NHBC Standards 2008

NHBC Standards
NHBC 2008
Standards
Effective from 1 May 2008
2008
NHBC
Buildmark House, Chiltern Avenue, Amersham, Bucks HP6 5AP
Tel: 0870 241 4302 Fax: 01494 735201 www.nhbc.co.uk
NHBC is authorised and regulated by the Financial Services Authority HB1286 04/07
‘Welcome’
to the 2008 edition of NHBC’s Standards.
What’s new in 2008?

Major change:
• Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber framed walls’ has had its first major revision for
many years. With continuing growth in the number of timber frame homes being
constructed and that it is now able to go to seven storeys, suitable detailing to
accomodate the differential movement between the timber frame and other
elements is critical. The Chapter provides guidance on how much movement is likely
to occur and where. New certification procedures are also introduced.
• The CD version of the Standards now contains an electronic calculator to determine

foundation depths when building near trees. The Chapter 4.2 electronic calculator
replaces the old slide rule and is quicker and easier to use. The calculator can also
determine the most onerous tree and give guidance on heave precautions.
Minor changes:
• Chapter 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’ has been revised to take account of the recently
introduced designations for reinforced bitumen membranes, contained in BS 8747.
All minor changes are identified by a blue vertical marker adjacent to the relevant
paragraph and the revised text underlined.
Please note:
Throughout this edition of the Standards coloured text is used as follows:
• Red text = Technical Requirements that must be met by the builder.
• Black text = Performance Standards for Design, Materials and Sitework.
• Blue text = Guidance (on how the Performance Standards may be met).
2008
More copies
For more copies of NHBC Standards,
a CD-ROM version, or to subscribe
to Standards Extra, call us on
Tel: 01494 735328.
Buy Online
To buy Standards online, visit our
website at
www.nhbcbuilder.co.uk/NHBCshop/
TechnicalStandards
Technical Helpline
For Technical help and advice, call our
Technical helpline on
Tel: 01908 747384.
e-mail: [email protected]
IT Support
If you need assistance with the HTML
version on the CD-ROM, please call the
IT Response Centre on
Tel: 01494 735353.
Contact Us
Amersham Milton Keynes
NHBC, Buildmark House, Chiltern Avenue, NHBC, NHBC House; Davy Avenue,
Amersham, Bucks HP6 5AP Knowlhill, Milton Keynes, Bucks MK5 8FP
Tel: 0844 633 1000 Fax: 01494 735201 Tel: 0844 633 1000 Fax: 0844 633 0022
Edinburgh Belfast
NHBC Scotland, Suite 4, NHBC, Holyrood Court,
5 New Mart Place, Edinburgh EH14 1RW 59 Malone Road, Belfast BT9 6SA
Tel: 0131 455 3100 Fax: 0131 455 3101 Tel: 028 9068 3131 Fax: 028 9038 6001
2008
Contents
PART 1 General information PART 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)
1.1 Introduction to the Standards and 6.1 External masonry walls

Technical Requirements 6.2 External timber framed walls
1.2 A consistent approach to finishes 6.3 Internal walls
1.3 No longer allocated 6.4 Timber and concrete upper floors
1.4 Cold weather working 6.5 Steelwork
6.6 Staircases
PART 2 Materials 6.7 Doors, windows and glazing
2.1 Concrete and its reinforcement 6.8 Fireplaces, chimneys and flues
2.2 No longer allocated 6.9 Curtain walling and cladding
2.3 Timber preservation (natural solid timber) 6.10 Light steel framed walls and floors
PART 3 No longer allocated PART 7 Roofs
7.1 Flat roofs and balconies

PART 4 Foundations 7.2 Pitched roofs
4.1 Land quality – managing ground conditions
4.2 Building near trees PART 8 Services and internal finishing
4.3 No longer allocated 8.1 Internal services
4.4 Strip and trench fill foundations 8.2 Wall and ceiling finishes
4.5 Raft, pile, pier and beam foundations 8.3 Floor finishes
4.6 Vibratory ground improvement techniques 8.4 Finishings and fitments
8.5 Painting and decorating
PART 5 Substructure and ground floors
5.1 Substructure and ground bearing floors PART 9 External works

5.2 Suspended ground floors 9.1 Garages
5.3 Drainage below ground 9.2 Drives, paths and landscaping
PART 10 No longer allocated
2008
Part 1
General information
1.1 Introduction and Technical Requirements
1.2 A consistent approach to finishes
1.3 No longer allocated
1.4 Cold weather working

Part 1 General information
Chapter 1.1
Introduction and Technical Requirements
1.1
1.1
CONTENTS SCOPE
INTRODUCTION TO THE STANDARDS Page This Chapter introduces the Standards and gives the
Application of the Standards 1 Technical Requirements.
Composition of the Standards 1
Technical Requirements 1
Performance Standards 1
Guidance 1
Limitations on use 1
Interpretation 1
Testing 1
Standards and Codes of Practice 1
Tolerances 1
Acknowledgements 1
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Statutory requirements R1 2
Design requirement R2 2
Materials requirement R3 2
Workmanship requirement R4 3
Structural design requirement R5 3
INDEX 4
Page 5 Chapter 1.1 2008

1.1
1.1
INTRODUCTION TO THE Guidance is based on normal construction the International Standards Organisation
procedures and recommended practices (ISO) and a European Committee for
STANDARDS which have been shown to be satisfactory Standardisation (CEN).
and acceptable over time. NHBC will
APPLICATION OF THE consider alternative methods to meet
Example: BS EN ISO 9000-1
STANDARDS specific requirements, subject to prior Unless NHBC provides written notification
consultation and evaluation. to the contrary, the use of guidance in
The NHBC Standards give the Technical
Requirements, Performance Standards and authoritative documents not mentioned in
Guidance for the design and construction LIMITATIONS ON USE the NHBC Standards, such as BRE Digests,
of dwellings acceptable to NHBC. In the can be considered for acceptance.
The Technical Requirements, Performance
Standards, a DWELLING means a HOME as Standards and Guidance do not form a
defined in the NHBC Rules. complete specification and should not be TOLERANCES
used as such in contracts. All measurements shall be within
The Standards come into effect for every
NHBC registered home whose foundations acceptable tolerances. Where it is
Individual Chapters cover, as far as
are concreted on or after 1 September applicable, account should be taken of
practical, the requirements for particular
2008 and apply throughout the UK, unless Chapter 1.2 ‘A Consistent approach to
elements of construction. To avoid
otherwise stated. finishes’. In other situations, tolerances
repetition, some cross-referencing is made
will be those currently acceptable in the
to other Chapters, where necessary.
industry.
COMPOSITION OF THE
STANDARDS INTERPRETATION ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The Standards are divided into 10 Parts, Occasionally, there may be disagreements
NHBC is indebted to the members of
each covering a particular aspect. All on how Technical Requirements and
the Standards Review Group, Scottish
parts may not currently contain chapters. Performance Standards are to be
and Northern Ireland Technical Sub
The Parts follow the usual construction interpreted. Such cases are usually
Committees and Standards Committee for
process; from design through to resolved through further consultation,
all their work.
construction on site. NHBC Standards do failing which NHBC will exercise its right to
not cover aspects of health and safety decide, subject to appeal to an arbitrator NHBC also wishes to acknowledge the
relating to building operations and to under NHBC Rules. help given by consultants, authoritative
the handling and use of certain building organisations, individuals and staff.
materials. Such matters are covered by the TESTING A list of the organisations who nominate
statutory requirements. Where required by NHBC, Builders must representatives to the Standards
In general, each Chapter is made up of make samples of materials available Committee, Scottish Technical Sub
sections dealing with Design, Materials and for testing to ensure that they comply Committee and the Northern Ireland
Sitework. with Technical Requirement R3. Tests Technical Sub Committee is shown below.
acceptable in the UK must be used when
applicable. The costs of any test shall Standards Committee
TECHNICAL be met by the Builder if it proves non- Chartered Institute of Building
REQUIREMENTS compliance and by NHBC if it proves Construction Products Association
compliance. Materials which do not comply Consumer Policy Committee of the British
In this Chapter, the Technical
shall, if necessary, be removed from the Standards Institution
Requirements, which MUST be met by the
site. Federation of Master Builders
Builder, are printed in red.
Home Builders Federation
STANDARDS AND CODES Housing Corporation (observer)
PERFORMANCE Institution of Civil Engineers
STANDARDS OF PRACTICE Department of Communities and
Where NHBC Standards refer to British Local Government (observer)
Most of the Chapters consist of detailed
Standards or Codes of Practice, other Royal Institute of British Architects
Performance Standards printed in black,
for each Design, Materials or Sitework authoritative documents or technical
approval certification, the documents Scottish Technical Sub Committee
section. Each section contains clauses Homes for Scotland
which are prefixed by the Chapter number shall be the editions current at the time of
Building Regulation approval, unless other Royal Incorporation of Architects in
and D, M or S for Design, Materials or Scotland/Royal
Sitework, respectively. recommendations are made by NHBC in
writing. Institute of British Architects
Alternative standards of performance will Scottish Branch of the Chartered Institute
be acceptable ONLY if, in the opinion of The British Standards and Codes of of Building
NHBC, the Technical Requirements are met Practice referred to in the NHBC Standards Scottish Branch of the Royal Institution of
and the standard achieved is not lower include British Standards or Codes of Chartered Surveyors
than the stated Performance Standard. Practice and those made under the Scottish Group of the Association of
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ Consulting Engineers
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
GUIDANCE European Technical Specifications Northern Ireland Technical Sub
Guidance on how the Performance approved by a European Committee for Committee
Standard may be met is printed in light Standardisation (CEN). Construction Employers Federation
blue. Royal Society of Ulster Architects
The UK accepts harmonised standards
Diagrams may contain text in red. This is which are dual numbered British
to highlight points and has no mandatory Standards. These have numbers issued
status. by the British Standards Institution (BSI),
2008 Chapter 1.1 Page 1

1.1
1.1
TECHNICAL (ii) all imposed loads, including wind provided their use is accepted by
loads NHBC,
REQUIREMENTS (iii) construction loads. or
(c) The geographical location of the site, (iv) satisfactory assessment by
The Builder shall ensure including: an appropriate independent
that the work complies (i) climate technical approvals authority
(ii) topography. accepted by NHBC, including:
with the Technical (d) The position of the dwelling on the British Board of Agrément
requirements site, especially with reference to the (BBA), Building Research
dwelling’s exposure to the weather, Establishment (BRE), or a body
R1 Statutory requirements including exposure at early stages in authorised under Annex 4 to the
Work shall comply with all relevant the development of a site, even if it Construction Products Directive,
Building Regulations and other statutory is eventually protected by structures or
requirements relating to the completed built later. (v) use of materials and products in
construction work (e) The position of building elements accordance with well established
within the construction works, satisfactory custom and practice,
In England, Wales and the Isle of Man, including the inter-relationship of provided that such custom and
NHBC will generally accept work that materials and constructions. practice is acceptable to NHBC,
accords with the relevant Approved (f) The security of the dwellings. or
Documents and their supporting (vi) acceptance, in writing, by NHBC
documents. Exceptions would be
where NHBC has a higher standard or
R3 Materials requirement that the quality and use is
All materials, products and building satisfactory.
where there is doubt as to whether (b) MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS USED
the recommendation in the Approved systems shall be suitable for their
intended purpose FOR NON-CRITICAL FUNCTIONS
Document is appropriate to a particular Compliance with the above
application. The structure of the home shall, unless acceptance criteria for
In Scotland and Northern Ireland, account specifically agreed otherwise in writing critical functions or strictly in
shall be taken of the relevant Building with NHBC, have a life of at least 60 years. accordance with manufacturers’
Standards and Regulations. Individual components and assemblies, not recommendations for the specific use.
integral to the structure, may have a lesser (c) RECLAIMED MATERIALS
Building Regulations and rules of Statutory durability and need planned maintenance, Reclaimed materials may only be
Authorities primarily cover matters of repair or replacement during that period. re-used with the prior agreement of
health and safety. Matters affecting NHBC. Independent certification of
durability and serviceability also need to Proper account shall be taken of the use
and location of materials, products and suitability may be required.
be considered. (d) PROPRIETARY BUILDING SYSTEMS
building systems in relation to:
NHBC Standards do not apply to: • durability of both the structure and Reference should be made to R3(a),
• health and safety matters relating to individual components and assemblies (iv).
building operations • geographical location (e) TIMBER DURABILITY
• handling and use of certain building • position on the site Reference should be made to Chapter
materials • position within the structure. 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid
• planning matters. timber)’ (each section).
Materials, products and building systems
will normally be acceptable if they comply Note
R2 Design requirement with the following: Equivalents to British Standards or
Design and specification shall provide (a) MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS USED technical approvals authority shall be
satisfactory performance FOR CRITICAL FUNCTIONS those accepted in the UK.
Account shall be taken of: Functions critical to performance
(a) The land quality, including: are: structure, fire resistance, R4 Workmanship requirement
(i) climate weatherproofing, durability, thermal All work shall be carried out in a proper,
(ii) topography and sound insulation, services neat and workmanlike manner
(iii) geology and ground conditions including heating appliances and
The Builder shall ensure that:
(iv) contamination flues.
(a) the conditions of the materials,
(v) workings below ground Any of the following are acceptable:
products and the completed work are
(vi) previous use of the site (i) performance in accordance with
satisfactory
(vii) any other aspect, on or adjacent standards set by NHBC,
(b) appropriate precautions are taken to
to the site, which could affect the or
prevent damage
design. (ii) where no NHBC standard is set,
(c) account is taken of the following:
Where appropriate, the land quality compliance with the relevant
(i) the requirements of the design
will have to be determined by a British Standard or equivalent
(ii) suitable methods of unloading
person acceptable to NHBC. European Technical Specification
and handling
(b) The structural adequacy of the approved by a Committee for
(iii) proper protection during storage
works. The design, with appropriate Standardisation, provided they
(iv) use of correct installation
factors of safety, should satisfactorily are used in accordance with the
methods
allow for loads during and after relevant Code of Practice,
(v) protection against weather
construction and for their transfer or
during construction (including
to the supporting structure, or (iii) compliance with standards
excessive heat, cold, wetting or
foundation, without undue movement, not lower than those defined
drying)
including: in a relevant British Standard
(vi) protection against damage by
(i) self weight specification or equivalent,
following trades.

1.1
1.1
R5 Structural design BS 5950 Structural use of steel work

requirement in building
Structural design shall be carried out by BS 6399 Loading for buildings
suitably qualified persons in accordance
BS 8004 Code of Practice for
with British Standards and Codes of
foundations
Practice
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
The following shall be designed by
Chartered Civil or Structural Engineers Alternatively, designs in accordance with
whose status (including professional BS 8103 ‘Structural design of low rise
indemnity insurance) is accepted by NHBC: buildings’ will be acceptable.
(a) foundations on hazardous ground The Builder shall:
where the hazard makes special • require the Engineer to issue clear
consideration necessary. This would instructions for site personnel
not apply to matters for which NHBC • not permit departure from the design
sets Standards, such as building near without the Engineer’s written consent
trees, except where specified to the • require the Engineer or his
contrary representative to carry out such
(b) foundations and superstructure of inspections as may be required by NHBC
every building over three storeys in to ensure the adequacy of the design
height and construction.
(c) certain types of foundations and
retaining walls, as required in the The Builder shall ensure that the Engineer
individual Chapters of the NHBC visits the site during construction:
Standards (i) when the foundations have been
(d) any structural element which is not designed under this Technical
based on specific design criteria as Requirement, or
laid down in the Chapters of the NHBC (ii) when specifically required by NHBC in
Standards these Standards.
(e) any dwelling not constructed in The Engineer shall satisfy himself that
accordance with UK traditional the design is suitable for the conditions
practice. encountered on the site of each dwelling.
Other structural elements may be When requested by NHBC, the Builder

designed by a Chartered Civil or Structural shall:
Engineer or others whose status (including • produce such design documents,
professional indemnity insurance) is calculations and prescribed forms
accepted by NHBC. of certification as NHBC requires for
scrutiny
The structural design shall take account
of the durability requirement in Technical • provide design documents and assembly
Requirement R3 Materials requirement. instructions, solely for the use of NHBC
staff
In England, Wales, Northern Ireland and • arrange for NHBC staff to have access
the Isle of Man, structural design may be to places where off-site fabrication is
undertaken by the Builder’s own Engineer taking place.
or a Consulting Engineer employed by the
Builder. Where specialist subcontractors
undertake the design, it must be
separately appraised by the Builder’s own
Engineer or by a Consulting Engineer
employed by the Builder to ensure that the
site investigation, choice of foundations,
siting and construction of dwellings are
properly taken into account and that the
design is appropriate for the loading and
conditions.
In Scotland, the Engineer shall be
independent of the Builder and specialist
subcontractor.
Account shall be taken of the following
British Standards and Codes of Practice or
their European equivalents or such codes
and standards as may supersede them:
BS 5268 Structural use of timber
BS 5628 Code of Practice for use of
masonry

1.1
1.1
INDEX
A L S
Acknowledgements 1 Land quality 2 Samples 1
B Limitations 1 Standards commitees 1
British Standards 1 Low rise buildings 3 Statutory requirements 2
Building Systems 2 M Structural design 3
C Materials, critical 3 T
Codes of practice 1 functions Technical requirements 1
Critical functions 2 Materials, non-critical 3 Testing 1
functions
D Timber durability 3
Materials, requirements 2
Design requirements 3 Tolerances 1
P
F W
Performance standards 1
Foundations 3 Workmanship 3
R
G
Reclaimed materials 3
Guidance 1
I
Interpretation 1

Chapter 1.2
A consistent approach to finishes
1.2
1.2
CONTENTS SCOPE
Page This Chapter gives guidance on the suitability of the finishes

External walls 1 in new homes.
Fairfaced brickwork and blockwork 1
Appearance of external wall finishes 2 INTRODUCTION
External works 2
Doors and windows 3
A consistent approach to finishes gives guidance on the
Glazing 3
suitability of the finishes in new homes and will be used by
Walls and ceilings 3 NHBC Inspectors during the construction of new homes and
Floors 4 by NHBC Claims staff conducting Resolutions under Section
Finishes and fittings 4 2 of the Buildmark insurance cover. Its recommendations
will be considered in conjunction with relevant performance
Index 5
standards and guidance of the NHBC Standards.
The guide is intended to apply at the time the home is
physically complete and has passed its NHBC pre-handover
inspection. However, some elements may be subject to
thermal or drying movement and this may occur both before
and after completion. Where appropriate, guidance is given
as to the likely changes which may occur during this period.
Many sources of information relating to tolerances
have been reviewed in the preparation of the guide. The
tolerances given here are considered to be appropriate for
the house-building industry and take precedence over other
recommendations.
This guide is not intended to deal with every situation that
may arise and discretion should be exercised in its application
in specific circumstances. The nature and extent of work
necessary to remedy minor variances from the tolerances
given should be appropriate to the circumstances.

1.2
1.2
EXTERNAL WALLS Level of bed joints Plumb of wall - storey height

± 10mm deviation for walls 5m long (a pro Max deviation of ± 10mm in a storey
The variable nature of external wall rata tolerance is applicable for walls less height, approx 2.5m.
materials and their use than 5m long).
Many of the materials used to construct
external walls are not uniform, because ± 15mm deviation for walls over 5m long. 50 x 50mm spacing block
of their manufacturing process. Nor are Line of bed joint Max deviation Horizontal
reference line
they intended to be. In consequence,
external walls will have variations and
irregularities. Where reclaimed materials
5m
are used there may be even greater
There should not be frequent variations in the
irregularities and these characteristics are level of the bed joints Plumb line
often intended as an aesthetic feature.
The relevant recommendations are Thickness of bed joints
Storey
intended to be applied in the spirit of this The thickness of an individual bed joint height
overall context. should not vary from the average of any 8

successive joints by more than 5mm.
Commentary
• Bricks and other materials vary in size Commentary
and appearance for a number of reasons • Bricks and other materials vary in size
and in consequence the tolerances and and therefore some variation in the
finishes stated in this document may not thickness of bed joints is likely.
always be appropriate, especially where
reclaimed stock is used. Such materials Perpend alignment in external walls
Example:
will need to be considered separately. Vertical alignment of perpend joints Using 50mm wide spacing block, the plumb
• The tolerances described generally apply should not deviate significantly from the bob should be between 40mm and 60mm
perpendicular. from the wall.
to entire areas of walling, complete
Note:
panels and the like, and not to the Commentary Spacing block dimensions are a guide only.
elements of the construction, such as • Because bricks do vary in length To suit actual site conditions, final dimensions
individual bricks. should ensure plumb line is kept clear of the
as a result of their manufacturing wall face
• The tolerances do not apply to design process, not all perpend joints will
features and similar constructional align. However, there should not be Straightness in section
details which are not intended to lie a cumulative displacement of the Max deviation ± 10mm in any 2.5m height
within the limits stated in this document perpend joints in a wall. of wall.
(e.g. quoins, soldier courses, plinths). 25 x 25mm spacing block
Plumb of wall - overall height
Masonry line
Max deviation of ± 20mm in overall height
FAIRFACED BRICKWORK of wall.
AND BLOCKWORK Max 10mm
deviation
Straightness on plan
± 10mm max deviation in any length of wall Nominal line
of wall 15mm
up to 5m.
35mm
2.5m
Masonry line
35mm Overall
height
Max 10mm Max 10mm deviation
Reference
deviation
line
15mm
5m
Example:
Nominal line Using 25mm wide spacing blocks, the masonry line
of wall should be between 15mm and 35mm from the
reference line
Reference
line Note:
Spacing block dimensions are a guide only.
To suit actual site conditions, final dimensions should
ensure reference line is kept clear of the wall face
25 x 25mm
spacing blocks
Example:
Using 25mm wide spacing blocks, the masonry
line should be between 15mm and 35mm from
the reference line.
Note:
Spacing block dimensions are a guide only.
To suit actual site conditions, final dimensions
should ensure reference line is kept clear of the
wall face.

1.2
1.2
Straightness of external reveals APPEARANCE OF EXTERNAL WORKS

6mm max deviation.
EXTERNAL WALL FINISHES Drives and paths - standing water
Fairfaced brickwork and blockwork Surfaces should minimise the potential for
Fairfaced brickwork and blockwork should standing water.
be reasonably uniform in appearance, Commentary
texture and finish.
• One hour after rain has stopped, isolated
With certain walls, such as half brick walls, areas of temporary standing water up
a fairfaced finish can only be achieved on to 1m2 and no deeper than 7mm are
one face. The other face should be left considered to be reasonable.
neat and tidy.
Drives and paths - variations in surface
Mortar should be reasonably uniform in finish
appearance, texture and finish. Variations in the surface should not exceed
± 10mm deviation from a 2m straight edge
Facing brick units should not have
with equal offsets.
significant cracks in them or other damage
such as chips and marks greater than Commentary
15mm in diameter. • Some minor variations in surface levels
Max 6mm Commentary including scuffing and pitting may
deviation
• Appearance should be considered for arise due to settlement, natural ground
entire wall areas, panels and the like and movement and vehicle use. In gravel
not for individual units. Consequently, and other loose surfaces, displacement
straight edge
Straightness the wall being considered should, where of stone etc., will require some
(1m long)
of reveal
possible, be viewed in daylight from a maintenance by the homeowner.
distance of 10m. • Localised falls into gulleys and channels
• Some mortar blemishes will occur on are acceptable.
individual masonry units.
Covers to the drainage system
• Some variation will occur in the
colour of individual masonry units and Covers to the drainage system in hard
generally over the wall. paved areas should align with the
• Some variation will occur in the adjacent ground.
RENDERING (PLAIN FINISH) appearance, texture and finish of mortar. Commentary
• Efflorescence occurs naturally in some • In hard landscaping, some settlement of
Vertical and horizontal flatness
types of masonry. It is not harmful and the area immediately around the cover is
± 10mm (excluding features).
usually disappears over time. to be expected. The difference in height
• Some brick products have natural or between a cover and the adjacent hard
design features which may be in excess surfaces should be not more than 10mm.
of 15mm in diameter.
• In soft landscaping, such as lawned
Max 10mm
• Some minor shrinkage cracking may
deviation areas, some settlement of the ground
occur between masonry units (bricks
Reference may occur and would be made good
line and blocks) and mortar joints.
by the homeowner as part of normal
Rendering household maintenance.
Rendering on walls should be reasonably
consistent in texture, finish and colour.
5m
Commentary
• Rendering should, where possible,
be viewed in natural daylight from a
Max 10mm distance of 10m.
deviation • Some minor cracking and crazing is
likely to occur but should not be such as
to affect its performance.
• Some patches and daywork joints may
be visible but should not be unduly
Equal spacing obtrusive.
blocks
Tile hanging
Panels of tile hanging should be
Rendering should have a maximum
vertical and horizontal deviation from flatness reasonably uniform in appearance,
of ± 10mm in 5m. particularly at abutments.
Commentary
Commentary • Tile hanging should, where possible,
• Features such as bell casts, and the be viewed in natural daylight from a
areas of render in close proximity to the distance of 10m.
feature, are excluded from the tolerance. • Certain handmade tiles vary in size and
• Flatness is measured in a similar way may not be of a uniform appearance.
to straightness on plan and plumb of • Some variation in colour may occur in tiles.
masonry.

1.2
1.2
DOORS AND WINDOWS Window frames up

to 1.5m in height –
Level of ceiling
Max 10mm deviation in 2m
max 6mm out of plumb.
Openings in walls (including external Over 1.5m in height
openings viewed from the inside) – max 10mm out of plumb.
Reveals, head and sill
Head and sill:

Flatness along the Max out of level
length of sills and tolerance 6mm for
window boards openings up to 1.5m
± 3mm in 1m wide. 10mm for
openings more than
1.5m wide
Max 3mm out of level

across reveal (measured
from frame)*
Reveals:
GLAZING Max 15mm deviation using 500mm square
Max out of plumb tolerance 6mm When viewed in daylight from within the
for openings up to 1.5m high. 10mm 15mm 15mm
for openings more than 1.5m high room and at least 2m from the panes (3m
for toughened, laminated or coated glass)
Maximum ± 8mm deviation off square and looking at right angles through the
into reveal up to 200mm deep
glass, the following are acceptable if they
are neither obtrusive nor bunched:
• bubbles or blisters
• hairlines or blobs
• fine scratches not more than 25mm long
• minute particles.
8mm 8mm
Commentary Flatness of ceiling:
Max ± 6mm deviation from 2m straight edge
*Tiled sills, for example, in bathrooms • The above does not apply within 6mm with equal offsets
may be intentionally laid sloping of the edge of the pane, where minor
away from the window
scratching is acceptable.
2m
Gaps and distortion WALLS AND CEILINGS

Door distortion:
Max 10mm out of Max 5mm across width (PLASTERED AND DRY
plumb over height of Max 9mm in height
frame (in one LINED)
direction only)
Wall and ceiling surfaces
Max 5mm gap For all wall and ceiling surfaces no sharp
between door deviations exceeding 4mm in any 300mm
and head of
Window jamb (for fire
and door doors the Flatness of
frame manufacturer’s 5mm wall, Max
should recommendations deviation
2m
not be should be used) ± 5mm from
distorted For double doors 2m straight
in the the gap at the edge with
opening meeting stiles equal offsets,
should be max 5mm horizontal
5mm and vertically
± 8mm in 200mm
These dimensions are The gap between the ± 8mm in 200mm

without prejudice to underside of an internal
satisfactory door and unfinished
performance in terms floor (concrete, screed, etc)
of weathertightness, should be min 5mm and
Plumb of wall finish:
exclusion of draughts max 22mm
Max 10mm out of plumb in a storey height
and fire resistance up to 2.5m - max 20mm out of plumb for a
where appropriate continuous wall height greater than 2.5m Surfaces should be reasonably uniform
although there may be minor textural
differences around lights and other
fittings. There should be no visible gaps
between fittings and the wall/ceiling, e.g.
around switch plates.
In plastered walls and ceilings some tooling
marks may be visible.

1.2
1.2
In general wall surfaces, some cracking (up or there are heavy items of furniture on Commentary
to 2mm wide) is likely, due to shrinkage the floor. • Because timber is a natural material
and differential movement of materials and some resin is likely to exude from knots
should be made good by the homeowner Floor screeds even though modern primers contain a
As screeds dry, they may shrink causing knotting compound to limit the effect.
as part of normal household maintenance.
minor cracking, which requires no remedial
Junctions action. Fitted furniture (kitchen, bathroom and
At wall, floor and ceiling junctions where bedroom)
Underfloor service ducts
there are changes in the construction Doors and drawers of fitted furniture
Service ducts should be constructed so that
materials used, small cracks (up to 2mm should be visually aligned vertically,
the cover is level on completion with the
wide) may appear in the surface as a result horizontally and in plan, and operate as
adjacent floor finish provided by the builder.
of shrinkage and differential movement of intended by the manufacturer.
materials. Commentary
• Drying shrinkage of the floor may result Gaps between adjacent doors and/or
in minor differences in level between the drawers should be uniform.
Duct casings
Duct casings, access covers and any floor and duct cover. This may become There should not be a significant
associated framing should be neat and tidy evident with some types of thin floor difference in level at the intersection of
and have an appropriate decorative finish. coverings, and the choice of covering adjacent worktops.
should take this into account.
Skirtings Commentary
Joints in skirtings are likely in long Timber floors and staircases • No dimensional tolerance has been set
Timber floors and staircases are made of for gaps between adjacent doors and/or
lengths of walls. Joints should present a
materials which naturally shrink as they drawers or for their alignment because
continuous appearance when viewed from
dry. As this drying occurs, it may result in some variation will be necessary to take
a distance of 2m in daylight. Some initial squeaking of components as they move
shrinkage of the skirting may already be account of adjustments as part of the
against each other. This is natural and
evident at completion of the property. fitting process. Over time doors and
to be expected. Some squeaking is to be
drawers may need some adjustment
expected and cannot be totally eliminated.
Gaps in skirtings may appear at joints and by the homeowner as part of normal
corners due to shrinkage and should be household maintenance.
made good by the homeowner as part of FINISHES AND FITTINGS • No dimensional tolerance has been set
normal household maintenance. Painted and varnished surfaces for the abutment of adjacent worktops
Surfaces should be reasonably smooth because of the variety of materials
Blockwork walls in garages and free from nail holes, cracks and splits. available and because minor variations,
Normal drying out shrinkage may lead to Joints should be filled. Colour, texture and even with manufactured products, are
cracking of unplastered blockwork walls. finish should be reasonably uniform. inevitable and small differences in height
Thermal movement and drying shrinkage may be unavoidable.
Commentary
may become evident but cracks of up to • Fitted furniture should normally be
• Surfaces should be viewed in daylight
3mm are generally considered to be normal. viewed from a distance of 2m.
from a distance of 2m and not by shining
Commentary artificial light along the surface. Wall lights Scratches on doors (including fitted
• Small cracks may occur in wall finishes or uplighters should be switched off. furniture), windows and frames
which pass across floors e.g. in walls • Painted and varnished surfaces should Factory-finished door and window
adjacent to a staircase. be free from conspicuous runs and components should not have conspicuous
• Where stair strings abut a wall a crack prominent brush marks. There should be abrasions or scratches when viewed in
of up to 4mm may appear as a result of no bare or starved areas. daylight from a distance of 0.5m.
shrinkage of materials and should be • Timber surfaces may show limited raised
made good by the homeowner as part of grain and the colour and texture may Commentary
normal household maintenance. also vary. • Conspicuous surface abrasions caused
• Drying shrinkage of timber may cause during the building-in process should
cracking of the paint finish, particularly be removed in accordance with the
FLOORS where joints occur in plaster and manufacturer’s recommendations which
Level of floor woodwork, and should be made good may include polishing out, re-spraying or
Maximum 4mm out of level per metre by the homeowner as part of normal painting as appropriate.
for floors up to 6m across, and maximum household maintenance. • In rooms or areas when there is no
25mm overall in any other case. • Where painted surfaces are touched-up, daylight, scratches should be viewed
minor colour variations will occur. in artificial light from fixed wall or
Flatness of floor • External finishes will dull over time ceiling outlets and not from portable
Maximum ±5mm deviation from a 2m depending on a number of factors equipment.
straight edge with equal offsets. such as exposure to sunlight, rain and
pollutants. To minimise the dulling,
Skirting to floor gap surfaces should be washed regularly to
A gap of up to 5mm can be expected remove the accumulation of dirt and
between the floor finish (without grime.
coverings) and the bottom of the skirting
in a newly completed home. Knots in timber
Some exudation of resin from knots may
The gap between the floor finish and the occur and may cause discolouration of
skirting may increase because of drying paintwork, both internally and externally.
out shrinkage and deflection, particularly
in timber floors. A gap of up to 10mm is
normal but exceptionally 15mm may be
seen where timber floors have long spans

1.2
1.2
INDEX
A G S
Appearance of external walls 1 Garages, blockwork walls 4 Scratches 4
B Glazing 3 Skirting to floor gap 4
Bathroom fitted furniture 4 J Skirtings 4
Bed joints 1 Junctions 4 Standing water 2
Bedroom fitted furniture 4 K Straightness in section 1
C Kitchen fitted furniture 4 Straightness on plan 1
Covers to drainage system 2 Knots in timber 4 T
D L Thickness of bed joints 1
Doors and windows 3 Level of bed joints 1 Tile hanging 2
Drives and paths 2 Level of floors 4 Timber floors and stairs 4
Duct casings 4 O U
E Openings in walls 3 Underfloor service ducts 4
External reveals, straightness 2 P V
External wall finishes 2 Painted and varnished surfaces 4 Variations in surface finish 2
External walls 1 Perpend alignment 1 W
External works 2 Plumb of wall 1 Wall and ceiling interfaces 4
F R Wall and ceiling surfaces 3
Fairfaced brickwork and blockwork 1, 2 Rendering 2 Walls and ceilings, plastered and 3
dry lined
Finishes and fittings 4
Windows and door openings 3
Flatness of floors 4
Floor screeds 4
Floors 4

Chapter 1.4
Cold weather working
1.4
1.4
CONTENTS SCOPE
DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
There are no specific Design implications Requirements and recommendations for cold weather
working.
MATERIALS
There are no specific Materials implications
SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1 1
Temperature and weather conditions S2 1
Protection of stored materials S3 1
Concreting S4 1
Masonry S5 2
Rendering, plastering and screeding S6 2
Use of admixtures S7 2
Painting S8 2
INDEX 3

1.4
1.4
SITEWORK STANDARDS
TOPOGRAPHICAL FEATURES CONCRETING
High trees or adjacent buildings may
provide permanent shade from low winter 1.4 - S4 Concrete shall not be placed in
1.4 - S1 All sitework shall: cold weather unless suitable precautions
sun and slow down any temperature rise.
(a) meet the Technical Requirements are taken
(b) follow established good practice and
workmanship Items to be taken into account include:
(a) placing of foundation and oversite
Sitework that complies with the guidance
concrete
below will be acceptable for cold weather
Concrete should not be placed if the
working.
ground or oversite is frozen. Work built on
frozen ground can be severely damaged by
TEMPERATURE AND movement when thawing takes place.
WEATHER CONDITIONS
1.4 - S2 Allowance shall be made
Frost hollows can occur where cold air is
for cold weather conditions during
drawn into valleys.
construction
Unless the precautions detailed in the
following guidance are adopted, work
should NOT proceed when the air
temperature is below or likely to fall below
2°C. Frozen materials should not be used.
Items to be taken into account include:
If work has to be carried out during long
(a) temperature measurement PROTECTION OF STORED periods of cold weather, the whole work
A maximum/minimum thermometer
should be available to indicate whether MATERIALS area should be covered, and heated if
necessary, to maintain the temperature
the temperature is falling or rising. The 1.4 - S3 Stored materials shall be above freezing.
thermometer should be sited in the shade. adequately protected against cold
The temperature may drop rapidly after weather (b) placing concrete other than in
sunset. Items to be taken into account include: foundations or oversites
All surfaces which can come into contact
(a) overnight protection
(b) weather and local topography with fresh concrete, such as formwork,
During cold weather, the use of covers will
FORECASTS reinforcement, and other concrete
protect materials from overnight snow, ice
Plan ahead and take account of weather surfaces should be free of snow, ice and
and frost. They will also reduce the effects
forecasting services, by either stopping frost. Special care is needed when small
of longer term frosts, and permit an earlier
work or taking adequate precautions. The quantities of fresh concrete are placed
resumption of work. Frozen materials
following services are available: against a large volume of hardened
should not be used.
• pre-recorded weather forecasts on the concrete at a lower temperature.
WEATHERCALL telephone service Appropriate covers should be provided
for bricks and blocks and for sand, (c) mixing concrete
• weather forecasts specific to
contractors’ needs aggregates and cement, to prevent them READY-MIXED
• an assessment of time when suitable from becoming saturated, and damaged The minimum temperature of concrete
working conditions will prevail in a given by frost. when delivered should be 5°C. This is a
area. requirement of BS 5328.
All these services are provided by the

Meteorological Office.
WIND CHILL
The Meteorological Office can advise on
the wind chill factor. Strong winds can
reduce the temperature of concrete and
minimum 5oc
mortar more quickly than still conditions. protection of bricks and blocks
Work is more likely to be affected by frost
in windy freezing conditions. (b) longer cold periods
If it is necessary to continue building
during longer periods of cold weather,
the use of heaters will protect aggregates
and other materials from being frozen,
and prevent frost damage to newly laid
masonry.

1.4
1.4
SITE-MIXED MASONRY should be kept above freezing during the

If the air temperature drops to 2°C, curing period.
concrete work should NOT proceed unless: 1.4 - S5 Masonry shall not be laid in
cold weather unless suitable precautions It is important that heaters used for this
• the aggregate temperature is above 2°C,
are taken purpose do not produce water vapour.
and the aggregate is free of frost and
While heaters are in use, the building
snow, and
MINIMUM TEMPERATURES should be ventilated to disperse moisture.
• water for mixing is heated, but not in
Materials which have been damaged by
excess of 60°C, and Because warm air rises, ground floors
frost or are frozen should NOT be used.
• the cement is not heated, and and walls near to floor level may be slow
• the cast concrete can be properly When the temperature is below or to respond to heating after a prolonged
protected, taking account of the cross likely to fall below 2°C, masonry should cold period. Warm air heaters should be
sectional area and location, and NOT be laid unless heating is provided. placed in the room a day before plastering
• the ground into which the concrete is to The temperature should be checked is to start, to allow sufficient time for the
be placed is not frozen. throughout the day on a maximum and structure to warm up. Heating should
minimum thermometer. continue for at least 48 hours after
Covers will not stop severe frost
completion of work.
penetrating the aggregate. If work is to PROTECTION
continue, it may be necessary to steam Newly laid masonry will need protection To avoid damage to screeds, plaster
heat aggregate or use hot air blowers when the temperature is below or likely to finishes and woodwork, heating should not
below covers. fall below 2°C. be excessive.
Heated mixing water cannot be relied upon
to thaw frozen aggregates. The amount of USE OF ADMIXTURES
water in a mix is only a small proportion of 1.4 - S7 Admixtures shall be used
the total mix volume. Very cold aggregate correctly
can absorb heat from water while
remaining frozen. PLASTICISERS AND ACCELERATORS
No admixture will prevent frost damage to
(d) curing immature concrete or mortar.
Curing periods may need to be extended
at low temperatures. Advice on minimum Plasticisers (which entrain air during
periods is given in BS 8110. Up to 6 mixing) can provide improved frost
days may be required, depending on resistance to mature mortar and concrete.
the severity of conditions, location and Additives should only be used strictly
materials used. in accordance with manufacturers’
50mm of insulation held down firmly at Polyethylene will provide weather recommendations.
the edges will give protection to oversite protection and prevent work from
The use of accelerators may assist
concrete from slight overnight frosts. If becoming saturated.
the mortar or concrete to set before
very severe frosts are expected, insulation temperatures fall.
An air gap between the masonry and the
alone is inadequate, and heating should be
covers will enable new masonry to cure.
provided. RETARDERS AND BONDING AGENTS
Additional insulation will be necessary Retarding agents should NOT be used in
at very low temperatures. If very severe cold weather as their use can seriously
frosts are expected, heaters would be delay setting times of the cement. Bonding
required. agents may be ineffective in cold weather.
Protection against frost may be required CALCIUM CHLORIDE
for up to 6 days depending on the severity Calcium chloride and additives based on it
of the conditions. do not prevent frost damage to mortars.
These additives should NOT be used. They
RENDERING, PLASTERING are also likely to have undesirable side
effects.
AND SCREEDING
1.4 - S6 Rendering, plastering and PAINTING
screeding shall not be carried out in cold
weather unless suitable precautions are 1.4 - S8 Painting shall not be carried
taken out when there is a risk of damage due
to cold weather
RENDERING
Rendering should NOT be carried out if: Painting should NOT be carried out:
• the temperature is below or likely to fall • on surfaces that are affected by damp,
below 2°C, or frost or condensation
• backgrounds are saturated or frozen, or • where the air temperature is below or
• there is a possibility that new work will likely to fall below 2°C
be subjected to frost before it has set. • when condensation is likely to occur
before paintwork is dry
PLASTER AND SCREED • when snow or rain is likely before the
Plastering and screed laying should NOT paintwork is dry.
be commenced unless the structure is free
of frost. The temperature of the structure

1.4
1.4
INDEX
A M T
Accelerators 2 Masonry 2 Temperature 1, 2
Admixtures 2 Materials 1 Topographical features 1
Aggregates 2 Minimum temperatures 2 W
Air temperature 1 O Water 2
B Oversite concrete 1 Weather 1
Bonding agents 2 P Wind chill 1
C Painting 2
Calcium chloride 2 Plastering 2
Cast concrete 2 Plasticisers 2
Cement 2 Protection 1, 2
Concreting 1 R
Curing 2 Ready-mixed concrete 1
F Rendering 2
Forecasts 1 Retarding agents 2
Foundations 1 S
Frozen materials 1 Screeding 2
H Sitework standards 1
Heaters 2 Site-mixed concrete 2

Part 2
Materials
2.1 Concrete and its reinforcement
2.3 Timber preservation

(natural solid timber)
Part 2 Materials
Chapter 2.1
Concrete and its reinforcement
CONTENTS SCOPE
2.1
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for concrete mixes
Suitability of concrete D2 1 suitable for various locations in and around dwellings.
Mix design D3-D4 1

Reinforced concrete D5-D6 2
Special types of concrete D7 2
Admixtures D8 2
Provision of information D9-D10 2-3
MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 3
Ready-mixed concrete M2 3
Site-mixed concrete M3 3
Reinforcement M4 3
SITEWORK
Storage of materials S2 3
Blinding concrete S3 3
Formwork S4 4
Reinforcement S5-S6 4
Ready-mixed concrete S7 4
On-site concrete mixing S8 5
Testing S9 5
Casting S10 5
Curing S11 5
APPENDIX 2.1-A
Table 1 - General purpose concrete mixes 6
Site-mixed concrete:
Table 2a - Mix proportion by weight 7
Table 2b - Mix proportion by volume 7
Table 2c - Slump classes 7
Table 3 - Exposure conditions 7
Buried concrete in aggressive ground:
Table 4a - Aggressive Chemical 8
Environment for Concrete
Table 4b - Design guide for concrete 9
elements in the ground
INDEX 10

Concrete and its reinforcement 2.1
• Standardised prescribed mix for site (d) aggregates
DESIGN STANDARDS mixing. Aggregates should be of a grade which
ensures adequate durability of the
2.1
2.1 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical Equivalent Designated and Standardised
concrete.
Requirements Prescribed mixes are listed as suitable for
Design that follows the guidance below particular end uses, for example: Certain types of aggregate are shrinkable
will be acceptable for concrete and its and require special precautions in mixing,
unreinforced ground bearing garage floor as described in BRE Digest 357.
reinforcement. slabs can use either:
• a GEN3 Designated mix, or (e) alkali-silica reaction
SUITABILITY OF • a ST4 Standardised Prescribed mix. Certain aggregates may be susceptible
CONCRETE 2.1 - D4 Mix design shall ensure
to attack from alkalis originating in the
cement or other sources. The reaction
2.1 - D2 Concrete shall be suitable for adequate durability causes expansion and subsequent cracking
its intended use Items to be taken into account include: and disruption of the concrete.
Concrete should be in accordance with (a) mix proportions The total alkali content of the concrete
relevant Building Regulations and other The various uses of concrete are shown in arising from all sources, calculated in
statutory requirements. Table 1 in Appendix 2.1-A. Designated mixes accordance with BRE Digest 330 or
should conform to Table 7 of BS 8500-2. Concrete Society Report 30 should not
Standardised Prescribed mixes conform exceed 3.0kg/m3.
(a) compliance with recognised design
standards to either Table 2a or 2b in Appendix 2.1-A Where unfamiliar aggregate materials are
Concrete design and specification should which are derived from Tables 10 and 12 used, special precautions may be required.
comply with the relevant British Standards. respectively of BS 8500-2. Damage will normally only occur when all
Mix design should take account of strength three of the following conditions exist:
(b) sulfates and acids in ground or
and durability and follow recognised • there is a high moisture level in the
groundwater
standards and practices. Alternatively, concrete, and
Sulfates and other chemicals can cause
mixes in accordance with the following • there is an alkali source, and
expansion and disruption of concrete.
guidance will be acceptable. (This applies • the aggregate contains an alkali reactive
Also, high acidity, for example in peat, or
to plain and reinforced concrete whether constituent.
permeable soil with acidic groundwater,
precast or in-situ.)
can cause damage to concrete. Where
(f) exposure to climate and atmosphere
Tables 1, 2a and 2b of Appendix 2.1-A list concrete is at risk from chemical attack
Five exposure conditions are given in Table
uses of concrete, mix specifications and from the ground or where the ground
3 of Appendix 2.1-A which corresponds to
the mix proportions for Standardised water is highly mobile the level of sulfate
Table 3.2 of BS 8110-1. Table 1 of Appendix
Prescribed mixes as described in BS 8500 and other chemicals should be determined,
2.1-A gives guidance on the strength
and BS EN 206. Table 3 of Appendix 2.1-A in terms of the ACEC Class (Aggressive
class of concrete suitable for particular
describes the exposure environments and Chemical Environment for Concrete Class)
exposures for superstructure elements.
examples where they may occur. Tables 4a in accordance with BRE Special Digest
Further guidance may be obtained from
and 4b in Appendix 2.1-A give guidance on 1. For the higher ACEC classes specialist
BS 8110-1.
selecting mixes for concrete elements in advice should be sought to determine the
aggressive ground. Design Chemical Class (DC Class) for the Any concrete mix should be designed for
concrete element and any appropriate the conditions expected:
(b) choice of supplier of ready-mixed Additional Protective Measures (APM) • at the geographical location of the site,
concrete which may be required. The mix and
Ready-mixed concrete will only be specification should then be selected from • at the location of the element in the
acceptable from suppliers who operate a Table A.7 of BS 8500-1. structure.
full quality control system which ensures
that the concrete specified is delivered. For lower levels of ACEC Class (AC-1, The higher the concrete grade, the greater
AC-1s, AC-2, AC-2s and AC-2z) the mix its resistance to:
Suppliers of ready-mixed concrete who specification may be selected using Tables • chemical attack, and
operate under the Quality Scheme for 4a and 4b in Appendix 2.1-A. • mechanical wear.
Ready-Mixed Concrete (QSRMC) or BSI
Kitemark scheme are acceptable. Other (c) chlorides Air entraining agents can effectively
suppliers of ready-mixed concrete may Chlorides in concrete are likely to increase reduce the risk of frost damage to cured
be accepted if their operations are to an the risk of corrosion of embedded metal concrete.
equivalent quality standard acceptable to and can also reduce the resistance of
NHBC. concrete to chemical attack. (g) overall performance
In addition to the items listed above,
All concrete materials contain some durability of concrete is dependent upon:
MIX DESIGN chlorides. For concrete mixes, the limits • correct control of the water/cement ratio
2.1 - D3 The concrete mix shall be on chloride content in fresh concrete are • full compaction of the placed concrete
specified correctly given in BS EN 206-1, Table 10. • good curing.
Concrete mixes should be specified in Cured concrete may also be damaged by
accordance with BS 8500-1. Concrete exposure to:
mixes for particular end uses in housing • chlorides in the ground
applications may be selected from Table 1 • sea spray, or
in Appendix 2.1-A or Table A.7 of BS 8500-1 • products used for de-icing highways.
as either:
Where these conditions might occur, follow
• Designated mix, which is supplied ready-
the guidance in relevant documents.
mixed, or

REINFORCED CONCRETE The effects of carbonation on concrete the manufacturer’s recommendations,

are to increase porosity and decrease including the stated dosage.
2.1 - D5 Reinforced concrete shall be alkalinity. When alkalinity is reduced below
2.1
designed to ensure adequate durability Air entraining agents increase the air void
a certain level steel reinforcement can
content and thereby the frost resistance of
Items to be taken into account include: rust.
cured concrete, but do not prevent fresh
(a) loading Carbonation cannot be prevented. The concrete freezing in cold weather.
Reinforced concrete should be designed by risk of reinforcement corroding can be
an Engineer in accordance with Technical Admixtures should not be relied upon to
reduced by providing as great a concrete
Requirement R5. prevent freezing. Retarding agents can, in
cover as possible; and by ensuring that wet
fact, increase the risk of frost damage.
concrete is of good quality and properly
BS 8103-4 can be used for the design
compacted, so reducing the rate of Admixtures containing chloride should
of suspended ground floors in houses,
carbonation. never be used in reinforced concrete.
bungalows and garages.
2.1 - D6 Reinforcing steelwork shall be
(b) end restraint
properly and clearly detailed, specified PROVISION OF
Where the ends of slabs are cast
monolithically with concrete members, and scheduled INFORMATION
surface cracking may develop over the The steel specification should indicate the 2.1 - D9 Designs and specifications shall
supports. Reinforcement should therefore steel type, grade and size. Drawings and be produced in a clearly understandable
be provided in accordance with BS 8110-1. bending schedules should be prepared in format and include all relevant
accordance with BS 4466 and include all information
(c) cover necessary dimensions for completion of
For concrete not designed by an Engineer the sitework. Items to be taken into account include:
in accordance with Technical Requirement (a) ground aggressivity
R5, the minimum cover for reinforcement Any ground aggressivity to concrete
should be: SPECIAL TYPES OF should be indicated as:
Position of the Minimum cover [mm]
CONCRETE • Design Sulfate Class (DS Class)
concrete 2.1 - D7 Special types of concrete shall • Aggressive Chemical Environment for
be appropriate for their use Concrete Class (ACEC Class)
In contact with the 75
ground Propriety concrete, no-fines or lightweight (b) strength and durability
In external conditions 50 concrete should be of a quality and density Concrete performance depends as much
Cast against a dpm 40 appropriate for their conditions of use. on how the cured concrete element is
on sand blinding produced as on the composition of the
Against adequate 40
If used for a structural purpose, the design concrete.
blinding concrete should be in accordance with Technical
Requirement R5, and the concrete mix The concrete specification should indicate
In protected or 25
internal conditions
design should be properly detailed. clearly any requirements which are of
specific importance, such as:
If no-fines concrete is used, a render,
• strength
cover coat or cladding should be applied
(d) fire resistance • maximum free water/cement ratio and/
to the finished structure, unless otherwise
Concrete cover to reinforcement should or minimum cement content
acceptable under Technical Requirement R3.
be adequate not only for the exposure • consistence class (e.g. slump)
conditions but also, where necessary, to Proprietary methods of reinforcement, • air content (if required)
resist fire. Requirements for fire resistance eg glass fibre, should be assessed in • aggregate size
are given in BS 8110-1. accordance with Technical Requirement R3. • colour.
Cover of 20mm will normally provide up (c) mix design and Additional Protective
to one hour fire resistance for columns, ADMIXTURES Measures (APM)
simply supported beams and floors. 2.1 - D8 Admixtures shall only be Drawings and specifications for concrete
used to enhance the performance and work should include:
(e) blinding
durability of concrete • specification of mix designs (concrete
Blinding concrete should be used only in
Items to be taken into account include: strength class)
the following situations:
• details of any Additional Protective
• to protect the bottom of the trench/ (a) improved workability
Measures.
excavation if there is a delay in pouring (b) waterproofing
structural concrete (c) foaming agents (d) reinforcement and movement joints
• to provide sufficient support to Drawings and specifications for concrete
(d) accelerated strength
ensure that cover to reinforcement is work should include:
maintained (e) retardation
• cover to reinforcement
• where the foundation has been slightly (f) chlorides
• reinforcement, plans, sections and
overdug bending schedules
• where localised soft spots have been Admixtures should only be specified in full
• reinforcement details at supporting
removed. knowledge of how each one works, and any
edges
limitations on their use.
• camber in beams and slabs, where
(f) carbonation
Admixtures are permitted in accordance appropriate
Carbonation is of concern in reinforced
with BS EN 206-1. • reinforcement around openings
concrete because it reduces the corrosion
• movement joints.
protection given to the reinforcement by Where admixtures are permitted, they
the concrete. should be used strictly in accordance with

(e) formwork READY-MIXED CONCRETE Air entraining admixtures should not be
Information should be included on: used in Standardized Prescribed concrete
• formwork materials and features 2.1 - M2 Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixes.
2.1
• joints in accordance with the design and shall
• mould release agents be chosen to ensure sufficient strength REINFORCEMENT
• holes for services. and durability
2.1 - M4 Reinforcement shall be in
Concrete which is to be left untouched Ready-mixed concrete should be ordered
accordance with the design
or with minimum finishing may require to a detailed specification conforming to
BS 8500 and BS EN 206-1. Reinforcement should comply with:
detailed formwork drawings indicating
the position and detail of joints between When Designated mixes are used, the BS 4449 Specification for carbon steel
shutters, corners and other critical ready-mix supplier will only require the mix bars for the reinforcement of
junctions. designation, and consistence class. concrete
BS 4482 Specification for cold reduced
(f) finish
Information should include details of final SITE-MIXED CONCRETE steel wire for the reinforcement
of concrete
finishing treatment. 2.1 - M3 Materials for site-mixed BS 4483 Specification for steel fabric for
concrete shall be in accordance with the the reinforcement of concrete
(g) testing
design and shall be chosen to ensure BS 6744 Specification for austenitic
Information should include:
sufficient strength and durability stainless steel bars for the
• number and frequency of samples to be
reinforcement of concrete.
taken Items to be taken into account include:
• test laboratory arrangements (a) cement or cementitious material
• recording of results. Cement and combination and combination
types should be as:
(h) curing and protection SITEWORK STANDARDS
Information should include: Table 1 of BS 8500-2 and should conform
to the Standards quoted therein and in 2.1 - S1 All sitework shall:
• requirements for curing and striking
the case of combinations to Annex A of BS (a) meet the Technical Requirements
formwork
8500-2. (b) take account of the design
• minimum period that should elapse
(c) follow established good practice and
before striking/removal of formwork
(b) aggregates workmanship
• minimum periods of curing
Aggregates should comply with:
• minimum periods of protection. Sitework that complies with the design and
BS EN 12620 Aggregates for concrete. the guidance below will be acceptable for
2.1 - D10 All relevant information shall the use of concrete and its reinforcement.
be distributed to appropriate personnel Aggregates should consist of any types of
coarse and/or fine aggregate as specified. Adequate concrete performance depends
Ensure that design and specification as much on how the cured concrete
Aggregates supplied as a mixture of
information is issued to site supervisors element is produced as on the composition
different sizes should be proportioned to
and relevant specialist subcontractors of the concrete.
ensure a reasonable consistency.
and/or suppliers.
Certain types of aggregate are shrinkable
and require special precautions in mixing STORAGE OF MATERIALS
as described in BRE Digest 357. 2.1 - S2 Materials shall be properly
MATERIALS STANDARDS stored to avoid impairing the
Certain types of aggregate may be
2.1 - M1 All materials shall: performance of the finished concrete
susceptible to alkali attack or excessive
(a) meet the Technical Requirements moisture movement. Unfamiliar materials Where materials need to be stored, the
(b) take account of the design should be checked and precautions taken, following precautions should be taken:
Materials that comply with the design and where necessary. Aggregate Carbon Range • store cement in a dry place
the guidance below will be acceptable for (ACR) should not exceed the specified • store each type of cement separately
concrete and its reinforcement. limits if required for use in concrete • follow the cement manufacturer’s
subject to aggressive sulfate ground recommendations on maximum storage
Materials for concrete and its conditions. time
reinforcement should comply with all • store different sizes of aggregate in
relevant standards, including those listed Proprietary aggregates should only be
separate bays
below. Where no standard exists, Technical specified where they have been assessed
in accordance with Technical Requirement R3. • keep sand and aggregate clean
Requirement R3 applies (see Chapter
• keep sand and aggregate dry - where
1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards and
(c) water this is not possible, allowance must
Technical Requirements’).
Water from the mains is acceptable. Water be made in the concrete batching for
References to British Standards and Codes from other sources should meet: moisture in the sand and aggregate.
of Practice include those made under the
BS EN 1008 Mixing water for concrete. For precautions during cold weather,
Construction Products Directive (89/106/
reference should be made to Chapter 1.4
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate (d) admixtures ‘Cold weather working’.
European Technical Specifications Admixtures, other than air-entraining
approved by a European Committee for
Standardisation (CEN).
admixtures, should comply with: BLINDING CONCRETE
BS EN 934-2 Admixtures for concrete
mortar and grout - Concrete admixtures 2.1 - S3 Blinding concrete shall be used,
- Definitions, requirements, conformity, where required, to aid construction
marking and labelling. Blinding concrete should only be used in
the following situations:

• to protect the bottom of the trench/ (especially shutter releasing agents and Supports should be placed not more
excavation if there is a delay in pouring oils) before, during and after placement. than one metre apart or closer where
structural concrete necessary.
2.1
• to provide sufficient support to ensure (b) shape of bars

Site bending should be carried out with Spacers for parallel bars should be
cover to reinforcement is maintained
the proper machinery for the job, whether staggered to avoid creating a plane of
• where the foundation has been slightly
hand-operated or powered. weakness in the concrete.
overdug
• where localised soft spots have been (c) placing of bars
removed. Bars should be bent and placed as shown
on the drawings.
FORMWORK spacers staggered
to avoid planes
Reinforcement should be laid so that the of weakness
2.1 - S4 Formwork shall be structurally main reinforcing bars are parallel to the
adequate and constructed in a span or as detailed in the design.
workmanlike manner
Slab reinforcement should be located
Items to be taken into account include: near the bottom of the slab, with the main
(a) setting out reinforcing bars usually placed first and
Where formwork is necessary, it should be the secondary bars on top. For beams, the
set out in relation to relevant reference main reinforcing bars should be placed Supports for top steel should be chairs (or
lines and benchmarks. Accuracy is inside the links. other proprietary products).
essential to ensure that the cover to the
reinforcement is as specified.
mild steel
supporting
(b) support of working loads span top layer
The formwork and its supports should
be rigid enough to maintain the correct
position and to withstand all extra loads
and accidental knocks likely to occur when
concrete is placed and compacted.
main bars
Wedges, inserts and boxes should be firmly
secured to avoid displacement during secondary bars
vibration.
(c) finish
For concrete which is to be left untreated
or with minimum finishing, the tightness of
formwork joints is particularly important
For details of reinforcement for suspended
to avoid grout loss and resulting ragged
ground floor slabs, reference should be
edges.
made to Chapter 5.2 ‘Suspended ground
Joints between shutters should be (d) lapping bars and mesh floors’ (Design).
constructed for easy stripping. Reinforcing bars or mesh should always
be lapped in accordance with their size 2.1 - S6 All installations and final
Any holes for bolts or spacers should and type, as indicated by the designer, to preparations shall be completed before
be drilled with care to avoid disfiguring ensure that the loading is fully transferred concreting starts
or splintering the formwork surface and across the lap. Any additional laps require Before concreting starts, all services,
giving a poor finish. the designer’s approval. ducts, inserts, etc to be embedded in the
(d) striking concrete should be installed and, where
(e) cover for bars
Formwork should be capable of being appropriate, tested.
Particular attention should be given
struck without damage to the concrete. to maintaining adequate cover for the All inserts, box-outs, cast-in fixings, etc
Formwork should be dismantled without reinforcement, especially for concrete in should be checked for correct positioning
shock, disturbance or damage to the exposed positions or in the ground. Check and secured.
concrete. Support for loadbearing that the cover is adequate for stirrups as
well as for the main bars, and that no ties The formwork should be cleaned out
elements should not be removed until the and checked for fallen debris, especially
concrete has achieved sufficient strength, or clips protrude into the cover.
nails and wire clippings. The completed
as detailed by the designer. reinforcement should be checked and,
Props under suspended floors or beams where necessary, approved by the designer
should be released from the centre, or his representative.
cover measured
outwards to avoid overloading. between links
and formwork
READY-MIXED CONCRETE
REINFORCEMENT 2.1 - S7 Ready-mixed concrete shall
2.1 - S5 All reinforcement shall be in be ordered to ensure it achieves the
accordance with the design required design strength and durability
(f) support of reinforcement
Items to be taken into account include: When ordering ready-mixed concrete all
Cover spacers should be made of concrete
requirements according to the design,
(a) condition of reinforcement (eg broken concrete paving slabs) or ready
including reference to Appendix 2.1-A,
Check that reinforcing bars are clean, and made of steel or plastic. Concrete cover
should be specified.
free from loose rust and contaminants spacers should be not more than 50 x 50mm.

The concrete should be a GEN mix, FND reference. Proof of testing, with allied (f) compaction
mix or RC mix ordered in accordance with documentation, should be made available Concrete should be consolidated
Appendix 2.1-A Tables 1 and 4b. to NHBC upon request. A ready-mix according to the design and specification
2.1
concrete supplier should take test cubes, requirements.
Check the delivery ticket to ensure that
as required, for his quality assurance
the concrete meets the requirements given Reinforced concrete should be fully
procedures.
in the design. compacted using poker vibration unless
the design states otherwise. Poker
ON-SITE CONCRETE MIXING CASTING vibration should be carried out by
2.1 - S10 Concrete shall be cast so as to experienced operators to ensure complete
2.1 - S8 Concrete shall be mixed to coverage and avoid honeycombing.
achieve the required design strength and
achieve the required design strength and
durability Vibrating beams or hand tamping may be
durability
Items to be taken into account include: used to consolidate slabs up to 150mm
Items to be taken into account include: thick, unless the design details otherwise.
(a) transportation
(a) mixing methods
Concrete should be deposited as close as Excessive use of vibration can cause
Except for very small quantities, a
possible to its final location. Transportation segregation and prevent concrete reaching
mechanical mixer should be used. If hand
on site should be as fast and efficient as an adequate strength.
mixing, add an extra 10% of cement to the
possible in order to avoid segregation and
quantities shown in Tables 2a and 2b in
to ensure full compaction of the placed (g) protection after placing
Appendix 2.1-A.
concrete. Freshly poured concrete should be kept
(b) admixtures moist by covering as soon as the surface
(b) low temperatures is hard enough to resist damage. This is
Admixtures should be used only where
The temperature of the concrete at the particularly important in hot, windy or
permitted in the specification. Dosages
point of use should not be less than 5°C cold weather to prevent the surface drying
should be strictly in accordance with the
(41°F). out too rapidly or freezing. Damp hessian,
manufacturer’s instructions and should
be tested in trial mixes, where necessary. Fresh concrete is susceptible to frost damp sharp sand or an impervious sheet
Admixtures should, wherever possible, be damage. Freezing can cause internal (such as polyethylene) are acceptable
added to the mix water to ensure complete damage that is not immediately obvious. as surface coverings. An alternative is
dispersal. During cold weather, either stop working to apply a curing agent to the surface of
or follow the recommendations given in concrete.
Do not overdose concrete with admixtures
Chapter 1.4 ‘Cold weather working’.
- use the correct dosage.
CURING
(c) placing
Plasticizers can improve concrete cohesion 2.1 - S11 Concrete shall be adequately
Site-mixed concrete should be placed
and the bond with reinforcement. cured to achieve full design strength
within 30 minutes, and ready-mixed
Air entraining agents increase the air void concrete within 2 hours, of water being Check the design to see if there are any
content of the cured concrete and can help added to the cement. special requirements for curing concrete.
produce a more frost resistant surface.
Additional water should not be added to No load should be allowed on the work
They are recommended for paths, drives
ready-mixed concrete unless under the until the concrete has cured sufficiently.
and pavements which are likely to be
supervision and approval of the supplier.
exposed to freezing conditions. It is recommended that plain unreinforced
Concrete should not be placed in or under
Accelerators produce early setting of the water, unless it has been specially designed concrete made with ordinary Portland
concrete. No admixture should be relied for that use. cement is left for at least 4 days to cure.
upon as an anti-freeze for fresh concrete. It is possible to proceed with substructure
For details about concreting at low Concreting should, wherever possible, masonry above strip or trench fill
temperatures, reference should be made to be carried out in one operation, taking foundations on unreinforced ordinary
Chapter 1.4 ‘Cold weather working’. account of: Portland cement concrete at an early
• weather conditions, stage, provided care is taken to protect the
Admixtures containing chlorides can cause • available daylight, and surface from damage.
metal corrosion and should never be used • time to allow for surface finishing.
in reinforced concrete. Reinforced concrete, or concrete
(d) avoiding construction joints containing cement replacements, such as
Concrete cast in one operation (ie without PFA, will require a longer curing period.
TESTING construction joints) should not be greater This will normally be 7 days and the
2.1 - S9 Testing, where required, shall than the following, and should always be as concrete structure should not be loaded
be carried out to the full satisfaction of square in shape as possible: during this period.
NHBC • reinforced concrete 60m2
Any curing agents should comply with
Where testing is necessary to ensure that • unreinforced concrete 16m2.
Technical Requirement R3 and should be
concrete is to the strength required by Sufficient concrete should be mixed/ applied strictly in accordance with the
the design, ie with Designed mixes, UKAS ordered, so that it can be placed in a manufacturer’s instructions. Curing agents
approved laboratories should be used. continuous process. Construction joints should never be used on floors which are
should be formed only if unavoidable and to receive either a topping or a screed, as
Concrete test cubes should be prepared as
then in consultation with the Engineer. it could affect the future bond.
requested by the Engineer. These should
be marked, cured and stored safely until Before work continues beyond the joint, all
Curing periods may be extended at low
testing. Tests should be carried out in shuttering should be removed.
temperatures, as described in Chapter 1.4
accordance with BS EN 12390. ‘Cold weather working’.
(e) joints in foundations
Proof of testing with reports and Joints should not be positioned next to a
certificates, should be kept for later return in the foundation.

Appendix 2.1-A
2.1
Table 1 - General purpose concrete mixes - minimum concrete specification (non-hazardous

conditions)
Use BS 8500 and BS EN 206-1
  Ready-mixed concrete Site-mixed concrete Consistence class
(Designated mix) (Standardised Prescribed mix)
Substructure and ground floors GEN1 ST2 S3
• rough blinding (non-structural)
• infill
• unreinforced oversite concrete below timber floors
• structural blinding and overbreak GEN1 ST2 S3/S41

• strip foundations
• trench fill
• other mass concrete foundations
• fill to wall cavity
• solid filling under steps
• house floors not designed as suspended and not

reinforced
- permanent finish to be added eg screed or floating GEN1 ST2 S2
floor
- no permanent finish to be added eg carpet GEN2 ST3 S2
• garage floors not designed as suspended and not GEN3 ST4 S2

reinforced
• house and garage ground floor slabs

- fully or nominally reinforced, either ground bearing, RC35 ST52 S2
suspended or over sub-floor voids
Superstructure
• general reinforced concrete exposure class3 to BS
8500-1
- nominal cover to reinforcement of 25mm plus a
tolerance of +10mm
- XC1 (dry) and XC2 (wet, rarely dry) RC30 4
S2
- XC3 (moderate humidity), XC4 (cyclic wet and dry) RC40 - S2
and XF1 (freeze/thaw attack and no de-icing agent)
- nominal cover to reinforcement of 30mm plus a
tolerance of +10mm
- Any exposure class (XC1-4 and XF1) RC35 5
S2
In-situ external concrete

• drives and paths PAV1 ST56 S2
• foundations for precast concrete paving slabs GEN1 ST1 S1
Notes
1 Consistence class S3 should be used for strip foundation concrete and Consistence class S4 should be used for trench fill foundation
concrete.
2 ST4 mix for house and garage floors may only be used in conjunction with Chapter 5.2 ‘Suspended ground floors’. In all other cases the
designated mix should be used.
3 Exposure classes (XC1-4 and XF1) are defined in BS 8500-1 Table A.1.
4 In this situation an ST4 mix may be used but only for small quantities of concrete. In all other cases the appropriate designated mix should
be used.
5 In this situation an ST5 mix may be used but only for small quantities of concrete. In all other cases the appropriate designated mix should
be used.
6 Not suitable in areas of severe exposure to frost attack (see Chapter 6.1 Appendix B). This is equivalent to Exposure Class XC4 above.

Tables 2a, 2b and 2c - Site-mixed concrete for Standardised Prescribed Mixes
2.1
Table 2a - Mix proportions by weight
This table applies to cement strength class 32.5 and 20mm maximum aggregate size. Where cement strength class 42.5 or higher is used the
cement weight should be decreased by 10%.
Standardised Consistence Class Cement Fine aggregate Coarse aggregate

Prescribed Mix (see Table 2c) (kg) (kg) (kg)
ST1 S1 230 770 1155
ST2 S2 265 760 1135
ST2 S3 285 735 1105
ST2 S4 300 815 990
ST3 S2 295 745 1120
ST4 S2 330 735* 1100
ST5 S2 375 720* 1080
Table 2b - Mix proportions by volume

This table applies to 20mm maximum aggregate size
Cement Standardised Consistence Class Number of (25 kg) Fine aggregate Coarse aggregate
strength class Prescribed Mix (see Table 2c) bags of cement (litres) (litres)
32.5 ST1 S1 1 60 85
ST2 S2 1 50 75
ST2 S3 1 45 70
ST2 S4 1 50 60
ST3 S2 1 45 65
42.5 or higher ST1 S1 1 65 95
ST2 S2 1 55 80
ST2 S3 1 50 75
ST2 S4 1 55 65
ST3 S2 1 50 75
Table 2c - Consistence classes
Consistence class Consistence (slump) in mm

S1 10 to 40
S2 50 to 90
S3 100 to 150
S4 160 to 210
Notes
* Fine aggregate grading to be grades CP or MP only of BS EN 12620.
Table 3 - Exposure conditions

Environment Exposure conditions
Mild Concrete surfaces completely protected against weather or aggressive conditions
Moderate Exposed concrete surfaces but sheltered from severe rain or freezing wind whilst wet
Concrete surfaces continuously under non-aggresive water
Concrete in contact with non-aggressive soil (AC-1 and AC-1s classes)
Concrete subject to condensation
Severe Concrete surfaces exposed to severe rain, alternate wetting and drying or occasional freezing or severe condensation
Very severe Concrete surfaces exposed to sea water spray, or de-icing salts (directly or indirectly)
Concrete surfaces exposed to corrosive fumes or severe freezing conditions whilst wet
Most severe Concrete surfaces frequently exposed to sea water spray or de-icing salts (directly or indirectly)
Concrete in sea water tidal zone down to 1m below lowest water
Notes
This table is based on Table 3.2 of BS 8110-1. For very severe and most severe exposure conditions follow guidance in relevant documents
explained in Design clause 2.1-D4.

Tables 4a and 4b - Buried concrete in aggressive ground

2.1
Tables 4a and 4b are based on extracts from BS 8500-1 & 2 and BRE Special Digest 1. They cover the lower range of chemical aggressiveness.
For concrete exposed to more aggressive conditions, specialist advice should be sought. For the purposes of Chapter 2.1 the following
terminology is used. Other related terms, which might be encountered in specialist reports, are described in BRE Special Digest 1.
Table 4a - Aggressive Chemical Environment for Concrete (ACEC) site classification(1)

This table applies to concrete exposed to ground with a pH value greater than 2.5
Sulfate and magnesium Natural soil Brownfield(3)

Design 2:1 Water/soil Groundwater Total Static water Mobile Static Mobile ACEC Class
Sulfate extract Potential water water water for site
Class for Sulfate(2)
site
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SO4 Mg SO4 Mg SO4 pH pH pH(5) pH(5)
mg/l mg/l mg/l mg/l %
DS-1 <500 All Mg <400 All Mg <0.24 >2.5 >2.5 AC-1s

values values
>5.5(6) >6.5 AC-1
2.5-5.5 5.5-6.5 AC-2z
4.5-5.5 AC-3z
2.5-4.5 AC-4z
DS-2 500-1500 All Mg 400-1400 All Mg 0.24-0.6 >3.5 >5.5 AC-1s

values values
>5.5 >6.5 AC-2
2.5-3.5 2.5-5.5 AC-2s
2.5-5.5 5.5-6.5 AC-3z
4.5-5.5 AC-4z
<4.5 AC-5z
Notes
1 For concrete quality and APM for ACEC Classes above AC-2z follow specialist advice. For the full list of ACEC Classes refer to Table A.2 of BS
8500-1 or BRE Special Digest Part C Table C1 for natural ground locations and Table C2 for brownfield locations.
2 Applies only to sites where concrete will be exposed to sulfate ions (SO4) which may result from the oxidation of sulphides such as pyrite,
following ground disturbance.
3 Applies to locations on sites that comprise either undisturbed ground that is in its natural state or clean fill derived from such ground.
4 ‘Brownfield’ is defined as sites which may contain chemical residues remaining from previous industrial use or from imported wastes.
5 An additional account is taken of hydrochloric and nitric acids by adjustment to sulfate content.
6 For flowing water that is potentially aggressive to concrete owing to high purity or an aggressive carbon dioxide level greater than 15 mg/l,
increase the ACEC Class to AC-2z.
Explanation of suffix symbols to ACEC Class number

• Suffix s indicates that, as the water has been classified as Static, no Additional Protective Measures are generally necessary.
• Concrete placed in ACEC Classes which include the suffix z have primarily to resist acid conditions and may be made with any of the
cements or combinations listed in Table D2 of BRE Special Digest 1.
This table is based on Tables C1 and C2 of BRE Special Digest 1.

Table 4b - Design guide for concrete elements in the ground
2.1
Concrete element ACEC Class(1) Designated mix
Strip or trenchfill foundation, raft foundation, pile(3) AC-1, AC1s As Table 1
and ground beams
AC-2, AC2s FND2(2)
AC-2z FND2z(2)
Notes
1 For all other ACEC Classes refer to BS 8500-1 Table A.4 or follow specialist advice.
2 Portland limestone cement may only be used if the Design Sulfate Class (see Table 4a) of
the site does not exceed DS-1.
3 Applies to cast-in-situ piles only and for other types of pile refer to BRE Special Digest 1 or
follow specialist advice.
Glossary of terms
Aggressive Chemical Environment for Concrete Classification (ACEC Class) - A new
system for the classification of aggressive ground conditions that are derived from Design
Sulfate Class. It takes into account the site (natural or brownfield) and the mobility and pH
of groundwater. Brownfield, ‘Mobile’ water and low pH (acidic) conditions, may have adverse
effects on buried concrete and hence result in a more severe ACEC Class.
Additional Protective Measures (APM) - These are defined as the extra measures that
could be taken to protect concrete where the basic concrete specification might not give
adequate resistance to chemical attack.
Design Chemical Class (DC Class) - This defines the qualities of concrete that are
required to resist chemical attack. The DC Class is derived from the ACEC Class of the
ground and other factors including the type of concrete element and its required structural
performance.
Design Sulfate Class (DS Class) - It is a site classification based on the determined sulfate
(including Potential sulfate) contents of the ground and/or groundwater. It is also dependent
of the type of site, presence or absence of magnesium ions, pyrite and for pH less than 5.5
chloride and nitrate ions. Five levels of classification are given that are equivalent to those
given in BRE Digest 363 (now superseded).
Enhanced concrete quality - An incremental step in concrete quality that could be used as
an Additional Protective Measure (APM). Each increment in concrete quality is counted as an
extra APM.
Mobile groundwater - Sites where water is free to flow into an excavation to give a standing
water level are affected by mobile ground water. The threshold ground permeability is
greater than 10-6 m/s (i.e. 86 mm/day).
Static groundwater - The sites where the free flow of water is confined due to either
permanently dry condition or the soil is relatively impermeable, of permeability less than 10-6
m/s.
Total Potential Sulfate (TPS) - The total potential sulfate content is the result of the
combination of sulfates already present in the ground and that which may be added due to
the oxidation of pyrite in the ground.

INDEX
2.1
A F S
ACEC class 8, 9 Finish 3 Site-mixed concrete 3, 5, 7
Acids 1 Fire resistance 2 Sitework standards 3
Admixtures 2, 3, 5 Formwork 3, 4 Special types of concrete 2
Aggregates 1, 3 G Standardised prescribed mixes 1, 6, 7
Alkali-silica reaction 1 General purpose mixes 6 Storage of materials 3
APM 2, 9 Glossary of terms 9 Sulfates 1, 9
B Ground aggressivity 2 T
Blinding 2, 3 J Testing 3, 5
C Joints 2, 3, 5 Transportation 5
Carbonation 2 L W
Cement 3, 8 Loading 2 Water 3
Chlorides 1, 2
M
Compaction 5
Mix design 1
Cover 2, 4
Mixing methods 5
Curing 3, 5
P
D Placing 5
Design standard 1
Protection 3, 5
Designated mixes 1, 6
Performance 2
Durability 2
R
E Ready-mixed concrete 1, 3, 4
Exposure 1, 7
Reinforced concrete 2
Reinforcement 2, 3, 4

Part 2 Materials
Chapter 2.3
Timber preservation (natural solid timber)
2.3 Timber preservation (natural solid timber)
CONTENTS SCOPE
2.3
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for the protection of
natural solid timber against fungal decay when exposed to
Statutory requirements D2 1
damp conditions and against insect attack.
Durability D3 1
Method of treatment D4 1
Compatibility with metal components D5 1 LIMITATIONS
MATERIALS
Materials standards M1 1 This Chapter only refers to treatment of natural solid timber.
It does not relate to timber products such as plywood and
wood particle boards.
SITEWORK
This Chapter only gives acceptable treatment schedules and
does not cover:
Protection and storage S2 1 • condition of the timber before treatment
Treatment of cut surfaces S3 1 • techniques of operating the treatment process, which is
the responsibility of the organisation carrying out the
APPENDIX 2.3-A operation.
Table 1 - Timber component groups and 2

preservative treatment (based on BS 8417)
Table 2 - Natural durability of building 3
timbers (heartwood only)
APPENDIX 2.3-B
Additional sources of information 3
INDEX 4

Timber preservation (natural solid timber) 2.3
(7-14 days). In situations where occasional
DESIGN STANDARDS dampness is expected, metal fittings in SITEWORK STANDARDS
2.3
contact with timber treated with copper
2.3 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical 2.3 - S1 All sitework shall:
containing preservatives should be
Requirements (a) comply with the Technical
galvanized. Where timber treated with
Requirements
Design that follows the guidance below copper containing preservatives is likely to
(b) take account of the design
will be acceptable for timber selection and become wet, fittings of austenitic stainless
preservation. steel should be used.
workmanship
Copper containing treatments can create
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS a corrosive cell between mild steel and
Sitework that complies with the design and
the guidance below will be acceptable for
2.3 - D2 Timber and its preservative aluminium.
timber preservation.
treatment shall comply with all
statutory requirements Timber treated with copper containing
preservations should be re-dried to a
Design should be in accordance with MATERIALS STANDARDS moisture content of 20% for at least 7 days
relevant Building Regulations and other before being in contact with metal fittings.
2.3 - M1 All materials shall:
statutory requirements.
(a) comply with the Technical In situations where occasional dampness
Requirements
DURABILITY (b) take account of the design
is expected, metal fittings in contact with
timber treated with copper containing
2.3 - D3 Timber and joinery used in the preservatives should be galvanized. Where
Materials that comply with the design and
construction of dwellings shall either timber treated with copper containing
the guidance given in Appendix 2.3-A will
have adequate natural durability or, preservatives is likely to become wet,
be acceptable for timber preservation.
where treatment is undertaken, receive fittings of austenitic stainless steel should
a satisfactory preservative treatment The specification should state the specific be used.
against fungal decay and insect attack treatment and standard required.
Check that when delivered to site, timber
Timber and external joinery should be Preservative treatments should comply and joinery products have received the
either: with all relevant standards and Codes specified treatment. This should be stated
• naturally durable and resistant to insect of Practice. Proprietary treatments on the delivery note.
attack, or not contained in this Chapter or in
• treated with preservative in accordance British Standards should comply with
with this Chapter. Technical Requirement R3 (see Chapter
PROTECTION AND STORAGE
1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards and 2.3 - S2 Timber and joinery shall be
Appendix 2.3-A provides information stored and protected to ensure it is in a
to establish whether or not treatment suitable condition when installed in the
is necessary for a particular element In all cases, preservatives must meet the dwelling
or timber species and also the type of requirements of the Control of Pesticides
treatment. Regulations (1986) administered by the It is important when timber and joinery
Health and Safety Executive. products are stored that they are:
• protected from damage immediately
METHOD OF TREATMENT The safety instructions published by the upon delivery
2.3 - D4 The method of treatment and manufacturers should be followed. • protected from the weather
treatment process shall reasonably • stored off the ground
References to British Standards and Codes
ensure that the timber is safely and • stored in a way which limits the risk of
satisfactorily protected against fungal distortion
decay and insect attack • stored so that air can circulate freely
around them.
For timber or joinery which requires European Technical Specifications
treatment, it is important that it is carried approved by a European Committee for
out to appropriate standards which are Standardisation (CEN). TREATMENT OF CUT
both suitable and safe. Treatments in
Where copper/chromium containing SURFACES
accordance with procedures set out in
preservatives (CC, CCP or CCB) have been 2.3 - S3 Timber which has been
British Standards, Codes of Practice or
used, it is important that metal fittings preservative treated and cut shall be
which have been satisfactorily assessed
are not applied to the timber until the re-treated on the cut surfaces
by an independent authority, will be
salts of the treatment have been “fixed”
acceptable, unless otherwise notified in Timber should not be cut after treatment
(7-14 days). In situations where occasional
writing. but where this is unavoidable (either at the
dampness is expected, metal fittings in
contact with timber treated with copper treatment plant or on site) all cut surfaces
COMPATIBILITY WITH containing preservatives should be should be given two liberal applications of
a suitable colour tinted preservative. The
METAL COMPONENTS galvanized. Where timber treated with
purpose of the colour tinting is to enable
copper containing preservatives is likely to
2.3 - D5 Measures shall be taken become wet, fittings of austenitic stainless checks to be made that re-treatment has
to prevent adverse effects from steel should be used. been carried out.
incompatibility between metal
Only in situations where colour tinting will
components and treated timber
affect the appearance of the timber when
Where copper/chromium containing fixed to the dwelling will clear preservatives
preservatives (CC, CCP or CCB) have been be acceptable for this purpose.
used, it is important that metal fittings
are not applied to the timber until the The site applied preservative should be
salts of the treatment have been “fixed” compatible with the original treatment.

Appendix 2.3-A
2.3
Table 1 - Timber component groups and preservative treatment required (based on BS 8417)
Component group Examples Hazard Desired Preservative type required (see note 1) Preservative
class service treatment not
life required:
Copper Organic Boron
containing Solvent or
Microemulsion
Internal joinery, Architraves, internal 1 60 unless a specific request
intermediate floor joists doors, intermediate for treatment against
floor joists insect attack has been
made
Roof timbers (dry) Pitched roofs: rafters, 1 60 unless a specific request
purlins, joists, wall for treatment against
plates insect attack has been
made
Roof timbers (dry) Ditto 1 60 Where timber used is:
in areas with house • softwood - heartwood
longhorn beetle only (see note 2) and of
durability class 1 - 3 (see
note 3) or
• hardwood
Roof timbers (risk of Flat roofs joists, sarking, 2 60 Where timber used is
wetting) tiling battens, valley heartwood only (see note
boards, timbers exposed 2) and of durability class 1
to risk of condensation - 2 (see note 3)
Roof timbers (risk of Ditto 2 60 Where timber used is
wetting) in areas with heartwood only (see note
house longhorn beetle 2) and of durability class 1
- 2 (see note 3)
External walls/ground Timber frames, ground 2 60 Where timber used is
floors floor joists, l-beam heartwood only (see note
studwork 2) and of durability class 1
- 2 (see note 3)
External joinery, coated Window frames, door 3 30 (see note 5) Where timber used is
(not in ground contact) frames, doors, cladding heartwood only (see note
(see note 4) (coated), soffits, fascias, 2) and of durability class 1
barge boards - 3 (see note 3)
Uncoated external Decking, balcony infill, 3 15 Where timber used is
timbers (not in ground cladding (uncoated) heartwood only (see note
contact) 2) and of durability class 1
- 2 (see note 3)
Timber in contact with Decking timber in 4 15 Where timber used is
the ground ground contact, timber heartwood only (see note
below dpc 2) and of durability class 1
- 2 (see note 3)
Notes to table 1
1 Preservative treatment of timber should be in accordance with the recommendations of BS 8417. For preservatives listed in the supplement
to the BWPDA Manual treatment recommendations are given in table 9, BS 8417.
2 Almost always, packs of timber contain sapwood. It should be assumed that timber is sapwood and preservative treated accordingly unless
the timber has been specifically selected as heartwood only.
3 Natural durability classes are given in table 2.
4 The hardwoods known as Meranti, Seraya or Lauan should be treated in the same way as European redwood / Scots Pine when used for
joinery.
5 Generally, copper containing preservatives are not used for treating joinery items, but they can be used to treat claddings which are to be
coated.

Timber preservation (natural solid timber) 2.3
Table 2 - Natural durability of building timbers (heartwood only) Appendix 2.3-B
2.3
Durability Class Timber Type Timber Species
1. Very durable Softwoods None Additional sources of
Hardwoods Opepe
Padauk-Andaman information
Afromosia
BS 8417 Preservation of Timber -
Greenheart
Guarea Recommendations.
Iroko
Jarrah BS EN 599 - Part 1 Durability of wood
Okan and wood-based products - Performance
Pyinkado of preventive wood preservatives as
Teak - Malaysian determined by biological tests - Part 1:
Kapur - Sabah
- Burma Specification according to hazard class.
Padauk - White
Peroba BWPDA Manual. The British Wood
2. Durable Softwoods Cedar - Western red (imported) Preserving & Damp-proofing Association,
1 Gleneagles House, Vernongate, Derby
Hardwoods Basralocus DE1 1UP Tel: 01322 225100;
Ekki
Chestnut - Sweet Email: [email protected]
Karri, Kempas
Louro - Red
Oak - American White
- European
Mahogany - American
3. Moderately durable Softwoods Pine - Caribbean pitch
Cedar - Western red (UK)
Fir - Douglas (North American)
- Douglas (UK)
- Dunkeld (UK)
Larch - European
- Hybrid
- Japanese
- Tamarack
- Western
- Maritime
Pine - American pitch
Hardwoods Keruing - Sabah
- Malaysian
Oak - Tasmanian
- Turkey
Mahogany - African
4. Slightly durable Softwoods Fir - Noble
- Silver
Pine - Canadian red
- Corsican
- Jack
- Parana
- Ponderosa
- Radiata
- Scots
- Southern
- Western white
- Yellow
Redwood - European
Fir - Balsam
- Grand
Hem-fir - USA and Canada
Pine - Lodgepole
Spruce - Eastern Canadian
- Engelmann
- European (Whitewood)
- Sitka
- Western white
Spruce-pine-fir - Canada
Hardwoods Elm - Dutch
- English
- White
Oak - American red
Beech - Silver
Elm - Rock
- Wych
5. Not durable Softwoods None
Hardwoods Alder
Beech - European
Birch - Silver
- European
- Paper
- Yellow
Chestnut - European horse
Lime
Sycamore

INDEX
2.3
A H S
Additional sources of information 3 Hardwoods 3 Sapwood 2
C Hazard class 2 Softwoods 3
Compatibility with metal 1 Health and safety executive 1 Storage of timber 1
components House Longhorn beetle 2 T
Component group 2 I Timber elements 2
Control of pesticides regulations 1 Insect attack 1 Timber type 3
Cut surfaces 1 M Timber species 3
D Method of treatment 1 V
Desired service life 2 Moderately durable timber 3 Very durable timber 3
Durability 1 N
Durable timber 3 Natural durability 3
E Non-durable timber 3
External wall timbers 2 O
External woodwork 2 Organic solvent 2
F P
Flat roofs 2 Pitched roofs 2
Floors 2 Preservation 2
Fungal decay 1 Protection 1

Part 4
Foundations
4.1 Land quality - managing ground

conditions
4.2 Building near trees
4.4 Strip and trench fill foundations
4.5 Raft, pile, pier and beam foundations
4.6 Vibratory ground improvement

techniques
Part 4 Foundations
Chapter 4.1
Land quality - managing ground conditions
4.1 Land quality - managing ground conditions
CONTENTS SCOPE
Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical

Objectives Requirements and recommendations for assessing the site
with regard to managing the ground conditions.
Procedural summary 1
PROCEDURAL FLOW CHART 2
DESIGN
Initial assessment
Desk study D1 3
Walkover survey D2 3
Results D3 4
Where hazards are not suspected
Basic investigation D4 4
Where hazards are suspected
4.1
Detailed investigation D5 4
Managing the hazards D6 5
Documentation and validation D7 5
Unforeseen hazards D8 6
APPENDIX 4.1-A
References 6
APPENDIX 4.1-B
Potential hazards and associated risks 7
APPENDIX 4.1-C
Site investigation techniques 8
APPENDIX 4.1-D
“Suitable persons” and “Consultants or 9
Specialists”
INDEX 9
Hazardous sites
Builders are reminded that where a site* is hazardous,
NHBC Rules state that, they must notify NHBC in writing
at least 8 weeks before work begins.
Failure to provide NHBC with information about
hazardous sites may result in a delay in processing the
registration, hold up construction work on site and the
issue of the 10 year cover.
* Site is defined in NHBC Rules as an area of land which is
covered by a single detailed planning consent.

Land quality - managing ground conditions 4.1
Objectives Procedural summary
This chapter provides a framework The processes to assess and manage the
for managing geotechnical and ground conditions are:
contamination issues with the objective of • illustrated in the Procedural flowchart,
ensuring that: and
• all sites are properly assessed and • described in detail in the pages that
investigated follow.
• foundations and substructure designs
are suitable for the ground conditions Useful references are contained in
• sites are properly remediated where Appendix 4.1-A.
necessary or appropriate design
Initial assessment (Clauses D1 to D3)
precautions are taken, and
NHBC requires all sites to be assessed by a
• appropriate documentation and
Desk study and a Walkover survey.
validation can be provided to NHBC.
The Results should be used to determine
Assessment of geotechnical and whether or not hazards are known or
contamination issues suspected.
Assessment should be carried out by
direct investigation and examination of the Basic investigation (Clause D4)
ground, supplemented where necessary Where hazards are not suspected a basic
4.1
by results of laboratory testing on samples investigation will be required to support
obtained. the results of the initial assessment.
Examples of potential hazards and Detailed investigation (Clause D5)

associated risks relating to geotechnical Where hazards are known or suspected a
and contamination issues are listed in detailed investigation will be required.
Appendix 4.1-B.
Further investigation
Additionally, contaminated land should be Where the results of the basic investigation
assessed using the following framework: or detailed investigation are inconclusive,
further site investigation will be required.
a substance or group
Where hazards are found (Clause D6)
of substances with Where hazards are identified, design
the potential to cause precautions or remediation will be required
source
significant harm to minimise their effects.
Documentation and validation (Clause D7)
NHBC will require documentation to show
that:
• the site has been properly assessed and
pathway
a route by which a investigated

source could reach • where necessary, suitable precautions
a target
are incorporated into the design
• all necessary remediation has been
carried out.
Unforeseen hazards (Clause D8)
that which could be If any unforeseen hazards are found
significantly harmed during the course of construction, further
target by the source investigation may be required.

Procedural flowchart
INITIAL ASSESSMENT
• DESK STUDY
• WALKOVER SURVEY
• RESULTS
HAZARDS
NO KNOWN OR YES
SUSPECTED?
BASIC DETAILED
INVESTIGATION INVESTIGATION
4.1
FURTHER FURTHER
INVESTIGATION YES INVESTIGATION
REQUIRED? REQUIRED?
NO NO
ARE
MANAGE HAZARDS
YES
HAZARDS FOUND?
DOCUMENTATION NO
AND VALIDATION
COMMENCE
CONSTRUCTION
UNFORESEEN
YES
HAZARDS?
NO
COMPLETE
CONSTRUCTION

DESIGN STANDARDS INITIAL ASSESSMENT
Is there cracking or stickiness of
WALKOVER STUDY
the surface which may indicate a
INITIAL ASSESSMENT 4.1 - D2 A walkover survey of the shrinkable sub-soil?
site and the surrounding area shall be
DESK STUDY
undertaken by a suitable person
4.1 - D1 A desk study of the site and the
surrounding area shall be undertaken by A walkover survey is a direct inspection of Are there sudden changes in
the site and the surrounding area carried conditions e.g. clay to chalk or
a suitable person
soil to rock?
out in conjunction with the desk study.
A desk study is the collection and
examination of existing information Look for indications of any potential
obtained from a wide variety of sources. hazards to provide a basis for the (c) surface water and ground water
investigation.
It should indicate any potential hazards at
an early stage and provide a basis for the A photographic record of the site can help Is a high water table indicated,
investigation. in the reporting of the walkover survey. e.g. by waterlogged ground?
A suitable person, as described in A suitable person, as described in

Appendix 4.1-D, should carry out the desk Appendix 4.1-D, should carry out the
study. walkover survey.
Are there any signs of flooding?
4.1
Items to be taken into account include: Items to be taken into account include:
(a) soils, geology, surface water and (a) topography
ground water
Investigate the soils, geology, surface
water and ground water of the site and What is the significance of any Are there any reeds or water-
surrounding area. abrupt changes in slope? loving plants?
(b) use of the site and surrounding area

Research the current use and history of
the site and surrounding area to assess the Are there any valley bottoms or
depressions which may be soft Are there any springs, ponds,
potential problems including those which wells, ditches or streams?
or filled?
may have been left by:
• industrial, commercial and agricultural
uses including storage
• mining Is there evidence of overburden Is there any discoloured water?
• quarrying on slopes? What is its source?
• landfilling and tipping.
Some sites may have been associated with
more than one process. (d) vegetation (which may indicate the
Is there excavation at the base of nature of the soils)
(c) sources of information a slope?
Refer to key sources of information
including: Is the vegetation sparse, dead or
dying?
• the Environment Agency or its
equivalent, for example coastal erosion, Are there any signs of landslip,
landfill sites, details of water abstraction e.g. tilting trees, posts or walls?
• the Local Authority, for example
What is the type and condition
planning and environmental health of vegetation on land adjoining
• county records offices, libraries, the site?
museums, and local history sources Is there evidence of imported soil,
tipped material or rubbish? Is it
• the utility companies
hot? Does it have an odour?
• the Coal Authority
- mining reports - past, present and What are the species, height and
proposed mining condition of the trees?
• the British Geological Survey Are there signs of local
- maps and information subsidence?
• soil survey maps
• the Ordnance Survey What are the species, height,
spread and condition of hedges
- current and previous editions of plans and scrub on clay?
and aerial photographs. (b) soils and rocks
The above list is not exhaustive and local

sources may be relevant. What is the basic type of ground?
Is there evidence of former trees,
(d) existing site information hedges or scrub on clay?
Review all available information from:
• the vendor of the site
Is there any evidence of peat,
• previous in-house information
silt or other highly compressible
• ongoing monitoring. material at or below the surface?

(e) structural information Sites where hazards are not Where there is any doubt about the
condition of the ground a detailed
suspected investigation should be carried out
Is there evidence of damage (see 4.1 - D5).
to structures, e.g. cracking in
buildings, on or around the site?
BASIC INVESTIGATION
FURTHER INVESTIGATION
4.1 - D4 A basic investigation of the
If the basic investigation reveals the
site shall be carried out and recorded by
presence of geotechnical and/or
a suitable person to the satisfaction of
contamination hazards further assessment
Is there other evidence of NHBC
movement? is required and a detailed investigation
Where the results of the initial assessment should be carried out (see Clause D5).
indicate that hazards are not suspected on
the site, this should be substantiated by Now refer to Clause D7, Documentation
carrying out a basic investigation. and Validation.
Is there evidence of any
structures or services below
ground? This approach is to provide assurance for Sites where hazards are
all sites, regardless of how free of hazards
they may appear. suspected
(f) local information Only suitable persons with the skills and DETAILED INVESTIGATION
knowledge described in Appendix 4.1-D
4.1
should carry out the basic investigation. 4.1 - D5 Where hazards are suspected
‘A few years back Is there local knowledge of the a detailed investigation of the site shall
there was a tip in
the area.’ site e.g. mining, refuse tipping, The following provides a specification for be carried out, under the supervision
flooding?
the basic investigation for all sites. of a consultant or specialist acceptable
to NHBC, to determine and report on
Trial pits should be located so as to be
the nature and extent of all hazardous
representative of the site. (For more
Are there local industrial history
detailed information refer to BS 5930.) ground conditions
records indicating past and
present uses of the site? A detailed investigation should be carried
The number and depth of trial pits needed
out where:
depends upon:
• hazards are suspected from the outset
• the proposed development
• the initial assessment identified hazards,
Do local place names and street • how inconsistent the soil and geology is
WATER LANE or
names give clues e.g. Brickfield across the site
• the basic investigation identified
Cottage, Water Lane? • the nature of the site.
hazards.
The depth of the trial pits should not
The basic (geotechnical and
usually be less than 3m.
contamination) investigation should form
INITIAL ASSESSMENT the minimum requirement for any site
RESULTS investigation.
(a) geotechnical investigation
4.1 - D3 The results of the desk study (see Appendix 4.1-C) In addition to the basic investigation, the
and walkover survey shall be recorded
detailed investigation should:
and evaluated by a suitable person A basic geotechnical investigation should
• adopt a structured and staged approach
be carried out. This will include trial pits
A suitable person, as described in • gather information based on clearly
and, where they do not provide sufficient
Appendix 4.1-D, should record the results defined stages of investigation
information, boreholes will be necessary.
of the initial assessment and evaluate • consider the immediate site and the
whether hazards are suspected. Physical tests, such as plasticity index adjacent area
tests, should be carried out as appropriate • take into account the possibility of
The record should include the following as
to support the results of the initial future development in the vicinity of the
appropriate:
assessment. site
• site plans with dates, showing:
• consider the nature of the development
- previous uses of the site Trial pits should be located outside the • consider the complexity of the ground
- current uses of the site likely foundation area. The distance from conditions
- the proposed site layout the edge of the foundation should not be • consider the presence of soil gas; if
• details of the geology of the site from: less than the trial pit depth. there is any possibility of gas being
- geological maps
(b) contamination investigation present, then a full gas investigation
- previous site investigations
(see Appendix 4.1-C) should be carried out, which should
- laboratory test results
include flow measurements
• photographs of the site to show A basic contamination investigation • provide a clear understanding of the
particular points of interest or concern, should be carried out as part of the problems, and an understanding of the
(e.g. areas of ground instability), with basic geotechnical investigation. This liabilities, which have to be managed in
dates should consist of sampling and testing order to develop the site
• copies and interpretation of aerial of soil taken from trial pits during the • consider:
photographs, with dates geotechnical investigation, as found to be - the surface water and groundwater
• a list of sources of information necessary from the outcome of the initial conditions
consulted (e.g. Environment Agency, assessment. - the soils and geology, and
Coal Authority, etc.) and copies of the
- the previous site history.
information obtained. During the excavation of the trial pits the
use of sight and smell may help to identify A consultant or specialist acceptable to
certain contaminants. NHBC should be appointed to:

• design and supervise the detailed - biological means All sites
investigation - chemical means
• present all the factual data obtained - thermal means. DOCUMENTATION AND
from the detailed investigation.
(c) site location VALIDATION
Guidance for the appointment of a The identification of any constraints
consultant or specialist is given in associated with the site and surrounding 4.1 - D7 Documentation and validation
Appendix 4.1-D. area which could restrict design shall be provided to the satisfaction of
precautions or remediation techniques NHBC that the site is suitable for the
proposed development
MANAGING THE HAZARDS should be identified and specified.
4.1 - D6 Any hazardous ground (d) timescale (a) geotechnical assessment
conditions shall be satisfactorily Time constraints may influence the WHERE GEOTECHNICAL HAZARDS
managed under the supervision of a solution chosen since some techniques are ARE PRESENT
consultant or specialist acceptable to very time consuming. This should not alter
NHBC should be provided with design
NHBC the requirement for effective remediation.
proposals to overcome the hazards.
As appropriate, the consultant or specialist (e) consultation
acceptable to NHBC should: (b) contamination assessment
In order to avoid abortive works it is
• identify any results which show that WHERE CONTAMINATION HAZARDS
important that the requirements of all
design precautions and/or remediation ARE NOT PRESENT
statutory authorities are met by the
4.1
may be necessary proposed solution for the site. Evidence to substantiate that the site is
• carry out a risk assessment to determine
not suspected to be hazardous may be
appropriate design precautions and/or REMEDIATION asked for.
remedial treatment (f) method statement
• specify the options for remediating any The method statement should detail the WHERE CONTAMINATION HAZARDS
contamination that may be present and proposed remediation strategy for the site. ARE PRESENT
provide a remediation statement
• make recommendations as to The statement should include the following NHBC should be provided with design
appropriate design precautions including details: proposals to overcome the hazards.
any ground improvement techniques as • original risk assessment, identification of
Radon gas
necessary the remediation objectives and outline
Where the site is within an area
• make recommendations on appropriate information of the method chosen
susceptible to radon it will be necessary
precautions for all underground services • remediation objectives for ground,
to follow appropriate guidance in Building
serving the site groundwater and soil gas
Regulations and associated documents.
• ensure the works are appropriately • working method for implementation of
supervised the remediation The following table indicates the
• produce a remediation report. • waste classification and methods for documentation required by NHBC.
controlling and disposing of waste
Items to be taken into account include: • proposed supervision and monitoring of
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS remediation
• all validation sampling and testing to be
(a) design precautions
implemented.
Solutions for dealing with geotechnical
hazards include the following: (g) reports
• specialist foundations: The report should include the following
- piling and ground beams information:
- rafts • photographic records, especially
• ground improvement techniques: for work which will be buried (e.g.
- vibro membranes)
- dynamic compaction • site diaries or drawings, environmental
- surcharging. supervisor’s site diary, and independent
witness statements where appropriate
(b) remediation techniques
• accurate surveys of the levels and
Solutions for dealing with contamination
position of all remediated areas
hazards include the following:
• a description of any remedial materials
• risk avoidance - treatment to reduce the
used
risk to the target by changing pathway
• details of soil movements and waste
or isolating the target by:
transfer notes
- changing layout
• results of post-remediation sampling;
- building protective measures into
laboratory certificates should be
construction
provided in appendices
• engineering based - treatment to
• validation test results
remove or isolate the contaminants or
• monitoring results
modify the pathway by:
• details of all consultations and meetings
- excavation
with statutory authorities.
- providing ground barriers
- covering and capping Now refer to Clause D7, Documentation
• process based - treatment to remove, and Validation.
modify, stabilise or destroy the
contaminants by:
- physical means

Documentation required by NHBC

  No Geotechnical Contamination Geotechnical
geotechnical or hazards hazards and
contamination present (but no present (but no contamination
hazards present contamination geotechnical hazards present
hazards) hazards)
Initial
assessment
and basic
investigation
Detailed  
investigation
results
Proposals    
to manage
geotechnical
hazards
Proposals    
4.1
to manage
contamination
UNFORESEEN HAZARDS
4.1 - D8 Where any additional or unforeseen ground conditions are found during
construction, the builder shall ensure that they are investigated and managed to the
satisfaction of NHBC
As construction proceeds, additional or unforeseen hazards may be found. For example, it is

possible to have undetected hazards which are missed by the site investigation.
Where additional or unforeseen hazards are found additional specialist advice is required so
that the hazard is properly investigated, managed and validated.
APPENDIX 4.1-A
References
BRE: 
Report BR211 - ‘Radon: Guidance on protective measures for new dwellings’
Report BR212 - ‘Construction of new buildings on gas-contaminated land’
Report BR376 - ‘Radon: guidance on protective measures for new dwellings in Scotland’
Report BR413 - ‘Radon: guidance on protective measures for new dwellings in Northern
Ireland’
Report BR414 - ‘Protective measures for housing on gas-contaminated land’
Digest 383 - ‘Site investigation for low-rise buildings: Soil description’
Special Digest 1 - ‘Concrete in aggressive ground’
BSI:
BS 5930 - Code of practice for site investigations
BS 10175 - Investigation of potentially contaminated sites - Code of practice
CIRIA:
Special publications 101 - 112 - Remedial treatment for contaminated land
DEFRA (Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs), its predecessor departments
and the EA (Environment Agency):
CLR Reports and CLEA (Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment) guidance, Software,
Soil Guideline Values and Toxicological Reports
Industry Profiles - information on the processes, materials and wastes associated with
individual industries
Waste Management Paper No 27 - The Control of Landfill Gas
EA/NHBC R&D Publication 66 - Guidance for the safe Development of Housing on Land
Affected by Contamination.

APPENDIX 4.1-B
Examples of potential hazards and associated risks
Potential hazard Associated risk
High water table or low lying land Flooding.
Effects from sulfates or toxic or noxious materials which
could be concentrated or transported by ground water.
Mining, past, present and proposed Ground movement which will depend on the type of
workings and materials extracted.
Existence of methane and carbon dioxide.
Solution features in chalk and limestone Underground cavities.
including swallow holes
Trees Shrinkage and heave of clay soils. See Technical
Requirement R5.
Physical damage caused by roots.
Peat Acid attack.
Changes in volume due to variations in moisture content.
4.1
Production of methane and carbon dioxide.
Low bearing capacity ground Settlement of foundations and sub-structures.
Infill and made ground including tipping Release of gases which may be explosive or asphyxiating.
Low bearing capacity causing settlement.
Former buildings or structures Underground obstructions producing variations in bearing
capacity and settlement characteristics.
Adjacent buildings Effect on stability of both the new and existing buildings.
Existing drains, including land drains Contamination, flooding, waterlogging and interruption of
land drainage systems.
Sulfates in ground or ground water Expansive reaction.
Chemical attack on concrete, mortar and bricks or blocks
made with cement.
Unstable ground subject to landslip Ground movement.
Seas, lakes and rivers adjacent to land Erosion.
Contamination Substances which may be:
• carcinogenic
• toxic
• asphyxiating
• corrosive
• phytotoxic
• combustive
• explosive
• radioactive.

Sampling
APPENDIX 4.1-C The number and type of samples taken
and tests which are carried out for any
Site investigation techniques particular investigation are designed to
(In accordance with the recommendations be appropriate to the range of ground
of BS 5930 Site Investigations) materials encountered and to the
development which is planned. This is
Site investigation normally comprises a based on the results of the desk study, the
combination of the following: walkover survey and the site investigation.
Direct investigation Samples should always be taken, stored
These techniques involve actual and transported carefully to avoid cross
examination of the ground using the contamination.
following methods of investigation:
a) trial pits Samples can be taken of:
Trial pits allow the detailed inspection, a) soils and rocks
logging, sampling and in-situ testing of Samples from trial pits and boreholes are
large volumes of natural soil or fill and the taken to enable soil and rock descriptions
assessment of ground water conditions. to be made and to provide material for
physical and chemical testing.
b) trenches
4.1
Trenches are extended trial pits or linked Samples of soils may be either ‘disturbed’
trial pits which are excavated where (that is, not retaining the original structure
greater exposure of the ground conditions and consistency) or ‘undisturbed’. Having
is required. undergone minimal disturbance, it follows
that ‘undisturbed’ samples provide a
Trial pits and trenches should be more reliable indication of physical soil
positioned where they will not affect future properties than ‘disturbed’ samples.
foundations.
b) groundwater
c) boreholes Samples of groundwater are taken from
• Shell and auger trial pits, trenches and boreholes for
The conventional equipment used in the chemical testing.
UK to drill boreholes in soils and weak
rocks is the light cable percussion rig, c) gas
often referred to as the shell and auger Gas sampling may be carried out in
rig. boreholes, from standpipes which have
• Continuous flight auger been installed in trial pits or boreholes or
Exploratory boreholes may also be from spike-holes which have been driven
drilled in soils by mechanical continuous into the ground.
flight augers of various sizes.
• Rotary drilling Testing
Rotary drilling is used to investigate a) in-situ testing
rock and sometimes stiff soils such A wide variety of in-situ tests can be used
as Boulder Clay. The two basic rotary to support the results of direct testing.
methods are open-hole drilling and These range from basic tests undertaken
rotary coring. by geologists or engineers using simple
hand-held devices to elaborate methods
d) probes that require specialist personnel and
Probing techniques can be used for the equipment.
analysis of the relative density of soils
and also for environmental sampling and b) laboratory testing
monitoring (such as chemical and physical It is important that testing is undertaken
testing of gases, liquids and solids). using quality assured procedures by
laboratories which are UKAS accredited for
Indirect investigation these tests.
Geophysical techniques (for example,
electromagnetic, resistivity, seismic, Physical tests on soil and rock materials
gravity and ground radar) provide indirect are carried out to provide the following
interpretations of ground conditions. These information on ground:
measure from the surface, variations in • strength
properties of the ground both horizontally • relative density
and vertically and hence attempt to define • deformation
subsurface conditions. • settlement
• consolidation characteristics
Geophysical methods rely for their • permeability.
effectiveness on marked contrasts in
the physical properties being measured. Chemical tests on soils, rocks, groundwater
The required contrasts are provided by and gases can be carried out to provide an
boundaries between distinctive strata with indication of potential contamination on
different properties (for example, between the site.
sand and gravel and rockhead). Definable
contrasts may also be provided by faulting,
underground cables and pipelines or by
cavities.

APPENDIX 4.1-D
“Suitable persons” and “consultants or specialists”
SUITABLE PERSONS
The following skills and knowledge are required by the person responsible for the Initial Assessment (Clause D3), Basic Investigation
(Clause D4) and Documentation and Validation (Clause D7):
• be able to carry out a desk study and walkover survey

• understand the hazards that can affect the development and know from where they originate
• know how to collect information relating to such hazards on and adjacent to the site
• be able to recognise the signs of potential hazards
• be able to determine when specialist advice and detailed testing is required, and
• be able to report the findings in a clear and concise manner.
CONSULTANTS OR SPECIALISTS
The following criteria should be used as guidance for the appointment of a consultant or specialist responsible for the Detailed
Investigation (Clause D5), management of hazards (Clause D6) and Documentation and Validation (Clause D7):
4.1
Experience has experience with similar types of site and development
Appropriate discipline(s) a thorough understanding of all the relevant skills required on the project and has access to the skills of other disciplines including
chemists, geologists, hydrogeologists and environmental chemists
Project management ability to manage a project team consisting of the appropriate disciplines
Communication able to communicate effectively within their organisation, with the client, statutory authorities and the general public
Reporting can prepare comprehensive and well presented reports
Legislation understands the legislation and liabilities associated with the area of the United Kingdom in which the development is being
carried out
Quality assurance has an appropriate quality management system and uses appropriately accredited laboratories
Risk management can carry out risk assessments as part of the risk management process
Site investigation can design site investigation programmes which include soil sampling, testing and laboratory analysis
Health and safety is fully aware of all occupational hygiene issues and health and safety legislation
Engineering design understands effective risk reduction techniques e.g. engineered foundations and sub-structure details or suitable remediation
Professional indemnity has, and maintains, appropriate Professional Indemnity Insurance for the work being carried out.
insurance
INDEX
A H S
Assessment 1 Hazards 1, 3, 4, 5 ,6, 7, Site investigation 8
8, 9 techniques
B
I Source 1
Basic investigation 1, 4, 9
Initial assessment 1, 3, 4, 9 Specialist 4, 5, 9
C
O Suitable person 3 ,4, 9
Consultant 5, 9
Objectives 1 Supervision 4, 5
Contamination 5
P T
Contamination hazards 4, 5 ,7
Pathway 1 Target 2
D
Potential hazards 7 U
Design considerations 5
Procedural flow chart 1, 2 Unforeseen hazards 2, 9
Desk study 1, 3, 4, 9
Procedural summary 1 V
Detailed investigation 1, 4, 9
R Validation 2, 9
Documentation 1, 5, 6, 9
Remediation 5 W
F
Results 1, 4, 5, 8, 9 Walkover survey 2, 4, 5, 10,
Further investigation 1, 4
12, 14
G
Geotechnical hazards 5, 6

Part 4 Foundations
Chapter 4.2
Building near trees
CONTENTS SCOPE
Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical

INTRODUCTION 1 Requirements and recommendations when building near
trees, hedgerows and shrubs, particularly in shrinkable soils.
DESIGN
Design standards D1 1 INTRODUCTION
Trees and hedgerows adjacent to D3 1
structures The combination of shrinkable soils and trees, hedgerows
or shrubs represents a hazard to structures that requires
Foundations (all soil types) D4 1 special consideration. Trees, hedgerows and shrubs take
moisture from the ground and, in cohesive soils such as
Foundations (shrinkable soils) D5-D7 1-3 clay, this can cause significant volume changes resulting
Designing to accommodate heave D8 4 in ground movement. This has the potential to affect
4.2
Provision of information D9 5 foundations and damage the supported structure. In order

to minimise this risk, foundations should be designed to
accommodate the movement or be taken to a depth where
MATERIALS
the likelihood of damaging movement is low.
Proprietary heave materials M2 5 This Chapter gives guidance for common foundation types
to deal with the hazard and includes suitable foundation
depths which have been established from field data,
SITEWORK research, NHBC data and practical experience. The depths
Sitework standards S1 5 are not those at which root activity, desiccation and ground
Foundation depths S2 5 movement are non existent but they are intended to provide
an acceptable level of risk. However, if significant quantities
Excavation for foundations S3 6
of roots are unexpectedly encountered in the base of the
Heave precautions S4 6 trench, the excavation may need to be deepened.
Drainage S5 7
The interaction between trees, soil and buildings is
dependent on many factors and is inherently complex. The
APPENDIX 4.2-A relationship becomes less predictable as factors combine to
Water demand and mature height of 8 produce extreme conditions. These are signified by the need
trees for deeper foundations. Depths greater than 2.5m indicate
APPENDIX 4.2-B that conditions exist where prescriptive guidance is less
reliable.
Foundation depth charts 9
APPENDIX 4.2-C The following situations are beyond the scope of the
guidance in this Chapter and will require a site specific
Foundation depth tables 13
assessment by an Engineer (see Technical Requirement R5):
APPENDIX 4.2-D • foundations with depths greater than 2.5m within the
Climate zones 19 influence of trees
APPENDIX 4.2-E • ground with a slope of greater than 1 in 7 (approximately
8°) and man made slopes such as embankments and
Information sources and 20
cuttings
acknowledgements
• underpinning.
APPENDIX 4.2-F
Worked example 21 Consideration has been given to the potential effects of
climate change in the guidance provided.
INDEX 23 The services of a specialist arboriculturalist may be helpful

for the identification of the type and condition of trees that
may affect building work. This includes trees both on and
adjacent to the site.

Building near trees 4.2
species of the tree. An arboriculturist Shrinkable soils are widely distributed
DESIGN STANDARDS may be required to assess these factors throughout the UK. Local geological survey
• ensuring services are not routed close maps may give relevant information.
4.2 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical to trees or, where this is impractical, are
Requirements installed in such a way as to minimise (b) soil classification
Design that follows the guidance below root damage. For the purposes of this Chapter,
will be acceptable for building near trees, shrinkable soils are those containing more
Further guidance is given in BS 5837. than 35% fine particles and having a
hedgerows and shrubs.
(c) allowance for physical growth of modified Plasticity Index of 10% or greater.
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS young trees Fine particles are defined as those having
Direct damage due to the growth of the a nominal diameter less than 60µm, ie.
4.2 - D2 Design shall comply with all main trunk and roots of young trees
relevant statutory requirements clay and silt particles.
should be avoided by locating structures
Design should be in accordance with and services at a safe distance from the The Plasticity Index (Ip) of a soil is a
relevant Building Regulations and other trees. Further guidance is given in BS 5837. measure of its volume change potential
statutory requirements Where this cannot be achieved precautions and is determined by Atterberg Limits
should be taken to allow for future growth. tests. These tests are carried out on the
TREES AND HEDGEROWS For example: fine particles and any medium and fine
sand particles. Soil particles with a nominal
ADJACENT TO STRUCTURES • foundations should be reinforced to
4.2
diameter greater than 425µm are removed
resist lateral forces by sieving beforehand. The percentage of
4.2 - D3 The design shall take account
• walls or structural slabs should bridge particles smaller than 425µm is routinely
of trees and hedgerows and their growth   
over the roots allowing sufficient reported for Atterberg Limits tests. This is
Items to be taken into account include: clearance for future growth or be a requirement of BS 1377, which specifies
(a) removal of existing trees and reinforced to avoid cracking the test procedure.
hedgerows • pavings and other surfaces should be
Dead trees and dead hedgerows should laid on a flexible base to allow for some The Modified Plasticity Index (I’p) is
be removed. Unstable trees should be movement. defined as the Plasticity Index (Ip) of
made stable but where this is not possible the soil multiplied by the percentage of
they should be felled. If in doubt, advice FOUNDATIONS (all soil types) particles less than 425µm.
should be obtained from a Registered
Arboriculturalist. 4.2 - D4 Foundations for all soil types
shall be designed to transmit loads to  
Acts of Parliament, planning conditions, the ground safely and without excessive Modified Plasticity Index is related to
conservation area restrictions or tree movement volume change potential as shown in Table 1.
preservation orders may mean that trees
and hedgerows are protected and must Foundations for all soil types should be Table 1 Volume change potential
be retained. The local planning authority designed and constructed in accordance
with Chapter 4.1 ‘Land quality - managing Modified Plasticity Volume change
should be consulted. Index potential
ground conditions’ and other relevant
(b) protection of remaining trees and Chapters of the Standards (depending on 40% and greater High
hedgerows site specific conditions). 20% to less than 40% Medium
Most of a tree’s root system is within 600mm l0% to less than 20% Low
of the surface and extends radially for Different foundation types should not
distances often in excess of the tree’s height. be used to support the same structure
unless the foundations and superstructure Alternatively the Plasticity Index may be
All parts of the root system are vulnerable used without modification. For pure clays
to damage and once damaged, roots may design are undertaken by an Engineer (see
Technical Requirement R5). and other soils with 100% of particles less
not regenerate. Extensive root damage may than 425µm the result will be the same.
impair the stability of the tree. The remainder of this Chapter gives However, for mixed soils such as glacial
Root damage and tree instability can be additional guidance that applies when tills, use of the modified Plasticity Index
caused by: building near trees, hedgerows and shrubs may result in a more economic design.
• stripping topsoil too close to trees on shrinkable soils as defined in Clause D5(b).
For further information about the modified
• excavating trenches for foundations and Plasticity Index refer to BRE Digest 240.
services too close to trees FOUNDATIONS (shrinkable soils)
• raising soil levels adjacent to trees, The volume change potential should be
4.2 - D5 The design shall make
particularly where non-granular established from site investigation and
allowance for the effect of trees and
materials are used reliable local knowledge of the geology.
hedgerows on shrinkable soils
• compaction of soil around trees by
Items to be taken into account include: Sufficient samples should be taken to
heavy plant
provide confidence that the test results are
• storage of heavy materials around trees (a) shrinkage and heave
representative of the soil volume change
• covering rooting area with impervious Shrinkable soils are subject to changes
potential for the site. If in doubt use the
surfaces. in volume as their moisture content
higher value of volume change potential.
is altered. Soil moisture contents vary
Trees should be protected from damage by:
seasonally and are influenced by a number If the volume change potential is unknown,
• a fence or barrier. The fence or barrier
of factors including the action of tree high volume change potential should be
should extend around a single trunk
roots. The resulting shrinkage or swelling assumed.
equivalent to a circle of radius 12 times
the trunk diameter measured 1.5m above of the soil can cause subsidence or heave
damage to foundations, the structures (c) water demand of trees
ground level. The shape of this area may
they support and services. Heave Water demand varies according to tree
change depending on specific factors
precautions are described in Clause D8. species and size.
such as local drainage, soil type, age and

Appendix 4.2-A gives the water demand Figure 1 Tree height H to be used for D8 and their design takes account of
categories of common tree species. particular design cases Clause D7:
• strip
Where the species of a tree has not been
mature height • trench fill
identified, high water demand should be
• pier and beam
assumed. In this range use
H = mature height • pile and beam
as listed in
Where the species of a tree has been Appendix 4.2-B • raft.
identified but is not listed, the following
Variations to the foundation depths
assumptions may be made for broad leafed 50% mature height
derived from this Chapter may be
trees:
permitted where other foundation depths
• high water demand - all Elms, In this range use are traditionally acceptable or where
Eucalyptus, Hawthorn, Oaks, Poplars and H = actual height
necessary to take account of local ground
Willows
conditions, provided that they can be
• moderate water demand - all others.
supported by a design in accordance with
Where trees are not listed in Appendix Technical Requirement R5.
Figure 1 should be used when:
4.2-A, information may be obtained from • deriving foundation depths when trees have been removed (use Root barriers are not a reliable means
suitable alternative authoritative sources tree height at time of removal - see Design clause 4.2 - D5(a))
• checking the appropriate level from which depths should be of reducing the effects of trees on
(see Appendix 4.2-E). measured when trees remain and ground levels are increased (use
tree height at time of construction relative to original ground foundations in shrinkable soils and are not
4.2
Tree identification can be assisted by level - see Figure 5) an acceptable alternative to the guidance
• determining whether heave precautions should be provided
reference to a tree recognition book (see (use tree height at time of construction - see Design clause 4.2 - given in this Chapter.
D8(b) and (c)).
Appendix 4.2-E).
Freestanding masonry walls should be
For the purposes of this Chapter, the zone Where trees have undergone or are constructed on foundations in accordance
(i.e. lateral extent) of influence of trees is to undergo heavy crown reduction or with this Chapter or be designed to
shown in Table 2. pollarding, the mature height should be accommodate likely ground movement, for
used or a Registered Arboricuturalist example, by careful use of movement joints
Table 2 Zone of tree influence and reinforcement.
should be consulted to undertake a site
Water demand Zone of influence specific assessment. (b) method of assessment of foundation
High 1.25 x mature height depths
(e) climate
Moderate 0.75 x mature height One of the following methods may be used:
High rainfall reduces moisture deficits
• design in accordance with this Chapter
Low 0.5 x mature height caused by trees and hedgerows, and cool
to a depth derived from Appendix 4.2-B
damp weather reduces the rate of water
or 4.2-C taking account of:
(d) tree heights loss from the tree, thus reducing the risk
- the site investigation
Mature heights of common tree species of soil movement. As the driest and hottest
- the soil volume change potential
are listed in Appendix 4.2-A. For the conditions in the UK usually prevail in
- the water demand of the tree
purposes of this Chapter, these are the southeast England, the greater risk occurs
- the appropriate tree height
average mature heights to which healthy in that area and diminishes with distance
- the distance of the tree(s) from the
trees of the species may be expected north and west.
foundations
to grow in favourable ground and - the geographical location of the site
For the purposes of this Chapter, the
environmental conditions. These may be north and west of London
UK has been divided into zones at 50
used even when the actual heights are - appropriate heave precautions.
mile intervals from London. After the
greater.
foundation depth has been derived from
Note: the most onerous conditions should
The mature heights given in Appendix Appendix 4.2-B or 4.2-C a reduction of
be assumed in the absence of any of the
4.2-A should be used for trees that are to 0.05m (50mm) may be made for every 50
above information.
remain or are scheduled to be planted and miles distance north and west of London
• design by an Engineer in accordance
where ground levels are unaltered. Where (see Appendix 4.2-D).
with Technical Requirement R5, taking
ground levels are increased see also Figure account of:
1 and Sitework clause S3(c). 4.2 - D6 Foundations shall be capable of
accommodating the effects of trees and - the recommendations of this Chapter
Where there are different species within hedgerows on shrinkable soils without - results of the site investigation
hedgerows, the mature height of the excessive movement - advice, when necessary, from a
species likely to have the greatest effect Registered Arboriculturalist or
Items to be taken into account include: other competent person whose
should be used.
(a) foundations qualifications are acceptable to NHBC.
For trees which have been or are to be Foundations to all permanent structures
removed, allowance should be made for (including garages, porches and Note: when this method is used and it
the fact that the water demand of a tree conservatories) should take account of results in foundation depths or other
varies with its size and rate of growth (see the effects of soil desiccation caused by details less onerous than those derived
Figure 1). The water demand of a semi- previous or existing trees and trees which from this Chapter, the design should be
mature tree may be as great as that for a are scheduled to be planted. submitted to NHBC for approval prior to
mature tree of the same species whereas work commencing on site.
The following foundations will be
the water demand for a sapling or young (c) distance between tree and foundation
acceptable in shrinkable soils, provided
tree will be significantly less. The distance D between the centre of the
that they are capable of supporting the
applied loads without undue settlement, trunk and the nearest face of the foundation
heave precautions are taken as in Clause should be used to derive the foundation
depths from Appendix 4.2-B or 4.2-C.

For trees which have been or are to be The foundation design should consider Figure 2 Foundations in non shrinkable
removed from within 2m of the face of the shrub planting as follows: soils overlying shrinkable soil
proposed foundation and where the height • Shrubs whose mature height does not
on removal is less than 50% of the mature exceed 1.8m and climbing varieties (i.e.
acceptable depth
height given in Appendix 4.2-A, it may be those requiring a wall for support) whose foundation greater
non shrinkable soil

depth than
assumed that D = 2m. mature height does not exceed 5m: 3/4 X
- use foundation depth from Table 5 B
Note: This is to avoid the anomalous
• Pyracantha and Cotoneaster whose T equal to or depth X
situation where, for example, a “sapling” greater than B determined
mature height exceeds 1.8m: assuming
removed from the foundation line would soil is
- use foundation depth from Table 5 shrinkable
otherwise require an unnecessarily deep
and plant at least 1.0 x mature height
shrinkable
foundation since the D/H value would
from foundation, or
soil
always be zero regardless of the height H
- use foundation depth from Table 3
of the tree.
and plant at least 0.5 x mature height
(d) foundation depths related to from foundation (g) stepped foundations
proposed tree planting • All others: Where foundations are to be stepped to
Foundation depths relating to proposed - use foundation depth from Table take account of the influence of trees,
tree planting should be based on one of 5 and plant at least 0.75 x mature hedgerows and shrubs they should
the following: height from foundation, or be stepped gradually in accordance
4.2
• foundation depths derived in accordance - use foundation depth from Table 3 - no with Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip and trench fill
with Appendix 4.2-B or 4.2-C, or restriction on minimum distance from foundations’ with no step exceeding 0.5m
• foundation depths shown in Table 3 with foundation. (see Sitework clause S3(b)).
limits agreed in the planting schedules
Planting schedules should be produced by (h) foundations on or near sloping ground
to exclude trees within the distances
a qualified landscape architect or other Where the foundations are on or adjacent
from foundations shown in Table 4, or
suitably qualified person and agreed with to sloping ground greater than 1 in 7
• foundation depths shown in Table 5 with
the local planning authority before work (approximately 8°) and man-made slopes
limits agreed in the planting schedules
commences on site. such as embankments and cuttings they
to exclude trees within the zone of
should be designed by an Engineer (see
influence shown in Table 2. The landscape and foundation designs
Technical Requirement R5).
should be compatible.
Table 3 Minimum foundations depths
allowing for restricted new planting Table 6 - removed April 2005
• slope stability
Volume change Minimum depth [m] (f) strip or trench fill foundations in non • potentially enhanced desiccation due to
potential shrinkable soils overlying shrinkable soil increased run-off and the de-watering
High 1.5 Non shrinkable soils such as sands and effects of the slope and vegetation.
Medium 1.25 gravels may overlie shrinkable soil.
4.2 - D7 Foundations in shrinkable soils
Low 1.0 Foundations may be constructed on the shall be designed to transmit loads to
overlying non shrinkable soil in accordance the ground safely and without excessive
Table 4 No tree planting zone for with Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip and trench fill movement
minimum depth foundations foundations’ provided all of the following
conditions are satisfied, as illustrated in Items to be taken into account include:
Water demand No tree planting zone Figure 2: (a) strip foundations
High 1.0 x mature height • consistent soil conditions exist across Strip foundations up to 1.5m deep should
each plot. This should be confirmed by be constructed in accordance with
Moderate 0.5 x mature height
the site investigation the recommendations of this Chapter
Low 0.2 x mature height and Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip and trench fill
• the depth of the non shrinkable soil is
greater than 3/4 depth X, where X is foundations’. Depths should be determined
Table 5 Minimum foundations depths the foundation depth determined using in accordance with Clause D6.
outside zone of influence Appendix 4.2-B or 4.2-C, assuming that (b) trench fill foundations
Volume change Minimum depth [m] all the soil is shrinkable Trench fill foundations up to 2.5m deep
potential • the thickness T of non shrinkable soil should be constructed in accordance with
High 1.0 below the foundation is equal to or the recommendations of this Chapter
Medium 0.9 greater than the width of the foundation B and Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip and trench fill
• the proposals are submitted to and foundations’. Depths should be determined
Low 0.75
approved by NHBC prior to work in accordance with Clause D6.
commencing on site.
Planting schedules should be agreed with Reference should be made to Clause D8
the local planning authority before work Where any of the above conditions is to establish the precautions necessary to
commences on site. not met, foundation depths should be cater for potential heave.
determined as for shrinkable soil.
The landscape and foundation designs Trench fill foundations deeper than 2.5m
should be compatible. will only be acceptable if they are designed
(e) foundation depths related to new by an Engineer (see Technical Requirement
shrub planting R5) taking account of all potential
Shrubs have considerable potential to movement of the soil on the foundations
cause changes in soil moisture content. and substructure.

The following will need to be taken into The infill should not be less than 50% Heave precautions should be used:
account if foundations are to be deeper of the foundation depth derived in • where the foundation is within the zone
than 2.5m: accordance with Clause D6 and should of influence of trees (see Table 2), and
• foundation depths should be designed not exceed 1.25m. Site inspections by • where the foundation depth determined
taking account of soil desiccation and the Engineer may be required by NHBC in accordance with Clause D6 is greater
arboricultural advice to verify the compaction of the fill than 1.5m based on the appropriate tree
• additional heave precautions may be • the infill extends beyond the edge of the height (see Figure 1).
necessary to cater for lateral and shear foundation by a distance equal to the
Heave precautions for trench fill
forces acting on large vertical areas of natural angle of repose of the infill plus
foundations up to 2.5m should be in
foundation 0.5m
accordance with Sitework clause S4(a).
• instability of the trench sides can lead to • the raft is generally rectangular in plan
serious construction difficulties with a side ratio of not more than 2:1 (c) heave precautions for pier and beam
• the foundation is dependent upon a high • NHBC is satisfied that the raft is foundations
level of workmanship and detailing: sufficiently stiff to resist differential Pier and beam foundations should be
- concrete overspill or overbreak in the movements. designed in accordance with Clause D7.
excavations can result in additional
vertical forces being transmitted to Figure 3 Requirements for raft Heave precautions for piers should be
the foundation foundations on shrinkable soils used:
- construction joints will need to raft foundation
ground level • where the foundation is within the zone
4.2
be detailed to take account of the 1.25m max.

of influence of trees (see Table 2), and
angle of
increased lateral forces repose of depth (measured
in accordance with
• where the foundation depth derived in
infill material
- compressible material should be
Sitework clause S3) accordance with Clause D6 is greater
correctly placed to avoid excessive 0.5 m
level formation
0.5 m than 1.5m based on the appropriate tree
fully compacted
heave forces being applied to the infill material height (see Figure 1).
foundation.
DESIGNING TO Heave precautions for pier and beam
(c) pier and beam foundations foundations should be in accordance with
Pier and beam foundations should be
ACCOMMODATE HEAVE Sitework clause S4(b).
designed by an Engineer (see Technical 4.2 - D8 Foundations, substructure (d) heave precautions for pile and beam
Requirement R5) and constructed in and services shall incorporate adequate foundations
accordance with the recommendations of precautions to prevent excessive Pile and beam foundations should be
this Chapter and Chapter 4.5 ‘Raft, pile, movement due to heave designed in accordance with Clause D7.
pier and beam foundations’.
Heave can take place in a shrinkable soil
Heave precautions should be used for
Note: pier depths up to 2.5m may be when it takes up moisture and swells
piles and ground beams in accordance
derived from Clause D6. Pier depths after the felling or removal of trees and
with Sitework clause S4(c). In addition the
greater than 2.5m require site specific hedgerows. It can also occur beneath a
following should be taken into account in
assessment. building if roots are severed or if water
the selection and design of piles:
enters the ground from leaking drains,
Reference should be made to Clause D8 • piles should be designed with an
water services or changes in ground water
to establish the precautions necessary to adequate factor of safety to resist uplift
conditions.
cater for potential heave. forces on the shaft due to heave by
Items to be taken into account include: providing sufficient anchorage below
(d) pile and beam foundations (a) vegetation survey the depth of desiccated soil. Slip liners
Pile and beam foundations should be Before the site is cleared, the location, may be used to reduce the uplift but the
designed by an Engineer (see Technical heights and species of trees, hedgerows amount of reduction is small, as friction
Requirement R5) and constructed in and shrubs on and adjacent to the site and between materials cannot be eliminated
accordance with the recommendations of which may affect proposed foundations • piles should be reinforced for the length
this Chapter and Chapter 4.5 ‘Raft, pile, should be surveyed and recorded. of the pile governed by the heave design
pier and beam foundations’. • bored, cast-in-place piles are well
If the location of previously removed suited to this application. Most types
Reference should be made to Clause D8 vegetation is not known, local enquiries have a straight-sided shaft but some
to establish the precautions necessary to and reference to aerial photographs construction techniques produce a
cater for potential heave. may be necessary. Otherwise the design contoured shaft, similar to a screw
(e) raft foundations should assume the worst conditions or profile, to increase load capacity. The
Raft foundations should be designed by an an Engineer (see Technical Requirement design should allow for the enhanced
Engineer (see Technical Requirement R5) R5) should be consulted to undertake a tensile forces in such piles
and constructed in accordance with the site specific design based on all relevant • driven piles are less well suited to this
recommendations of this Chapter, Chapter information. application and are difficult to install in
4.5 ‘Raft, pile, pier and beam foundations’ Where root growth is noted within stiff desiccated clay without excessive
and the following conditions. shrinkable soil and where records are noise and vibration. Most types are
not available, an Engineer (see Technical jointed and, if these are to be used,
Raft foundations will only be acceptable
Requirement R5) should be consulted to the joint design should be capable of
where all of the following apply, as
assess whether heave is likely. transmitting tensile heave forces
illustrated in Figure 3:
• piles and ground beams should be
• the foundation depth derived in (b) heave precautions for trench fill designed taking into account the
accordance with Clause D6 is 2.5m or foundations upward force on the underside of the
less Trench fill foundations should be designed ground beams transmitted through the
• the raft is founded on granular infill in accordance with Clause D7. Any compressible material or void former prior
placed and fully compacted in layers foundations deeper than 2.5m should be to collapse (refer to manufacturer’s data).
in accordance with the Engineer’s designed by an Engineer (see Technical
specification and to NHBC’s satisfaction. Requirement R5).

(e) suspended ground floors used, for example taking the excavation
Suspended ground floors should be used in deeper and laying the pipework on MATERIALS STANDARDS
all situations where heave can occur within granular bedding of suitable thickness to
the area bounded by the foundations. This reduce the extent of potential movement
(a) meet the Technical Requirements
includes: • a drainage system capable of
• where the foundation depth derived in accommodating the likely movement
accordance with Clause D6 is greater should be used Materials that comply with the design and
than 1.5m based on the appropriate tree • pipes and services passing through the guidance below will be acceptable for
height (see Figure 1), unless NHBC is substructure walls or trench fill building near trees.
satisfied the soil is not desicated foundations should be designed and
Materials used when building near trees
• where ground floor construction is detailed so as to cope with the potential
should comply with all relevant standards,
undertaken when surface soils are ground movements shown in Table 7.
including those listed below. Where no
seasonally desiccated (i.e. during
Table 7 Potential ground movement standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
summer and autumn) unless NHBC is
applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
satisfied the soil is not desiccated. Volume change Potential ground
potential movement [mm] Standards and Technical Requirements’).
The following types of suspended floor will
High 150 References to British Standards and Codes
be acceptable where there is potential for
Medium 100 of Practice include those made under the
heave.
4.2
Low 50
PRECAST CONCRETE EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
A minimum void depth should be provided European Technical Specifications
Existing land drains should be maintained
between underside of beam and ground approved by a European Committee for
or diverted. Where the void beneath
level as shown in Table 10 (see Sitework suspended floors is liable to flooding, Standardisation (CEN).
clause S4(d)). drainage should be provided.
PROPRIETARY HEAVE
TIMBER (i) paths and driveways
A minimum void depth should be provided Drives and pathways should be designed MATERIALS
between underside of joist and ground and detailed to cater for the likely ground 4.2 - M2 Proprietary heave materials
level as shown in Table 10 (see Sitework movement. shall be assessed in accordance with
clause S4(d)). All sleeper walls should Technical Requirement R3
Further guidance is given in BS 5837.
have foundations with depths derived in
accordance with Clause D6. Where foundations and substructure
PROVISION OF INFORMATION could be subjected to heave, they should
IN-SITU CONCRETE be protected by voids, void formers or
4.2 - D9 Designs and specifications
A minimum void depth should be provided compressible materials in accordance with
shall be produced in a clearly
between the ground and the underside the design.
understandable format and all relevant
of slab as shown in Table 9 (see Sitework
information shall be distributed to Void formers consist of material that
clause S4(d)). Where proprietary materials
appropriate personnel collapses to form a void into which the clay
are used, they should be in accordance
It is important that all relevant information can swell reducing the build up of load on
with Materials clause M2 and the design
needed for the completion of the sitework the foundation.
should take into account the upward force
transmitted through the compressible is readily available to all appropriate Compressible material, such as low density
material or void former prior to collapse personnel. polystyrene, compacts as the clay expands
(refer to manufacturer’s data). reducing the build up of load on the
All necessary dimensions and levels should
be indicated and related to: foundation.
(f) heave precautions for raft foundations
Raft foundations constructed in • at least one benchmark, and Each material should be used in
accordance with Clause D7 should provide • reference points on site. accordance with the requirements of the
adequate protection from heave. relevant independent assessment and the
Details should be provided with respect to:
(g) other foundations • site investigation manufacturer’s recommendations.
All foundations not covered in the above • site survey including location and height
clauses, but specifically designed for heave, of trees and hedgerows affecting the site
should be designed by an Engineer (see • site layout SITEWORK STANDARDS
Technical Requirement R5) taking account • dimensions, type and depth of
of the recommendations of this Chapter foundations 4.2 - S1 All sitework shall:
and submitted to NHBC for approval prior • soil volume change potential (a) meet the Technical Requirements
to work commencing on site. • tree species (including existing, removed (b) take account of the design
and proposed) using English names (c) follow established good practice and
(h) heave precautions for new drains
• planting schedules workmanship
Drainage should be constructed in
• original and final ground levels
accordance with Chapter 5.3 ‘Drainage Sitework that complies with the design
• technical method statements including
below ground’ with the following additional and guidance below will be acceptable for
critical sequences of construction
precautions to guard against the effects building near trees.
• location of services
of heave:
• design of drainage system
• design gradients may need to be greater
• locations and detailing of: FOUNDATION DEPTHS
than the minimum gradients in Chapter
- steps in foundations 4.2 - S2 Foundation depths shall be in
5.3 as these do not allow for possible
- movement and construction joints accordance with the design
ground movement. Where sufficient
- ducts and services passing through
falls to cater for the likely movement A site plan should show the trees and
the foundations.
cannot be provided, alternative means hedgerows that affect the site together
of catering for the movement should be

with the type, depth and dimensions of the Figure 5 Levels from which foundation Table 8 Minimum foundation depths
foundations that are within the influence depths are measured where trees or
of those trees and hedgerows. Where hedgerows are to remain Volume change potential Minimum depth
trees or hedgerows are either not shown [m]
tree to remain
or are in different positions and there High 1.0
is shrinkable soil, it may be necessary Medium 0.9
to adjust the foundation depths on site.
tree to remain
Low 0.75
Foundation depths should be determined
in accordance with Design clause D6 or the
(b) stepped foundations
electronic foundation depth calculator. If in b For stepped foundations, the relevant
doubt about any of the information either b
a recommendations of Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip
assume the worst conditions or consult a
and trench fill foundations’ should be
suitably qualified Engineer. original ground level
followed with the additional precaution
Use the lower of:
An Engineer should be consulted where a: foundation depth based on appropriate that the maximum step height should not
tree height (see Figure 8)
foundation depths exceed 2.5m (see b: foundation depth based on mature exceed 0.5m as shown in Figure 9.
height of tree
Technical Requirements R5).
On sloping ground, foundation trenches
Figure 4 Electronic foundation depth Figure 6 Levels from which foundation can be gradually stepped so that the
calculator depths are measured where trees or required foundation depth is reasonably
4.2
hedgerows are removed uniform below ground level.

tree to be removed Figure 9 Stepped foundations
ground level
foundation depth
tree to be removed
line of trench bottom
b a step not greater

than 0.5m
a
(c) trench bottoms
original ground level
Where trench bottoms become excessively
Use the lower of:
a: foundation depth based on appropriate
dried or softened due to rain or ground
tree height (see Figure 8)
b: minimum foundation depth (see Table 8)
water, the excavation should be re-
bottomed prior to concreting.
Figure 7 Levels from which foundation Some root activity may be expected below
depths are measured where trees or the depths determined in accordance with
hedgerows are proposed Design clause D6. However, if significant
proposed tree
proposed tree
quantities of roots are unexpectedly
encountered in the base of the trench, the
excavation should be deepened or consult
an Engineer.
b a b
HEAVE PRECAUTIONS
4.2 - S4 Heave precautions shall be
original ground level
incorporated into foundations and
Use the lower of:
a: minimum foundation depth (see Table 8)
substructure in accordance with the
b: foundation depth based on mature
height of tree
design
Figure 8 Tree height H to be used for The following details show the minimum
EXCAVATION FOR particular design cases requirements for common foundation
types. They apply to all foundations within
FOUNDATIONS mature height
the zone of influence of trees which are to
In this range use
4.2 - S3 Excavation for foundations H = mature height remain or be removed.
as listed in
shall take account of the design and be Appendix 4.2-B
Correct placement of heave materials is
suitable to receive concrete
50% mature height
essential to ensure the foundations and
Items to be taken into account include: substructure are adequately protected
(a) measurement of foundation depths from heave forces.
Foundation depths should be measured on In this range use
H = actual height
the centre line of the excavation. (a) heave precautions for trench fill
foundations
Where ground levels are to remain Heave precautions should be provided as
unaltered foundation depths should be shown in Figure 10.
measured from original ground level. Figure 8 should be used when:
• deriving foundation depths when trees have been removed (use Compressible material should be provided
Where ground levels are reduced or tree height at time of removal - see Design clause 4.2 - D5(a))
against the inside faces of all external wall
• checking the appropriate level from which depths should be
increased (either in the recent past or measured when trees remain and ground levels are increased (use foundations greater than 1.5m deep based
tree height at time of construction relative to original ground
during construction) foundation depths level - see Figure 5) on the appropriate tree height (see Figure 8).
should be measured as shown in Figures • determining whether heave precautions should be provided
5 to 7.
(use tree height at time of construction - see Sitework clause 4.2 - No compressible material is required
S4(a) and (b)).
against the faces of internal foundations.

Heave precautions are not required for faces of external ground beams unless Table 10 Minimum void dimensions under
proposed trees as the soil has not been NHBC is satisfied that the soil, at this level, precast concrete and timber ground floors
desiccated and therefore heave cannot is not desiccated.
Precast Suspended
take place.
Heave precautions are not required for concrete timber
Figure 10 Heave precautions for trench proposed trees as the soil has not been Soil Void dimension Void dimension
fill foundations up to 2.5m deep desiccated and heave cannot take place. heave [mm]1 [mm]2
potential
Figure 12 Heave precautions for pile and
High 225 300
Void
(see Table 9 or 10)
beam foundations
450mm backfill
max Medium 175 250
Void (see Table 9 or 10)
compressible material vertical Low 125 200
(see Table 9) face to backfill
foundation
500mm compressible material embedment of pile tension Note:

or void former to reinforcement to be 40 bar
inside face of external diameters or designed by 1 Measurement from underside of beam to
It is essential that: ground beams an Engineer (see Technical
(see Table 9) Requirement R5) ground level (includes 75mm ventilation
• compressible material is provided to the entire area shown, and
allowance).
compressible material optional rigid
• the foundation excavation has a vertical face. Where the
excavation is battered or if there is over break or concrete
or void former slip liner 2 Measurement from underside of joist
beneath ground
overspill it may be necessary to consult an Engineer. beams (see Table 9) to ground level (includes 150mm
4.2
ventilation allowance).
Trench fill foundations deeper than 2.5m pile length to
Engineer's design
will only be acceptable where they are
designed by an Engineer (see Technical
It is essential that heave material is provided to the entire areas
shown. Particular care should be taken to ensure that the full
DRAINAGE
width of the ground beam and the areas around the piles
Requirement R5). are protected. 4.2 - S5 Drainage shall be in
(b) heave precautions for pier and beam (d) minimum void dimensions accordance with the design and allow for
foundations ground movement
Voids should be provided to accommodate
Heave precautions should be provided as movement in accordance with Tables 9 Drainage construction should be in
shown in Figure 11. and 10. accordance with the design and the
Compressible material should be provided relevant recommendations of Chapter
Table 9 Minimum void dimension 5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’ should be
against all faces of the pier foundation
which are greater than 1.5m deep based on for foundations, ground beams and followed.
the appropriate tree height (see Figure 8). suspended in-situ concrete ground floors
Additional items to take into account
A void, void former or compressible Against side Under include:
of foundation ground beam • falls should be sufficient to cater
material should be provided below all and ground and suspended
ground beams. for possible ground movement or
beam in-situ concrete
alternative means should be used
ground floor
Compressible material or a void former to reduce the extent of potential
should also be provided against the inside Volume Void dimension Void dimension movement, for example by taking
faces of external ground beams unless change [mm]1 [mm]1 the excavation deeper and laying
potential
NHBC is satisfied that the soil, at this level, the pipework on granular bedding of
is not desiccated. High 35 150 suitable thickness
Medium 25 100 • a drainage system capable of
Heave precautions are not required for
accommodating the likely movement
proposed trees as the soil has not been Low 0 50 should be used
desiccated and heave cannot take place.
• pipes passing through substructure walls
Note: or trench fill foundations should have
Figure 11 Heave precautions for pier and
1 For compressible material the sufficient clearance to take account
beam foundations
void dimension is the amount the of the potential ground movement
void (see Table 9 or 10) material should be able to compress indicated in Table 11.
to accommodate heave. The actual
backfill thickness of compressible material Table 11 Minimum allowance for potential
compressible material
or void former to embedment of
anchorage bars to
required should be established from the ground movement
inside face of external
ground beams be 40 bar diameters
or designed by an
manufacturer’s recommendations and
(see Table 9) Volume change Potential ground
Engineer (see Technical is generally in the order of twice the
Requirement R5) potential movement [m]
or void former beneath
void dimension shown. For void formers
ground beams to sides of piers the void dimension is the remaining High 150
(see Table 9) 500mm (see Table 9)
void after collapse. The actual thickness Medium 100
It is essential that heave material is provided to the entire of void former required should be Low 50
areas shown. Particular care should be taken to ensure that the
full width of the ground beam is protected. established from the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Existing land drains should be maintained
(c) heave precautions for pile and beam
or diverted. Where the void beneath
foundations
suspended floors is liable to flooding,
Heave precautions should be provided as
drainage should be provided.
shown in Figure 12.
A void, void former or compressible
material should be provided below all
ground beams.
Compressible material or a void former
should also be provided against the inside

Appendix 4.2-A
Water demand and mature height of trees
Table 12
Broad leafed trees Coniferous trees
Water demand Species Mature Water demand Species Mature
height [m] height [m]
High Elm High Cypress
English 24 Lawson’s 18
Wheatley 22 Leyland 20
Wych 18 Monterey 20
Eucalyptus 18 Moderate Cedar 20
Hawthorn 10 Douglas fir 20
Oak Larch 20
English 20 Monkey Puzzle 18
Holm 16 Pine 20
Red 24 Spruce 18
4.2
Turkey 24 Wellingtonia 30
Poplar Yew 12
Hybrid black 28
Lombardy 25 Note:
White 15 1 Where hedgerows contain trees, their effect should be
Willow assessed separately. In hedgerows, the height of the species
Crack 24 likely to have the greatest effect should be used.
Weeping 16 2 Within the classes of water demand, species are listed
White 24 alphabetically; the order does not signify any gradation in
Moderate Acacia false 18 water demand.
Alder 18 3 When the species is known but the sub-species is not, the
Apple 10 greatest height listed for the species should be assumed.
Ash 23 4 Further information regarding trees may be obtained from the
Bay Laurel 10 Arboricultural Association or the Arboricultural Advisory and
Beech 20 Information service (see Appendix 4.2-E).
Blackthorn 8
Cherry
Japanese 9
Laurel 8
Orchard 12
Wild 17
Chestnut
Horse 20
Sweet 24
Lime 22
Maple
Japanese 8
Norway 18
Mountain Ash 11
Pear 12
Plane 26
Plum 10
Sycamore 22
Tree of Heaven 20
Walnut 18
Whitebeam 12
Low Birch 14
Elder 10
Fig 8
Hazel 8
Holly 12
Honey Locust 14
Hornbeam 17
Laburnum 12
Magnolia 9
Mulberry 9
Tulip tree 20

Appendix 4.2-B
Foundation Depth Charts
Table 13 Determination of D/H Value
Distance Tree height H (m)
D (m)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 0.50 0.25 0.17 0.13 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.03
2 1.00 0.50 0.33 0.25 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.09 0.08 0.08 0.07 0.07
3   0.75 0.50 0.38 0.30 0.25 0.21 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.13 0.12 0.11 0.10
4   1.00 0.67 0.50 0.40 0.33 0.29 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.18 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.13
5     0.83 0.63 0.50 0.42 0.36 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.18 0.17
6     1.00 0.75 0.60 0.50 0.43 0.38 0.33 0.30 0.27 0.25 0.23 0.21 0.20
7     1.17 0.88 0.70 0.58 0.50 0.44 0.39 0.35 0.32 0.29 0.27 0.25 0.23
8       1.00 0.80 0.67 0.57 0.50 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.33 0.31 0.29 0.27
4.2
9       1.13 0.90 0.75 0.64 0.56 0.50 0.45 0.41 0.38 0.35 0.32 0.30
10         1.00 0.83 0.71 0.63 0.56 0.50 0.45 0.42 0.38 0.36 0.33
11         1.10 0.92 0.79 0.69 0.61 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.39 0.37
12         1.20 1.00 0.86 0.75 0.67 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.43 0.40
13           1.08 0.93 0.81 0.72 0.65 0.59 0.54 0.50 0.46 0.43
14           1.17 1.00 0.88 0.78 0.70 0.64 0.58 0.54 0.50 0.47
15             1.07 0.94 0.83 0.75 0.68 0.63 0.58 0.54 0.50
16             1.14 1.00 0.89 0.80 0.73 0.67 0.62 0.57 0.53
17             1.21 1.06 0.94 0.85 0.77 0.71 0.65 0.61 0.57
18               1.13 1.00 0.90 0.82 0.75 0.69 0.64 0.60
19               1.19 1.06 0.95 0.86 0.79 0.73 0.68 0.63
20                 1.11 1.00 0.91 0.83 0.77 0.71 0.67
21                 1.17 1.05 0.95 0.88 0.81 0.75 0.70
22                   1.10 1.00 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.73
23                   1.15 1.05 1.96 0.88 0.82 0.77
24                   1.20 1.09 1.00 0.92 0.86 0.80
25                     1.14 1.04 0.96 0.89 0.83
26                     1.18 1.08 1.00 0.93 0.87
27                       1.13 1.04 0.96 0.90
28                       1.17 1.08 1.00 0.93
29   Where no value is given in the table, minimum foundation depths       1.21 1.12 1.04 0.97
apply (i.e. 1.0m, 0.9m and 0.75m for high, medium and low volume
30   change potential soils respectively).         1.15 1.07 1.00
31           1.19 1.11 1.03

32             1.14 1.07
33             1.18 1.10
34                           1.21 1.13
35                             1.17
36                             1.20

Chart 1 Soils with HIGH volume change potential: Modified Plasticity Index 40% or greater
(see Design clause D5(b))
D/H
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0
0.5
4.2
Minimum depth 1.0m

Foundation depths (m)
1.0
1.5
w
Lo
h
e ig
rat H
o de
M
e
rat
2.0
de
Mo
h
Hig
2.5
TREE WATER DEMANDS
High High
Moderate Moderate
Low

Chart 2 Soils with MEDIUM volume change potential: Modified Plasticity Index between 20% and less than 40%
D/H
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0
0.5
4.2
Minimum depth 0.9m
1.0
w
Lo
e
1.5 at
er
od
M
e
at
er
od
gh
M
Hi
h
Hig
2.0
2.5
TREE WATER DEMANDS
High High
Moderate Moderate
Low

Chart 3 Soils with LOW volume change potential: Modified Plasticity Index 10 to less than 20%
D/H
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0
0.5
Minimum depth 0.75m

4.2
1.0
Low
te
dera
Mo
e
at
er
od
M
1.5
gh
Hi
gh
Hi
2.0
2.5
TREE WATER DEMANDS
High High
Moderate Moderate
Low

Appendix 4.2-C
Foundation depth tables
Table 14 - HIGH shrinkage soil and HIGH water demand tree
Foundation depth (m) Foundation depth (m)
Distance Tree height H (m) Distance Tree height H (m)

D (m) D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1                         1                        
2                         2 2.50     Foundations greater than 2.5m  

3           3 1.95 2.25 2.50       deep to be Engineer designed  
Foundations greater than 2.5m deep to be
4 2.50     Engineer designed     4 1.45 1.85 2.15 2.35 2.50              
5 2.25 2.50                     5 1.00 1.45 1.80 2.05 2.20 2.35 2.50          
6 2.00 2.30 2.50                   6   1.00 1.45 1.75 1.95 2.15 2.25 2.40 2.50      
7 1.75 2.10 2.35 2.50                 7   1.00 1.10 1.45 1.70 1.90 2.05 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50  
4.2
8 1.50 1.90 2.20 2.40 2.50               8     1.00 1.15 1.45 1.65 1.85 2.00 2.15 2.25 2.35 2.40
9 1.25 1.70 2.00 2.25 2.40 2.50             9       1.00 1.20 1.45 1.65 1.80 1.95 2.10 2.20 2.25
10 1.00 1.50 1.85 2.10 2.25 2.40 2.50           10         1.00 1.20 1.45 1.65 1.80 1.90 2.05 2.15
11 1.00 1.30 1.70 1.95 2.15 2.30 2.40 2.50         11           1.00 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.00
12 1.00 1.10 1.50 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.30 2.45 2.50       12             1.00 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.75 1.85
13   1.00 1.35 1.65 1.90 2.10 2.20 2.35 2.45 2.50     13             1.00 1.05 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.70
14   1.00 1.20 1.50 1.75 1.95 2.10 2.25 2.35 2.45 2.50   14               1.00 1.10 1.30 1.45 1.60
15     1.00 1.40 1.65 1.85 2.00 2.15 2.25 2.35 2.45 2.50 15                 1.00 1.10 1.30 1.45
16     1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 1.90 2.05 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.45 16                   1.00 1.15 1.30
17     1.00 1.10 1.40 1.65 1.80 1.95 2.10 2.20 2.30 2.40 17                     1.00 1.15
18       1.00 1.25 1.50 1.70 1.90 2.00 2.15 2.25 2.30 18                       1.00
19       1.00 1.15 1.40 1.60 1.80 1.95 2.05 2.15 2.25 19     1.0m minimum foundation depth          
20         1.00 1.30 1.50 1.70 1.85 2.00 2.10 2.20 20                        
21         1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.00 2.10 21                        
22         1.00 1.10 1.30 1.50 1.70 1.85 1.95 2.05 22                        
23           1.00 1.20 1.45 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.00 23                        
24           1.00 1.10 1.35 1.50 1.65 1.80 1.90 24                        
25             1.00 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.75 1.85 25                        
26             1.00 1.15 1.35 1.50 1.65 1.80 26                        
27             1.00 1.05 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.70 27                        
28               1.00 1.20 1.35 1.50 1.65 28                        
29               1.00 1.10 1.30 1.45 1.60 29                        
30                 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.50 30                        
31                 1.00 1.15 1.30 1.45 31                        
32                 1.00 1.05 1.25 1.40 32                        
33                   1.00 1.15 1.30 33                        
34                   1.00 1.10 1.25 34                        
35                     1.00 1.20 35                        
36                     1.00 1.10 36                        
37   1.0m minimum foundation depth       1.00 1.05 37                        
38                       1.00 38                        

Table 15 - HIGH Shrinkage soil and MODERATE water demand tree


D (m) D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 2.20 2.25 2.25 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.35 2.35 2.35 2.35 2.35 2.35 1 1.90 2.00 2.10 2.15 2.15 2.20 2.20 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.30 2.30
2 1.95 2.05 2.10 2.15 2.20 2.20 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.30 2.30 2.30 2 1.40 1.60 1.75 1.85 1.90 2.00 2.00 2.05 2.10 2.10 2.15 2.15
3 1.70 1.85 1.95 2.00 2.05 2.10 2.15 2.15 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.25 3 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.55 1.65 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.00
4 1.50 1.65 1.80 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.05 2.10 2.10 2.15 2.15 2.15 4   1.00 1.10 1.30 1.40 1.55 1.60 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90
5 1.25 1.50 1.65 1.75 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.05 2.05 2.10 2.10 5     1.00 1.00 1.15 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75
6 1.00 1.30 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.00 2.05 6         1.00 1.10 1.20 1.35 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.60
7 1.00 1.10 1.35 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.75 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95 2.00 7           1.00 1.00 1.15 1.25 1.35 1.40 1.50
8   1.00 1.20 1.35 1.50 1.60 1.65 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.90 8               1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.35
9     1.00 1.20 1.35 1.50 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 9                 1.00 1.05 1.15 1.20
10     1.00 1.10 1.25 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 10                   1.00 1.00 1.10
11       1.00 1.15 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.75 11                       1.00
4.2
12         1.00 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 12                        

13         1.00 1.05 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.60 13                        
14           1.00 1.10 1.25 1.35 1.40 1.50 1.55 14                        
15             1.00 1.15 1.25 1.35 1.40 1.50 15                        
16             1.00 1.05 1.20 1.25 1.35 1.40 16                        
17               1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.35 17                        
18                 1.00 1.15 1.20 1.30 18                        
19                 1.00 1.05 1.15 1.25 19                        
20                   1.00 1.10 1.20 20                        
21   1.0m minimum foundation depth     1.00 1.10 21   1.0m minimum foundation depth        
22                     1.00 1.05 22                        
23                       1.00 23                        
Table 16 - HIGH shrinkage soil and LOW water demand tree

Broad leafed trees
Foundation depth (m)

D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75
2 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.60 1.65 1.65 1.65 1.65 1.70 1.70 1.70
3 1.20 1.35 1.40 1.50 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.65 1.65 1.65
4 1.00 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.60 1.60
5   1.00 1.15 1.25 1.30 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.50 1.55 1.55
6     1.00 1.15 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.50
7       1.00 1.10 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.45
8         1.00 1.10 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.35 1.40
9           1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35
10             1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
11               1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25
12         1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20
13   1.0m minimum foundation depth      1.00 1.10 1.15
14                     1.00 1.05
15                       1.00

Table 17 - MEDIUM shrinkage soil and HIGH water demand tree Table 17

Distance Tree Height H (m) Distance Tree Height H (m)
D (m) D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1                         1               Foundations greater than 2.5m

2           deep to be Engineer designed
Foundations greater than 2.5m deep   2 2.15 2.30 2.45 2.50      
3 2.40 2.50       to be Engineer designed   3 1.70 1.95 2.15 2.25 2.35 2.45 2.50        
4 2.20 2.35 2.45                   4 1.25 1.60 1.85 2.00 2.15 2.25 2.30 2.40 2.45 2.50 2.50  
5 1.95 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50               5 0.90 1.25 1.55 1.75 1.95 2.05 2.15 2.20 2.30 2.35 2.40 2.45
6 1.75 2.00 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.45 2.50           6   0.90 1.25 1.50 1.70 1.85 1.95 2.05 2.15 2.20 2.25 2.30
7 1.55 1.85 2.05 2.20 2.30 2.35 2.45 2.50         7     1.00 1.25 1.50 1.65 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.10 2.15 2.20
8 1.35 1.70 1.90 2.05 2.20 2.25 2.35 2.40 2.45 2.50     8     0.90 1.00 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.75 1.85 1.95 2.00 2.10
9 1.15 1.50 1.75 1.95 2.10 2.20 2.25 2.35 2.40 2.45 2.50 2.50 9       0.90 1.05 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 1.95
10 0.90 1.35 1.60 1.80 1.95 2.10 2.20 2.25 2.30 2.35 2.40 2.45 10         0.90 1.10 1.25 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.75 1.85
11 0.90 1.15 1.50 1.70 1.85 2.00 2.10 2.20 2.25 2.30 2.35 2.40 11           0.90 1.10 1.25 1.40 1.55 1.65 1.75
4.2
12 0.90 1.00 1.35 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.00 2.10 2.20 2.25 2.30 2.35 12             0.90 1.10 1.25 1.40 1.50 1.60
13   0.90 1.20 1.45 1.65 1.80 1.95 2.05 2.10 2.20 2.25 2.30 13             0.90 0.95 1.10 1.25 1.40 1.50
14   0.90 1.05 1.35 1.55 1.70 1.85 1.95 2.05 2.10 2.20 2.25 14               0.90 1.00 1.15 1.25 1.40
15     0.90 1.20 1.45 1.60 1.75 1.85 1.95 2.05 2.10 2.20 15                 0.90 1.00 1.15 1.25
16     0.90 1.10 1.35 1.55 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.05 2.10 16                   0.90 1.00 1.15
17     0.90 1.00 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.70 1.85 1.90 2.00 2.05 17                     0.90 1.05
18       0.90 1.15 1.35 1.50 1.65 1.75 1.85 1.95 2.00 18                       0.90
19       0.90 1.05 1.25 1.40 1.55 1.70 1.80 1.90 1.95 19                        
20         0.90 1.15 1.35 1.50 1.60 1.75 1.80 1.90 20                        
21         0.90 1.05 1.25 1.40 1.55 1.65 1.75 1.85 21                        
22         0.90 0.95 1.15 1.35 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 22                        
23           0.90 1.10 1.25 1.40 1.55 1.65 1.75 23                        
24           0.90 1.00 1.20 1.35 1.45 1.60 1.70 24                        
25             0.90 1.10 1.25 1.40 1.50 1.60 25                        
26             0.90 1.05 1.20 1.35 1.45 1.55 26                        
27             0.90 0.95 1.15 1.30 1.40 1.50 27                        
28               0.90 1.05 1.20 1.35 1.45 28                        
29               0.90 1.00 1.15 1.30 1.40 29                        
30                 0.90 1.10 1.20 1.35 30                        
31                 0.90 1.00 1.15 1.30 31                        
32                 0.90 0.95 1.10 1.25 32                        
33                   0.90 1.05 1.15 33                        
34                   0.90 1.00 1.10 34                        
35                     0.90 1.05 35                        
37                     0.90 0.95 37                        
38                       0.90 38                        

Table 18 - MEDIUM shrinkage soil and MODERATE water demand tree


D (m) D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 1.85 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95 1.95 1.95 1.95 1.95 1.95 1.95 1.95 1 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.90
2 1.65 1.75 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.90 1.90 2 1.25 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.65 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.75 1.80 1.80 1.80
3 1.45 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85 1.85 3 0.90 1.10 1.25 1.35 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.65 1.70 1.70
4 1.30 1.45 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.75 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 4   0.90 0.95 1.10 1.25 1.30 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.55 1.60
5 1.10 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.70 1.75 1.75 1.80 5     0.90 0.90 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50
6 0.90 1.15 1.30 1.40 1.45 1.55 1.60 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.70 1.75 6         0.90 0.95 1.10 1.15 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40
7 0.90 1.00 1.15 1.30 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.65 1.70 7           0.90 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.25 1.30
8   0.90 1.05 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.55 1.60 1.65 8               0.90 0.95 1.05 1.10 1.20
9     0.90 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 9                 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.10
10     0.90 0.95 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 10                   0.90 0.90 0.95
11       0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 11                       0.90
4.2
12         0.90 1.05 1.15 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 12                        

13         0.90 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 13                        
14           0.90 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.25 1.30 1.35 14                        
15             0.90 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.25 1.30 15                        
16             0.90 0.95 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.25 16                        
17               0.90 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20 17                        
18                 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.15 18                        
19                 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.10 19                        
20                   0.90 0.95 1.05 20                        
22                     0.90 0.95 22                        
23                       0.90 23                        
Table 19 - MEDIUM shrinkage soil and LOW water demand tree

Broad leafed trees

D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.50 1.50
2 1.20 1.30 1.30 1.35 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.45
3 1.05 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.40
4 0.90 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.35 1.35 1.35
5   0.90 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.25 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.30
6     0.90 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.25 1.25 1.30
7       0.90 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.25
8         0.90 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20
9           0.90 1.00 1.05 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.15
10             0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.10
11               0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10
12       0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05
13    0.9m minimum foundation depth     0.90 0.95 1.00
14                     0.90 0.95
15                       0.90

Table 20 - LOW shrinkage soil and HIGH water demand tree

D (m) D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 2.35 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.45 2.45 2.45 2.45 2.45 2.45 2.45 2.45 1 2.15 2.25 2.30 2.30 2.35 2.35 2.35 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.40
2 2.15 2.25 2.30 2.30 2.35 2.35 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.45 2 1.80 1.95 2.05 2.10 2.15 2.20 2.25 2.25 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.35
3 2.00 2.10 2.15 2.20 2.25 2.30 2.30 2.35 2.35 2.35 2.35 2.40 3 1.45 1.65 1.80 1.90 1.95 2.05 2.10 2.10 2.15 2.20 2.20 2.25
4 1.80 1.95 2.05 2.10 2.15 2.20 2.25 2.25 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.35 4 1.05 1.35 1.55 1.70 1.80 1.85 1.95 2.00 2.05 2.05 2.10 2.15
5 1.65 1.80 1.95 2.00 2.10 2.15 2.15 2.20 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.30 5 0.75 1.05 1.30 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.05
6 1.45 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.05 2.10 2.15 2.15 2.20 2.20 2.25 6   0.75 1.05 1.25 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95
7 1.30 1.55 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.05 2.05 2.10 2.15 2.15 2.20 7   0.75 0.80 1.05 1.25 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.65 1.75 1.80 1.85
8 1.10 1.40 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.05 2.10 2.10 2.15 8     0.75 0.85 1.05 1.20 1.35 1.45 1.55 1.60 1.70 1.75
9 0.95 1.25 1.45 1.60 1.75 1.80 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.05 2.05 2.10 9       0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20 1.35 1.45 1.50 1.60 1.65
10 0.75 1.10 1.35 1.50 1.65 1.75 1.80 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.00 2.05 10         0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.55
11 0.75 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.55 1.65 1.75 1.80 1.90 1.95 1.95 2.00 11           0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.45
4.2
12 0.75 0.85 1.10 1.30 1.45 1.60 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 12             0.75 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.35
13   0.75 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 13             0.75 0.80 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.25
14   0.75 0.90 1.10 1.30 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 14               0.75 0.80 0.95 1.05 1.15
15     0.75 1.00 1.20 1.35 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 15                 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05
16     0.75 0.90 1.10 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 16                   0.75 0.85 0.95
17     0.75 0.80 1.05 1.20 1.35 1.45 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.75 17                     0.75 0.85
18       0.75 0.95 1.10 1.25 1.35 1.45 1.55 1.60 1.70 18                       0.75
19       0.75 0.85 1.05 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.55 1.65 19                        
20         0.75 0.95 1.10 1.25 1.35 1.45 1.50 1.60 20                        
21         0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.45 1.55 21                        
22         0.75 0.80 1.00 1.10 1.25 1.35 1.40 1.50 22                        
23           0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.45 23                        
24           0.75 0.85 1.00 1.10 1.25 1.30 1.40 24                        
25             0.75 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.35 25                        
26             0.75 0.85 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 26                        
27             0.75 0.80 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.25 27                        
28               0.75 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 28                        
29               0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05 1.15 29                        
30                 0.75 0.90 1.00 1.10 30                        
31                 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05 31                        
32                 0.75 0.80 0.90 1.05 32                        
33                   0.75 0.85 1.00 33                        
34                   0.75 0.80 0.95 34                        
35                     0.75 0.90 35                        
36                     0.75 0.85 36                        
38                       0.75 38                        

Table 21 - LOW shrinkage soil and MODERATE water demand tree


D (m) D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 1.50 1.50 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.60 1.60 1.60 1 1.30 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.55 1.55 1.55
2 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55 2 1.00 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.45
3 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 3 0.75 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.35 1.35 1.40
4 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.45 4   0.75 0.80 0.95 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.25 1.25 1.30
5 0.90 1.05 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.35 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.45 5     0.75 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20
6 0.75 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.35 1.35 1.40 1.40 6         0.75 0.80 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15
7 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.35 1.35 7           0.75 0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05
8   0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.25 1.30 1.30 8               0.75 0.80 0.85 0.95 0.95
9     0.75 0.90 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.25 1.30 9                 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90
10     0.75 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.25 10                   0.75 0.75 0.80
11       0.75 0.85 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.15 1.20
4.2
11                       0.75
12         0.75 0.85 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.15 12                        
13         0.75 0.80 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 13                        
14           0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 14                        
15             0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 15                        
16             0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 16                        
17               0.75 0.80 0.90 0.95 1.00 17                        
18                 0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95 18                        
19                 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 19                        
20                   0.75 0.80 0.85 20                        
22                     0.75 0.80 22                        
23                       0.75 23                        
Table 22 - LOW shrinkage soil and LOW water demand tree
Broad leafed trees

D (m)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 1.10 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
2 1.00 1.05 1.05 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
3 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.15
4 0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.10 1.10 1.10
5   0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05
6     0.75 0.85 0.90 0.90 0.95 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.05 1.05
7       0.75 0.85 0.85 0.90 0.95 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.00
8         0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.90 0.95 0.95 1.00
9           0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.90 0.95 0.95
10             0.75 0.80 0.85 0.85 0.90 0.90
11               0.75 0.80 0.85 0.85 0.90
12       0.75 0.80 0.85 0.85
13    0.75m minimum foundation depth    0.75 0.80 0.85
14                     0.75 0.80
15                       0.75

Appendix 4.2-D
Climate zones
Figure 13 Reductions in foundation depth due to climate variations
The foundation depth may be reduced by the amounts shown on the map for each climatic zone (see Design clause D5(e)). Where it is unclear
which zone applies, the lower reduction value should be used.
Thurso 0.50m (500mm)
Wick
0.45m (450mm)
Dingwall
4.2
Inverness Peterhead
0.40m (400mm)
Aberdeen
Fort William
Pitlochry
Montrose
0.35m (350mm)
Oban Perth
Dunbar
Edinburgh 0.30m (300mm)
Glasgow Berwick Upon Tweed
Ayr
Londonderry
0.25m (250mm)
Dumfries
Newcastle Tynemouth
Carlisle
Belfast Middlesbrough
Darlington
Enniskillen 0.20m (200mm)
Scarborough
Barrow-in-Furness
Douglas
Lancaster York
Blackpool Leeds Hull 0.15m (150mm)
Manchester
Grimsby
Holyhead Liverpool Lincoln
Conwy Chester
Skegness 0.10m (100mm)
Stoke on Trent
Derby
Shrewsbury Stafford Norwich
Kings Lynn Yarmouth
Aberystwyth Leicester
Birmingham Lowestoft 0.05m (50mm)
Cardigan Cambridge
Worcester
Banbury
Brecon
Cheltenham Ipswich
Colchester
Swansea
Newport Oxford
Pembroke Chelmsford
Cardiff
Swindon
Ilfracombe Bristol Reading London Margate
Salisbury Winchester
Barnstaple Dover
Taunton Southampton
Exeter Poole Brighton
Hastings
Portsmouth
St. Austell Plymouth Weymouth
Penzance

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Appendix 4.2-E NHBC gratefully acknowledges the help
given by authoritative organisations
Information sources and and individuals in the preparation of this
Chapter, particularly:
acknowledgements Building Research Establishment
INFORMATION SOURCES Dr P G Biddle Arboricultural Consultant
Further recommendations and information
can be obtained from:
Publications
BS 1377 ‘Methods of test for soils for civil
engineering purposes’
BS 5837 ‘Guide for trees in relation to
construction’
BS 5930 ‘Code of practice for site
investigations’
BRE Digests 240, 241 and 242 ‘Low rise
4.2
buildings on shrinkable clay soils’, parts 1,

2 and 3
BRE Digest 298 ‘The influence of trees on
house foundations in clay soils’
BRE Digest 412 ‘Desiccation in clay soils’
Tree Recognition - A Pocket Manual

by Ian Richardson and Rowena Gale,
Richardson’s Botanical Identifications,
49/51 Whiteknights Road, Reading, Berks
RG6 7BB
Field Guide to the Trees of Britain and

Northern Europe
by Alan Mitchell, Harper Collins, Glasgow
Geological survey maps

obtainable from British Geological Survey,
Nicker Hill, Keyworth, Nottingham NG12 5GG
Tel: 0115 936 3100; www.bgs.ac.uk
Tree root damage to buildings

Vol.1 Causes, Diagnosis and Remedy
Vol. 2 Patterns of Soil Drying in
Proximity to Trees on Clay Soils
by P G Biddle, Willowmead Publishing,
Wantage OX12 9JA
Organisations
Arboricultural Association
Ampfield House, Ampfield, nr. Romsey,
Hants SO51 9PA
Tel: 01794 368717; www.trees.org.uk
Arboricultural Advisory and Information

Service
Forest Research Station, Alice Holt Lodge,
Wrecclesham, Farnham, Surrey GU10 4LH
Tel: 01420 22022; www.treehelp.info
(Tree Helpline telephone no. 0906 516 1147)
Institution of Civil Engineers

1-7 Great George Street, London SW1P 3AA
Tel: 020 7222 7722; www.ice.org.uk
Institution of Structural Engineers

11 Upper Belgrave Street, London SW1X 8BH
Tel: 020 7235 4535; www.istructe.org.uk

Appendix 4.2-F
Worked example
How to determine foundation depths from the Charts in Appendix 4.2-B or the Tables in Appendix 4.2-C.
Step Ref Example

1 Determine the volume change potential D5(b) Site at Oxford, building near a Lombardy Poplar (to be retained) and a
of the soil. Ensure the site investigation Sycamore (to be removed)
includes representative sampling and testing.
From laboratory tests,
Plasticity Index, Ip = 36%.
Test results also report that 100% of particles are smaller than 425µm.
Therefore,
modified Plasticity Index, l’p = 36 x 100 = 36%
100
From Table 1, Volume change potential = Medium
4.2
(in the absence of tests assume high volume change potential)
This example is typical of Oxford Clay. More than 35% of the particles
are smaller than 60µm and therefore the soil is shrinkable. 100% of the
particles are smaller than 425µm and therefore the l’p is the same as the lp.
A typical Boulder Clay also has more than 35% of particles smaller than
60µm and is therefore also shrinkable. However, it may have only 80% of
its particles smaller than 425µm in which case the l’p is 80% of the lp.
A typical clayey sand may have less than 30% of its particles smaller than
60µm in which case the soil would be non shrinkable.
2 Establish the species, mature height and D5(c)
Lombardy Poplar Sycamore
water demand of all trees and hedgerows and
within their influencing radii. D5(d) From Appendix 4.2-A From Appendix 4.2-A
Mature height = 25m Mature height = 22m
Water demand = High Water demand = Moderate
3 Plot the trees and hedgerows relative D5(c)

to the foundations and draw their zones zone of influence
of Lombardy Poplar
of influence to determine which trees will 1.25 x 25 = 31.25m
affect the foundation design. Use a scaled
plan. Lombardy Poplar
mature height 25m
house
10m
Sycamore 8m
mature
height 22m
zone of influence
of Sycamore
0.75 x 22 = 16.5m
4 Establish the appropriate tree height H D5(d)

to use.
Always use the mature height for remaining Tree to remain. Therefore, Tree to be removed
and proposed trees and hedgerows. The H = Mature height Mature height = 22m
appropriate height to use for removed trees = 25m Actual height = 15m
and hedgerows depends on the actual height Actual height greater than 50%
when they are removed. mature height. Therefore,
H = Mature height
= 22m
5 Measure the distance D from the centre D6(c)

of the trees or hedgerows to the face of the
foundation. Distance D = 10m from foundation Distance D = 8m from foundation
6 Select Steps 6C(a) and (b) if using Charts in

Appendix 4.2-B to derive depths or select
Step 6T if using Tables in Appendix 4.2-C
to derive depths. Alternatively the NHBC
foundation depth calculator may be used
(see Sitework clause S2).

6C (a) Calculate D/H

i.e. distance D from face of foundation (Step
5) divided by the appropriate tree height H D = 10 = 0.4 D = 8 = 0.36
(Step 4). Alternatively D/H can be obtained H 25 H 22
from Table 13 in Appendix 4.2-B.
6C(b) Determine foundation depth using the
Charts in Appendix 4.2-B as follows:
In this example the volume In this example the volume
Volume change potential Chart change potential is Medium, then change potential is Medium, then
number from Chart 2 for broadleafed high from Chart 2 for broadleafed
water demand trees at D moderate water demand trees
High 1 = 0.4, at D
H = 0.36,
Medium 2
Foundation depth = 2.33m
H
Low 3 Foundation depth = 1.50m
The Lombardy Poplar is the tree requiring the greater depth (2.33m)
6T Determine foundation depth using the

Tables in Appendix 4.2-C as follows:
4.2
In this example the volume In this example the volume

Volume Tree water Table
change potential is Medium and change potential is Medium and
change demand number
the water demand is High, then the water demand is Moderate,
potential
from Table 17, for broad leafed then from Table 18, for broad
High High 14 high water demand trees at D = leafed moderate water demand
Moderate 15 10m and H = 25m, Foundation trees at D = 8m and H = 22m,
Low 16 depth = 2.33m (by interpolation) Foundation depth = 1.50m
Medium High 17 The Lombardy Poplar is the tree requiring the greater depth (2.33m)
Moderate 18
Low 19
Low High 20
Moderate 21
Low 22
7 Adjust the depth according to the climatic D5(e)

Oxford is between 50 and 100 miles NW of London. From Appendix 4.2-D,
zone. A reduction may be made for distance
a reduction of 0.05m is permitted.
north and west of London but the final depth
Final foundation depth = 2.33 - 0.05 = 2.28m
should not be less than the minimum given
in each Chart and Table.
8 Check that the recommendations of this  
Chapter have been met for:
Acceptable foundation types D6(a)
New planting D6(d),

(including shrubs) D6(e)
Non shrinkable soil overlying shrinkable soil D6(f)
Variations in foundation depths D6(g),

S3(b)
Foundations on sloping ground D6(h)
Precautions against heave D8,S4

(including suspended floors)
Measurement of foundation depths S3(a)
Foundation trench bottoms S3(c)
Precautions for drainage S5
Note:
The above process may be repeated to allow the foundation to be stepped as its distance from the tree increases.

INDEX
B M T
Broad leafed trees 8, 13 - 18 Modified Plasticity Index 1, 10, 11, 21 Tree heights 2, 6, 8, 13 - 18
C N Tree species 8
Climate 2, 19 New planting 3 Trench bottoms 6
Compressible materials 5, 6, 7 Trench fill foundations 2, 4, 6
P
Coniferous trees 8, 13 - 18 Pier and beam foundations 2, 4, 7 V
D Pile and beam foundations 2, 4, 7 Void formers 5, 7
Depth charts 9 - 12 Plasticity Index 1, 10, 11, 21 Volume change potential 1
Depth Tables 13 - 18 Protection of trees 1 W
Drainage 5, 7, 21, 22 R Water demand 1, 8, 13 - 18
E Raft foundations 2, 4, 5 Z
Excavation 6 Zone of influence 2, 21
S
F Shrinkable soils 1, 3, 13 - 18
4.2
Foundation depths 2, 3, 6, 9 - 18 Shrubs 3
Foundation types 2, 4 Sloping ground 3
H Soil classification 1
Heave 1, 4, 5, 6, 7 Stepped foundations 2, 6
Heave precautions 4, 5, 6, 7 Strip foundations 2, 3
Suspended ground floors 5

Part 4 Foundations
Chapter 4.4
Strip and trench fill foundations
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for strip and trench
Statutory requirements D2 1 fill foundations.
Requirement for foundations D3 1
Safe transmission of loads D4 1
Design by an Engineer D5-D6 1
Site conditions D7 1
Foundation depth D8 1
Stepped foundations D9 2
Services and drainage D10 2
Movement joints D11 2
Provision of information D12-D13 2
4.4
MATERIALS
Concrete M2 2
Reinforcement M3 2
Other materials M4 2
SITEWORK
Setting out foundations S2 3
Excavations S3-S8 3
Services and drainage S9-S10 3
General construction S11-S12 4
Strip and trench fill foundations S13 4
APPENDIX 4.4-A
Dimensions of strip foundations 6
INDEX 7

Strip and trench fill foundations 4.4
(b) stability of the dwelling and any work starts. Hazardous ground is defined
DESIGN STANDARDS associated constructions in Chapter 4.1 ‘Land quality - managing
Where appropriate, reference should be ground conditions’.
4.4 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical
made to BS 8103.
Requirements NHBC Rules state:
Design that follows the guidance below will Unless there are reasons for doing “If a Home is to be constructed on a
be acceptable for both strip foundations otherwise, foundations should be Hazardous Site you must before making an
and trench fill foundations. symmetrical beneath loadbearing Application for Inspection notify the NHBC
elements. in writing of the particular hazards which
arise. You must do this at least 8 weeks
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS Strip and trench fill foundations should before work begins on the site.”
be continuous throughout the building,
4.4 - D2 Design shall comply with all
including integral garages, porches,
relevant statutory requirements
conservatories, bay windows, etc. The SITE CONDITIONS
Design should be in accordance with foundations should be of sufficient width 4.4 - D7 Foundation design shall take
relevant Building Regulations and other throughout to avoid overstressing the account of site conditions
statutory requirements. ground, especially where the foundation is
required to support piers or columns. Items to be taken into account include:
(a) the results of site appraisal
REQUIREMENT FOR Reference should be made to Chapter 4.2 All relevant information about the nature
FOUNDATIONS
4.4
‘Building near trees’ where: and loadbearing capacity of the ground
• soil is shrinkable should be available before the foundations
4.4 - D3 All loadbearing elements shall
• trees have been, or are being, removed are designed.
be adequately supported by foundations since heave is possible in these situations
Elements requiring foundations include the special precautions are necessary. Information about ground conditions
following: and the past history of the site may be
The width of the foundation will depend available from a number of sources.
• external walls
on the loadbearing capacity of the sub-soil These include NHBC, Local Authorities
• separating (party) walls
and the loads from the building. However, and the area offices of the Gas, Water and
• chimney breasts
the foundation width should not be less Electricity Companies. Aerial photographs,
• piers
than the wall thickness, plus at least 50mm Ordnance Survey maps and geological
• internal loadbearing walls.
each side, to ensure that the foundation is maps and surveys may often be studied at
SLEEPER WALLS not oversailed by any part of the wall. local Public Libraries and Record Offices.
In Scotland, a sleeper wall is also defined
(c) stability of any adjoining dwelling or Site assessment surveys may require
as a loadbearing element and must be
construction supplementary site investigations involving
provided with a suitable foundation.
Foundations adjoining those of an existing trial pits and borings. Details are given
In England, Wales, Northern Ireland and building may require special design. If in Chapter 4.1 ‘Land quality - managing
the Isle of Man, sleeper walls should not be taken to a greater depth, such foundations ground conditions’.
built off oversite concrete: will usually need to be Engineer designed
• on shrinkable clay soils where heave and carefully supervised to check (b) dwelling design and layout
could take place the standard of workmanship. Where Foundation design is governed by the
• where infill below the oversite concrete necessary, allowance should be made in shape and size of the dwellings as well
is greater than 600mm the design for differential movement. as the site conditions. Foundations for
• which is less than 100mm thick. terraced dwellings may require special
precautions to prevent damage from
In these situations, suitable foundations DESIGN BY AN ENGINEER differential settlement.
will be required. 4.4 - D5 Foundations on hazardous
ground shall be designed by an Engineer (c) site levels
SAFE TRANSMISSION OF Stepped foundations or suspended floors
Details of hazardous ground to be taken may be needed for sloping sites. Reference
LOADS into consideration are given in Chapters: should be made to Clause D9 for stepped
4.1 ‘Land quality - managing ground foundations and to Chapter 5.2 ‘Suspended
4.4 - D4 Foundations shall be designed
conditions’, and ground floors’ (Design).
to transmit loads to the ground safely 4.2 ‘Building near trees’.
and without excessive settlement
Foundations should be designed by an FOUNDATION DEPTH
Engineer in accordance with Technical
(a) dead and imposed loads 4.4 - D8 Foundation depth shall be
Requirement R5 where:
Dead and imposed loads should be adequate for the site conditions
• buildings exceed 3 storeys in height
calculated in accordance with BS 6399 and • retaining walls are required for habitable Items to be taken into account include:
BS 648. rooms below ground. (a) soils with volume change potential
Appendix 4.4-A shows suitable foundation In shrinkable soils that are classified as
4.4 - D6 Where foundations are on containing more than 35% fine particles
dimensions and gives minimum widths
hazardous ground, notice shall be given (clay and silt), and have a modified
of strip foundations for different sub-
to NHBC before work starts on site Plasticity Index of 10% or greater, the
soil and wall loadings. Strip foundations
should be 150mm to 500mm thick. Trench Where hazardous ground has been minimum foundation depth should be as in
fill foundations should be greater than identified, NHBC must be notified before the following table:
500mm thick.

Modified Volume Minimum

them to be installed later. Materials for strip and trench fill
Plasticity change depth (m) foundations should comply with all
Reference should be made to Chapters 8.1
Index potential relevant standards, including those listed
‘Internal services’ (Design and Sitework)
40% and High 1.0 below. Where no standard exists, Technical
and 5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’ (Design
greater Requirement R3 applies (see Chapter
and Sitework) for further details.
20% to less Medium 0.9
than 40%
MOVEMENT JOINTS
10% to less Low 0.75 References to British Standards and Codes
than 20% 4.4 - D11 Movement joints shall be
suitable for their intended purpose
(b) frost susceptible soils Where movement joints are specified in EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
To avoid damage from frost action, the foundations, they should be continuous European Technical Specifications
depth to the underside of the foundation with those in the superstructure. approved by a European Committee for
in frost susceptible ground, eg chalk, Standardisation (CEN).
should be at least 450mm below finished PROVISION OF
ground level. INFORMATION CONCRETE
This depth should also be used when 4.4 - D12 Drawings and specifications 4.4 - M2 Concrete shall be of a mix
construction is undertaken during cold shall be produced in a clearly design which is suitable for the intended use
4.4
weather. Alternatively, precautions should understandable format Items to be taken into account include:
be taken to prevent freezing of the ground.
It is important that all relevant information (a) strength to safely transmit loads
(c) suitable bearing strata needed for the completion of the sitework (b) durability against chemical or
The depth of foundations should be such is stated clearly and unambiguously and is frost action
as to give a clean, firm and adequate readily available to all concerned.
bearing for the design loads. For guidance on the specification and use
All necessary dimensions and levels should of concrete, particularly in relation to the
Trench fill foundations greater than 2.5m in be indicated and related to: choice of mix to resist deterioration due
depth must be designed by an Engineer in • at least one benchmark, and to ground aggressivity, reference should
accordance with Technical Requirement R5. • reference points on site. be made to Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
reinforcement’ (each section).
All necessary details of junctions, steps,
STEPPED FOUNDATIONS movement joints and, where necessary,
4.4 - D9 Foundations shall be taken to any critical sequences of construction REINFORCEMENT
a suitable bearing level when building on should be provided. 4.4 - M3 Reinforcement shall be
sloping ground sufficient to ensure proper transfer
4.4 - D13 Designs and specifications,
of loads
Sloping ground may require stepped together with relevant site information,
foundations. shall be distributed to appropriate Where reinforcement may be necessary,
personnel for example at construction joints or over
Where foundations are stepped, the height
small localised soft spots or changes in
of the step should not exceed the thickness Both designers and site operatives need
bearing strata, it should be in accordance
of the foundation, unless it forms part of to be aware of the ground conditions
with Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
a foundation designed by an Engineer in and, in particular, any features requiring
accordance with Technical Requirement R5. special attention, such as any existing
sewers or other services, levels of water
For details of stepped foundations,
table and the presence of any deleterious OTHER MATERIALS
reference should be made to Sitework
substances, especially sulfates. 4.4 - M4 Compressible materials shall
Clause 4.4 - S13(b).
Information on ground conditions, the be capable of absorbing potential heave
forces, where appropriate
SERVICES AND DRAINAGE results of site investigation and the
foundation design can be requested by Proprietary materials should have been
4.4 - D10 Foundation design shall NHBC, even for those sites which are not assessed in accordance with Technical
make allowance for drainage and other classified as hazardous. Requirement R3.
services
Where toxic materials (or materials likely
Items to be taken into account include: to present a health hazard) are found, all
(a) ground water drainage
Provision should be made for adjusting any
available information should be supplied to SITEWORK STANDARDS
NHBC, together with proposals for dealing
existing ground water drains affected by with the hazard. 4.4 - S1 All sitework shall:
excavation work. (a) meet the Technical Requirements
(b) existing services
Precautions should be taken to MATERIALS STANDARDS workmanship
accommodate the effects of settlement,
where drains run under or near a building. 4.4 - M1 All materials shall:
Sitework that complies with the design
and the guidance below will be acceptable
(c) access for services (b) take account of the design
for both strip foundations and trench fill
Where services are to pass through or
Materials that comply with the design and foundations.
under foundations, provision should be
the guidance below will be acceptable
made for suitable ducts or lintels to enable
for both strip foundations and trench fill
foundations.

SETTING OUT ground should be at least 450mm below
ground level. If finished ground level is to
FOUNDATIONS be above existing ground level then, in cold
4.4 - S2 The setting out of foundations conditions when freezing is expected, the
vertical sides
shall take account of the design details foundation depth should be taken from the and steps horizontal
existing, not finished, ground level.
The accuracy of setting out should be
4.4 - S8 Trench bottoms, when
checked by control measurements of finished ground level
prepared for concreting, shall be
trenches, including their location relative
compact, reasonably dry and even
to site boundaries and adjacent buildings.
at least
Levels should be checked against bench 450mm If any part of a trench bottom is affected
marks, where appropriate. by rainwater, ground water or drying, it
should be re-bottomed.
In particular, for excavations check:
4.4 - S5 Excavation in shrinkable soil
• trench lengths Trenches should be kept free of water.
shall take account of the foundation
• trench widths
design
• length of diagonals between SERVICES AND DRAINAGE
external corners. The design should specify the minimum
foundation depth. In shrinkable soils, the 4.4 - S9 Existing services shall be
minimum foundation depth should be as in adequately protected
4.4
bou
the following table: Any existing services, such as cables,
nda
ry water pipes or gas mains, may need to be
Volume change Minimum depth (m)
potential supported and protected.
High 1.0 Drains which are redundant should be cut
distance from boundary
Medium 0.9 open and filled or removed.
Low 0.75 Any existing drains should be diverted or
di
ag adequately protected.
trench
on
als
trench
These minimum depths may only be used
length width where any existing or proposed trees Services should not be rigidly encased in
or shrubs are outside the zone of tree the foundations.
influence (See Chapter 4.2 ‘Building near Ground water drains should be diverted.
trees’ (Design)).
4.4 - S6 Excavations shall take account

trench length
of localised effects
Walls should be located centrally on Where localised changes in strata give
the foundation, unless specifically rise to differences in bearing capacity,
designed otherwise. special precautions will be necessary and land drains
reference should be made to the designer. diverted to
Any discrepancy in dimensions should suitable
outfall
be reported promptly to the designer. At soft spots, excavations should be
Resulting variations should be distributed deepened locally to a sound bottom diversion
to all concerned with sitework, including or, alternatively, the concrete should
NHBC, where appropriate. be reinforced.
Hard spots should be removed.
EXCAVATIONS
Where roots are visible on the sides or
4.4 - S3 Excavations for foundations
bottoms of trenches (especially in clay
shall take account of design dimensions
soils), excavations may need to be taken
Excess excavation should be avoided. deeper, or special precautions determined
Inaccuracy may prevent walls and piers by an Engineer in accordance with
being located centrally and therefore Technical Requirement R5.
result in eccentric loading of foundations
On sites where there are or have been 4.4 - S10 Provision shall be made for
and possible foundation failure.
trees, foundations constructed in service entries or services to safely
Accurate trench digging is particularly accordance with the guidance given in pass through, or above, foundations
important where the width of the Chapter 4.2 ‘Building near trees’ will be
foundation is only slightly wider than the acceptable to NHBC. For details of underground drains and
wall to be supported. services, reference should be made to
4.4 - S7 The shape of the trench shall Chapters 8.1 ‘Internal services’ (Design and
Any ground condition that might cause the not impair the performance of the Sitework) and 5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’
foundation design to be modified should foundation (Design and Sitework). Reference should
be reported promptly to the designer. also be made to Chapter 5.1 ‘Substructure
Unless otherwise designed by an Engineer
in accordance with Technical Requirement and ground bearing floors’ (Design and
4.4 - S4 Excavation shall be to a
R5, trench bottoms should be horizontal Sitework).
depth that gives adequate bearing and
protection from frost damage with all loose material removed. Trench
STRIP FOUNDATIONS
sides and steps should be, as near as
To avoid damage from frost action, the Services should not pass through strip
possible, vertical.
depth of foundation in frost susceptible foundations but through the masonry
above. Adequate lintels should be provided

in the masonry. Reference should be made For trench fill, it is particularly important
to Chapter 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground to check that the finished foundation level
bearing floors’ (Design and Sitework). is correct and horizontal. It will be difficult
to adjust for discrepancies in the small
TRENCH FILL FOUNDATIONS number of brick courses (possibly only 6)
Where services pass through trench fill between foundation and dpc level.
foundations, they should not affect the
ability of the foundations to carry loads.
Services should be either sleeved or
passed through a suitably strengthened joint using
reinforcing bars
opening in the foundation. This is to
ensure that differential movement will not
damage services.
In the case of drains, it is important to
leave sufficient space for movement
to ensure that the drain is capable of pegs help
to ensure
maintaining line and gradient. correct levels
flexible material 4.4 - S12 Strip and trench fill

4.4
around pipe
foundations shall be reinforced, where joint with
expanded
necessary, to suit localised ground metal lath
flexible conditions
joint flexible
joint
Reinforcement, if needed, should be clean TRENCH FILL FOUNDATIONS
and free from loose rust and should be It is important that concrete mix,
placed correctly. Bars, of an appropriate workability and placement are maintained
size, should be properly supported to throughout a trench fill foundation.
ensure that they are 75mm above the base However, where a joint is unavoidable,
of the foundation or as indicated in the it should not be positioned near a
design. They should be secured at laps and return in the foundation. Before work
granular lintel
backfill crossings. continues beyond the construction
around pipe
joint, all shuttering should be removed.
If in doubt about any soft spots, the Construction joints may be formed by one
designer’s advice should be taken before of the methods shown below.
placing the concrete.
50mm gap
all round
masked
opening
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION joint using

corrugated
metal former
4.4 - S11 Concrete shall be correctly
mixed, placed and cured
Concreting should be carried out, as far as
at least
possible, in one operation, taking account 75mm
75mm cover
of weather conditions and available side
cover
daylight. Concrete should be placed as
soon as possible after the excavation has
been checked. STRIP AND TRENCH FILL
Mixing, placing, testing and curing FOUNDATIONS
of concrete should be carried out as joint with
indicated in Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its 4.4 - S13 Strip and trench fill expanded
metal lath
reinforcement’ (each section), and for work foundations shall be constructed to take
carried out in cold weather, Chapter 1.4 account of the foundation design
(b) stepping of foundations
‘Cold weather working’. Items to be taken into account include: Sloping ground may require stepped
(a) construction joints foundations.
The foundation thickness should be:
• 150mm to 500mm - for strip foundation STRIP FOUNDATIONS
If construction joints are unavoidable, Where foundations are stepped, the height
• not less than 500mm - for trench fill
they should not be positioned near a of the step should not exceed the thickness
foundations.
return in the foundation. All shuttering of the foundation, unless it forms part of
Where trench fill foundations are in excess should be removed before work continues a foundation designed by an Engineer in
of 2.5m depth, they must be designed by beyond the construction joint. For strip accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
an Engineer in accordance with Technical foundations, construction joints may be Foundation bottoms should be horizontal
Requirement R5. formed by one of the methods shown below. and steps, as near as possible, vertical.

STRIP FOUNDATIONS
The overlap should be not less than:
• 2 x S, or
• T (maximum 500mm), or
• 300mm,
whichever is the largest.
S T
overlap
TRENCH FILL FOUNDATIONS

The overlap should be not less than:
• 2 x S, or
4.4
• one metre,
whichever is the larger.
S
T
overlap

Appendix 4.4-A
Approved Document A1/2, Section 2E, specifies the size of strip foundations using Diagram 24 and Table 10.
Also see Technical booklet D of Building Regulations (N Ireland) 1990.
Strip foundations should be:
• Located centrally under the wall
• of thickness P or 150mm (whichever is greater)
• of the width shown in Table 10.
Diagram 24 Foundation dimensions
wall should be
central on foundation
P W P
The minimum thickness

of the foundation (T)
4.4
should either be P or T
150mm, whichever is
greater.
foundation width
should be not less
than the appropriate
dimension in Table 10
Trench fill foundations may be used as an

alternative to strip foundations
Table 10 Minimum width of strip footings

Type of ground Condition of ground Field test applicable Total load of load-bearing walling not more than (kN/linear
(including engineered metre)
fill)
20 30 40 50 60 70
Minimum width of strip foundation (mm)
I Requires at least a pneumatic in each case equal to the width of the wall
Rock Not inferior to sandstone, or other mechanically
limestone or firm chalk operated pick for excavation
II Requires pick for excavation. 250 300 400 500 600 650
Gravel or Medium Dense Wooden peg 50mm square
Sand in cross section hard to drive
beyond 150mm
III Can be indented slightly by 250 300 400 500 600 650
Clay Stiff thumb
Sandy clay Stiff
IV Thumb makes impression 300 350 450 600 750 850
Clay Firm easily
Sandy clay Firm
V Can be excavated with a 400 600
Sand Loose spade. Wooden peg 50mm
Silty sand Loose square in cross section can be
Clayey sand Loose easily driven Note
Foundations on soil types V and VI do
VI Finger pushed in up to 10mm 450 650 not fall within the provisions of this
Silt Soft section if the total load exceeds 30 kN/m
Clay Soft
Sandy clay Soft
Clay or silt Soft
VII Finger easily pushed in up to
Silt Very soft 25mm
Clay Very soft Refer to specialist advice
Sandy clay Very soft
Clay or silt Very soft
This table is applicable only within the strict terms of the criteria described within it.

INDEX
A   H R
Adjoining constructions 1 Hazardous ground 1 Reinforcement 2, 4
C I S
Compressible materials 2 Imposed loads 1 Services 2, 3
Concrete 2, 4 J Setting out 3
D Joints 4 Shrinkable clay 1, 3
Dead loads 1 L Site conditions 1
Design standard 1 Loads 1 Sitework standards 2
Drainage 2, 3 Sleeper walls 1
M
E Materials standards 2 Soft spots 4
Excavations 3 Movement joints 2 Stepped foundations 2, 4
F O Statutory requirements 1
Foundation depths 1 Overlap 5 T
4.4
Foundation dimensions 6 Transmission of loads 1
P
Frost 2 Trench bottoms 3
Provision of information 2

Part 4 Foundations
Chapter 4.5
Raft, pile, pier and beam foundations
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for raft, pile, pier and
beam foundations.
Statutory requirements and D2-D3 1
other standards
Hazardous ground D4 1
Notification D5 1
Supervision by an Engineer D6 1
Requirement for foundations D7 1
Site conditions D8 1
Differential settlement D9 1
Services, including drainage D10 1
4.5
Damp-proofing D12 2
MATERIALS
Concrete M2 3
Reinforcement M3 3
Other materials M4-M5 3
SITEWORK
Setting out foundations S2 3
Excavations S3-S5 3
Services and drainage S6-S7 4
Reinforcement S8 4
Concreting S9 4
Raft foundations S10 4
Piled foundations S11 4
Pier and beam foundations S12 4
APPENDIX 4.5-A
Guidance for the design of semi- 4
raft foundations on made ground
INDEX 5

Raft, pile, pier and beam foundations 4.5
DESIGN STANDARDS SUPERVISION BY AN in terms of the ACEC Class (Aggressive
Chemical Environment for Concrete Class)
ENGINEER in accordance with BRE Special Digest 1.
4.5 - D6 When foundations have been Where sulfates or high acidity in ground or
Requirements
designed by an Engineer, the Builder groundwater are present, reference should
Design that follows the guidance below will shall require the Engineer to visit the be made to Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
be acceptable for raft, pile, pier and beam site during construction reinforcement’ (each section) for guidance
foundations. concerning acceptable concrete mixes.
The visits by the Engineer are necessary
so that the Engineer can be satisfied that (f) trees
STATUTORY the design of the foundation is suitable for Where trees are nearby or are to be
REQUIREMENTS AND the actual ground conditions encountered planted nearby (especially where the
and that the construction is in accordance
OTHER STANDARDS with the design.
soil is shrinkable), foundations should be
designed as shown in Chapter 4.2 ‘Building
4.5 - D2 Design shall comply with near trees’.
statutory requirements
REQUIREMENT FOR (g) frost susceptible soils
Design should be in accordance with
relevant Building Regulations and other
FOUNDATIONS To avoid damage from frost action, the
4.5 - D7 All masonry and all loadbearing depth to the underside of the foundation in
frost susceptible ground should be at least
4.5
elements shall be adequately supported
4.5 - D3 Design shall follow relevant 450mm below finished ground level.
by foundations
Standards and Codes of Practice
Elements requiring foundations include the
Relevant British Standards and Codes of following:
DIFFERENTIAL
Practice include: • external walls SETTLEMENT
BS 648 Schedule of weights of building • separating (party) walls 4.5 - D9 Foundations shall be
materials • chimney breasts designed to take account of differential
BS 6399 Loading for buildings • piers settlement
BS 8004 Code of Practice for • internal loadbearing or masonry walls
foundations • sleeper walls. Foundations should be designed to avoid
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete any local stress points or any differential
BS 10175 Investigation of potentially settlement. Foundations for attached bays,
contaminated sites - Code of
SITE CONDITIONS porches, garages, conservatories and
practice. 4.5 - D8 Foundations shall be designed other structures should be a continuation
to suit site conditions of those for the main dwelling, unless
HAZARDOUS GROUND the design indicates an alternative which
takes account of differential movement,
4.5 - D4 The design of foundations shall (a) site and ground appraisals
for example separate foundations.
All information relating to the site and its
take account of the characteristics of Foundations adjoining those of an existing
ground conditions which is necessary for
the site, its ground and any hazards building may require special precautions to
full and proper foundation design should
Where there is hazardous ground, the limit differential movement.
be obtained.
foundation design must be carried out by
an Engineer in accordance with Technical (b) dwelling design SERVICES, INCLUDING
Requirement R5. Foundation design should take account
of the shape, size and construction of the
DRAINAGE
Details of ground hazards to be taken into dwellings as well as the site layout. 4.5 - D10 Foundation design shall take
consideration are given in Chapters: account of access for services
4.1 ‘Land quality - managing ground Foundations for terraced dwellings may
conditions’ require special precautions to prevent Where services are to pass through, or
4.2 ‘Building near trees’ damage from differential settlement. under, foundations provision should be
made for suitable ducts or lintels to enable
(c) site layout them to be installed later, in such a way
NOTIFICATION Building over changes in ground as not to impair structural stability. For
4.5 - D5 NHBC shall be notified before characteristics should be avoided. further details, reference should be made
work starts on site to the Design and Sitework sections of
(d) site levels Chapters:
NHBC Rules state: Stepped foundations and suspended floor 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing
“If a Home is to be constructed on a slabs may be needed for sloping sites. floors’
Hazardous Site you must before making an
(e) sulfate and acids in ground or 5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’
Application for Inspection notify the NHBC
groundwater 8.1 ‘Internal services’.
in writing of the particular hazards which
arise. You must do this at least 8 weeks Sulfates and other chemicals can cause
before work begins on the site.” expansion and disruption of concrete. MOVEMENT JOINTS
Also, high acidity, for example in peat, or 4.5 - D11 Movement joints should be
permeable soil with acidic groundwater, suitable for their intended purpose
can cause damage to concrete. Where
concrete is at risk from chemical attack Movement joints should be located so
from the ground or where the groundwater as to limit the risk of damage caused by
is highly mobile, the level of sulfate and movement. Suitable materials are given in
other chemicals should be determined, the Materials section.

DAMP-PROOFING SAFE TRANSMISSION OF PROVISION OF

4.5 - D12 The foundation design shall LOADS INFORMATION
prevent the passage of moisture to the 4.5 - D13 Foundations shall transmit 4.5 - D14 Drawings and specifications
inside of the dwelling the loads from the structure to the should be produced in a clearly
Items to be taken into account include: supporting strata safely and without understandable format
(a) a drained cavity excessive settlement
All relevant information needed for the
Cavity walls should drain below dpc and
Items to be taken into account include: completion of the sitework should be
prevent water flooding cavities above
(a) need for adequate stiffness to stated clearly and unambiguously and be
dpc levels or crossing from the outside
ensure differential movement does not readily available to all concerned.
to the inside. A clear cavity of 225mm
adversely affect the supported structure
minimum below dpc is required. Where All necessary dimensions and levels should
(b) the nature and bearing capacity of
foundations other than strip or trench be indicated and related to:
the fill material to be placed under the
fill are used, including those for timber • at least one bench mark, and
foundation
framed dwellings, this may be reduced to • reference points on site.
(c) specification of concrete
150mm minimum below dpc provided that
(d) cover to reinforcement 4.5 - D15 Designs and specifications,
weep holes and other measures, where
necessary, are taken to ensure that the together with relevant site information,
RAFT FOUNDATIONS
cavity can drain freely. Dpc cavity trays are Rafts and semi-rafts should: shall be distributed to appropriate
4.5
not an acceptable weather-proofing to the • meet Clauses D1 to D12, where applicable personnel
edges of specialised foundations, such as • prevent the erosion of ground beneath Details should be provided with respect to:
rafts and ground beams. the raft • dimensions, type and depth of
• be designed to accommodate, where foundations
required, warm air ducts, service ducts • junctions
dpc
or services without any adverse effect • steps
at least upon performance of the foundation. • movement and construction joints
225mm
• detailing of ducts
Where appropriate, precautions should be
• location of services
taken to limit the risk of ducts becoming
• critical sequences of construction.
flooded.
Designers need to be aware of the ground
Semi-raft foundations on made ground
conditions and, in particular, any features
should follow the guidance given in
requiring special attention, such as any
Appendix 4.5-A.
existing sewers or other services, levels
GROUND
BEAM For details of suitable fill for raft of water table and the presence of any
foundations, refer to Chapter 5.1 deleterious substances, especially sulfates.
‘Substructure and ground bearing floors’
Where toxic materials (or materials likely
Appendix 5.1-A.
to present a health hazard) are found, all
PILED FOUNDATIONS available information should be supplied to
Piled foundations should: NHBC, together with proposals for dealing
• meet Clauses D1 to D12, where applicable with the hazard.
• follow the guidance given in Sitework
clause 4.5 - S11.
weep
hole The design should specify precautions to MATERIALS STANDARDS
dpc
be taken in cohesive soils where volume
changes can occur.
at least (a) meet the Technical Requirements
150mm
The bearing capacity and integrity of piles (b) take account of the design
should be confirmed by testing, when Materials that comply with the design and
required. the guidance below will be acceptable for
PIER/PAD AND BEAM FOUNDATIONS raft, pile, pier and beam foundations.
Pier/pad and beam foundations should: Materials for raft, pile, pier and beam
RAFT
FOUNDATION
• meet Clauses D1 to D12, where foundations should comply with all
applicable. relevant standards, including those listed
below. Where no standard exists, Technical
VIBRATORY GROUND IMPROVEMENT
TECHNIQUES
Vibratory ground improvement should:
• meet Clauses D1 to D12, where applicable
(b) damp-proof membranes • comply with Chapter 4.6 ‘Vibratory References to British Standards and Codes
For the provision of damp-proof ground improvement techniques’. of Practice include those made under the
membranes, reference should be made Construction Products Directive (89/106/
to Chapters 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
bearing floors’ (each section) and 5.2 European Technical Specifications
‘Suspended ground floors’ (each section). approved by a European Committee for

CONCRETE foam rubbers are the most satisfactory be modified, should be reported formally
materials for backing to movement joints to the Engineer. Resulting variations
4.5 - M2 Concrete shall be of a mix in fired clay brickwork. should be recorded and distributed to all
design which will achieve the required concerned (including NHBC).
strength and be sufficiently resistant to Hemp, fibreboard, cork and similar
chemical and frost action materials are suitable for movement joints bound
ary
in concrete, but should not be used for
For guidance on the specification expansion joints in fired clay brickwork.
and use of concrete, particularly in
relation to the choice of mix to achieve
sufficient structural strength and resist
deterioration due to ground aggressivity SITEWORK STANDARDS
and frost action, reference should be diagonals
made to Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its 4.5 - S1 All sitework shall:
reinforcement’ (each section). (a) meet the Technical Requirements
alignment
REINFORCEMENT workmanship
4.5 - M3 Reinforcement shall be Sitework that follows the design and the
sufficient to ensure proper transfer of guidance below will be acceptable for raft,
4.5
loads pile, pier and beam foundations.
Reinforcement shall be in accordance
with Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its SETTING OUT
FOUNDATIONS alignment
OTHER MATERIALS 4.5 - S2 The setting out of foundations EXCAVATIONS

shall take account of the design details 4.5 - S3 Excavations for foundations
4.5 - M4 Compressible materials shall
The accuracy of setting out should be shall take account of design dimensions
be capable of absorbing potential heave
forces, where appropriate checked by control measurements of Excess excavations should be avoided.
trenches, including their location relative Inaccuracy may prevent walls and piers
Proprietary materials should be either to site boundaries and adjacent buildings. being located centrally and therefore
assessed in accordance with Technical Levels should be checked against bench result in eccentric loading of foundations,
Requirement R3 or acceptable to NHBC marks, where appropriate. possibly foundation failure.
through established custom and practice.
In particular, for excavations check: To avoid damage, foundation excavation
4.5 - M5 Sealing materials for • trench lengths should be kept free from water (see Clause
movement joints shall be suitable for • trench widths S5).
their intended purpose • length of diagonals between external
corners. 4.5 - S4 Excavations shall take account
Joints often fail because the likely
of localised effects
variation in the size of the joint is not
compatible with the movement capability Where localised changes in strata give
of the sealing material. bou
nda
rise to differences in bearing capacity,
ry
reference should be made to the Engineer
Factors to be taken into account when to ensure this has been allowed for in the
choosing materials for movement joints design.
should include:
• designed joint width At soft spots, excavations should be
• actual joint width deepened locally to a sound bottom or,
• joint depth di
alternatively, the concrete should be
ag
• anticipated movement on
als
reinforced.
trench trench
• movement capability of seal length width
Hard spots should be removed.
• surface preparation
• backing medium Where roots are visible on the sides or
• projected life span of joint. bottoms of excavations (especially in clay
soils), the Engineer should be consulted
Sealants should be such that there is good
and the design depth modified.
adhesion between the sealant and the trench length
material either side of the joint. Where there are, or have been, trees or
In addition, for piles, pier and beam
foundations and ground improvement hedges, foundation depth should be in
Back up material should be resilient and
techniques, check: accordance with the guidance given in
should not adhere to, or react with, the
• spacing Chapter 4.2 ‘Building near trees’.
sealant.
• alignment 4.5 - S5 Excavation bottoms, when
The compressibility of the sealant back- • positions in relation to the proposed
up/joint filler is possibly the most critical prepared for concreting, shall be
superstructure. compact, reasonably dry and even
factor in the design of an adequate joint
for fired clay brickwork. Walls should be located centrally on the Trench bottoms affected by rainwater,
foundation, unless specifically designed to ground water or drying should be re-
A pressure of about 0.1N/mm should be
2
do otherwise. bottomed to form a sound surface.
sufficient to compress the material to 50%
of its original thickness. Flexible cellular Any discrepancy in dimensions, and any
polyethylene, cellular polyurethane or ground condition that causes the design to

SERVICES AND DRAINAGE Mixing, placing, testing and curing

Appendix 4.5-A
of concrete should be carried out as
4.5 - S6 Existing services shall be indicated in Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and
adequately protected its reinforcement’ (each section) and Guidance for the design of
when work is carried out in cold weather,
Any existing services, such as cables,
Chapter 1.4 ‘Cold weather working’.
semi-raft foundations on
water pipes or gas mains, may need to
be supported and protected. Any existing made ground
drains should be diverted, or bridged, RAFT FOUNDATIONS The following notes are to be used as
to prevent any foundation loads being a guide for Engineers designing raft
4.5 - S10 Raft and semi-raft
transmitted to them. foundations, but are by no means
foundations shall be constructed in
exhaustive. Special consideration will be
Services should not be rigidly encased in accordance with the design
required for certain sites.
concrete, masonry, etc.
Raft and semi-raft foundations should be
1 Raft foundations are to be designed by
Land drains should be diverted to a constructed in accordance with Clauses S1
a Chartered Civil or Structural Engineer
suitable outfall. to S9, as appropriate.
taking account of ground conditions
4.5 - S7 Provision shall be made for and the results of the site appraisal and
PILED FOUNDATIONS ground assessment.
service entries or services
4.5 - S11 Piled foundations shall be 2 Sufficient internal beams are to be
For relevant details, reference should be
4.5
constructed in accordance with the provided to adequately stiffen the slab.

made to the Design and Sitework sections 3 The area between downstand beams
design
of Chapters: should not be greater than 35m2.
5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing Items to be taken into account include: 4 The ratio of adjacent sides on plan
floors’, (a) alignment should not exceed 2 : 1.
5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’ Piles are to be vertical, unless designed 5 The minimum depth of perimeter and
8.1 ‘Internal services’ otherwise. party wall beams is to be 450mm. On
Where services pass through foundations, Piles are to be installed by an appropriate larger dwellings some internal beams
they must not affect the ability of the specialist under the Engineer’s should be of the same depth as the
foundation to carry loads. supervision. perimeter beams.
6 Perimeter and internal beams should
Services should be either sleeved or (b) load capacity verification be sufficiently wide at their base to
passed through a suitably strengthened Care should be taken to ensure that carry their total loading at the allowable
opening in the foundation. the bond of beams to pads and piles is bearing pressure for the site.
in accordance with the design and is 7 Beams are to be designed to span 3m
In the case of drains, it is important to
adequate. simply supported and cantilever 1.5m.
leave sufficient space for movement,
8 Beams are to use properly formed
to ensure that the drain is capable of Test loading should be undertaken when
reinforcement in accordance with BS
maintaining line and gradient and any required.
8110.
movement which may take place.
The Builder is to obtain written 9 Where mesh is used in beams, it should
confirmation that the piles are suitable for be delivered to the site pre-bent.
REINFORCEMENT their design load. 10 All beams should be cast on a minimum
4.5 - S8 Reinforcement shall be cut, of 50mm concrete blinding.
If piles are more than 75mm out of 11 Minimum cover to reinforcement should
bent and placed as shown in the design
position, or out of alignment by more than be 40mm.
Reinforcement shall be clean and free from 1 : 75, the Engineer should reconsider the 12 Floor slabs should be a minimum
loose rust and should be placed correctly. adequacy of the foundation design. 150mm thick, with nominal top face
Bars should be properly supported to reinforcement as a minimum and anti-
Unless otherwise recommended by the
ensure that the cover indicated in the crack reinforcement in the bottom face,
Engineer, NHBC will expect piles which
design is maintained. if appropriate.
are misaligned by more than 150mm in
Bars should be secured at laps and any direction, or which are more than 5° 13 Stools or similar should be used to
crossings. from their specified rake, to be replaced, support floor slab mesh during casting.
or additional piles to be provided in 14 Corners and junctions to beams should
be adequately tied using similar
CONCRETING accordance with design modifications
reinforcement to the beams.
provided by the Engineer.
4.5 - S9 Concrete shall be correctly 15 A minimum cavity drain of 225mm
mixed, placed and cured below dpc is to be maintained.
PIER AND BEAM
Concreting should be carried out, as far as
possible, in one operation, taking account of
FOUNDATIONS
weather conditions and available daylight. 4.5 - S12 Pier and beam foundations
Concrete should be placed as soon as shall be constructed in accordance with
possible after the excavation or, where the design
necessary, after the reinforcement has been
Pier/pad and beam (and reinforced
checked. Excavation and/or reinforcement
concrete strip) foundations should be
may need to be approved by the Engineer
constructed to meet Clauses S1 to S9, as
or his representative, before concreting
appropriate.
commences. In England and Wales,
foundations should be approved by the
person responsible for the Building Control
inspections, before the concrete is placed.

INDEX
A   L   S  
Alignment 4 Levels 1  Sealing materials 3 
C   Loads 2, 4  Services 1, 4 
Cavity walls 2 M   Setting out 3 
Compatible materials 2  Made ground 4  Settlement 1 
Concrete 3, 4  Materials standards 2  Site conditions 1 
D   Movement joints 1, 3  Sitework standards 3 
Damp proofing 2  N Statutory requirements 1 
Design standards 1  Notification 1  Sulfates 1 
Drainage 1, 4  P   Supervision 1 
Dwelling design 1  Pier/pad and beam 2, 4  T  
E   foundations Trees 1 
Excavations 3  Piled foundations 2 , 4 Trench bottoms 3 
F   Provision of information 2 
4.5
V  
Frost 1  R   Vibratory techniques 2 
H   Raft foundations 2, 4 
Hazardous ground 1  Reinforcement 3 

Part 4 Foundations
Chapter 4.6
Vibratory ground improvement techniques
4.6 Vibratory ground improvement techniques
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for vibratory ground
Statutory requirements and other D2-D3 1
improvement techniques.
standards
Hazardous ground D4 1
Notification D5 1
Site investigation D6 1
Suitability of ground conditions D7 1
Confirmation of suitability of proposed D8 2
treatment
Compatibility of layout and design for D9 2
the treated ground
4.6
MATERIALS
Stone fill M2 3
Granular material M3 4
SITEWORK
Site supervision S2 4
Verification of completed treatment S3-S4 4-5
APPENDIX 4.6-A
Soil classification chart 6
Vibratory techniques 7
APPENDIX 4.6-B
Materials for use as fill 9
INDEX 9

Vibratory ground improvement techniques 4.6
DESIGN STANDARDS SITE INVESTIGATION SUITABILITY OF GROUND
4.6 - D6 The Engineer shall commission CONDITIONS
4.6 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical a site investigation and advise the
Requirements 4.6 - D7 The ground shall be suitable
interested parties for vibratory ground improvement
Design that follows the guidance below will The site investigation should take account of:
be acceptable for foundations on ground The Engineer should assess the ground
BS 5930 Code of practice for site
improved by vibratory techniques. and be satisfied that it is suitable for
investigations
treatment. Vibratory ground improvement
BS 10175 Investigation of potentially
techniques suitable for various ground
STATUTORY contaminated sites - Code of
conditions are detailed in Appendix 4.6-A.
practice.
REQUIREMENTS AND Items to be taken into account include:
OTHER STANDARDS Chapter 4.1 ‘Land quality - managing (a) ground conditions acceptable for
ground conditions’ treatment
4.6 - D2 Design shall comply with
statutory requirements Conditions acceptable for treatment are
The site investigation should at least
only those within zones A and B of the
Design should be in accordance with determine:
chart.
relevant Building Regulations and other • the depths and properties of the natural
statutory requirements. materials under the site, including the
Micron
1.18
3.35
37.5
mm
150
212
300
425
600
6.3
63
10
14
20
28
50
63
75
2
5
100
4.6
presence of caves, workings, or natural 90
phenomena such as rocks or soils which

80
4.6 - D3 Design shall follow relevant 70

Zone B
stone
columns
dissolve or erode when exposed to the
PERCENTAGE PASSING
Standards and Codes of Practice 60
50
Zone A
deep
passage of water. The Engineer should 40

compaction
Relevant British Standards and Codes of

establish the scope of, and supervise,
30
Practice include: 20
the site investigation, taking account 10
BS 5930 Code of practice for site 0
of the findings of the desk study. Data

2 6 20 60 200 600 2 6 20 60 200 mm
Fine Medium Coarse Fine Medium Coarse Fine Medium Coarse
investigations
CLAY COBBLES
SILT SAND GRAVEL
for comparison with post treatment

BS 8004 Code of practice for
properties should be established
foundations Note: an enlarged chart appears in
• the extent and nature of any areas of
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete Appendix 4.6-A.
filled ground on the site, including:
BS 10175 Investigation of potentially
- the proportions and distribution of (b) ground conditions not acceptable for
contaminated sites - Code of
constituent materials treatment
practice.
- the state of compaction of the fill The following ground conditions are NOT
material throughout its depth acceptable for treatment:
HAZARDOUS GROUND - the grading and particle size • soft clays with an undrained shear
distribution of fill materials strength less than 30kN/m2. The wet
4.6 - D4 The design of foundations shall
- the potential for gas generation from process may be applicable to clays
be undertaken by an Engineer and take
fill materials with a lower undrained shear strength
account of the characteristics of the
- the potential for spontaneous but such sites should be examined
site, its ground and any hazards
combustion of fill and/or natural individually. Under no circumstances can
The foundation design should be carried deposits the treatment of clays with an undrained
out by an Engineer in accordance with • the presence and extent of any existing shear strength of 15kN/m2 or less be
Technical Requirement R5 - see Chapter 1.1. or redundant services and drains, and accepted
what information is available regarding • ground with peat layers close to
In this Chapter, the term “Engineer” means the extent and nature of the backfill to foundation level or the base of the
an engineer who is independent of the the excavations stone column, or where intermediate
specialist contractor responsible for the • the presence, level and nature of any layers of peat are thicker than 200mm
vibratory ground improvement techniques. ground water, and if it is likely to rise and either as a single layer or the sum of
Details of ground hazards to be taken into cause heave or collapse by saturation the thicknesses of individual layers
consideration are given in Chapters: • whether the site has been previously throughout the length of the stone
4.1 ‘Land quality - managing ground occupied by any structure, and whether column
conditions’ these structures have left any potential • voided filled ground, eg old water tanks,
4.2 ‘Building near trees’ underground obstructions or hardspots, pottery, glass bottles, concrete rubble or
eg basement walls, floor slabs etc brick fill of unsuitable grading
• whether there are any contaminated • chalk fill or clay fills subject to:
NOTIFICATION substances or gases present or - collapse settlement
4.6 - D5 NHBC shall be notified before suspected. - collapse caused by saturation
work starts on site - rising or fluctuating water levels
The Specialist Contractor should be
NHBC Rules state: “If a Home is to be • filled ground still settling or expected to
involved in the investigation.
constructed on a Hazardous Site you must settle:
before making Application for Inspection The results of the investigation should be - under its own weight
notify the NHBC in writing of the particular sent to NHBC. - where there is a high organic content
hazards which arise. You must do this at - where decay is continuing
least 8 weeks before work begins on the
settlement
site.” of fill
layers with
high organic
content

• fill, containing degradable material • obstructions and variations in the CONFIRMATION OF

where organic material forms more than density of fill and natural ground (hard
15% of fill by volume spots) SUITABILITY OF
• highly contaminated ground, eg toxic • alterations to the oversite level before PROPOSED TREATMENT
waste, or where inflammable, explosive or after treatment or disturbance of
or toxic gas generation will take place ground by excavations after treatment 4.6 - D8 The builder shall obtain
(stone columns may act as vertical vents) • the location of changes in the profile of written confirmation from the Engineer
the natural underlying ground eg edges and Specialist Contractor that the site
of pits or quarries, slopes, or manmade is suitable for the proposed ground
obstructions such as soakaways or improvement system
drainage runs Confirmation that the site is suitable for
• long term lowering of water table the proposed system should be made
causing settlement of existing adjacent available to NHBC.
stone column acting as vent
for dangerous gases
buildings
The Engineer and Specialist Contractor
should agree the following in writing
adjacent new
building building before work commences on site:
• a detailed schedule of work
• a programme of work
4.6
• what tests are to be carried out on

stone column
completion of the work
• clays with a plasticity index greater than
original water level
• responsibility for procedures and tests.
40% For details of tests see Sitework clause S3.
• highly sensitive soils liable to collapse or
remoulding dry process
depressed water level The following should also be taken into
account:
(c) detrimental factors • the layout and depth of the stone
Factors to be considered include the • short term rise in local water table due
to large volumes of water used in wet columns and the accuracy to be
following: achieved (see Sitework clause S2)
• where partial depth treatment of filled process during construction causing
settlement or heave of existing adjacent • what factors of safety have been
ground is proposed, the Engineer incorporated into the design to allow for
should be satisfied as to the anticipated buildings
unforeseen contingencies
performance of both the treated • the criteria for non acceptance of the
and untreated zones. The Specialist new vibrating poker work
adjacent
Contractor should take responsibility for building
building
• what calculations and case histories
the treated zone and the decision as to are required to justify the ground
the depth of treatment improvement proposals together with
• the minimum depth of soil treated the layout of the stone columns and
stone column raised water level
should allow for the interaction of details of the equipment and process to
adjacent foundations be used on site.
original water level
house A house B These written agreements should be made
wet process available to NHBC before work commences
on site.
• surface water sewers should be used
for rainwater disposal where possible, COMPATIBILITY OF
but where soakaways are necessary,
these should be positioned so that LAYOUT AND DESIGN FOR
their construction and operation is not THE TREATED GROUND
detrimental to the treated ground
4.6 - D9 Design shall ensure that
• soils with a modified Plasticity Index of
interaction of site layout and dwelling design are
adjacent foundations 10% or greater should have foundations
compatible with the treated ground
designed to accommodate volume
• stone columns may form vertical drains changes, and the depth of concrete Items to be taken into account include:
allowing the passage of water to a foundation should be in accordance with (a) limitations of the treated ground
moisture susceptible strata, or provide Chapter 4.2 ‘Building near trees’. The Engineer should:
seepage paths for gases • undertake discussion with the Specialist
Contractor to confirm the feasibility of
proposals
• determine the loads to be imposed by
the buildings and assess against the
results of the site investigation
depth in accordance
with Chapter 4.2
stone column acting

as soakaway

• if during excavations for foundations in
structural load
from design
treated ground it is found that excessive
depths of concrete are required, then
precautions should be taken to ensure
overall stability of the foundations, and
the Engineer should be satisfied that
construction of the foundation will not
be detrimental to the treated ground.
(e) use of suspended ground floors
ground bearing capacity
and settlement potential
45º Suspended ground floors should be
provided for all dwellings where vibratory
ground improvement has been carried out.
• consider limitations of the configuration
of the dwellings: (f) notice to NHBC
- T-block vulnerable at junction excavation and Notice of the proposed development
drain/service
- vulnerability of long blocks trenches should should be forwarded to NHBC.
be above 45º line
• avoid siting buildings in locations where
major changes in ground conditions can Inform NHBC of the appointment of
be expected the Specialist Contractor and of the
4.6
anticipated commencement date for
(d) suitable foundation types treatment.
The following criteria should be
incorporated in the foundation design
to ensure the compatibility and overall
stability of the foundations and MATERIALS STANDARDS
superstructure:
• only two types of foundations are 4.6 - M1 All materials shall:
suitable, both of which should comply (a) meet the Technical Requirements
with the minimum criteria for areas of (b) take account of the design
reinforcement as defined in BS 8110. Materials that comply with the design and
They are: the guidance below will be acceptable for
- reinforced concrete strip foundation use in conjunction with vibratory ground
improvement techniques.
Materials for use in conjunction with
• advise and discuss design criteria with vibratory ground improvement techniques
NHBC at the design stage. shall comply with all relevant standards,
(b) limitations of ground support including those listed below. Where no
The Engineer should: reinforced concrete standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
strip foundation
• establish the likely limits of ground applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
movement Standards and Technical Requirements’).
• allow for ground movement in the - reinforced concrete raft or semi-raft References to British Standards and Codes
design, including where appropriate: foundation positioned on a uniformly of Practice include those made under the
- position and spacing of movement compacted bed of hardcore Construction Products Directive (89/106/
joints EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
- flexibility of masonry mortars raft or
semi-raft European Technical Specifications
- masonry reinforcement. foundation
brick reinforcement • the depth of foundations to be a
and movement
joints in walls minimum of 600mm below the surface
STONE FILL
if required
of the treated ground, and founded 4.6 - M2 Stone fill for forming columns
on firm material of adequate bearing shall be compatible with the ground
capacity conditions, and be suitable for the
• where the treated ground is of a vibratory ground improvement process
granular nature, a reinforced concrete
Stone fill should be clean, hard, inert
strip foundation will normally be
(c) drainage and service trenches material complying with the guidance
acceptable provided that the full depth
The Engineer should consider the influence given in Appendix 4.6-B.
of all fill material is treated
of drainage and other service trenches on • if the treated ground is of a cohesive In acidic ground conditions, limestone fill
the stability of the complete design (see nature, a suitably designed raft, may not be acceptable.
Sitework clause S4). semi-raft or reinforced concrete strip
Natural gravel or crushed rock aggregate
foundation will normally be acceptable.
of nominal single-size within the range 20-
The reinforced concrete foundation
75mm will normally be acceptable.
should be designed to span between the
centres of adjacent stone columns
• if partial depth treatment of filled
ground is proposed then a suitably
designed reinforced concrete raft or
semi-raft foundation should be used

GRANULAR MATERIAL the intersection of adjacent reinforced
anticipated depth
concrete strips
4.6 - M3 Granular material for raising
2m 2m 2m maximum
site levels before treatment or adding centres
during deep compaction shall:
50% more
(a) be free from hazardous materials backfill than
anticipated
unless appropriate precautions are depth 25%
taken, and 2m max
greater than
anticipated
centres
(b) be suitable for compaction
The appropriate precautions to be taken VERIFICATION OF
where hazardous materials are present in
fill are detailed in Appendix 4.6-B. COMPLETED TREATMENT
• missing stone columns are replaced 4.6 - S3 The Engineer shall require the
The test requirements for fill given in • stone columns which are misaligned by
Appendix 4.6-B should be followed where Specialist Contractor to verify that the
more than 150mm in any direction are ground treatment is satisfactory
appropriate. replaced
Well graded, inert fill which passes a stone column mis-aligned
100mm x 100mm screen in all directions by 150mm or less - (a) suitable testing
no action needed
and contains less than 10% fine material of Tests should be carried out to establish the
4.6
silt or clay size will normally be acceptable degree of ground improvement, its load-
for raising site levels. bearing characteristics and settlement
stone column potential.
mis-aligned by
The grading of material for adding during more than
deep compaction should be within Zone A missing stone 150mm - new The types of test that can be used are
column - new column required
of the chart shown in Design clause D7 and column required in correct position described in the following clauses. The
Appendix 4.6-A. Specialist Contractor should predict the
results from his experience of work on the
type of ground, prior to the test taking
• a check on the location of all stone place. Prediction of the results and the
SITEWORK STANDARDS columns is made by the Engineer’s degree of tolerance within those results
representative prior to the specialist is to be agreed with the Engineer prior to
4.6 - S1 All sitework shall: testing, and compared with the test results.
(a) meet the Technical Requirements plant leaving the site.
(b) take account of the design If for example a threefold improvement
(b) unforeseen circumstances
(c) follow established good practice and were predicted and only a twofold
Allowance should be made for:
workmanship improvement achieved, this could mean
• unforeseen changes in the site
that the ground was different to that
Sitework that complies with the design conditions, or trends which may affect
indicated by the investigation, or that the
and guidance below will be acceptable for site conditions. Changes should be
treatment carried out differed from the
vibratory ground improvement. recorded and reported to the Engineer
specified treatment. In such a case, further
immediately they become apparent
investigation would be necessary.
• changes in the anticipated depth of
SITE SUPERVISION the compaction point in excess of 25% Tests on ground containing clay soils may
4.6 - S2 The Builder shall ensure that should be recorded and reported to the need to be delayed for a few days after the
the Engineer visits the site and provides Engineer and Specialist Contractor as completion of treatment to allow excess
competent supervision throughout the soon as possible but no later than the pore pressures to dissipate.
ground treatment process end of the day on which they occur
• variations of over 50% in the quantity The Engineer may choose any combination
The Engineer should provide competent of the following tests:
full time site supervision throughout the of backfill used in compaction points of
the same length. Variations should be • 600mm diameter plate tests or dummy
period of the ground treatment process. footing tests using long stiffened steel
recorded and reported to the Engineer
Some aspects of sitework may be the and Specialist Contractor at the end of plates
responsibility of the Engineer or his the day on which they occur • mini zone test
representative, or of the Specialist • unforeseen obstructions requiring • in-situ test
Contractor, rather than of the Builder. either local removal and backfilling prior • trial pits
to treatment, or realignment of, and • zone test.
additional columns, coupled with local 600MM DIAMETER PLATE TESTS OR
(a) location, depth and alignment of amendment of foundation design
columns DUMMY FOOTING TESTS USING LONG
• the effects of any of the above on STIFFENED STEEL PLATES
Supervision should be provided to ensure the final efficiency of the treatment.
that: This test will not determine the design but
These are to be fully considered by the will allow for an assessment to be made of
• the minimum required depth of the Engineer and the Specialist Contractor.
stone columns is achieved, and they are the workmanship on the stone columns.
The Builder and NHBC are to be advised Plate tests should be carried out on stone
correctly located. The Builder should immediately about proposed remedial
provide sufficient profiles to enable columns or treated ground at a frequency
measures. of at least one test per day per rig.
locations to be checked
• the stone columns are located either
centrally under the foundations they
are to support or in the predetermined
staggered arrangement, at a maximum
of 2 metres centre to centre and at

MINI ZONE TEST (b) written confirmation of completed
A mini zone test can be used as a limited treatment
substitute for zone tests. The test should On completion of the treatment the
be applied to at least two stone columns Engineer should:
and the area of foundation which they • from the results of the tests carried out
support. The load may be applied through satisfy himself that the treated ground
a rigid beam or stiffened plate using skips has achieved the anticipated condition
or other known loads arranged to give a assumed in his design
uniform distribution of the load. • once satisfied with the effectiveness of
the treatment in relation to the design,
To be useful, mini zone tests should be
advise the Builder and NHBC accordingly
continued for sufficient time for creep
in writing
behaviour to be quantified and allowances
• advise the Builder of any special
for this time should be made in the overall
precautions which should be taken for
project programme.
the positioning of services both beneath
the dwelling and adjacent to it.
(c) record of the work

A comprehensive record of all works
4.6
mini zone including information concerning the
test using skips
treatment, depth of fill, volume of stone
used, on-site changes and all other
relevant information, should be made
available to NHBC.
IN-SITU TEST 4.6 - S4 The Builder shall ensure that

Where vibration will improve the ground treated ground is not disturbed by
itself, eg granular materials, then in-situ subsequent excavations
testing is appropriate. The improvement Ensure that the minimum clearance
in density of deep fill (greater than 5m) between excavations and foundations
should be checked in this manner. The is not less than the depth of excavation
improvement can be assessed when the minus the depth of the structural foundation.
test results are compared with the in-situ
test results recorded during the pre-
treatment investigation.
TRIAL PITS
Trial pits can be excavated around trial
stone columns to prove that they are fully
formed and to the required depth and
diameter. This is a destructive test and
allowance should be made accordingly.
45º
ZONE TEST
An isolated pad or strip footing is
used, and up to 8 stone columns and
the intervening ground can be tested.
excavation and
Loadings, which must simulate the drain/service
trenches should
dwelling loads, are held for 24 hours at be above 45º line
pre-determined stages to examine creep
behaviour.
zone test

Appendix 4.6-A
SOIL CLASSIFICATION CHART
Conditions acceptable for treatment are only those within zones A and B of the chart.
Micron
1.18
37.5
3.35
mm
150
212
300
425
600
6.3
50
63
63
10
14
20
28
75
2
5
100
90
80
Zone B
70 stone
columns
PERCENTAGE PASSING
60
Zone A
50 deep
compaction
4.6
40
30
20
10
0
0.002 0.006 0.02 0.06 0.2 0.6 2 6 20 60 200 mm
Fine Medium Coarse Fine Medium Coarse Fine Medium Coarse
CLAY COBBLES
SILT SAND GRAVEL

Vibratory techniques
The vibratory process is applied usually to weak natural soils and filled ground. The purpose
is to improve the load bearing capacity, reduce settlement and provide an adequate bearing
stratum for the foundation supporting the dwelling.
A decision to buy a hazardous site is an acceptance by the builder/developer of the risks
involved. It is important that the ground hazards are assessed before buying the site, and
that allowance is made in foundation design for any consequences of this assessment.
Hazardous sites are defined in NHBC Rules.
ACCEPTABLE METHODS
Several vibratory techniques are acceptable. Some use a vibrating poker suspended from a
crane. The poker penetrates the ground under its own weight aided by horizontal vibration
and thus forms a void. Other techniques use an impact hammer system to form and compact
stone columns. The two common techniques are:
Stone columns - Dry process

(applicable to soft clays and silts and to inorganic filled ground)
4.6
The poker is withdrawn to leave a void which is partially filled with stone. The poker is then
reintroduced and used to compact the stone and the surrounding strata. This process is
repeated until the whole void is filled with compacted stone and the surrounding existing
granular strata increased in density. Penetration of the poker is assisted by compressed air
delivered to the nose of the vibrator which also releases suction on withdrawal.
compressed air
clean, hard
inert stone
void is formed as stone backfill is continuous stone

vibrator displaces placed into void column formed
the ground during withdrawal
of vibrator
Stone columns - Wet process

(applicable to soft clays and silts and to inorganic filled ground, and where the water table is
high)
The process is similar to the dry process except that water is used to maintain ground
stability and to keep the stone ‘clean’ while it is being placed and compacted.
Note: Special bottom feed pokers or choke tubes which introduce stone into the void via the
end of the poker or tube are available. These use compressed air as a flushing medium but
can be used in weak ground or ground with a high water table.
water jet
water compacted
flushing column
clean, hard
inert stone
void is formed as vibrator stone backfill is placed continuous stone

displaces the ground into the void during column formed
withdrawal of vibrator -
water assists in
stabilising the hole

A third technique is:
Deep Compaction
(applicable to saturated fine sands, which are rarely found in the UK)
After penetration the poker is withdrawn in stages and compacts the existing strata. Granular
material is introduced in a similar manner to the wet and dry process. Water flushing, where
excess water drains into sands, can assist this process.
compacted zone
granular
material
4.6
vibrator displaces granular material existing ground

the ground is placed into is compacted
the depression
around vibrator
Alternative systems, methods or variations to those given in this Chapter must be shown
to be suitable for their purpose and for the conditions for which they are intended, prior to
acceptance by NHBC.
On completion of the vibratory ground improvement, the combined ground/column system
offers support to the foundations for the proposed structures. The application of vibratory
techniques improves the strength of the combined ground/column system and the stiffness
by between two and three times in clay soils. Settlements of the treated area may therefore
be reduced to between half and a third of the magnitude of that which would otherwise occur.
Note: The stone columns produced by vibratory techniques are not piles and should never
be considered so. Stone columns derive their capacity by interacting with the surrounding
ground. Piles are more than 10 times stiffer than stone columns.
The compaction is localised and could be variable. Reinforced foundations are needed.
It should not be assumed that all of the surrounding ground has been improved.

Sulfate content should be expressed as a • on wet sites, or sites with a high water
Appendix 4.6-B percentage SO4 by weight on the basis of table, crushed or broken bricks which
acid soluble testing, taking full account of have no limit on their soluble salt
the recommendations of BRE Digest 363 content (as defined in BS EN 771).
and BS 5328 Part 1.
MATERIALS FOR USE AS Expansive materials
FILL Sources of fill material Fill containing expansive materials is not
Where the material is of a stable and acceptable for use as support to structural
Hazardous materials uniform type from one source, it may foundations and slabs or as backfill to
The following materials require testing to only be necessary to check its suitability associated trenches.
ensure their suitability for use as fill to once. If material is variable, or from a
support structural foundations and slabs number of sources, it should all be suitable.
or as backfill to associated trenches: Regular inspections and/or testing may be
• acid wastes required.
• reactive materials
• materials that include sulfates (eg Where industrial waste is permitted as
gypsum) fill material, it is essential that sufficient
• organic materials testing is carried out to ensure suitability.
• toxic materials
Where material is obtained from stockpiles,
• materials that cause noxious fumes,
4.6
check the material is uniform. Different
rot, undue settlement or damage to
forms of stockpiling can affect particle
surrounding materials.
size/grading. The outside of a stockpile
Test requirements may be weathered and may not be the
Tests should be carried out by a suitably same as unweathered material.
qualified person with a detailed knowledge
Fill requiring NHBC approval
of:
The following types of fill should not be
• the material to be tested, and
used unless written permission has been
• the proposed conditions of use.
obtained from NHBC:
The samples tested must be representative • colliery shale and any other residue
of the true nature of the material. It may from mineral extraction
be necessary to take a number of samples • slags
to find out the material characteristics of • furnace ashes and other products of
the fill. combustion
• material obtained from demolition
INDEX
A L V
Approval 9 Layout 2 Verification 4
C M Vibratory techniques 7
Compatibility 2 Materials standards 3 W
D N Written confirmation 2
Deep compaction 6, 8 Notifications 1, 3
Design 2 S
Design standards 1 Service trenches 3
Drainage 3 Site investigations 1
E Sitework standards 4
Expansive materials 9 Soil classifications 6
F Statutory requirements 1
Fill materials 9 Stone columns 6, 7
Foundation types 3 Stone fill 3
G Supervision 4
Granular material 4 Suspended ground floors 3
Ground conditions 1 T
H Testing 4, 5, 9
Hazardous materials 9

Part 5
Substructure and ground floors
5.1 Substructure and ground bearing floors
5.2 Suspended ground floors
5.3 Drainage below ground

Part 5 Substructure and ground floors
Chapter 5.1
Substructure and ground bearing floors
CONTENTS SCOPE
Requirements and recommendations for substructure,
Design standards D1 1 excluding foundations. It includes substructure walls, ground
Statutory requirements D2 1 bearing floors (where depth of fill is not more than 600mm),
Transfer of loads D3 1 basements and installation of services below dpc.
Ground conditions D4 1
Services and drainage D5 2
Walls below dpc D6-D7 2
Ground below fill D8 2
Hazardous fill D9-D10 3
Fill deeper than 600mm D11 3
Floor slab damp-proofing D12 3
Damp-proof course D13 3
Thermal insulation D14 3
Ground floor slab D15 4
Basements D16 4
MATERIALS
5.1
Masonry below dpc M2 5

Site mixed mortar M3 5
Proprietary mortar M4 5
Wall ties M5 5
Wall insulation M6 5
Fill M7 5
Damp-proof membrane M8 6
Concrete M9 6
Tanking materials M10 6
Floor insulation M11 6
Damp-proof course materials M12 6
SITEWORK
Walls below dpc S2 6
Ground below fill S3 7
Fill supporting ground bearing slabs S4-S5 7
Trench backfill S6 7
Blinding S7 8
Damp-proofing floors S8 8
Damp-proof course S9 8
Laying thermal insulation S10 8
Laying the slab S11 8
Basements S12 8
APPENDIX 5.1-A
Materials for use as fill 9
APPENDIX 5.1-B
Basement constructions 10
APPENDIX 5.1-C
Typical details for basements 10
INDEX 12

Substructure and ground bearing floors 5.1
In certain parts of the country, special T
DESIGN STANDARDS precautions may be necessary to reduce t1
where cavity
t2 fill is omitted
then:
the entry of radon gas. Areas in England T =t1 + t2
and Wales where special precautions are
Requirements
necessary are detailed in BRE Report 211.
Design that follows the guidance below will
be acceptable for substructure and ground When precautions are necessary they
H
bearing floors. should be acceptable to NHBC.
(b) bearing capacity of the ground
STATUTORY Ground bearing floors may only be used
where:
REQUIREMENTS • trenches are backfilled with suitable
5.1 - D2 Design shall comply with all material and the fill is properly
relevant statutory requirements compacted
• infill is less than 600mm in depth and
properly compacted.
statutory requirements. Where the bearing capacity and nature of
the ground varies, a ground bearing floor
TRANSFER OF LOADS may not be suitable, even if the depth of T
fill is less than 600mm. Special measures

5.1 - D3 Design of substructure and may be needed to restrict settlement, such
ground bearing floors shall ensure that as the use of suspended floor construction.
loads are supported and transferred to
foundations, or to the ground, without (c) nature of the ground
undue movement Shrinkable soil, expansive materials
or other unstable soils may require H
Studies of the site, carried out in
suspended floor construction. Shrinkable
accordance with Chapter 4.1 ‘Land quality
soils are classified as those containing
- managing ground conditions’ should
5.1
more than 35% fine particles (silt and
be taken into account in the design of
clay) and have a modified Plasticity Index
substructure.
of 10% or greater (see Chapters 4.2
Where the depth of infill exceeds 600mm, ‘Building near trees’ (each section) and 5.2
the floor must be designed as a suspended ‘Suspended ground floors’ (each section)).
floor, as described in Chapter 5.2
A soil-testing laboratory should be
‘Suspended ground floors’ (Design).
consulted to verify the plasticity index of
Loadbearing partitions should not be the soil.
• difference between floor levels of
supported off ground bearing floors. They
(d) effect of sloping ground on depth of adjacent structures (H) is greater than 4
should have proper foundations (reference
infill times the total width of wall (T).
should be made to Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip and
Sloping ground may require steps in the T
trench fill foundations’ (each section)).
substructure and possibly different floor t1 t2
In Scotland, sleeper walls should not be levels. Where more than 600mm of infill
built off ground bearing floors. is required at any point in a self-contained
area, the floor over the whole of that where cavity
Movement joints should be aligned area must be of suspended construction
fill is omitted
then:
with those in the foundations. Details as described in Chapter 5.2 ‘Suspended
T =t1 + t2
of movement joint design are given in ground floors’ (Design).

Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ H greater
(Design). suspended floor
than 4xT
GROUND CONDITIONS more than

600mm
5.1 - D4 Substructure shall not be

adversely affected by the ground
conditions
Construction on steep slopes may involve
Items to be taken into account include: walls below dpc level acting as retaining
(a) ground hazards walls. These should be designed by an
The main hazards likely to affect Engineer where the:
substructure and ground bearing floors • height (H) of slab above ground level is
are chemicals, particularly sulfates, greater than 4 times the total width of
contaminated material above or in the wall (T)
ground and waterlogged ground.

(e) site works and construction (c) provision of new services BLOCKWORK

Special precautions may be needed to It is important that the design drawings Concrete blocks for use below dpc should
prevent damage to the substructure from include all necessary details relating to comply with BS EN 771 and have:
site operations on adjoining ground, such the proposed underground services (see • a density exceeding 1500kg/m3, or
as ground treatment or surcharging due Clause D17). • a compressive strength not less than
to infill. 7.3N/mm2.
Drain pipes passing through or under the
Where necessary, to resist sulfate attack
building may require flexible connections
SERVICES AND DRAINAGE or other means of accommodating
and ensure adequate durability, special
blocks made with a higher than normal
5.1 - D5 Substructure shall not be differential movement. Further details
cement content and/or with sulfate-
adversely affected by services and are given in Sitework clause 5.1 - S2(e)
resisting cement should be used.
drainage and Chapter 5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’
(Design and Sitework). If there is any doubt about the suitability of
Items to be taken into account include: a type of block, particularly where acids or
(a) surface water and sub-soil drainage Services should be arranged so that
sulfates occur, written confirmation should
Surface and/or land drainage may be future access, if required, can be obtained
be obtained from the block manufacturer
needed on sites where there is a risk of without affecting structural stability.
concerning its suitability for the:
waterlogging. Ground or paths adjoining • geographical location
the dwelling should slope away at a slight WALLS BELOW DPC • location in the structure.
fall. Ground or path level should be at least
150mm below dpc. 5.1 - D6 Walls below dpc shall be capable
MORTAR
of supporting their intended loads and, The selection of mortar for use below dpc
Walls which act as retaining walls may where necessary, be resistant to frost should follow the recommendations given
require land drains, hardcore fill and action, sulfates and other harmful or in BS 5628 : Part 3. Alternatively, the mix
suitable outlets to dispose of any sub-soil toxic materials may be 1 : 1 : 5½, cement : lime : sand, with
water that collects behind the wall.
Generally, masonry walls below dpc plasticiser.
(b) existing underground services should be designed and constructed as
Sulfate-resisting cement should be
All existing services should be located and described in Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry
used where recommended by the brick
identified before work commences. Where walls’ (each section) and sleeper walls as
manufacturer and where sulfates are
5.1
existing services would be obstructed by described in Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip and trench
present in the ground or ground water.
the foundations and substructure, they fill foundations’ (each section).
should be: Proprietary mortars and admixtures
• disconnected and grubbed up, or Recommendations for the design strength
should only be used strictly in accordance
• diverted and any remaining voids filled of bricks, masonry blocks and mortars are
with the manufacturer’s recommendations,
with concrete or grout, or given in BS 5628.
taking into account the type of masonry
• protected where they are to remain Frost damage occurs on saturated unit and its location.
active. masonry exposed to freezing conditions.
For non-clay bricks or blocks, manufacturers’
To avoid flooding around, in or under Bricks, blocks and mortars which are
recommendations should be followed.
dwellings, existing active ground water located between 150mm above, and
drainage should be retained. Water from 150mm below ground level, are the most 5.1 - D7 Walls below dpc shall be of
these drains may require diversion. likely to be damaged by frost. adequate strength to resist overturning
forces when acting as temporary
It is very difficult during a dry period to BRICKWORK
retaining walls during construction
find out whether ground water drains Fletton or common bricks are usually of
are active, so where they are severed or durability designations F1,S2 or F1,S1. If in Walls which act as temporary retaining
disturbed, they should be re-connected to doubt as to their suitability, bricks of F2,S2 walls, due to the sequence of backfilling
a suitable outfall. or F2,S1. designation should be specified or trenches and filling the wall cavity, should
the manufacturer consulted. be designed:
• as retaining walls, or
Where bricks of grade F1,S2 or F1,S1. are • by an Engineer in accordance with
to be used in the outer leaf below dpc, Technical Requirement R5, or
land drains
or where they could be frozen when • so that the thickness of the leaf acting
diverted to
suitable
saturated, it is most important to ensure as the temporary retaining wall is as
outfall that they are durable. given in Sitework clause 5.1 - S2(b).
If there is any doubt about the suitability The drawings and/or specification should
of a particular brick, written confirmation be detailed accordingly.
diversion should be obtained from the brick
manufacturer concerning its suitability for GROUND BELOW FILL
the:
5.1 - D8 Ground below fill shall be
• geographical location
suitable to support ground bearing floors
• location in the structure.
without undue movement
Calcium silicate bricks for use below dpc
Before fill is placed, all topsoil containing
should be at least compressive strength
roots and vegetation should be removed
class 20.
and a suitable bearing surface prepared.
Bricks used in walls which act as retaining
walls should be of a type recommended
by the manufacturer for the conditions of
exposure.

HAZARDOUS FILL FLOOR SLAB DAMP- DAMP-PROOF COURSE
5.1 - D9 Harmful or toxic materials PROOFING 5.1 - D13 Moisture from the ground shall
present in fill, or made ground below fill, be prevented from reaching the inside of
5.1 - D12 Ground bearing floors shall
shall be identified to the satisfaction of the building
resist the passage of moisture to the
NHBC inside of the dwelling A damp-proof course should be positioned
Details of materials, test requirements at least 150mm above finished ground or
and sources of fill material are given in paving level.
(a) ground moisture
Appendix 5.1-A. Ground bearing concrete floor slabs should Horizontal dpcs should be impermeable.
5.1 - D10 The performance of the be protected against ground moisture by They should be either lapped (at least
substructure shall not be affected by providing a continuous membrane, details 100mm) or welted, where appropriate, and,
harmful or toxic materials present in the of which are given in the Materials section. in all cases, linked to the dpm.
fill or in the ground Care should be taken not to trap moisture
when a combination of damp proofing and
Precautions should be taken to avoid vapour control layers are used.
dpc
adverse effects by either:
• ensuring that made ground and fill When the membrane is located below the
at least
materials are free from harmful or toxic slab, a blinding layer of sand should be 150mm
substances, or provided to fill voids in the hardcore and

• designing the construction to contain, so minimise the risk of puncturing the
ground
resist and prevent adverse effects of membrane.
such materials, by means acceptable to The continuity of the membrane should be
NHBC. maintained as follows:
Types of fill which require special • laps in polyethylene should be at
precautions to be taken are given in least 300mm and joints sealed, where Where dwellings are ‘stepped’ on a sloping
Appendix 5.1-A. necessary site, care should be taken to link dpcs and
• membranes beneath the slab should link dpms properly, so that all parts of each
Where sulfates or other harmful chemicals with wall dpcs to form an impervious
5.1
dwelling are protected.
are present in the ground at levels likely to barrier to prevent moisture reaching the
be harmful: interior of the dwelling
membrane linked
• concrete for the floor slab should be: • linking should take account of possible with stepped dpc
floor level
- of the appropriate mix to resist differential movement.
sulfate attack, and
- protected by an impervious layer of A clear cavity for at least 225mm dpc level
at least
1200 gauge (0.3mm) polyethylene below dpc should be maintained. When 150mm
sheet (or 1000 gauge (0.25mm) specialised foundations are used, including
if assessed in accordance with those for timber framed buildings, this
depth may be reduced to 150mm below
Technical Requirement R3) which
dpc if weep holes are provided and other
THERMAL INSULATION
may also serve as a dpm
• mortar should be in accordance with the necessary measures are taken to ensure 5.1 - D14 Thermal insulation of ground
recommendations of BS 5628 : Part 3 that the cavity can drain freely. bearing floors and walls below dpc shall
• concrete blocks should have a sulfate be designed to comply with statutory
resistance appropriate for the level of requirements
sulfate in the fill or ground. dpc
The BRE Report ‘Thermal insulation:
Where expansive materials are present, a avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of
suspended floor system should be used. at least insulation relevant to ground bearing
225mm
floors. In England and Wales account
should be taken of Accredited Details.
FILL DEEPER THAN
600mm (a) floor insulation
concrete
5.1 - D11 Where fill is deeper than cavity fill Thermal insulation materials for use below
600mm, additional precautions shall be ground bearing slabs are given in the
taken to provide satisfactory support to Materials section.
the floor and any imposed loads (b) water pressure
Where ground water can exert pressure, For details of thermal insulation above
Ground bearing slabs are not acceptable land drainage may be necessary to prevent ground floor slabs, reference should
where fill exceeds 600mm in depth. water entering the dwelling. At changes be made to Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’
Where the depth of fill exceeds 600mm at in floor level, eg stepped separating walls, (Design).
any point within a self-contained area, the special attention is required to ensure the
(b) wall insulation
floor construction over the whole of that continuity of the dpm.
Where cavity insulation batts or slabs start
area is required to be independent of the Horizontal and vertical tanking should below dpc level, the vertical and horizontal
fill and capable of supporting: link with wall dpcs in a manner similar to spacing of wall ties should be compatible
• self weight a dpm. with the spacing to be used above dpc
• partitions level.
• other imposed loads.
For details of insulating masonry walls,
For details, reference should be made to reference should be made to Chapter 6.1
Chapter 5.2 ‘Suspended ground floors’ ‘External masonry walls’ (each section).
(Design).

(c) cold bridging should be designed to withstand the full • Type C drained cavity. The water
The design should ensure that any risk hydrostatic head. resistance is achieved by collecting
of cold bridging is minimised, giving any water in the internal cavity system.
Any existing land drains which are
particular attention to junctions between An additional moisture barrier may be
disturbed by the basement excavation
floor and external walls. necessary.
should be diverted to a suitable outfall. See
This system is reliant on collecting and
Precautions include: Clause D5.
disposing of any water within the cavity
• extending cavity insulation below floor
Walls and floors below external ground system to a suitable outfall. Any sumps
slab level
level should resist moisture from reaching and/or pumps will need to be accessible
• linking floor and wall insulation
the internal surfaces of walls or the upper for maintenance.
• providing perimeter insulation to floors
surface of a floor.
• facing supporting substructure with
(c) services
insulation. The design should ensure that the The number of services passing through
level of protection against water and basement waterproofing should be kept to
Where dwellings are stepped or staggered,
moisture reaching the internal surfaces a minimum.
the wall forming the step or stagger may
is appropriate for the proposed use.
require insulation.
Where there is any doubt about use, the The design should detail how any
level of protection required for habitable penetrations for services prevent water or
GROUND FLOOR SLAB accommodation should be provided. damp ingress.
5.1 - D15 Ground bearing floor slabs Further details of services and drainage
Basements to be used for habitable
shall be of adequate strength and accommodation should be designed to are given in Clause D5 and Appendix 5.1-C.
durability allow no water penetration and provide a
Appropriate mixes for ground bearing dry environment if maintained by adequate PROVISION OF
concrete floor slabs are specified heating and ventilation. This is referred
in Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its to as “Grade 3” in the “Basements for
INFORMATION
reinforcement’ (Design). dwellings” Approved Document. 5.1 - D17 Designs and specifications
Ground bearing concrete floor slabs should Walls and floors to basements to be used
understandable format and include all
be not less than 100mm thick, including for parking cars, for storage or as plant
5.1
relevant information
monolithic screed where appropriate. rooms should be designed to allow no
water penetration (unless a type C drained Clear and fully detailed drawings should
be available on site to enable work to be
BASEMENTS cavity) although moisture vapour is
carried out in accordance with the design.
tolerated. This is referred to as “Grade 2”
5.1 - D16 All elements (including in the “Basements for dwellings” Approved
walls, floors and foundations) forming Design drawings should include:
Document.
a basement shall be suitable for their • all necessary plan dimensions and levels
location The design should ensure that all materials related to identified benchmarks
and products used in the construction of a • information on all proposed
The design should take account of the basement are compatible and used strictly underground services
BCA Approved Document “Basements in accordance with the manufacturer’s • points of entry to the building for
for dwellings”. Its principles should be recommendations. services
followed in England, Wales, Scotland and • penetration of services through the
Northern Ireland. Proprietary waterproofing materials should substructure, including support of the
comply with Technical Requirement R3. structure above
In this clause the term “basement”
means construction which is wholly or Appendix 5.1-B shows generic basement • details of trench backfill, infill and void
partly below ground level and for which constructions that may be acceptable to formers
normal damp proofing arrangements are NHBC subject to appropriate detailing. • the required sequence of trench backfill
inappropriate. if this is relevant to the design of the
They are: walls below dpc
Items to be taken into account include: • Type A tanked protection. The water • work required to maintain the integrity
(a) structural stability resistance is achieved by waterproofing. of dpcs and dpms
All basements should be designed by an This system is not suitable where the • details of junctions between dpm, dpc
Engineer in accordance with Technical water table is either variable or high and and tanking
Requirement R5. the basement walls are masonry. See • details of underfloor and floor edge
“Basements for dwellings” Approved insulation and cavity insulation, where
Information from the site investigation, Document. relevant.
carried out in accordance with Chapter
4.1 ‘Land quality - managing ground Note 5.1 - D18 All relevant information shall
conditions’ should be taken into account in be distributed to appropriate personnel
Internal tanking is generally not
the design of basements.
acceptable. Ensure that design and specification
Reference should be made to Chapter • Type B structurally integral protection. information is issued to site supervisors
4.2 ‘Building near trees’ where trees, The water resistance is achieved by the and relevant specialist subcontractors
hedgerows or shrubs are present. design of the concrete construction. and/or suppliers.
An additional moisture barrier may be
(b) waterproofing necessary.
The design of the basement should take This system is not suitable where the
account of the current and future ground water table is either variable or high and
water conditions. Where it is uncertain the design is to BS 8110 unless there is
what the future ground water conditions additional waterproofing. Alternatively,
may be the waterproofing system the design should be to BS 8007.

MATERIALS STANDARDS SITE MIXED MORTAR BS 6676 Thermal insulation of cavity
walls using man-made
5.1 - M3 Mortar for use in masonry
5.1 - M1 All materials shall: mineral fibre batts (slabs).
below dpc level, and for bedding the dpc,
(a) meet the Technical Requirements shall be suitable for the location and
(b) take account of the design intended use UF foam when permitted to BS 5617,
Materials that comply with the design and and installed by a specialist company
the guidance below will be acceptable for registered by BSI in accordance with BS
(a) strength and composition 5618, will be acceptable in England and
substructure and ground bearing floors.
Mortar should comply with the design and Wales only.
Materials for substructure and ground should take account of the strength, type
bearing floors should comply with all and location of the masonry. The thickness of materials should be as
relevant standards, including those listed required by the design.
below. Where no standard exists, Technical (b) sulfate resistance
Where the ground, ground water or the
masonry contains levels of sulfates likely
FILL
to be harmful, the mortar should be made 5.1 - M7 Fill, including made ground,
with sulfate-resisting cement to BS 4027. trench backfill and infill below ground
References to British Standards and Codes bearing floor slabs, shall:
of Practice include those made under the PROPRIETARY MORTAR (a) be free from hazardous materials
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ unless appropriate precautions are
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate 5.1 - M4 Proprietary mortars shall be taken, and
European Technical Specifications suitable for their intended use (b) provide consistent support to ground
approved by a European Committee for Proprietary mortars and admixtures bearing slabs
Standardisation (CEN). should comply with Clause M3 and should The appropriate precautions to be taken
only be used strictly in accordance with where hazardous materials are present in
MASONRY BELOW DPC the manufacturer’s recommendations, fill, are detailed in Appendix 5.1-A.
taking into account the type of masonry
5.1 - M2 Walls below dpc shall be The test requirements given in Appendix
unit and its location.
capable of supporting their intended
5.1
5.1-A should be followed where necessary.
loads and, where necessary, be resistant
to frost action, sulfates and other WALL TIES Fill containing expansive materials or
harmful or toxic materials 5.1 - M5 Wall ties shall be suitable for chemicals is not acceptable for the support
their intended use of ground bearing slabs.
Recommendations for the design strength
of bricks, masonry blocks and mortars are Wall ties should comply with BS EN 845 or Well graded, inert fill containing no
given in BS 5628. be assessed in accordance with Technical hazardous materials, which passes a
Requirement R3. 150mm x 150mm screen in all directions,
BRICKWORK normally will be suitable as support for
Clay bricks should comply with BS EN 771, ground bearing floors.
which classifies bricks by the durability WALL INSULATION
designations shown below: 5.1 - M6 Thermal insulation materials
F2,S2    (Freeze/thaw resistant, Low active for walls below dpc shall be suitable for
soluble salts) their intended use
F2,S1    (Freeze/thaw resistant, Normal Cavity insulation materials, super
active soluble salts) lightweight blocks, blocks with face
F1,S2    (Moderately freeze/thaw resistant, bonded insulation and blocks with integral
Low active soluble salts) insulation should be either:
F1,S1    (Moderately freeze/thaw resistant, • used in accordance with an assessment
Normal active soluble salts) which complies with Technical
F0,S2    (Not freeze/thaw resistant, Low Requirement R3 or
active soluble salts) • manufactured in accordance with a
F0,S1    (Not freeze/thaw resistant, Normal British Standard and used in accordance
active soluble salts) with a relevant Code of Practice.
Fletton or common bricks are usually of In Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man,
durability designations F1,S2 or F1,S1. If in it is not permitted to fill cavities with
doubt as to their suitability, bricks of F2,S2 pumped thermal insulants at the time of
or F2,S1 designation should be specified or construction.
the manufacturer consulted. In Scotland, it is not permitted to fill the
full width of the cavity with any thermal
BLOCKWORK
insulants at the time of construction.
Concrete blocks for use below dpc should
comply with BS EN 771 and have: Insulants specified and installed in
• a density exceeding 1500kg/m3, or accordance with the following British
• a compressive strength not less than Standards will be acceptable in England
7.3N/mm2, or and Wales only:
• an assessment in accordance with BS 6232 Thermal insulation of cavity
Technical Requirement R3. walls by filling with blown
man-made mineral fibre
Proprietary blocks should comply with
Technical Requirement R3.

DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE FLOOR INSULATION WALLS BELOW DPC

5.1 - M8 Selection of damp-proof 5.1 - M11 Thermal insulation for ground 5.1 - S2 Walls below dpc shall be
membrane materials shall take account bearing floors shall be suitable for its constructed in accordance with the
of the nature of the construction and intended use design
the possibility of damage
Thermal insulation materials for use below Items to be taken into account include:
For solid floors, requirements vary with the ground bearing slabs should have: (a) concrete cavity fill
location of the damp-proof membrane as • appropriate density for the location A clear cavity for at least 225mm
shown in the following table. • low water absorption. below dpc should be maintained. When
specialised foundations are used, including
Selection of damp-proof membrane Insulation to be positioned below both the
those for timber framed buildings, this
materials slab and dpm should be resistant to ground
depth may be reduced to 150mm below
contaminants.
Below the slab dpc provided that weep holes and other
The following materials are acceptable for necessary measures are taken to ensure
• Polyethylene sheet not less than
use as insulation: that the cavity can drain freely.
1200 gauge (0.3mm) (or 1000 gauge
• expanded polystyrene boards (grade
(0.25mm) if assessed in accordance
EPS 70) to BS EN 13163
with Technical Requirement R3 of
• a proprietary material assessed in
Chapter 1.1) dpc
accordance with Technical Requirement
• Bitumen sheet to BS 743 ‘Materials for
R3.
damp-proof courses’ at least
For details of floor insulation materials 225mm
In a sandwich construction above ground floor slabs, reference should
be made to Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’
• Any sheet of material given in the
(Materials).
previous column
• Hot applied asphalt to BS 6925, pitch concrete
or bitumen DAMP-PROOF COURSE cavity

fill
• Three full coats of cold applied MATERIALS

bituminous solutions, cold tar, pitch or
5.1
5.1 - M12 Materials for damp-proof (b) construction sequence

rubber emulsion
courses shall adequately resist the Where backfill is placed and compacted in
• Composite polyethylene and bitumen
passage of moisture one side of the foundation trench before
self-adhesive not less than 0.6mm
the other side is backfilled, the wall will be
thick Acceptable materials for dpcs are: acting as a temporary retaining wall.
On the surface of the slab • bitumen to BS 6398
• polyethylene to BS 6515 (except below T
• Hot applied asphalt to BS 6925 or copings and in parapets); polyethylene where cavity
t1 t2
pitch mastic dpcs should be black and not less than
fill is omitted
then:
• Cold applied pitch/epoxy resin 0.5mm thick
T = t1 + t2
• a proprietary material assessed in

CONCRETE accordance with Technical Requirement
D
R3.
5.1 - M9 Concrete shall be of a mix Dpcs and flexible cavity trays should be of
design and be reinforced, where the correct dimensions to suit the detailed
necessary, to safely support the floor design.
loads and to achieve sufficient durability backfill placed before
concrete cavity fill
to resist chemical and frost action Brick dpcs should consist of two courses of
engineering bricks, laid breaking joint and
For guidance on the specification and
bedded and jointed in a 1 : ¼ : 3, cement
use of concrete, concrete additives and
: lime : sand, or equivalent, mortar. Brick
reinforcement, reference should be T
dpcs are only suitable to resist the upward
made to Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
movement of moisture.
For complicated junctions, preformed
TANKING MATERIALS cavity trays are recommended. Care may
be needed to ensure the correct type and
5.1 - M10 Walls and floors of basements shape is ordered.
shall incorporate tanking materials to
adequately resist the passage of water
and moisture
SITEWORK STANDARDS D
Tanking materials should be:
• asphalt to BS 6925 or BS 6577, or 5.1 - S1 All sitework shall:
• a proprietary system or product (a) meet the Technical Requirements
assessed in accordance with Technical (b) take account of the design
Requirement R3. (c) follow established good practice and
workmanship
Polyethylene sheet (such as ‘Polythene’ or
backfill placed after
‘Visqueen’) is not acceptable for tanking. Sitework that complies with the design and concrete cavity fill
substructure and ground bearing floors.

In such cases, the wall should be either
PIPE BEDDED IN WALLS
designed by an Engineer in accordance
with Technical Requirement R5 or the 150mm 150mm
600mm max max 600mm
thickness (T) should be increased as max max
indicated in the following table: suspended floor
where infill is
more than 600mm
Depth (D) of Minimum thickness (T) of flexible flexible
joint joint
filled trench [m] wall leaf supporting fill [mm]
Up to 1.1 200
1.1 to 1.4 300
1.4 to 1.7 400
1.7 to 2.0 500 Services should be sleeved where they
pass through a structural element.
Note
This table is only applicable to the When unidentified services, ducts,
temporary condition and where problems cables or pipes are exposed, advice
such as hydrostatic pressure are not should be sought from local offices of
present. statutory undertakings and service supply FILL SUPPORTING
companies.
(c) workmanship
GROUND BEARING SLABS
Workmanship below dpc level should be GROUND BELOW FILL 5.1 - S4 Fill, including made ground,
of a high standard to avoid the necessity trench backfill and infill, shall provide
for costly repairs. Details of cavity wall 5.1 - S3 Ground shall be adequately
full and consistent support to any
construction are given in Chapter 6.1 prepared to provide consistent support
ground bearing slab
‘External masonry walls’ (Sitework). to the fill and the ground bearing slab
Well graded inert fill without hazardous
All vegetable soil and organic matter,
(d) wall ties materials, which passes a 150mm x 150mm
including tree roots, should be removed to
Where cavity insulation batts or slabs start screen in all directions, will normally be
provide an even bearing surface.
5.1
below dpc level, the vertical and horizontal suitable as support for a ground floor slab.
spacing of wall ties should be compatible Ground bearing floors may be used only
with the spacing to be used above dpc Fill should be placed and mechanically
where:
level. compacted in layers not exceeding 225mm
• trenches are backfilled with properly
deep, to form a stable mass.
compacted material
(e) services and service entries • infill is less than 600mm in depth and
Underground services should be installed 5.1 - S5 The performance of the
properly compacted substructure and ground bearing slab
as described in Chapters 8.1 ‘Internal • the ground is suitable to support floor
Services’ (Sitework) and 5.3 ‘Drainage shall not be affected by any hazardous
loads and any other loads. materials in the fill
below ground’ (Sitework), or provision
made for their later installation. Where Types of fill which require special
ground bearing
services penetrate walls, the following floor where precautions to be taken are given in
infill is less
alternatives are acceptable: than 600mm Appendix 5.1-A.
Where sulfates are present in the ground
properly compacted
fill and backfill at levels likely to be harmful:
• the floor slab should be of the
PIPES PASSING THROUGH 50mm space
LINTELLED OPENING around pipe appropriate mix to resist sulfate attack
and be protected by an impervious layer
Where more than 600mm of infill is of 1200 gauge (0.3mm) polyethylene
required at any point within a self- sheet (or 1000 gauge (0.25mm) if
contained area, or the bearing capacity assessed in accordance with Technical
opening masked
both sides and nature of the ground varies, the floor Requirement R3) which may also serve
over the self-contained area should be as a dpm
of suspended construction. Reference • mortar in substructure walls should
should be made to Chapter 5.2 ‘Suspended contain sulfate resisting cement
ground floors’ (Sitework). • concrete blocks in substructure walls
should have a sulfate resistance
appropriate for the level of sulfate in the
lintel over
multiple services fill or ground.
Expansive materials are not acceptable for
use as fill supporting ground bearing slabs.
TRENCH BACKFILL
5.1 - S6 Backfill to trenches shall be
adequately compacted
To avoid settlement at junctions between
the substructure wall and the ground
bearing floor, trenches should be backfilled
with solid material, graded and compacted
according to the guidance given in

Clause S4. Alternatively, concrete may be 5.1 - S11 Ground bearing floors shall
used (see Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its be reasonably level and effectively
dpc laps dpm
reinforcement’ (Sitework)). impervious to moisture
All underfloor services and ducts should
be installed and, where appropriate, tested
fill compacted before concreting is started.
in equal layers
on both sides
Care should be taken to ensure that
all joints and junctions between damp-
proofing membranes, wall dpcs or tanking
in substructure walls are undamaged,
Where dwellings are stepped down a especially while the concrete for the
sloping site, the dpcs and dpms should be ground slab is being poured.
linked so that all parts of each dwelling are
Fill should be placed in layers of equal protected.
thickness to both sides of substructure
walls so that compaction on one side is not DAMP-PROOF COURSE
more than one layer ahead of the other.
Where this is not possible, the wall will be 5.1 - S9 Moisture from the ground shall
acting as a retaining wall and the advice be prevented from reaching the inside of
given in Clause S2(b) should be followed. the building
A damp-proof course should be positioned
BLINDING at least 150mm above finished ground dpm protected
by board
or paving level and should link with any
5.1 - S7 Blinding shall provide a suitable
ground floor dpm.
surface for the materials above
Fill should be blinded sufficiently to receive The dpc should be of the correct width and
concrete (or dpm, if required) using the fully bedded.
Details of screeds laid monolithically with
5.1
minimum thickness necessary to give a For guidance concerning setting and floor slabs are given in Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor
suitable surface. Concrete blinding may be bedding dpcs, reference should be made finishes’ (Sitework).
needed where voids in the fill could result to Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’
in loss of fines from the blinding. Where Details of mixing, placing and curing
(Sitework).
hardcore fill is used, smooth blinding, eg concrete are given in Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete
sand or other suitable fine material, is and its reinforcement’ (Sitework).
essential to avoid puncturing a sheet dpm.
LAYING THERMAL
Where the ground floor is to be reinforced, INSULATION BASEMENTS
the blinding should be firm and even to 5.1 - S10 Installation of thermal 5.1 - S12 Basements shall be
give good support for the reinforcement insulation shall ensure that the full constructed in accordance with the
and to maintain the design cover, using
thermal performance of the floor is design
reinforcement stools, where necessary.
achieved
Appendix 5.1-B gives details of the different
Insulation boards should be tightly butted
DAMP-PROOFING FLOORS together to maintain insulation continuity.
types of basement construction that
may be acceptable to NHBC subject to
5.1 - S8 Ground bearing floors shall be appropriate detailing.
resistant to the passage of moisture Where the insulation is turned up vertically
from the ground at the edge of the slab, the edge should be Items to be taken into account include:
protected whilst concrete is being poured (a) detailing and application of tanking
A ground bearing concrete floor should and tamped. materials
be protected from ground moisture by a Appendix 5.1-C gives typical details of the
continuous damp-proof membrane. Where edge insulation is within the cavity
critical areas in basement construction to
external wall, the insulation material
The continuity of the membrane should be avoid water penetration.
should be supported on wall ties as
maintained as follows: described in Clause S2(d) and Chapter 6.1 The design will specify the method of
• laps in polyethylene should be at ‘External masonry walls’ (Sitework). tanking to be used. This should not be
least 300mm and joints sealed, where changed without consulting the designer.
necessary
• membranes beneath the slab should link Where required by the design the
with wall dpcs to form an impervious waterproofing system should be applied
barrier to prevent moisture reaching the by a specialist contractor experienced
interior of the dwelling insulation protected
in that system. Installers should be
• linking should take account of possible by board made fully aware of the design and the
differential movement. manufacturer’s recommendations for the
dpm trimmed
preparation and installation.
to avoid
bridging cavity Tanking which is being installed or is
complete should be protected to prevent
damage.
A suitable protection board should be
provided against the waterproofing
material to avoid damage. Where the
LAYING THE SLAB waterproofing system is protected by

backfilled material this should be placed
carefully in layers to prevent damage. Appendix 5.1-A
(b) junctions, abutments and services
Details of how junctions and abutments
are formed should be provided to site Materials for use as fill
personnel.
Hazardous materials The following materials require testing to ensure their suitability for use as
Where services pass through the fill to support ground bearing slabs or as backfill to associated trenches:
waterproofing system they should be in • acid wastes
accordance with the design. • reactive materials
The basement waterproofing system • materials that include sulfates (eg gypsum)
should be linked to the damp proofing • organic materials
arrangements for the superstructure. Any • toxic materials
lap joints should be protected against • materials that cause noxious fumes, rot, undue settlement or damage to
damage during construction. surrounding materials.
See Appendix 5.1-C.
Test requirements Tests should be carried out by a suitable qualified person with a detailed
knowledge of:
• the material to be tested, and
• the proposed conditions of use.
The samples tested must be representative of the true nature of the
material.
It may be necessary to take a number of samples to find out the material
characteristics of the fill.
Tests for sulfate content should be carried out in accordance with the
recommendations of BRE Special Digest 1 (third edition).
5.1
Sources of fill Where the material is of a stable and uniform type from one source, it may
material only be necessary to check its suitability once. If material is variable, or
from a number of sources, it should all be suitable. Regular inspections
and/or testing may be required.
Where industrial waste is permitted as fill material, it is essential that

sufficient testing is carried out to ensure suitability.
Where material is obtained from stockpiles, check the material is uniform.
Different forms of stockpiling can affect particle size/grading. The outside
of a stockpile may be weathered and may not be the same as unweathered
material.
Fill requiring NHBC The following types of fill should not be used unless written permission has
approval been obtained from NHBC:
• colliery shale and any other residue from mineral extraction
• slags
• furnace ashes and other products of combustion
• material obtained from demolition
• on wet sites, or sites with a high water table, crushed or broken bricks
which have S1 designation (as defined in BS EN 771).
Expansive materials Fill containing expansive materials is not acceptable for use as support to
ground bearing slabs or as backfill to associated trenches.

Appendix 5.1-B Appendix 5.1-C

Basement constructions Typical details for
This Appendix shows the three types of basements
basement constructions.
This Appendix contains generic details
for basements. Because of the variations
between different waterproofing systems,
they should not be used as construction
details. The manufacturer of the tanking
system should be consulted.
external waterproofing
with protection water masonry walls
resistant
concrete
external waterproofing
Type B structure - structurally integral with protection
protection (water-resistant concrete)

(water resistance reliant specifically on
Type A structure - tanked protection the concrete construction but may be Type A structure
5.1
(water resistance reliant on waterproofing) combined with additional waterproofing) Strip foundation without starter bars
continuous
drained
cavity
waterproof
reinforced
concrete
drainage
sandwich sump discharging
waterproofing to suitable outlet
Type A structure - tanked protection Type C structure - drained cavity Type B structure
(water resistance reliant on waterproofing) (water resistance reliant on collecting and Integral protection - water-resisting
disposing of any water within the internal concrete
cavity system)

reinforced concrete wall recess in basement wall

masonry walls lintel to bridge recess
internal cavity
internal cavity drainage system
drainage
system
drain connection
(drainage sump not shown) (drainage sump not shown)
Drainage connection avoiding penetration

Type C structure of the waterproofing system by the soil
5.1
Type C structure
Strip foundation without starter bars Drained cavity construction stack
masonry walls reinforced

internal cavity
drainage
sysem
internal cavity
drainage
system
150mm 150mm 600mm
max max max
flexible joints
drainage
sump not
included pipe sealed to
waterproofing system
(drainage sump not shown)
Type C structure Type C structure Drainage connection penetrating

Strip or piled foundation with starter bars Reinforced masonry on concrete raft basement wall
dpc
cavity tray
external
waterproofing
external
waterproofing
with protection
Type A structure Example of linking waterproofing with

Reinforced masonry on concrete raft DPC/cavity tray

INDEX
B G S
Backfill 7 Ground conditions 1 Services 2, 7
Basement constructions 10 Ground hazards 1 Site-mixed mortar 5
Bearing capacity of ground 1 Ground moisture 3 Sloping ground 1
Blinding 8 H Statutory requirements 1
Blockwork 2, 5 Hazardous fill 3, 9 Sulfate resistance 5
Brickwork 2, 5 Surface water 2
I
C T
Insulation 3, 5, 6, 8
Cold bridging 4 Tanking materials 6
M
Concrete 6 Test requirements 9
Masonry below dpc 5
D Thermal insulation 3, 6, 8
Mortar 2, 5
Damp-proofing 3, 8 Transfer of loads 1
N
Damp proof course 3, 6, 8 Typical details 10
Nature of ground 1
Damp proof membrane 6 W
NHBC approval 9
Wall ties 5, 7
Depth of infill 1, 3
P
Walls below dpc 2, 3, 5, 6
Proprietary mortar 5
Drainage 2 Water pressure 3
E Waterproofing 4
Expansive materials 9
F
Fill 2, 3, 5, 7, 9
Floor slab 3
5.1

Chapter 5.2
Suspended ground floors
CONTENTS SCOPE
DESIGN - General Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Requirements and recommendations for suspended ground
Design standards D1 1 floors of in-situ and precast concrete and timber joists.
Statutory and other requirements D2 1
Resistance to ground contaminants D3-D4 1
DESIGN - In-situ concrete

Structural stability D5 1
Resistance to moisture D6 1
Floor finishes and decking D8 1
DESIGN - Precast concrete

Resistance to moisture D10 2
Floor finishes and decking D12 2
DESIGN - Timber
5.2
Structural timber D14 2

Trimmers D15 2
Strutting D16 2
Joist hangers D17-D18 2
Joist support at separating walls D19 2
Intermediate support D20 2
Floor decking D21 3
Damp-proofing D22 3
DESIGN - Information
MATERIALS
Concrete and reinforcement M2 4
Proprietary systems M3 4
Timber M4 4
Damp-proofing and thermal insulation M5 4
materials
SITEWORK
Ventilation and damp-proofing S2-S3 4
Construction of floors S4 4
Thermal insulation S5 4
Floor finishes S6 4
Floor decking : general S7-S8 5
Softwood boarding S9 5
Chipboard flooring S10 5
Oriented strand board flooring S11 5
Other floor decking S12-S13 5
INDEX 5

Suspended ground floors 5.2
DESIGN STANDARDS In-situ concrete • have low water absorption
• be resistant to ground contaminants
5.2 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical STRUCTURAL STABILITY • be strong enough to support wet
construction loads
Requirements 5.2 - D5 In-situ concrete suspended • be compatible with any dpm.
Design that follows the guidance below will ground floors shall be designed
be acceptable for suspended ground floors. to transmit all loads safely to the Suitable insulating materials are described
supporting structure without undue in the Materials section.
STATUTORY AND OTHER movement (b) insulation placed above the floor slab
Items to be taken into account include: For guidance on insulation above the floor
REQUIREMENTS slab, reference should be made to Chapter
(a) dead and imposed loads
5.2 - D2 Design of suspended ground Loads should be calculated in accordance 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’ (Design and Materials).
floors shall comply with all relevant with BS 6399. (c) cold bridging
statutory and other requirements
Suspended in-situ concrete ground floors The design should ensure that any risk
Design should be in accordance with of cold bridging is minimised, giving
should be designed either:
relevant Building Regulations and other particular attention to junctions between
• by an Engineer in accordance with
statutory requirements. floor and external walls.
Technical Requirement R5, or
NHBC requires ground floors to be • in accordance with BS 8103 Part 4. Precautions include:
constructed as suspended floors in the • extending cavity insulation below floor
following situations: (b) end bearings
slab level
• where the depth of fill exceeds 600mm, Bearings on supporting walls should be
• linking floor and wall insulation
as described in Chapter 5.1 ‘Substructure designed either:
• providing perimeter insulation to floors
and ground bearing floors’ (Design) • by an Engineer in accordance with
• facing the supporting substructure with
• where soil swelling may occur, as Technical Requirement R5, or
insulation.
described in Chapter 4.2 ‘Building near • in accordance with BS 8103 Part 4.
trees’
• on sites which have been subject to RESISTANCE TO MOISTURE FLOOR FINISHES AND
5.2
vibratory ground improvement, as 5.2 - D6 In-situ concrete suspended
DECKING
described in Chapter 4.6 ‘Vibratory ground floors shall be designed to resist 5.2 - D8 Finishes and decking to in-situ
ground improvement techniques’ the passage of moisture to the inside of concrete suspended ground floors shall
• where ground or fill is not suitable be suitable for their intended use
the building
to support ground bearing slabs. For
suitable fill providing temporary support Items to be taken into account include: Details of finishes and decking are given in
to suspended floors, refer to Chapter 5.1 (a) damp-proofing Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’ (each section)
‘Substructure and ground bearing floors’ Dampness from the ground and supporting and Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete
Appendix 5.1-A. structure should be prevented from upper floors’.
reaching the floor by use of dpms and
RESISTANCE TO GROUND dpcs. Precast concrete
CONTAMINANTS (b) linking dpm with dpc
Damp-proofing of suspended ground floors
STRUCTURAL STABILITY
5.2 - D3 Design shall ensure that
adequate measures are taken against should be linked with any damp-proofing 5.2 - D9 Precast concrete suspended
adverse effects of ground contaminants of the supporting structure in order to ground floors shall be designed
and radioactive materials provide continuous protection. to transmit all loads safely to the
supporting structure without undue
Any contaminants in or above the ground Where there is a risk of sulfate attack, a
movement
should be identified to the satisfaction of polyethylene sheet dpm, not less than
NHBC, following the guidance given in the 1200 gauge (0.3mm) (or 1000 gauge Items to be taken into account include:
appropriate British Standard. (0.25mm) if assessed in accordance with (a) dead and imposed loads
Technical Requirement R3) should be used, Loads should be calculated in accordance
Where necessary, precautions against properly lapped. with BS 6399 : Part 1.
danger to health caused by contaminants
should be taken, as described in the Precast concrete suspended ground floors
Appendix ‘Introduction to remedial THERMAL INSULATION should be:
measures’ to Approved Document C1/2/3 5.2 - D7 Thermal insulation of in-situ • designed by an Engineer in accordance
and other Building Regulation documents. concrete suspended ground floors shall with Technical Requirement R5, or
be designed to comply with statutory • proprietary systems which have been
5.2 - D4 Design shall provide adequate assessed in accordance with Technical
requirements
protection against radon gas Requirement R3, or
The BRE report ‘Thermal insulation: • chosen from manufacturers’ details
In certain parts of the country, special
avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of which are based on recognised
precautions may be necessary to reduce
insulation relevant to suspended ground Standards and Codes of Practice.
the entry of radon gas. Areas in England
floors. In England and Wales account
and Wales where special precautions are
should be taken of Accredited Details. (b) end bearings
necessary are detailed in BRE Report 211.
Bearings on supporting walls should be as
When precautions are necessary, they recommended by the manufacturer, and in
(a) insulation placed below the floor slab
should be acceptable to NHBC. no case less than 90mm.
Insulation below the ground floor slab
should:
• be placed on a suitable compacted and
even substrate

RESISTANCE TO MOISTURE with any damp-proofing of the supporting STRUCTURAL TIMBER

structure in order to provide continuous
5.2 - D10 Precast concrete suspended protection. 5.2 - D14 Structural timber grades and
ground floors shall be designed to resist sizes shall be adequate for the spans
the passage of moisture to the inside of and imposed loads
the building
THERMAL INSULATION
For guidance, reference should be made to
5.2 - D11 Thermal insulation of precast
Items to be taken into account include: Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper
concrete suspended ground floors shall
(a) damp-proofing floors’ (Design and Materials).
be designed to comply with statutory
The supporting structure should, wherever
requirements
necessary, incorporate adequate damp- TRIMMERS
proofing measures to prevent dampness The BRE report ‘Thermal insulation:
from reaching the floor as described in the avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of 5.2 - D15 Where trimming is necessary,
following Chapters: insulation relevant to suspended ground adequately sized timbers shall be used
5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing floors. In England and Wales account For guidance, reference should be made to
floors’ (each section) should be taken of Accredited Details. Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper
6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (each section). floors’ (Design and Sitework).
(b) ventilation of underfloor voids (a) insulation above floor slab
A minimum void of not less than 150mm For guidance on insulation above a floor STRUTTING
should be provided below the underside of slab, reference should be made to Chapter 5.2 - D16 Strutting shall be adequate to
floor slabs and beams. 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’ (each section). limit the twisting of joists
On shrinkable soil where heave could (b) cold bridging For guidance, reference should be made to
take place, allowance should be made for The design should ensure that any risk Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper
the void to accommodate the following of cold bridging is minimised, giving floors’ (Design and Sitework).
movements according to the shrinkage particular attention to junctions between
potential of the soil:
• high potential - 150mm
floor and external walls. JOIST HANGERS
Precautions include:
5.2
• medium potential - 100mm 5.2 - D17 Joist hangers shall be suitable

• low potential - 50mm. • extending cavity insulation below floor for the joist width and depth, the
slab level strength of masonry and the required
Voids should be ventilated by openings • linking floor and wall insulation load
providing not less than 1500mm2 per • providing perimeter insulation to floors
metre run of external wall or 500mm2 • facing the supporting structure with For guidance, reference should be made to
per m2 of floor area, whichever gives the insulation. Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper
greater opening area. floors’ (each section).
Ventilation openings should be provided FLOOR FINISHES AND 5.2 - D18 Adequate end bearings shall
on at least two opposite sides. Where this
is not possible, effective cross ventilation
DECKING be provided for joists and joist hangers
5.2 - D12 Finishes and decking to For guidance, reference should be made to
from opposite sides should be provided by
precast concrete suspended ground Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper
a combination of openings and air ducts.
floors’ (Design and Sitework).
floors shall be suitable for their intended
Where the finished level below the floor is use
lower than the finished adjoining ground
Details of finishes and decking are given in
JOIST SUPPORT AT
level, appropriate drainage should be
provided. Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper SEPARATING WALLS
floors’ and Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’ 5.2 - D19 Joists shall be correctly
(c) damp-proofing of suspended floors (each section). supported at masonry separating walls
It may not be necessary to provide
additional damp-proofing where the: For guidance, reference should be made to
• underfloor void is ventilated and dpcs
Timber Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper
are provided under bearings of precast floors’ (Design and Sitework).
floors in accordance with CP 102
STRUCTURAL STABILITY
• ground below the floor is effectively 5.2 - D13 Timber suspended ground INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT
drained (if excavated below the level of floors, including the decking material,
the surrounding ground). shall be designed to: 5.2 - D20 Sleeper walls shall
(a) support self weight, dead loads and adequately support the floor joists
Vapour control layers may be necessary
imposed loads For guidance, reference should be made
to protect floor finishes and should
(b) transmit loads safely to the to Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip and trench fill
be positioned in accordance with the
supporting structure foundations’ (Design and Sitework).
manufacturer’s recommendations
(c) not deflect unduly
(reference should be made to Chapter 8.3
(d) take account of the adverse effects
‘Floor finishes’ (each section)).
of shrinkage and movement
(d) linking dpm with dpc
Where provided, damp-proofing of
Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper
suspended ground floors should be linked
floors’ (Design).

FLOOR DECKING shrinkage potential of the soil as follows: Information
• high potential - 150mm
5.2 - D21 Appropriate materials for
floor decking shall be used
• medium potential - 100mm PROVISION OF
• low potential - 50mm.
INFORMATION
Voids should be ventilated by openings
(a) decking and joist centres providing not less than 1500mm2 per 5.2 - D24 Designs and specifications
(b) resistance to moisture metre run of external wall or 500mm2 shall be produced in a clearly
per m2 of floor area, whichever gives the understandable format and include all
(c) fixing
greater opening area. relevant information
Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper Clear and fully detailed drawings should
Ventilators should be spaced at not more
floors’ (each section). be available on site to enable work to be
than 2m centres and within 450mm of
carried out in accordance with the design.
each end of any wall. Air bricks should
DAMP-PROOFING be ducted through cavities and be Design drawings should include:
5.2 - D22 Design of timber suspended unobstructed. • all necessary plan dimensions and levels
ground floors shall ensure that the related to identified benchmarks
Every part of the void under a timber
floors are not adversely affected by • details of loadbearing walls
suspended ground floor should be
moisture • minimum bearing dimensions
thoroughly ventilated through openings
Items to be taken into account include: • information on all proposed underground
on at least two opposite sides. Where this
(a) damp-proofing of supporting services
is not possible, effective cross ventilation
structure • points of entry to the building for
from opposite sides should be provided by
The supporting structure should include services
a combination of openings and air ducts.
damp-proofing to prevent moisture • penetration of services through the
penetrating to the suspended floor, as Provision should be made for ventilation substructure, including support of the
described in Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry through partitions and sleeper walls. structure above
walls’ (each section). If necessary, pipe ducts should be • details of trench backfill, infill and void
incorporated in adjoining solid floors, formers
Where the finished level below the floor is separating walls or other obstructions. • the required sequence of trench backfill
5.2
lower than the finished adjoining ground Ventilation should not be obtained through if this is relevant to the design of the
level: a garage. walls below dpc
• appropriate drainage should be provided, • work required to maintain the integrity
or THERMAL INSULATION of dpcs and dpms
• the structure should be tanked. • details of junctions between dpm, dpc
5.2 - D23 Thermal insulation of and tanking
(b) resistance to ground moisture timber suspended ground floors shall • details of underfloor and floor edge
Provision should be made to prevent be designed to comply with statutory insulation and cavity insulation, where
ground moisture affecting timber floor requirements relevant.
construction.
The BRE report ‘Thermal insulation:
This can be achieved by either: 5.2 - D25 All relevant information shall
avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of
• 50mm concrete or 50mm fine aggregate be distributed to appropriate personnel
insulation relevant to suspended ground
on a polyethylene membrane laid on floors. In England and Wales account Ensure that design and specification
50mm sand blinding, or should be taken of Accredited Details. information is issued to site supervisors
• 100mm concrete. and relevant specialist subcontractors
Items to be taken into account include: and/or suppliers.
In Scotland, the deemed-to-satisfy (a) positioning of insulation
specification of the statutory regulations Insulation may be:
should be followed. • insulation quilt, or
Where necessary, oversite concrete should • rigid insulation. MATERIALS STANDARDS
be protected against sulfate attack by Insulation quilt should be supported 5.2 - M1 All materials shall:
the use of a polyethylene sheet dpm, not between joists. (a) meet the Technical Requirements
less than 1200 gauge (0.3mm) (or 1000 (b) take account of the design
gauge (0.25mm) if assessed in accordance Rigid insulation boards should be Materials that comply with the design and
with Technical Requirement R3) properly adequately supported on battens fixed to the guidance below will be acceptable for
lapped. the sides of joists. suspended ground floors.
(c) ventilation of underfloor voids (b) cold bridging Materials for suspended ground floors
A minimum ventilation void of 150mm The design should ensure that any risk should comply with all relevant standards,
should be provided below floor joists or of cold bridging is minimised, giving including those listed below. Where no
75mm below any wall plate. particular attention to junctions between standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
floor and external walls. applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
On shrinkable soil where heave could take
Standards and Technical Requirements’).
place, an allowance for movement should Precautions include:
be added to the underfloor ventilation • extending cavity insulation below floor References to British Standards and Codes
requirement to determine the minimum level of Practice include those made under the
dimension of the underfloor void. The • linking floor and wall insulation Construction Products Directive (89/106/
allowance for movement relates to the • providing perimeter insulation to floors EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
• facing the supporting substructure with European Technical Specifications
insulation. approved by a European Committee for

CONCRETE AND For thermal insulation used above concrete • the design
floor slabs, materials should be selected • relevant parts of Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete
REINFORCEMENT in accordance with Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor and its reinforcement’ (each section)
5.2 - M2 Concrete shall have finishes’ (Design and Materials). • relevant parts of Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber
appropriate reinforcement and be of a and concrete upper floors’ (each
mix design that will: section).
(a) achieve sufficient strength to SITEWORK STANDARDS (b) precast concrete floors
support floor loads safely
All sitework for precast concrete floors
(b) be sufficiently durable to remain 5.2 - S1 All sitework shall: should be carried out in accordance with
unaffected by chemical or frost action (a) meet the Technical Requirements the manufacturer’s recommendations.
For guidance on the specification and (b) take account of the design
(c) follow established good practice and Care should be taken to ensure that dpcs
use of in-situ concrete, additives and
workmanship are not damaged or displaced.
reinforcement, reference should be
made to Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its Sitework that complies with the design and (c) timber floors
reinforcement’ (each section). the guidance below will be acceptable for All sitework for timber floors should be
suspended ground floors. carried out in accordance with the relevant
PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS parts of Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete
5.2 - M3 Proprietary flooring systems VENTILATION AND DAMP- upper floors’ (Sitework).
shall have adequate strength and PROOFING
durability THERMAL INSULATION
5.2 - S2 Construction of suspended
Proprietary concrete flooring systems ground floors shall ensure adequate 5.2 - S5 Thermal insulation shall
should be designed in accordance with damp-proofing be installed to minimise thermal
BS 8110. Where a system incorporates transmission through the floor
Masonry supporting suspended ground
elements which cannot be designed to this The BRE report ‘Thermal insulation:
floors should have been damp-proofed
standard, eg polystyrene infill blocks, the avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of
using dpm, dpc or tanking in accordance
floor should be assessed in accordance insulation relevant to suspended ground
5.2
with the guidance given in the following

with Technical Requirement R3. floors. In England and Wales account
Chapters:
5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing should be taken of Accredited Details.
TIMBER floors’ (each section) Items to be taken into account include:
5.2 - M4 Structural timber, decking and 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (each section).
(a) floor insulation methods
related materials shall be suitable for Where proprietary floor systems are TIMBER FLOORS
their location and intended use used, moisture-resistant membranes, etc Insulation quilts should be supported,
Materials should be selected in accordance should be installed in accordance with the eg by draping plastic mesh across the
with the relevant parts of Chapter 6.4 manufacturer’s recommendations. joists and stapling it to joist sides so that
‘Timber and concrete upper floors’ (Design the quilt can be laid to the full thickness.
and Materials). 5.2 - S3 Construction of suspended Insulation draped over the joists is not
ground floors shall ensure adequate acceptable.
ventilation
DAMP-PROOFING AND
Ventilation should be provided in
THERMAL INSULATION accordance with the design. This is
MATERIALS normally provided by ventilators on at
mesh supporting
least two opposite external walls. insulation quilt
5.2 - M5 Materials shall be suitable for
their location and intended use Air bricks in cavity walls should be properly
ducted as detailed in Chapter 6.1 ‘External Rigid insulation boards should be
Items to be taken into account include: supported on battens or fillets nailed to
masonry walls’ (Design and Sitework).
(a) damp-proofing materials the sides of joists.
Damp-proofing materials should be Sleeper walls should be constructed with
selected in accordance with Chapter 5.1 sufficient openings to ensure adequate CONCRETE FLOORS
‘Substructure and ground bearing floors’ through ventilation. Where underfloor For guidance on insulating concrete floors,
(Design and Materials). voids adjoin ground bearing floors, reference should be made to Chapter 8.3
ventilation ducts should be installed. ‘Floor finishes’ (each section).
(b) thermal insulation materials
Thermal insulating materials used below Ventilation should not be obtained through (b) cold bridging
cast in-situ suspended floor slabs should a garage. The design should be followed to ensure
be selected in accordance with the relevant that any risk of cold bridging is minimised.
recommendations given in Chapter 5.1 CONSTRUCTION OF Pay particular attention to junctions
‘Substructure and ground bearing floors’ between floor and external walls.
(each section).
FLOORS
Thermal insulating materials for use with
5.2 - S4 Construction of suspended FLOOR FINISHES
floors shall ensure that they safely
timber floors should be: 5.2 - S6 Finishes to concrete suspended
support the intended loads and are
• expanded polystyrene boards (grade EPS ground floors shall be protected, where
reasonably level
70) to BS EN 13163 necessary, against damp, condensation
• mineral wool to BS 5803 : Part 1 Items to be taken into account include: or spillage
• other materials which have been (a) in-situ concrete floors
For guidance, reference should be made
assessed in accordance with Technical Concreting should be carried out in
to Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’ (Design and
Requirement R3. accordance with:
Sitework).

FLOOR DECKING :
GENERAL INDEX
5.2 - S7 Flooring shall be fixed only B   O  
when the dwelling is substantially Bearings 1, 2 Oriented strand board 5 
weathertight
Boarding 5  P  
For guidance, reference should be made to C   Plywood 5 
Chipboard flooring 5  Precast concrete 1, 4 
floors’ (Sitework).
Cold bridging 1, 2, 3, 4  Proprietary systems 4 
5.2 - S8 Completed floor decking shall Concrete 4  Protection 4 
not be overloaded and shall be protected Concrete floors 4  Provision of information 3 
against damage D   R  
For guidance, reference should be made to Damp-proofing 1, 2, 3, 4  Radon gas 1 
Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper Decking 1, 2, 5  Reinforcement 4 
floors’ (Sitework). E   Resistance to moisture 1, 2 
Care should be taken to prevent trapping End bearings 1  S  
any water spillage below timber floors. F   Separating walls 2 
Floor decking 3, 5  Sleeper walls 2 
SOFTWOOD BOARDING Floor finishes 1, 2, 4  Softwood boarding 5 
5.2 - S9 Softwood boarding shall be Floor slab 1, 2  Structural stability 2 
securely fixed G   Strutting 2 
For guidance, reference should be made to Ground contaminants 1  T  
Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper I   Thermal insulation 1, 2, 3, 4 
floors’ (Design and Sitework). Insitu concrete 1, 4 Timber 2, 4 
5.2
Insulation 1, 2, 3, 4 Timber floors 4 
CHIPBOARD FLOORING Intermediate support 2  Trimmers 2 
5.2 - S10 Chipboard flooring shall be J   U  
of the type and thickness specified and Joist hangers 2 Underfloor voids 2, 3 
shall be fixed securely L   V  
For guidance, reference should be made to Loads 1  Ventilation 2, 3, 4 
Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper Voids 2, 3
floors’ (each section).
ORIENTED STRAND BOARD

FLOORING
5.2 - S11 Oriented strand board flooring
shall be of the type and thickness
specified and shall be fixed securely
floors’ (each section).
OTHER FLOOR DECKING

5.2 - S12 Plywood decking shall be fixed
securely
floors’ (Design and Sitework).
5.2 - S13 Proprietary materials shall be

fixed in accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations
Other floor decking should have been
assessed in accordance with Technical
Requirement R3 and should be installed
in accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations.

Part 7
Roofs
7.2 Pitched roofs

Chapter 5.3
Drainage below ground
CONTENTS SCOPE
This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical

DESIGN Clause Page
Requirements and recommendations for the design and
Design standards D1 1 construction of foul, surface water and ground water
Statutory requirements D2 1 drainage systems.
Drainage system design D3-D6 1-2
Design to avoid damage D7 2
Foul and surface water disposal D8 3
Ground water drainage D9 4
MATERIALS
Drainage materials M2 4
SITEWORK
Preliminary work S2 5
Excavation S3 5
Laying pipework S4 5
Protection of pipework S5 6
Access points and gullies S6 6
5.3
Cesspools S7 7
Septic tanks S8 7
Surface water soakaways S9 7
Testing S10 8
Protection of work S11 8
APPENDIX 5.3-A
Minimum dimensions for access fittings and 9
chambers
APPENDIX 5.3-B
Percolation test procedures for septic tank 10
installations
APPENDIX 5.3-C
Septic tank field drain design 11
APPENDIX 5.3-D
Cross section of typical underdrain 12
APPENDIX 5.3-E
Percolation test procedures for surface water 12
soakaways
INDEX 14

Drainage below ground 5.3
DESIGN STANDARDS DRAINAGE SYSTEM DESIGN Air admittance valves which have been
5.3 - D3 Drainage systems shall be Requirement R3 may be used in some
5.3 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical designed to convey foul effluents and dwellings to prevent trap seal siphonage.
Requirements surface water satisfactorily to an An open vent is generally required at the
Design that follows the guidance below will appropriate outfall head of common drainage systems and
be acceptable for drainage below ground. Items to be taken into account include: where the discharge pipe is the only vent
(a) compliance with codes and standards for a septic tank or cesspool.
STATUTORY Guidance on drainage design is given in BS (b) prevention of gases entering the
REQUIREMENTS EN 752. dwelling
(b) compatibility with the existing main RADON
sewerage system In certain geographical locations special
The drainage system should be designed precautions may be necessary to reduce
Design should be in accordance with to be compatible with the main sewerage the entry of radon gas, for example where
relevant Building Regulations and other system: drains enter buildings. Areas in England
statutory requirements. • as a combined system, or where special precautions are necessary
All drainage schemes require the approval • with separate systems for foul water and are detailed in BRE Report 211.
of the Building Control Authority. Local surface water, or
LANDFILL AND OTHER GASES
sewerage undertakers may impose • with separate systems where foul water
Precautions to be taken when building
additional requirements and restrictions. is connected to the main sewer, while
where landfill or other gases may be
Both should be consulted early, especially surface water disposal is by soakaways
where the drainage system is to be present are given in BRE Report 212.
or other suitable means.
adopted under an agreement under Where necessary ensure that drains are
Section 104 of the Water Industry Act Where the sewerage undertaker permits
sealed where they enter the building.
1991 or Sewerage (Scotland) Act 1968. surface water drains to be connected to a
The system may need to be inspected and foul water system an interceptor should (c) siting of septic tanks and cesspools
tested by the sewerage undertaker, as well be installed on the surface water side of Septic tanks and cesspools should be at
5.3
as by the Local Authority, Building Control the foul sewer junction, or trapped gullies least 7m from a dwelling and within 30m of
Authority and NHBC. should be used. a vehicular access to permit emptying. In
Scotland they should be at least 5m from a
Sewers which are to be adopted under an surface water manhole
dwelling and a boundary.
agreement under Section 104 of the Water
Industry Act 1991 or Sewerage (Scotland) interceptor public
combined (d) pumped systems
Act 1968 are outside the scope of this foul
sewer
Where a gravity system is not possible,
document. For information on standards pumps may have to be used. Pumped
required for adopted sewers, contact manhole systems should be designed in accordance
the local sewerage undertaker and other with BS EN 752 and BS 6297. The
relevant Authorities. installation should include:
Satisfactory outfall disposal is essential Where ground water drains are connected • holding tank of sufficient volume to
where a septic tank is installed. In England to surface water drains, there should be a contain 24 hours domestic effluent
and Wales the Environment Agency silt trap on the ground water side of the based on 120L/150L per head per day
consent may be needed to discharge junction. • suitable warning system giving visual
effluent from a septic tank. In Northern and/or audible signals to indicate system
(c) rights of connection to disposal
Ireland the Department of the Environment malfunction
should approve proposals, in Scotland the systems
• suitable equipment housing.
Local Authority and, where appropriate, Ensure that a legal right exists when
the River Purification Authority should connecting drains to an outfall. 5.3 - D5 Drainage systems shall
approve proposals. (d) capacity of private sewers be designed to minimise the risk of
Private drainage systems should be blockage
Ground conditions may preclude the use
of septic tanks in some locations. In all sufficient to cope with the intended Items to be taken into account include:
cases NHBC will require evidence of a capacity. The design should be in (a) pipe sizes
satisfactory percolation test where a septic accordance with BS EN 752 or similar Pipe sizes should be designed for the
tank drainage system is being installed. authoritative document. maximum peak load, using BS EN 752 as
See Appendix 5.3-B. the basis for calculations. Ground water
Where an existing private drainage system
drains and soakaways should be designed
For surface water discharge into a is to be extended, or where the capacity
with sufficient capacity for normal weather
watercourse the permission of the is to be increased, sufficient investigation,
Environment Agency is required in England conditions.
measurement and calculation should be
and Wales. A “consent to discharge” is undertaken to ensure that all parts of the (b) gradients
required from the DoE in Northern Ireland. private system are of adequate capacity. Design gradients should be as even as
In Scotland the Local Authority and, practicable, depending on the number
where appropriate, the River Purification 5.3 - D4 Drainage shall be designed to of WCs being served (minimum one for
Authorities should be consulted. prevent health hazards 100mm pipes, five for 150mm pipes, with
Items to be taken into account include: peak flows greater than 1 L/sec. at the
(a) ventilation of systems gradients shown below).
Ventilation of drains is normally achieved
Where flows are 1.0 L/second or less,
by ventilating discharge stacks. For details,
gradients for 100mm diameter pipes
should not be flatter than 1:40.
‘Internal services’ (Design).

The following gradients may be used where (b) flooding

flows exceed 1.0L/second: Where there is a risk of flooding the advice
slow of the relevant Rivers Authority should be
Pipe diameter Minimum radius
bends followed.
[mm] gradient
100 1 : 80 (c) ground water
Foul and surface water drainage systems
150 1 : 150
should prevent the ingress of ground water.
(c) pipe runs
Pipe runs should be designed to maintain DESIGN TO AVOID DAMAGE
self-cleansing velocity (0.7 m/s). They 5.3 - D7 Drainage systems shall be
should be as straight as practicable with designed so that they are adequately
minimal changes of direction. Bends protected against damage
proprietary
should only occur in or next to inspection manhole
chambers or manholes. Curves should be Items to be taken into account include:
slight so that blocked pipes can be cleared. (a) loads from foundations
Drains should be located so that
(d) access foundation loads are not transmitted to
To ensure that every length of drain can pipes. Where drainage trenches are near
be rodded, the design should include all foundations, foundation depths should be
necessary access points, such as: increased or the drain re-routed further
• rodding eyes from the foundations.
• access chambers
• inspection chambers Where the bottom of a trench is below
• manholes. foundation level, the trench should be
filled with concrete to a suitable level.
Sizes of access fittings and chambers For construction details of access fittings
should be specified for the depth of invert and chambers, reference should be made
as detailed in Appendix 5.3-A. to clause S6.
5.3
5.3 - D6 Foul and surface water

drainage systems shall be adequately A
watertight under test and working
less than 1m
conditions
ACCESS CHAMBER Items to be taken into account include:
(a) ground movement
All pipes should have flexible joints.
Where ground movement may occur,
precautions against leakage are needed. In
mining areas, and in other locations where
INSPECTION CHAMBER movement could be significant, a flexible
pipe system should be specified. Flexible
systems should be flexible pipes with A
flexible joints. Refer to Sitework Clause S5. more than 1m
Proper allowance should be made for

settlement. Where there is a risk of soil
movement, for example in made-up
ground, design gradients should be steeper
than the minimum allowed for the flow rate B is within A-150mm from B
bottom of foundation
and pipe size.
MANHOLE In non-uniform or saturated soils where
Inspection chambers and manholes may be movements of the trench bottom can be
the following types: expected, soft spots should be removed Where drains pass through structural
• open, half-round section channel with and replaced with suitable material. elements, allowance should be made for
suitable benching, or Protective blinding should be specified differential movement, thermal movement
• closed access - at manholes, cover for the trench bottom, to be placed and maintenance.
panels have to be removed to gain immediately following excavation. Pipes passing through substructure walls
access to the pipe.
In ground conditions where movement should accommodate movement by:
Side branches to inspection chambers and is likely to adversely affect the drain a • 50mm clearance all round, or
manholes should discharge into the main support system for the drain should be • a sleeve with a 50mm clearance, or
channel not higher than half pipe level. designed by an Engineer in accordance • if built in, a connection on both sides
with Technical Requirement R5. of the wall to pipes with flexible joints
Connections should be made obliquely in located not more than 150mm from
the direction of flow. Shrinkage and heave of clay soils can the face of the wall. Refer to Sitework
affect pipelines. Design gradients should clause S5(a).
be greater than the permitted minimum
to allow for possible movement. Refer to See clause D4(b) for prevention of gas
Chapter 4.2 ‘Building near trees’ for details entering the building.
of zones of influence of trees.

(b) loads from overlying fill and traffic (c) connection to surface water disposal OUTFALL
Pipes should be firmly supported systems The outfall from a septic tank may require
throughout their length and bedded to Surface water drainage is generally consent from the Environment Agency in
resist loads from overlying fill and traffic. required to be separated from foul water England and Wales. In Northern Ireland the
Small diameter rigid pipes may be laid: drainage. Surface water may be discharged Environment and Heritage Service should
• directly on trench bottoms, or into public surface water main drains or approve proposals. In Scotland the Scottish
• bedded on granular material. Refer to directly into natural watercourses, ponds Environment Protection Agency should
Sitework clause S4. or soakaways, as appropriate. Surface approve proposals. The designer should
water should not discharge to a septic tank ensure at an early stage that consent
For flexible pipes, and where a greater
or cesspool, or a separate foul sewer. will be given, or an alternative method of
factor of safety is needed, specify the
drainage selected.
bedding class and grading of backfill as For large or complicated dwellings the
described in BS EN 13242, BS 5955 and BS amount of surface water to be disposed of Copies of relevant consents are required
EN 752. Refer to Sitework clause S4(a). may be calculated by reference to BS 6367. by NHBC before work commences.
When using proprietary systems assessed Siting of soakaways should take account POROUS SUBSOILS
in accordance with Technical Requirement of topography to ensure that water is If the outfall from a septic tank is to
R3, pipes should be supported in drained away from the building. In soil of discharge to a porous subsoil, such as
accordance with the assessment. low permeability, soakaways should only gravel, sand or chalk, at a level above that
Special protection may be required where be provided where no alternative system is of the winter water table level, a soakaway
pipes are near the ground surface or available. Soakaways should be a minimum may be used.
where they could be damaged by the of 5m from any adjacent building.
This consists of an excavation filled with
weight of backfill or traffic load from A simple test for assessing the brick bats or other large pieces of inert
above. Guidance is given in Sitework clause permeability of the soil and how to convert material; or unfilled but lined, eg with
S5 and in BS 5955 and BS EN 752. the result into soakaway dimensions is dry laid brickwork or precast concrete
Manhole covers, gully gratings and other detailed in Appendix 5.3-E. A more refined (porous or perforated) rings, from which
fittings should be suitable for the traffic method to determine soakaway size is the effluent may percolate into the
conditions. given in BRE Digest 365. surrounding ground. Soakaways which
5.3
are not filled should be covered by a slab
(c) chemicals in ground and ground water (d) cesspools
incorporating an inspection cover.
If the ground or ground water contains A cesspool is a tank which stores effluent
sulfates, concrete and masonry work and has to be emptied periodically. The size of the soakaway should be
may require special precautions as determined as described in Appendix 5.3-
Cesspools should be sited within 30m of
detailed in Chapters 2.1 ‘Concrete and its C, the area of the bottom of the soakaway
a vehicle access to permit emptying. They
reinforcement’ (Design) and 6.1 ‘External should equal the area of trench bottom in
should be at least 7m from a dwelling.
masonry walls’ (Design). Chart 1.
Cesspools are required to be at least
Where the porous strata is overlaid by less
FOUL AND SURFACE 18m3 capacity. A 45 day holding capacity
permeable sub soil a bore hole may be
calculated at 150 litres/head/day should be
WATER DISPOSAL provided.
permitted by the appropriate authority.
5.3 - D8 Drainage systems shall be Proprietary septic tanks should be
(e) septic tanks
designed to connect to a suitable outfall assessed in accordance with Technical
A septic tank is a form of treatment plant
Items to be taken into account include: Requirement R3.
and requires a suitable outfall (agreed by
(a) connection to a main foul sewer the relevant authority) for treated effluent LESS POROUS SUBSOILS
All connections to a public sewer will discharge. Septic tank design is detailed in In less porous subsoils a sub surface
require the agreement of the responsible BS 6297. irrigation system may be a possible
authority. They should be consulted as to
Septic tanks should be sited within 30m of alternative.
the type and position of the connection to
be made. a vehicle access to permit emptying. They Such an alternative will have to be
should be at least 7m from a dwelling. In designed to determine the area of the sub
All connections to a private sewer will Scotland they should be at least 5m from a
require the agreement of the owners of surface drainage trench from which the
dwelling and a boundary. length of land drain can be found.
the sewer. This should be obtained as part
of the design process. If the main private CAPACITY First a percolation test has to be carried
sewer discharges into a public sewer the The capacity of the septic tank should out to determine the percolation value (s)
local sewerage undertaker should be be based on the number of people it will in seconds. Details of how to carry out the
notified of the proposal. serve. This is determined by the formula: test are given in Appendix 5.3-B.
(b) connection to a cesspool or a septic C = 180P + 2000 If the percolation value is less than 100s
tank
use Chart 1 to determine the field drain
The entry flow velocity should be where C = capacity of tank (in litres) min
trench area and Chart 2 the pipe length to
restricted to reduce disturbance in the 2700L
provide this area. For percolation values
tank. For drains not exceeding 150mm
and between 100s and 140s underdrains are
diameter a gradient not steeper than 1:50
for a distance of at least 12m upstream of necessary. For percolation values in excess
P = design population/potential occupancy
the entry is required. of 140s the soil is unsuitable for field
(min 4)
drains.
Rodding and cleaning facilities should be Appendix 5.3-C gives minimum capacities
provided at the connection with the tank. Design guidance for underdrains is given in
for septic tanks serving up to 10 persons.
Appendix 5.3-D.

FIELD DRAINS PROVISION OF DRAINAGE MATERIALS

These should be:
• sited taking account of topography to INFORMATION 5.3 - M2 All materials for drainage work
ensure that water is drained away from shall ensure satisfactory service for the
the building life of the system
• perforated pipes laid at least 500mm understandable format and include all Items to be taken into account include:
below the surface relevant information (a) manholes, chambers, pipes, fittings
• laid in trenches with a uniform gradient and covers
not steeper than 1:200 with undisturbed Drawings and specifications should
BS 65 Specification for vitrified clay pipes,
ground 2m wide between trenches and include: fittings, joints and ducts (Note: This
at least 8m from any building and 10m • proposed drain layout includes perforated pipes)
from any water course • invert levels and locations of existing BS 437 Specification for cast iron spigot
• laid on a 150mm bed of clinker, clean sewers and socket drainpipes and fittings
gravel or broken stone (20 - 50mm • junctions BS 1247 Specification for manhole step irons
grade) and the trenches filled to a level • ground floor levels of dwellings
BS EN 588 Fibre cement pipes for sewers and
50mm above the pipe and covered with • external finished levels drains.
strips of plastic material to prevent • inspection and access points
BS 4660 Specification for unplasticised
entry of silt • method of disposal of both foul and PVC underground drain pipes and
• backfilled with as dug material. surface water fittings
• position of any septic tank or cesspool in BS 4962 Specification for plastics pipes for
Note. If the level of the water table is relation to adjacent buildings use as light duty sub-soil drains
expected to rise in the winter months to • results of percolation tests where BS 5911 Precast concrete pipes, fittings and
within 1m of the invert of the field drains, treated effluent disposal is through field ancillary products
it is not acceptable to use sub-surface drains BS 5955 Plastics pipework (thermoplastic
irrigation. • length of field drains and their layout materials)
(including details of trench width, this
(f) small private sewage treatment BS 6087 Specification for flexible joints for
being critical to the functioning of the cast iron drainpipes and fittings (BS
works for more than one dwelling
system) 437) and for cast iron soil, waste
Small sewage treatment works for more
5.3
than one dwelling should be designed in • depth of field drains. and ventilating pipes and fittings
(BS 416)
accordance with BS 6297. The discharge Drains or sewers which are intended for
from the waste water treatment plant BS DD 76 Draft for Development, Precast
adoption should be clearly identified on concrete pipes of composite
should be sited at least 10m away from relevant drawings. construction
water courses and dwellings. The design
should be carried out by a suitably BS EN 124 Gully tops and manhole tops for
5.3 - D11 All relevant information shall vehicular and pedestrian areas
qualified engineer. be distributed to appropriate personnel
BS EN 295 Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and
Ensure that design and specification pipe joints for drains and sewers
GROUND WATER DRAINAGE information is distributed to site BS EN 1401-1 Plastics piping systems for non-
5.3 - D9 Ground water drainage shall be supervisors, relevant specialist pressure underground drainage and
designed to convey excess ground water subcontractors and/or suppliers. sewerage - Unplasticized poly (vinyl
chloride) (PVC-U)
to a suitable outfall
(a) layout of pipes INSPECTION/MANHOLE COVERS AND
Depending on site contours and ground MATERIALS STANDARDS FRAMES
conditions, ground water drainage, where • Group 1 - Areas which can only be used
required, may be designed as a: 5.3 - M1 All materials shall:
by pedestrians and pedal cyclists.
• natural system (a) meet the Technical Requirements
• Group 2 - Footways, pedestrian areas
• herringbone system (b) take account of the design and comparable areas, car parks or car
• grid system Materials that comply with the design and parking decks.
• fan-shaped system the guidance below will be acceptable for • Group 3 - For gully tops installed in the
• moat system. drainage below ground. area of kerbside channels of roads which
(b) pipe construction when measured from the kerb edge,
Materials for drainage below ground extend a maximum of 0.5m into the
Pipe perforations should be holes or slots should comply with relevant standards,
to suit the nature of the ground. carriageway and a maximum of 0.2m
including those listed below. Where no into the footway.
(c) outfall standard exits, materials should carry • Group 4 - Carriageways of roads
Ground water drain systems connected a certificate of assessment from an (including pedestrian streets), hard
to foul, surface water or combined drains independent authority, acceptable to shoulders and parking areas, for all
should discharge into the drain through NHBC. Materials of a higher standard are types of road vehicles.
a catchpit. Where available, ground water also acceptable.
drainage may discharge into a soakaway, Covers used for manholes within buildings
References to British Standards and Codes should be airtight and mechanically
preferably through a catchpit or into a
of Practice include those made under the secured.
watercourse.
In England and Wales the National Rivers EEC) and, in particular, appropriate Covers used for septic tanks, cesspits and
Authority consent may be needed for European Technical Specifications settlement tanks should be lockable.
discharge proposals. In Northern Ireland approved by a European Committee for
the Department of Environment should Standardisation (CEN).
approve proposals; in Scotland the River
Purification Authority should approve
proposals.

GULLY GRIDS Percolation tests should be verified where LAYING PIPEWORK
• Grade B - for use in carriageways of treated effluent disposal is through field
roads with cars and slow moving normal drains. 5.3 - S4 Pipework shall be laid to the
commercial vehicles designed lines and gradients
The length of any field drains specified
• Grade A Class 2 - for use in carriageways Items to be taken into account include:
in the design should be accommodated
of roads (a) bedding
within the site boundaries.
• Grade A Class 1 - for use in carriageways Pipes should be firmly supported
of roads (gully grids of permanent non- throughout their length and bedded as
rock design). EXCAVATION specified in the design.
5.3 - S3 Excavation shall ensure that
(b) bricks and blocks Bricks, blocks or other hard material
the invert levels and gradients required
Clay bricks for manholes should comply should not be used as temporary supports
by the design are achieved
with BS EN 771 and: to achieve the correct gradients, as they
• be of low active soluble salt content Items to be taken into account include: may create hard spots which can distort
• have a compressive strength not less (a) setting out dimensions the completed pipe run.
than 48N/mm2. Drain runs and depths should be set out
from benchmarks previously checked and Pipes should be either:
Engineering bricks are suitable. verified. Any discrepancies in dimensions, • bedded on granular material, minimum
and any ground conditions requiring 100mm deep or
Concrete bricks to BS EN 771 should have • laid directly on the trench bottom, where
modification to the design, should be
a minimum crushing strength of 48N/mm2 reported immediately. Any resulting the trench bottom can be accurately
with a minimum cement content of 350kg/ variations should be recorded and hand trimmed with a shovel but is not so
m3 for foul drainage. distributed to all concerned. soft that it puddles when walked on.
Calcium silicate bricks should comprise (b) depth of trenches Depressions should be formed where
strength class 20 or above for foul Excavate to the depths shown on the necessary in the trench bottom to
drainage situations. drawings. If any trench is excavated lower accommodate pipe joints.
(c) backfill and bedding than the designed bottom level, it should
Granular backfill and bedding material be re-filled to the designed level to allow
5.3
should comply with the requirements of for the bedding to be continuous. Fill
BS EN 13242, BS 5955 and BS EN 752, as material should be:
specified. • granular material, or
• concrete mix GEN 1 or ST 1/2 (not for
Rigid pipes of nominal size 100mm and field drains).
110mm nominal flexible pipes should have pipe supported pipe supported on bed
granular material bedding to BS EN 13242 Hard spots should be undercut and on trench bottom of granular material
of 4/10mm pipe bedding gravel. Rigid removed, so that local stress points under
pipes are avoided. Nominal pipe Granular material
pipes of nominal size 150mm and 160mm size [mm] for bedding
nominal flexible pipes should have granular Soft spots should be filled with suitable
material bedding to BS EN 13242 of well-compacted material.
rigid flexible Material (complying
2/14mm pipe bedding gravel. See Sitework
(c) width of trenches pipes pipes with BS EN 13242)
clause S4 (a).
Trenches should be as narrow as possible 100 110 4/10mm pipe bedding
Proprietary pipe systems should be within working limits, allowing at least 150mm gravel
supported and bedded in accordance with working space on each side of the pipe. 150 160 2/14mm pipe bedding
the manufacturer’s recommendations. gravel
(d) proximity of foundations
or
Foundation bottoms should be lower than 4/10mm pipe bedding
adjacent drainage trenches. gravel
SITEWORK STANDARDS Where the bottom of a trench is below
foundation level, the trench should be Proprietary pipes should be supported
5.3 - S1 All sitework shall:
filled with concrete to a suitable level. in accordance with manufacturers’
(a) meet the Technical Requirements recommendations. Some proprietary
(b) take account of the design systems permit a minimum of 50mm depth
(c) follow established good practice and of bedding in certain circumstances.
workmanship Generally, for 150mm diameter and 100mm
A
Sitework that complies with the design and less than 1m diameter drains, a bed and surround of
the guidance below will be acceptable for 10mm pea gravel (to a thickness of 100mm
drainage below ground. all round the drain) will be acceptable for
drains under gardens, paths and drives.
PRELIMINARY WORK (b) jointing
5.3 - S2 Checks shall be made on site to Pipes should have flexible joints, installed
A
ensure that the design can be achieved in accordance with manufacturers’
more than 1m
recommendations.
Check that the following are as specified in
the design: (c) sidefill and backfill
B is within A-150mm
• invert levels and locations of existing from bottom of Sidefill and backfill should be placed as
B
sewers foundation soon as the pipes have been bedded,
• ground floor levels of dwellings jointed and inspected.
• external finished levels.
For proprietary systems, sidefilling
and backfilling should be carried out

in accordance with manufacturers’ PROTECTION OF PIPEWORK GARDEN AREAS

recommendations. Sidefill should be either: Where flexible pipes are not under a
• granular material (see table to Clause 5.3 - S5 Pipework shall be adequately road and have less than 0.6m cover they
S4(a)), or protected against damage should, where necessary, have concrete
• selected backfill material from the Items to be taken into account include: paving slabs laid as bridging above the
trench excavation, ie free from: (a) pipes passing through substructure pipes, with at least 75mm of granular
- stones larger than 40mm walls material between the top of the pipe
- clay lumps larger than 100mm Pipes passing through substructure walls and underside of the slabs.
- timber should accommodate movement. This may
- frozen material be achieved by:
- vegetable matter. • a 50mm clearance all round, or
• a sleeve, with 50mm clearance all round
GENERAL BACKFILL less than
and suitably sealed 600mm
Normally the excavated material from the cover
• if built in, connecting on both sides of
trench will be suitable for backfilling above
the wall to pipes with flexible joints 75mm
the selected material. General backfill
located not more than 150mm from the
material should be free from:
face of the wall. Flexible joints should
• boulders
be made in accordance with the pipe
• building rubble 100mm
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• timber
• vegetable matter. 50mm space
around pipe
PLACING BACKFILL (c) movement joints

Backfill should be placed in layers not Where rigid pipes have to be encased in
opening masked
deeper than 300mm, and should be well both sides concrete, movement joints of 13mm thick
compacted. Mechanical compacting should compressible board should be provided
only be used when compacted backfill is at around the spigot next to the socket,
least 450mm above the crown of the pipe. either at each joint or at not more than 5m
PIPES PASSING THROUGH LINTELLED OPENING
intervals.
5.3
movement joint of 13mm

compressible board
150mm 150mm
max max
600mm 600mm
max max
flexible flexible
joint joint
pipe encased
in concrete at
least 100mm
thick all round
150mm
above
pipe PIPES BEDDED IN WALLS
ACCESS POINTS AND
(b) pipework under roads GULLIES
Where drains pass under roads and drives,
the final compaction should be sufficient 5.3 - S6 Access points shall be
to prevent later settlement. constructed and installed as required by
the design
RIGID PIPES
Rigid pipes less than 1.2m below the
(a) size and location of access points
road surface should, where necessary,
All access points should be located where
be protected from damage by concrete
shown on the drawings. They should:
encasement not less than 100mm thick,
• be accessible for rodding and cleaning
and having movement joints formed with
• not cross boundaries or kerb lines.
compressible board at each socket or
sleeve joint face. Ensure that inspection chambers and
manholes are of sufficient size for the depth
Flexible joints should remain flexible.
of invert. Do not exceed the invert depth for
FLEXIBLE PIPES the particular fitting or chamber. Reference
Flexible pipes less than 0.9m below the should be made to Appendix 5.3-A.
road surface should be protected by (b) covers of the drainage system
concrete bridging slabs or should be Manholes should be constructed or installed
2 layers hand compacted
surrounded with concrete reinforced as at the correct level, so that the covers will
before mechanical compaction appropriate. align with the adjacent ground. Gullies
should be adequately bedded, set level and
protected if protected if square and kerbed, where necessary.
cover less cover less
than 900mm than 1.2m
(c) traditional construction
FLEXIBLE RIGID The minimum specification for traditional
PIPES PIPES
manholes and inspection chambers is as
follows:

BASE shoulders and parking areas, for all percolation test where a septic tank
Concrete not less than 100mm thick. types of road vehicles. drainage system is to be installed. See
Appendix 5.3-B.
WALLS Covers used for manholes within buildings
Brick, blockwork or concrete should should be airtight and mechanically Septic tanks should be sited taking account
be appropriate for ground conditions. secured. of topography to ensure that water is
Generally 100mm minimum thickness is drained away from the building.
Covers used for septic tanks, cesspits and
suitable for depths up to 0.9m where no
settlement tanks should be lockable. (b) impermeability to liquids
vehicular traffic loads are encountered
Septic tanks should be impermeable to
and there is no ground water pressure.
Elsewhere, 200mm minimum thickness CESSPOOLS their contents and to sub-soil water. They
may be constructed of brickwork, concrete,
should be provided. 5.3 - S7 Cesspools shall be sited and glass reinforced concrete, glass reinforced
constructed to prevent contamination of plastics or steel.
RENDERING
water and health hazards
Rendering, if required, should be applied to Brickwork should be of engineering bricks,
the external faces of the wall. Items to be taken into account include: laid in cement mortar and at least 220mm
(a) resistance to the passage of water thick.
BENCHING Cesspools should be impermeable to their
Benching should be steel trowelled to contents and to subsoil water. They may In-situ concrete should be at least 150mm
provide: be constructed of brickwork, concrete, thick.
• a smooth finish glass reinforced concrete, glass reinforced
• rounded corners (c) cover and ventilation
plastics or steel.
• a fall of not less than 1:12 Septic tanks should be covered and
• a good foothold. Brickwork should be of engineering bricks, ventilated.
laid in cement mortar and at least 220mm
(d) siting, inspection and access
nominal thickness.
Septic tanks should be sited at least 7m
In-situ concrete should be at least 150mm from a dwelling, but within 30m of a vehicle
thick. access to facilitate emptying. In Scotland,
5.3
they should be at least 5m from a dwelling
(b) cover and ventilation and a boundary. Septic tanks should be
Cesspools should be covered and provided with access for emptying or
ventilated. de-sludging and cleaning. All such access
(c) siting, access and inspection points where entry is required should have
Cesspools should be sited at least 7m from no dimension less than 600mm and be
a dwelling, but within 30m of a vehicle provided with lockable covers.
access to facilitate emptying. The inlet and outlet of a septic tank should
Cesspools should be provided with access be provided with access for inspection.
(d) proprietary systems for emptying or de-sludging and cleaning. (e) velocity of flow
Proprietary systems should be installed All such access points should have no Provision should be made to limit the
strictly in accordance with manufacturers’ dimension less than 600mm and be velocity of the flow to a septic tank. For
instructions. Adaptors, couplers and provided with lockable covers. drains up to 150mm diameter, the velocity
sealing rings should be installed correctly may be limited by laying the last 12m of the
and only the lubricants and solvents The inlet of a cesspool should be provided
with access for inspection. incoming drain at a gradient not steeper
specified by the manufacturer used. than 1:50. A dip pipe should be provided,
Proprietary manholes should not be used Cesspools should have no openings except with the top limb rising above scum level
at a depth greater than that for which they the inlet, the vent and the inspection and the bottom limb extending about
have been assessed as suitable. access. 450mm below top water level.
(e) type of cover/grid SEPTIC TANKS SURFACE WATER

Manhole covers and gully grids should
be of the correct type for the proposed 5.3 - S8 Septic tanks shall be sited and SOAKAWAYS
location. Proprietary items (eg covers to constructed to prevent contamination of
5.3 - S9 Soakaways shall be sited
plastic manholes) should be in accordance water and health hazards
and constructed to provide adequate
with manufacturers’ recommendations. Items to be taken into account include: short term storage for surface water
(a) outfall disposal and adequate percolation into the
INSPECTION/MANHOLE COVERS AND
Satisfactory outfall disposal is essential surrounding ground
FRAMES
where septic tank sewage disposal is
• Group 1 - Areas which can only be used Items to be taken into account include:
installed. Environment Agency consent
by pedestrians and pedal cyclists (a) location
may be needed in England and Wales.
• Group 2 - Footways, pedestrian areas Where possible soakaways should be built
In Northern Ireland the Environment
and comparable areas, car parks or car on land lower than, or sloping away from,
and Heritage Service should approve
parking decks buildings. Soakaways should generally be
proposals, in Scotland the Scottish
• Group 3 - For gully tops installed in the sited at least 5m from the foundations of
Environment Protection Agency should
area of kerbside channels of roads which a building.
approve proposals. Check that this
when measured from the kerb edge,
approval has been obtained before starting NHBC may require a percolation test for
extend a maximum of 0.5m into the
drainage work. a soakaway. If the ground is free draining
carriageway and a maximum of 0.2m
into the footway Ground conditions may preclude the use and granular, a test may not be necessary.
• Group 4 - Carriageways of roads of septic tanks in some locations. NHBC However, if there is any doubt about the
(including pedestrian streets), hard will require evidence of a satisfactory ground, or if there is a large quantity

of run-off into the soakaway which may PROTECTION OF WORK

swamp the ground, a percolation test may
be required. 5.3 - S11 All completed work shall be
suitably protected from damage by
Information on percolation tests is given in construction work
Appendix 5.3-E.
Damaged drainage will not be accepted.
(b) small soakaways It is recommended that no heavy loading
Small soakaways are holes filled with or underground work is permitted above
granular material, eg broken brick, crushed or near unprotected drainage, and that
rock or gravel, with particle size 10mm to dumpers, trucks, fork lifts or other heavy
150mm. PVC sheet or concrete blinding vehicles are not driven along or near pipe
should be laid over the fill to prevent runs.
topsoil being washed down into the
soakaway.
PVC sheet or
concrete blinding
effective depth D
diameter D
(c) large soakaways
5.3
For large soakaways, a pit is lined with dry

jointed or honeycomb brickwork.
Alternatively, perforated precast concrete
rings or segments may be laid dry and
surrounded with granular material.
The volume of large soakaways should be
calculated to ensure they are of suitable
capacity. Refer to Appendix 5.3-E or BRE
Digest 365.
TESTING
5.3 - S10 All foul and, where
appropriate, surface water drainage
systems shall be tested prior to
handover
Inspection and testing should be arranged
when required by the Local Authority, the
sewerage undertaker and NHBC.
Before backfilling, visual inspections are
required and the Builder is advised to test.
When the dwelling is handed over, the
system must be in full working order and
free from obstruction.

Appendix 5.3-A
Minimum dimensions for access fittings and chambers

Type Depth to invert Internal sizes Cover sizes
from cover level
Length x Circular Length x Circular
(m)
Width (mm) Width (mm)
(mm x mm) (mm x mm)
Rodding eye As drain but Same size as
min 100 pipework1
Access fitting
small 150 diam 0.6 or less,
150 x 100 except where 150 x 100 150 150 x 1001 Same size as
situated in a access fitting
large 225 x 100 chamber 225 x 100 225 225 x 1001
Inspection chamber
shallow 0.6 or less 225 x 100 1902 - 1901
1.2 or less 450 x 450 450 Min 430 x 430 430
deep greater than 1.2 450 x 450 450 max 300 x 3003 Access restricted
to max 3503
Notes
1 The clear opening may be reduced by 20mm in order to provide proper support for the cover
and frame.
2 Drains up to 150mm.
5.3
3 A larger clear opening cover may be used in conjunction with a restricted access. The size is
restricted for health and safety reasons to deter entry.
Minimum dimensions for manholes

Type Size of largest pipe Min internal dimensions1 Min clear opening size1
(DN) (mm)
Rectangular Circular Rectangular Circular
length and diameter (mm) length and diameter
width (mm) width (mm) (mm)
Manhole
less than equal to or less than 150 750 x 6757 10007 750 x 6752 na3
1.5m deep 225 1200 x 675 1200 1200 x 6752
to soffit 300 1200 x 750 1200
greater than 300 1800 x (DN+450) The larger of 1800
or (DN+450)
greater equal to or less than 225 1200 x 1000 1200 600 x 600 600
than 1.5m 300 1200 x 1075 1200
deep to 375 - 450 1350 x 1225 1200
soffit greater than 450 1800 x (DN+775) The larger of 1800
or (DN+775)
Manhole shaft4
greater Steps5 1050 x 800 1050 600 x 600 600
than 3.0m
deep to Laddder5 1200 x 800 1200
soffit pipe Winch6 900 x 800 900 600 x 600 600
Notes
1 Larger sizes may be required for manholes on bends or where there are junctions.
2 May be reduced to 600 by 600 where required by highway loading considerations, subject to a
safe system of work being specified.
3 Not applicable due to working space needed.
4 Minimum height of chamber in shafted manhole 2m from benching to underside of reducing
slab.
5 Min clear space between ladder or steps and the opposite face of the shaft should be
approximately 900mm.
6 Winch only - no steps or ladders, permanent or removable.
7 The minimum size of any manhole serving a sewer (i.e any drain serving more than one
property) should be 1200mm x 675 mm rectangular or 1200mm diameter.
Reproduced from Tables 11 and 12 of Approved Document H to the Building Regulations by
permission of HMSO.

Appendix 5.3-B
Percolation test procedure for septic tank installations
1 Excavate a hole 300mm square x 250mm deep below the proposed invert level of the land
drain.
2 Fill the hole with water to a depth of 250mm and allow to drain away over night.
3 Refill to a depth of at least 250mm and note the time taken (in seconds) to drain away
completely.
4 Repeat the exercise two more times and calculate the average of the three results, as
follows:
time to drain away (seconds)

percolation value (s) =
depth of water (mm)
Results
percolation value suitability
up to 100 use Appendix 5.3-C Chart 1 to determine field drain
area
100 to 140 use Appendix 5.3-C Chart 1 but with underdrains*
over 140 field drains unsuitable
* Where underdrains are necessary, drainage trenches should be constructed not less than
600mm deeper than the pipe level specified in the design, and the lower part filled with pea
gravel (see Appendix 5.3-D)
A second system of drainage pipes should be laid on the bottom of the trenches to convey
5.3
surplus drainage to an outfall in a surface ditch or watercourse.

Underdrains are costly, and a secondary treatment system able to produce an effluent
suitable for surface discharge may be preferable.

Appendix 5.3-C
Septic tank field drain design
Capacity based on Potential Occupancy
Minimum capacity (litres) Number of persons/bed spaces
2700 <4
2720 4
2900 5
3080 6
3260 7
3440 8
3620 9
3800 10
Chart 1 Field Drains Trench Area
240
230 9 persons
220
210
200 8 persons
190
180 7 persons
170
Field Drain Trench Area (m )
2
160
150 6 persons
140
130
120 5 persons
110
100 4 persons
90
80
5.3
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Percolation Value
Chart 2 Field Pipe Length
800 300 wide

750
Linear Pipe Length (m)
700
650
600
550 450 wide
500
450
600 wide
400
350
300 750 wide
250 900 wide
200
150
100
50
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240
2
Drain Trench Floor (m )

Appendix 5.3-D
Cross section of typical underdrain
Soil, gravel or
600mm
other topping
300 to
Tar paper
300mm
Invert of inlet pipe
Sand and gravel
600mm
Broken piece of tile
as cover to joint
Drain
5.3
600mm
Cross section of typical underdrain
Appendix 5.3-E
Percolation tests and design method for surface water
soakaways
PERCOLATION TEST
The rate at which water will disperse into the ground depends on the permeability of the
ground, which varies with the soil type.
The test will give a fairly accurate assessment of how the ground drains. As the test hole
can be used as part of a soakaway, it should be dug in a place that would be suitable for a
soakaway, at least 5m from the foundations of a building.
A summary of the test procedure is given below:
TEST PROCEDURE
A trial hole in a similar location and to the same depth as the proposed soakaway or septic
tank land drain will give a measured rate of percolation.
The procedure is as follows: 
1 Bore a hole 150mm in diameter with an auger to a depth of one metre.
2 Fill with water to depth of 300mm above the bottom. As an aid, mark a stick 300mm from
one end, place in the hole and fill up to the mark on the stick (it takes approximately 5.5
litres to fill a 150mm diameter hole to a depth of 300mm).
3 Observe the time taken in minutes for the water to soak away (this may take several
hours, in some cases need to be left overnight).
4 If possible the test should be repeated and the average time used.
5 A second group of tests are carried out after the hole has been bored out to a depth of 2
metres, still using 300mm of water above the bottom of the hole.
6 If the soil appears to become more permeable with depth, it may be useful to deepen and
retest the bore in one metre stages.

DESIGN OF SOAKAWAY
The relationship between the diameter or effective depth required for a soakaway to suit
a given area of roof and/or paved area, and the average time (t) given by the test outlined
on the previous page, is shown on the graph below. The diameter and effective depth below
invert level are assumed to be the same dimension (D).
400
300
D = diameter and effective depth

Plan area drained (m )
2
=
D
200 3.5
m
D = 2.8 D
=
150 3 .0
m
D=
100 2 .5
m
D= D=
2.0m
1.5
D= m
1 .0m
0
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000 4400
900 Time (t) in minutes
5.3
EXAMPLE
Test time (t) = 900 minutes
Plan area to drain = 150m2
Therefore, using the graph, the diameter and effective depth of the soakaway (D) are both
2.8m.
Notes
• If the ground is of low permeability, dig separate soakaways to drain smaller but distinct
parts, for example:
- one side of a roof to one soakaway
- the other side to a second soakaway
- the driveway or yard to a third soakaway.
• Where the permeability of the ground increases with depth, tests in the deepened trial
holes will give shorter percolation times, so it may be cheaper to build a smaller soakaway
at a greater depth below the surface.
• Where possible, soakaways should be built on land lower than, or sloping away from,
buildings. They should also be kept a “safe” distance away from buildings. This should be
at least 5m from building foundations. In chalk and other soil and fill material subject to
modification or instability, the advice of a specialist geotechnologist should be sought
regarding the siting and advisability of soakaways.

INDEX
A G S
Access 2, 6, 9 Garden areas 6 Septic tanks 1, 3, 7, 10, 11
B Gradients 1 Sewage treatment 4
Backfill 5, 6 Ground water 2, 3, 4 works
Bedding 5 J Soakaways 7, 12
Benching 7 Jointing 5 Subsoils 3
Blockage 1 Surface water 3, 7
L
Bricks and blocks 5 Landfill gases 1 T
C Layout 4 Testing 8, 10, 12
Capacity 1, 3 M U
Cess pools 1, 3, 7 Manholes 4, 6, 7 Underdrain 12
Chambers 4 Movement joints 6 V
Chemicals 3 Ventilation 1, 7
O
Connections 3
Outfall 3, 4
Covers 4
P
D Pipes 1, 2, 4
Damage 2
Preliminary work 5
E Private sewers 1
Excavation 5 Protection 6, 8
F Pumped systems 1
Field drains 4, 11 R
5.3
Fittings 4 Radon 1
Flooding 2 Rendering 7
Foul sewer 3 Rights of connection 1
Foundations 5 Roads 6

Part 6
Superstructure (excluding roofs)
6.1 External masonry walls
6.2 External timber framed walls
6.3 Internal walls
6.4 Timber and concrete upper floors
6.5 Steelwork
6.6 Staircases
6.7 Doors, windows and glazing
6.8 Fireplaces, chimneys and flues
6.9 Curtain walling and cladding
6.10 Light steel framed walls and floors

Part 6 Superstructure (excluding roofs)
Chapter 6.1
External masonry walls
CONTENTS
DESIGN Clause Page APPENDIX 6.1-A

Design standards D1 1 Suitable wall constructions 16
Statutory requirements D2 1 APPENDIX 6.1-B

Structural design D3 1 Areas of severe exposure to 18
frost attack
Exposure D4 2
APPENDIX 6.1-C
Mortar D5 3
Mortar mixes 20
Damp-proof courses and cavity D6 3
trays APPENDIX 6.1-D
Wall ties D7 4 Dpcs and cavity trays 21
Stone masonry D8 4 APPENDIX 6.1-E

Lintels D9 4 Durability classification of bricks 22
Thermal insulation D10-D11 5

Fire safety D12 5 INDEX 22
Sound insulation D13 5

Claddings D14 5
Rendering D15 5 SCOPE
Requirements and recommendations for external masonry
MATERIALS
walls.
Bricks M2 7
Blocks M3 7
Stone masonry M4 7
Mortar and rendering M5 8
Dpc materials M6 8
Wall ties M7 8
6.1
Lintels M8 8
Thermal insulation M9 8
Cladding materials M10 8
Movement joints M11 8
SITEWORK
Construction S2 9
Stone masonry S3 11
Damp-proof courses and cavity S4 11
trays
Wall ties S5 12
Lintels S6 13
Rendering S8 14
Cold weather working S9 15
Handling and protection S10 15

External masonry walls 6.1
located beneath areas of concentrated The spacing of the first movement joint
DESIGN STANDARDS loads. from a return should not be more than half
of the above dimension.
6.1 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical (e) chases
Requirements The position and depth of chases for When different materials are used
Design that follows the guidance below will services should be considered. Horizontal together, consideration should be given to
be acceptable for external masonry walls. chases should be limited to one-sixth the potential differential movement. Wall ties
thickness of a single leaf, and vertical are needed on either side of movement
chases to one-third the thickness of a joints (reference should be made to Clause
STATUTORY single leaf. D7 and Sitework clause 6.1 - S5).
REQUIREMENTS Particular care is needed where hollow Movement joints should run the full height
6.1 - D2 Design shall comply with all blocks are specified. Hollow blocks of the masonry wall. Any movement
relevant statutory requirements should not be chased, unless specifically joints provided in the substructure must
permitted by the manufacturer. be carried up into the superstructure.
Movement joints may be needed in the
relevant Building Regulations and other Chases should not be formed in external
superstructure where none are required
statutory requirements. walls within 650mm of a sound-resisting
in the substructure - however suitable
wall.
allowance should be made for relative
STRUCTURAL DESIGN (f) bonding movement.
6.1 - D3 External cavity and solid When partition walls abut the external
Where masonry walls form panels in a
walls shall be designed to support and wall and are of similar materials, they may
framed structure, movement joints should
transfer loads to foundations safely and be either fully bonded or tied together.
be provided in accordance with BS 5628:
without undue movement Where materials have dissimilar shrinkage
Part 3.
or expansion characteristics, eg dense
concrete and aerated concrete, a tied joint Details of suitable materials to form
(a) standards
is preferable as this will reduce the risk of movement joints are given in the Materials
Structural design should be in accordance
random cracking. section of this chapter.
with BS 5628.
In the case of a connection between a Where movement joints are provided to
Intermediate floors and roofs should be
loadbearing wall on foundations and a control shrinkage in concrete blockwork,
designed to provide lateral restraint to
non-loadbearing wall supported on a they may be simple vertical joints filled
external walls, in accordance with BS 8103
ground bearing slab, it is preferable to tie, with mortar and sealed.
and BS 5628.
not bond, the walls. This will reduce the
To ensure the sealant is effective, there
Walls of dwellings or buildings containing risk of cracking due to differential vertical
should be a good bond with the masonry.
dwellings over three storeys high should movement.
The sealant should be at least 10mm deep
be designed in accordance with Technical
Tied joints should be formed using or in accordance with manufacturers’
Requirement R5.
expanded metal, wire wall ties or a instructions.
6.1
(b) lateral restraint provided by concrete proprietary equivalent, at maximum
Movement joints are not normally
floors 300mm intervals.
necessary to the inner leaf of cavity walls
Concrete floors, with a minimum 90mm
(g) movement joints but consideration should be given to
bearing onto the wall, provide adequate
Movement joints should be provided, providing:
restraint.
where necessary, and in such a way that • movement joints in rooms with straight
Concrete floors running parallel to and stability is maintained. If no provision unbroken lengths of wall over 6m. This is
not built into walls require restraint straps is made for both initial and long term unnecessary for fired clay bricks
to provide restraint to the wall (reference movements, masonry walls may crack. • bed joint reinforcement as an alternative
should also be made to Chapter 6.4 to movement joints in areas of risk, eg
Vertical movement joints should be
‘Timber and concrete upper floors’ (each under window openings.
provided in the outer leaf to minimise the
section)).
risk of major cracking, as shown in the To reduce cracking and to maintain the
(c) lateral restraint provided by timber following table: level of thermal resistance:
floors • bricks and blocks, or blocks of different
Timber joisted floors can provide adequate Material Joint Normal spacing densities, in a wall should not be mixed
width • a joint should be formed where
restraint when joists are carried by
(mm)
ordinary hangers to BS EN 845 and dissimilar materials abut
connected to the wall with restraint straps. Clay brick 16 12m (15m maximum) • the joint should be tied (eg with
Calcium 10 7.5 to 9m expanded metal in the bed joint) unless
In buildings of not more than two storeys, silicate the joint is to act as a movement joint.
timber joisted floors can provide adequate brick
restraint without strapping when: Concrete 10 6m Where cracking is likely, walls should be
• the minimum bearing onto masonry block and dry lined or clad (reference should also be
is 90mm (or 75mm onto a timber wall brick made to Sitework clause 6.1 - S2(g)).
plate), or Any 10 half the above (h) calcium silicate brickwork
• joists are carried by restraint type masonry spacings and 1.5m
Design of calcium silicate brickwork
hangers, as described in BS 5628 : Part 1, in a from corners (double
parapet the frequency) should follow the the brick manufacturer’s
at not more than 2m centres.
wall recommendations.
(d) point loads
(i) cladding to framed structures
Padstones and spreaders may be
Allowance should be made for differential
necessary and, where required, should be
movement between cladding and frame.

The following precautions should be taken • retaining walls In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle
to prevent buckling and fracturing of • parapets of Man and in other places where the
masonry panels: • freestanding walls exposure to driving rain is Very Severe,
• flexible movement joints should be • rendered walls masonry should form a rebate at the
provided at the underside of each • areas of Severe or Very Severe exposure reveals of openings to avoid a straight
horizontal support member to driving rain. through joint where the frame abuts the
• the masonry outer leaf should have at masonry.
Reclaimed bricks should be used only in Minimum 12mm overlap of
least two-thirds of its width supported masonry (or render) to frame
accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
securely by the concrete frame or a
metal angle (b) rain penetration sealant ‘rebated‘ or
‘check‘ reveal
• the inner leaf should be adequately tied Rainwater will penetrate the outer leaf of 25mm
in areas of Very
severe exposure
to the structural frame. Forked plate a masonry wall in prolonged periods of
sealant
ties held in dovetail slots, cast into the driving rain. Resistance to rain penetration
column or an equivalent are acceptable of masonry walls can be improved by
• vertical movement joints should be cladding the wall. Total resistance can only
provided at corners. be achieved with an impervious cladding. Proprietary cavity closers may be an
acceptable alternative provided they
For timber framed construction, reference The following should be taken into account have been assessed in accordance with
should be made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External to minimise the risk of rain penetration: Technical Requirement R3. For information
timber framed walls’ (Design). • determination of the exposure to wind on doors and windows, reference should be
driven rain made to Chapter 6.7 ‘Doors, windows and
(j) corbelling
• a suitable wall construction and glazing’ (each section).
The size of corbels should not exceed the
insulation method In Scotland and areas of Severe or Very
dimensions given in Sitework clause
• design detailing for the local exposure, Severe exposure to driving rain, cavities
6.1 - S2(j).
taking into account the likely quality of should be continuous around enclosed
workmanship on site. porches and habitable areas.
EXPOSURE
A very high standard of workmanship Cavity trays should be used at junctions
6.1 - D4 External walls shall be suitable is required to ensure that cavities are with roof (reference should also be made
for their exposure and resist the not bridged. Where full or partial cavity to Clause D6).
passage of moisture to the inside of the insulation is proposed, the installation
dwelling should follow the recommendations of any Sills, copings and the like should be
assessment and the manufacturer. weathered and throated unless adequate
In this Chapter, reference is made to
alternative provision is made to protect the
exposure to:
The most exposed part of the building brickwork from saturation, frost damage
• wind driven rain
should be given particular attention when and staining.
• frost attack.
selecting a suitable construction method
as this may affect the choice for the whole (c) frost attack
Details of how these are defined are
The main factors affecting frost attack are:
6.1
contained in Appendices 6.1-A and 6.1-B. building.

• degree of exposure (incidence of frost)
Items to be taken into account include: The following aspects of design can reduce • saturation of the masonry
(a) general aspects affecting durability the risk of rain penetration: • frost resistance of the masonry
Masonry in the following locations is • providing cladding (other than render) • localised protection of the masonry
particularly likely to become saturated to the wall. Even if cladding is only by roof overhangs, trees and other
and may remain so for long periods. added to gable walls and upper floors, it buildings.
Precautions as necessary should be taken reduces rain penetration
• increasing the clear cavity width or the Areas of severe frost exposure are shown
to resist frost damage and sulfate attack in:
width of full cavity insulation. Increasing on the map in Appendix 6.1-B.
• parapet walls and copings
• sills and projections the cavity width for full cavity insulation In areas of exceptionally severe frost
• masonry below dpc at ground level from 50mm to 75mm or more greatly exposure, which is defined as a location
• freestanding walls. reduces the risk of rain passing through which is in a severe frost exposure area
the cavity. A nominal cavity of 50mm is and, in addition, faces long stretches of
The selection of bricks and mortar should always required on the outside of partial open countryside, only frost-resistant
follow the recommendations given in cavity insulation bricks (F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771) are
BS 5628 : Part 3 and manufacturers’ • rendering the wall (reference should also acceptable for the superstructure.
recommendations. be made to Clause D15). Specify backing
material carefully to avoid cracking In areas of severe frost exposure, the
In addition to the mortar designations
which can reduce the effectiveness of following are acceptable:
given in BS 5628, the following mortar
render against rain penetration • clay facing bricks which are frost-
mixes can be used with ordinary Portland
• designing protective features to keep resistant (F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771).
cement or sulfate-resisting cement:
the wall dry, eg projecting sills and deep Reference should be made to Appendix
• air-entrained 1 : 1 : 5½ cement : lime :
overhanging eaves and verges 6.1-E for the freeze/thaw resistance
sand, or
• mortar joints. All joints should be fully classification of bricks to BS EN 771
• air-entrained 1 :½ : 4½ cement : lime :
filled. Where full cavity insulation is • clay bricks which are classified
sand.
proposed, recessed joints should not be in manufacturers’ published
Sulfate-resisting cement should be used used. Reference should also be made to recommendations as satisfactory for the
where clay bricks with S1 designation are Clause D5(c). exposure
used as follows: In areas of Very Severe exposure to driving • calcium silicate bricks (in accordance
• below dpc where there are sulfates rain and in Scotland the cavity should not with BS EN 771)
present in the ground contain full fill insulation. • concrete bricks with a strength not less
• below dpc where there is a high risk of than 20N/mm2
saturation

• concrete blocks with a density not less increase the risk of frost damage, sulfate (d) admixtures and additives
than 1500kg/m3 or of strength not less attack or other detrimental effects. They Calcium chloride should not be used as
than 7.3N/mm2 should not be applied to S1 designation an admixture to mortar. The contents of
• most types of aerated concrete blocks bricks without the brick manufacturer’s admixtures should be checked to ensure
with render. written agreement. that they do not contain calcium chloride.
In Scotland, all clay bricks used as facings Admixtures should only be used in
should be frost-resistant (F2,S2 or F2,S1 to MORTAR accordance with manufacturers’
BS EN 771). 6.1 - D5 Mortar shall be of the mix recommendations/instructions.
If there are doubts about the suitability proportions necessary to achieve Mortars containing an air-entraining
of a facing brick for sites in areas of adequate strength and durability and be plasticiser are more resistant to freeze/
exceptionally severe frost exposure suitable for the type of masonry thaw damage when set.
classification, written confirmation should Items to be taken into account include:
White cement to BS EN 197 and pigments
be obtained from the brick manufacturer (a) geographical location and position
to BS 1014 may be used, but pigments
that the brick is suitable for: within the structure
should not exceed 10% of the cement
• its geographical location, and Recommended mortar mixes for different
weight or 3% if carbon black is used.
• its location in the structure. locations are given in Appendix 6.1-C.
Further advice concerning admixtures is
This applies particularly to bricks such (b) sources of sulfate given in Appendix 6.1-C.
as fletton facings which are moderately Ordinary Portland cement mortar can
freeze/thaw resistant (F1,S2 or F1,S1). expand, crumble and deteriorate badly
In addition, follow manufacturers’ if attacked by sulfates. Sufficient soluble DAMP-PROOF COURSES
recommendations on suitability, including sulfate to cause this problem may be AND CAVITY TRAYS
the choice and use of mortar and the type contained in clay bricks. Clay bricks with
of pointing. 6.1 - D6 Damp-proof courses and related
an S1 designation have no limit on their
components shall be provided to prevent
Recessed joints should only be used in sulfate content. The problem is most acute
moisture rising or entering the building
compliance with Clause D5(c). when brickwork is saturated for long
periods; mortar is vulnerable to attack by Items to be taken into account include:
Bricks that are not frost-resistant (F0,S2 or any soluble sulfates present. (a) dpcs
F0,S1 to BS EN 771) may not be acceptable Damp-proof courses should be provided
for use externally, unless completely To reduce the risk, sulfate-resisting
in accordance with the Table in Appendix
protected by a cladding which can Portland cement to BS 4027 should be
6.1-D.
adequately resist the passage of water. used:
• below dpc level when sulfates are At complicated junctions, clear drawings
Good brickwork detailing can limit present in the ground should be provided and preformed
persistent wetting of brickwork and reduce • when clay bricks (F2,S1 and F1,S1 to BS profiles specified. Isometric drawings
the risk of frost attack. EN 771) are used, and there is a high can sometimes be clearer than the
saturation risk, for example in the
6.1
For example: combination of plan and section/elevation
following situations: drawings.
• paths should drain away from walls to
- parapets
avoid saturating bricks near the ground (b) cavity trays
- chimney stacks
• sills, copings and the like should have a Cavity trays should be provided at all
- retaining walls
weathered upper surface interruptions to the cavity, eg window
- freestanding walls
• a coping should be provided for and door openings, air bricks, etc, unless
- rendered walls
all parapet walls, chimneys and otherwise protected, eg by overhanging
- areas of Severe or Very Severe
freestanding walls unless clay bricks of eaves.
exposure to driving rain.
F2,S1 or F2,S2 classification to BS EN
771 have been used. Copings should (c) joints A cavity tray should:
have a generous overhang, throatings Struck (or weathered) and bucket handle • provide an impervious barrier and
at least 40mm clear of the wall and a joints are preferable. ensure that water drains outwards
continuous, supported dpc underneath • project at least 25mm beyond the outer
which projects beyond the line of the Recessed joints should not be used where: face of the cavity closure or, where
wall. Single leaf parapet walls should not • bricks are perforated nearer than 15mm a combined cavity tray and lintel is
be rendered on both sides. to the face acceptable, give complete protection to
• bricks are not frost resistant (if clay F1,S1 the top of the reveal and vertical dpc
Where there is a risk that brickwork may or F1,S2 to BS EN 771), unless the brick where provided
be persistently wet, bricks should be manufacturer has agreed in writing for • provide drip protection to door and
specified that are low in soluble salts (if their use in a particular location window heads
clay, F2,S2 or F1,S2 to BS EN 771). • there is no reasonable shelter from • have an overall minimum upstand from
driving rain (reasonable shelter could the inside face of the outer leaf to the
Note be from buildings or groups of trees
Only clay bricks designated L by BS EN outside of the inner leaf of 140mm
if these are within 50m and of similar • be shaped to provide at least a 100mm
771 have a low limit on their soluble salt height to the dwelling)
content. In persistently wet conditions, clay vertical protection above a point where
• the dwelling is built on steep sloping mortar droppings could collect.
bricks of S1 designation may create sulfate ground, facing open countryside or
attack on the mortar. within 8km of a coast or large estuary
Painted or decorated finishes can trap • the cavity is to be fully filled with cavity
moisture in external brickwork and insulation.
Jointing is preferable to pointing because
it leaves the mortar undisturbed.

throating
clear of Minimum bearing length (mm)
brickwork
Span (m) Simple Lintel combined
lintel with cavity tray
dpc supported
at least at least over cavity
140mm 100mm Up to 1.2 100 150
Over 1.2 150 150
open perpend
weep holes at
To avoid overstressing, composite lintels
maximum 1m
spacing at least should have the required depth of fully
150mm
shape of an
effective
bedded brickwork stipulated by the
cavity tray manufacturer above the lintel, before
point loads are applied. Where necessary,
padstones and spreaders should be
In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of provided under the bearings of lintels.
Man and areas of Very Severe exposure to Reference should be made to Chapter 6.5
driving rain, the upstand part of the damp- ‘Steelwork support to upper floors and
proof protection should be returned into partitions’ (Design) for details of padstones.
(e) materials
the inner leaf of masonry except at sloping
Materials that are suitable for use as dpcs
abutments. In all other areas, the upstand (b) adequate durability against corrosion
are given in Materials clause 6.1 - M6.
should be returned into the inner leaf and resistance to water entering the
unless it is stiff enough to stand against dwelling
the inner leaf without support. WALL TIES Cavity tray/damp-proof protection should
6.1 - D7 Wall ties shall be provided, be provided over all openings, either as a
Where fairfaced masonry is supported by combined part of the lintel or separately.
lintels: where required, to tie together the
leaves of cavity walls Reference should be made to Clause D6(b).
• weep holes should be provided at
450mm (maximum) centres with at least The spacing of wall ties in masonry walls Steel and concrete lintels should comply
two weep holes per opening should be in accordance with Sitework with BS EN 845-2.
• cavity trays or combined lintels should clause 6.1 - S5. Seperate cavity tray protection should be
have stop ends.
Details of suitable wall ties are given in the provided when:
Where full fill insulation is placed in the Materials section of this Chapter. • the profile of the lintel is not as shown in
cavity, a cavity tray should be used above Clause D6(b), or
the highest insulation level, unless the • steel lintels have materials coatings
insulation is taken to the top of the wall.
STONE MASONRY references L11, L14 and L16.1 and are
(Manufacturers’ recommendations should 6.1 - D8 Elements constructed of used in external walls
be followed.) stone masonry shall comply with the
performance standards for brick and Lintels used in aggressive environments
(e.g. coastal sites) should be austenitic
6.1
(c) abutment details block masonry, where applicable

Cavity trays should be provided at stainless steel.
abutments of roofs and cavity walls. This Stone masonry should be designed to
meet the requirements of BS 5628 ‘Code In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
will ensure that any water penetrating into Man and areas of Severe or Very Severe
the cavity does not enter the enclosed of practice for use of masonry’.
exposure to driving rain, separate damp-
area. This only applies where the roof proof protection should be provided over
is over an enclosed area, including an LINTELS all lintels in accordance with the guidance
attached garage, but does not apply to 6.1 - D9 Lintels shall safely support the for cavity trays given in Clause D6(b).
open car ports and open porches. applied loads
Lintels should be of such a size and be
Where the roof abuts at an angle with Items to be taken into account include: located so that the external edge of the
the wall, preformed stepped cavity trays (a) structural support lintel projects beyond, and therefore offers
should be provided. Concrete, steel and reinforced brickwork protection to, the window head.
are acceptable materials for use as lintels.
preformed
stepped
(c) cold bridging and condensation
cavity trays Timber lintels should not be used, unless: The BRE Report ‘Thermal insulation:
• they are protected from the weather, avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of
and insulation relevant to external masonry
• they do not support masonry or other walls. In England and Wales account should
rigid or brittle materials. be taken of Accredited Details.
at least Lintels should be designed in accordance The risk of condensation at reveals and
85mm
either with Technical Requirement R5 or soffits becomes more likely as the wall
manufacturers’ published data. A lintel insulation increases. Cold bridge paths
should be provided where frames are not should be avoided.
designed to support superimposed loads.
To avoid a cold bridge, the wall insulation should
Lintels should be wide enough to provide ideally abut the head of the window frame.
(d) parapet details adequate support to walling above.
Masonry should not overhang the lintel Clause D4(b) details methods of preventing
Dpcs below the coping should be rain penetration which may also be required.
supported over the cavity to prevent support by more than 25mm. A lintel
sagging. A dpc should be specified that can should extend beyond the opening at each (d) adequate fire resistance
achieve a good key with the mortar. end by at least the following lengths: Where steel lintels are used,
manufacturers’ recommendations for
providing adequate fire resistance,

particularly to the lower steel flange, be at least 50mm nominal. In areas of Very • sealing of air paths
should be followed. Severe exposure in England and Wales, a • allowing appropriate spacings between
residual cavity of 75mm is required where openings in external walls.
THERMAL INSULATION the outer leaf is fair faced masonry.
The density of external walls and the
6.1 - D10 External walls shall be Wall ties should be long enough to allow a position of openings adjacent to sound-
designed to provide the required 50mm embedment in each masonry leaf. resisting walls should be in accordance
standard of thermal insulation with statutory requirements and, where
(d) inner leaf of insulated blockwork
relevant, an assessment which complies
The insulation value of the wall must meet Types of blockwork include:
with Technical Requirement R3.
the requirements of the relevant Building • lightweight aerated concrete
Regulations. • lightweight aggregate blocks
• voided blocks with insulation infill CLADDINGS
Design should avoid cold bridging at • blocks faced with insulation material. 6.1 - D14 Cladding shall satisfactorily
openings and at junctions of external walls
Manufacturers’ recommendations should resist the passage of moisture
with roofs, floors and internal walls.
be followed and particular note taken of Items to be taken into account include:
6.1 - D11 External walls shall be designed the following: (a) battens
to ensure the correct use of insulation • a clear 50mm wide cavity should always Where battens are required, they must be
materials be maintained pre-treated with preservative, as described
Items to be taken into account include: • the blocks should be capable of in Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation
(a) acceptable insulation materials supporting concentrated loads (natural solid timber)’ (each section).
Insulation, or lightweight aerated concrete • the correct type of joist hanger for the
blocks, or blocks with face bonded type and size of block and size of joist (b) joints
insulation, or voided blocks with insulation should be used Joints between claddings and adjacent
infill should be used in accordance with: • long unbroken lengths of blockwork materials should be detailed to be watertight
• an assessment which complies with should be avoided under the particular exposure conditions of
Technical Requirement R3, or • precautions should be taken to reduce the site. Where necessary, provision should
• a British Standard and the relevant Code risk of shrinkage cracking be made for differential movement.
of Practice. • dry lining should be used where
shrinkage cracking might be unsightly (c) moisture barriers
(b) full cavity insulation and to avoid long term pattern staining Unless specifically not required for a
In Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man, at mortar joints proprietary cladding, moisture barriers
it is not permissible to fill cavities with • restrictions on chasing for services should be provided between walls of solid
pumped thermal insulants at the time of when using voided blocks should be masonry and any boarding, slating, tiling or
construction. noted (reference should be made to other similar claddings. The moisture barrier
Clause D3(e)). may be roofing underfelt or equivalent.
In Scotland, it is not permissible to fill the
full width of the cavity with any thermal (e) dual insulation Vapour barriers such as polyethylene sheet
6.1
insulants at the time of construction. Where partial cavity insulation is used are not an acceptable moisture barrier as
in addition to an insulated block inner they can trap moisture in the structure.
The type of insulation, its thickness and
leaf (reference should be made to Clause For timber framed walls clad with masonry,
the wall construction should be suitable for
D11(c)), the whole composite construction reference should be made to Chapter 6.2
the exposure of the dwelling in accordance
should have been assessed in accordance ‘External timber framed walls’ for details.
with Appendix 6.1-A.
Materials clause 6.1 - M9 sets out the range (d) vertical tile or slate cladding
(f) insulated dry linings
of acceptable insulation materials and the Every tile or slate should be nailed with
Where an insulated dry lining contains a
relevant British Standards. two nails. Nails should be aluminium,
combustible insulant, the plasterboard
copper or silicon bronze.
Render on an external leaf of clay bricks  should be at least 12.5mm thick and
(F2,S1 or F1,S1 designation bricks to BS EN mechanically fixed to the masonry inner Bottom edges should be finished with an
771) in Severe or Very Severe exposures leaf. This is to prevent early collapse of the under-course and tilting batten.
is not permitted where the cavity is to be lining in a fire.
fully filled with insulation. (e) timber cladding
Timber claddings should be pre-treated
The following design points should be FIRE SAFETY with preservative in accordance with
noted: 6.1 - D12 Cavity walls shall adequately Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural
• stop ends should be provided to cavity resist the passage of fire solid timber)’ (each section).
trays or combined lintels
• weepholes should be provided at Cavities should be closed with cavity
450mm (maximum) centres with at least closers in accordance with statutory RENDERING
two per opening requirements. 6.1 - D15 Rendering, in conjunction
• mortar joints should not be recessed with the surface to which it is applied,
• painted finishes on bricks or render are SOUND INSULATION shall satisfactorily resist the passage of
not acceptable if they are likely to cause 6.1 - D13 External walls adjacent to moisture
frost damage or sulfate attack or other sound-resisting walls shall be designed Items to be taken into account include:
damage. to adequately resist flanking sound (a) rain penetration
(c) partial cavity insulation transmission External rendered finishes should comply
Partial cavity insulation should be fixed with BS EN 13914 ‘Design, preparation
Acceptable levels of sound reduction
only against the cavity face of the inner and application of external rendering and
between dwellings may be achieved by:
leaf. The clear cavity width between partial internal plastering’ and the guidance given
• the inner leaf of an external cavity wall
cavity insulation and the outer leaf should below.
having sufficient weight, and

It is important to prevent rainwater Rendered finishes should not be used over prevent rain from penetrating the junction
penetrating behind the rendering. Design fully filled cavity walls if: as this might cause the render to fail as a
features around openings and at the head • the outer leaf is built in bricks with S1 result of frost damage.
of the rendering should provide shelter, designation (F2,S1 and F1,S1 to BS EN
All exposed timber, except naturally durable
where possible, and help to shed water 771), and
species, should be treated in accordance
away from the surface below. • the site is in an area classed as Severe
with Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation
or Very Severe exposure to driving rain
(b) exposed elements (natural solid timber)’ (each section).
(see Appendix 6.1-A).
It is not advisable to render exposed
Where timber is used on brick or render,
parts of a building, such as parapets and Rendering may be used on brickwork with
it is essential that all cut ends, mortices,
chimneys constructed of clay bricks of S1 partial cavity insulation provided a clear
etc made after treatment are flood coated
designation, without the use of sulfate- cavity width between insulation and outer
with preservative.
resisting cement. leaf of at least 50mm nominal is maintained.
Large section timbers should be fitted
(c) movement (e) mixes
with suitable weather bars, flashings, etc
Movements can occur at a change in The rendering mix should be appropriate
to prevent moisture penetration through
material. In such cases, the render should to the strength of the background. No
joints with adjacent materials.
be either stopped at specially formed render coat should be stronger than the
movement joints or, if the expected background or richer than the preceding Non-ferrous fixings should be used.
movement is small, be reinforced by metal coat. The render should be of adequate Aluminium is not suitable when the
lathing carried across the joint. If metal strength to achieve durability. preservative is Copper/Chromium/ Arsenic.
lathing is used, three rendering coats
Mixes should comply with the (h) proprietary and local rendering
should be applied.
recommendations of BS EN 13914 ‘Design, systems
(d) background preparation and application of external Proprietary rendering finishes should be
To achieve a good bond, the masonry rendering and internal plastering’. When applied in accordance with manufacturers’
backing should be moderately strong rendering on bricks that are F1,S1 or recommendations.
and porous to give some suction and a F1,S2 to BS EN 771, the Table to Sitework
mechanical key. Dense masonry with a clause 6.1 - S8(b) should be followed. The Traditional local rendering should comply
smooth surface should not be rendered. manufacturer of the background masonry with the above guidance, as appropriate,
should be consulted regarding particular and with established local practice.
Aerated or lightweight aggregate concrete
requirements for the mix or its application.
blocks can be used, as a background,
but more care is needed when selecting Pigments complying with the requirements
PROVISION OF
a rendering mix and surface treatment. of BS 1014 may be added to the finishing INFORMATION
Strong render mixes should not be used. coat up to a limit of 10% of the cement 6.1 - D16 Designs and specifications
Roughcast and dry dash finishes that weight or 3% in the case of carbon black. shall be produced in a clearly
require a strong mix are not recommended White Portland cement may be used. understandable format and include all
for use on aerated or lightweight
6.1
(f) number and thickness of coats relevant information

aggregate blocks. Block manufacturers’
The number of coats should be chosen For external masonry walls, the drawings
with regard to the background and the should show:
In Scotland, render should be applied only exposure conditions of the site. • wall layout with all dimensions shown
to bricks: • position and size of openings
For rendering on masonry cavity walls,
• which are keyed, or • coursing of the bricks and blocks in
one undercoat and one finishing coat is
• where a spatterdash coat has been relation to storey heights and opening
acceptable. On metal lathing or on solid
applied before the first render positions
wall construction, two undercoats and one
undercoat. • details at all junctions, indicating
finishing coat are required.
In other areas, render should be applied position of dpcs and cavity trays.
Initial undercoats should not be less than Isometric sketches are recommended
only to bricks where either:
10mm and not more than 15mm thick. Any for complicated junctions
• keyed bricks are used, or
further undercoat should be thinner than • position and type of lintels
• the joints are raked out at least 15mm
the preceding coat. Finishing coats should • position of restraint straps
deep.
be generally between 6mm and 10mm • details of cavity closers
Render may be applied to bricks (if clay thick. • details at reveals
F2,S1 or F1,S1 to BS EN 771) only if the • details of how support is given to other
Undercoats should be allowed to shrink
following conditions are met: elements, eg padstones and wall plates
and dry out before applying following
• cement for brickwork mortar is sulfate- • position and detail of movement joints
coats. When rendering onto dense
resisting to BS 4027 • acceptable methods of pointing or
concrete blocks, adhesion can be improved
• the brick manufacturer has confirmed, mortar joint finish
by use of proprietary bonding agents or a
in writing, that the brick is suitable, • type of insulant to be used
spatterdash coat.
taking account of the brickwork detailing • type and location of wall ties.
and the particular exposure of each (g) detailing of timber/brick/render
rendered element. If sulfate-resisting Dwellings which incorporate rendered 6.1 - D17 All relevant information shall
cement is used in the mortar, it should panels between timber boards should have be distributed to appropriate personnel
also be used in spatterdash coats and at least one coat of render applied over Ensure that design and specification
base coats of the render. the whole wall face before the boards are information is issued to site supervisors
fixed. The second coat may be applied and relevant specialist subcontractors
Care should be taken when specifying
between the boards. and/or suppliers.
render to walls with full cavity fill. The lack
of a ventilated cavity can slow down the Rendering and timber can shrink causing Where proprietary products are to be
rate at which the wall dries out. gaps. Precautions should be taken to used, manufacturers usually have specific

requirements for fixing and/or assembly In areas of severe freeze/thaw exposure BLOCKS
of their products. This information should outside Scotland, bricks that are
also be made available for reference moderately freeze/thaw resistant (F1,S1 6.1 - M3 Concrete blocks shall:
on site so that work can be carried out or F1,S2 to BS EN 771) may be used for (a) be capable of supporting intended
satisfactorily in accordance with the design general wall areas, provided they are loads
and specification. classified in manufacturers’ published Blocks should comply with BS EN 771 and be
recommendations as satisfactory for the used in accordance with BS 5628: Part 3.
exposure.
In general, 2.9N/mm2 blocks are suitable
Bricks that are not freeze/thaw resistant for one and two storey dwellings.
MATERIALS STANDARDS (F0,S2 or F0,S1 to BS EN 771) are not
acceptable for use externally, unless For three storey dwellings or dwellings
6.1 - M1 All materials shall: with storey heights over 2.7m, 7.3N/mm2
completely protected by a cladding which
(a) meet the Technical Requirements blocks are required for certain parts of the
can resist satisfactorily the passage of
(b) take account of the design structure.
water.
Where brickwork may become saturated, Structural design may show that strengths
moderately freeze/thaw resistant bricks lower than 7.3N/mm2 are adequate.
external masonry walls.
(F1,S1 or F1,S2 to BS EN 771) are not Other factors may dictate the strength of
Materials for external masonry walls appropriate if there is a risk of vulnerability blocks required in certain circumstances,
shall comply with all relevant standards, to frost. In saturated conditions, sulfate- eg sulfate-resistance may require blocks of
including those listed below. Where no resisting cement mortar is required for S1 greater strength.
standard exists, Technical Requirement R3 designation bricks.
applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the The maximum loadbearing capacity of the
Standards and Technical Requirements’). CALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS wall should not exceed manufacturers’
Bricks of compressive strength Class 20 recommendations.
References to British Standards and Codes (to BS EN 771-2) are suitable for most
of Practice include those made under the applications. Bricks of strength Class 30 (b) have appropriate resistance to
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ and declared as freeze/thaw resistant (to adverse effects of freeze/thaw and
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate BS EN 771-2) are recommended in areas sulfate attack
European Technical Specifications of severe freeze/thaw exposure (see map Concrete blocks used in the outer leaf
approved by a European Committee for in Appendix 6.1-B) or for use where bricks without protective cladding or render,
Standardisation (CEN). may be persistently wet (eg parapets, should:
chimneys, sills and below dpc). • have a compressive strength exceeding
BRICKS Calcium silicate bricks do not contain
7.3N/mm2, or
• have a density exceeding 1500kg/m3, or
6.1 - M2 Bricks shall: significant amounts of soluble sulfates • be made with dense aggregate to BS EN
(a) be capable of supporting intended and may be suitable where sulfate bearing 12620, or
loads soil and ground water conditions exist.
6.1
• be lightweight aerated concrete blocks
Requirements for the design strength Manufacturers’ recommendations should having had their suitability confirmed by
of bricks are given in BS 5628: Part 1. be followed. the manufacturer.
The brick specified in the design should CONCRETE BRICKS Concrete blocks should not be used below
be used. Clay bricks to BS EN 771 with a In concrete bricks there is a direct dpc where there are sulfates in the ground,
minimum compressive strength of 9N/mm2 relationship between strength and unless suitability is confirmed by the block
should be adequate for one and two storey durability, including freeze/thaw resistance. manufacturer. Sulfates may attack the
dwellings and 13N/mm2 for three storey Most concrete bricks in production have cement used in the block. Sulfate-resisting
dwellings. a strength of 20N/mm2 and are durable cement will be required in the mortar. The
(b) have appropriate resistance to the in most situations. For copings and sills, proportions will depend on the level of
adverse effects of freeze/thaw and bricks with a compressive strength of sulfates in the ground.
sulfate attack 36N/mm2 should be used.
(c) have an adequate thermal resistance,
CLAY BRICKS RECLAIMED BRICKS where required
BS EN 771 classifies clay bricks according Reclaimed bricks could be unsuitable The designer may have specified a
to their freeze/thaw resistance and soluble for external work because of a high salt particular type and thickness of concrete
salt content (see Appendix 6.1-E). content or a lack of freeze/thaw resistance. block because of its thermal insulation
Their use is permitted only in accordance performance in addition to its strength.
Only bricks that are freeze/thaw resistant Alternative concrete blocks should not be
with Technical Requirement R3. It is
(F2,S2 or F2,S1 to BS EN 771) should used without the designer’s acceptance.
advisable to know where they come
be used where there is a high risk of
from, both geographically and within the
prolonged wetting and freezing. Such
areas include:
previous building. Bricks used internally STONE MASONRY
or fully protected may be unsuitable in
• all external facing work in Scotland 6.1 - M4 Stone masonry shall be capable
external situations.
• exposed parts including copings, sills of supporting the intended loads and
and parapets and chimneys which have Reclaimed bricks should be considered have appropriate resistance to the
no overhang to provide protection. as F1,S1 or F1,S2 to BS EN 771 and used adverse effects of freeze/thaw
Reference should be made to Design accordingly. Independent certification of
clause 6.1 - D4(c) Stone for masonry should conform to the
suitability may be required.
• areas of the country subject to requirements of BS EN 771-6.
exceptionally severe freeze/thaw SPECIAL SHAPED BRICKS Reconstructed stone masonry units should
exposure (see map in Appendix 6.1-B). Special shaped bricks should conform to comply with BS EN 771-5.
BS 4729.

MORTAR AND RENDERING (b) flashings The installer should be a member of a

The following are acceptable as flashings: surveillance scheme acceptable to NHBC.
6.1 - M5 Mortar and rendering materials • rolled lead sheet (at least Code 4)
shall be of the mix proportions to Insulation materials should be installed in
complying with BS EN 12588
achieve adequate strength and durability accordance with the following:
• aluminium and aluminium alloys
to comply with the design • UF foam to BS 5617 installed in
complying with BS 1470 (0.6mm to
accordance with BS 5618
Items to be taken into account include: 0.9mm thick)
• all other insulation materials, whether
• zinc alloy complying with BS 6561 and
(a) cement and lime for full or partial cavity insulation,
0.6mm thick.
Ordinary Portland cement should be to BS insulated blockwork or internal
EN 197. Sulfate-resisting Portland cement insulation may only be used if
should be to BS 4027. Masonry cement WALL TIES assessed in accordance with Technical
should be to either BS EN 197 or BS EN 6.1 - M7 Wall ties shall be appropriate Requirement R3.
413. for their location and intended use The thickness of materials required by the
Limes should conform to BS EN 459. Wall ties shall be in accordance with either: design and Appendix 6.1-A should be used.
• BS EN 845, or
(b) sand type
Sand and aggregate from natural sources
• an assessment in accordance with CLADDING MATERIALS
should conform to BS EN 13139. 6.1 - M10 Cladding materials shall be
Ties should be long enough to be of the quality, type and dimensions
(c) mortar type embedded at least 50mm into each leaf. required by the design
Ready-mixed mortars should comply with
BS EN 998. For recommended mortar In England and Wales, wall ties should be Items to be taken into account include:
mixes, see Appendix 6.1-C. stainless steel or non-ferrous. In Northern (a) tiles and slates
Ireland, stainless steel or non-ferrous ties Clay tiles for tile hanging should be to BS
(d) additives should be used where the cavity is fully 402.
Air entraining and set retarding admixtures filled with insulation and 75mm wide or
should comply with BS EN 934. more. In Scotland, galvanised ties may be Concrete tiles for tile hanging should be to
used. BS 473.
Pigments for colouring mortars should
conform to BS EN 12878. Where partial cavity insulation is used, Slates for vertical slating should be to BS
it should be held in place by retaining 680.
(e) render devices which may be clipped to the wall
Sand for render should be sharp sand to (b) timber boarding
ties. These devices should be assessed in
BS EN 13139, preferably from the coarse Timber should comply with BS 1186 and be
accordance with Technical Requirement R3
end of the grading scale. Sand with Class 3 or better.
and used only with compatible wall ties.
excessive fine material will shrink and
Timber should be a naturally durable
crack.
LINTELS species or pre-treated with preservative.
6.1
Metal reinforcement to rendering should Reference should be made to Chapter 2.3

6.1 - M8 Lintels shall be of the type and ‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’
be galvanized or stainless steel, in
dimensions appropriate to their position (each section) for guidance on preservative
accordance with one of the specifications
within the structure treatments.
in BS EN 845.
Steel and concrete lintels should comply
Decorative finishes that contain asbestos (c) underfelt behind cladding
with BS EN 845-2, ‘Specification for
are not acceptable. Type 1F felt to BS 747 is acceptable as an
ancillary components for masonry’.
underfelt behind cladding.
DPC MATERIALS Lintels up to 1.2m length which do not
(d) battens
need a separate dpc tray should have a
6.1 - M6 Materials for damp-proofing minimum 100mm end bearing and project Battens should be of the size specified
shall resist adequately the passage of beyond the cavity closer by at least 25mm. in the design and pre-treated with
moisture Normally, other lintels should be long preservative treatments. Reference
enough to have a minimum 150mm end should be made to Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
bearing each side of the opening. preservation (natural solid timber)’ (each
(a) dpcs section) for guidance on preservative
The following materials are acceptable for Cavity trays may be required over the treatments.
use as dpcs: lintels. This should be specified in the
• bitumen to BS 6398 design. Reference should be made to (e) proprietary cladding systems
• polyethylene to BS 6515 (except below Design clause 6.1 - D9(b). Proprietary systems should be assessed in
copings and in parapets) accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
• proprietary materials assessed in
THERMAL INSULATION
R3. 6.1 - M9 Insulation materials shall
MOVEMENT JOINTS
provide the degree of insulation to 6.1 - M11 Materials for movement joints
Dpcs and flexible cavity trays should be of shall be suitable for their intended
comply with the design
the correct dimensions to suit the detailed purpose
design. All retro-fill insulation materials (UF
foam, blown mineral fibre and expanded When choosing materials, account should
For complicated junctions, preformed polystyrene beads) should be installed by be taken of the following:
cavity trays are recommended. Care should installers trained by the assessment holder • joint width
be taken to order the correct type and and approved jointly by the assessment • joint depth
shape. holder and the assessing organisation. • anticipated movement
• movement capability of material
• surface preparation

• backing materials (d) cavity walls
• projected life span of joint. Cavities should be uniform and of the
To keep courses to the correct height, use
Acceptable materials for movement joints width specified in the design. All cavities
a gauge rod. The rod should be marked
in clay brick walls are: should be at least 50mm nominal clear
with the height of windows, doors and
• flexible cellular polyethylene width. Partial cavity insulation should be
floors.
• cellular polyurethane fixed against the inner leaf of the cavity.
• foam rubber. All work should be reasonably level and Check that the correct wall tie is being
true. The bond detailed in the design used (reference should be made to Clause
Materials which are acceptable for use
should be used. Perpendicular joints S5).
in contraction joints with concrete bricks
should be kept in line and plumb. Courses
or blocks, but not acceptable for use as To keep the wall plumb, do not over-reach
should be kept level by using lines and
expansion joints in fired clay bricks, are: at changes of lift. It is better to wait for the
spirit levels.
• hemp next scaffolding lift.
• fibreboard (c) mortar
• cork. Different types of bricks and blocks need
In concrete blockwork, the construction different strength mortar mixes. Some
joint may be a simple vertical joint filled parts of the building, such as below
with mortar and sealed. dpc, chimneys and copings, may need a
different mix to the main walling. Make
sure the mix is right for the job.
Recommended mortar mixes are given in
SITEWORK STANDARDS Appendix 6.1-C.
6.1 - S1 All sitework shall: Plant and banker boards should be kept
(a) meet the Technical Requirements clean. Mixers should be kept clean to
(b) take account of the design operate efficiently. The mortar colour
(c) follow established good practice and should be consistent.
workmanship
Mortar which has started to set should not The difference in heights between the two
Sitework that complies with the design and be re-tempered. leaves of a cavity wall under construction
can be up to 6 block courses, provided
external masonry walls. All bricks and blocks should be laid on a
the ties are sufficiently flexible to ensure
full bed of mortar and all perpends should
coursing is achieved without breaking the
CONSTRUCTION be solidly filled.
bond.
6.1 - S2 Construction shall ensure a Joints should be filled to reduce the risk
Cavities should be constructed so that:
satisfactory standard of brickwork and of rain penetration and dampness in the
• mortar is struck off from all joints as
blockwork wall. Solid mortar bedding and fully filled
work proceeds
6.1
perpends are particularly important in
Items to be taken into account include: • wall ties are kept free of droppings and
exposed areas and where the cavity is to
(a) appearance debris
be fully filled with insulation.
The appearance of a masonry wall depends • cavity trays are clear of droppings and
upon the materials used, the setting out debris.
and the workmanship. Further details are
given in Clauses S2 to S10.
(b) setting out board keeps

properly
When setting out masonry, avoid cutting filled joints
cavity clear of
mortar droppings
reduce risk
bricks or blocks except when it is essential of rain
penetration
and avoid irregular or broken bonds,
particularly at openings.
Where a number of openings of similar
width are being formed, use a rod cut to
the required size to check the width of
openings as the work rises.
Unless the design states otherwise, only
bucket handle or weathered joints should
be used. Recessed joints should not be
used where the cavity is to be fully filled
with insulation.
Where pigments (to BS 1014) are used
they should not exceed 10% of the cement
Clean cavities with mortar droppings
weight or 3% if carbon black is used.
removed are particularly important in
For precautions to take in cold weather, exposed areas and where partial cavity fill
reference should be made to Chapter 1.4 is used.
‘Cold weather working’.
Where cavity insulation is used, mortar
droppings should be cleaned off from the
top edge. Mortar left on the top edge may
transmit dampness to the inner leaf. The
use of a cavity batten will prevent this.

Cavity battens should be wrapped with Where the inner leaf of a cavity wall is
flexible material to allow easy withdrawal. being used for thermal insulation and
where a different size of masonry unit is
tie where blocks are
of a different type
used to ensure correct coursing, the unit
batten keeps
cavity clear of should have similar thermal insulation
mortar droppings
properties to the masonry used for the
rest of the wall. For example aerated
concrete blocks should not be mixed with
clay bricks.
(h) chasing for services

Chases should be cut with care. Impact
power tools can damage the wall and
should not be used.
(e) movement
Brickwork/blockwork should not be
subjected to vibration until the mortar has horizontal chase no
deeper than one-sixth
set. block thickness
sill
(f) openings
Masonry may be built around either:
• the frame in-situ, or 1/2 vertical chase no deeper
than one-third block thickness
• a profile or template to enable the frame
3/4 3/4
to be fitted later.
1/2
Openings should be the correct size and The depth for horizontal chases should be
square. The brickwork should butt closely 3/4 3/4 limited to one-sixth of the thickness of the
against the frame. The frame should not brick bond set out at base of wall
single leaf. The depth for vertical chases
be distorted by forcing bricks against the so that cut bricks occur below openings should be limited to one-third of the
jamb. thickness of the single leaf. Hollow blocks
Where joist hangers are not used, joist should not be chased unless specifically
filling should be brick or blockwork, permitted by the manufacturer.
without excessive mortar joints. Clay bricks (i) movement joints
and concrete blocks should not be mixed. Movement joints should be formed where
Joist filling should be kept 12mm below the required by the design. Movement joints
frames should top of flat roof joists to allow for timber are necessary in long lengths of walling to
not be distorted
shrinkage, but check also that cold roof reduce unsightly cracking. Joints are often
ventilation is not blocked (reference should
6.1
hidden in corners, or behind rainwater

be made to Chapter 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and pipes. Normally, movement joints are not
balconies’ (Design and Sitework)). needed in internal walls and partitions.
Window and door frames, when built-in, flat roof joists
The correct materials should be used
should be fixed with: to form movement joints. Clay bricks
• frame cramps, or expand and require an easily compressible
12mm
• proprietary cavity closers, or material.
• plugs and fixings.
Timber plugs should not be used in
vulnerable positions, such as the outer easily compressible filler
leaves of walls.
12mm
(g) bonding
A regular bonding pattern should be
maintained. External walls should be
Where a different size of masonry unit is
bonded to partitions and party walls, as
needed to ensure correct coursing, small sealant
required by the design. Either:
units of the same material should be used
• tooth every alternate course, or
to reduce cracking and problems due to
• tie with wall ties, expanded metal or
different thermal insulation properties.
equivalent at centres not exceeding Suitable materials are:
300mm vertically. different masonry types • flexible cellular polyethylene
used to adjust coursing
• cellular polyurethane
bond where blocks
are of the same type
• foam rubber.
The sealant should be at least 10mm deep
to ensure a good bond. If the joint is in
a freestanding wall, the filler will require
sealant to both exposed edges and the
top (where the joint is carried through the
coping).
incorrect use of different masonry types

(j) corbelling The coping throating should be clear of the
Where courses are corbelled out in brickwork. Reference should be made to
ordinary masonry, one above another, the Clause S4(d) for guidance on sealing dpcs.
extent of corbelling should not exceed that
All dpcs should be fully bedded in mortar.
shown in the following diagrams.
Where reinforcing is used, corbels should throating
clear of
be designed by an Engineer in accordance brickwork
with Technical Requirement R5. at least

150mm dpc supported
over cavity
T
thickness
wall tie not reduced
on this side
open perpend
weep holes at
maximum 1m
spacing at least
150mm
Special dpc detailing may be required
at doorways where the dwelling is to be
T
designed to allow access for the disabled.
maximum corbel = T maximum corbel = T
3 3 Dpcs should:
CAVITY WALL SOLID WALL • be laid on a surface, free from
projections which could puncture or
(k) calcium silicate bricks adversely affect the dpc material (c) dpcs to prevent downward flow of
Where calcium silicate bricks are used, the • be fully bedded on fresh mortar where water
brick manufacturer’s recommendations required by the design, or where the Where dpcs are intended to prevent the
should be followed. building is over three storeys in height downward movement of water, joints
• be of correct width should be sealed or welded. Lapped joints,
STONE MASONRY • not project into the cavity unsealed, are unacceptable.
• not be set back from the edge of the
6.1 - S3 Stone masonry shall be Where flashings link with dpcs, rake out
masonry
constructed to an acceptable standard 25mm of mortar below the dpc to allow for
• lap the dpm.
the flashing to be tucked in. It is easiest to
Stone masonry will be acceptable if it: rake out the joints as the work proceeds.
• complies with brickwork/blockwork dpcs clear of cavity
clauses (where appropriate)
• gives an adequate weather-resisting
dpc laps dpm
structure (in conjunction with any brick
or block backing and/or vertical damp- slight
projection
6.1
proof membranes)
• is laid on its natural bed (unless local
practice is otherwise) 25mm
mortar raked out flashing wedged in
• follows good local recognised practice. while still green place and pointed up
STAGE 1 STAGE 2
DAMP-PROOF COURSES
AND CAVITY TRAYS (d) dpcs around openings
The concrete fill in a cavity wall should A dpc (either separate or combined as
6.1 - S4 Dpcs and cavity trays shall be part of a proprietary cavity closer) should
stop at least 225mm below the base dpc.
installed to prevent moisture entering be provided at jambs of openings and at
This may be reduced to 150mm where
the building heads and sills as required by the design.
special foundations, such as rafts, are
Items to be taken into account include: used.
Where a jointed or permeable sill is used
(a) horizontal dpcs
(all sills in Northern Ireland and the Isle
Dpcs and cavity trays should be in one
of Man), a dpc should be placed between
continuous piece, whenever possible.
the sill and the outer leaf, turned up at the
Joints in horizontal wall dpcs positioned
back and ends of the sill.
to prevent rising damp should be
lapped 100mm or sealed or welded. The at least
225mm
manufacturer’s recommendations should
be checked. Elsewhere, joints in dpcs and
dpc turned up
cavity trays should be sealed to prevent at back and
ends of sill
water seeping through the joints.
At ground level, all parts of the dpc should
be at least 150mm above finished ground
or paving level.
(b) dpcs in parapet walls
Parapet walls should have:
• a dpc under the coping, and
• a dpc tray starting 150mm minimum
above the roof. Where a separate vertical dpc is used it
should be 150mm wide and be nailed to the
full height of the frame. The dpc should

protrude into the cavity by about 25mm In Scotland, all lintels should have a dpc (f) stepped cavity trays
and extend up to the underside of the lintel built into the inner leaf. At the abutment of pitched roofs to
where it should be turned back towards cavity walls, stepped cavity trays should
In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
the inner leaf. be provided as shown below. The lowest
Man and areas of Very Severe exposure to
cavity tray should have two stop ends and
sealant driving rain, the upstand part of the damp-
a weep hole to allow water to drain from
proof protection should be returned into
25mm 25mm the cavity.
sealant
the inner leaf of masonry.
preformed
Where fairfaced masonry is supported by stepped
NORMAL EXPOSURE VERY SEVERE EXPOSURE cavity trays
lintels:
• weep holes should be provided spaced
at maximum 450mm intervals. Each
opening should have at least two weep
holes.
• cavity trays or combined lintels should at least
have stop ends. 85mm
stop end
WALL TIES
at least 2 weep holes
per opening, not more
than 450mm apart
6.1 - S5 Wall ties shall be of the correct
insulation vertical dpc
type correctly installed
combined lintel
projects at least Items to be taken into account include:
Where there is a sill dpc, it should be 25mm beyond
lapped with the reveal dpc.
the outer face (a) type
of cavity closure
The type of wall tie specified by the
If there is no sill dpc, the vertical dpc designer should be used.
should be continued 150mm below the sill 25mm min
level. (b) position
If ties slope down to the inner leaf, if
A fillet joint of sealant should not be drips are off-centre or if ties have mortar
considered as a substitute for good droppings on them, water can cross the
workmanship or dpcs. However, a bead of combined lintel cavity.
mastic should be used around openings. or cavity tray
The two leaves should be coursed so that
(e) cavity trays
6.1
the wall tie is level or slopes outwards.

The single brick thick external leaf of a
cavity wall can allow moisture into the
cavity. Cavity trays should be used so that
water drains outwards above openings. A cavity tray should be provided where the
Cavity trays over lintels should extend at cavity is bridged by air bricks, etc. The dpc
least 25mm beyond the outer face of the should extend 150mm beyond each side of
cavity closer and cover the ends of the the bridge.
wall tie should be
level or sloping
lintel. Where the lintel does not require a Where not otherwise protected (eg by a to the outside
dpc, the lintel itself should have a suitable roof at an appropriate level), a dpc tray
profile and durability and give complete should be provided over meter boxes. inside
outside
protection to the top of the reveal and
vertical dpc where provided. A dpm should be provided behind meter
boxes in areas of Very Severe exposure to Ties should be bedded a minimum of
driving rain. 50mm into each leaf of the wall as work
proceeds. The drip should face downwards.
Ties should be built-in, not pushed into
cavity
tray
cavity
tray joints.
at least at least wall tie built at least
140mm 100mm rise 50mm into each leaf
total rise in cavity tray
in cavity from front
tray of cavity
dpc oversails groove in window

lintel to protect head prevents rain AIR BRICK
timber door and penetration
window heads METER BOX
The upstand part of the cavity tray should

be returned into the inner leaf masonry
unless stiff enough to stand against the
inner leaf without support.

drip of wall tie placed
centrally in cavity
the inner leaf by retaining devices. The
retaining devices should be compatible
with the wall ties and used in accordance
with an assessment which complies with
Unless the independent assessment states
otherwise, where partial cavity fill is being
used the wall ties should be spaced more
closely to provide adequate support and
restraint for the 1200mm long boards.
Ties should be spaced at 600mm centres overhang
not more
overhang
not more
horizontally and in vertical as well as than 25mm than 25mm
horizontal rows, ie not staggered. flexible sealant

Where one leaf is built in advance of the lintel toe projects between lintel
and window
other, the wall ties should project enough beyond window head
from the built leaf to bed at least 50mm LINTELS STEEL LINTEL
into the unbuilt leaf. 6.1 - S6 Lintels and beams shall be
installed correctly (b) thermal insulation
Items to be taken into account include: Insulation may help to prevent cold bridges
(a) span and placing at the heads of openings in external walls.
Lintels should be the correct size for the The design should be checked for this
opening and have the correct bearing at requirement. Insulation should be provided
50mm
each end: to the underside of the lintel unless the
manufacturer shows an alternative to
wall tie should project
enough to build 50mm Minimum bearing length (mm) prevent cold bridging.
into the unbuilt leaf
Span (m) Simple Lintel

lintel combined
with cavity
tray
Up to 1.2 100 150
Over 1.2 150 150
Longer span lintels may require padstones

(the design should be checked).
sealant
Setting out should ensure that lintels
(c) spacing
6.1
bear on a full block, where possible, or on
Wall ties should be spaced above and
a whole brick, and be installed level on a
below dpc as follows: sealant
solid bed of a mortar. Soft or non-durable
Maximum spacing (mm) packing should not be used. Small pieces
of cut brick or block should not be used (c) use of dpc cavity trays
Horizontally Vertically around lintel bearings. A separate cavity tray should be provided
General wall 900 450 over some lintels if:
area • the corrosion protection to the lintel is
At jamb within 225 not more inadequate, and
openings, of opening than 300 • the shape of the lintel is unsuitable.
movement lintel
joints, etc. This should be checked with the designer

full block for
lintel bearing or buyer.
At openings and movement joints, wall ties correct bonding
In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
should be spaced at maximum 300mm below supporting
block
Man and areas of Severe or Very Severe
centres vertically even if this means exposure to driving rain, a cavity tray is
cutting cavity insulation to insert the tie. required over all lintels. Reference should
Lintels and masonry should form openings be made to Clause S4(e) for details of
additional ties additional ties
at movement joint at openings of the correct size for the frame of the cavity trays.
window or door.
All cavity trays should have stop ends
Concrete floor units or other heavy where the outer leaf is fairfaced masonry.
components which bear on lintels should
225mm
be positioned carefully to avoid damage or (d) use of steel lintels
450mm
shock load. Where steel lintels are being used, the
inner and outer leaf should be built up
The lintel toe should: together to avoid twisting the lintel flange.
• project past the window head The difference in height between the
900mm • have a flexible sealing compound leaves should not exceed 225mm.
between toe and window.
(d) use of partial fill insulation Brickwork or masonry should not overhang
Where partial cavity fill insulation is
the lintel by more than 25mm.
being used, it should be retained against

THERMAL INSULATION and condensation can form on the cold across the joints or, alternatively, provision
spots where insulation is missing. made to accommodate movement.
6.1 - S7 Thermal insulation shall be
installed correctly insulation cut to avoid
leaving uninsulated gaps
Expanded metal should be fixed with
the correct side towards the wall (see
A high standard of workmanship should be manufacturers’ literature). If metal lathing
maintained to minimise the risk of damp is used to bridge changes in background
penetration to the inside of the dwelling material, a separating strip, eg breather
lintel
where cavity insulation is used. paper, should be fixed behind the lathing
In particular: so that the render does not bond at the
• mortar joints, including perpends, should background joints. Lathing should be set
be solidly filled with mortar
reveal
blocks
away from the wall so that rendering can
• mortar droppings should be removed be forced through the mesh to achieve a
from wall ties and the edges of good bond.
insulation materials
• excess mortar should be struck smooth
from the inside of the outer leaf.
Where insulation is built-in, manufacturers’
separating strip used behind
instructions should be followed. These expanded metal when plastering
across dissimilar backgrounds
are normally printed on the insulation
fibres in
packaging and include a recommended insulation
should be (b) mix
sequence of construction. parallel to
the wall to The mix proportions should be checked
avoid bridging
Recessed joints should not be used where the cavity against the specification, especially
(full cavity fill)
the cavity is to be filled with insulation. whether sulfate-resisting cement should
be used.
In Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man
it is not permissible to fill the cavity with Mixes for rendering on brickwork using
pumped insulants, eg UF foam, at the time clay bricks with no limit on their soluble
Insulation boards for partial fill should be
of construction. salt content (F2,S1 or F1,S1 to BS EN 771)
stored flat without bearers otherwise they
should be as follows:
In Scotland, it is not permissible to fill the may distort making them difficult to fix
full width of the cavity with any thermal against the wall. Warped boards should be Exposure Undercoat mix Finishing
insulants at the time of construction. rejected. conditions proportions coat mix
(by volume) proportions
All retro-fill insulation materials (UF
foam, blown mineral fibre and expanded
RENDERING (by volume)
Parapets, rendering not recommended
polystyrene beads) should be installed by 6.1 - S8 Rendering shall be to the freestanding
6.1
installers trained by the assessment holder correct mix, have a good bond and walls, pillars,
and approved jointly by the assessment be free from significant cracking and retaining walls
holder and the assessing organisation. crazing and chimneys
The installer should be a member of a All walls other 1 : 5, sulfate- 1 : 5,
surveillance scheme acceptable to NHBC. than those resisting ordinary
(a) preparation of backing surface above Portland Portland
The first row of insulation boards or batts The surface to be rendered should be free cement : sand, cement :
should be supported on wall ties, two ties from dust, loose particles, efflorescence plus integral sand, dry
to each board or batt. and organic growth. waterproofer dashing
strongly
Wall ties should coincide with horizontal Where necessary, surfaces should be advised
joints in the insulation. treated to provide an adequate key by:
• raking out joints For backing brickwork, it should be
• hacking the surface ensured that sulfate-resisting cement
ties in vertical • applying a bonding agent which complies with Appendix 6.1-C is used
rows at joints
between • applying metal lathing in the mortar.
insulation
boards (partial • applying a spatterdash coat, or
cavity fill) If water-resisting properties are required,
• other appropriate means.
Portland cement with a waterproofing
The surface suction should be checked by agent already incorporated may be
splashing water onto the wall. The result available. Otherwise, a waterproofing
should be observed and appropriate action agent should be used and added to the
taken as follows: rendering mix in strict accordance with
• if too much suction, spraying with water manufacturers’ instructions.
may be needed - do not use too much
water (c) application
Where wall ties need to be closely spaced, The number and thickness of coats should
• if too little suction, a spatterdash coat or
for example at reveals, it is acceptable to be in accordance with the design.
bonding agent may be needed
make a clean cut neatly in the insulation
• if the background is too wet, delay
to accept the extra ties. The insulation
rendering until conditions improve.
manufacturer’s instructions should be
followed. The design requirements should be
checked where rendering is continuous
Insulation should be close butted with no
over different materials. Corrosion-
gaps. Gaps provide routes for dampness,
resistant metal lathing should be fixed

Check what effect additives have on
joints raked out setting times. Cold weather slows setting,
15mm to give
key for 10mm as do retarders. If the set is retarded too
to 15mm thick
undercoat much, the next lift might squeeze out the
mortar below.
Brick and blockwork should not be built
nor rendering carried out when the air
temperature is 2°C and falling.
following
coats thinner
and weaker
than undercoat
2ºC
0ºC
render stopped
above dpc
In Scotland, a spatterdash coat should be

applied before the first render coat if the Walls should be protected from frost until
background is of Scottish common bricks the mortar has set sufficiently to resist
and bricks to BS EN 771. frost damage. Covers should be provided
to form a still air space to insulate the wall. (c) storage
Undercoats should be applied at least 3 Walling damaged by frost will not regain Stacks of bricks and blocks should be
days before applying the following coat. strength and should be taken down and protected from rain, mud splashes, etc by
re-built when conditions improve. covering with waterproof covers. Bricks
If coloured pigments are specified,
and blocks that become excessively wet
batching should be undertaken with care
cover weighted down can suffer from:
to ensure colour consistency.
• staining and efflorescence
(d) cracking and crazing • increased drying shrinkage with a
Rendering should be free from significant cover provides
a still air space
greater risk of cracking
cracking and crazing. to insulate the
wall from frost
• lack of mortar adhesion to mud stained
surfaces.
To avoid surface crazing:
6.1
• use properly graded sand (fine sand
increases the risk of crazing)
• strong mixes should not be used as the
finishing coat
• overworking, which causes laitance to be Reference should be made to Chapter 1.4
drawn to the surface, should be avoided ‘Cold weather working’ for more detailed
• the finishing coat should be kept damp advice.
for at least 3 days. In warm dry weather,
spraying or protection by polyethylene HANDLING AND
sheet may be needed. Rendering should PROTECTION protection of bricks and blocks
not be carried out during hot weather or

in bright sunshine. 6.1 - S10 Materials shall be handled,
Cement should be stored off the ground
stored, used and protected in such a
and protected from weather. Sand should
COLD WEATHER WORKING way as to ensure that the construction
be prevented from spreading and be
shall be neat, clean and undamaged upon
6.1 - S9 Precautions shall be taken to protected so that it remains clean.
completion
protect walls and rendering from damage
Items to be taken into account include: The work place should be kept clean to
by frost during construction
(a) avoidance of damage reduce mortar splashes to a minimum. Any
Freshly laid mortar and render may fail if it It is cost effective to protect and store accidental mortar smears should be lightly
freezes because the frozen water expands materials properly and maintain good brushed off the face after the mortar has
and forces apart the particles of mortar. quality control during construction. taken its first set.
Admixtures which contain calcium chloride
(b) handling
should not be used.
The unloading of all bricks and blocks,
The use of air entraining agents in cold especially facing bricks, preferably should
weather gives better frost resistance to be by mechanical means, directly onto a
set mortar but does not aid the set. The firm level surface. Bricks that are tipped
use of accelerating admixtures and other on delivery or moved about the site in
admixtures should not be relied on as an dumper trucks often have a high degree of
anti-freeze precaution. wastage. Chipped or fractured bricks are
not acceptable for facework.

(d) workmanship
Materials should be handled with care Appendix 6.1-A
during construction to avoid damage and
staining. Badly chipped bricks should not
be used for facework.
Suitable wall constructions for use with full cavity insulation
Minimum insulation thickness (mm)
Exposure Suitable wall construction Built-in Retro-fill UF foam
category insulation (other than
UF foam)
Very Severe Any wall with impervious cladding 50 50 50
Fairfaced masonry with impervious 100 100 N/A
cladding to all walls above ground storey
Any wall fully rendered2 75 75 N/A
Fairfaced masonry 1
N/A N/A N/A
Severe Any wall with impervious cladding or 50 50 50
render2
Fairfaced masonry with impervious 50 75 50
cladding or render2 to all walls above
At night, the scaffold board closest to the ground storey
brickwork should be removed to prevent Fairfaced masonry 75 75 N/A
rain splashing off boards onto facework. Moderate Any wall with impervious cladding or 50 50 50
The inner board should be turned back render
onto other boards or placed on top of the Fairfaced masonry with impervious 50 50 50
day’s work to protect cavities and voids cladding or render to all walls above ground
from rain. storey
Fairfaced masonry 50 75 75
Unless bricks have been blended by
Sheltered Any wall with impervious cladding or 50 50 50
the manufacturer, bricks from different render
batches should be mixed to avoid colour
Fairfaced masonry with impervious 50 50 50
patching. cladding or render to all walls above ground
storey
Fairfaced masonry 50 50 50
N/A - not applicable

6.1
Notes
1 In Very Severe exposure locations fairfaced masonry with full cavity insulation is not
permitted.
2 Render on an external leaf of clay bricks (F2,S1 or F1,S1 designation bricks to BS EN 771) in
bricks from different
batches should be mixed Severe or Very Severe exposures is not permitted where the cavity is to be fully filled with
to avoid colour patching
insulation.
3 This table covers walls where the external leaf does not exceed 12m in height.
To reduce the risk of efflorescence, newly
4 The exposure category of the dwelling is determined by its location on the map showing
erected masonry should be covered. This
categories of exposure to wind driven rain.
also prevents the mortar being washed
5 Fairfaced masonry includes clay, calcium silicate and concrete bricks and blocks and
out of the joints by rain and stops masonry
dressed natural stone laid in an appropriate mortar (see Appendix 6.1-C) preferably with
becoming saturated.
struck or weathered or bucket handle joints. Cavity walls of random rubble or random
natural stone should not be fully filled.
6 Recessed mortar joints should not be used.
7 In Scotland, it is not permissible to fill the full width of the cavity with any thermal
insulation at the time of construction.
8 In Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man it is not permissible to fill the cavity with pumped
thermal insulants (for example, UF foam) at the time of construction.

MAP SHOWING CATEGORIES OF EXPOSURE TO WIND DRIVEN RAIN
6.1
Exposure zones Exposure to wind driven
rain (litres/m² per spell)
very severe 100 or more
severe 56.5 to less than 100
moderate 33 to less than 56.5
sheltered less than 33
Note:
Variations to the exposure shown on
the map can only be made by site-specific
calculations using BS 8104 “Assessing
exposure of walls to wind driven rain”
and the table above.
Adapted from the map in the

BRE report “Thermal Insulation:
avoiding risks”

Appendix 6.1-B
Areas of severe exposure to frost attack

The tinted areas have a frost incidence over 60 days a year, rainfall over 1000mm per year and an elevation over 90m above sea level
KW
IV
PA
AB
PH
DD
PA
FK
KY
G
EH
ML
KA TD
DG NE
CA DH SR
DL TS
6.1
LA
HG YO
BD
Northern Ireland FY PR BB LS
From the available HX
HU
meteorological data, BLOL HD
WF
the three criteria for L WN
M DN
assessing severe WA S
exposure to frost SK
attack, as set out CH
CW LN
above, do not occur LL
simultaneously in any NG
ST DE
part of Northern Ireland
SY TF
WS LE
PE NR
WV
DY B
CV NN
LD WR IP
HR CB
SA MK
GL SG
NP OX LU CO
HP AL CM
CF HA EN
UB G
SN SL TW RM
SS
BS RG DB
SM BR DA
KT CR
BA ME
TA GU CT
SP RH TN
SO
EX
DT BH PO BN
PL
TQ
TR
Map reproduced by permission of Hanson.

The following list identifies the postal areas within which the three criteria for severe exposure to frost attack are met.
Only in a few instances is the whole of the post code district within the area of severe frost exposure.
                                      54  
                                      40  
                                      28  
                                      27  
                                      26  
                                      25  
                                      24  
        23                             23  
        22                 47           22  
        20                 21 84         19  
  12     19 48       14     55 20 83         18  
  11     17 47       13     48 19 82         17  
  10     16 46       12     47 18 81         16 26
  9     13 45       11     46 17 77         15 19
  8     12 44       10     45 16 76         14 18
  7 24   11 43       8     44 15 75         13 17
  6 23 9 10 42       7     43 14 74         12 16
  5 22 8 9 41       6     28 13 72         7 6
  4 21 7 8 40       4   13 27 12 65 8     7 6 5
  3 20 2 7 39       3   12 26 11 64 7   5 6 4 4
5 2 15 1 6 37   9 6 2   11 23 8 63 4   3 4 3 3
3 1 13 0 5 8 7 8 4 1 8 8 14 1 62 3 3 2 2 1 1
AA BB BD BL CA CF CH DD DE DG DH DL EH FK G HD HG HR HX IV KA
6.1
        57                                
        55             21                  
        54             20                  
        41         16   19 41                
        40         15   18 40                
        33         14 41 17 39                
        32         13 40 16 38                
        28         12 38 15 37   48            
14       27         11 37 11 36   44     25      
13   23   26   12     10 36 10 35   40     24      
12   22   25   11   44 9 35 9 34   39 17   23      
11   21 8 24   10   8 8 34 8 33   33 16   22      
10   20 7 23   9 71 7 7 33 7 32   32 15   21      
9   12 6 22   8 66 6 6 32 6 31   20 14   20 71    
8   10 5 21   7 49 5 5 27 5 30   19 13   19 11    
7   9 4 20   6 48 4 4 26 4 26 30 13 12   18 8   22
6   8 3 16   3 47 3 3 25 3 25 11 11 11   17 5   21
5   6 2 15   2 46 2 2 24 2 23 10 10 10 13 16 2   18
3 13 2 1 11 24 1 19 1 1 23 1 22 6 9 6 10 10 1 9 6
KW KY LA LD LL M ML NE NP OL PA PH S SA SK ST SY TD TS YO
  partly within
  wholly within
Reproduced by permission of Hanson.

Appendix 6.1-C
Mortar mixes
Unless recommended otherwise by the brick manufacturer, the mixes in the table below
should be used for clay bricks.
In the case of concrete or calcium silicate bricks, particular attention should be paid to
manufacturers’ recommendations.
Mortar mixes using ordinary Portland or sulfate-resisting cements where required (see
also Design clauses 6.1- D5(b) and (d)).
Recommended Recommended Recommended Mortar
cement: lime: cement: sand masonry cement: designation
sand mix mix with sand mix to
Location air-entraining BS5628-3
plasticiser
General in areas of 1 : ½ : 4½ 1 : 3½ 1:3 (ii)
wall area Severe or
above Very Severe
dpc exposure -
high durability
other exposure 1 : 1 : 5½ 1 : 5½ 1 : 4½ (iii)
categories
- general use
Below - high 1 : ½ : 4½ 1 : 3½ 1:3 (ii)
dpc level durability
and in
chimney
stacks
Cappings, - low 1 : 0 to ¼ : 3 - - (i)
copings permeability
and sills
Air-entraining plasticiser can be incorporated in the following general use and high durability
mortars:
6.1
1 : 1 : 5½, cement : lime : sand, or

1 : 1 : 4½, cement : lime : sand.
Retarded mortar
Retarded mortar and most pre-mixed mortars can be used over a longer period of time than
site mixed, cement : lime : sand mortars. The timescale of use is defined by the manufacturer,
whose advice should be followed:
• protect retarded mortar against freezing prior to use
• do not use retarded mortar beyond the time for which it is effective
• because of delayed setting, temporary bracing of larger walls, for example gable peaks and
long walls, may be necessary.
Admixtures and additives

Where air-entraining plasticisers or other additives are to be used, follow manufacturers’
instructions:
• do not overdose, ‘more is not better’
• an air entraining agent can help reduce frost damage but it is not an anti-freeze
• do not use unauthorised additives.

Appendix 6.1-D
Dpcs and cavity trays

Some positions where dpcs and cavity trays should be provided:
Location Provision of dpcs and cavity trays

Base of walls, piers, A dpc should be provided a minimum 150mm above adjoining
etc surfaces and linked with the dpm in solid floors.
dpc laps dcm
dpc
at least
150mm
ground
Base of partitions Dpc should be full width of partition.

built off oversite
where there is no
integral dpm
Base of wall built off Detail to prevent entry of damp by driving rain.
beam, slab, etc
Parapet (1) Beneath coping, and
(2) 150mm above adjoining roof surface to link with the roof upstand.
In cavity walls over A cavity tray should be provided to direct to the outside any water that enters
openings, air bricks the cavity. The cavity tray should fully protect the opening.
and the like
6.1
At the horizontal A cavity tray should be provided 150mm above the adjoining roof or balcony
abutment of all roofs surface. The tray should be lapped over any roof upstand or flashing to
over enclosed areas ensure water penetrating into the cavity does not enter the enclosed area.
and balconies to walls
At sloping abutments A stepped cavity tray should be provided above the roof surface and linked to
of all roofs over any roof upstand or flashing to ensure any water penetrating into the cavity
enclosed areas to does not enter the enclosed area.
cavity walls
Doorsteps A dpc should be provided behind a doorstep where it is higher than a wall dpc.
dpm behind
doorstep links
with dpc
level of
wall dpc
doorstep
Sills Where precast concrete or similar sills incorporate joints or are of a

permeable material, a dpc should be provided beneath them for the full
length and be turned up at the back and the end of the sill.
Jambs in cavity The reveal should be protected throughout its width by a continuous dpc. The
width of the dpc should be sufficient to be fixed to, or overlap, the frame and
fully protect the reveal.
For Severe and Very Severe exposure conditions: rebated reveal construction,
with or without closed cavity and dpc.

Appendix 6.1-E
Durability classification of bricks

BS EN 771-1 classifies clay bricks according to their freeze/thaw resistance and active soluble salts content as follows:
Durability Freeze/thaw resistance Active soluble salts content
F2,S2 Freeze/thaw resistant (F2), durable in all building situations Low (S2)
F2,S1 Freeze/thaw resistant (F2), durable in all building situations Normal (S1)
F1,S2 Moderately freeze/thaw resistant (F1), durable except when saturated and subject to repeated Low (S2)
freezing and thawing
F1,S1 Moderately freeze/thaw resistant (F1), durable except when saturated and subject to repeated Normal (S1)
freezing and thawing
F0,S2 Not freeze/thaw resistant (F0), liable to be damaged by freezing and thawing Low (S2)
F0,S1 Not freeze/thaw resistant (F0), liable to be damaged by freezing and thawing Normal (S1)
Calcium silicate and concrete bricks contain no significant active soluble salts.
Information on their durability is given in Materials clause 6.1 - M2(b)
6.1
INDEX
A F S
Abutment details 4 Fire resistance 4, 5 Setting out 9
Admixtures and additives 3, 8, 20 Flashings 8 Sound insulation 5
B Frost attack 2, 18 Slates 8
Background, rendering 6 I Stone masonry 4, 7, 11
Blockwork 5 Insulation, full fill 5, 16 Storage 15
Bonding 1, 10 Insulation, partial fill 5, 13 Structural support, lintels 4, 13
Bricks and blocks 7, 22 J Sulfate 3
C Joints 3 T
Calcium silicate bricks 1, 7, 11 L Thermal insulation 5, 8, 14
Cavity trays 3, 11, 12, Lateral restraint 1 W
13, 21 Lintels 4, 13 Wall ties 4, 8, 12
Cavity walls 5, 9 Workmanship 16
M
Cement 8
Mortar 3, 8, 9,
Cladding 1, 5, 8 20
Cold bridging 4 Movement joints 1, 8, 10
Cold weather working 15 O
Condensation 4 Openings 10
Corbelling 2, 11 P
D Parapet details 4, 21
Damp proof courses 3, 8, 11, Point loads 1
13, 21
Protection 15
Dry linings 5
R
Durability 4, 22
Rain penetration 2, 5
E
Reclaimed bricks 7
Exposure 2, 18
Render 5, 8, 14

Chapter 6.2
External timber framed walls
CONTENTS SCOPE
DESIGN Clause Page Requirements and recommendations for external walls of
timber framed dwellings, substantially timber framed dwellings
Design standards D1 1
and wall panels (including relevant certification procedures).
Statutory requirements D2 1 This Chapter applies to timber framed walls up to seven
Loadbearing walls D3 1 storeys high.
Moisture control and insulation D4 1
Preservative treatment D5 2
Exterior cladding D6 2
Control of fire D7 3
Provision of information D8, D9 3
MATERIALS
Timber M2 3
Timber preservation M3 4
Sheathing M4 4
Breather membranes M5 4
Cavity barriers and fire-stops M6 4
Holding down devices M7 4
Nails and staples M8 4
Vapour control layers M9 4
Wall ties and fixings M10 4
Insulation M11 4
SITEWORK
6.2
Construction S2 4
Breather membranes S3 5
Wall ties S4 6
Insulation S5 6
Vapour control layers S6 6
Cladding S7 6
Control of fire S8 6
Services S9 7
APPENDIX 6.2-A
Certification 7
APPENDIX 6.2-B
Packing under timber sole plates 7
APPENDIX 6.2-C
Differential movement 7
INDEX 16

External timber framed walls 6.2
DESIGN STANDARDS
Additional studs may be required at MOISTURE CONTROL AND
openings for fixing wall ties where
masonry cladding is used. INSULATION
Requirements Multiple studs should be included to 6.2 - D4 The design shall ensure that
support multiple joists and other point the structure is adequately protected
Dwellings with a timber frame from the effects of moisture
superstructure require certification loads unless otherwise specified by the
indicating that the design has been designer. Items to be taken into account include:
checked by an NHBC timber frame certifier. The design should avoid narrow, (a) provision of dpcs and dpms
See Appendix 6.2-A. inaccessible gaps between studs which are Dpcs should be installed below the sole
difficult to insulate. plates of all ground floor walls, including
Design that follows the guidance below will internal partitions, to protect timber from
be acceptable for external walls of timber rising damp and residual construction
framed dwellings, substantially timber moisture.
framed dwellings and wall panels. This
Chapter applies to timber framed walls up Dpcs and trays should be fitted at openings
to seven storeys high. lintel where needed to prevent rain penetration.
For guidance on the prevention of fire In Scotland, Northern Ireland, the Isle of
during construction see ‘Fire prevention on cripple Man and other places where the exposure
stud
construction sites’ jointly published by the to driving rain is Severe or Very Severe,
Construction Confederation and the Fire masonry should form a rebate at the
Protection Association (www.thefpa.co.uk). reveals of openings to avoid a straight
through joint where the frame abuts the
STATUTORY masonry.
REQUIREMENTS
dpc
relevant Building Regulations and other load bearing lintel
statutory requirements. supported by cripple studs
LOADBEARING WALLS
6.2 - D3 Loadbearing timber framed sealant
walls shall be designed to support and
6.2
(b) anchoring the frame
transfer loads to foundations safely and Wall panels should be adequately fixed
without undue movement to the sole plate which in turn should be JAMB - SHELTERED
Structural design of loadbearing timber anchored to the substructure to resist all
framed walls should be in accordance with the lateral and vertical forces acting at
BS 5268 : Parts 2 and 6. The design should these junctions. Typical details are shown
take into account: in Clause S2.
• wind loads
Where frames are fixed to masonry or
• roof loads rain
beam and block floors by shotfiring, the
• floor loads.
blocks should be concrete blocks to BS EN
Items to be taken into account include: 771 with a minimum crushing strength of dpc
(a) structural elements 7.3N/mm2. Blocks in beam and block floors

weepholes
All structural timber should be: should be grouted. drain any
moisture
• of a suitable grade in accordance with
(c) joints between panels and other
BS 5268 and
elements sealant to resist
• dry graded and marked in accordance driving rain
Wall panels should be securely fixed
with BS 4978.
together and fixed to floor and roof
Sheathing and its associated fixings should framing where appropriate. Appropriate HEAD - SHELTERED
be structurally adequate to resist racking measures should be taken to prevent
due to wind and other forces. buckling.
Individual studs should be not less than If head binders are not provided joists and
37mm wide, at maximum 600mm centres, roof trusses, including girder trusses and dpc
unless other adequate support is provided other similar loads, should bear directly
for wall boards and fixings. over studs.
A lintel and cripple studs should be At joints between wall panels, sole plates
provided to any opening in loadbearing and head binders should be provided to
panels except when the opening does bind panels together. Joints in sole plates
not affect the stud spacing or where the and head binder should not coincide with
supported loads are carried by a rim beam those between panels. Joints in head
or perimeter joist. binders should occur over a stud. sealant
JAMB - SHELTERED

• a masonry cladding which is rendered or Insulated sheathing boards should be

clad with an impervious material. assessed in accordance with Technical
  Requirement R3 and installed in
rain The cavity should be extended at least
accordance with the assessment.
150mm below dpc, to allow drainage of
the cavity and should be kept clear. Open Wall insulation should be of a type which
dpc
brick perpends should be provided where ‘breathes’ eg, mineral wool (rock or glass).
weepholes necessary to prevent water build up in the Other insulation materials should be
drain any
moisture
cavity. These openings can also provide assessed in accordance with Technical
cavity venting. Requirement R3 for use in timber frame
wall panels and installed in accordance
dpc turned up inner
sealant to resist
face of sole plate to
with the assessment.
driving rain
lap with vapour
control layer. Water and heating services within walls
Seal between wall and
HEAD - SHELTERED floor barriers or seal should be on the warm side of the
gap between skirting insulation.
board and floor.
lowest (e) vapour control layers for walls

timber
150mm A vapour control layer should be fixed on
above
ground
the warm side of the wall insulation.
dpc level
The vapour control layer should cover the
weep holes
external wall including bottom rails, head
rails, studs, lintels and window reveals.
Vapour control layers should be of 500
weep vents
sealant gauge (120 micron) polyethylene or vapour
lowest timber control plasterboard.
not less than
75mm above
ground
All joints in sheet vapour control layers
JAMB - EXPOSED level 225mm min should have at least 100mm laps and
weep holes be located on studs or noggings and be
drainage
(b) membranes medium adequately fixed to the frame.
next to
Breather membranes should be lapped so masonry
that each joint is protected and moisture cladding PRESERVATIVE
drains outwards and downwards as shown Note: This detail is only acceptable in situations where the site is
TREATMENT
not subject to a high water table or where the cavity will
in Clause S3. not have standing water.
6.2 - D5 Timber and timber products
In areas of Very Severe exposure to wind shall either be naturally durable or
6.2
driven rain (as defined in Appendix 6.1-A) The cavity should be vented to allow
where necessary be treated with
a high performance breather membrane some limited, but not necessarily through,
preservative to give adequate resistance
should be used (unless the alternatives movement of air. Where wall areas are
against decay and insect attack
given in Clause D4(c) below are adopted). divided by horizontal cavity barriers and
openings should be provided to each Items to be taken into account include:
(c) cavities in external walls section (see Clause 6.2 - D7). (a) timber framing
A drained and vented cavity should Timber framing should be treated in
be provided to reduce the risk of rain The openings should be:
accordance with the guidance in Chapter 2.3
penetrating to the frame. The following • equivalent to an open brick perpend
‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’,
minimum cavity widths, measured every 1.2m
to which reference should be made.
between the cladding and sheathing, • located to prevent the ingress of rain,
should be provided: or I-studs manufactured from timber of
• below the lowest timber. durability class ‘moderately durable’ or
Cladding Minimum cavity width lower should be preservative treated in
Proprietary perpend ventilators are
accordance with Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
Masonry 50mm nominal available.
preservation (natural solid timber)’.
Render on backed 25mm nominal
lathing
These openings can also provide drainage
of the cavity. (b) timber cladding
Vertical tile hanging No vertical cavity Timber cladding should be treated in
without underlay required when a accordance with the guidance in Chapter 2.3
(d) insulation
breather membrane
is fitted to the The BRE Report ‘Thermal insulation: ‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’.
sheathing avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of
Other cladding* 15mm
insulation relevant to external timber EXTERIOR CLADDING
framed walls. In England and Wales
account should be taken of Accredited 6.2 - D6 Exterior cladding shall be
* See Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and compatible with the timber frame
Details.
cladding’.
Insulation should normally be placed Items to be taken into account include:
In areas of Very Severe exposure to wind (a) cavity
within the stud void. Partial fill cavity
driven rain (as defined in Appendix 6.1-A) A drained and vented cavity between
insulation, with a 50mm residual cavity,
the wall construction should include a exterior cladding and the sheathing should
between it and any cladding should be
50mm cavity between the sheathing and be specified as detailed in Clause D4. This
the cladding and: cavity should not contain electricity cables
Requirement R3 as an integral part of the
• a high performance breather membrane, other than meter tails.
wall system and installed in accordance
or
with the assessment.

(b) wall ties (e) services also be made available for reference
Wall ties should be: Differential movement should be allowed on site so that work can be carried out
• of a type which complies with BS EN 845 for services both within the timber frame satisfactorily in accordance with the design
and fully permits differential movement envelope or where they pass through it. and specification.
between the timber frame and the Some guidance is given in Appendix 6.2-C
The fixing schedule should cover every
cladding - see Clause D6(c) below or in the case of gas services publications
structural connection made on site
• fixed to studs, not sheathing from the Institution of Gas Engineers and
including fixing details for framing, wall
• spaced at a maximum of 600mm Managers (www.igem.org.uk).
ties, breather membrane, sheathing and
horizontally and 450mm vertically
vapour control layers, and should show as
• spaced at jambs of openings and at CONTROL OF FIRE appropriate:
movement joints in masonry a maximum
6.2 - D7 Walls and panels shall resist • number and spacing of nails and staples
of 300mm vertically and within 225mm
the spread of fire • size and type of nails and staples including
of the masonry reveal or movement
material and corrosion protection
joint. In this case additional studs may Guidance on the prevention of fire during • method of nailing (eg skew, end, etc.).
be needed construction is given in ‘Fire prevention on
• spaced within 225mm of the top of a construction sites’ jointly published by the Where the wall design relies on
masonry wall Construction Confederation and the Fire plasterboard to take racking forces those
• inclined away from the sheathing so Protection Association (www.thefpa.co.uk). walls should be clearly defined and the
that the slope is maintained following type and centres of the fixings stated.
differential movement. All elements should have adequate fire
resistance. Copies of the fixing schedule should be
given to the person doing the job.
(c) differential movement between the Service mains should not pass through
timber frame wall and other elements separating wall cavities. 6.2 - D9 Design of the superstructure
During the first two years after erection, shall be checked by an NHBC timber
In Scotland services are not permitted
the timber frame will reduce in overall frame certifier
within a timber framed separating wall.
height as it dries out. The anticipated
The superstructure design should be
amount of shrinkage of the timber frame is Service outlets should not impair the fire
placed with an NHBC approved timber
given in Appendix 6.2-C. resistance of floors and walls.
frame certifier so that a certificate can be
Movement between the timber frame and
Items to be taken into account include: issued in accordance with Appendix 6.2-A.
other parts of the construction will occur at:
• door and window openings (a) cavity barriers
• eaves and verges The design should detail the position and
• balconies (including Juliet balconies) materials for cavity barriers in accordance MATERIALS STANDARDS
• openings for drive-throughs with relevant Building Regulations.
• staircases and lift shaft enclosures Horizontal cavity barriers (except under (a) meet the Technical Requirements
(where they are not timber framed) eaves) should be protected with a dpc tray.
6.2
• service entries The tray should have a minimum upstand of
• the interface of the timber frame with 100mm. Alternatively polyethylene encased Materials that comply with the design and
any other construction. cavity barriers providing a minimum the guidance below will be acceptable for
upstand of 100mm should be used. external timber framed walls including
Appendix 6.2-C provides guidance on
wall panels and dwellings which are
the anticipated amount of shrinkage of Dpcs should be used to cover horizontal substantially timber framed.
the timber frame and where it will occur and vertical cavity barriers and to shed
between other parts of the structure. moisture away from the sheathing. Typical Materials should comply with all relevant
The extent of the differential movement details are shown in Clause S8. standards, including those listed below.
increases with the number of storeys. Where no standard exists, Technical
Movement gaps should be filled with Vertical timber cavity barriers should be Requirement R3 applies (see Chapter
suitable materials to take up the expected protected from moisture by a dpc. 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards and
movement. The manufacturer of the material Technical Requirements’).
should be consulted on the suitability for the (b) fire-stops
The design should detail the position References to British Standards and Codes
extent of the movement expected.
and type of fire-stops in accordance with of Practice include those made under the
Where the opening movement gap is relevant Building Regulations. Construction Products Directive (89/106/
expected to be more than 35mm it should EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
be protected by a cover strip. A typical fire-stop detail is shown in European Technical Specifications
Clause S8. approved by a European Committee for
All claddings that are fixed direct to the
timber frame, should have a horizontal PROVISION OF
movement joint at each floor level. See
Appendix 6.2-C. INFORMATION TIMBER
Masonry claddings should not be 6.2 - D8 All relevant information shall 6.2 - M2 All timber shall be of a grade
supported by the timber frame. be distributed to appropriate personnel suitable for the design
Ensure that design and specification All structural timber should be:
(d) prefabricated chimneys • of a suitable grade in accordance with
information is issued to site supervisors
Prefabricated chimneys should either be BS 5268 and
and relevant specialist subcontractors and/
supported by: • dry graded and marked in accordance
or suppliers.
• the masonry cladding, or with BS 4978.
• the timber frame, including any roof Where proprietary products are to be
construction supported by the timber used, manufacturers usually have specific I-studs should be assessed in accordance
frame. requirements for fixing and/or assembly with Technical Requirement R3.
of their products. This information should

TIMBER PRESERVATION Other materials may be used if Wall insulation should be of a type that
satisfactorily assessed in accordance with ‘breathes’, eg mineral wool (rock or glass).
6.2 - M3 Timber shall be either Technical Requirement R3. Other insulation used in walls should be
naturally durable or preservative treated assessed in accordance with Technical
to provide adequate protection against
rot and insect attack
HOLDING DOWN DEVICES Requirement R3 for use in timber frame
wall panels.
6.2 - M7 Holding down devices shall be
Timber preservation should be in
of durable material
accordance with Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
preservation (natural solid timber)’. Holding down devices should be SITEWORK STANDARDS
manufactured from:
I-studs manufactured from timber of • austenitic stainless steel to BS EN 6.2 - S1 All sitework shall:
durability class ‘moderately durable’ or 10088-1, minimum grade 1.4301 (a) meet the Technical Requirements
lower should be preservative treated in • galvanised mild steel with zinc coating (b) take account of the design
accordance with Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber to BS EN ISO 1461, minimum coating (c) follow established good practice and
preservation (natural solid timber)’. 940 g/m2 on each side. workmanship
Sole plate anchors within the internal
SHEATHING envelope should be galvanised mild steel, All relevant information in a form suitable
minimum coating Z275. for the use of site operatives should be
6.2 - M4 Sheathing shall be durable available on site before construction starts
and capable of providing structural All holding down devices should be as including:
resistance to racking detailed in the design. • a full set of drawings
The following materials are acceptable: • materials specification
• plywood in accordance with BS 5268-2 NAILS AND STAPLES • fixing schedules
or BS EN 13986 table 7 • nailing details
6.2 - M8 Nails and staples shall be • manufacturers’ recommendations
• oriented strand board in accordance
durable and of the correct type to relating to proprietary items.
with BS EN 300 type OSB 3 or 4
provide adequate mechanical fixing
• moisture-resistant chipboard in
accordance with BS EN 312 type P5 or P7. Staples for fixing breather membranes CONSTRUCTION
• medium board in accordance with BS EN should be austenitic stainless steel or
other material of similar strength and 6.2 - S2 Construction shall ensure that
622-3 type MBH.HLS1 or MBH.HLS2
corrosion resistance. the building is structurally adequate
• impregnated soft board in accordance
with BS EN 622-4 type SB.HLS. (a) setting out
Nails for fixing sheathing or timber should
be galvanised, sheradized or austenitic The substructure should be correctly set
Proprietary sheathing materials should
stainless steel. out to receive the timber frame which will
be assessed in accordance with Technical
be manufactured to close tolerances. The
Requirement R3 and used in accordance
timber frame should be checked to ensure
with the assessment. VAPOUR CONTROL
6.2
that it is erected accurately both on plan

LAYERS and vertically. The load from the frame
BREATHER MEMBRANES should be supported as intended in the
6.2 - M9 Vapour control layers shall
6.2 - M5 Breather membranes shall be design. Where packing under sole plates is
restrict the passage of water from
capable of allowing water vapour from necessary it should be in accordance with
within the dwelling to the timber frame
within the frame to pass out into the Appendix 6.2-B.
cavity and protect the sheathing and Vapour control layers should be 500 gauge
frame from external moisture (120 micron) polyethylene sheet or vapour
control plasterboard.
Breather membranes should be:
• vapour resistant to less than 0.6MNs/g Vapour control products manufactured
when calculated from the results of tests from recycled materials should be
carried out in accordance with BS 3177 assessed in accordance with Technical
12mm maximum
at 25°C and relative humidity of 75% Requirement R3. overhang of
frame over
• capable of resisting water penetration supporting
• self extinguishing WALL TIES AND FIXINGS structure (20mm
for 140mm wide
• durable studs)
• adequately strong when wet to resist 6.2 - M10 Wall ties and fixings shall
site damage be capable of properly connecting
• Type 1 to BS 4016 in areas of Very Severe the cladding to the timber frame in
accordance with the design Ledges can form moisture traps. Where
exposure (unless the alternatives given these occur protection should be provided.
in Design Clause D4(c) are adopted). Wall ties and their fixings should be of
austenitic stainless steel, comply with BS
CAVITY BARRIERS AND EN 845 and be capable of accommodating
the anticipated differential movement
FIRE-STOPS given in Appendix 6.2-C.
6.2 - M6 Materials used for cavity ledge protected
by breather
barriers and fire-stops shall be capable INSULATION membrane
of providing adequate resistance to fire
and smoke 6.2 - M11 Insulation materials shall frame set back
12mm maximum
provide the degree of insulation to from edge of
Materials specified in statutory comply with the design and statutory supporting structure
requirements are acceptable. requirements
(20mm for 140mm
wide studs)

(b) anchoring the frame Unless otherwise clearly specified by the measured between the cladding and
The frame should be anchored to resist designer, multiple studs should be included sheathing, should be provided:
both lateral movement and uplift. Care to support multiple joists.
should be taken to avoid splitting timber Cladding Minimum cavity width
plates or damaging the substructure. (d) supporting claddings
Masonry 50mm nominal
Wall ties should be in accordance with the
When shotfiring, care should be taken not Render on backed 25mm nominal
design and fixed to studs.
lathing
to spall edges of masonry or slabs. When
shotfiring into masonry, solid concrete Battens supporting lightweight cladding Vertical tile hanging No vertical cavity
should be fixed to studs. without underlay required when a
blocks with a minimum crushing strength
breather membrane
of 7.3N/mm2 should be used, positioned to is fitted to the
(e) fixing plasterboard
receive fixings. sheathing
Plasterboard should be fixed in accordance
with Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ Other cladding* 15mm
(Sitework) unless the design specifies
closer fixing centres *See Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and
cladding’.
dpc Particular care should be taken at
the junction between walls and roofs. A clear cavity for at least 150mm below
Reference should be made to Chapter 8.2 dpc should be maintained. Weep holes
‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (Sitework). (open perpends) should be provided where
necessary to prevent water build up in the
(f) movement between timber frame wall cavity.
FIXING TO PLATE
and other elements
The timber frame will reduce in overall
height as it dries out. The anticipated
BREATHER MEMBRANES
amount of shrinkage of the timber frame 6.2 - S3 Breather membranes shall
and where it will occur between other parts where required protect the sheathing
of the structure is given in Appendix 6.2-C. from dampness
Movement will occur at: Special attention should be given to the
• door and window openings following details:
• eaves and verges • laps, which should be at least 100mm on
• balconies horizontal joints and 150mm on vertical
• openings for drive-throughs joints as shown in the following diagram
• staircases and lift enclosures (where • direction of laps - upper layers should be
they are not timber framed) fixed over lower layers to ensure rain runs
• service entries away from the sheathing. Vertical joints
should be staggered wherever possible
6.2
• the interface of the timber frame with
any other construction. • fixing should be at regular intervals to
prevent damage by wind and should
The extent of the differential movement be not less than 500mm centres and
FIXING TO STUDS
increases with the number of storeys. in accordance with the manufacturer’s
Movement gaps should be filled with recommendations
  suitable materials to take up the expected • marking of the stud positions for wall tie
movement. The manufacturer of the fixing
(c) fixing panels material should be consulted on the
All fixings, including nailed joints and • shedding water away from the lowest
suitability for the extent of the movement timber
sheathing, should be as scheduled in the expected.
design. • use of self extinguishing grade membrane
Where the movement gap is expected to • use of high performance breather
Wall panels should be securely fixed be more than 35mm it should be protected membrane in areas of Very Severe
together and to floor and roof framing. by a cover strip. exposure to wind driven rain (as
defined in Appendix 6.1-A) (unless the
Sole plates and head binders should be All claddings that are fixed directly to the alternatives given in Design Clause D4(c)
provided to bind the panels together. timber frame, should have a horizontal are adopted)
Joints in sole plates and head binders movement joint at each floor level. See • use of fixings described in Chapter 6.2
should not coincide with those between Appendix 6.2-C. (Materials).
panels. Joints in head binders should occur
over a stud. Masonry claddings should not be
supported by the timber frame.
If head binders are not provided, joists and
roof trusses, including girder trusses and (g) prefabricated chimneys 150mm
other similar loads, should bear directly Prefabricated chimneys should either be 100mm
over studs. Individual studs should be not supported by:

less than 37mm wide, at maximum 600mm • the masonry cladding, or
centres, unless other adequate support is • the timber frame, including any roof
provided for wall boards and fixings. construction supported by the timber
frame. staggered joints
A lintel and cripple studs should be
provided to any opening in loadbearing (h) cavities
panels except when the opening does A cavity should be provided to reduce
not affect the stud spacing or where the the risk of rain penetrating to the frame.
supported loads are carried by a rim beam The following minimum cavity widths, membrane protects
lowest timber
or perimeter joist.

Damaged membranes should be repaired No gaps should be left: The ventilation openings should be:
or replaced before proceeding with the • against studs or rails • equivalent to open brick perpends every
cladding. • at corners 1.2m
• against noggings • placed to prevent the ingress of rain or
When bitumen impregnated fibre building should be below the lowest timber.
• at junctions with partitions
board is used and a breather membrane
• behind service panels.
is not specified the joints of the boards Proprietary perpend ventilators are available.
should be closely butted and horizontal
joints sealed to prevent water ingress. VAPOUR CONTROL These openings can also provide drainage.
When a breather membrane is not required

LAYERS The cavity should be kept clean, free of
obstructions and be capable of draining
the bottom frame members should be 6.2 - S6 Vapour control layers shall be freely.
protected from water in the cavity. correctly installed
All proprietary cladding should be fixed
Before fixing a vapour control layer the in accordance with the manufacturer’s
framing timbers should have a moisture recommendations.
content of 20% or less.
Masonry cladding should be constructed
The vapour control layer should be fixed in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External
on the warm side of the insulation and masonry walls’.
frame.
The vapour control layer should be the CONTROL OF FIRE
material specified in the design. 500 6.2 - S8 Fire spread shall be controlled
gauge (120 microns) polyethylene sheet
as detailed in the design
or vapour control plasterboard should be
used. Where vapour control plasterboard Guidance on the prevention of fire during
is used joints between sheets should be construction is given in ‘Fire prevention
positioned on studs or noggings and the on construction sites‘ jointly published by
WALL TIES joints should be filled, taped and finished. the Construction Confederation and Fire
Protection Association.
6.2 - S4 Wall ties shall be correctly Where polyethylene is used all joints in the
installed vapour control layer should have at least CAVITY BARRIERS
100mm laps and be located on studs or Cavity barriers should be installed in
Wall ties should be: noggings. positions detailed by the design and
• of the type specified in the design relevant Building Regulations.
• fixed to the studs not the sheathing Vapour control layers should be fixed at
• be sufficiently flexible or of a type that 250mm centres to the top and bottom of Cavity barriers should be formed of
fully permits differential movement the frame, at laps and around openings. materials specified in the design. If no
specification is available the advice of the
6.2
• be kept clean and free from mortar

When cutting vapour control plasterboard designer should be obtained.
droppings
care should be taken not to displace the
• spaced at a maximum of 600mm Horizontal cavity barriers (except under
vapour control material.
horizontally and 450mm vertically eaves) should be protected with a dpc tray.
• spaced at jambs of openings and at Any holes made in a vapour control layer The tray should have a minimum upstand of
movement joints in masonry a maximum should be made good. 100mm. Alternatively polyethylene encased
of 300mm vertically within 225mm of cavity barriers providing a minimum
the masonry reveal or movement joint The vapour control layer should cover the upstand of 100mm should be used.
• spaced within 225mm of the top of a external framed wall area including rails,
masonry wall studs, reveals, lintels and sills.
• inclined away from the sheathing so The vapour control layer should lap with breather membrane
that the slope is maintained following the dpc.
lapped over dpc tray
differential movement.
CLADDING
INSULATION
6.2 - S7 Cladding and its fixings shall
6.2 - S5 Insulation shall be correctly not obstruct the cavity and shall allow
installed for differential movement
Insulation should cover the whole wall area Allowance for differential movement
between studs. between various components should be dpc
made as detailed in Clause S2 of this
Chapter. Vertical timber cavity barriers should be
protected from moisture by a dpc.
Horizontal battens, which obstruct the
drained and vented cavity, should not
be used to support cladding, except tile
hanging.
dpc
The cavity should be vented to allow
some limited, but not necessarily through,
movement of air. Where wall areas are
divided by horizontal cavity barriers,
openings should be provided to each
section (see Design clause 6.2 - D7).

FIRE-STOPPING Applications to become a timber frame bedding is not disturbed during the fixing
Fire-stops should be installed in positions certifier should be made to NHBC Standards of the sole plate.
detailed in the design and relevant Building and Technical.
Regulations. 3 Doube sole plate ‘sandwich’
Registered Builders bottom member
Only those materials specified in the Registered builders should ensure that of wall panel
design should be used for fire-stopping. the completed timber frame certificate is
available on site for inspection by NHBC.
If details of fire-stop design, location and
materials are not available they should
be verified with the designer before
construction commences. Appendix 6.2-B sole plate
permanent
packing
fire-stop between
battens above Packing under sole plates under
temporary each stud
spacers
underlay
The finished surface of the substructure
fire-stop below supporting the timber frame should be
underlay
reasonably level. However, where packing
is required to ensure the timber frame
or sole plate is level, the following three
The lower sole plate is fixed to follow the
alternative options are acceptable.
contours of the supporting structure.
The options given are for packing up to The upper sole plate is fixed on top and
20mm. Packing exceeding 20mm should levelled with temporary spacers inserted
be agreed between the timber frame between the sole plates. Once the first lift
manufacturer’s engineer and NHBC. construction has been erected permanent
cavity barrier packing is inserted under each load point
of mineral wool or
fire-resisting board
cavity barrier in
wall between
1 Permanent structural packing under (e.g. stud or post).
in boxed eaves buildings sole plate
Because this method introduces an
bottom member
of wall panel additional sole plate the extra shrinkage
SERVICES should be taken into account. See
Appendix 6.2-C.
6.2 - S9 Services shall not reduce the
sole plate
fire resistance or stability of the dwelling Notes
temporary 1 Permanent packing should be designed
Service outlets should not impair the fire spacer
and approved by the timber frame
resistance of floors and walls. grout or permanent
packing under designer to suit the horizontal and
each stud
Only those services shown in the design vertical loads on the sole plate and
should be at least the same plan area
6.2
should be installed in separating walls.
as the load points (e.g. studs or posts).
Notching or drilling of structural timber Hollow plastic packing with reduced
members should be carried out as detailed The sole plate is levelled on temporary bearing surfaces is not acceptable.
in the design. If these details are not spacers. Once the first lift construction - 2 Temporary spacers can remain in place
available the designer should be consulted wall panel and first floor floor structure (or providing they are durable and non-
before such operations are started. roof structure in a single storey building) degradable.
- has been erected, permanent packing is 3 Grout and mortar are both unsuitable for
See Appendix 6.2 - C for details of
placed under the sole plate. gaps less than 5mm and in such cases
differential movement and services.
permanent packing should be used.
This permanent packing can be:
• free flowing non-shrinkable grout for the
Appendix 6.2-A full length and width of the sole plate, or
• individual packers placed under each
Appendix 6.2-C
Certification load point (e.g. stud or post).
Certifiers
DIFFERENTIAL MOVEMENT
2 Bedding of sole plate
The timber frame certifier is required INTRODUCTION
to complete and sign a certificate bottom member During the first two years after erection
of wall panel
confirming that he has assessed the the timber frame will reduce in overall
structural adequacy of the timber frame height as it dries out. Movement will occur
superstructure for a specific project. between the timber frame and other parts
of the structure.
The completed and signed certificate must sole plate
be given to the registered builder. This Appendix contains:
mortar bed • guidance on differential movement of
Certifiers must be suitably qualified civil the timber frame, and
or structural engineers with at least • common details for timber frame
three years’ experience in timber frame construction where differential
construction and Chapter 6.2 ‘External movement will take place.
timber framed walls’. The certifier must
not be the designer of the timber frame. The sketches show examples of typical
The sole plate is laid and levelled on a interfaces and illustrate general design
Where the design is four storeys or more, continuous bed of mortar, prior to the principles. In the absence of project
and the floor joists are solid timber, the erection of the wall panels. The bedding specific calculations the gaps shown in the
design is to be submitted to NHBC. should extend the full width of the sole following table, are required:
plate. Care is needed to ensure that the

Table of differential movement

Gap location Opening and Closing gaps (mm)
Floor joists
Solid timber (mm) Engineered I-joist (mm)
Eaves/verge Add 5mm to gap dimension at level below
Sixth storey Specialist calculations to be 61
submitted to NHBC
Fifth storey 53
Fourth storey 45
Third storey 45 35
Second storey 35 25
First storey 20 15
Ground storey* 5 5
*Ground storey or lowest level of timber frame.
Notes
The gap sizes are based on the following :
• timber joist and rim beam/header joist maximum depth 240mm
• timber frame floor cross section is as shown below with maximum 45mm deep timber
plates/binders
• single head binder at the eaves. Maximum double sole plates
• calculations, where required, to be based on BS 5268 Part 6.1 - 2007
• timber components are not saturated and normal moisture contents at the time of
construction (e.g. less than 20%) and tight jointed construction
• movement gaps in excess of 35mm should be protected by cover strips
• the table allows for a 2mm thickness of compressible material in closing gaps. Check the
manufacturer’s product details
• outer leaf brickwork with expansion rates no greater than 2.5mm per storey
• brickwork up to 5 storeys with lightweight cladding above 5 storeys
• lightweight cladding - floor level joints to be 15mm for solid timber and 10mm for engineered
I- joists
6.2
• the ground floor is concrete. For ground floors of timber joists add 15mm for solid timber
and 10mm for engineered I-joists.
Stud
Bottom rail of panel
Sole plate
Structural decking
Movement
Joist
Opening gap
Headbinder
Closing gap
Top rail of panel
Stud
As Built After Movement
Timber frame construction on which the

Location of opening and closing gaps at
table of differential movement above is
windows.
based.

COMMON DETAILS
The following sketches show examples of
typical construction details and illustrate
general principles relating to differential
movement.
Further information is available from the
UKTFA document ‘Guidance on detailing
to accommodate differential movement
in timber frame buildings’. This UKTFA
Sill not
publication includes guidance on: built into Sill not
masonry
• the interface between a lift shaft and the built into
Allow for
Allow for masonry
timber frame movement movement
• the interface between lightweight

cladding to the timber frame and
balconies
• the support of roofs above lift shafts etc.
constructed from masonry or concrete
• staircases within the timber frame
• services within the timber frame
• additional chimney details.
Normal reveal Check reveal
In the following sketches:-
= downward movement of the timber

frame
= upward brick expansion (taken as

Allow for
2.5mm per m of clay masonry). movement
Timber frame
The design should ensure that the material movement
used in movement joints will safely
accommodate the amount of expansion
or compression expected and, where
required, provide a weather resistant and
durable joint. See Clauses 6.2-D6 and S2. As built After movement
6.2

WINDOW HEADS WITH MASONRY CLADDING

(movement gaps in excess of 35mm should be protected by cover strips) (cavity trays omitted for clarity)
Timber frame
Allow for movement
movement
  
 As Built  After movement
Allow for
movement
6.2
Timber frame
Allow for movement
movement
As Built  After movement
Timber frame
movement
Allow for
movement
As Built After movement

WINDOW HEAD AND SILL WITH LIGHTWEIGHT CLADDING
(movement gaps in excess of 35mm should be protected by cover strips)
No differential movement No differential movement

 
Head with lightweight cladding     Sill with lightweight cladding
ROOF TO CHIMNEY ABUTMENT
Allow
for
movement
75mm
minimum
6.2
Timber
frame
movement
TIMBER FRAME INTERFACE WITH CONCRETE OR MASONRY STAIRS AND COMMON AREAS
Timber
Transition piece
frame
movement
As Built  After movement (transition piece removed)

EAVES
Allow for
movement Timber
frame
movement
VERGE
Allow for
movement
Timber
frame
6.2
movement
SERVICES
Timber
Service passing through wall
frame
movement
Allow for
movement
As built After movement

DRIVE THROUGH
Timber
frame
movement
6.2
Lintel/beam Lintel/beam
Ceiling
Allow for
movement
Ceiling
Section A - A
Timber
frame
movement
Timber floor construction
Timber floor construction
Allow for
movement
Ceiling
Ceiling
Drive through
Drive through
Section B - B

BALCONY ABUTMENTS
Allow for
movement
Allow for
movement
Decking Decking
Balcony structure Balcony structure

independant of timber frame Timber independant of timber frame
frame
movement
Gap
Allow for
movement
Balcony - lightweight cladding As built After movement
Allow for
Allow for Timber movement
Allow for movement frame
6.2
movement movement
Slotted
holes Slotted
holes
Balcony - masonry cladding As built After movement
Fix to masonry cladding subject to

engineers details
Slotted hole joint
Sliding joint
Slotted hole joint Sliding joint Juliet balcony

 

LIGHTWEIGHT WALL CLADDING - JOINT AT EACH FLOOR LEVEL
(with and without insulation in cavity)
Vertical batten
15mm*
Movement across
floor zone
15mm*
Allow for
15mm*
movement
Note: * 10mm for

engineered I-Joists
Cavity
LIGHTWEIGHT CLADDING AND MASONRY PLINTH
Allow for
Timber
movement frame
movement
6.2
WALLS TO FLAT ROOF ABUTMENT

Allow for
movement
75mm
minimum
Timber
frame
movement

INDEX
A I T
Anchoring frame 1, 5 Information 3 Timber 3
B Insulation 2, 4, 6 Timber cladding 2
Balconies 14 J Timber framing 2
Breather Membranes 2, 4, 5 Joints 1 V
C L Vapour control layer 2, 4, 6
Cavities 2, 5 Loadbearing walls 1 Verge 12
Cavity barriers 3, 4, 6 M W
Certification 1, 7 Membranes 2 Wall ties 2, 4, 6
Chimneys, roof 11 Moisture 1 Window reveals 9
Cladding 5, 6, 10, 11, 15 Movement 3, 5 Window heads 10, 11
D N Window sill 11
Damp proof courses 1 Nails 4
Differential movement 3, 7, 8 P
Drive through 13 Panels, fixing 5
E Plasterboard, fixing 5
Eaves 12 Preservative treatment 2, 4
Exterior cladding 2 Packing 7
F Prefabricated chimneys 3, 5
Fire control 3, 6 S
Fire-stops 3, 4, 7 Services 3, 7, 12
Fixings 4, 5 Setting out 4
Flat roof 15 Sheathing 4
H Stairs interface 11
Holding down devices 4 Staples 4
Structural elements 1
6.2
Sole plates 7

Chapter 6.3
Internal walls
6.3 Internal walls
CONTENTS SCOPE
Requirements and recommendations for internal walls,
including separating walls and compartment walls.
Loadbearing masonry walls D3 1
Loadbearing timber walls D4 2
Beams and lintels D5 2
Non-loadbearing internal partitions D6 2
Fire resistance D7 2
Sound insulation D9 3
Damp-proofing D10 4
Fireplaces and flues D11 4
MATERIALS
Masonry materials M2 5
Wall ties and related items M3 5
Timber M4-M5 5
Plasterboard M6 5
Damp-proof courses M8 5
Sound insulation materials M9 5
Fire-stopping materials M10 6
Fireplaces and flues M11 6
6.3
SITEWORK
Damp-proof courses S2 6
Masonry partitions S3 6
Timber stud partitions S4 7
Proprietary partitions S5 8
Separating walls S6 8
Partitions to rooms containing a WC S7 8
Walls providing fire resistance S8 9
Chimneys, flues and linings S9 9
INDEX 9

Internal walls 6.3
restraint type
DESIGN STANDARDS Height of Minimum compressive joist hanger
wall strength of brick or block unit

6.3 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical 1 or 2 storeys blocks - 2.9N/mm2
Requirements
bricks - 9.0N/mm2
be acceptable for internal walls, including Lowest blocks - 7.3N/mm2
separating walls and compartment walls. storey of a 3 bricks - 13.0N/mm2
storey wall
(unless calculations show that
STATUTORY or where
individual lower strengths are suitable)
REQUIREMENTS storeys
exceed 2.7m
Upper blocks - 2.9N/mm2
Design should be in accordance with storeys of 3 bricks - 9.0N/mm2
relevant Building Regulations and other storey wall
(c) lateral restraint
LOADBEARING MASONRY Loadbearing walls, including separating
WALLS walls should be provided with lateral at least
300mm
6.3 - D3 Loadbearing masonry internal restraint: long on
both joists
walls shall be designed to support and • at each floor level, and
• at the ceiling level below a roof.
transfer loads to foundations safely and Where permitted, timber joists built into
without undue movement Concrete floors provide adequate restraint separating walls may provide lateral
Structural design of masonry walls should if: restraint but care should be taken to
be in accordance with BS 5628. • they have a minimum 90mm bearing ensure that sound insulation and fire
onto the wall, or resistance requirements are also met. See
Items to be taken into account include: • they abut each side of the wall (provided Clauses D7 and D9.
(a) provision of foundations that both floors are at, or about, the
Any loadbearing wall should be provided same level). (d) bonding and tying
with either: Where a separating wall abuts an external
• a foundation, or Restraint straps should be provided at 2m wall they may be tied or bonded together.
• a means of support that transfers the centres to each floor when:
• floors are not at, or near, the same level, Tied joints should be formed using
load safely to a foundation.
and expanded metal strip, wall ties or
6.3
Sleeper walls should be designed and • the floor span is parallel to the wall, and equivalent fixings, at maximum 300mm
constructed as described in Chapter 4.4 • the floor is not built into the wall. vertical centres.
‘Strip and trench fill foundations’ (each
The external wall cavity should be closed
section). at least 450mm
at the junction with the separating wall
Where necessary, oversite concrete should restraint straps with a flexible cavity stop, unless the cavity
at 2m centres
be protected against sulfate attack by to each floor is fully filled with built-in insulation (where
the use of a polyethylene sheet dpm, not permitted).
less than 1200 gauge (0.3mm), (or 1000 at least 450mm
(e) movement joints
gauge (0.25mm) if assessed in accordance
For guidance on the design of movement
with Technical Requirement R3) properly
joints, reference should be made to Clause
lapped.
D8.
Loadbearing walls built off a concrete
(f) wall ties for cavity separating walls
groundbearing slab are acceptable only if Timber joists with a minimum of 90mm
Normally, the two leaves of a masonry
the concrete forms part of a foundation bearing normally provide adequate lateral
cavity separating wall should be tied
which is designed by an Engineer in restraint.
together to provide structural stability.
Where timber joists are not built into a The type of tie and spacing should limit
R5.
masonry wall, restraint should be provided the sound transmission across the cavity.
Foundation design should take account of at 2m centres by means of either: Reference should be made to Clause D9
any site investigation or ground hazards. • restraint type joist hangers to BS 5628 : for details.
Part 1, or
(b) structural elements In England and Wales, separating walls may
• restraint straps with a cross section of at
Bricks and blocks should be selected in be built in accordance with Robust Details
least 30mm x 5mm.
accordance with their intended use. The “Resistance to the passage of sound”.
table below gives recommended strengths Where restraint is required and restraint-
of bricks and blocks to be used in buildings type hangers are not used, straps should
up to 3 storeys high: be:
• at least 300mm long on each joist
• fixed with four fixings to each joist
• not more than 2m apart.

6.3 Internal walls
LOADBEARING TIMBER type of tie and spacing should limit sound (b) movement joints
transmission across the cavity. Reference should be made to Clause D8.
WALLS
To limit sound transmission, metal tie (c) method of supporting partition
6.3 - D4 Loadbearing timber internal straps should be: Walls and partitions should be supported
walls shall be designed to support and • not more than 3mm thick by the structural floor, not by a floating
transfer loads to foundations safely and • fixed below ceiling level floor that incorporates a compressible
without undue movement • spaced at least 1.2m apart horizontally. layer, unless the material is specifically
Structural design of loadbearing timber manufactured for that purpose.
Thicker ties, fixed at ceiling level or
walls should be in accordance with BS
more closely spaced will increase sound Preferably, masonry partitions should be
5268.
transmission across the cavity. supported on:
Structural timber should be specified • other masonry partitions or walls
according to the strength classes in BS BEAMS AND LINTELS (wherever possible the design of
5268 : Part 2, eg C16 or C24. When using dwellings should be such that first floor
the BS 4978 grading rules, the timber 6.3 - D5 Beams and lintels shall be
masonry partitions are a continuation of
species should be included. The strength adequate for their purpose those on the ground floor)
classes can then be determined from BS Items to be taken into account include: • concrete floors
5268. (a) loads and spans • steel or concrete beams.
Items to be taken into account include: Loads and spans should be either Where steel or concrete beams are to be
(a) provision of foundations in accordance with manufacturers’ used, it may be necessary to use padstones
Foundations should be provided as for recommendations or designed by an at bearings.
structural masonry walls (see Clause Engineer in accordance with Technical
D3(a)). Requirement R5. Masonry partitions should not be
supported by timber joists or beams,
(b) structural elements (b) materials unless they have been designed by an
Normally, individual studs, sills and Concrete or steel lintels are suitable for Engineer in accordance with Technical
headplates should be 38mm x 75mm. use in masonry walls. Timber lintels should Requirement R5.
Larger timber section sizes may be not be used to support masonry.
required in order to achieve an adequate The design should make allowance for the
Lintels should extend beyond each end of relatively flexible nature of the timber and
level of fire resistance. Studs should be openings in masonry as follows:
spaced at maximum 600mm centres. the relatively rigid nature of masonry.
A lintel and cripple studs should be Span [m] Minimum length of bearing Where stud partitions or proprietary
provided to any opening except when
[mm] plasterboard partitions are supported by
the stud spacing is unaffected. Normally, Up to 1.2 100 a timber floor, extra noggings or joists
multiple studs should be provided to should be specified, unless it can be shown
Over 1.2 150
that the deck can transfer the load without
6.3
support multiple joists.

undue movement.
Where structurally necessary, padstones
Where internal walls are made up of
should be provided under the bearings of Allowance should be made for the
panels, structural continuity should be
lintels and beams. Reference should be possible deflection of floors at the head
maintained, for example by the use of a
made to Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork support to of partitions to prevent the partition
continuous top binder.
upper floors and partitions’. becoming loadbearing.
NON-LOADBEARING
INTERNAL PARTITIONS
continuous
top binder 6.3 - D6 Non-loadbearing partitions
shall have adequate strength and be
floor deflects gap for
adequately supported when loaded possible
deflection
(a) partition construction
The following constructions are
acceptable:
• partitions of brick or block construction
• timber stud partitions using studs,
sills and headplates nominally 63mm x
cripple studs support 38mm. Studs should be spaced to suit
loadbearing lintels
the thickness of plasterboard used, as
follows:
- not more than 450mm spacing for FIRE RESISTANCE
9.5mm boards
6.3 - D7 Internal walls shall, where
- not more than 600mm spacing for
Framing joints should be secured with not necessary, have adequate resistance to
10mm to 20mm boards
less than two nails per joint. the spread of fire
• proprietary partitions of plasterboard, The guidance below applies in England,
(c) wall ties for cavity separating walls strawboard or other material, detailed Wales, Northern Ireland and the Isle of
For timber framed separating walls, ties and constructed in accordance with Man. In Scotland, reference should be
should be specified in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations. made to statutory requirements.
system designer’s recommendations. The

Internal walls 6.3
Items to be taken into account include: made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber methods, where permitted, cannot enter
(a) fire resistance of internal walls framed walls’ for further information. the separating wall cavity.
In houses up to 2 storeys, the following
In masonry cavity separating walls, where
walls should be fire-resisting: MOVEMENT JOINTS the cavity is up to 75mm, flexible wall ties
• loadbearing walls (half-hour minimum)
6.3 - D8 Masonry walls shall, where should be used, such as:
• separating walls (one hour minimum)
necessary, be provided with movement • butterfly type ties, or
• walls between a house and an integral or
joints • ties assessed for the purpose.
attached garage (half-hour minimum).
Movement joints should be provided in Where structural design permits, the
In houses of 3 or more storeys, in addition
straight unbroken lengths of wall as shown omission of ties will enhance sound
to the above, the walls enclosing the
in the following table: insulation.
staircase should have half-hour fire
resistance. Type of brick Joint width Normal
Ties should be spaced 900mm horizontally
or block [mm] spacing and 450mm vertically. Closer spacing
For flats, the following walls should be
will increase sound transmission. Wider
fire-resisting: Clay brick 16 12m (15m max)
spacing may impair structural stability.
• loadbearing walls within the flat (half- Calcium 10 7.5 to 9m Rigid ties transmit sound more readily than
hour for up to 2 storeys, one hour for silicate brick
flexible ties.
3 or more storeys) Concrete 10 6m
• separating walls, compartment walls and block and Chases for services should be kept to a
walls enclosing protected shafts, such as brick minimum and be well filled with mortar.
staircases (normally one hour)
Movement joints in foundations should be (c) flanking transmission
• other walls enclosing hallways within
continued through the superstructure. The construction of the flanking wall,
flats, half-hour.
including the position of openings in it, will
have an impact on sound transmission.
(b) fire-stopping SOUND INSULATION The requirements of statutory regulations
Fire-resisting walls should be fire-stopped
or constructed to resist fire spread: 6.3 - D9 Internal walls shall, where should be followed.
• at their perimeter necessary, have adequate resistance to
the transmission of sound (d) partitions to rooms containing a WC
• at junctions with other fire-resisting The guidance below applies in Scotland,
walls, floors and roofs Items to be taken into account include: Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man. In
• where openings are formed for doors, (a) all separating walls England and Wales reference should be
pipes, etc. In England and Wales, separating walls made to statutory requirements.
The following details should be designed may be built in accordance with Robust
Details Part E “Resistance to the passage PARTITION PERFORMANCE
carefully:
of sound”. Any partition between a room containing
• the junction between a separating or
a WC and a living room, dining room, study
compartment wall and a pitched roof or For details of separating walls in timber
6.3
or bedroom should have a weighted sound
a flat roof frame construction, reference should be reduction index of not less than 38dB over
• where pipes and cables penetrate a fire- made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber the frequency range 100-3150Hz, when
resisting wall (reference should also be framed walls’. tested in accordance with BS 2750. This
made to Chapter 8.1 ‘Internal services’
To ensure an adequate level of sound does not apply to a partition between a
(Design and Sitework)).
insulation for masonry separating walls: WC and a bedroom where the WC forms an
The wall dividing an integral or attached • statutory requirements may permit the en-suite facility to the bedroom.
garage and the floor above should act building in of joist ends into separating The following methods of construction
together to provide adequate resistance walls. Where permitted there should be will achieve the performance level stated
to fire spread. If there is either no ceiling a mortar joint around the joist perimeter above.
or no floor to the space above the ceiling and the face of the joint pointed with
to the garage, vertical fire separation may silicone sealant BLOCKWORK PARTITIONS
be required. • all joints in the separating wall should be Blocks having a density of not less than
When fire-stopping against timber fully filled with mortar 600kg/m3 finished on both sides with
construction, it is important to specify • flexible cavity stops should be provided 13mm of plaster are acceptable.
compressible material, such as mineral at the junction of separating walls with
external walls Blockwork should be tied in every course
wool, to allow timber shrinkage to take to adjoining walls, with the joints filled
place without affecting the fire-stopping. • avoid any reduction in the thickness of
masonry, but where this is unavoidable, solid.
(c) provision of cavity barriers eg to accommodate electrical sockets, For details of bonding and tying, reference
All internal walls of hollow or cavity positions on opposite sides of the should be made to Sitework clause 6.3
construction, whether fire-resisting or not, separating wall should be staggered. - S3(d).
should have cavity barriers installed at
Care should be taken when specifying
their perimeter and at junctions with fire- TIMBER STUDWORK
dry lining to masonry separating walls.
resisting floors and walls. Timber studwork is acceptable if used
The thickness of plasterboard layers,
with one of the following combinations of
For cavity separating walls of masonry the method of fixing and sealing may be
materials:
construction, the top of the wall needs critical. For fixing details, reference should
to be closed for fire resistance. be made to BS 8212.
Timber framed separating walls should (b) cavity separating walls

be specified with cavity barriers of wire Cavity separating walls should be
reinforced mineral wool at junctions with constructed so that any external cavity
floors and ceilings. Reference should be wall insulation placed by blown or pumped

6.3 Internal walls
cavity separating
wall FIREPLACES AND FLUES
6.3 - D11 Fireplaces and flues
membranes See Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and
and dpcs
two layers one layer of linked flues’.
of 12.5mm 12.5mm
plasterboard plasterboard protection to
each side each side
+
no insulation
+
25mm
vertical dpm
PROVISION OF
mineral
wool quilt INFORMATION
dpm 6.3 - D12 Designs and specifications
concrete cavity
fill below dpc
understandable format and include all
Drawings should give full information,
including:
• wall layout, with all dimensions shown
• position and size of openings and lintels
Dpcs should be included below the • details at junctions, indicating fire-
5mm plaster one layer of following: stopping where applicable
coat on one 12mm
layer of panel board • non-loadbearing partitions built off an • details of wall constructions and
9.5mm each side
plasterboard + in-situ ground slab with a dpm applied to materials, ties and restraints
each side 75mm
+ mineral wool the top of the slab • details of foundations where required.
25mm quilt
mineral wool
quilt 6.3 - D13 All relevant information shall
screed on
be distributed to appropriate personnel
dpm above
partition on dpc
above polyethylene
slab Ensure that design and specification
dpm
and relevant specialist subcontractors
Other forms of timber studwork
and/or suppliers.
construction will be acceptable provided
the criteria given under PARTITION Where proprietary components are to be
PERFORMANCE is achieved and used, manufacturers usually have specific
independent evidence of performance is requirements for fixing and/or assembly
available at the request of NHBC. of their products. This information should
also be made available for reference
Where two thicknesses of board are used,
on site so that work can be carried out
the joints should be staggered and the
6.3
satisfactorily in accordance with the design

joints in the outer layer properly filled.
and specification.
Top plates, bottom plates and end studs applied dpm
should be secured and sealed to the such as mastic
asphalt above
adjoining structure so that sound paths slab
cannot develop following shrinkage and/or

partition dpc
MATERIALS STANDARDS
deflection of the timber. dpc and 6.3 - M1 All materials shall:
dpm linked
PROPRIETARY PARTITIONS (a) meet the Technical Requirements

Certain proprietary partition systems (b) take account of the design
meet the required standard. The partition Materials that comply with the design and
manufacturer should have independent the guidance below will be acceptable for
test evidence of the system’s performance. internal walls, including separating walls
and compartment walls.
DAMP-PROOFING Materials for internal walls should comply
6.3 - D10 Internal walls shall be • partitions that may be adversely affected with all relevant standards, including those
designed to provide adequate resistance by residual damp (eg stud partitions) listed below. Where no standard exists,
to moisture from the ground built off any type of concrete floor. Technical Requirement R3 applies (see
Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards
Loadbearing walls built off foundation
and Technical Requirements’).
walls should have a dpc at their base at
stud partition
least the width of the wall. The dpc should on dpc References to British Standards and Codes
link with any adjoining dpm. of Practice include those made under the
Where steps are necessary in the ground
floor slab, a dpc should be incorporated as
European Technical Specifications
a continuous link between the upper and
lower dpcs. The vertical part of the dpc
should be protected from damage during
construction.
dpm below slab

Internal walls 6.3
MASONRY MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified by the brick PLASTERBOARD
or block manufacturer, ordinary Portland
6.3 - M2 Masonry shall comply with cement to BS EN 197 may be used. Sulfate- 6.3 - M6 Plasterboard shall be of a
relevant standards resisting Portland cement should be used, suitable thickness for its intended use
Items to be taken into account include: where necessary (see Chapter 6.1 ‘External Plasterboard should be to BS 1230.
(a) precast concrete blocks masonry walls’ (Materials)). Plasterboard thickness should be:
Concrete blocks should comply with Admixtures, retarded mortars and pre- • 9.5mm for stud spacing up to 450mm
BS EN 771. mixed mortars may be used in accordance • 12.5mm for stud spacing up to 600mm.
When used in loadbearing partitions, with the manufacturer’s recommendations, For sound-resisting walls (separating
blocks should have the minimum provided those of the masonry walls and walls to WC compartments), the
compressive strength required by manufacturer agree. correct thickness, number of layers of
the design. The table below gives plasterboard sheets and sealing should be
recommended strengths of blocks to be WALL TIES AND RELATED specified (see Design clause 6.3 - D9).
used in specific cases: ITEMS Tapered edge boards should be used where
6.3 - M3 Walls ties and related items the plasterboard is to be jointed only
Height of wall Minimum compressive
strength of block unit shall be of the appropriate type and before decoration.
1 or 2 storeys blocks - 2.9N/mm2 strength and shall have adequate Dry lining systems should comply with
Lowest storey of a 3 blocks - 7.3N/mm2 durability BS 8212. Reference should be made to
storey wall or where (unless calculations Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (each
WALL TIES FOR SEPARATING WALLS
individual storeys show that lower section) for further details.
exceed 2.7m Wall ties should either:
strengths are suitable)
• be butterfly type, or
Upper storeys of 3 blocks - 2.9N/mm2 • have been tested to show that
PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS
storey wall their design meets with statutory 6.3 - M7 Prefabricated proprietary
requirements. partition systems shall be suitable for
Where buildings are more than 3 storeys their purpose
in height, masonry should be designed in Wall ties for timber frame separating walls
accordance with Technical Requirement R5 should be not more than 40mm x 3mm in Proprietary partitions should be specified
using the block strength specified by the cross section. in accordance with the manufacturer’s
designer. recommendations.
HANGERS, STRAPS, ETC
The maximum loadbearing capacity Joist hangers, restraint straps, bond ties, DAMP-PROOF COURSES
of the wall should not exceed the etc should be protected against corrosion.
recommendations of the manufacturer. Ferrous metals with the following levels of 6.3 - M8 Materials for damp-proofing
protection are acceptable: shall adequately resist the passage of
In some partitions to WC compartments • post-galvanizing to BS 729, or moisture
6.3
and all separating walls, blocks should have • pre-galvanizing to BS 2989. Materials which are acceptable for use as
at least the minimum density required by
dpcs include:
the design in order to achieve the required Restraint straps for use in masonry
• bitumen to BS 6398
sound insulation. construction should have a minimum cross
• polyethylene to BS 6515
section of 30mm x 5mm.
Where special blocks/pipes are • proprietary materials assessed in
used for flues, the manufacturer’s accordance with Technical Requirement
recommendations should be checked. TIMBER R3.
Special materials may be required around 6.3 - M4 Timber shall be of the Dpcs should be not less than the width of
the blocks/pipes. appropriate grades and sizes to support the wall or partition.
the imposed loads
(b) bricks
Bricks should comply with the relevant Preferably, regularised timber should SOUND INSULATION
British Standards: be used for stud partitions. Structural MATERIALS
• clay bricks should comply with timber should be specified according to
BS EN 771-1 the strength classes in BS 5268 : Part 2, 6.3 - M9 Materials used for sound
• calcium silicate bricks should comply eg C16 or C24. When using the BS 4978 insulation shall be of a suitable
with BS EN 771-2 grading rules, the timber species should be thickness and density
• concrete bricks should comply with included. The strength class can then be Normally, mineral wool quilt should be
BS EN 771-3. determined from BS 5268. used for acoustic insulation in partitions.
Finger joints should comply with BS EN 385 The thickness and density should be as
When used in a separating wall, bricks
and timber for dry lining with BS 8212. required by the design.
should have at least the minimum density
required by the design. A lighter brick
may not provide a suitable level of sound 6.3 - M5 Timber shall have a suitable
resistance. moisture content
To minimise drying shrinkage, timber
For bricks suitable for use in chimneys
should have a moisture content not
greater than 20%.
‘Fireplaces, chimneys and flues’.
Structural softwood for internal use should
(c) mortar be dry graded to BS 4978 and marked
A mortar of 1 : 1 : 5½, cement : lime : sand, ‘DRY’ or ‘KD’.
with plasticiser is suitable for both internal
and external walls.

6.3 Internal walls
FIRE-STOPPING (b) construction sequence

Walling should be constructed in lifts/
MATERIALS stud partition
on dpc
stages to prevent distortion of wall panels
6.3 - M10 Fire-stopping materials shall during construction.
be suitable to resist the passage of fire
(c) mortar mix and joints
Suitable fire-stopping materials include: MIX
• mineral wool Make sure the correct mix is used. A
• cement mortar mortar of 1 : 1 : 5½, cement : lime : sand,
• gypsum plaster with plasticiser is suitable for both internal
• intumescent mastic or preformed strip and external walls.
• proprietary sealing systems (particularly
those designed for service penetrations) Unless otherwise specified, ordinary
dpm below slab
assessed in accordance with Technical Portland cement may be used. Sulfate-
Requirement R3 to maintain the fire resisting Portland cement should be used,
resistance of the wall. where necessary (see Chapter 6.1 ‘External
A dpc should be provided below all internal
masonry walls’ (Sitework)).
walls where the dpm is applied to the top
FIREPLACES AND FLUES surface of the slab. Mixers should be maintained and cleaned
6.3 - M11 Fireplaces and flues to function properly.
The dpcs should be at least the width of
See Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and the partition. Where dpcs join, the lap Mortar should be used within 2 hours,
flues’ should be at least 100mm. unless it is a retarded mortar. Mortar
should not be re-tempered after setting
has commenced.
SITEWORK STANDARDS partition on dpc
screed on
dpm above RETARDED MORTAR
slab
above polyethylene
dpm Retarded mortar should not be used
beyond the time specified by the supplier.
(b) take account of the design Retarded mortar should not be used during
(c) follow established good practice and cold weather.
workmanship
ADDITIVES
Sitework that follows the design and the Where plasticisers or other additives are to
guidance below will be acceptable for be used, the manufacturer’s instructions
internal walls, including separating walls should be followed. An air entraining agent
and compartment walls. can help reduce frost damage but it is not
an anti-freeze. The recommended quantity
6.3
DAMP-PROOF COURSES of air entraining agent should be carefully

measured for each batch in accordance
6.3 - S2 Damp-proof courses shall be
installed to prevent moisture entering
MASONRY PARTITIONS with the manufacturer’s instructions.
the building 6.3 - S3 Construction of masonry MORTAR JOINTS
internal walls shall ensure adequate All bricks and blocks should be laid on a
A dpc should be provided below all
stability full bed of mortar.
loadbearing walls built off foundation
walls. The dpc should be linked with any Items to be taken into account include:
All perpends should be solidly filled.
adjoining dpm. (a) setting out and workmanship
Partitions should be accurately set out in If walls are to be finished with wet plaster,
The dpm may be either continuous or joints should be raked out square to a
accordance with the design.
formed by two separate overlapping shallow depth to provide a key.
pieces. All work should be reasonably plane and
true. Walls should be plumbed and courses For dry lining, mortar joints should be
levelled by using lines and spirit levels. struck off flush.
dpc linked
with dpm Openings should be formed to the correct For information on dry lining masonry
below partition
size and shape. Templates should be used, walls, reference should be made to Chapter
where necessary. 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (Sitework).
(d) bonding and tying

A regular bonding pattern should be
maintained. All masonry walls and
dpm
below slab partitions should be fully bonded or tied,
as required by the design.
Either:
• tooth every alternate course, or
Dpcs should be provided below timber
• tie with expanded metal or equivalent, at
partitions where directly fixed to floor
centres not exceeding 300mm vertically.
slabs, even if there is a dpm beneath the
slab. This is to prevent residual moisture in
the concrete affecting the timber.

Internal walls 6.3
(f) size, location and support of lintels TIMBER STUD PARTITIONS
bonded
connection
and beams
Lintels should be the correct size for the 6.3 - S4 Construction of timber stud
opening and have the correct bearing at internal walls shall ensure adequate
each end: stability
Span [m] Minimum bearing [mm]
(a) setting out and workmanship
Up to 1.2 100 Partitioning should be correctly positioned,
Over 1.2 150 square and plumb.
Long lintels may require padstones. Lintels

should bear on a full block where possible
and be installed level on a solid bed of
tied mortar. Soft or non-durable packing should
connection
not be used.
Small pieces of cut bricks or blocks
should not be used around lintel bearings.
Concrete lintels should be the right way up.
reinforced concrete
lintel right way up
Joist filling should be brick or blockwork, lintel bearing

without excessive mortar joints. Bricks and on full block,
where possible
Studs should be spaced at centres to
blocks should not be mixed. suit the plasterboard thickness. Extra
studs should be provided at openings, as
To avoid cracking, bricks and blocks or required by the design.
blocks of different types should not be
mixed in the same wall. (b) size of timber members
Where steel beams are to be used, Loadbearing timber partitions should be
different masonry types used to adjust coursing
reference should be made to Chapter 6.5 constructed in accordance with the design.
‘Steelwork support to upper floors and Unless designed otherwise, the minimum
partitions’ (Sitework) for guidance on steel specification for all partitions should be:
beam sizes and the need for padstones. • sill and head plates 63mm x 38mm
• studs 63mm x 38mm at maximum
(g) restraint strapping
6.3
600mm centres
Joists built into masonry walls provide • framing joints secured with not less than
adequate lateral restraint. 2 nails per joint
Restraint straps may be required by the • blocking/nogging for support of
incorrect use of different masonry types design. If so, they should be fitted before plasterboard 43mm x 38mm
new masonry is built above. • blocking/nogging for other purposes
63mm x 38mm.
(e) chasing for services
Chases can reduce the sound insulation (c) support and fixings
value of a wall and should be cut only Partitions should be firmly fixed to each
where required by the design. Impact other and to abutting walls. Noggings or
power tools that can damage the wall extra studs should be used, where necessary.
should not be used.
The depth of horizontal chases should
not exceed one-sixth the thickness of the
single leaf, and vertical chases, one-third
restraint strap
the thickness. Hollow blocks should not be at least 300mm
long on
chased, unless specifically permitted by both joists
the manufacturer.
extra stud
horizontal
chase no
deeper than
one-sixth
block
thickness
Partitions should be fixed at head and base

vertical chase no deeper
to noggings or joists.
than one-third block thickness

6.3 Internal walls
fixing to
nogging
Fixing and finishing plasterboard partitions TIMBER SEPARATING WALLS
should be in accordance with Chapter 8.2 The design details should be carefully
‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (Sitework). followed. There should be no gaps in the:
• mineral wool quilt
PROPRIETARY PARTITIONS • plasterboard layers
• fire-stopping.
6.3 - S5 Proprietary partitions
shall be erected in accordance with Services should not penetrate the
manufacturers’ recommendations plasterboard layers. They should be fixed
Partitioning should be correctly positioned, in front of the plasterboard.
square and plumb. The manufacturer’s
fixing to
recommended construction sequence PARTITIONS TO ROOMS
nogging should be followed. CONTAINING A WC
Timber or other additional fixings should 6.3 - S7 Partitions to rooms containing
be provided for radiators, electrical outlets, a WC shall provide adequate sound
switches and the like. insulation, where required by the design
The guidance below applies in Scotland,
SEPARATING WALLS Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man. In
6.3 - S6 Construction of separating England and Wales the design should be
walls shall ensure adequate sound checked to see how sound insulation is to
PARTITION PARALLEL TO JOIST
insulation be achieved.
fixing to joist MASONRY SEPARATING WALLS A partition between a room containing

The correct density of block should be a WC and a living room, dining room,
used. Holes, voids, even hairline cracks, study or bedroom (except where the WC
can significantly reduce the effectiveness is en-suite) should have adequate sound
of a sound-insulating wall. insulation.
To maintain sound insulation: Most masonry partitions provide adequate

• fully fill all mortar beds and perpends sound insulation without additional
• use only butterfly or other approved wall treatment.
ties for cavities up to 75mm wide
Some methods of providing adequate
• space wall ties 900mm minimum
sound insulation with a timber stud
horizontally and 450mm minimum
partition are shown below:
vertically
• stagger the positions of electrical socket
6.3
outlets on opposite sides of separating

walls
• tie in or tooth bond to adjoining walls to
fixing to joist
improve rigidity of separating wall two layers one layer of
of 12.5mm 12.5mm
• where joist ends are built into separating plasterboard plasterboard
PARTITION AT RIGHT ANGLES TO JOIST each side each side
walls fully fill the spaces around the + +
no insulation 25mm
Internal partitions should not be wedged joists with mortar and point around the mineral
against ceiling joists or roof trusses. This joist perimeter with silicone sealant as wool quilt
does not allow for ceiling deflection/ required by the design

movement and can damage the ceiling • chases for services should be well filled
boards. with mortar.
Partitions should not be over-wedged at floor Solid separating walls should be taken
level. This could damage floor boarding. through the inner leaf of a cavity external
wall using metal ties to provide rigidity.
Noggings should be provided to support
However, if the same blocks are used for
fittings, such as radiators, wall mounted
both walls, tooth bonding is acceptable.
boilers, sanitary fittings, kitchen units, etc. 5mm plaster one layer of
separating wall taken coat on one 12mm
through and tied to inner leaf layer of panel board
dense 9.5mm each side
block plasterboard +
separating each side 75mm
wall + mineral wool
25mm quilt
mineral wool
quilt
nogging
supports
radiator
Where two layers of plasterboard are used,
the joints should be staggered and the
lightweight block inner leaf
joints in the outer layer properly filled.
Proprietary plasterboard partitions usually
need an additional layer of plasterboard
to one or both sides of the partition to
provide adequate sound insulation.

Internal walls 6.3
WALLS PROVIDING FIRE
RESISTANCE INDEX
6.3 - S8 Internal walls shall, where
A M
required, have adequate resistance to
Additives 6 Masonry 5, 6, 8
fire spread
B Moisture resistance 4, 5, 6
Beams 7 Mortar 5, 6
(a) separating wall construction
Junctions between separating walls Blockwork 3 Movement joints 1, 2, 3
and roofs should be firestopped to the Bonding 1, 6 P
underside of the tiling to prevent fire Bricks 5 Partitions 2, 3, 4, 6
spreading between dwellings. C Plasterboard 5
The separating wall should stop about Cavity barriers 3 Precast blocks 5
25mm below the top of adjacent roof Cavity walls 1, 3 Proprietary systems 5
trusses. Chasing 7 R
Soft packing, such as mineral wool, should Chimneys 9 Restraint straps 5, 7
be used above and below the roofing Concrete blocks 5 S
underlay, to allow for movement in roof D Separating walls 1, 2, 3, 5,
timbers and prevent ‘hogging’ of the tiles. Damp proofing 4, 6 8, 9
Durability 5 Services 7, 9
F Setting out 6, 7
firestop between battens
above underlay
Fireplaces 4, 6 Sound insulation 3, 5
Fire-stopping 3, 6 Studwork 3
firestop below
underlay
Fixings 4, 7 Support 2, 7
Flanking transmission, sound 3 T

Flues 4, 6, 9 Timber 5
Foundations 1, 2 Timber stud partitions 7
J Timber walls 2, 8
thin board
Joints 6 Tying 1, 6
as cavity
closer to
Joist hangers 5 W
avoid cold
bridge Wall ties 1, 2, 5
cavity barrier of cavity L
mineral wool or barrier in
fire-resisting board separating wall
Lateral restraint 1 WCs 3, 8
in boxed eaves
6.3
Lintels 7 Workmanship 6,7
It is important that a cavity barrier is
provided within boxed eaves. The cavity
barrier should be wire reinforced mineral
wool blanket, at least 50mm thick, nailed
to the rafter and carefully cut to shape to
fully seal the boxed eaves.
(b) penetration of fire-resisting walls by
services
Pipes, cables and ducting should be
firestopped where they pass through fire-
resisting walls, including:
• separating walls
• compartment walls
• walls to ducts serving flats.
The design requirements for firestopping
should be checked and making good
completed neatly.
CHIMNEYS, FLUES AND

LININGS
6.3 - S9 Construction of chimneys,
flues and linings
See Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and
flues’.

Chapter 6.4
Timber and concrete upper floors
CONTENTS
APPENDIX 6.4-A
DESIGN Clause Page
Span tables for timber floor joists 13
APPENDIX 6.4-B
Protection from corrosion of metal 15
Upper floor design D3 1 components embedded in masonry
Timber floor joists D4 1
Trimmer joists D5 2 INDEX 16
Strutting of floor joists D6 2
Joist hangers D7-D8 2-3
Joist support at separating walls D9 3
Restraint strapping D10 3
SCOPE
Structural steel in floors D11 3
Fire spread D12-D13 3 This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Floor decking D14 4 Requirements and recommendations for the construction of
timber and concrete upper floors.
Concrete floors D15 4
Floors between dwellings D16-D17 4
MATERIALS
Timber floors M2-M4 4
Joist hangers and restraint straps M5 5
Strutting M6 5
Floor decking M7 5
Sound insulation M8 5
Structural steel in floors M9 5
6.4
Concrete and reinforcement M10 5

SITEWORK
Timber floors S2 5
Joist hangers S3-S4 6
Trimmed and trimming joists S5-S6 6-7
Multiple joists S7 7
Strutting of floors S8 8
Notching and drilling S9 9
Restraint strapping S10-S12 9 - 10
Overlapping and butted joists S13 10
Floor decking: general S14-S16 10
Softwood boarding S17 10
Chipboard flooring S18-S19 11
Oriented strand board flooring S20 11
Plywood flooring S21 11
Other floor decking S22 12
Floors between dwellings S23 12
Concrete floors S24-S25 12
In-situ concrete S26 12
Precast concrete S27 12
Fire-stopping S28 13

Timber and concrete upper floors 6.4
timber)’ (Design). I-joists and metal web
DESIGN STANDARDS I-joist
joists should not be built into solid external
walls.
Requirements Concrete floors should normally have a
Design that follows the guidance below metal web minimum bearing of 90mm on masonry
will be acceptable for timber and concrete walls.
upper floors.
TIMBER FLOOR JOISTS
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS The support reaction due to dead and
6.4 - D4 Floor joists shall be adequate
imposed loads on the floor should not
6.4 - D2 Design shall comply with all exceed the recommended value specified for the spans and imposed loads
relevant statutory requirements by the manufacturers of I-joists and metal Items to be taken into account include:
Design should be in accordance with web joists. (a) design
relevant Building Regulations and other Structural timber for solid joists is
Where necessary, I-joists should have
statutory requirements. normally specified as strength Class C16
web stiffeners at the locations of
or C24. Tables giving the permitted clear
concentrated loads in accordance with the
span for joists of strength Class C16 and
UPPER FLOOR DESIGN manufacturer’s recommendations.
C24 are given in the TRADA Technology
6.4 - D3 Upper floors shall be designed Ltd publication “Span tables for solid
to support and transmit loads safely to timber members in floors, ceilings and
the supporting structure without undue web roofs (excluding trussed rafter roofs) for
stiffeners
deflection dwellings” reproduced in Appendix 6.4-A.
Items to be taken into account include: I-joists and metal web joists should
(a) dead and imposed loads be specified in accordance with the
The dead loads should include the weight manufacturer’s instructions and the
of the following: following deflection limits based on total
• floor structure, decking and finishes dead and imposed loads for combined
• ceilings and applied finishes intermediate bearing end bearing bending and shear; 0.003 times the span
• walls and partitions supported by the with a maximum deflection of 14mm if
floor Metal web joists should have uprights at strutting is provided or 12mm if strutting is
• permanent fixtures such as boilers, the supports between the flanges held in not provided.
water tanks, etc. place by punched metal plate fasteners.
Other support options are either top or I-joists and metal web joists should not be
Imposed loads are the variable loads bottom chord (flange) support, designed by used in situations where any part of the
imposed when the building is in use. They joist is exposed to external conditions.
the manufacturer.
include the weight of furniture and people.
6.4
BS 6399-1 recommends an imposed (b) joist sizes
loading allowance of 1.5kN/m2 for self Solid timber joist sizes are given in the
contained dwellings. span tables in BS 8103-3. Where the
Where the design includes communal areas tables do not apply or where there are
serving flats or maisonettes, refer to BS concentrated loads, floor joists should be
6399-1 for recommended imposed loads. designed by an Engineer in accordance
Information concerning balconies is given uprights at
end bearing
in Chapter 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’ Regularised timber is recommended for
(Design and Sitework). floor joists. The section sizes in the tables
reproduced in Appendix 6.4-A should be
(b) supporting structure regularised, or be ALS or CLS to enable
The floor structure should have an floors and ceilings to be level.
adequate bearing on the supporting
structure. Timber joists should normally I-joists and metal web joists should
have a minimum bearing as shown in the be specified in accordance with
table. manufacturers’ instructions.
(c) joist spacing
Type of timber Minimum bearing [mm]
Joists should not be spaced at centres
joist
End Intermediate uprights at
intermediate bearing
greater than 600mm.
support support
When planning joist spacings, a clearance
Solid joist on 90 (75) 90 (75)
of 25mm to 75mm between the first joist
masonry walls
Joists may be supported on joist hangers and the wall face should be allowed. This
Solid joist on 75 75
or on internal load bearing walls. Where helps when installing services and fixing
timber wall plate
permitted they may be built into the inner floorboards.
I-joist 90 (45) 90
leaf of an external cavity wall. Where joists (d) support of lightweight partitions
Metal web joist 90 (75) 90
are built into the inner leaf care should be Multiple solid timber joists supporting
taken to ensure air-tightness. Where solid lightweight non-loadbearing partitions
Note
timber joists are built into solid external running parallel to the joists should be
Figures in brackets should only be used
walls, they should be pre-treated with suitably fixed together (see Sitework
when the joist is not providing restraint to
the wall. preservative in accordance with Chapter clause 6.4 - S7).
2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid

I-joists and metal web joists should either: TRIMMER JOISTS STRUTTING OF FLOOR
• be positioned centrally below a non-
loadbearing partition (if necessary 6.4 - D5 Adequately sized trimmer JOISTS
they can be doubled or tripled up in joists shall be provided around floor 6.4 - D6 Strutting shall be adequate
accordance with the manufacturer’s openings to distribute loads and limit movement
instructions), or Trimmed openings may be needed around within floors.
• support the weight of the non- staircase openings and chimneys. Solid
loadbearing partition by noggings or Herringbone strutting or blocking should
trimmed joists may be supported using
bearers to the two adjacent joists. be provided at the ends of solid joists
either:
Unless designed otherwise the noggings where they:
• joist hangers
should not be less than 38 x 90mm • bear onto steelwork
• notches
at 600mm centres and fixed with • bear onto intermediate walls
• support battens (light loading only)
metal clips. The sole plate of the non- • are supported on joist hangers.
• tusked tenon joints.
loadbearing partition should be fixed to Where solid joists span over 2.5m
the noggings. I-joists and metal web trimmed joists
additional strutting should also be
may be supported using joist hangers. If
specified as follows:
an I-joist is used as a trimmer to support
another I-joist, backer blocks should be Joist span [m] Rows of strutting
provided on both sides of the web of the
Under 2.5 none needed
trimmer.
I - joist
2.5 to 4.5 1 (at centre of span)
Over 4.5 2 (at equal spacing)
Herringbone strutting should be used

whenever possible as blocking can be
affected by shrinkage of both blocking and
joists.
non-loadbearing partition
supported by noggings Metal strutting systems are also acceptable
for solid joists if assessed in accordance
Where required, strutting for I-joists should
be provided in accordance with the table
above.
backer blocks Where required, strutting for metal web
joists should be in accordance with the
6.4
metal web
following table;
Joist span [m] Rows of bracing

If a metal web joist is used as a trimming Over 8.0 2 (at equal spacing)
(e) support of masonry partitions joist to support another metal web joist,
Where first floor masonry partitions cannot timber uprights should be provided For metal web joists, bracing (strongbacks)
be built over ground floor masonry walls, between the flanges of the trimmer. should be provided.
steel or reinforced concrete beams should
be specified to support the partition to
avoid the effects of shrinkage and long
term deflection which can occur with single or double
trimmer as required
timber beams. It is not acceptable to by the design
bracing (strongback)
support masonry partitions on joists
unless they are designed by an Engineer in
JOIST HANGERS
(f) heavy loads timber upright 6.4 - D7 Joist hangers shall be suitable
Bearers or additional joists should be for the joist type, width and depth, the
specified under heavy loads. Where I-joists strength of masonry and the required
and metal web joists are used refer to the load
manufacturer’s detail. Trimmed openings should be designed in For solid timber joists the hanger should
accordance with Technical Requirement R5 be the full depth of the joists.
(g) adverse effects of shrinkage and
or other authoritative guidance.
moisture For I-joists:
Timber adjacent to heat sources, such Further information concerning staircases • the hanger should be the full depth of
as flues, boilers and hot water cylinders, is given in Chapter 6.6 ‘Staircases’ (Design the joists and restrain the top flange, or
is more susceptible to drying shrinkage. and Sitework). • be at least 0.6 x the depth of the joist
Structural softwood for internal use should and full depth stiffeners should be fixed
be dry graded to BS 4978 (incorporating to both sides of the web.
BS EN 518) or BS EN 519 and marked ‘DRY’
or ‘KD’.

For metal web joists: the joists at not more than 2m centres Flanges of metal web joists should not
• the hanger should be the full depth of are required. Where restraint type joist be notched. Joists can bear directly into
the joist and restrain the top flange or, hangers, assessed in accordance with the steel beam if there is at least 75mm
• top flange restraint should be provided Technical Requirement R3 are used or bearing on the bottom flange of the steel
(see Sitework clause 6.4-S4). where joists are built into a wall and bear beam. Timber uprights should be provided
at least 90mm on the wall no restraint between the flanges and 38mm x 97mm
A timber upright should be fixed between straps are required along the joists. noggings should be provided between the
the flanges of metal web joists.
uprights. If the bearing is less than 75mm
Joist hangers should meet with the STRUCTURAL STEELWORK metal web joists can be supported on their
top flange and their bottom flange should
requirements of BS EN 845-1 or be IN FLOORS be fixed to timber blocking supported on
Requirement R3. The manufacturers of 6.4 - D11 Steelwork in floors shall be the inside of the steel beam.
I-joists and metal web joists should be designed by an Engineer
consulted about joist hangers suitable for Structural steelwork should be in
their range of products. accordance with Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork
support to upper floors and partitions’
If low strength masonry is used, the timber blocking
(each section), or should be designed by to support metal
loading on the top flange of the joist
an Engineer in accordance with Technical web joists
hanger should not be greater than the Requirement R5.
strength of the supporting masonry.
Where steelwork supports solid timber
6.4 - D8 Adequate end bearings shall be joists, the depth of the timber joists should
provided for joists and joist hangers be such that they can be notched and
The design should detail the type of have 12mm/2mm projections to allow for
shrinkage of the timber.
support to be used for joists, trimmers and at least 12mm projection
trimming joists.
The minimum bearing for joists on hangers FIRE SPREAD
should be as follows:
6.4 - D12 Floors shall be designed to
Type of timber joist Minimum bearing provide the appropriate fire resistance
[mm] All floors should have the fire resistance
Solid joist 75 required by the relevant Building
I-joist 45 Regulations.
Metal web joist 75 I-joists and metal web joists may require a
at least 2mm projection different specification for the ceiling than
6.4
The minimum bearing for hangers on that for solid timber joists to achieve the
masonry should be 75mm. Structural continuity of the floor should be same fire resistance.
provided by the use of continuous decking
fixed to joists on both sides of a transverse Ceilings should not be perforated (e.g.
JOIST SUPPORT AT steel joist. for downlighters) unless it can be shown
SEPARATING WALLS Steel sizes should allow adequate bearing
that the floor construction achieves the
required fire resistance.
6.4 - D9 Joists shall be correctly for timber joists, where required.
supported at masonry separating walls 6.4 - D13 Structural timber shall be
Where steelwork supports I-joists, the
Joists built into separating walls may joists may bear directly into the steel beam located away from heat sources
provide lateral support but it can conflict if there is at least 45mm bearing on the Combustible material should be kept
with sound insulation and fire resistance bottom flange of the steel beam. Noggings away from heat sources as described in
requirements in England & Wales. (38mm x thickness of flange) should be Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and
provided at the top and bottom flanges flues’ (Design and Sitework). In particular,
In Scotland joists should not be built into of the I-joists. If the bearing is less than
separating walls. structural timber should be at least 40mm
45mm timber blocking should be fixed from the outer surface of a masonry
to the steel beam to enable the I-joists to
chimney or fireplace recess. Floorboards
RESTRAINT STRAPS be face fixed using joist hangers to the
may be closer than 40mm from the
blocking inside the steel beam.
6.4 - D10 Adequate restraint strapping chimney wall.
shall be provided
Restraint straps and/or joist hangers
= at least 40mm
suitable for taking tensile forces may be
required to tie the walls and upper floors
together. Restraint straps at not more than
2m centres should be provided along the
walls that run parallel to the joists.
BS 8103-1 gives details of the connections
between structural elements.
The position and size of restraint straps structural timber
should be shown on drawings. kept away from
chimney wall
Where joists are supported on hangers

restraint straps along the direction of

FLOOR DECKING Design of in-situ or precast concrete floors

MATERIALS STANDARDS
should be in accordance with BS 8110 and
6.4 - D14 Floor decking shall be suitable Technical Requirement R5. Proprietary
for the intended use concrete elements will be acceptable, if
Items to be taken into account include: (b) take account of the design
Requirement R3.
(a) decking and joist centres Materials that comply with the design and
The correct thickness of decking should
be specified for the joist centres used. FLOORS IN AND BETWEEN the guidance below will be acceptable for
Thicknesses should be not less than those DWELLINGS
shown in this table for normal domestic Materials for timber and concrete upper
6.4 - D16 Floors between dwellings shall floors should comply with all relevant
loads, i.e. an imposed load of 1.5kN/m2.
be designed to provide adequate fire standards, including those listed below.
resistance Where no standard exists, Technical
Thickness of decking [mm]
Materials and constructions should comply Requirement R3 applies (see Chapter
Joist centres
with Technical Requirement R3 and 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards and
400mm 450mm 600mm Technical Requirements’).
T and G 16 16 19
softwood 6.4 - D17 Floors between dwellings and References to British Standards and Codes
boarding where appropriate floors within dwellings of Practice include those made under the
Chipboard 18 18 22 shall be designed to adequately limit Construction Products Directive (89/106/
sound transmission EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
Plywood 12 12 16
Oriented 15 15 18/19 Materials and constructions should comply approved by a European Committee for
strand board with Technical Requirement R3 and with Standardisation (CEN).
Note
Oriented strand board should be laid with TIMBER FLOORS
the stronger axis at right angles to the
PROVISION OF
6.4 - M2 Structural timber shall be
supports. Other decking materials not INFORMATION of the appropriate grades and sizes to
listed in the table should comply with 6.4 - D18 Designs and specifications support the imposed loads
Technical Requirement R3. The above shall be produced in a clearly
thicknesses may not be adequate to Structural timber should be specified
understandable format and include all according to the strength classes in BS
achieve a mass for floor decking of 15 relevant information
kg/m2 for sound insulation requirements of 5268-2. It is insufficient to specify timber
floors in England & Wales. The design should ensure compatibility using the BS 4978 (incorporating the
with other drawings, especially with requirements of BS EN 518) grading rules
(b) resistance to moisture respect to services. (eg GS or SS) unless the timber species is
6.4
Chipboard for flooring should be moisture- also specified so that the strength class
resistant flooring Type P5 to BS EN 312 For upper floors, the drawings should can be determined.
throughout the dwelling. Oriented strand show:
• direction of floor span and size Finger joints should comply with BS EN 385.
board should be Type OSB3 to BS EN 300.
and spacing of joists or concrete Where possible, regularised timber should
(c) fixing components be used for joists.
Adequate support and correct fixings • size of trimmers and trimming joists
should be specified in accordance with • position of strutting I-joists and metal web joists should be
the manufacturer’s recommendations. All • openings in the floor assessed in accordance with Technical
butt joints should be supported by joists or • supporting walls below Requirement R3.
noggings. Nail length should be 2½ times • walls and partitions above
the thickness of the decking material. • positions of restraint straps 6.4 - M3 Structural timber shall be
• positions of large service penetrations, of suitable durability, particularly in
Some decking materials require their joints eg chimneys, SVPs conditions where it could become damp
to be glued together and glued to joists • position of insulation Timber that is built into solid external
(see Sitework clauses 6.4 - S19 and S20). • details at all junctions. walls or embedded should be pre-treated
(d) sound insulation with preservative. Reference should be
6.4 - D19 All relevant information shall
Where the floor decking contributes to made to Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation
the sound insulation of a floor within a (natural solid timber)’ (each section) for
dwelling, the thickness of the decking Ensure that design and specification recommended methods of preservative
given in (a) above may not achieve a information is issued to site supervisors treatment.
mass of 15 kg/m2. Alternatively the floor and relevant specialist subcontractors
Any timber treated with preservative and
construction may have been tested to and/or suppliers.
cut after treatment should be given two
show adequacy. Where proprietary components are to be liberal applications of a suitable colour
used, manufacturers may have specific tinted preservative to the cut surfaces.
CONCRETE FLOORS requirements for fixing and/or assembly
of their products. This information should 6.4 - M4 Structural timber shall have a
6.4 - D15 Concrete floors shall be suitable moisture content
designed to transmit loads to the also be made available for reference
on site so that work can be carried out Structural softwood for internal use should
supporting structure without undue
satisfactorily, in accordance with the be dry graded to BS 4978 or BS EN 519
movement
design and specification. and marked ‘DRY’ or ‘KD’.
Clause D3.

JOIST HANGERS AND SOUND INSULATION TIMBER FLOORS
RESTRAINT STRAPS 6.4 - M8 Materials and systems for 6.4 - S2 Solid timber, I-joists and metal
floating floors, including insulation web joists shall be selected, located and
6.4 - M5 Hangers and straps shall be of
materials, shall be of a type that will supported as detailed in the design
appropriate types and strength and shall
provide adequate sound insulation
have adequate durability Items to be taken into account include:
Details of materials and systems for (a) grades and sizes
Joist hangers to BS EN 845-1 are
floating floors should be in accordance Check materials on delivery to site
acceptable. It is important that joist
with Chapter 8.3 ‘Floor finishes’ (each for conformity with the drawings and
hangers are the correct size for the timber
section). specification.
joist or trimmer.
Materials and systems should comply with Structural timber should be marked to
Where joist hangers are required to resist
relevant Building Regulations. show its strength class (normally C16 or
tensile forces, a joist hanger complying
with the requirements of BS 5628-1 C24). Alternatively, evidence of species
Appendix C or proprietary joist hangers STRUCTURAL STEELWORK and grade should be available to determine
that have been assessed in accordance
with Technical Requirement R3 should be
IN FLOORS the equivalent strength class.
used. 6.4 - M9 Steelwork shall be suitably Where timber is graded to BS 4978 or

durable and be of the appropriate section BS EN 519, it should also be marked with
Restraint straps should have a cross- identification of the company responsible
to support the imposed loads
section of at least 5 x 30mm or be for the grading.
proprietary restraint straps assessed in Structural steel should be in accordance
accordance with Technical Requirement R3 with Chapter 6.5 ‘Steelwork support Storage time may be minimised by phasing
and be protected in accordance with the to upper floors and partitions’ (each deliveries to suit the work programme.
requirements of BS 5628-3. Tables 1 and section), or be designed by an Engineer in When storage is required, timber should
2 of Appendix 6.4-B list suitable materials accordance with Technical Requirement R5. be stored on bearers or in racks and be
and protective finishes. The size of nails protected.
Steel beams should be protected by a
or screws should be specified for fixing
suitably durable paint coating as detailed
restraint straps to joists.
in Chapter 8.5 ‘Painting and decorating’ store timber off
ground on bearers
(each section). Intumescent paints should
STRUTTING be compatible with paints providing
6.4 - M6 Strutting shall ensure corrosion protection.
adequate rigidity of the floor structure
Timber strutting should be either:
CONCRETE AND
• herringbone strutting at least 38mm x REINFORCEMENT
38mm, or
6.4 - M10 Concrete shall have
6.4
• solid strutting at least 38mm thick and
appropriate reinforcement and be of
at least three-quarters the depth of the
a mix design that is suitable for the
joist. I-joists and metal web joists should
location and intended use
Proprietary metal strutting should be protected from adverse weather
For guidance on the specification and conditions during transport and storage.
have been assessed in accordance with
use of concrete, concrete additives and They should be stored clear of the ground
reinforcement, reference should be and stacked vertically. Manufacturers’
Thin metal strip is not acceptable as made to Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its recommendations for handling, transport
strutting. reinforcement’ (each section). and storage should be followed. Damaged
joists should not be used.
FLOOR DECKING PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS
(b) moisture content
6.4 - M7 The type and thickness of the 6.4 - M11 Proprietary concrete flooring Structural softwood for internal use should
decking material shall have adequate systems shall have adequate strength be dry graded to BS 4978 or BS EN 519
strength and moisture resistance and durability and marked ‘DRY’ or ‘KD’.
The following materials are acceptable: Proprietary concrete flooring systems
should be designed in accordance with (c) quality
• softwood boarding in accordance with
BS 8110, or should have been assessed in Timber should not be used if it:
BS 1297
accordance with Technical Requirement • is excessively bowed, twisted or
• moisture-resistant chipboard, Type P5 to
R3. cambered
BS EN 312. Ring shank nails (length 2½ x
decking thickness) or screws should be • has large edge knots or shakes
specified for fixing chipboard • has a wany edge more than half the
• oriented strand board Type OSB3 to BS thickness
EN 300 SITEWORK STANDARDS • has any sign of rot
• plywood in accordance with BS EN • has been damaged.
636. Fixings and support should be as
recommended by the manufacturer
• floor decking materials not covered by (b) take account of the design
a British Standard should have been (c) follow established good practice and
assessed in accordance with Technical workmanship
Requirement R3. Sitework that complies with the design and
Some decking materials require their joints
to be glued together and glued to joists
(see Sitework clauses 6.4 - S19 and S20).

(d) bearing For solid timber joists and metal web joists Flanges of I-joists should not be notched.
Bearings for joists should be as follows; the hanger should be the full depth of the Tabs of the hanger should be bent and
joists. A timber upright should be fixed nailed to the bottom flange of the I-joist.
Type of Minimum bearing [mm] between the flanges of metal web joists.
timber joist
End support Intermediate For I-joists the depth of the hanger should
support be at least 0.6 x the depth of the joist. Full
Solid joist 90 (75) 90 (75) depth stiffeners should be fixed to both
on masonry sides of the web if the hanger does not
walls restrain the top flange of an I-joist.
Solid joist on 75 75
timber wall Where joist hangers are supported on
plate lightweight blockwork, the suitability of the
I-joist 90 (45) 90 hanger should be checked. Joist hangers
which meet BS EN 845 are stamped on
Metal web 90 (75) 90
joist the base or gusset with the minimum
compressive strength of block for which
Note they are suitable, eg 2.9N/mm2 or 3.6N/mm2.
Figures in brackets should only be used Where hangers are to BS EN 845-1 ensure
tabs on hanger bent over
when the joist is not providing restraint to the supporting masonry is that specified in and nailed to flange
the wall. the design.
Bearings should be level. If joists are not Joist hangers should be supported on level
laid level, the floor will be springy and beds and should be tight to the wall.
uneven. Where bearings are uneven, joists The masonry course to carry the joist Flanges of metal web joists should not
should be levelled using hard packing, eg hangers should be checked for level and be notched. When used with hangers the
tiles or slates bedded in mortar. Loose or height. Hangers should not be cut into the top flange of metal web joists should be
soft packing should not be used. walling. restrained.
For further information concerning timber Where restraint type joist hangers
framed construction, reference should are shown in the design do not use
be made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber alternatives without checking with the
framed walls’. designer.
(e) levelling
Where possible, regularised timber should
be used. timber to
masonry hanger
6.4
The floor should be levelled from the

staircase trimmer and trimming joist.
spirit level
timber to timber hanger heavy duty hanger

staircase
trimmer
6.4 - S4 Joists shall be properly cut to

trimming
joists length and fitted to joist hangers
top flange restraint
Joists should be accurately cut to length
joists levelled from staircase trimmer or trimming joist for a tight fit. Solid joists should be All circular holes in the vertical sides of
notched into the hanger to keep the ceiling joist hangers should be fully nailed.
(f) joist spacings line level.
Joist spacing should be as shown on the When joist hangers are used at both ends
drawings. If the joist spacing is not shown, joists cut accurately of a joist, measuring, marking and cutting
so that gap is not
the designer should provide spacing more than 6mm should be accurate to ensure the joist fits
details. Do not increase the spacing. properly at both ends.
Joists should not be spaced at more than
600mm centres. The decking material to TRIMMED AND TRIMMING
be used should be taken into account.
JOISTS
(g) clearance from the wall
6.4 - S5 Trimmed and trimming joists
When placing joists, a clearance of 25mm
shall be properly supported
to 75mm should be allowed between the
first joist and the wall face. This helps Trimmed and trimming joists should be
when installing services and fixing floor used as detailed in the design.
decking.
notch to keep opening
JOIST HANGERS ceiling line level in floor
trimmer trimmed joists

6.4 - S3 Hangers shall be of the correct
size and properly built in
It is important that the joist hanger is the trimming joist support wall
correct size for the joist or trimmer.

The thickness and depth of trimmed and
trimming joists should be as detailed in the
design.
The ends of trimmed solid joists may be
supported using joist hangers or notches.
When using hangers, ‘timber-to-timber’ timber blocking
behind joist hanger
hangers should be used, not wall hangers.
trimmer notched to
keep hanger flush
with top of joist
backer blocks
Flanges of metal web joists should not
be notched. Joists can bear directly into
the steel beam if there is at least 75mm
bearing on the bottom flange of the steel
beam. Timber uprights should be provided
between the flanges and 38mm x 97mm
TIMBER-TO-TIMBER JOIST HANGER Flanges of metal web joists should not be noggings should be provided between the
notched and ‘timber-to-timber’ hangers uprights. If the bearing is less than 75mm
should be used to join a joist to a trimmer metal web joists can be supported on their
joist. top flange and their bottom flange should
be fixed to timber blocking supported
inside the steel beam.
single or double
trimmer as required
by the design
NOTCHED TRIMMER
timber blocking
to support
metal web joists
timber upright
trimmer notched:
6.4
-maximum half its depth
-maximum quarter its width
6.4 - S6 Joists shall be properly
trimmed into steelwork
For lightly loaded trimmed joists, support Joists trimmed into steelwork should be
battens (plates) may be used. notched at both top and bottom and have MULTIPLE JOISTS
12mm/2mm projections respectively to
lightly loaded allow for timber shrinkage. 6.4 - S7 Multiple joists shall be securely
at least 12mm projection
trimmed joist fixed together
Solid timber joists may be doubled up to
support a non-masonry partition or to
form trimmers.
nails at approx
450mm centres
SUPPORT BATTEN NAILED
nails at approx
20mm from top
and bottom
of joist
Flanges of I-joists should not be notched at least 2mm projection
and should be supported on trimmers

Flanges of I-joists should not be notched.
by ‘timber-to-timber’ hangers. Timber
I-joists can bear directly into the steel
blocking should be used to face fix a joist
beam if there is at least 45mm bearing on
to a trimmer joist.
the bottom flange of the steel beam and
noggings (38mm x thickness of flange)
should be provided at the top and bottom
bolts on centre lines
flanges of the I-joists. If the bearing is at approx 1m centres
less than 45mm timber blocking should

BOLTED
be fixed to the steel beam to enable the
I-joists to be face fixed using joist hangers
to the blocking inside the steel beam. Fixings should be to the Engineer’s
specification and should be given a second
check for tightness just before fixing the
ceiling.

Toothed plate, split ring and shear At the end of each run of strutting the last (c) joists supported by hangers
plate connectors should be used in joist should be firmly blocked to the wall. Solid blocking should be used at all joist
strict accordance with manufacturers’ bearings of solid timber joists where they
recommendations. are not built into brickwork or blockwork.
This includes some forms of timber frame
blocking construction. The blocking may be used for
fixing plasterboard and floor decking.
SPLIT RING
TOOTHED PLATE
SHEAR PLATE
herringbone strutting
Washers, or single faced connectors,

should be used with bolts. Check whether
Where I-joists require strutting it should be
toothed connectors are required between
provided in accordance with the table for
the timber faces. Ensure that all washers,
solid timber joists.
etc are provided.
Where metal web joists require strutting it solid blocking where joists
Bolts should be checked for tightness are not built into blockwork
should be in accordance with the following
(fixing bolts should not be used for (d) I-joists and metal web joists
table:
tightening). Make sure that timber is not supported on walls
damaged by over-tightening. Joist span [m] Rows of bracing Noggings should be provided for I-joists
and metal web joists at the top flange
I-joists can be doubled or tripled up 4.0 to 8.0 1 (at centre of span)
along the wall to support the floor decking.
in accordance with manufacturer’s Over 8.0 2 (at equal spacing) Noggings at the bottom flange may be
recommendations to support a lightweight
required to support the plasterboard
partition or to form trimmers. The design For metal web joists, bracing (strongbacks) ceiling.
should specify how the joists are fixed should be provided.
together.
bracing (strongback)
(b) bearings onto steelwork

Strutting should be provided where solid
6.4
timber filler block

timber joists bear on, or are notched into,
steelwork to prevent rotation.
perimeter nogging
STRUTTING OF FLOOR
JOISTS
6.4 - S8 Appropriate strutting shall be
provided to joists, where required
(a) span of the floor
Strutting for solid timber joists should be
provided before laying floor decking as solid strutting
follows:
Strutting should be provided where I-joists
Joist span [m] Rows of strutting
bear directly onto the bottom flange of the
Up to 2.5 none needed steel beam. Noggings (38mm x thickness
2.5 to 4.5 1 (at centre of span) of flange) should be provided at the top
Over 4.5 2 (at equal spacing) and bottom flanges of the I-joists. Strutting
is not necessary when an infill timber
perimeter nogging
For solid timber joists either herringbone blocking is fixed to the steel beam and
strutting (38mm x 38mm timber) or joists hangers of full depth of the joists are
minimum 38mm thick solid strutting used to face fix the joists to the blocking.
should be used, for not less than three- Strutting should be provided where metal
quarters the depth of the joist. Strutting web joists bear directly on to the bottom
should not project beyond the top and flange of the steel beam. Timber uprights
bottom edges of joists. should be provided between the flanges
and 38mm x 97mm noggings should be
provided between the uprights.

NOTCHING AND DRILLING into webs immediately below the top Packing should be provided between the
flange. wall and the first joist.
6.4 - S9 Notching and drilling shall be
carried out within recognised limits (c) metal web joists 2m maximum
spacing
In metal web joists service conduits
Items to be taken into account include: should run in the gaps between the metal
(a) solid timber joists webs. The maximum duct sizes should be
Solid timber joists and studs should only in accordance with the manufacturer’s
be notched and drilled within the limits recommendations. Large service ducts
shown in the table below: may have to be inserted before fixing the
joists as it may not be possible after the nogging
Item Location Maximum joists have been fixed.
size
Notching Top edge 0.1 0.15 x depth
joists up to 0.2 of span of joist packing
to 250mm
depth
Drilling joists Centre line 0.25 x depth
up to 250mm 0.25 to 0.4 of of joist
span
maximum diameter
of hole should be maximum depth
0.25 x joist depth services passing through
of notch should be metal web joists
0.15 x joist depth
notches on top in a
zone between 0.1
and 0.2 x span
RESTRAINT STRAPPING
6.4 - S10 Restraint strapping shall be noggings for I-joists
provided where specified in the design

holes on centre line
in a zone between
details
0.25 and 0.4 x span
When the external wall is to be stabilised
holes to be kept apart by at least
three times hole diameter by connection to the floor, straps may be
required. They may be fixed to the top or
bottom of the joist, depending on how the
Notches and drillings in the same masonry is coursed.
joist should be at least 100mm apart
horizontally. Straps should have a cross section of
6.4
30mm x 5mm galvanised steel straps
or straps which have been assessed in
accordance with Technical Requirement noggings for metal web joists
R3. (See clause 6.4 - S12 for fixing details).
Where joists run parallel to the wall, straps
should be supported on noggings fixed Where joists are supported on walls,
between the three joists adjacent to the restraint straps will not normally be
wall. required at the ends of joists, if there is at
at least 100mm between least 90mm bearing (eg if they are built
notches and holes Solid timber joists should have noggings
into masonry).
not less than 0.5 times the depth of the
joists if the strap is located on top of the Separate straps should be fitted along the
joists but the full depth if located beneath joists and at centres not more than 2m
the joists. unless the joist hangers are designed to
Special instructions should be obtained provide restraint.
I-joists should have solid timber noggings
from the designer when notching and not less than 0.5 times the depth of the
drilling: I-joists up to a maximum of 150mm, fixed
between the webs and located beneath
• is required in joists deeper than 250mm
the top flange of the I-joists when 30mm
• does not meet the above guidelines, or joist hanger
x 5mm galvanised straps are used. Where
• is needed close to heavy loads, such as
straps which have been assessed in
those from partitions, cisterns, cylinders
and stair trimming.
R3 are used the noggings should be short
If structural strength is impaired by lengths of I-joist or solid timber noggings restraint strap
held tight
notching or drilling, the element should be to the full depth of the I-joists. against blockwork
replaced or correctly repaired.

Metal web joists should have solid timber
(b) I-joists noggings, size 35mm x 97mm, used
In I-joists pre-formed holes are provided beneath the top flange of the metal web
in the timber webs for pipes and cables. joists and twice nailed to the joists.
Other holes or notches should not be cut Straps should be placed at a maximum of
without the approval of the manufacturer. 2m apart and carried over the three joists.
However, restraint straps can be slotted

OVERLAPPING AND
BUTTED JOISTS
6.4 - S13 Joists shall be properly fixed
at intermediate load bearing walls
(a) solid timber joists
Where joists overlap on loadbearing
intermediate walls, they should be
nailed together and cut so that they
will not project beyond the supporting
wall by more than 100mm. This is to
prevent the floor decking being pushed
up or the ceiling being cracked when intermediate support for
metal web joists
the cantilevered part of the joist moves
I-joist with restraint strap upwards.
FLOOR DECKING : GENERAL
6.4 - S11 Straps shall be located to overlapping joists
provide adequate restraint for the nailed together 6.4 - S14 Flooring shall only be fixed
masonry at the appropriate time during the
construction process.
Straps should bear on the centre of bricks
or blocks, not on mortar joints. Timber based materials can swell if they
become wet and may twist and bow
producing large gaps when drying out.
If timber decking is installed before the
dwelling is substantially watertight the
manufacturer should confirm that it is
suitable for that situation.
100mm maximum overhang
When floor decking has to be stored, it
should be stored on a hard base, under
cover, if possible indoors.
(b) I-joists
Where I-joists are supported on load 6.4 - S15 Floor decking shall be
bearing intermediate walls they should be securely fixed to the floor joists
strap centred on fixed as follows:
6.4
block and tight to wall Before fixing floor decking, a check should
be made that all noggings, blocking and
strutting are in place and fixed securely.
6.4 - S12 Straps shall be fixed with The length of nails should be 2½ times the
suitable screws or nails thickness of the decking.
Straps may be fixed on the side, top or The ends of adjacent boards should be
bottom as appropriate for all joist types. square. Joints should be staggered and
I-joists and metal web joists should not be supported on noggings or joists. Reference
notched. should be made to Clause S23 for fixing
floating floors.
Straps to walls which run parallel to the
joists should extend over at least three Temporary wedges and packings at the
joists. They should be fixed with 2 screws perimeter should be removed after the
or nails into each joist. The fixings should floor decking is complete.
be 3.75mm x 30mm square twisted nails
for all joist types. Noggings should be 6.4 - S16 Completed floor decking shall
provided to receive two additional nails. not be overloaded and shall be protected
Alternatively for solid joists two 4.76mm against damage
diameter x 50mm long wood screws (No. Floors should not be overloaded, especially
intermediate support for I-joist
10) or 4mm diameter x 75mm round nails with materials stored during construction.
(8 SWG) can be used in each joist. Where necessary, fixed flooring and/or
When nailing into Laminated Veneer (c) metal web joists floor decking should be protected against
Lumber flanges of I-joists, care should Where metal web joists are supported damp (for example from plaster splashes)
be taken to prevent the splitting of the on load bearing intermediate walls they and damage.
flanges. Nails should be driven in at an require a minimum bearing of not less
angle (not horizontally) and should not than 90mm. Joists should be overlapped. SOFTWOOD BOARDING
protrude from the flanges. Blocking is required between the joists
unless walls are built up to the underside 6.4 - S17 Softwood boarding shall be
of the floor. securely fixed
End (butt) joints should be made on joists
and staggered, ie the joints of adjacent
boards should not be on the same joist.

• screws, to BS 1210 with a minimum
length of twice the board thickness and
not less than size no. 8.
Edges at room perimeters should be
supported on joists or noggings.
Fixings should be spaced at centres
not more than 300mm apart along the
continuously supported edges and the
intermediate supports.
joist or nogging
joist
Expansion gaps should be not less than

10mm wide where boards abut a rigid
upstand. For larger areas of boarded floor
Board thickness should not be less a wider gap may be needed at upstands ORIENTED STRAND BOARD
than the following for the joist spacings and intermediate expansion gaps equal to
indicated: FLOORING
2mm per linear metre of floor provided.
6.4 - S20 Oriented strand board
Board thickness Maximum joist centres
[mm] [mm]
flooring shall be securely fixed
16 450 Oriented strand board should be laid over

supports in the direction indicated on the
19 600
boards. The stronger axis should be laid at
expansion gap at least 10mm
right angles to the supporting joists.
Boards should be cramped up and either
double nailed or secret nailed to each joist. All square edges should be supported. All
Nails should be of a length 2½ times the short edges should be supported on the
thickness of the decking and should be centre line of the joist. It is not necessary
punched well below the surface. to support the long edges of tongued and
grooved boards, except at room perimeters
The above thicknesses may not be
where all board edges should be fully
adequate to achieve a mass for floor
supported.
boarding of 15 kg/m2 for sound insulation
requirements of floors in England & Wales. No boards less than two joist spacings long
should be used.
CHIPBOARD FLOORING SQUARE EDGED BOARDS AND BOARDS Nails should be flat headed, annular
6.4
6.4 - S18 Chipboard flooring shall be of WITH LOOSE TONGUES grooved nails 3mm in diameter.
the type and thickness specified Boards should be supported on all sides on Expansion gaps should be not less than
Only moisture-resistant, Type P5 chipboard joists or noggings. 10mm wide where boards abut a rigid
to BS EN 312 should be used for flooring. upstand. For larger areas of boarded floor
This can be recognised by the green stripe a wider gap may be needed at upstands
on the chipboard edge and an identifying and intermediate expansion gaps equal to
marking. 2mm per linear metre of floor provided.
Board thicknesses should be not less To reduce squeaking, tongued and grooved
than the following for the joist spacings joints between boards should be glued and
indicated: the boards should be glued to the joists. A
suitable polyvinyl acetate (PVAC) adhesive
Board thickness Maximum joist centres should be used.
[mm] [mm]
18/20 450 nogging PLYWOOD FLOORING
22 600
6.4 - S21 Plywood decking shall be
securely fixed
adequate to achieve a mass for floor TONGUED AND GROOVED BOARDS Plywood should be laid with the face grain
decking of 15 kg/m2 for sound insulation Boards should be laid with long edges at at right angles to the supports. All butt
requirements of floors in England & Wales. right angles to joists. joints and joints with loose tongues should
be supported on joists or noggings. All
6.4 - S19 Chipboard flooring shall be Short edges should be supported on joists end joints should occur over joists (38mm
securely fixed or noggings. minimum thickness) or noggings.
ALL TYPES OF CHIPBOARD Projecting ends of boards should be cut
Chipboard should be supported and back to form a butt joint on a joist.
fixed in accordance with manufacturers’
instructions, using either: To reduce squeaking, tongued and grooved
• flat-headed ring shank nails minimum joints between boards should be glued and
3mm diameter and of length 2½ times the boards should be glued to the joists. A
the thickness of the chipboard, or suitable polyvinyl acetate (PVAC) adhesive
should be used.

Board thickness should be not less CONCRETE FLOORS Beam layout drawings should always be
than the following for the joist spacings followed. Doubled beams usually support
indicated: 6.4 - S24 Concrete upper floors shall be concentrated loads, such as partitions.
constructed/erected in accordance with
Board thickness Maximum joist centres the design. (d) propping of beams and planks during
[mm] [mm] construction
Care should be taken to ensure that
12 450 Where floors rely on structural topping or
concrete floors are reasonably level and
in-situ make-up sections, propping may
16 600 smooth. Particular care should be taken at
be needed until the in-situ concrete has
doorways and junctions.
reached its design strength.
adequate to achieve a mass for floor 6.4 - S25 Appropriate measures shall
(e) grouting of joints
decking of 15 kg/m2 for sound insulation be taken when concreting or screeding in
Most precast floors rely on a grout to
requirements of floors in England & Wales. cold weather
ensure composite action of the units and
Reference should be made to Chapter 1.4 provide adequate strength, as well as fire
Nails for fixing plywood should be either:
‘Cold weather working’. and sound resistance.
• plain wire nails - minimum diameter
3.35mm The manufacturer’s specification should be
- minimum length 65mm IN-SITU CONCRETE checked for the grout mix.
- with penetration not less than 40mm, 6.4 - S26 Reinforced concrete upper
or (f) restraint straps and ties
floors shall be constructed in accordance
• annular-ring shank nails - minimum Restraint straps should be shown on the
with design details
diameter 3mm drawings. They are usually necessary
- minimum length 50mm All concrete work should be in accordance where the beams run parallel with the wall.
- penetration not less than 32mm. with Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
Fixings should be at 150mm centres (max)
around the perimeter and 300mm centres The Builder should not depart from the
(max) on intermediate supports. design without the Engineer’s written
consent. at least 450mm straps at not more
An expansion gap of at least 1.5 - 2mm than 2m centres
should be allowed between each panel.

PRECAST CONCRETE
OTHER FLOOR DECKING 6.4 - S27 Precast concrete upper floors
shall be erected in accordance with
6.4 - S22 Proprietary flooring materials design details strap tight precast beam
to blockwork
shall be securely fixed
Proprietary floor decking should be (a) manufacturer’s assembly
6.4
assessed in accordance with Technical instructions

Requirement R3 and be fixed in A copy of the manufacturer’s assembly Metal ties may be required to provide
accordance with any certification instructions (and BBA Certificate, if a structural link across internal and
requirements. applicable) should be on site and the separating walls.
FLOORS BETWEEN The Builder should not depart from the
(g) position of holes for services
Where holes are required for services,
DWELLINGS design without the Engineer’s written blocks should be omitted or cut where
6.4 - S23 The floating part of a floor consent. necessary. Infill blocks should be cut
shall be completely separated by a carefully and neatly without damage. Using
(b) bearings a hammer and bolster to cut blocks may
resilient layer from the main structure Bearings onto masonry should be 90mm
and surrounding walls cause significant damage.
minimum. Bearings onto steelwork should
The structural component of floors be 75mm minimum. (h) trimmed openings
between dwellings may be concrete, steel, Large openings for staircases and
Bearings should be solid and level. Any chimneys may require openings to be
timber or a combination of these materials.
open frogs in brickwork should be filled. trimmed. Specifications and drawings
The floor finish should be isolated from should be followed.
walls and skirtings. (c) setting out of beams
When setting out beam and block floors, Steel trimmer shoes may be used to trim
Proprietary floating floor materials use the infill blocks as spacers to ensure openings.
and systems should be fixed strictly in correct spacing between beams.
accordance with the manufacturer’s and Doubled beams are common around
any relevant certification requirements trimmed openings, and should be propped
and Building Regulations. until all voids have been solidly concreted
and the concrete has reached its design
Where board materials are laid loose, all strength.
joints in tongued and grooved boards
should be glued. (i) cracked or broken components
Beams, planks or infill blocks that are
cracked should not be used.
infill blocks used as
spacers to make sure beams
are positioned correctly

(j) clips for suspended ceiling
Some designs include metal ceiling clips Appendix 6.4-A
inserted between the planks or blocks so
that timber battens can be fixed below. Span tables for solid timber
planks marked with
position of clips floor joists
Tables 1 and 2 in this Appendix are derived
from a TRADA Technology Ltd. publication
“Span tables for solid timber members in
floors, ceilings and roofs (excluding trussed
rafter roofs) for dwellings”.
The section sizes of the floor joists given
clips inserted as planks in Tables 1 and 2 should be regularised, or
are being laid
be ALS or CLS to enable floors and ceilings
to be level.
FIRE-STOPPING For upper floors with a 22mm thick
6.4 - S28 Penetrations in floors chipboard decking and 12.5mm
between dwellings shall be fire-stopped. plasterboard ceiling, a dead load of
between 0.25kN/m2 and 0.5kN/m2 may be
The specified method of fire-stopping assumed. Use the centre three columns
should be carried out. There should be no from the tables.
holes or gaps for smoke to penetrate once
the fire-stopping has been installed. Where For timber floors between dwellings, the
downlighters are incorporated in a ceiling dead load of the construction to meet
they should be installed in accordance with acoustic performance is likely to be within
the manufacturer’s instructions the range 0.6kN/m2 to 0.7kN/m2, therefore
use the three right-hand columns.
These tables are based on design criteria
which may permit a deflection of up to
14mm. Floors based on these tables require
strutting in accordance with Sitework
clause 6.4 - S8.
Lightweight non-loadbearing partitions
which weigh no more than 0.8kN (81.5kg)
per metre run and are parallel to the joists
6.4
may be supported by one or two additional
joists placed immediately beneath them.
The partitions should be fixed through the
floor decking into the joist(s) beneath. For
the unshaded areas of Tables 1 and 2 one
additional joist is sufficient; for the shaded
areas, two additional joists are required.
For similar lightweight partitions which run
at right-angles to the joists, the maximum
spans in Tables 1 and 2 should be reduced
by 10%. For all other additional loads, joist
sizes should be designed by an Engineer
in accordance with Technical Requirement
R3.

Table 1 - Permissible clear spans for domestic floor joists - strength class C16
Imposed load not exceeding 1.5 kN/m2
Service Class 1 or 2
Dead Load [kN/m2] excluding self-weight of joist
  Not more than 0.25 More than 0.25 but not more than 0.50 More than 0.50 but not more than 1.25
Size of joist Spacing of joists [mm]
  400 450 600 400 450 600 400 450 600
Breadth [mm] Depth [mm] Maximum clear span [m]
38 97 1.84 1.70 1.31 1.73 1.56 1.22 1.43 1.31 1.04
38 122 2.49 2.39 1.94 2.38 2.23 1.76 1.96 1.80 1.45
38 147 3.00 2.88 2.52 2.86 2.72 2.35 2.46 2.30 1.88
38 170 3.46 3.33 2.89 3.30 3.12 2.70 2.82 2.66 2.28
38 195 3.96 3.78 3.28 3.75 3.54 3.07 3.21 3.03 2.62
38 220 4.46 4.23 3.67 4.20 3.96 3.44 3.59 3.39 2.93
47 97 2.03 1.92 1.59 1.93 1.82 1.47 1.67 1.53 1.23

47 122 2.68 2.57 2.31 2.56 2.46 2.10 2.27 2.09 1.70
47 147 3.22 3.09 2.80 3.08 2.96 2.62 2.74 2.58 2.18
47 170 3.71 3.57 3.21 3.55 3.42 3.00 3.14 2.96 2.56
C16
47 195 4.25 4.09 3.64 4.07 3.91 3.41 3.56 3.36 2.91
47 220 4.75 4.61 4.08 4.58 4.39 3.82 3.99 3.76 3.26
63 97 2.33 2.21 1.93 2.20 2.09 1.83 1.94 1.85 1.54

63 122 2.95 2.84 2.58 2.82 2.71 2.46 2.54 2.44 2.10
63 147 3.54 3.41 3.10 3.39 3.26 2.96 3.05 2.93 2.59
63 170 4.09 3.93 3.58 3.91 3.77 3.42 3.52 3.39 2.97
63 195 4.67 4.50 4.10 4.48 4.31 3.92 4.03 3.88 3.37
63 220 5.10 4.96 4.61 4.94 4.80 4.41 4.54 4.34 3.77
75 122 3.12 3.00 2.73 2.99 2.88 2.61 2.69 2.59 2.34
75 147 3.75 3.61 3.28 3.59 3.46 3.14 3.23 3.11 2.82
75 170 4.32 4.16 3.79 4.14 3.99 3.63 3.73 3.59 3.23
75 195 4.87 4.73 4.34 4.72 4.56 4.15 4.27 4.11 3.67
75 220 5.32 5.17 4.82 5.15 5.01 4.67 4.77 4.63 4.11
ALS/CLS
38 140 2.86 2.74 2.41 2.73 2.60 2.18 2.34 2.16 1.76
38 184 3.74 3.58 3.11 3.56 3.36 2.91 3.04 2.87 2.48
38 235 4.73 4.50 3.91 4.46 4.21 3.66 3.82 3.60 3.12
Table 2 - Permisible clear spans for domestic floor joists - strength class C24
Imposed load not exceeding 1.5 kN/m2
6.4
Service Class 1 or 2
Dead Load [kN/m2] excluding self-weight of joist

  Not more than 0.25 More than 0.25 but not more than 0.50 More than 0.50 but not more than 1.25
Size of joist Spacing of joists [mm]
  400 450 600 400 450 600 400 450 600
Breadth [mm] Depth [mm] Maximum clear span [m]
38 97 2.03 1.91 1.66 1.92 1.82 1.58 1.70 1.62 1.36
38 122 2.67 2.57 2.30 2.55 2.45 2.17 2.27 2.16 1.88
38 147 3.21 3.09 2.80 3.07 2.95 2.67 2.76 2.65 2.39
38 170 3.71 3.56 3.23 3.55 3.41 3.09 3.18 3.06 2.74
38 195 4.24 4.08 3.71 4.06 3.90 3.54 3.65 3.50 3.12
38 220 4.75 4.60 4.17 4.57 4.40 3.99 4.11 3.95 3.49
47 97 2.24 2.12 1.85 2.12 2.01 1.75 1.87 1.78 1.56

47 122 2.87 2.76 2.50 2.74 2.64 2.39 2.46 2.36 2.09
47 147 3.45 3.31 3.01 3.30 3.17 2.88 2.96 2.85 2.58
47 170 3.98 3.83 3.48 3.81 3.66 3.32 3.42 3.29 2.98
C24
47 195 4.55 4.38 3.98 4.36 4.19 3.81 3.92 3.77 3.41
47 220 5.00 4.86 4.48 4.84 4.70 4.29 4.41 4.24 3.85
63 97 2.52 2.42 2.13 2.41 2.29 2.01 2.12 2.01 1.78

63 122 3.16 3.04 2.76 3.02 2.91 2.64 2.72 2.61 2.37
63 147 3.79 3.65 3.32 3.63 3.49 3.18 3.27 3.14 2.85
63 170 4.37 4.21 3.83 4.19 4.03 3.67 3.77 3.63 3.29
63 195 4.91 4.77 4.39 4.76 4.61 4.20 4.32 4.15 3.77
63 220 5.36 5.21 4.86 5.19 5.05 4.71 4.81 4.67 4.25
75 122 3.34 3.22 2.93 3.20 3.08 2.80 2.88 2.77 2.51
75 147 4.01 3.86 3.52 3.84 3.70 3.37 3.46 3.33 3.03
75 170 4.62 4.45 4.06 4.43 4.27 3.88 4.00 3.84 3.49
75 195 5.12 4.98 4.64 4.96 4.82 4.45 4.57 4.40 4.00
75 220 5.59 5.43 5.07 5.41 5.26 4.91 5.02 4.88 4.51
ALS/CLS
38 140 3.06 2.94 2.67 2.93 2.81 2.55 2.63 2.52 2.25
38 184 4.01 3.85 3.50 3.83 3.69 3.34 3.44 3.31 2.95
38 235 4.98 4.84 4.46 4.82 4.68 4.26 4.39 4.21 3.71

APPENDIX 6.4-B
Protection from corrosion of metal components embedded in masonry
Metal components, other than wall ties built into masonry, should be made of a material listed below and protected in the way described in
Table 1. Reference should be made to Table 2 for guidance on which category of material and protection to use.
Table 1 - Materials for metal support and restraint components and recommended protection levels
Durability Base material Form Grade and standard that should be Protective measures to be carried out after
Category conformed to fabrication
A Hot-dip galvanized low Sheet BS EN 10143:1993 Z1 or Z2, coating type G 600. All external cut edges to be protected using a
carbon steel Minimum mass of coating 600 g/m2 including one-pack chemical-resistant paint conforming to
both sizes. HF1A to HF2F in part 4 of table 4H of BS 5493 :
1977 and modified to give adequate adhesion to
the fixing.*
BS EN 10143:1993, Z1 or Z2, coating type G 275. Coating to be supplied after fabrication to the
Minimum mass of coating 275 g/m2 including external surfaces and consisting of either:
both sides. (a) bituminous solution complying with types 1 or
2 of BS 3416 and of minimum thickness 25µm;
or
(b) a one-pack chemical-resistant paint
conforming to HF1A to HF2F in part 4 of table 4H
of BS 5493: 1977 and modified to give adequate
adhesion to the fixing.*
Where the zinc is removed on internal surfaces
during the fabrication, e.g. by welding, further
protection should be applied to these areas.
B Low carbon steel Strip BS EN 10111 Post-galvanising conforming to BS EN ISO 1461.
Minimum mass of coating of 920 g/m2 including
BS EN 10025:1993 both sides, i.e. 460 g/m2 on any surface.
grade S275JO
C Low carbon steel Strip BS EN 10111 Post-galvanising conforming to BS EN ISO 1461.
Minimum mass of coating of 1880 g/m2 including
BS EN 10025:1993 both sides, i.e. 940 g/m2 on any surface.
grade S275JO
D Copper alloys BS EN 1172 Material other than phosphor bronze to be
formed either
BS EN 12167 (a) by bending at dull red heat and allowing to
6.4
cool in still air;
or
(b) by cold forming and subsequently stress relief
annealing at 250°C to 300°C for 30 min to 1 hour.
Effectiveness of stress relieving of cold formed
components to be tested by the supplier using
the mercurous nitrate test described in BS EN
ISO 196.
Austenitic stainless steel Strip, bar, BS EN 10088-1
minimum 18/8 composition rod, tube
and excluding free machining or wire
specifications
E Austenitic stainless steel Strip, bar, BS EN 10088-1  
minimum 18/8 composition rod, tube
and excluding free machining or wire
specifications (molybdenum
chrome nickel alloys only)
*BS 5496:1977 has been proposed for obsolescence and has been partially replaced by BS EN ISO 12944 and BS EN ISO 14713
Reproduced from BS 5628 by permission of BSI.

Table 2 - Protection of metal support and restraint components (including wall ties) built into masonry
Type of component Situation Durability category of exposure given in table 1 (material and recommended protection)
For buildings not exceeding For buildings exceeding For buildings located in an
three storeys three storeys agressive environment (e.g.
coastal sites)
Sliding anchors, anchorages, In contact with, or embedded All categories
bonding continuous support in, an internal wall only
angles, support brackets and
cavity wall ties. In contact with, or embedded C,D or E D or E E
in, an inner leaf of an external
cavity wall
In contact with, or embedded
in, an outer leaf of an
external cavity wall or a
single leaf external wall
Dowels and restraint In contact with, or embedded All categories
straps, joist hangers and in, an internal wall only
reinforcement for non-
structural use In contact with, or embedded A,B,C,D or E A,B,C,D or E E
in, an inner leaf of an external
cavity wall
In contact with, or embedded C,D or E D or E E
in, an outer leaf of an
external cavity wall or a
single leaf external wall
Lintels installed with or All situations As specified in BS 5977-2 for Not normally applicable. If used special precautions may be
without a DPC tray the appropriate type of lintel necessary.
(i.e. installed with or without
a DPC tray)
It is an NHBC recommendation that components in contact with, or embedded in, an inner leaf which is damp or exposed to periodic wettings
(eg below dpc) should be protected in the same way as components in contact with, or embedded in, an outer leaf.
Reproduced from BS5628 by permission of BSI.
INDEX
6.4
B L T
Bearings 3, 6, 8, 12 Levelling 6 Timber, grades and quality 5
Boarding 10, 11 Lightweight partitions 1 Timber floors 4, 5
C M Timber joists 9, 10
Chimneys 3 Masonry partitions 2 Trimming joists 2, 6
Chipboard 11 Metal web joists 7, 8 9, 10
Clearance 6 Moisture 4, 5
Concrete 4, 5, 12 Multiple joists 7
D N
Dead loads 1 Notching 9
Decking 4, 5, 10, 11 O
Drilling 9 Oriented strand board 11
Overlapping joists 10
E
P
End bearings 3
Plywood 11
F
Pre-cast concrete 12
Fire spread 3
Proprietary systems 5, 12
Fire-stopping 13
R
Fixings 4
Reinforcement 5, 12
Floating floors 12
Restraint strapping 3, 5, 9, 12
Flooring 3
S
I
Separating walls 3
Imposed loads 4
Shrinkage 2
In-situ concrete 12
Sound transmission 4, 5
I-joists 7, 8, 9, 10
Span 1, 8
J Strength class 1
Joist hangers 2, 5, 6, 8 Structural steel 3, 5, 7
Joist sizes 1 Strutting 2, 5, 8
Joist spacing 1, 4, 6 Supporting structure 1

Chapter 6.5
Steelwork
6.5 Steelwork
CONTENTS SCOPE
DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter gives guidance on meeting Technical

Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for steelwork to
Structural design D2 1
support masonry partitions, timber floors and to trim
floor voids.
Padstones D3 1
MATERIALS
Steelwork M2 1
Padstones M3 1
Connections M4 1
SITEWORK
Steelwork S2-S3 2
APPENDIX 6.5-A
Design tables for support of 2
masonry partitions (no floor
loads)
Table 1 - Load of partition to be 2
supported
Table 2 - Size of steel beam 2
supporting partition
Table 3 - Size of padstone 3
APPENDIX 6.5-B
6.5
Design tables for support of floors (no 3

masonry partition loads)
Table 4 - Size of steel beam supporting 4
floor
Table 5 - Size of padstone 4
APPENDIX 6.5-C
Connection of beams supporting 5
floors
INDEX 5

Steelwork 6.5
(d) steelwork to steelwork connection approved by a European Committee for
DESIGN STANDARDS Connections between steel beams should Standardisation (CEN).
be designed.
Requirements Where appropriate, steelwork beam-to- STEELWORK
Design that follows the guidance below will beam connections should be in accordance 6.5 - M2 Steelwork shall be of sufficient
be acceptable for steelwork supporting with Appendix 6.5-C. strength and durability
either masonry partitions or floors. Appendix 6.5-C uses bolted connections Steelwork will be acceptable if it complies
(using black bolts) or welding. Connections with Clause M1 above and is based on:
STRUCTURAL DESIGN requiring the use of other forms of BS 4 Part 1 Structural steel sections :
connection (such as high strength friction Specification for hot-rolled
6.5 - D2 Steelwork shall be designed
grip bolts) should be designed by an sections, or
to support and transmit loads to the
supporting structure without undue BS 4848 Specification for hot-rolled
Requirement R5.
movement or deflection structural steel sections.
Steelwork (including its support and any (e) durability
Steelwork should be given a protective To ensure durability, steelwork should be
connections) should be either:
coating system to ensure durability. For given a protective coating system. For
• designed by an Engineer in accordance
details, refer to Sitework clause 6.5-S3. steelwork which is to be bolted (using black
with Technical Requirement R5, or
bolts) or not connected, an acceptable
• where appropriate, detailed according to (f) fire resistance
the designs shown in this Chapter. coating system is one coat of high build
Steelwork should be provided with the zinc phosphate primer and one coat of
The designs shown in this Chapter are level of fire resistance required by Building bituminous paint. Where welding is to be
in accordance with BS 5950 using grade Regulations. carried out, use the protective coating
43 steel and therefore meet statutory system specified by the designer.
requirements. PADSTONES
It should be noted that the information 6.5 - D3 Padstones shall distribute PADSTONES
given in this Chapter has been prepared point loads safely to the supporting 6.5 - M3 Padstones shall distribute
primarily to assist builders in providing structure point loads safely to the supporting
proper support to masonry partitions and
floors. The designs given will not always be Where a steel beam is supported by structure
the most economic and an engineer may masonry, a padstone may be required Details of padstones are given in Table 3,
be able to design a smaller section beam to spread the load over a sufficiently Appendix 6.5-A and Table 5, Appendix 6.5-B.
for a particular situation. large area of the masonry to prevent For the design of padstones see Design
overstressing. A padstone may be section, clause D2.
Items to be taken into account include: necessary (see Table 3, Appendix 6.5-A and
(a) support of masonry partitions Table 5, Appendix 6.5-B for sizes).
CONNECTIONS
6.5
Where appropriate, masonry partitions
may be supported by steelwork selected in Where the inner leaf is used to provide
6.5 - M4 Connections shall be chosen
accordance with Appendix 6.5-A. a major contribution to the thermal
to be capable of supporting and
insulation of a cavity wall, any padstone
Care should be taken during construction transmitting the intended loads
that is needed should have similar thermal
to avoid the problem of out-of-true properties to the masonry used for the Connections should comply with the
masonry being only partly supported by rest of the inner leaf or precautions should design. Bolts will be acceptable if they
steelwork. be taken to prevent cold bridging. comply with the design and are based on
(b) support of floors the relevant British Standards, including:
Timber floors can be supported by steelwork. BS 4190 Specification for ISO metric
black hexagon bolts, screws
Where appropriate, steelwork should be in MATERIALS STANDARDS and nuts
accordance with Appendices 6.5-B and 6.5-C.
6.5 - M1 All materials shall: BS 4395 Specification for high
The timber floor should be in accordance (a)meet the Technical Requirements strength friction grip bolts
with Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete (b)take account of the design and associated nuts and
upper floors’ (each section), including washers for structural
proper allowance for shrinkage of timber engineering
the guidance below will be acceptable
joists supported by steelwork. BS 4604 Specification for the use of
for steelwork supporting either masonry
at least 12mm projection
partitions or floors. high strength friction grip
bolts in structural steelwork.
Materials for steelwork supporting either
masonry partitions or floors shall comply Welded connections should comply with:
with all relevant standards, including those BS 5135 Specification for arc welding
listed below. Where no standard exists, of carbon and carbon-
Technical Requirement R3 applies (see manganese steels.
at least 2mm projection Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards
(c) support of steelwork and Technical Requirements’).
Steelwork may need to be supported on References to British Standards and Codes
padstones to distribute loads safely. of Practice include those made under the
Masonry should be in accordance with Construction Products Directive (89/106/
Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (each EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
section) or Chapter 6.3 ‘Internal walls’ European Technical Specifications
(each section), as appropriate.

6.5 Steelwork
SITEWORK STANDARDS Appendix 6.5-A

DESIGN TABLES FOR SUPPORT OF MASONRY PARTITIONS
(b) take account of the design (no floor loads)
(c) follow established good practice and Steel beams in accordance with the Tables 1, 2 and 3 in this Appendix will be acceptable to
workmanship NHBC for the support of masonry partitions, if:
Construction that follows the design and • the masonry partition is not more than 2.7m in height, and
the guidance below will be acceptable • steel beams only support the weight of the masonry partition and self weight, and
for steelwork supporting either masonry • steel beams span no more than 4.0m, and
partitions or floors. • the masonry partition is built centrally on the steelwork beam, and
• the masonry partition is of one of the types detailed in Table 1, and
STEELWORK • padstones are provided, where required, and
• the masonry supporting the steel beam is of at least 2.8N/mm2 blockwork (workface
6.5 - S2 Steelwork shall be installed size 440mm x 215mm) or brickwork and the beam supports do not occur over a door or
to achieve the required structural window opening.
performance
If any of the above limitations are not met, steelwork should be designed in accordance with
Items to be taken into account include: Technical Requirement R5.
(a) the section size and grade detailed in
the design
When materials are delivered to site, check Method of applying tables
that they conform with either: 1 Check that the situation is within all the limitations detailed above.
• the Engineer’s design, or 2 Identify the masonry partition construction and thickness.
• the steelwork sizes given in the 3 Use Table 1 to establish the load per metre run.
Appendices to this Chapter. 4 Check the span of the beam(s).
5 Use Table 2 to determine a suitable steel section size.
(b) bearings
6 Check whether padstones are required - see Table 3.
Bearings for steelwork should be:
• at least 100mm, and (To help in applying the tables, a worked example is given at the end of this Appendix.)
• clean, dry and level.
Padstones may be required in accordance Table 1 - Load of partition to be supported
with:
• the Engineer’s design, or Type of masonry for supported Maximum masonry density Structural thickness [mm]
partition (not more than 2.7m high [kg/m3]
• the guidance given in Table 3, Appendix 100 90 75
and plastered both sides)
6.5-A and Table 5, Appendix 6.5-B.
Load [kN/m run]
6.5
(c) connections Dense masonry 2000 6.8 6.2 5.4

Where steelwork-to-steelwork connections
are required, follow either: Medium masonry 1400 5.1 4.8 4.2
• the Engineer’s design, or Lightweight masonry 800 3.5 3.3 2.9
• the guidance given in Appendix 6.5-C.
Only weld, cut or drill steelwork if it is
required by the design. Table 2 - Size of steel beam supporting partition
6.5 - S3 Steelwork shall be protected to Partition load (from Table 1) Clear span of beam Smallest suitable Universal Beam size
[kN/m run] [m] [mm x mm x kg/m]
achieve the required durability
Less than 3 up to 4 127 x 76 x 13
To ensure durability, steelwork should be
over 4 see Note 2
given a protective coating system.
3 to 5 up to 3 127 x 76 x 13
For steelwork which is to be bolted 3 to 3.5 152 x 89 x 16
(using black bolts), or not connected, an 3.5 to 4 178 x 102 x 19
acceptable coating system is one coat of over 4 see Note 2
high build zinc phosphate primer and one 5 to 7 up to 2.5 127 x 76 x 13
coat of bituminous paint. 2.5 to 3 152 x 89 x 16
3 to 4 178 x 102 x 19
Where steelwork is to be protected by
over 4 see Note 2
intumescent paint for fire purposes,
manufacturers’ recommendations should
be followed. Notes to Table 2
1 For spans up to 4m, Universal Column 152mm x 152mm x 23kg/m, which is the smallest
STEELWORK - UNGALVANIZED size available, may be used.
Internal and external steelwork that has 2 For spans over 4m, beams should be designed by an Engineer in accordance with
not been galvanized should be protected Technical Requirement R5.
with at least:
• two coats of zinc phosphate primer, and
• a suitable decorative finish where required.
STEELWORK - GALVANIZED
Unless steelwork is galvanized to a rate
of 460g/m2, it should be protected as
described for ungalvanized.

Steelwork 6.5
Table 3 - Size of padstone Appendix 6.5-B
Type of masonry for Thickness of wall supporting beam [mm]
supported partition (not
Minimum
depth of
DESIGN TABLES FOR
100 125 140 150 190 215
more than 2.7m high and
plastered both sides) Min length of padstone [mm]
padstone [mm] SUPPORT OF FLOORS
Dense masonry 215 190 185 180 165 155 150
(no masonry partition loads)
Medium masonry 155 140 135 130 120 110 150
Limitations
Steel beams in accordance with Tables 4
Lightweight masonry 95 85 80 75 70 70 150 and 5 in this Appendix will be acceptable to
NHBC for the support of floors, if:
Notes to Table 3 • the floor construction is of decking
1 Padstones are not necessary where the flange dimension of the beam exceeds the length (softwood boarding, chipboard, oriented
of the padstone given in this table. strand board or plywood) on timber
2 When steelwork is in line with the wall supporting it (ie when acting as a lintel over an joists with a plasterboard ceiling
opening): underneath which is given either a
• the flange dimension of the beam should not be more than 50mm greater than the plaster skim coat or a plastic finish
thickness of the supporting wall, and (Artex or similar), and
• the minimum length of padstone should be 200mm, and • allowance has been made of 0.5kN/m2
• the padstone depth should match the coursing of adjacent masonry, and for self weight (floor and ceiling load)
• the web of the beam should be over the centre of the wall. and
3 The minimum length of steel bearing onto padstone should be 100mm. • the floor does not support masonry
4 Padstones can be formed from: partitions, and
• in-situ concrete • any lightweight partition (such as
• precast concrete plasterboard on timber studwork or
• concrete blocks proprietary product) is non-loadbearing,
• clay bricks. and
Padstones should be formed in one unit with a minimum compressive strength of 10N/mm2. • padstones are provided, where required,
and
For padstone sizes less than 215mm x 100mm, engineering bricks will be suitable. • clear span of beam does not exceed
4.4m, and
wall supported by steel beam
Worked Example -75mm thick • connections between steelwork beams
-medium density (1200kg/m3)
-plastered both sides are in accordance with Appendix 6.5-C
-2.6m high
or are designed by an Engineer, and
• the floor support is one of the methods
shown in Figure 1.
6.5
outer
padstone
If any of the above limitations are not
met, steelwork should be designed by an
inner
padstone Requirement R5.
100mm steel beam
-opening 3.8m
-min 100mm bearing
at each end
100mm
Method of applying tables
Procedure
1 Using information about the supported wall and Table 1: 1 Check that the situation is within all the
• load per metre run = 4.2kN/m. limitations detailed above.
2 Using the load per metre run, the span of the beam and Table 2: 2 Using Figure 1, determine the area
• suitable section size = 178 x 102 x 19 UB (The alternative 152 x 152 x 23 UC is not supported by the beam(s).
suitable as it is too wide for the inner padstone/wall.) 3 Check the span of the beam(s).
3 Using information about the wall supporting the beam (100mm thick), the walls supported 4 Use Table 4 to determine a suitable steel
by the beam (medium density block) and Table 3: section size.
• minimum padstone size = 155mm long 5 Check whether padstones are required
= 150mm deep by Table 5.
• outer padstone (beam at right angles to wall): 6 If steel beam-to-steel beam connections
- minimum length = 155mm are required, use Appendix 6.5-C.
(as this is greater than the flange dimension of the steel section obtained in 2 above
- 102mm - a padstone is required to distribute the load)
- minimum depth = 150mm
- thickness = 100mm, to match blockwork
(The actual length and depth of a padstone could be greater to suit masonry coursing.)
• inner padstone (beam in line with the wall):
- minimum length = 200mm (see Note 2 to Table 3)
- minimum depth = 150mm
- thickness = 100mm, to match blockwork.
Note
Beam supports should not occur above window or door openings

6.5 Steelwork
Figure 1 - Effective areas supported by Table 4 - Size of steel beam supporting floor
steel beams Effective Effective Smallest suitable steel section size
If any area shown as ‘void’ contains a staircase, add 2m2 to the area trimmer span (mm x mm x kg/m)
effective area supported by any beam which supports (partially or supported = clear span
(m2) + 100mm (m) Universal beam Universal column
fully) that staircase.
0 to 20 0 to 2.0 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
B
0 to 20 2 to 2.5 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
20 to 30 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
0 to 10 2.5 to 3 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
10 to 20 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
A A
20 to 30 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
wall wall
under under
B 0 to 10 3 to 3.5 127 x 76 x 13 152 x 152 x 23
A A 10 to 30 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
30 to 40 203 x 133 x 25 152 x 152 x 30
0 to 10 3.5 to 4 152 x 89 x 16 152 x 152 x 23
Beam Effective area Beam Effective area 10 to 20 178 x 102 x 19 152 x 152 x 23
AA AA +
20 to 30 203 x 102 x 23 152 x 152 x 23
30 to 40 203 x 102 x 30 152 x 152 x 30
BB 40 to 50 see Note 1 152 x 152 x 37
0 to 10 4 to 4.5 203 x 102 x 23 152 x 152 x 23
10 to 20 203 x 133 x 25 152 x 152 x 23
20 to 30 203 x 133 x 30 152 x 152 x 30
30 to 40 see Note 1 152 x 152 x 37
40 to 50 see Note 1 203 x 203 x 46
Note to Table 4
A A A A
B B 1 Beams should be designed by an Engineer in accordance with
void void Technical Requirement R5.
B B
Beam Effective area Beam Effective area

Table 5 - Size of padstone
AA + AA
Effective area Minimum padstone size [mm]
BB BB supported
(as used in Table 4) Thickness of wall supporting steel beam [mm]
B C B C [m2] Up to 105 105 to 155 156 to 216
6.5
length depth length depth length depth

Up to 10 95 150 80 150 70 150
10 to 20 185 150 160 150 140 150
20 to 30 275 150 240 150 210 150
A A A A
30 to 40 365 215 320 150 280 150
void void
B C B C 40 to 50 455 300 400 215 345 215
Beam Effective area Beam Effective area

AA AA
Notes to Table 5
1 See limitations listed at the beginning of this Appendix.
BB + BB
2 Padstones are not necessary where the flange dimension of the
CC + CC
beam exceeds the length of the padstone given in this table.
3 Where the steelwork is in line with the wall supporting it (ie
acting to form a lintel over an opening):
• the steel flange dimension should not be more than 50mm
greater than the thickness of the supporting wall, and
• the minimum length of padstone should be 200mm, and
• the padstone depth should match the coursing of adjacent
masonry, and
• the web of the beam should be over the centre of the wall.
4 Padstones can be formed from:
• in-situ concrete
• precast concrete
• concrete blocks
• clay bricks.
Padstones should be formed in one unit with a minimum
compressive strength of 10N/mm2.
For padstone sizes less than 215mm x 100mm, engineering bricks
will be suitable.

Steelwork 6.5
Appendix 6.5-C
INDEX
Connection of beams
B M
supporting floors Beams 2, 4 Masonry partitions, support 1, 2
The connection methods shown in this Bearings 2 P
Appendix (determined using Appendix 6.5-
Bolted connections 1 Padstones 1, 3, 4
B) are suitable for connecting steel beams
used to support floor loads C Partitions 2
Clear span 4 Point loads 1
25mm
Coatings 1, 2 Protection 2
maximum 170mm
cleats from 70 x 70 x 6 rolled

= steel angle (one each side) Cold bridging 1 S
at least
80mm cleats joined to beams with Connections 1, 2, 5 Section size 2
= 3 No M20 bolts with washers
or 6mm fillet weld all round D Staircase 4
Design, structural 1 Support 1, 2, 3
maximum 10mm
Durability 1, 2 T
JOINT BETWEEN BEAMS OF SIMILAR SIZE
(neither beam deeper than 170mm) E Timber floors 1
Effective areas 4 V
25mm F Voids 4
Fire resistance 1 W
35mm
170mm to 230mm
cleats from 70 x 70 x 6 rolled

steel angle (one each side) Floors, support 1, 3 Welding 1, 2
50mm cleats joined to beams with G
6 No M20 bolts with washers
or 6mm fillet weld all round Galvanized steel 2
35mm
Grade 2
I
maximum 10mm
Intumescent paint 2
JOINT BETWEEN BEAMS OF SIMILAR SIZE
(beams 170mm to 230mm deep)
Limitations
Limitations on the use of this method are:
• neither beam is to support masonry
partitions, and
• both beams have been chosen from
6.5
Table 4 of Appendix 6.5-B, and
• beams do not differ in depth by more
than 40mm.
The following connections should be
with Technical Requirement R5:
• between steel sections which differ in
depth by more than 40mm, or
• between steel sections, one of which
carries floor loads and one of which
carries a masonry partition, or
• between steel sections which have not
been derived using Appendix 6.5-B, or
• between steel sections which both carry
masonry partitions.

Chapter 6.6
Staircases
6.6 Staircases
CONTENTS SCOPE
Requirements and recommendations for staircases.
Staircase width and headroom D4 1
Design of steps D5 1
Landings D6 2
Handrails D7 2
Guarding D8 2
Fire Precautions D9 2
Lighting D10 2
MATERIALS
Staircase units M2 3
Timber and wood-based products M3 3
In-situ and precast concrete M4 3
Fixings M5 3
SITEWORK
Location and fixing S2 3
6.6
Timber staircases S3-S4 3-4

Concrete staircases S5-S7 4
Steel staircases S8-S9 4
Handrails and balustrades S10-S11 4
Protection of finished work S12 5
APPENDIX 6.6-A
Design aid for rise and going 6
INDEX 7

Staircases 6.6
DESIGN STANDARDS STAIRCASE WIDTH AND going (G) should usually be related so that
2R+G is between 550mm and 700mm.
HEADROOM
6.6 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical A design aid giving the relationship
Requirements 6.6 - D4 Staircase design shall ensure between rise and going is given in
adequate provision for: Appendix 6.6-A.
be acceptable for staircases. (a) headroom
Further information on staircase design
The minimum headroom above stairs
may be found in BS 5395.
should be measured vertically from the
STATUTORY pitch line. The clear headroom (h) over (b) consistent rise and going
REQUIREMENTS the entire length and width of a stairway, In each flight of stairs all the steps should
including landings, should be 2.0m. have the same rise and going.
relevant statutory requirements The thicknesses of screeds and floor
Design should be in accordance with finishes should be taken into account.
h
landing
SAFE TRANSMISSION OF h
unequal rises
do not comply
LOADS
6.6 - D3 Design shall ensure that pitch
line
loads are properly supported and
transmitted to the supporting structure (c) tapered treads and winders
without undue movement, deflection or The rise of tapered treads should be the
deformation same as that of adjacent parallel treads.
(b) minimum unobstructed width The going should be uniform and not less
Generally, all stairs and staircases should No recommendations are given for than the going of the associated straight
comply with BS 5395 : Parts 1 and 2. minimum widths in England, Wales and the flight. The going should be measured from
Isle of Man. Where staircases form part the centre line of the straight flight (as
of means of escape, reference should be shown below).
(a) timber staircase construction
made to the relevant Building Regulations.
Timber domestic staircases with straight
flights and quarter- or half-landings should Dimensions for stair widths in Scotland and
comply with BS 585. Particular attention Northern Ireland should be in accordance equal
should be paid to the performance with relevant Statutory Requirements. going centre
line
requirements for strength, deflection and
vibration under load, given in BS 585 :
6.6
Part 2.
DESIGN OF STEPS
6.6 - D5 The design of steps shall allow g
The method of fixing flights to the safe use of the staircase
surrounding structure should be specified.
(b) concrete staircase construction (a) pitch centre
Reinforced concrete staircases should The maximum angle of pitch of a stairway line
be designed to BS 8110 and comply with should not exceed:
Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its reinforcement’ • 42° for private stairs
(each section) and, where appropriate, Minimum going (g) [mm]
• 38° for common or access stairs.
designed by an Engineer in accordance England and Wales 50
with Technical Requirement R5. Scotland 50
(c) steel staircase construction Northern Ireland 50
pitch
Steel staircases should be designed to BS line Isle of Man 50
5950.
(d) proprietary staircase construction angle
(d) safe foothold
Proprietary staircases should:
of pitch All steps should have level treads.
• comply with an assessment in Stairs with open risers should have treads
accordance with Technical Requirement that overlap 16mm minimum.
R3
• be suitable for their required use and The dimensions for maximum rise and
location. minimum going should be: overlap
all gaps
(e) differential movement less then
Type of stairs Maximum Minimum 100mm
When considering differential movement in rise [mm] going [mm]
relation to setting out, levels and finishes,
Private stairs 220 220
allowances should be made for:
• casting tolerances Common stairs 190 250
(not Scotland) Where stairs are open to the weather or
• deflection under load
• foundation settlement Access stairs 190 250 may otherwise become wet, a non-slip
• creep and shrinkage (Scotland) finish or an insert to each tread should be
• storey height. specified.
The dimensions of the rise (R) and the

6.6 Staircases
LANDINGS • that handrail ends do not project to should comply with the relevant Building
catch clothing, etc. Regulations.
6.6 - D6 Landings shall be designed to
allow safe use of the staircase Ventilation of staircases serving flats in
GUARDING buildings of three or more storeys should
Landings should be provided at the top comply with BS 5588.
6.6 - D8 Guarding shall be designed to
and bottom of every flight. The width and
prevent accidents by falling
depth of landings should be at least the
same as the width of the stair. Items to be taken into account include: LIGHTING
(a) resistance to loads 6.6 - D10 Lighting shall be provided to
Landings should be properly framed to
Guarding should be: ensure safe use of the staircase
provide full support and secure fixings for
flights, nosings, newels, etc. • capable of resisting a horizontal force Artificial light sources should be provided
of 0.36kN/m at its minimum required to all staircases and landings. Within
Where pivot windows are being used, they height dwellings, lighting to stairs should be
should not obstruct the landing area or • a solid wall or balustrading. controlled by two way switching.
stair flight when in the open position.
Where guardrails or balustrades are long, Where the Public Lighting Authority
Generally, door swings should not obstruct the newel posts may not be sufficient to specify and maintain control of entrance
landings. However, a door may open across transfer horizontal forces to the structure lighting, their requirements should be
the bottom landing of a flight of private and intermediate posts may be needed. met. Otherwise, landings and staircases
stairs if the swing is at least 400mm from in common areas to dwellings should be
the first tread and the dwelling is not over The method of fixing newels should be
specified (eg through-bolted to joists). provided with adequate artificial lighting.
two storeys high. Manual two way switching, controlled by
Any glazing in the guarding should be people using these areas is acceptable.
bottom
landing toughened or laminated glass, or glass Automatic light sensitive controls may be
blocks. Wired glass is not regarded as safe used, provided lights can also be switched
for this purpose and should not be used. two way manually.
at least
400mm
(b) dimensional requirements Reference should be made to Chapter
Guarding should be provided along the 8.1 ‘Internal services’ (Design) for further
full length of the open sides of all stairs details on lighting.
and landings when the drop is more than
600mm at any point. To comply with Where staircases are lit by glazing, any
HANDRAILS relevant Building Regulations, guarding glass below the minimum height of
may be required where a stair abuts an guarding (see Table to Clause D8(b))
6.6 - D7 Handrails shall be designed to
opening window. should be:
provide a safe handhold
• protected by a balustrade or railing, or
A handrail is required to all flights of stairs Guarding is not needed when the rise is • glass (toughened or laminated), or
6.6
that rise over 600mm. less than 600mm and when the stair or • constructed of glass blocks.
landing is not a means of escape.
Where winders are used, Building Regulations
(Northern Ireland) require a handrail to be Balustrading should be designed so that it PROVISION OF
fitted on the side where tapered treads have is not easily climbed by children. INFORMATION
the greater going.
No opening in the balustrade should 6.6 - D11 Designs and specifications
be large enough for a 100mm diameter shall be produced in a clearly
sphere to pass through. understandable format and include all
Type of stairs Minimum guarding
Usually, staircase drawings and
height [mm]
specifications should show:
flights landings • layout of stairs
Private stairs 900 900 • dimensions covering width, rise and
(England, going, handrail height, etc
Wales, Northern • fixings of stairs, treads, risers, strings,
Ireland balustrades, newel posts and handrails,
and the Isle of Man)
as appropriate
at least Private stairs 840 900
25mm • the length of time before formwork can
(Scotland)
be removed from in-situ concrete stairs
Common stairs 900 1100 • whether precast concrete or steel
staircases can be used immediately
FIRE PRECAUTIONS after erection or whether time should be
allowed to cure grouted connections.
Handrails should be at a height between 6.6 - D9 Staircases shall provide the
900mm (840mm in Scotland) and necessary means of escape in case of 6.6 - D12 All relevant information shall
1000mm. fire be distributed to appropriate personnel
Design should ensure: Timber staircases are acceptable within Ensure that design and specification
• a firm handhold a single family dwelling where there are information is issued to site supervisors
• that trapping or injuring the hand is no more than four storeys, excluding the and relevant specialist subcontractors
prevented basement. and/or suppliers.
• a minimum 25mm clearance at the back
Houses of three or more storeys and
of the handrail
flats in buildings of three or more storeys
• secure fixing

Staircases 6.6
(b) plywood the entire length and width of a stairway,
MATERIALS STANDARDS Plywood should be used only for risers and including landings, should be 2.0m.
should comply with BS EN 636.
(a) meet with Technical Requirements (c) chipboard
(b) take account of the design Chipboard should comply with Type P5 of
Materials that comply with the design and BS EN 312. h
the guidance below will be acceptable for landing

(d) oriented strand board
staircases.
Oriented strand board should comply with h
Materials for staircases should comply Type OSB3 of BS EN 300.
with all relevant standards, including those
listed below. Where no standard exists, (e) medium density fibreboard pitch
line
Technical Requirement R3 applies (see Fibre building boards should comply with
Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards BS 1142 : Part 2.
and Technical Requirements’).
(f) laminated timber
References to British Standards and Codes Glued laminated timber structural (b) overall vertical rise
of Practice include those made under the members should comply with BS 4169. Staircases are normally manufactured off
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ site so the floor-to-floor dimensions should
be accurate. An allowance should be made
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate IN-SITU AND PRECAST for floor finishes to structural floors or
CONCRETE staircase treads.
Standardisation (CEN). 6.6 - M4 Concrete shall be of the (c) pitch
mix proportions to achieve adequate Staircases should be accurately located
STAIRCASE UNITS strength as required by the design and fixed with the string at the correct
6.6 - M2 Proprietary staircases Reference should be made to Chapter 2.1 angle so all treads are horizontal.
and associated components shall ‘Concrete and its reinforcement’ (Design
and Materials) for guidance on concrete, (d) landings
comply with the design and Technical Landings, where required, should be
Requirements reinforcement and additives.
properly framed to provide full support
Where proprietary staircases or to and secure fixings for flights, nosings,
associated components are proposed,
FIXINGS newels, apron linings, etc.
they should meet the statutory and design 6.6 - M5 Fixings shall be of adequate
(e) floor finishes
requirements for stairs, as detailed in the strength and durability and comply with
Allowance should be made for stair and
drawings and/or specification. the design
floor finishes to ensure that all risers are
Fixings should be checked for compliance
6.6
Manufacturers of staircases and equal.
balustrading, etc should be sent all with the design and whether they are
relevant drawings and other information provided by the supplier, especially for:
stair
to ensure their products meet the design • timber and steel staircases finish
requirements. • newel posts

• handrails
Allowance should be made for tolerances • guarding and balustrading.
all risers
equal
or actual site dimensions.
TIMBER AND WOOD-BASED SITEWORK STANDARDS floor

PRODUCTS finish

6.6 - M3 Timber and wood-based
materials shall be of sufficient quality
and durability for use in staircases
(c) follow established good practice and TIMBER STAIRCASES
Items to be taken into account include: workmanship
(a) timber 6.6 - S3 Timber staircases shall:
Construction that follows the design and (a) have secure component parts,
Timber for joinery should:
the guidance below will be acceptable for including strings, treads and risers,
• comply with BS 1186 : Part 1
staircases. newel posts, balusters and handrails
• be Class 3 or better, and
• be free of resinous knots, splits, shakes (b) be securely fixed to the supporting
and wanes. LOCATION AND FIXING structure
Fits of joints, construction of joints, moving 6.6 - S2 Staircases shall be correctly Strings should be glued to newel posts and
parts, glueing, laminating, construction of located and fixed secured with dowels or screws. Particular
finger joints and surface finish should be to attention should be given to winders;
BS 1186 : Part 2. remedying problems, such as deflection
(a) headroom
and/or squeaking, can be difficult,
Timber which is to be exposed to the The overall floor opening should be
especially if the soffit covering has been
weather should be suitably durable or checked for size to accept the stairs and to
fixed.
be pre-treated with preservative against allow sufficient headroom.
fungal attack in accordance with Chapter Landings should be framed to provide full
The minimum headroom above stairs
2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid support and solid fixings for the tops of
should be measured vertically from the
timber)’. flights, nosings, newels, apron linings, etc.
pitch line. The clear headroom (h) over

6.6 Staircases
Newel posts should be plumb and fixed Minimum

securely. cover [mm]
The top nosing should be level with the Internal staircases 25
floor decking and should be fixed firmly. Staircases open to the weather 50
nosing securely seated
and fixed level with
floor decking
(b) allowance for nosings and any cast-in
finishes
Allowance should be made for pre-formed
nosings or non-slip finishes, if specified
(see also Clause S5).
at least
(c) correct striking of formwork 25mm
Formwork should be struck in accordance
with the design, normally:
string securely • side formwork - after 24 hours
fixed to wall • soffit and support formwork - after 28
days.
6.6 - S11 Balustrading shall be securely
6.6 - S7 Appropriate measures shall be fixed and constructed to reduce the risk
taken when concreting in cold weather of it being climbed up or fallen through
6.6 - S4 Finished joinery shall be free
from unsightly blemishes Reference should be made to Chapter 1.4 Statutory regulations require that
‘Cold weather working’ when concrete, balustrading:
Finished joinery should be free from splits,
mortar, grout or other materials containing • is fixed securely
knocks and other damage which would
water are used. • cannot be easily climbed, and
impair its structural performance or finish.
• has no gaps which would allow a 100mm
Handrails should have a smooth finish, free STEEL STAIRCASES diameter sphere to pass through.
from rough edges. No handrail bracket or
screw head should present a sharp edge. 6.6 - S8 The supporting structure shall
be accurately set out to receive steel
Nails should be punched below the surface staircases
of the wood and stopped.
The supporting structure should be
constructed within the tolerance limits
CONCRETE STAIRCASES set for the steel staircase. Treads should
6.6 - S5 The structure shall be set be checked for level. The correct fixings
out and constructed to ensure that should be available.
6.6
staircases are correctly located and

6.6 - S9 All work shall be carried
levelled 100mm diameter spheres
out strictly in accordance with cannot pass through gaps
PRECAST CONSTRUCTION manufacturers’ instructions
When setting out levels, account should
Manufacturers’ assembly and erection
be taken of the thickness of finishes to the
instructions should be available and
floor or landing, as well as any finish to be
followed. In concrete staircases, balustrading may be:
applied to the stair treads. Particular care
• grouted into pre-formed holes or
is needed at the top and bottom of each
flight. HANDRAILS AND pockets
• bolted or screwed into pre-drilled holes
Precast units should be accurately located
BALUSTRADES • bolted to brackets cast into the concrete.
and levelled. 6.6 - S10 A handrail shall be correctly Fixing methods for balustrading should
located and fixed to provide a safe allow a degree of tolerance. It may be
IN-SITU CONSTRUCTION handhold
Shuttering for in-situ concrete elements preferable to take measurements from
or connections should be accurately A handrail should be provided for any flight the completed staircase, whether of
constructed to ensure a consistent rise that rises 600mm or more. The handrail in-situ or precast construction, before
and going. should be fixed between 900mm (840mm manufacturing the balustrading. This will
in Scotland) and 1000mm vertically above ensure that the fixings are positioned
FLOOR FINISHES the pitch line. correctly and allow for variations in the
For both precast and in-situ staircases, surrounding structure.
allowance should be made for the The ends of the handrail should be shaped
or returned to the wall to prevent clothes Design details on the spacing of bolt
thickness of finish at the top and bottom
catching on projections. fixings for balustrades or handrails should
of flights.
be followed.
Throughout its whole length the handrail
6.6 - S6 Concrete staircases shall be
should be:
constructed to provide satisfactory final
• fixed securely
performance • continuous
Items to be taken into account include: • smooth and unobstructed
(a) correct placing of reinforcement to • at least 25mm from any surface.
give the required cover
Check that fixing and location are in
Chairs or spacing blocks should be used
accordance with the design.
to give the following minimum cover to
reinforcement:

Staircases 6.6
Care should be taken when using
expanding fixings near the edges of
concrete (whether in-situ or precast).
dimensions
should be
sufficient to
avoid fracture
PROTECTION OF FINISHED
WORK
6.6 - S12 On completion, staircases
shall be undamaged, fixed properly and
suitable for handover
When stored, staircases should be stacked
on bearers. Wood staircases should be
stored under cover and be fixed in place
only when the building is weathertight.
Staircases, stair treads, nosings,
balustrades and handrails may be protected
with timber strips, plywood or building
paper. Plastic sheeting should not be used
to protect stairs because it gives a slippery
surface which is not safe to walk on.
6.6
treads and
nosings protected

6.6 Staircases
Appendix 6.6-A
Design aid for rise and going
Rise and going which intersect within the relevant shaded areas meet the criteria 2R+G between 550mm and 700mm.
220
244
210
200
198
243
190
187
180
170
Rise
160
[mm]
150
140
130
120
6.6
110
100
220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380
Going
[mm]
Key
Private stairs - whole of shaded area
Common stairs - hatched area only
Based on Figure 11 in BS 5395 : Part 1.

Staircases 6.6
INDEX
B I R
Balusters 3, 4, ,5 In-situ concrete 3, 4 Reinforcement 4
C J Rise 1, 3, 6
Chipboard 3 Joinery 4 S
Concrete 3 L Safety 1, 2
Concrete staircases 1, 4, 5 Landings 1, 2, 3 Steel staircases 1, 4
D Lighting 2 Steps 1
Differential movement 1 Location 3 Straight flights 1
Doors 2 M Strings 3
Durability 3 Means of escape 2 T

F Medium density fibreboard 3 Timber 3
Finish 4 Movement 1 Timber staircases 1, 3
Fire precautions 2 N Treads 1, 3, 4
Fixings 1, 3, 4, ,5 Nosings 3, 4, 5 W
Floor finishes 3, 4 Newel posts 3 Width 1, 3
Formwork 4 O Winders 1
G Oriented strand board 3
Going 1, 6 P
Guarding 2 Pitch 1, 3
H Plywood 3
Handrails 2, 3, 4 Precast concrete 3, 4
Headroom 1, 3 Proprietary staircases 1, 3

Protection 5
6.6

Chapter 6.7
Doors, windows and glazing
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for doors, windows
Statutory requirements D2 1 and glazing.
Environmental factors D3 1
Security D4 1
In service performance D5 1
Resistance to decay D6 2
Glazing D7 2
Provision of information D8 2
MATERIALS
Timber doors and windows M2-M4 3
Non-timber doors and windows M5 3
Ironmongery M6 3
Glazing M7 3
SITEWORK
Protection against damp S2 4
Glazing S4-S5 5
Protection S6 5
INDEX 6
6.7

Doors, windows and glazing 6.7
Multipoint locking systems (espagnolettes) fitted with lockable devices which cannot
DESIGN STANDARDS are alternatives to conventional locks be released without a key
provided they meet with the above • where the windows are required by
requirements. Building Regulations to have background
Requirements
ventilation they may be fitted with
Design that follows the guidance below FLATS AND MAISONETTES trickle ventilators or some other
will be acceptable for doors, windows, and Locks to entrance doors of individual flats means of providing ventilation which is
glazing. and maisonettes of three or more storeys controllable and located to avoid undue
should be openable from the inside by draughts. Windows with ‘night vent’
a single simple manual operation not
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS requiring the use of a key.
positions are not accepted as meeting
these recommendations.
To avoid the possibility of the door
statutory requirements
becoming locked during a fire while one of IN SERVICE PERFORMANCE
Design should be in accordance with the occupants is outside the dwelling the
6.7 - D5 Doors, windows and glazing
relevant Building Regulations and other lock should not have a self locking latch.
statutory requirements. shall be designed and specified to ensure
(b) opening limitation devices to main adequate performance in service
entrance doors
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS A securely fixed opening limitation device
(a) weather resistance
6.7 - D3 Design and selection of doors, should be fitted to main entrance doors. Windows and external doors exposed
windows and glazing shall take account to wind-driven rain may need particular
Opening limitation devices should be fitted
of location and planning requirements protection to ensure they remain
to the entrance doors of individual flats
Items to be taken into account include: and maisonettes. weathertight.
(a) noise control BS 6375 contains recommendations for
In sheltered accommodation opening
Where noise levels are very high, for the classification of window components
limitation devices should be of a type
example near airports or motorways, according to their resistance (under test)
capable of being disengaged from the
it may be advisable to install sound- to air and water penetration, and wind
outside with a key.
insulating windows, usually of special pressure. A similar classification is used by
design and construction. (c) view outside main entrance door BBA for certification of windows.
There should be a means of giving a wide
(b) planning requirements angle view of the area immediately outside Water penetration may occur not only
Local planning authorities may impose the main entrance door of individual between frame and opening leaf or light, but
limitations on the shape, size and choice dwellings. Acceptable ways include: also between the frame and the surrounding
of materials for windows and doors, for • a through-door viewer structure. Vertical and horizontal dpcs
example in conservation areas. • clear glazing either to part of the door should be provided around the frame in
or a convenient window accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External
(c) climatic conditions
6.7
• closed circuit television. masonry walls’ (Design and Sitework).
Climatic conditions, especially wind speed,
together with the required level of window (d) secondary external access doors In Scotland, Northern Ireland and other
performance (eg in relation to air tightness), Secondary external access doors including locations of Very Severe exposure, rebated
may govern the size of glass panes and sliding patio doors should have: reveal construction should be sealed with
opening lights in exposed locations. • a 5-lever lock fixed securely an appropriate sealant.
• bolts fixed securely at both top and Reference should be made to Chapter 6.1
SECURITY bottom of the door on the internal ‘External Masonry Walls’ Appendix 6.1-A for
opening edge. categories of exposure to wind driven rain.
6.7 - D4 Doors, door frames, windows
and locks shall be designed and specified Where multipoint locking systems In all locations where weathertightness
so as to improve their resistance to (espagnolettes) are used bolts may be is likely to be a problem, additional
unauthorised entry omitted. precautions may be needed, such as:
Items to be taken into account include: External sliding doors should be designed • setting the frame back from the facade
(a) locks to main entrance doors to prevent the doors being forced along • fixing the frame behind a rebate in the
DWELLINGS their tracks, being opened by lifting the structural opening (sometimes known as
The main entrance doors of individual door off the latch, and fitted in such a way a ‘check’ reveal)
dwellings should be fitted with one (or that the doors cannot be lifted from their • fixing weather boards and water bars to
more) securely fixed lock and keep which frames from the outside. external doors but ensuring threshold is
complies with BS 3621 or has: accessible where appropriate
Connections between door and/or frame
• at least 1000 differs, and Minimum 12mm
components which can be easily released
• a fixing which, if burst open, would not overlap of masonry
(or render) to frame
from outside should not be used. This
pull out without breaking the door or its
includes accessible screw connections.
frame, and sealant
• a hardened steel bolt or inserts to (e) fittings for windows 25mm
prevent sawing, and Ironmongery for windows should be sealant
• latch and deadlocking facility supplied as follows:
• hinges and fastenings of opening lights
and is preferably openable on the inside water bar and weatherboard ’rebated‘ or ‘check‘ reveal
of windows should be of a type which provided for external doors in areas of Very Severe exposure
by a single simple manual operation not
prevents them from being opened from
requiring the use of a key.
the outside when in the closed position • building a projecting porch
Any glazing which, if open or broken, • opening lights on all ground floor • rain check grooves to inward opening
would permit release of the snib by hand windows and others which are readily external door frames
or arm entry should be laminated. accessible from the outside may be • a combination of the above.

(b) thermal break For detailed information, reference Site glazing may incorporate fully
Where metal windows are to be used, should be made to Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber bedded systems on the top and sides of
designs should incorporate a thermal break. preservation (natural solid timber)’ (each the insulating glass unit but the rebate
section). platform requires a drained and vented
(c) ventilation control
bottom bead.
Trickle ventilation is covered in Clause D4.
GLAZING
INSULATING GLASS UNITS
Mechanical ventilation is covered in 6.7 - D7 Glass and the method of • Insulating glass units should comply with
Chapter 8.1 ‘Internal services’ (Design). glazing shall be selected to: the requirements of BS EN 1279, be CE
(d) fire safety (a) resist wind loads marked and the subject of a third party
Fire resisting doors and positive self- The quality and thickness of normal certification scheme (e.g. Kitemarking).
closing devices should be fitted where window glass should be specified to suit
required by Building Regulations. the design wind load for the location, in Insulating glass units should normally
accordance with BS 6262 and relevant have a dual seal, or single seal if of hot
(e) strength
data sheets issued by the Glass and melt butyl, together with desiccant in at
Door frames and windows and their
Glazing Federation. least one long and one short section of
fittings should be adequate to withstand
the spacer bar.
operational loads. Structural loads should
(b) minimise risk of injury
be carried on lintels, beams or some other BEADS
Where there is a high risk of accidental
structural element. If frames are required In external situations the bottom bead
breakage, the glazing should be designed
to carry structural loads, they should be should project slightly over the rebate
and selected to comply with the safety
designed accordingly. edge, and be bedded to the rebate
recommendations for risk areas specified
(f) resistance to movement, shrinkage in Approved Document N for England, platform.
and the effects of moisture Wales and the Isle of Man, Technical
Doors and windows should be designed Booklet V in Northern Ireland and BS 6262 PROVISION OF
and selected to avoid significant distortion, in Scotland. Where there is a particular INFORMATION
such as twisting and bowing during use. risk, such as at door side panels, ‘low level’
Timber shrinkage should be allowed for. glazing and where fully glazed panels
can be mistaken for doors, toughened
To reduce twisting, doors should be hung or laminated glass, or other materials, Ensure that design and specification
on hinges as follows: such as acrylic or polycarbonate, may be information is issued to site supervisors
needed. and relevant specialist subcontractors
Type of door Hinges
and/or suppliers.
External 1½ pairs x 100mm (c) ensure adequate performance
Fire door 1½ pairs* x 100mm DRAINED AND VENTED SYSTEMS
• These systems should allow any moisture
Airing or cylinder
cupboard
1½ pairs x 75mm
that enters the glazing channel between MATERIALS STANDARDS
6.7
Other internal 1 pair x 75mm the frame and the edge seal of the
insulating glass unit to be drained away.
* 1 pair where rising butts are used (a) meet the Technical Requirements
The system should prevent long term
moisture contact with the edge seal.
Window boards may be wetted by Materials that comply with the design and
condensation. Materials other than natural A gap of at least 5mm should be the guidance below will be acceptable for
timber should be moisture-resistant. provided between the frame’s lower doors, windows and glazing.
(g) emergency access rebate and the edge seal of the
Materials for doors, windows and glazing
Where doors to rooms containing a bath or insulating glass unit. Adequate drainage
should comply with all relevant standards,
WC have a securing device, it should be of and ventilation should be provided by
including those listed below. Where no
a type capable of being opened from the holes, slots or channels.
standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
outside in an emergency. Insulating glass units 1m2 or greater in area applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
should have a drained and vented glazing Standards and Technical Requirements’).
In sheltered accommodation, additional
special provisions may be needed for all system, whether they are factory glazed or
door locks, limiters and other fasteners, to site glazed.
enable wardens to gain access to dwellings Construction Products Directive (89/106/
when necessary. Suitable systems and installations are
shown in the relevant parts of BS 8000,
RESISTANCE TO DECAY BS 6262 and BRE Digest 453. The system
should provide adequate protection of the
6.7 - D6 Joinery for external doors and Standardisation (CEN).
edge seal of the insulating glass unit.
windows shall be adequately protected
against decay FULLY BEDDED SYSTEMS TIMBER DOORS AND
• Factory glazed methods should be in
The following elements of timber doors
accordance with the relevant parts of BS
WINDOWS
and windows should be of naturally 6.7 - M2 Timber and wood-based
8000, BS 6262 and BRE Digest 453.
durable timber or timber pre-treated
materials shall be of the quality and
against fungal decay:
Fully bedded systems (acceptable for dimensions required by the design
• external door frames
factory glazing only) rely on no gaps Items to be taken into account include:
• windows
being left around the perimeter of the
• timber surrounds to metal windows (a) classification and use
insulating glass units. Moisture that
• external doors, other than flush doors. All timber and wood-based materials
can reach these areas will lead to the
should comply with the relevant
breakdown of the edge seal.
requirements of BS EN 942 as follows:

• glazing beads - European (b) priming BS 4951 Specification for builders’
• window casements/sashes - ‘J’ classes Material to be painted should be primed hardware: lock and latch
• all other elements - (see table 1 of before fixing. For further guidance on furniture (doors)
BS EN 942). preparing elements for painting, see
BS 5872 Specification for locks and
In England, Wales, Northern Ireland and Chapter 8.5 ‘Painting and decorating’
latches for doors in buildings
the Isle of Man, planted stops are not (each section).
permitted on frames to external doors. BS 6459 Door closers.
(c) staining
Storey-height frames should be of a section Material to be stained should have the first (b) security
appropriate to their height and function. coat applied before delivery to site. Security items for doors and windows are
contained in Clause D4.
External doors should be not less than 6.7 - M4 Glazing compounds and timber
42.5mm (44mm nominal) in thickness. stains shall be compatible (c) door hinges
Wood windows should comply with the The requirements for door hinges are
Compatibility of glazing, sealants and
relevant requirements of BS 644 and have contained in Clause D5(f).
finishes should be checked with relevant
a minimum rebate depth of 15mm where manufacturers.
double glazed units are to be installed. GLAZING
Medium density fibreboard for window NON-TIMBER DOORS AND 6.7 - M7 Glazing shall be as required by
the design
boards should be moisture resistant grade. WINDOWS
6.7 - M5 Doors and windows of (a) relevant standards
(b) drying shrinkage
materials other than timber shall be in Insulating glass units and glazing materials
To minimise drying shrinkage, the moisture
accordance with appropriate standards should comply with appropriate British
content of joinery, when fixed, should not
Standards, including the following:
exceed the following: Relevant standards include the following:
BS 5516 Code of Practice for patent
BS 4873 Specification for aluminium glazing
Joinery items Moisture content (%)*
alloy windows
Windows and frames 17 BS 6262 Code of Practice for glazing
BS 6510 Specification for steel of buildings
Internal joinery in: windows, window boards and
- intermittent heating 15
BS EN Glass in buildings -
doors
1279 insulating glass units.
- continuous heating 12 BS 7412 Plastics windows made
- in close proximity to 9 from PVC-U extruded hollow (b) materials
a heat source profiles Glazing components should be compatible
* on delivery, the moisture content should be BS 7413 White PVC-U extruded hollow with the frame finishes. Manufacturers’
within 2% either side of the values specified. profiles with heat welded recommendations should be taken
corner joints for plastics into account. Materials from different
6.7
(c) workmanship windows: materials type A manufacturers should not be used together
All prefabricated items should be BS 7414 White PVC-U extruded hollow unless both have agreed in writing.
constructed to a good standard of profiles with heat welded
workmanship, including: Linseed oil based putty should never be
corner joints for plastics used for the installation of laminated glass
• fit and construction of joints windows: materials type B.
• construction of finger joints or insulating glass units.
• glueing and laminating Third party certification is also required (c) glass
• construction of moving parts for PVC-U windows. Windows which
• surface finishes. Glass used in insulating glass units for
are Kitemarked will meet with the
windows and doors should comply with
Prefabricated components should comply Performance Standard.
appropriate British Standards including the
with the relevant parts of BS 1186 : Part 2. Doors and windows to which the above following:
British Standards do not apply should • Annealed glass - BS EN 572
(d) surface finish
have been assessed in accordance with • Laminated glass - BS EN ISO 12543
Any surface finishing defects should be
Technical Requirement R3. • Toughened glass - BS 952
such that they would not be apparent with
• Wired glass - BS EN 572
a matt paint finish, whether the surface is
to be stained or painted, gloss or matt.
IRONMONGERY • Low-e coated glasses, including both
hard and soft coated - BS EN 1096.
6.7 - M6 Ironmongery shall be of the
6.7 - M3 Timber for doors and windows type and material required by the design (d) safety and security
shall be of a naturally durable timber
Items to be taken into account include: The glass supplier should provide
species or preservative treated and primed
(a) relevant standards documentation to confirm the properties of
Items to be taken into account include: Ironmongery should be provided the various glasses used and conformance
(a) preservation in accordance with the design and with the appropriate British Standards.
Non-durable timbers used externally specification. For critical functions, Permanent marking of safety glass (including
should be treated, see Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber materials should comply with appropriate glazed shower/bath screens) is required.
preservation (natural solid timber)’ (each standards, including the following:
section) for details. Glazing materials should be compatible with
the required levels of safety and security.
Preservative treatment is required for the BS 7352 Specification for strength
The requirements for critical locations with
following: and durability performance of
a high risk of accidental breakage should
• external door frames metal hinges
comply with the safety requirements of
• windows BS 3621 Specification for thief- Approved Document N in England, Wales
• timber surrounds to metal windows resistant locks and the Isle of Man, Technical Booklet V in
• external doors, other than flush doors. Northern Ireland and BS 6262 in Scotland.

and the Isle of Man, ‘check’ reveals should (d) cut ends
SITEWORK STANDARDS be used. Additionally, an appropriate Where pre-treated joinery is cut or
sealant is required between doors and adjusted on site, the affected surfaces
windows and masonry. should be re-treated with two flood brush
(a) meet the Technical Requirements coats of appropriate preservative.
(b) take account of the design Minimum 12mm
overlap of masonry
(c) follow established good practice and (or render) to frame
workmanship
sealant
Sitework that complies with the design and ’rebated’ or
’check’ reveal
25mm
the guidance below will be acceptable for in areas of Very
Severe exposure
doors, windows and glazing. sealant
PROTECTION AGAINST (b) fixing

DAMP Window frames and linings should be fixed
solidly, level and plumb and should be either:
6.7 - S2 Door and window components
• secured by door/window cramps, or (e) window boards
shall, where necessary, be adequately
• plugged and screwed. The top surface of window boards should
protected against damp
be flat and level. Boards should be
Items to be taken into account include: Fixings should be not more than 600mm
fixed close to the frame and adequately
apart and not more than 150mm from
(a) priming secured against twist and other
top or bottom. Alternative locations and
Material to be painted should be primed movement, particularly any back slope
fixings are acceptable as long as they
before fixing. Material to be stained should towards the frame.
provide the same structural stability.
have the first coat applied before delivery
Medium density fibreboard should be
to site. Any material delivered untreated When driving wedges or other fixings, moisture resistant grade.
should be treated promptly. frames or other components should not
be distorted. (f) hanging doors and opening lights
Neither primer nor the first coat prevent
Opening lights and door leaves should
joinery from taking in moisture. Frames and linings should fit tightly into
hang square within the frame or lining
openings and be blocked or packed out at
(b) storage and fit neatly with minimum gaps,
fixing points, where necessary.
When joinery is stored on site, precautions subject to the requirements of effective
should include: Frames for external elements should weatherstripping. Doors to bathrooms and
• avoiding wetting during unloading be located in openings so that the head WCs with mechanical ventilation should be
• stacking external joinery on bearers of the frame is protected by the lintel, hung with a gap at the bottom or be fitted
off the ground and covering with and throatings in sill members are not with a ventilation grill.
waterproof material obstructed by the wall face. Where a standard flush door is reduced in
• storing internal joinery in a weather- height, the bottom rail should be replaced
6.7
protected condition. throating

clear of if necessary. The leading edges of doors
wall face
should be protected with timber lipping,
sealant where necessary.
sealant
dpc turned up (g) general ironmongery

at back and
ends of sill Where required, hinges and other
ironmongery should be housed neatly
flush with the surface.
In Scotland, Northern Ireland and areas of
Very Severe exposure in England, Wales The full complement of matching screws
Joinery which is not properly stored should be provided and properly screwed
and the Isle of Man, it is not acceptable
or protected may not meet Technical home.
to fix window frames in the outer leaf of
Requirement R3.
external walls. Locks should not be fitted in mortices too
LOCATION AND FIXING (c) bay windows tightly and keyholes should be aligned and
locks should turn easily. The clearance
6.7 - S3 Doors and windows shall be To prevent sagging and bowing, bay and
between a door handle and a door stop
correctly located and securely fixed bow type windows should be adequately
should be at least 25mm.
supported and secured to the structure to
prevent casements becoming twisted. (h) door hinges
(a) weathertightness
Bay windows should be properly linked to To reduce twisting, doors should be hung
Doors and windows should be installed
dpcs at reveals. on hinges as follows:
correctly so they perform satisfactorily
in use. Type of door Hinges
Dpcs should be correctly installed. External 1½ pairs x 100mm

Fire door 1½ pairs* x 100mm
The dpc should extend approximately bay windows
Airing or cylinder 1½ pairs x 75mm
25mm into the cavity. If a thick block is adequately
supported cupboard
used to close the cavity and form the
reveal, a wider dpc will be required. Other internal 1 pair x 75mm
* 1 pair where rising butts are used

Vertical dpcs should extend continuously
to the full height of the frame.
(i) security
In Scotland, Northern Ireland and areas of Security items for doors and windows are
Very Severe exposure in England, Wales contained in Clause D4.

(j) workmanship When cutting single sheets of glass or (f) doors and windows of materials other
Internal door frames and linings should be plastics for windows, an allowance should than wood
of the correct widths to match the wall or be made for thermal movement of the Where doors and windows of materials
partition thickness, including finish. pane, taking into account: other than timber are delivered to the
• the material being used, and site unglazed, the glazing should be
Frames and linings should be blocked off
walls, wherever possible, to allow for full • the size of the pane. carried out in strict accordance with the
architraves. manufacturer’s instructions.
This allowance is especially important when
window rebates are shallow, allowing limited Appropriate fixing and sealing systems
tolerance for expansion of the glazing. should include:
• distance pieces, unless load bearing
(b) rebates
tapes are used
Before glazing, rebates should:
full architrave • setting blocks
• have been primed (for timber frames),
• location blocks where required
• be rigid and true, and
• appropriate beads
• be of the correct size for the glazing.
All timber trim should be: • glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets
Insulating glass units should be properly
• sufficiently wide to mask joints, and and/or capping.
protected by the frame from sunlight.
• fixed so as to minimise movement and
The spacer bar of the insulating glass
shrinkage.
unit should always be below the level of
PROTECTION
Architraves should be: the frame’s sightline. 6.7 - S6 Completed work shall be free
• parallel to frame and lining arrises from damage
Setting and location blocks should be of
• accurately mitred or scribed to fit tightly Keep internal doors covered with
a suitable resilient material. In drained
and neatly polyethylene or original wrapping.
and ventilated frames the drainage
• fixed with an equal margin to each frame
channels in the rebate should be free Door frames and linings should be
member
from obstructions that prevent effective protected with timber strips or plywood to
• fixed securely together with linings to
drainage. The dimensions of holes and at least 1m above skirting level. Thresholds
prevent curling.
slots should be checked to ensure that and window sills should be covered.
Nails should be punched below the effective drainage can occur. Scaffolding and walkways should be kept
surface of the timber and holes stopped. away from frames.
Nails should not be driven home with the (c) bead glazing
hammer head. Damage should be avoided Beads and linings should be used for: Joinery should be protected from paint
where easing is necessary. Any damage • all internal glazing splashes and other damage.
should be made good. • other locations where shock absorption
properties are required. All temporary coverings should be
(k) finish upon completion of work removed after all other work has been
Work should be left in a clean state and Beads should be used: completed, before handover.
• where doors or windows are to be
6.7
brought to an appropriate level of finish
for other trades. finished with water-borne stains
• where fully bedded systems are used to
Finishing trades should not be relied upon install insulating glass units
to correct untidy work. • where glazing takes place on site, the
bottom bead should be drained and
GLAZING vented.
6.7 - S4 Glass and glazing shall be Beads should be fixed at not more than
installed upon delivery or shall be 150mm centres.
adequately stored and protected until
required (d) glazing compounds
All materials should be compatible
Glass and insulating glass units should be and used in accordance with the
inspected for visual defects and defects manufacturer’s recommendations.
which could lead to premature failure. Materials from different manufacturers
Often, defects are caused by: should not be used together unless both
have agreed in writing.
• water accumulating between sheets,
which may cause surfaces to become (e) insulating glass units
marked, and Unless factory glazed, insulating glass
• edge damage or scratching. units should be installed in accordance with
the design. In timber frames where solid
6.7 - S5 Glazing shall be carried out in bedding methods are to be used on site, the
accordance with relevant standards bottom bead should be drained and vented.
Items to be taken into account include: Insulating glass units and any
(a) size of insulating glass units/sheets accompanying documentation should be
Sufficient space should be provided checked to ensure that they comply with
between the glass edge and the frame to the design. The insulating glass units should
allow for thermal expansion of the glass. carry a CE mark to BS EN 1279 and have a
A gap of 3mm is recommended, except for third party assessment certificate such as
drained systems where at least 5mm is the BSI Kitemark. The glass type, gas filling,
required for drainage at the bottom bead. edge seal type and dimensions should be
Insulating glass units should not be cut or checked against the documentation and the
punctured in any way on site. insulating glass unit itself.

INDEX
A G S
Aluminium doors and windows 3 Glazing 2, 3, 5 Secondary external access 1
B Glazing compounds 5 doors
Bay windows 4 I Security 1, 3, 4
Insulated glass unit 2 Steel doors and windows 3

C
Ironmongery 3, 4 Storage 4
Compatibility 3
Strength 2
D L
Locks 1, 3 T
Door hinges 2, 5
Timber doors and windows 3
Drained and vented systems 2 M
Durability 2 Main entrance doors 1 V
Ventilation control 2
E P
Emergency access 2 Performance 1, 2 W
Environmental factors 1 Preservation 2, 3, 4 Weather resistance 1
Priming 3, 4 Weathertightness 1, 4
F
Protection 4, 5 Wind loads 2
Finish 5
PVC-U doors and windows 3 Workmanship 3, 4
Fire safety 2
Fixing 4 R
Flats and maisonettes 1 Rebates 5
Fully bedded systems 2
6.7

Chapter 6.8
Fireplaces, chimneys and flues
CONTENTS
APPENDIX 6.8-D
DESIGN Clause Page
Flue outlet positions for solid fuel 15
Design standards D1 1 appliances
Statutory requirements D2 1 APPENDIX 6.8-E
General considerations D3 1 Flue outlet position for gas appliances 16/17
Fireplaces and hearths (solid fuel) D4 1 APPENDIX 6.8-F
Walls near appliances (solid fuel) D5 1 Flue outlet positions for oil appliances 18
Flue pipes (solid fuel) D6 1
Chimneys and flues (solid fuel) D7 2 INDEX 19
Chimney terminals (solid fuel) D8 2
Fireplaces and hearths (gas) D9 3
Flue pipes (gas) D10 3
Chimneys (gas) D11 3
SCOPE
Fireplaces and hearths (oil) D12 4
Flue pipes (oil) D13 4 This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical
Chimneys (oil) D14 4 Requirements and recommendations for fireplaces,
chimneys and flues..
Timber frame construction D15 5
MATERIALS
Bricks M2 5
Concrete blocks M3 5
Stone masonry M4 5
Mortar M5 6
Flue liners M6 6
6.8
Flue pipes M7 6
Flue terminals M8 6
Flue blocks for gas appliances M9 6
Twin wall flue systems M10 6
Flashings M11 6
Damp proof course M12 6
SITEWORK
Fireplaces and hearths S2 6
Flues S3 7
Chimneys S4 7
Terminals S5 9
Provision of combustion air S6 9
Testing S7 9
APPENDIX 6.8-A
Provision of combustion air 10
APPENDIX 6.8-B
Minimum sizes for flues contained in 10
chimneys
APPENDIX 6.8-C
Typical construction details 11/14

solid non-combustible
material at least 75mm thick
6.8
less than
150mm
at least
150mm at least
1.2m
Fireplaces, chimneys andhearth

flues
(b) provision of hearths and recesses

DESIGN STANDARDS HEARTHS
6.8 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical Constructional hearths of sufficient
Requirements dimensions should be provided for open at least
300mm
fires or closed combustion appliances to
Design that follows the guidance below comply with statutory requirements and
will be acceptable for fireplaces, chimneys manufacturers’ recommendations. The t
x
and flues. dimensions shown in Clause S2 are for x t
In this Chapter a number of terms are a concrete hearth at least 125mm thick appliance
used. Details are given in Appendix 6.8-C. below an open fire.

The hearth for a freestanding appliance t = thickness of solid non-combustible material as follows:
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS should have minimum dimensions of

if x is 50mm or less, t = at least 200mm
if x is 50mm to 150mm, t = at least 75mm
6.8 - D2 Design shall comply with all 840mm. The following diagram shows the
relevant statutory requirements minimum dimensions from the appliance FLUE PIPES
to the edge of the hearth.
Design should be in accordance with 6.8 - D6 Flue pipes shall be correctly
relevant Building Regulations and other designed to safely connect an appliance
at least
statutory requirements. 150mm to a flue
hearth
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS appliance
(a) size
Flue pipes should be equal to the cross-section
6.8 - D3 Chimneys and flues shall enable front of of the outlet of the appliance they serve.
appliance
efficient operation of the appliance for at least
which they are designed while protecting at least 300mm
for an open
225mm (b) direction
for a
the fabric of the building appliance and closed Flue pipes for solid fuel appliances should
for closed
appliance which
appliance
be vertical or inclined at 45° or less from
may be properly
The design of dwellings which incorporate used with its vertical. A short horizontal section not
front open
chimneys and flues should ensure that exceeding 150mm long may be used to
all details of the associated elements RECESSES connect a back outlet appliance to a flue.
are considered and, where necessary, Recesses for open fires or closed (c) jointing
provided. This should include the following: combustion appliances should be provided Flue pipes which have spigot and socket
• combustion air supply to comply with statutory requirements joints should be fitted socket up.
• constructional hearth and manufacturers’ recommendations.
• chimneys and flues, including where Appendix 6.8-C gives some recess
they project through the roof dimensions. The diagrams in Clause
• terminals S2 show minimum masonry thickness
• construction adjacent to hearths and flues
6.8
surrounding the fireplace recess. Recesses
• limitations on the type of appliance or are generally lined with a fire back or fire
open fire which can be installed or fuel bricks.
which can be used.
For recess openings up to 500mm x 550mm,
Where a chimney or flue is provided it a 200mm diameter flue or square section of
should be continuous from the hearth or equivalent area can be used. For openings
appliance to the outside air. (d) separation from combustible
larger than this the flue size should be 15% of
A notice plate containing safety the area of the recess opening. materials
information about any hearths and flues Flue pipes should be separated from
combustible materials by at least the
should be securely fixed in an unobtrusive WALLS NEAR APPLIANCES following:
but obvious position within the home.
6.8 - D5 Walls near appliances and their • 200mm of non-combustible materials, or
Solid fuel hearths shall be located to minimise the • an airspace at least 4 times the diameter
of the flue pipe, or
risk of fire to the building
FIREPLACES AND HEARTHS Walls near an appliance or its hearth
• shielded by a non-combustible shield
at least 3 times the diameter of the
6.8 - D4 Fireplaces and hearths shall be should be non-combustible or the flue pipe in width. The shield should be
designed to ensure proper combustion appliance should be positioned not closer at least 12mm from the combustible
of fuel and to minimise the risk of the to the wall than shown in the following material and the combustible material at
building catching fire in consequence of diagrams. least 1.5 times the diameter either side
their use of the flue pipe.
solid non-combustible
Where appliances are not provided, it is material at least 75mm thick 12mm
air space
important to construct fireplaces and
D
hearths to suit the appliance most likely to

3x
less than
be fitted. 150mm
flue pipe
at least
at least 4 x D
150mm at least
1.2m shield of
Items to be taken into account include: D
D non-combustible
material
(a) combustion air hearth
Combustion air is vital to the safe and

efficient operation of appliances. Solid fuel
3
xD
appliances should have an air supply either 1.5 x D

directly or indirectly from the external air
PLAN PLAN
to comply with statutory requirements and
REQUIREMENT IN REQUIREMENT
manufacturers’ recommendations. Reference NORTHERN IRELAND ELSEWHERE
should be made to Appendix 6.8-A.
at least
300mm
t
x
CHIMNEYS AND FLUES • be non-combustible (h) stability

• be reasonably smooth internally FOUNDATIONS
6.8 - D7 Chimneys shall incorporate • be correctly jointed with mortar with Where a chimney forms part of a wall, the
flues capable of safely conducting the space between the liners and the foundation should project at least 100mm
products of combustion to the external brickwork filled with weak insulating wider than the chimney base. Where the
air. The structure shall be capable of concrete unless the manufacturer chimney will exert higher loading on the
supporting the flue lining and shall recommends an alternative specification supporting sub-soil than the adjacent wall,
provide adequate protection to the • incorporate compatible purpose made the chimney foundation spread should be
adjacent structure bends at changes of direction; cut pipes designed to avoid uneven settlement. The
are not acceptable depth of chimney foundations should be
A notice plate containing safety
• be properly jointed at their junctions the same as adjacent wall foundations.
information about any hearths and flues
should be securely fixed in an unobtrusive with the starter block or lintel and the HEIGHT
but obvious position within the home. outlet terminal. The height H of an unrestrained chimney
(e) cleaning should not exceed 4½ times the least plan
Where a chimney is not directly over an dimension of the chimney, W (see diagram
(a) flue size
appliance or opening, a soot box accessible in Clause S4), provided the density of the
A flue should serve only one appliance.
for emptying should be formed. masonry is at least 1500kg/m3, unless
Flues should be of sufficient cross
sectional area to remove all combustion (f) resistance to frost attack with Technical Requirement R5.
gases from the open fire or appliance they Clay brick chimneys above roof level
serve. which are not protected by a capping with (i) factory-made insulated chimneys
adequate overhang and drip should be This type of chimney should be designed
Appendix 6.8-B gives flue sizes for:
constructed with F2,S1 or F2,S2 bricks to in accordance with BS 4543 and BS EN
• open fires
BS EN 771 bedded in mortar of 1 : ½ : 4 1859 and installed in accordance with BS
• solid fuel appliances.
to 4½, cement : lime : sand or 1 : 3 or 4, 7566 or be assessed in accordance with
(b) flue direction and length cement : sand with plasticiser (see Chapter Technical Requirement R3.
Flues for solid fuel appliances should: 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’, Appendix An operating life of at least 30 years is
• be vertical where possible but not have 6.1-C). In Scotland, all external facing
more than two bends required.
brickwork should be constructed using
• not have bends more than 45° from the frost resistant bricks.
vertical CHIMNEY TERMINALS
• be not less than 4.5m high for solid fuel Sulfate resisting cement should be used in
6.8 - D8 The terminal to a chimney
appliances measured above the fireplace the mortar where flue gases are liable to
shall enable satisfactory discharge of
opening. affect the masonry, eg above roof level.
flue gases
(c) separation from adjacent spaces and If external chimneys built with clay bricks
materials of F2,S1 designation are rendered, sulfate
6.8
Combustible materials close to any brick or resistant cement should be used. (a) position of the outlet
blockwork chimney should be: Outlets should be positioned as shown
• at least 200mm from the inside surface (g) resistance to weather in Appendix 6.8-D. Refer to approved
of a flue, or Cavities in Very Severe and Severe Document J where roof coverings are
• in all areas except Scotland, 40mm from exposure areas should be continuous easily ignitable.
the face of the chimney. up to roof level. This only applies below
roof level where the stack forms part of (b) pressure zones
This does not apply to a floorboard, an external cavity wall and applies to the The design should, where possible, allow
skirting, dado or picture rail, mantelshelf complete structure including the fireplace for the effects of adjacent trees, buildings
or architrave. recess. Where the chimney breast is etc. on the “low pressure” zone as the
gathered in, the lower projecting masonry efficiency of the flue may be affected.
Materials used for chimneys should should be protected against damp
be capable of resisting fluctuating penetration with a suitable capping and A low pressure zone generally occurs on
temperatures up to 1100°C. Suitable cavity trays. Reference should be made to the lee side and at the ridge of a pitched
materials are described in the Materials Appendix 6.8-C for typical construction roof and close to the windward side of a
section of this Chapter. details. Alternatives may be suitable. flat roof. The flue will generally function
more effectively if the outlet is in this
Flues for solid fuel appliances should Above the roof, chimney dpcs should link zone, taking account of prevailing winds.
be formed within masonry walls at least with flashings. Two dpcs should be used
100mm thick or 200mm thick if separating at suitable levels when the roof is steeply Where down-draughts occur, for example
the flue from another compartment of the pitched, that is where the difference on hillsides or near tall trees and buildings,
same building, another building or another in level between the lower and higher the height of the flue outlet may have
dwelling. In Scotland, suitable masonry intersection of the chimney with the roof to be increased or a fan assisted flue
materials are described in the Building will be more than 450mm. Lead trays installed.
Standards (Scotland) Regulations. should be protected with a thick coat of
bitumen or bitumen paint where in contact (c) terminals
Flues in the same chimney should be Terminals may be purpose-made
with mortar. Plastic dpcs are not suitable.
separated by masonry at least 100mm components, built into the top of the
Weatherproofing details are included in
thick. chimney to a depth of not less than 125mm
Appendix 6.8-C.
Timber framed wall design should include into the masonry or one-quarter the length
full details of separation proposals. Face brickwork above roof level should not of the terminal, whichever is the greater.
have recessed joints. The terminal should be sealed to the flue
(d) flue liners liners. The top flue liner projecting at least
Flue liners should: If chimneys are to be rendered, the
20mm above the chimney capping is an
• have rebated or socketed joints with rendering should be as described in
acceptable terminal.
socket or internal rebate uppermost Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’.

Fireplaces, chimneys and flues 6.8
(d) chimney cappings The diagram below shows minimum (e) separation from combustible
Chimney cappings should be designed projections for the hearth beyond the materials
to protect the masonry below. Cappings appliance. Single wall flue pipes should be separated
should preferably be monolithic slabs, from combustible materials by:
at least 150mm
weathered, projecting at least 50mm with PLAN
• at least 25mm
at least
a drip to shed water clear of the masonry. 150mm • a non-combustible sleeve enclosing an
Brick chimneys which do not have this type air space of at least 25mm around the
of capping should be constructed using pipe where it passes through a wall,
frost resistant masonry. appliance
floor or roof
• non-combustible casing material with at
All external face brickwork in Scotland
least half the fire resistance needed for
should be constructed using frost resistant front the wall or floor where passing through a
bricks.
at least 225mm compartment wall or compartment floor.
beyond front
Cappings may be designed as a cover The 25mm may be measured from the
slab supported on piers to reduce the rain hearth for back boiler
outside of the inner pipe in the case of
penetration into the top of the flue. The double-walled pipes (see BS 5440).
height of the supporting piers should be ALL OTHER GAS APPLIANCES
sufficient to allow a total free opening area Hearths for other types of appliance
at least twice the area of the flue outlet. should be at least 12mm thick non- CHIMNEYS
combustible material to the same plan 6.8 - D11 Chimneys shall incorporate
CHIMNEY POT
dimensions as above. In some cases the flues capable of safely conducting
flue terminal (chimney pot)
provision of a hearth is not required, for products of combustion from an
example if the flame or incandescent appliance to the external air. The
material is at least 225mm above the floor. structure shall be capable of supporting
purpose-made
chimney Where a hearth has been provided, its the flue and providing adequate
cappings
50mm edges should be marked to provide protection to adjacent materials
a warning to the home owner and to Chimneys for gas appliances must not
discourage combustible floor finishes such incorporate an adjustable draught control.
as carpet from being laid too close to the
appliance. A way of achieving this would be Items to be taken into account include:
FLUE LINING ACTING
AS FLUE TERMINAL to provide a change in level. (a) masonry chimneys
Flues should be of the minimum sizes
(c) separating appliances from given in Appendix 6.8-B.
combustible materials
purpose-made Masonry chimneys as described for solid
chimney Appliances should not be closer than
cappings fuel are acceptable.
50mm 75mm to combustible material. This
6.8
applies to the back, sides and top of the Brick or blockwork chimneys for gas
appliance and any draught-diverter. It does appliances should provide at least the
not apply if a 25mm thick non-combustible fire resistance of any compartment wall
shield is used or the appliance complies or floor of which it forms part or passes
through (the compartment wall may
Gas with the appropriate parts of BS 5258 or
form the chimney wall if it is a masonry
BS 5386.
FIREPLACES AND HEARTHS material).
6.8 - D9 Fireplaces and hearths FLUE PIPES (b) flue liners

shall safely accommodate the fire or Flue liners should be as described for
6.8 - D10 Flue pipes shall safely
appliance for which they are designed solid fuel or comply with BS 715 (see
connect an appliance to a chimney or a
Clause D7(d)). Flexible flue liners are not
Items to be taken into account include: flue to a terminal acceptable for new build.
(a) combustion air Items to be taken into account include:
Combustion air is vital to the safe (c) flue block chimneys
(a) size
and efficient operation of appliances. Flue blocks should comply with BS EN 1858
Flue pipes should be at least the area of
Requirements for combustion air are given or BS EN 1806 with a performance class of
the outlet of the appliance and have no
in Appendix 6.8-A. at least FB4 N2. The chimney should only
adjustable draught control. be constructed of flue blocks if suitable for
(b) provision of hearths and recesses (b) direction the appliance.
SOLID FUEL EFFECT APPLIANCES Apart from balanced flues, horizontal runs Flue block chimneys should be constructed,
Hearths and recesses for solid fuel effect should be avoided. No pipe should exceed jointed and weatherproofed in accordance
appliances should be as described for solid 45° with the vertical. with manufacturers’ instructions.
fuel installations or in accordance with
BS 6714 or BS 5871 or the manufacturer’s (c) jointing Flue blocks should be correctly bonded to
instructions when the appliance has been Flue pipes with spigot and socket joints the flanking masonry.
tested by an approved authority. should be fixed socket up.
In all areas, the nominal cavity width
(d) connections and support as required in Chapter 6.1, should be
BACK BOILERS
Purpose-made connections should be maintained by either:
Hearths for back boilers should be
used particularly in roof spaces when • increasing the overall width of the
constructed of solid non-combustible
connecting to flue blocks and to ridge cavity, or
materials at least:
terminals. The connecting flue pipe • making the flue block flush with the
• 125mm thick, or
should be supported on straps at centres inside of the cavity but projecting into
• 25mm thick placed on non-combustible
not greater than 1.8m and have support the room as a false chimney breast.
supports at least 25mm high.
directly below each socket.

Flue blocks projecting into the cavity preventing moisture crossing the cavity, (c) separation from adjacent spaces and
should be protected by providing a for example, a moisture drip collar set in materials
vertical dpm. The dpm may be supported the centre of the cavity. See Clause D14 (c).
by building in a layer of suitable non-
CIRCULAR FLUES
combustible insulation.
CHIMNEYS
Plaster should not be applied directly to 6.8 - D14 Chimneys shall incorporate
moisture
flue blocks. A plasterboard lining with an drip collar
flues capable of safely conducting
airspace or non-combustible insulation appliance
products of combustion from an open
behind should be provided.
fire or other appliance to the external
Flue blocks should not be built into air. The structure shall be capable of
separating walls unless it can be shown that supporting the flue lining and shall
the wall has adequate sound resistance. provide adequate protection to adjacent
(d) factory-made insulated chimneys and materials
terminals Items to be taken into account include:
Factory-made insulated chimneys should: (a) size of flue
sheet metal plate sloping
• comply with the requirements of at 45° across cavity, Flue sizes should be in accordance with
located on top of flue
BS 4543 and be installed in accordance assembly and extending Appendix 6.8-B.
about 25mm either side
with BS 6461 or comply with BS 715 and
(b) direction of flues
installed in accordance with BS 5440.
As for gas flues.
Factory-made insulated chimneys appliance
(c) separation from adjacent spaces and
should be assembled, erected, anchored
and protected in accordance with materials
manufacturers’ instructions. Separation should be in accordance with
the following table.
(e) terminals to masonry chimneys Protecting buildings from hot flues for flue
If appropriate, flue terminals should RECTANGULAR FLUES gas temperatures not more than 250°C
comply with the appliance manufacturer’s
Flue within: Protection measures
recommendations.
Proprietary terminals should comply with
Oil Connecting flue pipe Flues should be at
least 25mm from any
BS 715 and BS EN 1858. FIREPLACES AND HEARTHS Factory-made chimney
complying with
combustible material
(measured from the
BS 715:1993 outer surface of the
Where proprietary terminals are not used, 6.8 - D12 Fireplaces and hearths fluewall, or the outer
the free opening area should be at least shall safely accommodate the fire or surface of the inner
twice the area of the flue. The openings wall in the case of
appliance for which they are designed multi-walled products).
should be uniformly distributed around the Where passing through
6.8
terminal or be on two opposite faces. The a combustible wall,

openings in the terminal should admit a (a) combustion air floor or roof (other
than a compartment
6mm diameter ball but exclude a ball over Combustion air is vital to the safe and wall floor or roof) this
25mm diameter. efficient operation of appliances. Reference separation can be
should be made to Appendix 6.8-A. achieved by a non-
(f) direction combustible sleeve
enclosing the fluepipe
Flues should be vertical where possible. (b) provision of hearths or chimney with a
Any necessary bend in a flue should not If the temperature of the hearth below the 25mm airspace to
make an angle exceeding 45° with the the relevant flue wall.
appliance is likely to exceed 100°C, or the (The airspace could be
vertical. temperature is not known, a hearth should wholly or partially filled
with non-combustible
(g) outlets not serving balanced flue be provided as described for solid fuel insulating material).
appliances appliances. If this temperature is unlikely
Factory-made chimney Refer to appropriate
A flue outlet serving a gas appliance to be exceeded the appliance may stand on complying with British Standards
should be: a rigid, non-combustible imperforate sheet BS 4543-1:1990 (1996),* and Manufacturers
BS 4543-2:1990 (1996), recommendations.
• situated at roof level, so that air can of material without a constructional hearth. BS 4543-3:1990 (1996)
pass freely across it at all times Masonry chimney Provide at least
(c) shielding appliances
• at least 600mm from any opening into 25mm of masonry
Appliances which are likely to have back or between flues and any
the building combustible material.
side temperatures exceeding 100°C should
• fitted with a flue terminal where the flue
be shielded as described for gas appliances Flueblock chimney Provide flueblock walls
diameter is less than 170mm. Larger at least 25mm thick.
(see Clause D9(c)).
diameter flues should be fitted with a
Flue assemblies a) flues passing
terminal where required by Building
Regulations.
FLUE PIPES for roomed-sealed
appliances
through combustible
walls should be
6.8 - D13 Flue pipes shall safely surrounded by
(h) outlets serving balanced flue insulating material at
connect an appliance to a chimney least 50mm thick.
appliances b) provide a clearance
See Appendix 6.8-E for position of Items to be taken into account include: of at least 50mm
balanced flue outlets. (a) size from the edge of the
flue outlet to any
Flue pipes should be at least the size of the combustible wall
(i) damp penetration outlet to the appliance. Reference should cladding.
Precautions should be taken where be made to Appendix 6.8-B. * BS 4543-1:1990 (1996) withdrawn April 2000;
appropriate to prevent damp penetration partially superseded by BS EN 1859:2000
as described for solid fuel chimneys. (b) direction
As for solid fuel.
Balanced flues which bridge the cavity of
an external wall should have a means of

(d) flue liners • ‘Guide for gas installation in timber applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
As for gas if the flue gases are unlikely framed housing’ Standards and Technical Requirements’).
to exceed a temperature of 250°C. As • ‘Specification for flues for class II
References to British Standards and
for solid fuel if the flue gases are likely appliances in timber framed housing’.
Codes of Practice include those made
to exceed a temperature of 250°C or the
Appendix 6.8-C contains a detail of an under the Construction Products Directive
temperature is not known.
external fireplace recess and chimney. (89/106/EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
(e) resistance to heat Other details for internal chimneys and European Technical Specifications
As for gas flue pipes if the flue gases are chimneys in separating walls are available approved by a European Committee for
unlikely to exceed a temperature of 250°C. in TRADA publications. Standardisation (CEN).
As for solid fuel flue pipes if the flue gases
are likely to exceed a temperature of PROVISION OF BRICKS
250°C or the temperature is not known.
INFORMATION 6.8 - M2 Bricks shall be capable of
(f) resistance to chemical attack supporting intended loads and have
As for solid fuel. 6.8 - D16 Design and specifications appropriate resistance to the adverse
shall be produced in a clearly effects of frost and sulfates
(g) resistance to weather understandable format and include all
As for solid fuel. relevant information Bricks should be selected in accordance
with BS 6461 and BS EN 771.
(h) separation from combustible For fireplaces and flues the drawings
materials should show: In external chimney stacks clay bricks
As for gas flue pipes if the flue gases are • position and size of hearths and should be of durability rating F2,S1 as
unlikely to exceed a temperature of 250°C. fireplaces described in BS EN 771 unless protected by
As for solid fuel flue pipes if the flue gases • position and size of chimneys and flues a projecting capping bedded on a dpc. In
are likely to exceed a temperature of • position and proximity of combustible Scotland frost resistant bricks should be
250°C or the temperature is not known. materials used for all external facing brickwork.
• position and details of flue terminals or Reference should also be made to Chapters
(i) stability outlets
As for solid fuel if of masonry construction. 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (Materials) and
• position of dpcs and flashings 6.3 ‘Internal walls’ (Materials).
(j) factory-made insulated chimneys • construction details of fireplace
This type of chimney should be designed in openings and chimney connections
accordance with BS 4543 : Part 1 to • details of materials to be used CONCRETE BLOCKS
Part 3 BS EN 1859 and installed in • limitations on the type of appliance or 6.8 - M3 Blocks shall be capable of
accordance with BS 7566 : Part 2 or be open fire which can be installed or fuel supporting intended loads and have
assessed in accordance with Technical which can be used appropriate resistance to the adverse
Requirement R3. An operating life of at • details of tests required on chimneys effects of frost and sulfates
least 30 years is required. Component and flues including who is responsible
Blocks should be selected in accordance
6.8
systems to be BS 715 installed in for carrying them out.
with BS 6461 Part 1, BS EN 771 or
accordance with BS 5440. satisfactorily assessed in accordance with
(k) outlets be distributed to appropriate personnel Technical Requirement R3. Block density
See Appendix 6.8-F for positions of flue should be minimum 1500 kg/m3, unless
Ensure that design and specification designed by an Engineer in accordance
outlets. information is issued to site supervisors with Technical Requirement R5.
All balanced flue terminals should be and relevant specialist subcontractors
positioned to allow free intake of air to the and/or suppliers. Reference should also be made to Chapters
appliance. 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (Materials) and
Where proprietary products are to be 6.3 ‘Internal walls’ (Materials).
(l) terminals used, manufacturers usually have specific
As for solid fuel if of masonry construction, requirements for fixing and/or assembly In Scotland, 100mm thick blockwork in
of their products. This information should chimney construction should have a
unless otherwise stated in the appliance
also be made available for reference density of at least 1600 kg/m3. Other
manufacturer’s instructions, which should
on site so that work can be carried out suitable masonry specifications for
be followed.
satisfactorily in accordance with the design Scotland are given in the Building
Standards (Scotland) Regulations.
General and specification.
TIMBER FRAME STONE MASONRY

CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS STANDARDS 6.8 - M4 Stone masonry shall be
capable of supporting intended loads
6.8 - D15 Fireplaces, chimneys and
6.8 - M1 All materials shall: and have appropriate resistance to the
flues in timber frame construction shall
(a) meet the Technical Requirements adverse effects of frost and sulfates
be designed to minimise the risk of the
building catching fire (b) take account of the design Stone for masonry should comply with the
Materials that comply with the design and requirements of BS EN 771 and BS 6461 :
The design of timber frame construction
the guidance below will be acceptable for Part 1.
should ensure that combustible material is
either far enough away from heat sources fireplaces, chimneys and flues.
Reconstructed stone masonry units should
or, where permitted, shielded. Materials for fireplaces, chimneys and flues comply with BS EN 771-5 and BS 6461 :
shall comply with all relevant standards, Part 1.
Designers may find the following
‘Institution of Gas Engineers’ publications including those listed below. Where no
useful: standard exists, Technical Requirement R3

MORTAR FLUE PIPES FLASHINGS

6.8 - M5 Mortar shall be batched and 6.8 - M7 Flue pipes shall be suitable for 6.8 - M11 Flashings and trays shall
mixed to achieve adequate strength and their purpose be capable of adequately resisting the
durability to comply with design entry of moisture into the building
Cast iron flue pipes should comply with
Mortar should be as specified for areas of BS 41. Suitable materials for flashings and trays
Severe or Very Severe exposure in Chapter are:
Mild steel flue pipes should have a
6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ Appendix 6.1-B. • milled sheet lead (at least Code 4)
minimum wall thickness of 3mm and
(1 : ½ : 4 to 4½ cement : lime : sand or 1 : 3 complying with BS EN 12588
comply with BS 1449.
or 4 cement : sand with plasticiser). • aluminium and aluminium alloys
Stainless steel flue pipes should be at least complying with BS 1470 (0.6mm to
Sulfate resisting cement should be used in
1mm thick as described in BS EN 10088 0.9mm thick)
the mortar where flue gases are liable to
and should be one of the following grades: • zinc alloy complying with BS 6561 and
affect the masonry, eg above roof level.
1.4401, 1.4404, 1.4432 or 1.4436. 0.6mm thick.
FLUE LINERS Vitreous enamelled flue pipes should be

DAMP-PROOF COURSE
of low carbon steel coated internally and
6.8 - M6 Flue liners shall be unaffected externally with acid resisting enamel and 6.8 - M12 Materials for damp-proofing
by flue gases and suitable for their conform to the description given in shall resist adequately the passage of
purpose BS 6999. moisture into the building
Special fittings should be specified at
Flue pipes for gas appliances should The following are acceptable for use as
changes of direction of the flue.
comply with BS 715. dpcs:
Liners suitable for solid fuel appliances • bitumen to BS 6398
All flue pipes should be jointed in
(and generally suitable for other fuels) • polyethylene to BS 6515 (not in the
accordance with manufacturers’
could be: chimney stack above roof level)
• liners whose performance is at least instructions.
equal to that corresponding to the accordance with Technical Requirement
designation T450 N2 S D 3, as described FLUE TERMINALS R3.
in BS EN 1443: 1999, such as:
6.8 - M8 Flue terminals shall be
- clay flue liners with rebates or sockets
suitable for their purpose
for jointing meeting the requirements
for Class A1 N2 or Class A1 N1 as Clay flue terminals should comply with
SITEWORK STANDARDS
described in BS EN 1457: 1999; or or be constructed from materials which 6.8 - S1 All sitework shall:
- concrete flue liners meeting the comply with BS 1181. (a) meet the Technical Requirements
requirements for the classification
Chimneys serving gas appliances should (b) take account of the design
Type A1, Type A2, Type B1 or Type
have terminals complying with BS EN 1858. (c) follow established good practice and
6.8
B2 as described in prEN 1857(e18)

January 2001; or Flue pipes serving gas appliances should workmanship
- other products that are independently have terminals complying with BS 715. Sitework that complies with the design
certified as meeting the criteria in a); and the guidance below will be acceptable
or FLUE BLOCKS FOR GAS for fireplaces, chimneys and flues. Gas
• imperforate clay pipes with sockets
for jointing as described in BS 65: 1991 APPLIANCES appliances should be fitted by a registered
CORGI installer to comply with the Gas
(1997). 6.8 - M9 Flue blocks for gas appliances Safety (installation and use) (amendment)
Liners should be installed in accordance shall be unaffected by flue gases and Regulations 1990.
with their manufacturer’s instructions. suitable for their purpose
Appropriate components should be Good workmanship and effective
Flue blocks for use with gas appliances supervision during construction are
selected to produce the flue path should comply with BS 1289 : Part 1
without cutting and to keep joints essential to ensure that fireplaces,
(Concrete) or Part 2 (Clay). In situations chimneys and flues function correctly
to a minimum. Bends and offsets
where the cavity width is reduced by in use.
should only be formed with purpose-
the flue block all insulation and vertical
made components. Liners need to be Additional construction details are shown
dpms should be in accordance with
placed with the sockets or rebate ends
manufacturers’ instructions. in Appendix 6.8-C.
uppermost to contain water and other
condensates in the flue. Caulking can be
effected with fire cement or refractory TWIN WALL FLUE SYSTEMS FIREPLACES AND
mortar. Spaces between the lining
6.8 - M10 Twin wall flue systems shall HEARTHS
and the surrounding masonry should
be suitable for their purpose 6.8 - S2 Fireplaces and hearths shall
not be filled with ordinary mortar. In
the absence of liner manufacturer’s Twin wall flue systems should comply with safely accommodate the appliances for
instructions, the space could be filled BS 715 or be assessed in accordance with which they are designed
with a weak insulating concrete such as Technical Requirement R3. Fireplace recesses should be constructed
mixtures of:
of solid non-combustible material as shown
- one part ordinary Portland cement
below:
to 20 parts suitable lightweight
expanded clay aggregate, minimally
wetted; or
- one part ordinary Portland cement to
6 parts Vermiculite; or
- one part ordinary Portland cement to
10 parts Perlite.

each leaf at least 100mm
minimum
50mm cavity
(b) connections to appliances Flue linings should be handled carefully to
The connection between a fireplace or prevent chipping or cracking.
at least appliance and the flue should be correctly
100mm Bends or tees should be purpose made for
constructed (see details in Appendix 6.8-C).
use with the lining system being installed.
throat unit connection
to raft lintel Flue linings should be sealed at their joint
FIREPLACE
at least 200mm
EXTERNAL WALL with the starter block or throat unit. No
cavity should be formed between the
reinforced concrete linings and the starter elements.
raft lintel flue liner
Flue linings should be installed socket up.
at least
200mm
Changes of direction of flue liners should
be formed using purpose made fittings.
INTERNAL WALL
offset using
pre-fabricated bends
fireplace surround
bend
45º maximum
weak
insulating
concrete
each leaf at least 100mm EXTERNAL WALL
The space between a fireback and any

flue pipe connection
masonry forming the recess should be to raft lintel
filled with vermiculite concrete (1 : 4, lime :

APPLIANCE flue
vermiculite with water). pipe
non- bend
combustible
Combustible material should not be placed rope
under a constructional hearth unless it is: CHIMNEY WITH FLUE LINERS SUITABLE FOR SOLID FUEL
• to support the edges of the hearth or 150mm
deep
• separated from the underside of the concrete Jointing material for flue liners should be
blanking
hearth by an airspace of at least 50mm panel built clamping
fire cement or refractory mortar, unless
into jambs
or ring the manufacturers’ instructions require an
• at least 250mm from the material to the alternative jointing to be used.
top of the hearth. (c) flue draught control unit Each joint should be fully filled and all
Where adjustable throat units are specified surplus material cleared from the inside of
Hearths should be at least the sizes shown
they should be fitted in accordance with each joint as the flue is built.
below. Hearths for freestanding appliances
manufacturers’ instructions. Adjustable
should be at least 840mm square.
6.8
flue draught control units are not (f) fire hazards
at least 150mm permitted where gas burning appliances Combustible materials close to any brick or
are installed. blockwork chimney should be:
• at least 200mm from a flue, or
(d) flue pipes • except in Scotland, 40mm from the face
Flue pipes should be fixed ‘socket up’ of the chimney.
and correctly aligned. Longer flue pipes
hearth
projection forming flues from gas appliances should This does not apply to a floorboard,
at least
500mm
hearth be supported at a maximum of 1.8m skirting, dado or picture rail, mantelshelf
centres and have support directly below or architrave.
each socket.
Metal fixings in contact with combustible
FLUES SOCKETED FLUE PIPE FLUE PIPE SERVING
A GAS APPLIANCE materials should be at least 50mm from
6.8 - S3 Flues shall provide an a flue.
unrestricted passage for combustion
gases between the fireplace or appliance 1.8m CHIMNEYS
maximum
and the outlet 45° 6.8 - S4 Chimneys shall provide fire
maximum
Items to be taken into account include: protective casing for flues, and shall be
(a) cleaning support capable of adequately supporting the
beneath
The bottom of flues not directly over an each socket flue liner and resisting damp penetration
appliance should be provided with a means and the products of combustion
of access for cleaning and inspection. Items to be taken into account include:
(a) stability
(e) flue liners Masonry chimneys should be properly
The space between flue liners and bonded to, or supported by, adjoining walls
masonry should be filled with weak of the building. The depth of chimney
insulating concrete or manufacturers’ foundations should be the same as any
recommendations with specified material adjacent wall foundation.
providing adequate protection.
The height H of an unrestrained chimney
Flue linings to chimneys should be clay or should not exceed 4½ times the least plan
purpose made concrete as specified by the dimension of the chimney W (see diagram),
design. provided the density of the masonry is at
least 1500kg/m3, unless designed by an

Engineer in accordance with Technical (e) drying ridge

terminal alternative
Requirement R5. A chimney should be allowed to dry outlet position
naturally for at least 14 days before use.
H H
(f) masonry chimneys
twin wall
BRICKS flue pipe with
supports at
w w
Frost resistant bricks should be used above 1.8m centres 45°
maximum maximum
the roof unless protected by a capping
projecting at least 50mm. In Scotland,
frost resistant bricks should be used for all offset transfer
(b) wall thickness block
facing brickwork.
Chimneys of block, brick or stone should
roof space
have a minimum wall thickness of 100mm Below roof level the bricks and mortar
excluding the lining thickness. may be the same as those used for general
brickwork.
A chimney forming part of a compartment
wall and not back to back with an adjacent Mortar should be as specified for areas
chimney should have a wall thickness of at of Severe and Very Severe exposure
least 200mm separating it from the other in Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’
building or dwelling. Appendix 6.1-C. (1 : ½ : 4 to 4½, cement :
lime : sand or 1 : 3 or 4, cement : sand with
Chimneys built in a cavity separating wall
plasticiser).
should form two leaves each of at least
100mm thickness between the flue and Sulfate resisting cement should be used in
adjoining building. the mortar where flue gases are liable to
affect the masonry, eg. above roof level.
(c) damp penetration
The damp proof course to the main walls BLOCKS
should be carried through the base of Hollow or cellular blocks, suitable for the first floor
chimneys. construction of chimneys, should only be 30º
Damp proof courses, flashings and gutters used if the voids are filled with concrete as
should be provided at the intersection the work proceeds.
lateral offset block
point of the chimney with the surface (g) flue block chimneys plain block
of the roof through which the chimney Gas flue block chimneys are only suitable
passes. for gas appliances. Their suitability
Metal elements making up dpcs and should be checked before connecting any
flashing should be compatible non-ferrous appliance.
6.8
metals. Lead trays should be bitumen Flue block chimneys should be lintel block
coated where in contact with cement. constructed, jointed and weather may be
Occasional damp penetration below roof proofed in accordance with the design one or
two piece
level may occur in chimneys which exit and manufacturers’ instructions. A high set starter block
close to the ridge of a pitched roof. This is standard of workmanship should be

ground floor
acceptable in a well ventilated roof space maintained to ensure that the flue is clean
provided that any dampness penetrating and sealed. ELEVATION SHOWING AN INDIVIDUAL FLUE TO A GAS FIRE
downwards is unlikely to reach the living

areas. Flue blocks should be correctly bonded to The design will show how the extra
the flanking masonry. thickness is incorporated by either:
Where chimneys exit close to the eaves of • increasing the overall width of the
a pitched roof or through a flat roof, trays Where gas flue blocks are shown in the
cavity, or
and flashings should be installed in the design they will be at least 140mm wide.
• making the flue block flush with the
chimney so that all damp penetration is This may be wider than the wall leaf.
inside of the cavity but projecting into
prevented. the room as a false chimney breast.
The weatherproofing details shown in
brick
Appendix 6.8-C should be used in Very
cavity
Severe and Severe exposure zones. In
lower exposure zones the tray upturn may block
be on the outside of the flue liner.

full or partial fill non-combustible false breast
(d) coring insulation (not polystyrene)
A core is a sack, full of loose straw or
the like, used to block the flue during the Where the cavity is shown to be reduced
construction of a chimney with circular the flue block should be protected by
linings. The core, which is attached to a a vertical dpm. The dpm should be
rope to pull it up the flue, keeps the flue supported by building in a layer of non-
clean and free of falling mortar and debris combustible insulation.
which may later form an impedance to
gases passing through the flue. Ensure
that the core is removed on completion of
the chimney.

vertical dpm flaunching, or one quarter the length of TESTING
brick
the terminal, whichever is the greater.
cavity
6.8 - S7 Installations shall be tested
flue terminal (chimney pot)
insulating block before use
plasterboard on dabs ALL FLUES
CAVITY WALL WITH INSULATING BLOCK All flues should be checked during
construction to ensure that there are no
50mm purpose-made
cavity vertical dpm capping obstructions in the flue and that mortar
or other blockages are removed. When the
brick
flue is complete, if practical a visual check
cavity
minimum
50mm
should be made and any obstructions
block projection cleared.
plasterboard on dabs
non-combustible insulation
(not polystyrene)
FLUES FOR SOLID FUEL APPLIANCES
CAVITY WALL WITH CAVITY INSULATION AND VERTICAL DPM
Coring ball test
Appendix 6.8-C gives details of brickwork When a visual test cannot be carried out or
Plaster should not be applied directly to capping. is inconclusive, the coring ball test should
flue blocks. A plasterboard lining with an be carried out.
(b) jointing
airspace or non-combustible insulation
The terminal of a masonry flue should A suitable concrete or metal ball is
behind should be provided. Insulated dry
be jointed to the flue lining with cement attached to a strong cord or rope. The ball
lining may be unsuitable in this situation
mortar to form a seal. is lowered slowly from the flue outlet to
unless separated from the flue block.
the bottom of the flue (the fireplace recess
(h) connection between flue block (c) size or the appliance connection). If a blockage
chimney and roof outlet Terminals should be the same cross or obstruction is found it must be removed
Connections between flue blocks and ridge sectional area as the flue which for solid and the test repeated until the flue is
terminals should be made as detailed in fuel is not less than 200mm diameter. completely clear of obstruction.
the design using the correct fittings and
(d) draught improvement Smoke test
supports as specified by the manufacturers
In cases where down draughts may occur, This test is designed to show that a flue
of the flue blocks, flue pipe and the ridge
special terminals designed to increase up draws adequately and that there are no
terminal. draught should be fitted. leaks between the appliance and the
ridge tile A special terminal will not overcome terminal.
adaptor
problems caused by high pressure zones. The smoke test is carried out when neither
line of support brackets at 1.8m
ridge maximum centres Where relevant, the Solid Fuel Association the flue to be tested nor adjacent flues are
tiles
or other authoritative body should be
in use. The flue is first warmed for about
consulted.
6.8
flue pipe
offset transfer
10 minutes with a heat source such as a
block
(e) chimney capping blow lamp. If an appliance is fitted it should
Where a chimney is to be capped, a single be completely closed as should any flue
unjointed concrete or stone capping should access doors.
be used. The capping should project and Two purpose made smoke pellets are
be throated to cast rainwater away from then placed in the appliance firebox or in
the face of the chimney. The slab should the bottom of the flue and ignited. The
project 50mm beyond the faces of the appliance, chimney or fireplace opening
chimney. The withes between flues should should then be closed or sealed off and
be carried to the underside of the slab. the smoke allowed to rise. When smoke
Decorative brick cappings should be appears at the top of the flue the outlet
carefully constructed to avoid rain should be sealed with a blow-up rubber
(i) factory-made insulated chimneys penetration and frost damage. The use ball or other air tight closing system.
Factory-made insulated chimneys of frost resistant bricks may be required. The whole structure forming the flue
should be assembled, erected, anchored All bricks used for facing brickwork in should be inspected externally on all sides
and protected in accordance with Scotland should be frost resistant. and from top to bottom for smoke leakage.
manufacturers’ instructions. This should include the top of cavity walls
PROVISION OF and any other possible smoke paths, even
TERMINALS COMBUSTION AIR those terminating some distance from the
flue. The test should be continued for at
6.8 -S5 Terminals shall assist the 6.8 - S6 Installations shall have least 5 minutes.
proper functioning of the flue an adequate supply of air to ensure
Terminals should be purpose made or satisfactory combustion of fuel and the FLUES FOR GAS APPLIANCES
formed by extending the flue lining not efficient working of flues and chimneys More sophisticated flue tests may be
less than 20mm above the head of the required for some gas appliances.
Combustion air is vital to the safe
chimney. Various terminals are shown in These tests should be carried out by the
and efficient operation of appliances.
Appendix 6.8-C. appliance installer.
Reference should be made to Appendix
Items to be taken into account include: 6.8-A. FLUES FOR OIL APPLIANCES
(a) stability Flues for oil fired appliances should
Terminals should be embedded at least be tested as required by the appliance
125mm into the chimney excluding any manufacturer.

Appendix 6.8-A
Provision of combustion air
Solid fuel up to 45kW output Gas * Oil
Open Closed appliance ** Up to 70kW input Up to 45kW output
England, Wales and Isle 50% of throat area*** 550mm2/kW above 5kW 500mm2/kW above 7kW input 550mm2/kW above 5kW
of Man rating for an appliance in a room rating for an appliance in a
or space room or space
Scotland 1500mm2 for fireplaces up As England and Wales As BS 5440: Part 2 (as As England and Wales
to 450mm wide (measured England and Wales)
between firebricks), for
fireplaces exceeding 450mm
width manufacturers’ details
should be followed
Northern Ireland As England and Wales 550mm2 up to 6kW rating. 450mm2 up to 8kW. Over As solid fuel closed appliance
Over 6kW add 550mm2 for 8kW add 450mm2 for each
each kW above 6kW. kW above 8kW
Notes:
Full details of ventilation requirements for all types of appliances are contained in the relevant building regulations.
* Decorative fuel effect gas appliances should have a provision for combustion air complying with the relevant part of BS 5871.
Normally a minimum of 10,000mm2 of purpose provided ventilation is required. Air vents should be direct to the external air or to an adjacent
room or internal space which has an air vent or vents to the external air of at least the same free area. Air vents should have aperture
dimensions no smaller than 5mm.
** Where closed appliances use a flue fitted with a draught stabiliser the total free area should be increased to 300mm2/kW for the first 5kW
plus 850mm2/kW for the balance of appliance output.
***In the case of a fire with a canopy the open air vents should be 50% of the flue area.
Appendix 6.8-B
Minimum sizes for flues contained in chimneys
6.8
Solid fuel burning appliance up to 45kW output

Serving Minimum flue size [mm]
Fireplace recess with an opening up to 500mm x 550mm 200 diameter or square section of equivalent area
Fireplace with larger opening See approved Document J
Closed appliance up to 20kW rated output burning smokeless fuel 125 diameter or square section of equivalent area
Closed appliance up to 30kW rated output burning any fuel 150 diameter or square section of equivalent area
Closed appliance above 30kW and up to 50kW rated output burning any fuel 175 diameter or square section of equivalent area
Non fan-assisted individually flued gas burning appliances up to 70kW input excluding balanced flue
Serving Minimum flue size
Gas fire Round flue with a cross-sectional area of at least 12,000mm2 (125mm diameter) or rectangular flue with a cross-sectional area of at least
16,500mm2 with minimum dimension of 90mm
Any other At least the cross-sectional area of the outlet from the appliance
Inset live or decorative gas fuel effect appliances

Serving Minimum flue size
Open fire within a fireplace opening up to 500mm x 550mm Circular or rectangular minimum flue dimension 175mm
Oil burning appliances up to 45kW output

Not less than the size of the appliance outlet

Appendix 6.8-C
Typical construction details
KEY TO TERMS
flue and chimney terminal flue and chimney terminal
ridge terminal
flue pipe in separating flue

roof space wall
flue
lining
roof space roof space roof space
6.8
masonry masonry
gas flue chimney chimney
blocks as containing containing
part of the a flue a flue
wall
first floor first floor
flue pipe
gas
appliance free standing open hearth
solid fuel appliance
PARTY WALL EXTERNAL WALL EXTERNAL WALL

For weathering detail see Detail C

DETAILS OF EXTERNAL CHIMNEY
BREAST WITH MASONRY INNER LEAF
Other alternatives may be suitable
provided they meet the appropriate
Performance Standards.
joists
supported
on hangers
*in Scotland, joists, etc
should be at least
200mm from inner
surface of flue. Brickwork
or blockwork in chimney
construction should be at
least 100mm thick and
have a density of at least
1600 kg/m3. Aircrete
blocks may be used if at
least 150mm thick
40mm air space between

for weathering details see Detail C combustible material and
100mm thick masonry*
.
6.8
for brick capping,

see Detail B
cavity
prefabricated
throating
cavity
tray
see also Detail A

DETAIL A DETAIL B
flaunching
Freeze/thaw
resistant
(F2,S1) bricks
1100mm approx
CHIMNEY DETAIL WITH BRICK CAPPING
690 to 840mm
350mm
APPLIANCES RECESS -
WITH RAFT LINTEL, SUITABLE FOR FREE STANDING ROOM HEATER
6.8
vermiculite
concrete
350mm VARIOUS TERMINALS

690 to 840mm (see Clause S5)
FIREPLACE RECESS -
FOR INSET OPEN FIRE (WITHOUT BOILER UNIT)

DETAIL C TYPICAL EXTERNAL FIREPLACE

RECESS AND CHIMNEY - TIMBER
Weatherproofing details recommended for FRAME CONSTRUCTION
use in Very Severe and Severe exposure
zones.
In other exposure zones the dpc tray can
be dressed up the outside of the flue liner. 200mm minimum
All other details are the same.

Note: All flashings and trays in chimneys to
be metal (see Clause M11).
floor joist above
100mm mineral wool fire
minimum stop between frame
and chimney
PLAN OF RECESS
*at least 40mm air space

if wall of chimney is less
than 200mm
dpc at front
apron level
*In Scotland, joists etc,

should be at least 200mm
from inner surface of flue.
Brickwork or blockwork in
CHIMNEY ON OUTSIDE WALL chimney construction should
be at least 100mm thick and
have a density of at least
1600kg/m3. Aircrete blocks
may be used if at least
150mm thick
movement gap between

saddle timber and masonry to be
filled with mineral wool
timber lintel must be at least

6.8
300mm from inner face of

flue recess
cavity maintained
around chimney with
cavity wall ties as
required
cripple studs to lintel, gap

to brickwork filled with
mineral wool
CHIMNEY STACK AT RIDGE
hearth at least 125mm thick
head fixings
COMBINED WITH DPC TRAY

AND FLASHING
*at least 40mm airspace if non-
combustible material around flue
is less than 200mm thick
PLAN OF CHIMNEY AT UPPER FLOOR LEVEL

Appendix 6.8-D
Flue outlet positions for solid fuel appliances

Point where flue passes through Clearance to flue outlet
weather surface (Notes 1,2)
A
D A at or within 600m of the ridge. at least 600mm above the ridge.
B elsewhere on a roof (whether pitched or at least 2300mm horizontally from the

B flat) nearest point on the weather surface and:
C a) at least 1000mm above the highest
point of intersection of the chimney and
the weather surface: or
b) at least as high as the ridge.
C below (on a pitched roof) or within at least 1000mm above the top of the
2300mm horizontally to an openable opening.
rooflight, dormer window or other
opening, (Note 3)
D within 2300mm of an adjoining or at least 600mm above the adjacent

adjacent building, whether or not beyond building.
the boundary, (Note 3)
Notes
1 The weather surface is the building external surface, such as its roof, tiles or
external walls.
2 A flat roof has a pitch less than 10°.
3 The clearance given for A or B, as appropriate, will also apply.
6.8

Appendix 6.8-E
Location of outlets from flues servicing gas appliances
P
600mm
Flue should not penetrate
shaded area
roof window
or opening
600mm
boundary
2000mm
Q
I
B D,E
C
H
F
J
N
A
L
M
H
G
I H
boundary K
6.8

Location of outlets from flues serving gas appliances
Minimum separation distances for terminals in mm
Location Balanced flue Open flue
Natural draught Fanned draught Natural draught Fanned draught
A Below an opening (1) Appliance rated heat input (net) 300 (3) 300
0-7kW 300
>7-14kW 600
>14-32kW 1500
>32kW 2000
B Above an opening (1) 0-32kW 300 300 (3) 300

>32kW 600
C Horizontally to an opening 0-7kW 300 300 (3) 300

(1)
>7-14kW 400
>14kW 600
D Below gutters, soil pipes or 300 75 (3) 75

drain pipes
E Below eaves 300 200 (3) 200
F Below balcony or car port 600 200 (3) 200

roof
G From a vertical drainpipe or 300 150 (4) (3) 150

soil pipe
H From an internal or external 600 300 (3) 200

corner or to a boundary
alongside the terminal (2)
I Above ground, roof or 300 300 (3) 300

balcony level
J From a surface or a 600 600 (3) 600

boundary facing the
terminal (2)
K From a terminal facing the 600 1200 (3) 1200

terminal
6.8
L From an opening in the car 1200 1200 (3) 1200
port into the building
M Vertically from a terminal 1200 1500 (3) 1500

on the same wall
N Horizontally from a 300 300 (3) 300

terminal on the same wall
P From a structure on the N/A N/A 1500mm if a ridge terminal. N/A

roof For any other terminal, as
given in BS 5440-1:2000
Q Above the highest point of N/A Site in accordance with Site in accordance with 150
intersection with the roof manufacturer’s instructions BS 5440-1:2000
Notes:
1 An opening here means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a fixed opening such as an air vent. However, in addition, the
outlet should not be nearer than 150mm (fanned draught) or 300mm (natural draught) to an opening into the building fabric formed for the
purpose of accommodating a built in element, such as a window frame.
2 Boundary as defined in Paragraph 0.4 of Approved Document J: smaller separations to the boundary may be acceptable for appliances that
have been shown to operate safely with such separations from surfaces adjacent to or opposite the flue outlet.
3 Should not be used.
4 This dimension may be reduced to 75mm for appliances of up to 5kW input (net).
5 N/A means not applicable.

Appendix 6.8-F
Location of outlets from flues serving oil-fired appliances
P
O
boundary
N
F C,D
J
B
A
H K
E F
G F L
boundary
Minimum separation distances for terminals in mm

Location of outlet (1) Appliance Appliance with
with vaporising burner
pressure
jet burner
A Below an opening (2, 3) 600 should not be used
B Horizontally to an opening (2, 3) 600 should not be used
C Below a plastic/painted gutter, drainage pipe or eaves if 75 should not be used
combustible material protected (4)
D Below a balcony or a plastic/painted gutter, drainage pipe or 600 should not be used
6.8
eaves without protection to combustible material

E From vertical sanitary pipework 300 should not be used
F From an external or internal corner or from a surface or 300 should not be used
boundary alongside the terminal
G Above ground or balcony level 300 should not be used
H From a surface or boundary facing the terminal 600 should not be used
J From a terminal facing the terminal 1200 should not be used
K Vertically from a terminal on the same wall 1500 should not be used
L Horizontally from a terminal on the same wall 750 should not be used
M Above the highest point of an intersection with the roof 600 (6) 1000 (5)
N From a vertical structure to the side of the terminal 750 (6) 2300
O Above a vertical structure which is less than 750mm (pressure 600 (6) 1000 (5)
jet burner) or 2300mm (vaporising burner) horizontally from
the side of the terminal
P From a ridge terminal to a vertical structure on the roof 1500 should not be used
Notes:
1 Terminals should only be positioned on walls where appliances have been approved for
such configurations when tested in accordance with BS EN 303-1:1999 or OFTEC standards
OFS A100 or OFS A101.
2 An opening means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a permanently
open air vent.
3 Notwithstanding the dimensions above, a terminal should be at least 300mm from
combustible material, e.g. a window frame.
4 A way of providing protection of combustible material would be to fit a heat shield at least
750mm wide.
5 Where a terminal is used with a vaporising burner, the terminal should be at least 2300mm
horizontally from the roof.
6 Outlets for vertical balanced flues in locations M, N and O should be in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.

INDEX
A G W
Appliances 3, 4 Gas appliances 3, 6, 9, 10 Walls 1, 8, 11
B H Weather resistance 2, 5
Back boilers 3 Hearths 1, 3, 4, 6
Balanced flues 4 Height 2, 15, 16, 17
Bricks and blocks 5, 8 M
C Masonry chimneys 3, 8
Cappings 3, 9, 12, 13 Mortar 6
Chimney breasts 12, 14 O
Chimney pots 2 Oil appliances 9, 10
Chimneys 2, 3, 4, 7, 12, Outlets, position 2, 4, 5, 8, 9
13, 14
P
Cleaning, flues 2, 7
Pressure zones 2
Combustion air 1, 3, 4, 9, 10
R
Coring 8
Recesses 1, 13, 14
D Render 2
Damp penetration 4, 8
S
Damp proof courses 2, 6, 14
Smoke test 9
Draught control unit 7
Solid fuel 1, 3, 9, 10
F Solid fuel effect appliances 3, 10
Fire hazards 1, 2, 7
Stability 2, 5, 7, 9
Fireplaces 1, 3, 4, 6 12,
Stone masonry 5
13, 14
T
Flashings 6, 14
Terminals 2, 4, 5, 6, 13
Flue block chimneys 3, 6, 8, 9
Testing 9
Flue direction and length 2, 3, 4
Timber frame construction 5
Flue liners 2, 3, 5, 6, 7
Twin wall flue systems 6
Flue pipes 1, 3, 4, 7, 10
Flue size 1, 2, 3, 4, 10
6.8
Foundations 2
Frost resistance 2

Chapter 6.9
Curtain walling and cladding
CONTENTS
Clause Page
Rainscreen cladding
INTRODUCTION 1
Weather resistance S12 10
DESIGN
Allowance for movement S13 11
Tolerances S14 11
Design life D3 2
Insulated render systems
Accessibility for maintenance D4 2
Fixing S15 11
Curtain walling
Tolerances S17 12
Certification D5 2
In-service performance D6 2
Brick slip cladding systems
Fixing S18 12
Rainscreen cladding
Certification D7 3
Tolerances S20 13
APPENDIX 6.9-A
Insulated render systems
Interfaces 13
Certification D9 5
INDEX 14
Brick slip cladding systems

Certification D11 6
In-service performance D12 6 SCOPE
General This Chapter gives guidance on meeting the Technical

6.9
Provision of information D13-D14 7 Requirements and recommendations for curtain walling and
cladding.
MATERIALS
Dpc/dpm materials M2 8
Glazing M3 8
Gaskets M4 8
Sealant M5 8
Fixings M9 8
Timber preservation M10 8
Ventilation screens M11 8
SITEWORK
Sitework standards S1-S2 9
Handling and storage S3 9
Curtain walling
Glazing S6 9
Control of condensation S7 9
Allowance for movement S8 9
Tolerances S9 9
Testing S10 10

Curtain walling and cladding 6.9
INTRODUCTION STONE & PRECAST
This Chapter gives guidance on the forms
CONCRETE CLADDING
of curtain walling and cladding acceptable Stone & precast concrete cladding
to NHBC. Curtain walling and cladding should be designed as curtain walling or
systems that do not conform to the rainscreen cladding and comply with the
following descriptions will not normally be relevant section of this Chapter.
acceptable to NHBC.
Guidance on the use of other types of DEFINITIONS (FOR THIS
cladding including brickwork, rendered CHAPTER)
masonry, vertical tile & slate cladding and
timber cladding is given in Chapter 6.1 Air barrier
‘External masonry walls’ and Chapter 6.2 A continuous layer that limits air leakage
‘External timber framed walls’. through the backing wall.
Air gap
CURTAIN WALLING The space between the back of the
typical rainscreen cladding system cladding panels and the external face of
This Chapter deals with the following
the insulation in a rainscreen system.
curtain walling systems:
• prefabricated or site assembled support Air cushion
framework with infill panels or INSULATED RENDER Balancing external and internal air
• prefabricated factory assembled wall pressure to create a cushion within the
This Chapter deals with insulated render
sections and glazing systems that air gap.
systems that are fixed to all types of
include:
backing wall.
- structural silicone glazing Backing wall
- mechanically fixed structural glazing A framed or masonry wall to which the
- slope glazing (excluding patent cladding system is fixed.
glazing).
Brick slip cladding system
Conservatories are not covered by this A brick slip system fixed to masonry or
Chapter. framed backing walls, normally supported
by a proprietary carrier.
Cavity
The space between the cladding system
and the backing wall. The cavity should be
6.9
adequately drained, and where required by
the design, be ventilated.
Compartmentation
The provision of baffles and cavity closers
to form compartments within the air gap
of a rainscreen cladding system, to achieve
typical insulated render system
pressure equalisation. Cavity barriers
that are provided to control the spread of
smoke and fire may also be used to form
BRICK SLIP CLADDING the compartments.
This Chapter deals with brick slip cladding Curtain walling

systems that are fixed to all types of A form of vertical building enclosure that
backing wall. supports no load other than its own weight
and the environmental forces that act
Typical curtain walling system upon it, e.g. wind, water and solar. Curtain
walling also includes slope glazing.
RAINSCREEN CLADDING Curtain walling system

The vertical building enclosure system,
This Chapter deals with rainscreen including all frames, brackets, fixings,
cladding systems that comprise: flashings, gutters, copings, glass, panels,
• an outer skin of panels, which have gaskets and sealant that form the
open, baffled, or labyrinth (rebated) assembly.
joints. Joints should not be sealed
• a pressure equalised air gap at least CWCT
38mm wide between the insulation and The Centre for Window and Cladding
the panels Technology at Bath University.
• an insulated airtight backing wall.
CWCT Standards
The current CWCT Standard for curtain
walling and the current CWCT Standard for
Typical brick slip cladding system ventilated rainscreens.

Design life Rainscreen cladding system (b) secondary components

The period for which materials, products A multi-layer façade fixed to the outside Secondary components should be
and systems should be designed to be face of a building that provides a barrier designed and specified to provide
durable, assuming routine inspection and to wind and rain. The system normally satisfactory in-service performance for at
maintenance. includes a vapour control layer, air least 25 years.
barrier, supporting framework and fixings,
Dpc/Dpm
Horizontal or vertical damp-proof course/
insulation, breather membrane, cavity/air ACCESSIBILITY FOR
gap and cladding panels.
membrane to prevent the passage of MAINTENANCE
moisture. In curtain walling terminology, a Traditional tile hanging and timber
dpc is sometimes referred to as a dpm. 6.9 - D4 Appropriate arrangements
cladding are not rainscreen cladding
shall be provided for the purposes of
systems as defined in this Chapter.
Façade cleaning, inspection, maintenance and
The face of a building which forms the Secondary components repair
outer appearance. Internal linings, external finishes, window Provision should be made for safe future
and door furniture, glazing, gaskets, seals access to the façade. Access should
Fire and smoke stopping
and sealant. normally be provided from a safe working
Preventing the transmission of fire and
smoke through voids or cavities in the platform such as a cradle or mobile
Separating floor elevating platform.
curtain walling or cladding assembly. A floor that separates flats or rooms for
residential purposes. Appropriate arrangements should be made
Fixing for the replacement of failed insulating
A component which is used to attach the Separating wall glass units without incurring excessive
curtain walling or cladding system to the costs for gaining access.
A wall that separates adjoining dwelling
structure.
houses, flats or rooms for residential
Gasket purposes. Curtain walling
A compressible material that forms an
Slope glazing
air and water seal at joints between
A drained and ventilated sloped roofing
CERTIFICATION
components.
system. 6.9 - D5 Curtain walling systems
In-service performance shall be designed and certificated in
The manner or quality of functioning for a Test pressures accordance with appropriate Standards
material, product or system in use. The pressures at which testing is carried
out in accordance with the design. Curtain walling systems should have
certification confirming satisfactory
Insulated render system
Vapour control layer assessment in accordance with the
A proprietary render system applied to the
A layer that restricts the passage of water CWCT Standard for Curtain Walling by
external face of an insulation material that
vapour into the construction to reduce the an appropriate independent technical
is in turn fixed to the backing wall.
approvals authority accepted by NHBC.
6.9
risk of interstitial condensation.

Interstitial condensation The CWCT Standard provides detailed
Condensation caused by vapour guidance on performance and testing.
condensing on colder surfaces within the Other certification bodies or test
wall construction.
DESIGN STANDARDS documentation may be acceptable if they
are considered by NHBC to be a suitable
Negative pressure
6.9 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical alternative.
Where the air pressure on the internal face
of the system is greater than that on the Requirements
The certification, together with all test
external face. Design that follows the guidance below documentation should be made available
will be acceptable for curtain walling and to NHBC before work on the curtain walling
Positive pressure cladding. or cladding begins on site.
Where the air pressure on the external
face of the system is greater than that on The use of the system should be within
the internal face. STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS the scope of the certification and test
6.9 - D2 Design shall comply with all documentation.
Primary components
Framing, panels, fixings, insulation, vapour
control layers and weathering components. Design should be in accordance with
IN-SERVICE PERFORMANCE
relevant Building Regulations and other 6.9 - D6 Curtain walling systems shall
Pressure equalisation statutory requirements. be designed and specified to ensure
The creation of an air cushion within the adequate in-service performance
cavity to significantly reduce the amount
of water passing through the joints of DESIGN LIFE Items to be taken into account include:
a rainscreen. Compartmentation and 6.9 - D3 Design shall provide (a) loads, movement, brackets and
adequately large joints are required to satisfactory in-service performance fixings
achieve pressure equalisation. Dead and live loads should be transferred
subject to routine inspection and
safely to the building’s structure without
maintenance
Rainscreen undue permanent deformation or
The part of the assembly (normally the Items to be taken into account include: deflection of any component.
outermost) that prevents the majority of (a) primary components
rain from penetrating the wall. Imposed loads should be calculated in
Primary components should be designed accordance with BS 6399 and take account
Some water may pass through the joints of and specified to provide satisfactory in- of both internal and external pressures,
a rainscreen, but appropriate detailing of service performance for the design life of together with the location, shape and size
open joints or the provision of baffled or the building. See Technical Requirement R3. of the building.
labyrinth joints should limit the amount.

Thermal-induced loads due to differential Pre-formed factory-moulded ‘picture (i) durability
stresses caused by temperature gradients frame’ type vulcanised epdm or silicone The curtain walling system should be
within materials or components should be internal gaskets should be used for all constructed with corrosion resistant or
accommodated without any reduction in curtain walling systems. adequately protected materials. The risk of
performance. The stresses in components bimetallic corrosion should be avoided by
Sealant should be specified in accordance
and materials should not exceed the the isolation of dissimilar metals.
with BS 6213 and the manufacturer’s
permissible values recommended by the
recommendations. Aluminium components should be
product manufacturer.
separated from direct contact with
(e) condensation
Movement within the curtain walling cementitious surfaces.
The curtain walling system should be
should be accommodated without any
designed to minimise the risk of surface The curtain walling system should not
reduction in performance. Causes of
and interstitial condensation by the use of include materials liable to infestation
movement include:
thermal breaks and a continuous vapour attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects
• dead and live loads
control layer. or vermin.
• changes in temperature
• changes in the moisture content of Thermal bridging should be controlled to Where timber is used it should be treated
components ensure no part of the curtain wall is more in accordance with the guidance in Chapter
• freezing of retained moisture at risk of surface condensation forming 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid
• creep. than the glazing. timber)’. Timber should only be used
where it can be easily inspected and
Fixings and supports should be designed (f) acoustic performance
replaced without disturbing the curtain
to accommodate specified loads and take Noise from the curtain walling system
walling system.
account of the product manufacturer’s caused by loads, movements and changes
recommendations. in the environmental conditions should be (j) tolerances
accommodated without being intrusive. Design should allow for the line, level,
Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors
plumb and plane of the completed curtain
and fixings should be carried out in The curtain walling system should be
wall to be within reasonable tolerances.
accordance with the design, BS 5080 designed to resist the passage of airborne
and the Construction Fixings Association and impact sound within the building. Acceptable tolerances would normally be:
Guidance Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing Particular attention should be given to • +/- 2mm in any one storey height or
Construction Fixings’. Tests should be flanking transmission at: structural bay width and
carried out at a suitable rate agreed with • the edges of separating floors • +/- 5mm overall.
NHBC. The test results should be made • the outer ends of separating walls
available to NHBC. • the outer ends of partition walls Rainscreen cladding
• the junctions with roof constructions
Packing of brackets to achieve surface
tolerance should be permitted only
and parapets. CERTIFICATION
in accordance with the product (g) testing 6.9 - D7 Rainscreen cladding systems
6.9
manufacturer’s recommendations. Air and water testing of the ‘prototype’ shall be designed and certificated in
curtain walling system should be carried accordance with appropriate Standards
(b) insulating glass units
out in accordance with and pass the CWCT
Insulating glass units should be in Rainscreen cladding systems, including
Standard (test sequence A or B) tested at a
accordance with Chapter 6.7 ‘Doors, panels, should have current certification
test pressure of 600 Pascals. Panels tested
windows and glazing’. confirming satisfactory assessment by
should be of similar size and configuration
(c) weather resistance to those to be used on the building. an appropriate independent technical
The curtain walling system, including approvals authority accepted by NHBC,
Where the maximum calculated design including: British Board of Agrément (BBA)
doors, windows and other openings, should
wind pressure is above 2400 Pascals the or Building Research Establishment (BRE)
resist the passage of water to the inside of
test pressure should be increased to 0.25 x Certification.
the building, allow free drainage and not
the design wind pressure.
trap water. It should have: Systems that are assessed and certificated
• external and internal air and water seals, The ‘prototype’ should remain watertight by an appropriate independent technical
and during and after the test. approvals organisation in accordance
• drained and ventilated glazing rebates. with the CWCT Standard for Walls with
At a test pressure of 600 Pascals an air
Particular attention should be given to Ventilated Rainscreens will normally be
infiltration rate no higher than
the interfaces between the curtain walling acceptable to NHBC.
1.5m3/hr/m2 for fixed glazed panels is
system and other elements or cladding permissible provided there is no evidence Other certification bodies or test
systems. of concentrated leakage. documentation, may be acceptable if they
External and internal air and water seals are considered by NHBC to be a suitable
Wind resistance, serviceability and safety
and a drained ventilated cavity should be alternative.
testing should be carried out in accordance
provided at all interfaces. Guidance on with the CWCT Standard. The certification, together with all test
interfaces is provided in Appendix 6.9-A. documentation should be made available
(h) electrical continuity and earth
(d) air infiltration to NHBC before work on the rainscreen
bonding
Appropriate gaskets and sealants should begins on site.
The curtain walling system should
be used to resist the flow of air from the comply with BS 7671 ‘Requirements for The use of the system should be within
outside to the interior surface of the Electrical Installations, formerly IEE Wiring the scope of the certification and test
curtain walling system. Particular attention Regulations’ and BS 6651 ‘Code of Practice documentation.
should be given to the interfaces between for Protection of Structures against
the curtain walling system and the walls, Lightning’.
roof, doors, windows and cladding system.

IN-SERVICE PERFORMANCE (b) weather resistance A screen to prevent birds and animals

The design should ensure that water is entering the cavity should be provided at
6.9 - D8 Rainscreen cladding systems prevented from reaching any parts of the the top and bottom of the rainscreen and
shall be designed and specified to ensure wall that could be adversely affected by penetrations through the cladding.
adequate in-service performance the presence of moisture.
(c) insulation
Items to be taken into account include: Sealants should be specified in accordance Where insulation forms part of the
(a) loads, movement and fixings with BS 6213 and the manufacturer’s rainscreen cladding system it should cover
Dead and live loads should be transferred recommendations. all exposed areas of the backing wall, be
safely to the building’s structure without neatly cut around fixings and brackets and
The minimum width for air gaps should be:
undue permanent deformation or be fixed in accordance with the product
• 50mm for panels with open joints
deflection of any component. manufacturer’s recommendations.
• 38mm for panels with baffled or
Imposed loads should be calculated in labyrinth (rebated) joints.
accordance with BS 6399 and take account 50mm (min) 38mm (min)
of the location, shape and size of the
building.
Thermal-induced loads due to differential
stresses caused by temperature gradients
within materials or components should be
accommodated without any reduction in
performance. The stresses in components
and materials should not exceed the
permissible values recommended by the
product manufacturer.
Movement within the rainscreen cladding
movement include: open joints baffled or labyrinth
(rebated) joints
• changes in temperature The air gap should be adequately insulation neatly fitted
• changes in the moisture content of ventilated. Dpc/dpm trays with stop ends between support frame
components should be provided above openings, at the

• freezing of retained moisture base of the rainscreen and at interfaces Where the insulation is fixed to the backing
• creep. where necessary, to ensure water is wall a minimum of one non-combustible
drained to the outside. fixing per square metre or per insulation
Fixing rails, frames, fixings and fasteners batt, whichever is the lesser, should be
6.9
should be designed to accommodate Particular attention should be given to the provided in addition to the other fixings.
specified loads and take account of the interface between the rainscreen cladding
system and the walls, roof, doors, windows, Reference should be made to BRE
product manufacturer’s recommendations. document BR135 - 2003 ‘Fire performance
other cladding systems, and curtain
Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors walling. External and internal air and water of external thermal insulation for walls of
and fixings should be carried out in seals should be provided at all interfaces. multi-storey buildings’ when specifying the
Guidance on interfaces is provided in type of insulation system to be installed.
accordance with the design, BS 5080
and the Construction Fixings Association Appendix 6.9-A. The design should ensure that the
Guidance Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing Open, baffled or labyrinth (rebated) joints insulation is continuous around
Construction Fixings’. Tests should be should normally have a minimum opening penetrations through the rainscreen
carried out at a suitable rate agreed with of 10mm. cladding system.
NHBC. The test results should be made
Where the rainscreen panel joints are open
available to NHBC.
and the performance of the insulation
Bonded fixings should be specified only could be diminished by moisture, a
where there is no suitable alternative and breather membrane should be provided
10mm (min) open joint
should be designed in accordance with the over the outer face of the insulation.
product manufacturer’s recommendations. (d) thermal bridging and condensation
Packing of the supporting rails, The rainscreen cladding system should be
frame or the panel fixings to achieve designed to minimise the risk of thermal
surface tolerance should be permitted bridging and, surface and interstitial
only in accordance with the product condensation.
manufacturer’s recommendations. 10mm (min) baffled joint A vapour control layer should be provided
unless a condensation risk analysis in
The air gap between the face of the
accordance with BS 5250 shows that one
insulation and the back of the rainscreen
is not necessary. The vapour control layer
panels should be of sufficient width to
should be fixed on the warm side of the
allow any water passing the joints to run wall insulation.
down the back of the rainscreen panels
and be discharged externally without (e) air infiltration
10mm (min) labyrinth (rebated) joint
wetting the insulation or the backing wall. The rainscreen cladding system should be
fixed to a backing wall that is reasonably
The design should avoid the need for airtight, e.g:
disproportionate work when repairing or
replacing individual components.

• masonry walls jointed to a high standard Aluminium components should be Movement joints in the backing wall should
with all joints filled separated from direct contact with be continued through the insulated render
• framed walls with a rigid sheathing on cementitious surfaces. system and formed in accordance with the
the cavity face with all joints taped or manufacturer’s recommendations.
The rainscreen cladding system should
sealed.
not include materials liable to infestation Fixing rails, frames, mechanical and
Where reasonable airtightness cannot be attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects bonded fixings should be designed
achieved, a separate continuous vapour or vermin. to accommodate specified loads and
permeable air barrier with joints taped or take account of the manufacturer’s
(j) tolerances
sealed should be provided on the outer recommendations.
The design should allow for the line,
face of the backing wall.
level, plumb and plane of the completed Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors
(f) compartmentation rainscreen cladding system to be within and fixings should be carried out in
The rainscreen cladding should be reasonable tolerances for the materials accordance with the design, BS 5080
designed as a pressure equalised system. involved. and the Construction Fixings Association
Guidance Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing
The cavity should be compartmented by: Acceptable tolerances would normally
Construction Fixings’. Tests should be
• a horizontal cavity closer at each floor be +/- 3mm in any one storey height or
carried out at a suitable rate agreed with
level, and structural bay width.
NHBC. The test results should be made
• vertical cavity closers at centres not
available to NHBC.
exceeding 6.0m, Insulated render systems
• vertical cavity closers at centres not (b) weather resistance
exceeding 1.5m within 6.0m of an CERTIFICATION Insulated render systems, together with
internal or external corner, and the backing wall to which they are applied,
• a vertical cavity closer as close as 6.9 - D9 Insulated render systems should satisfactorily resist the passage of
possible to an external corner, normally shall be designed and certificated in moisture to the inside of the building.
within 300mm. accordance with appropriate Standards
For timber and steel framed backing
1.5m (max) Insulated render systems should walls a cavity of at least 15mm should
6.0m (max)
have current certification confirming be provided between the wall and the
satisfactory assessment by an appropriate insulation to allow any moisture to drain
independent technical approvals authority away.
accepted by NHBC, including: British Board
of Agrément (BBA) or Building Research Where the backing wall is timber framed
horizontal cavity
closer at each Establishment (BRE) Certification. the cavity should be ventilated in
floor level
accordance with Chapter 6.2 ‘External
IN-SERVICE PERFORMANCE timber framed walls’ (Design).
steel frame timber frame
This compartmentation is in addition 6.9 - D10 Insulated render systems
6.9
to the requirements of the Building shall be designed and specified to ensure
Regulations for cavity barriers to control adequate in-service performance
the spread of smoke and fire. However, the Items to be taken into account include:
same cavity barriers may be used for the (a) loads, movement and fixings
compartmentation. Dead and live loads should be transferred
(g) acoustic performance safely to the building’s structure without
undue permanent deformation or
Noise from the rainscreen cladding system
deflection of any component.
caused by rain striking the outer surface of
panels should be accommodated without Imposed loads should be calculated in
being intrusive e.g. by the use of noise accordance with BS 6399 and take account 15mm (min) 15mm (min) drained
absorbing or anti-drumming material. of the location, shape and size of the drained cavity and ventilated cavity
building.
(h) electrical continuity and earth The introduction of a cavity is likely to
bonding Thermal-induced loads due to differential increase the risk of impact damage to
The rainscreen cladding system should stresses caused by temperature gradients vulnerable areas of the insulated render
comply with BS 7671 ‘Requirements for within materials or components should be system, e.g. at low level, around balconies
Electrical Installations, formerly IEE Wiring accommodated without any reduction in and where cradle systems, etc. can come
Regulations’ and BS 6651 ‘Code of Practice performance. The stresses in components into contact with the façade. Suitable
for Protection of Structures against and materials should not exceed the precautions to resist impact damage
Lightning’. permissible values recommended by the should be included in the design e.g. by
manufacturer. the provision of a rigid board behind the
(i) durability insulation whilst maintaining the cavity.
The rainscreen cladding system should Movement within the insulated render
be designed with corrosion resistant, system should be accommodated without Dpc/dpm trays with stop ends should be
adequately protected or durable materials. any reduction in performance. Causes of provided above openings, above cavity
movement include: barriers, at the base of the insulated
Fixings and bracketry should normally be • dead and live loads render system and at interfaces where
stainless steel or a suitable non-ferrous • changes in temperature necessary to ensure water is drained to
metal. • changes in the moisture content of the outside. The insulated render support
components system should not obstruct the drainage
The risk of bimetallic corrosion should
• freezing of retained moisture paths.
be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar
• creep.
metals. Insulated render systems can be applied
direct to concrete panels or masonry

backing walls without a cavity being (e) reinforcement IN-SERVICE PERFORMANCE

provided. Reinforcement mesh should be included
in the design in accordance with the 6.9 - D12 Brick slip cladding systems
Particular attention should be given to the shall be designed and specified to ensure
interfaces between the insulated render adequate in-service performance
Typically, reinforcement mesh should also
system and the walls, roof, doors, windows,
be provided at points where there is a Items to be taken into account include:
other cladding systems and curtain walling.
Guidance on interfaces is provided in likelihood of increased stress in the render (a) loads, movement and fixings
Appendix 6.9-A. system, e.g. at the corners of window or Dead and live loads should be transferred
door openings. safely to the building’s structure without
Sealants and tapes should be specified undue permanent deformation or
in accordance with BS 6213 and the Appropriate trims should be provided at
deflection of any component.
manufacturer’s recommendations. openings, corners, angles, interfaces and
movement joints in accordance with the Imposed loads should be calculated in
Where appropriate, a screen to prevent manufacturer’s recommendations. accordance with BS 6399 and take account
birds and animals entering the cavity of the location, shape and size of the
should be provided at the top and bottom (f) render
building.
of the cavity and to penetrations through Proprietary render systems should
the cladding. be specified in accordance with the Thermal-induced loads due to differential
manufacturer’s recommendations and stresses caused by temperature gradients
(c) insulation
include the correct number and thickness within materials or components should be
The insulation type should be suitable for
of render coats. accommodated without any reduction in
the intended purpose and be appropriately
performance. The stresses in components
keyed to receive the render finish. Corners, returns and features should
and materials should not exceed
be formed with appropriate trims in
The insulated render system should permissible values recommended by the
accordance with the manufacturer’s
be securely fixed to the support frame manufacturer.
recommendations.
or backing wall with appropriate
Movement within the brick slip system
fixings/adhesive in accordance with the (g) durability
manufacturer’s recommendations. The insulated render system should be
non-combustible fixings
designed with corrosion resistant or
adequately protected materials. movement include:
Fixings and bracketry should normally be • changes in temperature
stainless steel, suitable non-ferrous metal • changes in the moisture content of
or suitable plastics. components
The risk of bimetallic corrosion should • freezing of retained moisture
be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar • creep.
metals. Movement joints in the backing wall
6.9
The insulated render system should not should be continued through the brick slip
include materials liable to infestation cladding system and formed in accordance
attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
A minimum of one non-combustible fixing or vermin.
Fixing rails, frames, fixings and fasteners
per square metre or per insulation batt, (h) tolerances should be designed to accommodate
whichever provides the greater number, The design should allow for the line, specified loads and take account of the
should be provided in addition to the other level, plumb and plane of the completed manufacturer’s recommendations.
fixings. The non-combustible fixings should insulated render system to be within
be fixed through the mesh reinforcement. Bonded fixings of rails, frames, fixings
reasonable tolerances for the materials
involved. and fasteners should be specified only
Reference should be made to BRE where there is no suitable alternative and
document BR135 - 2003 ‘Fire performance Acceptable tolerances would normally be a should be designed in accordance with the
of external thermal insulation for walls of maximum horizontal or vertical deviation manufacturer’s recommendations.
multi-storey buildings’ when specifying the from flatness of +/- 10mm in 5m.
type of insulation system to be installed. Pull-out or destructive testing of anchors
and fixings should be carried out in
The design should ensure the continuity Brick slip cladding systems accordance with the design, BS 5080
of insulation around openings and other and the Construction Fixings Association
penetrations. CERTIFICATION Guidance Note ‘Procedure for Site Testing
6.9 - D11 Brick slip cladding systems Construction Fixings’. Tests should be
(d) thermal bridging and condensation
shall be designed and certificated in carried out at a suitable rate agreed with
The insulated render system should be
accordance with appropriate Standards NHBC. The test results should be made
designed to minimise the risk of thermal
Brick slip cladding systems should available to NHBC.
bridging and surface and interstitial
condensation. have current certification confirming (b) weather resistance
satisfactory assessment by an appropriate Brick slip cladding systems, together with
A condensation risk analysis in accordance technical approvals authority accepted the backing wall to which they are applied,
with BS 5250 should be carried out. Unless by NHBC, including: British Board of should satisfactorily resist the passage of
it shows otherwise, a vapour control layer Agrément (BBA) or Building Research moisture.
should be provided. The vapour control Establishment (BRE) Certification.
layer should be fixed on the warm side of For timber and steel framed backing
the wall insulation. walls a cavity of at least 15mm should be
provided between the wall and the brick
slip cladding system to allow any moisture
to drain away.

Where the backing wall is timber framed A minimum of one non-combustible fixing The risk of bimetallic corrosion should
the cavity should be ventilated in per square metre or per insulation batt, be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar
accordance with Chapter 6.2 ‘External whichever is the lesser, should be provided metals.
timber framed walls’ (Design). in addition to the other fixings.
The brick slip cladding system should
steel frame timber frame Reference should be made to BRE not include materials liable to infestation
document BR135 - 2003 ‘Fire performance attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects
of external thermal insulation for walls of or vermin.
multi-storey buildings’ when specifying the
type of insulation system to be installed. (i) tolerances
The design should allow for the line,
The design should ensure the continuity level, plumb and plane of the completed
of insulation around openings and other brick slip cladding system to be within
penetrations. reasonable tolerances for the materials
(d) thermal bridging and condensation involved.
The brick slip cladding system should be Acceptable tolerances would normally be:
designed to minimise the risk of thermal • a maximum horizontal or vertical deviation
bridging and surface and interstitial
from flatness of +/- 10mm in 5m
condensation.
15mm (min) 15mm (min) drained • a maximum deviation in the bed joints of
drained cavity and ventilated cavity
A vapour control layer should be provided +/- 10mm in a 5m length.
The introduction of a cavity is likely to unless a condensation risk analysis in
increase the risk of impact damage to accordance with BS 5250 shows that one General
is not necessary. The vapour control layer
vulnerable areas of the brick slip cladding
should be fixed on the warm side of the
system, e.g. at low level, around balconies
wall insulation.
PROVISION OF
and where cradle systems, etc. can come INFORMATION
into contact with the façade. Suitable (e) carriers
precautions to resist impact damage Proprietary carriers forming an integral 6.9 - D13 Designs and specifications
should be included in the design e.g. by part of the brick slip cladding system shall be produced in a clearly
the provision of a rigid board behind the should be fixed with appropriate understandable format and include all
insulation whilst maintaining the cavity. fixings/adhesive in accordance with the relevant information
manufacturer’s recommendations. Drawings and specifications should
Dpc/dpm trays with stop ends should be
provided above openings, above cavity (f) brick slips include:
barriers, at the base of the brick slip Brick slips should be specified and • full set of drawings
cladding system and at interfaces where fixed in accordance with the system • schedule of revisions
necessary to ensure water is drained to manufacturer’s recommendations. • manufacturer’s specification
the outside. The brick slip support system • fixing schedules
6.9
should not obstruct the drainage paths. The design should ensure that excessive • specific details of all interfaces
cutting of brick slips is avoided, e.g. in • manufacturer’s recommendations
Brick slip cladding systems can be applied the storey heights, at corners and around relating to proprietary items
direct to concrete panels or masonry openings. Coursing should be arranged to • on-site testing regime.
backing walls without a cavity being suit lintel heights.
provided. 6.9 - D14 All relevant information shall
Particular attention should be given to the
interfaces between the brick slip cladding Ensure that design and specification
system and the walls, roof, doors, windows, insulation (carrier)
other cladding systems and curtain walling. neatly cut
around opening
Guidance on interfaces is provided in and/or suppliers.
Appendix 6.9-A. Manufacturers’ requirements for
Sealants should be specified in accordance installation and fixing should be made
with BS 6213 and the manufacturer’s available for reference on site to ensure
recommendations. work is carried out in accordance with the
design and specification.
Where appropriate a screen to prevent
birds and animals entering the cavity All relevant information in a form suitable
should be provided at the top and bottom (g) joints for the use of site operatives should
of the cavity and to penetrations through Mortars, proprietary mortars and grouts be available on site before work on the
the cladding. should be specified in accordance with the curtain walling or cladding starts.
system manufacturer’s recommendations
(c) insulation to enable each joint to be adequately filled
Insulation forming an integral part of and appropriately struck.
the brick slip cladding system should
be specified and fixed with appropriate (h) durability MATERIALS STANDARDS
fixings/adhesive in accordance with the Fixings for the brick slip cladding
manufacturer’s recommendations. system should be corrosion resistant or
(a) meet the technical requirements
adequately protected materials.
Other insulation included in the design (b) take account of the design
should be suitable for its intended purpose Fixings and bracketry should normally be Materials that comply with the design and
and be specified and fixed with appropriate stainless steel, suitable non-ferrous metal the guidance below will be acceptable
fixings/adhesive in accordance with the or appropriate plastics. for curtain walling, rainscreen cladding,

insulated render and brick slip cladding Other materials may be used if Other materials may be used if satisfactorily
systems. satisfactorily assessed in accordance with assessed in accordance with Technical
Technical Requirement R3. Requirement R3.
Materials for curtain walling, rainscreen
cladding, insulated render and brick slip Systems incorporating proprietary
cladding systems should comply with all
SEALANT intumescent materials should follow the
relevant standards, including those listed 6.9 - M5 Materials for sealant shall guidance provided by The Intumescent
below. Where no standard exists, Technical provide satisfactory performance Fire Seals Association (IFSA) and the
Requirement R3 applies (see Chapter Sealant should be selected and applied in Association for Specialist Fire Protection
1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards and accordance with BS 6213 and BS EN ISO (ASFP).
Technical Requirements’). 11600.
FIXINGS
References to British Standards and Sealant to be used in locations where
Codes of Practice include those made differential movement may be expected, 6.9 - M9 Fixings shall be of durable
under the Construction Products Directive e.g. interfaces between the façade and the material and provide satisfactory
(89/106/EEC) and, in particular, appropriate structure, should be one of the following: performance
European Technical Specifications • two part polysulphide Fixings should be manufactured from:
approved by a European Committee for • one part polysulphide
• phosphor bronze
Standardisation (CEN). • one part silicone
• silicon bronze
• one or two part polyurethane.
• stainless steel to BS EN ISO 3506
DPC/DPM MATERIALS Other materials may be used if satisfactorily • mild steel with coatings to BS EN 12329,
6.9 - M2 Materials for damp-proofing assessed in accordance with Technical BS EN 12330, BS EN 1461, or other
shall resist adequately the passage of Requirement R3. appropriate treatment in accordance with
moisture BS EN ISO 12944 or BS EN ISO 14713
THERMAL INSULATION • aluminium alloy to BS EN 573 and
Items to be taken into account include: BS EN 755
(a) dpcs/dpms 6.9 - M6 Insulation materials shall
provide the degree of insulation to • appropriate plastics.
The following materials are acceptable for
use as dpcs/dpms: comply with the design Materials that comply with recognised
• polyethylene to BS 6515 Insulation materials should be inert, Standards, which provide equal or better
• EPDM durable, rot and vermin proof and should performance to those above, would also be
• neoprene not be adversely affected by moisture or acceptable.
• proprietary materials assessed in vapour.
Other materials may be used if satisfactorily
accordance with Technical Insulation materials that comply with the assessed in accordance with Technical
Requirement R3. following Standards are acceptable: Requirement R3.
Materials for dpcs/dpms should be • mineral wool to BS EN 13162
• FR grade (flame retardant) expanded Aluminium and aluminium alloys should
compatible with adjoining materials.
6.9
polystyrene to BS EN 13163 not come into contact with cementitious

Dpcs/dpms and flexible cavity trays should • FR grade (flame retardant) extruded material.
be of the correct dimensions to suit the polystyrene to BS EN 13164
detailed design. • rigid polyurethane foam and TIMBER PRESERVATION
polyisocyanurate to BS EN 13165
For complicated junctions, preformed 6.9 - M10 Timber shall be either
• phenolic foam to BS EN 13166
cavity trays are recommended. • cellular glass to BS EN 13167. naturally durable or preservative treated
to provide adequate protection against
(b) flashings Other materials may be used if satisfactorily rot and insect attack
The following are acceptable as flashings: assessed in accordance with Technical
• rolled lead sheet (at least code 4) Requirement R3. Reference should be made to Chapter 2.3
complying with BS EN 12588 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’
• aluminium and aluminium alloys to BREATHER MEMBRANES (each section) for guidance on preservative
BS EN 485 and BS EN 573 treatments.
6.9 - M7 Breather membranes shall be
• zinc alloys to BS EN 988
• stainless steel.
durable and be capable of allowing water VENTILATION SCREENS
vapour to pass outwards and prevent
moisture from penetrating inwards 6.9 - M11 Ventilation openings shall be
Aluminium and aluminium alloys should
protected from the entry of birds and
not come into contact with cementitious Breather membranes should comply with
material. animals
BS 4016 (Type 1 in areas of very severe
exposure). Ventilation openings where the least
GLAZING dimension exceeds 10mm should be
Other materials may be used if protected to prevent the entry of birds and
6.9 - M3 Glazing shall be as required by satisfactorily assessed in accordance with
animals.
the design Technical Requirement R3.
Reference should be made to Chapter 6.7 Acceptable protection of openings can be
‘Doors, windows and glazing’ (each section) CAVITY BARRIERS AND provided by:
for guidance on glazing. FIRE-STOPS • rigid fabrications with width of opening
greater than 3mm and less than 10mm
6.9 - M8 Materials used for cavity
GASKETS barriers and fire-stops shall be capable
(no restriction on length)
• rigid fabrications with round holes
6.9 - M4 Materials for gaskets shall of providing adequate resistance to fire greater than 3mm and less than 10mm
provide satisfactory performance and smoke diameter
Extruded rubber gaskets should comply Materials specified in statutory requirements
with BS 4255. are acceptable.

• square or rectangular mesh where the Curtain walling External and internal air and water seals
clear opening size is greater than 3mm and a drained cavity should be provided
at all interfaces. Guidance on interfaces is
and less than 10mm. LOCATION AND FIXING provided in Appendix 6.9-A.
6.9 - S4 Curtain walling systems shall
be correctly located and securely fixed (c) dpcs/dpms
in accordance with the design Dpcs/dpms should be installed correctly to
SITEWORK STANDARDS provide a physical barrier to the passage
Curtain walling systems should be of moisture. Dpc/dpm arrangements which
6.9 - S1 All sitework shall: correctly located and securely fixed in
(a) meet the Technical Requirements rely solely on sealant should not be used.
accordance with the manufacturer’s Guidance on the use of dpcs/dpms at
(b) take account of the design specification and the design details. interfaces is provided in Appendix 6.9-A.
workmanship The type, size and positioning of all fixings Dpc/dpm arrangements should extend
should be in accordance with the design. the full height of the curtain walling
Sitework that complies with the design
system and have appropriate details at
and guidance below will be acceptable for Proprietary fixings should be used in
all interfaces including floors, walls, roofs,
curtain walling and cladding systems. accordance with the manufacturer’s
balconies and terraces, to ensure moisture
recommendations with particular attention
All relevant information in a form suitable is directed to the outside.
given to:
for the use of site operatives should
• the correct embedment, spacing and (d) opening doors and lights
be available on site before work on the
edge distances Opening doors and lights should be fitted
curtain walling or cladding system starts,
• correct torque settings in accordance with the design, hang square
including:
• the provision of suitable locking nuts within the curtain wall frame and fit neatly
• full set of drawings
and washers with minimum gaps to ensure effective
• schedule of revisions weatherproofing.
• the isolation of dissimilar metals
• manufacturer’s specification
• the isolation of aluminium from
• fixing schedules
• specific details of all interfaces
cementitious material. GLAZING
• manufacturer’s recommendations
relating to proprietary items
WEATHER RESISTANCE 6.9 - S6 Glazing shall be carried out in
accordance with relevant standards
• on-site testing regime. 6.9 - S5 Curtain walling systems
shall be correctly installed to prevent Glazing should be carried out in accordance
6.9 - S2 Curtain walling and cladding moisture entering the building with Chapter 6.7 ‘Doors, windows and
systems shall be installed by competent glazing’ (Design and Sitework).
operatives Items to be taken into account include:
(a) weathertightness CONTROL OF
Curtain walling, rainscreen cladding, Curtain walling systems including doors,
insulated render and brick slip cladding windows and other components should be CONDENSATION
systems should be installed by operatives
6.9
installed correctly to ensure satisfactory 6.9 - S7 Installation shall ensure that
who: in-service performance.
• are competent the risk of condensation is minimised
• are familiar with the system being (b) gaskets and sealants Insulation should be installed in
installed Appropriate gaskets and sealants accordance with the design, ensuring that
• hold a certificate confirming they should be installed and used to ensure all interfaces are adequately insulated.
have been trained by the system satisfactory performance. Gaskets and
A continuous, durable vapour control layer
manufacturer, supplier or installer. sealants should be used in accordance
should be provided in accordance with the
with the design and the manufacturer’s
design.
HANDLING AND STORAGE recommendations.
6.9 - S3 Materials, products and Pre-formed factory-moulded ‘picture ALLOWANCE FOR
systems shall be protected and stored frame’ type vulcanised epdm or silicone
in a satisfactory manner to prevent internal gaskets should be used. MOVEMENT
damage, distortion, uneven weathering 6.9 - S8 Installation shall allow
and degradation movement of the curtain walling system
Items to be taken into account include: picture frame gasket and the building without causing damage
(a) handling and storage or deformation
The curtain walling or cladding system Allowance for movement should be
should be transported, lifted, handled provided in accordance with the design.
and stored in accordance with the
TOLERANCES
Insulated glass units should be carefully 6.9 - S9 Installation shall achieve the
stored and protected in a sheltered dry design tolerances
area.
The line, level, plumb and plane of the
(b) protection completed curtain walling system should
All practical steps should be taken to avoid be in accordance with the design.
the risk of damage to the curtain walling or
Unless otherwise specified in the design,
cladding system during construction. typical profile
the following installation tolerances would
normally be acceptable:
• + /- 2mm in any one storey height or
structural bay width and
• +/- 5mm overall.

TESTING recommendations with particular attention

given to:
6.9 - S10 Site hose testing shall be • the correct embedment, spacing and 10mm (min) labyrinth (rebated) joint
carried out on the curtain walling edge distances
system to confirm satisfactory • correct torque levels
performance • the provision of suitable locking nuts
and washers
On-site testing should be carried out • the isolation of dissimilar metals
to determine the resistance to water • the isolation of aluminium from Where required by the design a screen
penetration of the curtain walling system, cementitious material. to prevent birds and animals entering
including all joints and interfaces which
the cavity should be provided at the top
are designed to be permanently closed and
watertight. WEATHER RESISTANCE and bottom of the rainscreen and to
penetrations through the cladding.
Representative samples of the finished 6.9 - S12 Rainscreen cladding systems
installation should be hose tested on site shall be correctly installed to prevent Where required by the design, dpcs/dpms
in accordance with the current CWCT moisture entering the building should be installed correctly to provide a
Standard for curtain walling. physical barrier to the passage of moisture.
Dpc/dpm arrangements which rely solely
(a) weathertightness on sealant should not be used.
Rainscreen cladding systems including
door, window and other openings and cover To ensure moisture is directed to the
flashings, should be installed correctly to outside, dpc/dpm arrangements should be
ensure satisfactory in-service performance. correctly formed with suitable upstands
and stop ends including at the junction
hose test of Installation should prevent water reaching
typical interface
between the rainscreen cladding and any
any parts of the wall that could be adversely
affected by the presence of moisture. other component or system. External and
internal air and water seals and a drained
The following minimum air gap should be cavity should be provided at all interfaces.
maintained behind all rainscreen panels: Guidance on interfaces is provided in
• 50mm for panels with open joints, or Appendix 6.9-A.
• 38mm for panels with baffle or labyrinth
(rebated) joints. Appropriate sealants should be used
in accordance with the design and the
50mm (min) 38mm (min) manufacturer’s recommendations to
ensure satisfactory performance.
(b) insulation and condensation

Where insulation forms part of the
At least 5% of the completed curtain
6.9
rainscreen, it should be installed in

walling system should be tested, with
accordance with the design and the
particular focus on vulnerable areas such
manufacturer’s recommendations,
as joints and interfaces.
ensuring that all parts of the backing wall
Other testing may be acceptable if it are adequately insulated.
is considered by NHBC to be a suitable
alternative. Where the rainscreen panel joints are
open and the insulation could be adversely
The results of all testing should be made affected by the presence of water, a
available to NHBC. continuous durable breather membrane
open joints baffled or labyrinth
(rebated) joints should be provided to the outer face of the
Rainscreen cladding insulation.
Unless specified otherwise in the design, all
Where the insulation is fixed to the backing
LOCATION AND FIXING open, baffled or labyrinth (rebated) joints
wall, a minimum of one non-combustible
should have a minimum opening of 10mm.
6.9 - S11 Rainscreen cladding systems fixing per square metre or per batt,
shall be correctly located and securely whichever is the lesser, should be provided
fixed in accordance with the design in addition to the other fixings.
Rainscreen cladding systems should Installation should ensure that the
10mm (min) open joint
be correctly located and securely fixed insulation is continuous around
in accordance with the manufacturer’s penetrations through the rainscreen.
specification and the design details.
The rainscreen cladding system should be
The type, size and positioning of all anchors, installed to minimise the risk of thermal
fixing rails, frames, fixings and fasteners bridging and surface and interstitial
should be in accordance with the design. condensation.
Bonded fixings should only be used in 10mm (min) baffled joint
accordance with the design. (c) air infiltration

The rainscreen cladding system should be
Anchors, fixings and bracketry should fixed to a backing wall that is reasonably
normally be stainless steel or a suitable airtight, e.g:
non-ferrous metal. • masonry walls jointed to a high standard
Proprietary fixings should be used in with all joints filled
accordance with the manufacturer’s

• framed walls with a rigid sheathing on on interfaces that are designed to be • the provision of supplementary
the cavity face with all joints taped or permanently closed and watertight. mechanical fixings as required by the
sealed. design.
The building should remain watertight
Where reasonable airtightness cannot be
during and after the test.
achieved, a separate continuous vapour WEATHER RESISTANCE
permeable air barrier with joints taped or
sealed should be provided on the outer ALLOWANCE FOR 6.9 - S16 Insulated render systems
shall be correctly installed to prevent
face of the backing wall. MOVEMENT moisture entering the building
(d) compartmentation 6.9 - S13 Installation shall allow
To help achieve pressure equalisation the movement of the rainscreen cladding
(a) weathertightness
cavity should be compartmented by: system and the building without causing
Insulated render systems should be
• a horizontal cavity closer at each floor damage or deformation
installed correctly to ensure satisfactory
level, and
Allowance for movement e.g. at interfaces in-service performance.
• vertical cavity closers at centres not
and at gaps between panels, should be
exceeding 6.0m, and Insulated render systems should prevent
provided in accordance with the design.
• vertical cavity closers at centres not water reaching any parts of the wall
exceeding 1.5m in the area within 6.0m that could be adversely affected by the
of an internal or external corner, and TOLERANCES presence of moisture.
• a vertical cavity closer as close as 6.9 - S14 Installation shall achieve the
possible to an external corner, normally Where the backing wall is timber or steel
design tolerances framed a cavity of at least 15mm should
within 300mm.
Installation should allow for the line, be provided between the wall and the
1.5m (max) level, plumb and plane of the completed insulation to allow moisture to drain away.
6.0m (max) rainscreen cladding system to be within
Where the backing wall is timber framed
the cavity should be ventilated in
involved.
Acceptable tolerances would normally timber framed walls’ (Design).
horizontal cavity
closer at each be +/- 3mm in any one storey height or
floor level
structural bay width unless otherwise
specified in the design.
This compartmentation is in addition Insulated Render Systems

to the requirements of the Building
Regulations for cavity barriers to control FIXING
the spread of smoke and fire. However, the
6.9 - S15 Insulated render systems shall
6.9
same cavity barriers may be used for the
be securely fixed in accordance with the
compartmentation.
design
Cavity closers should be rigid and Insulated render systems should be 15mm (min) 15mm (min) drained
be installed in accordance with the securely fixed in accordance with drained cavity and ventilated cavity
manufacturer’s recommendations with the design and the manufacturer’s
particular attention given to maintaining Suitable precautions to resist impact
recommendations. damage should be provided in accordance
ventilation and drainage in accordance
with the design. The type, size and positioning of all with the design.
anchors, fixing rails, frames, fixings, Where required by the design a screen
(e) durability fasteners and bonded joints should be in should be provided to prevent birds and
The rainscreen cladding system should accordance with the design. animals entering the cavity through the
be fabricated and installed with corrosion
Anchors, fixings and bracketry should ventilation and drainage openings.
resistant or adequately protected
materials. normally be stainless steel, suitable non- Insulated render systems can be applied
ferrous metal or appropriate plastics. direct to masonry backing walls without a
Fixings and bracketry should normally
For mechanically-fixed systems particular cavity being provided.
be stainless steel or suitable non-ferrous
metal. attention should be given to: Where required by the design, dpcs/dpms
• correct embedment, spacing and edge should be installed correctly to provide a
The risk of bimetallic corrosion should distances physical barrier to the passage of moisture.
be avoided by the isolation of dissimilar • correct torque settings Dpc/dpm arrangements which rely solely
metals. • provision of suitable locking nuts and on sealant should not be used.
Aluminium components should be washers
• the isolation of dissimilar metals To ensure moisture is directed to the
separated from direct contact with
• the isolation of aluminium from outside, dpc/dpm arrangements should be
cementitious surfaces.
cementitious material. correctly formed with suitable upstands
The rainscreen cladding system should and stop ends including at the junction
not include materials liable to infestation For adhesive-fixed systems particular between the insulated render system and
attack by micro-organisms, fungi, insects attention should be given to: any other component or system.
or vermin. • thorough assessment of the backing wall
to confirm adhesive fixing is suitable Guidance on interfaces is provided in
(f) testing • suitable preparation of the backing wall Appendix 6.9-A.
On-site hose or sparge bar testing should to receive the adhesive
Appropriate tapes and sealant should be
be carried out with particular emphasis
used in accordance with the design and

the manufacturer’s recommendations to additional reinforcement at points of increased stress Fixing systems should be accurately
ensure satisfactory performance. set out to ensure brick slips suit storey
heights, lintels, corners and openings.
(b) insulation and condensation
Insulation should be installed in
accordance with the design and the WEATHER RESISTANCE
manufacturer’s recommendations, 6.9 - S19 Brick slip cladding systems
ensuring that all parts of the backing wall shall be correctly installed to prevent
are adequately insulated. moisture entering the building
Insulation should be returned into window Items to be taken into account include:
and door openings and be continuous (a) weathertightness
around penetrations through the wall. Brick slip cladding systems should be
reinforcement continuous across face of insulation
installed correctly to ensure satisfactory
(e) render in-service performance.
The surface to be rendered should be
free from contamination, dust and loose The brick slip cladding system should
particles. The number and thickness of prevent water reaching any parts of the
coats should be in accordance with the wall that could be adversely affected by
design. the presence of moisture.
Where coloured pigments are specified, Where the backing wall is timber or steel
batching should be undertaken with care framed, a cavity of at least 15mm should
to ensure colour consistency. be provided between the wall and the
insulation to allow moisture to drain away.
TOLERANCES Where the backing wall is timber framed,
the cavity should be ventilated in
6.9 - S17 Installation shall achieve the
design tolerances
timber framed walls’ (Design).
Installation should allow for the line,
level, plumb and plane of the completed
all layers neatly cut
around flue outlet insulated render system to be within
involved.
(c) air infiltration
The backing wall should be reasonably Acceptable tolerances would normally be a
airtight before installation of the insulated maximum horizontal or vertical deviation
render system, e.g. from flatness of +/- 10mm in 5m unless
6.9
• masonry walls jointed to a high standard otherwise specified in the design.

with all joints etc filled
• framed walls with a rigid sheathing on
the cavity face with all joints taped and
Brick Slip Cladding Systems
sealed.
FIXING 15mm (min) 15mm (min) drained
(d) reinforcement 6.9 - S18 Brick slip cladding systems drained cavity and ventilated cavity
Reinforcement mesh should be provided in shall be securely fixed in accordance

accordance with the design taking account with the design Suitable precautions to resist impact
of the following: damage should be provided in accordance
• laps between sheets of reinforcement Brick slip cladding systems should with the design.
mesh should be not less than 100mm be securely fixed in accordance with
the design and the manufacturer’s A screen should be provided to prevent
• openings, corners, angles, interfaces and
recommendations. birds and animals entering the cavity
movement joints should be formed with
through the ventilation and drainage
appropriate trims The type, size and positioning of all openings.
• additional mesh should normally be anchors, fixing rails, frames, fixings,
provided at points where there is a fasteners and bonded joints should be in Brick slip cladding systems can be applied
likelihood of increased stress in the accordance with the design. direct to masonry backing walls without a
render system, e.g. at the corners of cavity being provided.
window and door openings Anchors, fixings and bracketry should
• movement joints in the backing wall normally be stainless steel, suitable non- Where required by the design, dpcs/dpms
should continue through the insulated ferrous metal or appropriate plastics. should be installed correctly to provide a
render system. physical barrier to the passage of moisture.
Particular attention should be given to: Dpc/dpm arrangements which rely solely
• correct embedment, spacing and edge on sealant should not be used.
distances
• correct torque levels To ensure moisture is directed to the
• provision of suitable locking nuts and outside, dpc/dpm arrangements should be
washers correctly formed with suitable upstands
• the isolation of dissimilar metals and stop ends including at the junction
• the isolation of aluminium from between the brick slip cladding system and
cementitious material. any other component or system.
Guidance on interfaces is provided in
Appendix 6.9-A.

Appropriate tapes and sealants should be Each joint should be adequately filled and
used in accordance with the design and appropriately struck.
the manufacturer’s recommendations to external dpc/dpm
ensure satisfactory performance. TOLERANCES linked to
roofing membrane
(b) insulation and condensation 6.9 - S20 Installation shall achieve internal
Insulation should be installed in satisfactory appearance dpc/dpm
accordance with the design and the

Installation should allow for the line,
manufacturer’s recommendations,
level, plumb and plane of the completed
ensuring that all parts of the backing wall
brick slip cladding system to be within
are adequately insulated. roofing membrane
Insulation should be returned into window involved.
and door openings and be continuous
Unless otherwise specified in the design
around penetrations through the wall. acceptable tolerances would normally be:
• a maximum horizontal or vertical deviation 2. Curtain walling to balcony/terrace
from flatness of +/- 10mm in 5m Vertical section
• a maximum deviation in the bed joints of internal seal
+/- 10mm in a 5m length.
dpc/dpm
Appendix 6.9-A
Interfaces
Interfaces exist:
• between different curtain walling and
cladding systems, and
• between curtain walling and cladding external seal
insulation (carrier) systems and other elements of the
neatly cut
around openings building.
All interfaces should be carefully designed
and detailed to resist water and wind 3. Curtain walling to conventional
penetration. External and internal air and brick & block wall
water seals should normally be provided. Horizontal section
(c) air infiltration
The design should take account of:
6.9
The backing wall should be reasonably
• differing profile characteristics
airtight before installation of the brick slip
• movement
cladding system, e.g. • continuity of insulation, vapour barriers
• masonry walls jointed to a high standard and breather membranes
with all joints etc filled • tolerances and deviation external seal
• framed walls with a rigid sheathing on • the erection sequence

external
dpc/dpm
the cavity face with all joints taped and • planned maintenance.
sealed.
The drawings and specification should internal
dpc/dpm
(d) brick slips indicate clearly which contractor is
Brick slips should be fixed in accordance responsible for constructing the interface.
with the design and manufacturer’s
recommendations, taking account of Typical interfaces
relevant height restrictions. The following sketches show examples of 4. Curtain walling to soffit
typical interfaces and illustrate general Vertical section
Excessive cutting of brick slips should be design principles.
avoided. external dpc/dpm linked
to roofing membrane
internal seal
internal dpc/dpm
insulation (carrier) external dpc/dpm roofing

positioned to membrane
avoid excess
cutting of slips
external seal
(e) joints 1. Curtain walling to insulated render system 5. Curtain walling to roof including
Proprietary mortars and grouts should be Horizontal section coping detail
used in accordance with the design and Vertical section
the manufacturer’s recommendations.

INDEX
A I
Accessibility for maintenance 2 In-service performance 2, 4, 5, 6
Acoustic performance 3. 5 Insulating glass units 3
Air infiltration 3, 4, 10, 12, 13 Insulated render 1, 5, 11
B Insulation 4, 6, 7, 8, 10,
12, 13
Backing wall 1, 4, 5, 6, 7
Interfaces 13
Brackets 2
J
Breather membranes 8
external seal Joints 7, 13
Brick slips 7, 13
L
6. Brick slip cladding to insulated C
render system Loads 2, 4, 5, 6
Carriers 7
Horizontal section M
Cavity barriers 8
Movement 2, 4, 5, 6, 9, 11
Certification 2, 3, 5, 6
P
Compartmentation 5, 11
internal seal Condensation 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10,
12, 13 R
D Reinforcement 6, 12
Design life 2 S
Dpcs/dpms 8, 9 Sealant 8, 9
dpc/dpm
Durability 3, 5, 6, 7, 11 T
Testing 3, 10, 11
E
Tolerances 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11,
Earth bonding 3, 5
12, 13
external seal Electrical continuity 3, 5
V
F Ventilation screens 8
7. Insulated render system to Fire-stops 8 W
windows & doors Fixings 2, 4, 5, 6, 8 Weather resistance 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10,
Horizontal section
G 11, 12
Gaskets 8, 9 Weathertightness 9, 10, 11, 12
6.9
H
external seal Handling and storage 9
external seal
8. Penetration of gas flue through

insulated render system on light
gauge steel frame
Horizontal section

Chapter 6.10
Light steel framed walls and floors
CONTENTS SCOPE
DESIGN Clause Page This Chapter give guidance on meeting Techical

Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for light steel framed
walls and floors.
Steel and fixings D3 1
Loadbearing walls D4 1
Non-loadbearing walls D5 1
Moisture control and insulation D6 2
Exterior cladding D7 2
Floors D8 2
Services D9 4
Acoustic performance D10 4
Control of fire D11 4
Certification D14 4
MATERIALS
Steel and fixings M2 4
Damp-proof courses M3 5
Wall ties and fixings M4 5
Sheathing M5 5
Vapour control layers M8 5
6.10
Plasterboard M9 5
Floor decking M11 5
SITEWORK
Construction of loadbearing walls and S2 6
external infill walls
Insulation S3 7
Breather membranes S4 7
Wall ties and fixings S5 7
Vapour control layers S6 7
Cladding S7 7
Construction of non-loadbearing internal S8 8
walls
Separating walls S9 8
Light steel joists S10-S15 8 - 10
Separating floors S16 10
Services S17 10
Control of fire S18 10
APPENDIX 6.10-A
Certification procedure 10
INDEX 11

Light steel framed walls and floors 6.10
(b) compatibility Additional studs may be required at
DESIGN STANDARDS Where two metals are to be joined they openings for fixing ties or supports for the
should be compatible and not cause cladding.
6.10 - D1 Design shall meet the
bimetallic corrosion in that environment.
Technical Requirements Multiple studs should be included to
Alternatively they should be isolated from
Design that follows the guidance below support multiple joists unless otherwise
each other.
will be acceptable for external and internal specified by the designer.
walls, and floors using light steel framing. The choice of fixings should take account
Lintels should be securely fixed to
of bimetallic corrosion which can occur
This Chapter only applies to light steel supporting studs to ensure that loads are
when two dissimilar metals are in contact.
framing, typically 0.45 to 3.2mm thick, as transferred properly.
described and illustrated. Construction (c) connections
Where panels are diagonally braced with
should be ‘warm frame’ with sufficient Light steel components should be securely
flat strip it should be fixed to each stud at
insulation outside the steel envelope fixed together by bolting, welding, riveting,
the intersection to minimise the bow in the
to ensure that condensation does not clinching, crimping, screwing or nailing.
bracing member.
fall within the depth of the light steel Connections using these techniques should
members. be justified either by design to BS 5950 or (d) joints between panels and other
an appropriate test acceptable to NHBC. elements
For dwellings that incorporate loadbearing The design should detail how wall panels
light steel framed walls and/or floors, both
system and project certification will be
LOADBEARING WALLS are to be securely fixed:
• to the substructure
required in accordance with Appendix 6.10-A. 6.10 - D4 Loadbearing walls • to adjacent panels
incorporating light steel members shall • to the floor and roof framing.
For the purpose of this Chapter, non-
be designed to support and transfer
loadbearing walls are those not designed Account should be taken of uplift forces
loads to foundations safely and without
to carry the principal dead and imposed and, where necessary, proper holding down
undue movement
loads or provide the overall stability for devices should be provided to resist uplift.
the building. In some circumstances (e.g. Items to take into account include: The anchorage for holding down devices
external infill walls) they will carry wind (a) design should have sufficient mass to resist the
loads. The structural design of loadbearing steel uplift forces.
framed walls should be in accordance with
If the light steel framing is of a novel BS 5950. Timber wall plates should be fixed to the
construction, not shown in this Chapter, head rail of wall panels onto which timber
NHBC will require assessment in (b) design loadings roof trusses bear. The timber wall plate and
accordance with Technical Requirement R3. The building should be designed to resist head rail should be sized to permit single
loadings in accordance with BS 6399 timber trusses to be positioned at any
This Chapter does not apply to light steel including:
framed external walls used in basements. point between studs.
• dead loads
6.10
• imposed loads (e) racking
STATUTORY • wind loads. Wall panels may provide resistance to
racking forces using one or more of the
REQUIREMENTS (c) structural elements following techniques:
6.10 - D2 Design shall comply with all Individual studs should not be less than • internal bracing
relevant statutory requirements 36mm wide, spaced at not more than • crossed flat bracing
600mm centres, unless agreed with NHBC • internal sheathing board
Design should be in accordance with and other support is provided for wall • external lining board
relevant Building Regulations and other boards and fixings. • rigid frame action.
A lintel should be provided to any opening Methods adopted should be justified either
in loadbearing panels where one or more
STEEL AND FIXINGS studs is cut or displaced to form the
by design to BS 5950 or tested to BS 5268
or BS EN 594.
6.10 - D3 Steel and fixings shall be opening. A lintel is not required where an
suitable for the design and adequately opening falls between studs.
protected against corrosion NON-LOADBEARING
lintel above window opening WALLS
(a) steel 6.10 - D5 Non-loadbearing walls
Steel should be grade S280 or S350 to incorporating light steel members shall
BS EN 10326. Grade S390 steel may be have adequate strength and support
used if it has a nominal yield strength of Items to take into account include:
390N/mm2 and meets with the concepts of
(a) construction
BS EN 10326.
The following form of construction is
To provide adequate protection against acceptable:
corrosion due to condensation and the • light steel partitions using studs, head
environment, steel should be pre-galvanised and base rails from sections not smaller
in accordance with BS EN 10326 to provide than 43mm x 32mm x 0.45mm
a minimum zinc coating of 275 g/m2. • stud spacings to suit the thickness of
plasterboard, as follows:
9.5mm boards
12.5mm or thicker boards.

(b) movement joints Dpcs and trays should be provided at EXTERIOR CLADDING
Non-loadbearing walls should not bridge openings to prevent rain penetration.
movement joints in the main structure. 6.10 - D7 Exterior cladding shall be
(b) membranes compatible with the steel frame
A joint should be constructed between the Breather membranes and other barriers,
frame and any chimney or flue to prevent where provided, should be lapped so that Items to be taken into account include:
load transfer onto the chimney or flue. each joint is protected and moisture drains (a) wall ties
outwards. Wall ties for masonry claddings should be:
(c) support • of a type which accommodates
Non-loadbearing walls should be supported (c) cavities in external walls differential movement between the light
from the structural floor, not by a floating A clear cavity should be provided to reduce steel frame and the cladding - see clause
floor that incorporates a compressible the risk of rain penetrating to the frame. D7(c) below
layer, unless the floating floor is The following minimum cavity widths, • fixed through to the studs, not the
specifically designed for that purpose. measured between the claddings and sheathing
sheathings, should be provided: • installed at a minimum density of
Allowance should be made for the possible
3.7 ties/m2 e.g. spaced at a maximum
deflection of floors at the head of non- Cladding Cavity width of 600mm horizontally and 450mm
loadbearing walls to prevent the wall
Masonry 50mm nominal vertically (see Sitework clause 6.10 - S5)
becoming loadbearing.
Render on backed 25mm nominal • spaced at jambs of openings a maximum
lathing of 300mm vertically within 225mm of
Vertical tile hanging No vertical cavity the masonry reveal. Additional studs
without underlay required when a may be needed to achieve this
breather membrane is • inclined away from the light steel
provided framing.
Other cladding* 15mm nominal (b) masonry claddings
Soft joints should be provided to allow for
* see Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and differential movement. A gap of 1mm per
cladding’ metre of masonry should be provided at
The cavity should extend at least 150mm openings and soffits.
below the dpc and be kept clear to allow
drainage. Weep holes or other suitable
means of drainage should be provided
SUPPORT WHERE WALL IS
where necessary to prevent water build up
PARALLEL AND BETWEEN JOISTS in the cavity.
(d) insulation and interstitial
6.10
channel fixed to
structure over
condensation
avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of
compressible joint
head rail should
not be connected
insulation relevant to external light to be 1.0mm thick
per metre of masonry
to top track steel framed walls. In England and Wales to allow for vertical
movement
account should be taken of Accredited
Details for Part L.
A vapour control layer should be provided
unless a condensation risk analysis in (c) other claddings
accordance with BS 5250 shows that one For other claddings reference should be
is not necessary. The vapour control layer made to Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and
should be fixed on the warm side of the cladding’ (Design and Sitework).
wall insulation.
The vapour control layer should cover the FLOORS
SUPPORT WHERE FLOOR OR
BEAM IS ABOVE WALL external wall including base rails, head 6.10 - D8 Suspended floors shall be
rails, studs, lintels and window reveals. designed to support and transmit loads
MOISTURE CONTROL AND Vapour control layers should be of
safely to the supporting structure
without undue deflection
INSULATION 500g polyethylene or vapour control
plasterboard. Items to be taken into account include:
6.10 - D6 Wall designs shall ensure that (a) dead and imposed loads
the structure is adequately protected Insulation should continue 150mm below
Floors should be designed to resist loading
from the effects of moisture the base rail of the steel wall to minimise
in accordance with BS 6399 including:
thermal bridging.
Items to be taken into account include: • dead loads
(a) provision of dpcs and dpms Insulation with an integral facing on one • imposed loads.
Dpcs should be installed beneath and side only, e.g. a foil facing, should have the
Information concerning balcony loading
for the full width of the lowest section of facing on the cavity side. The facing should
is given in Chapter 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and
framing (e.g. all ground floor walls and not be used as the vapour control layer.
balconies’ (Design and Sitework).
internal partitions) to protect the steel
Service pipes, conduits, etc within walls
from corrosion due to moisture. The dpc (b) joist spacing
should be on the warm side of the
should be wide enough to lap with the Steel joists should be spaced at centres
insulation.
dpm. not greater than 600mm.

(c) deflection each other at the cross-over point and (g) openings
The in-service performance of light create noise Suitably sized trimmers should be provided
steel joists should be controlled by four around floor openings.
serviceability criteria:
(h) notching and holing
Static criteria: The flanges of light steel joists should
i) the maximum deflection for a single joist not be notched except to accommodate
due to imposed load should be limited to • solid blocking provided to every third connections.
span/450 pair of joists with ties between them Drilling or punching through the web
ii) the maximum deflection for a single joist
should only be carried out within
due to dead and imposed loads should be
recognised limits (see Sitework clause
limited to the lesser of span/350 or 15mm.
6.10-S11).
Dynamic criteria:
(i) ground floors
iii) t he natural frequency of the floor
• joists alternately reversed and tied Light steel joists used in ground floor
should be limited to 8Hz for dead load
together in pairs construction should have thermal
plus 0.2 x imposed load. This can be
insulation positioned to ensure that
achieved by limiting the deflection
condensation does not form on the joists.
of a single joist to 5mm for the given
loading The junction between the ground floor
iv) the deflection of the floor (i.e. a series joists and their support should be designed
of joists plus the floor decking) when to maintain the durability of the floor. Light
• joists alternately reversed and
subject to a 1kN point load should be steel floor joists and ring beams in ground
continuous ties (e.g. resilient bar) fixed
limited to the following values: floors should be galvanised to 450g/m2.
to the joist flanges.
Alternatively they can be galvanised to
Span (m) Max. deflection (mm) 275g/m2 with additional protection of a
3.5 1.7 two-coat bitumen based coating to BS 1070,
3.8 1.6 BS 3416 or BS 6949, or have a two coat
4.2 1.5 liquid asphaltic composition applied. Ring
(f) floor decking beams to ground floors should be totally
4.6 1.4
The correct thickness of decking should be protected and joists protected for 300mm
5.3 1.3
specified for the joist centres used. adjacent to an external wall support or ring
6.2 1.2 beam.
The thickness should be not less than
The deflection of a single joist is those shown in this table for normal (j) resistance to ground moisture
dependent on the overall floor domestic loads, i.e. an imposed load of Provision should be made to prevent
construction and the number of effective 1.5kN/m2. ground moisture affecting light steel
6.10
joists that are deemed to share the applied floors.
1kN point load. The following table gives Floor decking Thickness of decking This can be achieved by either:
typical values: [mm] • 50mm concrete or 50mm fine aggregate
Joist centres on a polyethylene membrane laid on
Floor configuration Number of effective 50mm sand blinding, or
joists 400mm 600mm
• 100mm concrete.
Joist centres Chipboard 18 22
Plywood 15 18/19 Where necessary, oversite concrete should
400mm 600mm
Oriented strand 15 18/19 be protected against sulfate attack by the
Chipboard, plywood 2.5 2.35 use of a polyethylene sheet dpm, not less
board
or oriented strand
than 1200 gauge (0.3mm) (or 1000 gauge
board
Note if assessed in accordance with Technical
Built-up acoustic 4 3.5 Requirement R3), properly lapped.
floor
Oriented strand board should be laid with
the stronger axis at right angles to the (k) ventilation of underfloor voids
(d) attachment to supporting structure supports. Other decking materials not listed A minimum ventilation void of 150mm
Light steel joists should be fixed to in the table should comply with Technical should be provided below the floor.
supporting walls by web cleats, direct Requirement R3. The above thicknesses
may not be adequate to achieve a mass On shrinkable soils where heave could take
attachment to wall studs, or by bearing
for floor decking of 15 kg/m2 for sound place, an allowance for movement should
onto the supporting structure. In the latter
insulation requirements of floors in England be added to the underfloor ventilation
configuration, bearing stiffeners may be
& Wales. requirement to determine the minimum
required.
dimension of the floor void. The allowance
(e) prevention of roll The floor deck is generally used as a for movement relates to the shrinkage
Floors constructed using joists with an diaphragm and, to achieve this, floor potential of the soil as follows:
asymmetric web (e.g. of ‘C’ or Sigma boarding should be attached using self- • high potential - 150mm
profile) can cause the floor to ‘roll’. To drilling, self-tapping screws, ring shank • medium potential - 100mm
avoid this, one of the following alternatives nails or other approved fixings at 300mm • low potential - 50mm.
should be used where the span exceeds maximum centres. T&g joints should be
glued. Voids should be ventilated by openings
3.5m for ‘C’ joists or 4.2m for Sigma joists:
providing not less than either 1500mm2
• a continuous line (or lines) of proprietary
per metre run of external wall or 500mm2
steel herringbone struts provided
per m2 of floor area, whichever gives the
between the joists. The pairs of struts
greater opening area.
should have a physical gap between
them so that they do not rub against

Every part of the void under the floor (c) fire-stops

should be thoroughly ventilated through Fire-stops should be provided in accordance MATERIALS STANDARDS
openings on at least two opposite sides. with relevant Building Regulations.
SERVICES PROVISION OF (b) take account of the design
6.10 - D9 Services shall be adequately INFORMATION Materials that comply with the design and
protected from damage the guidance below will be acceptable
Cutting of service holes on site should be shall be produced in a clearly for external and internal walls, and floors
avoided since badly cut edges can have understandable format and include all using light steel framing.
an adverse affect on the durability of the relevant information Materials for external and internal walls
frame and may cause damage to pipes and floors using light steel framing
For light steel framed walls and floors, the
and cables. should comply with all relevant standards,
following information should be available:
Grommets should be used around the edge • relevant drawings including those listed below. Where no
of service holes to protect electrical cables • materials specification standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
and reduce the risk of bimetallic corrosion. • fixing schedules applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
Swaged holes for electric cables and • fixing details Standards and Technical Requirements’).
plastic piping do not require grommets. • manufacturers’ recommendations
References to British Standards and
relating to proprietary items.
Service mains and service outlets should Codes of Practice include those made
be designed to ensure the fire resistance The information should be in a form under the Construction Products Directive
of walls and floors is not impaired. suitable for the use of site operatives and (89/106/EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
be available on site before and during European Technical Specifications
In Scotland, services are not permitted construction. approved by a European Committee for
within framed separating walls. Standardisation (CEN).
Assembly instructions should allow for
ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE every structural connection made on site
including fixing details for framing, wall STEEL AND FIXINGS
6.10 - D10 Internal walls and floors shall ties and should show as appropriate: 6.10 - M2 Steel and fixings shall be
be designed to adequately resist the • number and spacing of bolts, screws and suitable for the design and adequately
passage of sound rivets protected against corrosion
Designs should be in accordance with • size and type of each fixing type,
relevant Building Regulations and other including corrosion protection.
(a) steel
statutory requirements. Steel should be grade S280 or S350 to BS
be distributed to appropriate personnel EN 10326. Grade S390 steel may be used if
CONTROL OF FIRE
6.10
it has a nominal yield strength of 390N/

Ensure that design and specification
6.10 - D11 Walls and floors shall resist mm2 and meets the concepts of
the spread of fire BS EN 10326.
All structural elements should have and/or suppliers. To provide adequate protection against
adequate fire resistance. corrosion due to condensation and the
Where proprietary products are to be
environment, the steel should be pre-
Items to be taken into account include: used, manufacturers usually have specific
galvanised in accordance with BS EN 10326 to
(a) ceilings requirements for fixing and/or assembly
provide a minimum zinc coating of 275g/m2.
Ceilings should provide the necessary fire of their products. This information should
protection to floors constructed with light also be made available for reference Light steel floor joists and ring beams
steel joists. Either one or two layers of on site so that work can be carried out in ground floors should be galvanised
plasterboard are required and at least one satisfactorily in accordance with the design to 450g/m2. Alternatively they can be
of these should be fire-rated. When two and specification. galvanised to 275g/m2 with additional
layers of board are used, joints should be protection of a two-coat bitumen based
Copies of the assembly instructions should
staggered between layers. Boards should coating to BS 1070, BS 3416 or BS 6949,
be given to the person doing the job.
be attached using self-drilling, self-tapping or have a two coat liquid asphaltic
screws. composition applied. Ring beams to ground
CERTIFICATION floors should be totally protected and
(b) cavity barriers 6.10 - D14 Design of the superstructure joists protected for 300mm adjacent to the
Cavity barriers should be provided shall be checked by an NHBC steel frame support or ring beam.
in accordance with relevant Building certifier
Regulations. (b) compatibility
The specific project details should be Where two metals are to be joined they
Horizontal cavity barriers (except under checked by an NHBC steel frame certifier should be compatible and not cause
eaves) should be protected with a dpc tray. so that a certificate can be issued in bimetallic corrosion in that environment.
The tray should have a minimum upstand accordance with Appendix 6.10-A. The Alternatively the two metals should be
of 100mm. Alternatively polyethylene project certificate should be made isolated from each other.
encased cavity barriers providing a available on site for inspection by NHBC.
minimum upstand of 100mm should be The choice of fixings needs to take account
used. of bimetallic corrosion which can occur
when two dissimilar metals are in contact.

(c) connectors Plywood sheathing should be: Vapour control products manufactured
The following connectors are acceptable: • in accordance with BS 5268 Part 6 from recycled materials should be
• zinc plated bolts should be in • WBP to BS EN 636 assessed in accordance with Technical
accordance with BS 4190 • at least 5.5mm thick Requirement R3.
• countersunk bolts should be in • appropriate to the exposure of the
accordance with BS 4933 building. PLASTERBOARD
• screws should be in accordance with
Oriented strand board should be OSB3 to 6.10 - M9 Plasterboard shall be of a
BS 5427
BS EN 300 and be at least 8mm thick. suitable thickness for its intended use
• rivets should be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations Proprietary sheathing materials should Plasterboard should be to BS 1230.
• self-piercing rivets should be in be assessed in accordance with Technical Plasterboard thickness should be not less
accordance with the manufacturer’s Requirement R3 and used in accordance than:
recommendations with the assessment. • 9.5mm for stud spacings up to 450mm
• ring shank nails should be in accordance • 12.5mm for stud spacing up to 600mm.
with BS EN 10263
• welded connections should be in
BREATHER MEMBRANES To provide fire-resistance, fire-rated boards
accordance with BS 5135. The welding 6.10 - M6 Breather membranes shall be should be used and installed in accordance
wire should be in accordance with capable of allowing water vapour from with the manufacturer’s instructions.
BS 2901. within the frame to pass out into the
Cleats should comply with the requirements
cavity and protect the sheathing and CAVITY BARRIERS AND
frame from external moisture
of BS 5950. FIRE-STOPS
Breather membranes should be:
(d) holding down devices 6.10 - M10 Materials used for cavity
• vapour resistant to less than 0.6MNs/g
Holding down devices should be barriers and fire-stops shall be capable
when calculated from the results of tests
manufactured from mild steel with zinc of providing adequate resistance to fire
carried out in accordance with BS 3177
coating to BS 729 or BS 1706 and be at 25°C and relative humidity of 75% and smoke
suitable for the environment they will be • capable of resisting water penetration Materials specified in statutory requirements
exposed to. • self-extinguishing are acceptable.
• durable
Holding down devices manufactured from Suitable fire-stopping materials include:
• adequately strong when wet to resist
stainless steel to BS EN 10095 will be • mineral wool
site damage
suitable in any environment. • glass wool
• Type 1 to BS 4016 in areas of Very
Severe exposure. • cement mortar
DAMP-PROOF COURSES • gypsum plaster
• intumescent mastic or preformed strip
6.10 - M3 Materials for damp-proofing THERMAL INSULATION • proprietary sealing systems (particularly
6.10
shall adequately resist the passage of those designed for service penetrations)
6.10 - M7 Insulation materials shall be
moisture assessed in accordance with Technical
of a suitable thickness to comply with
Materials which are acceptable for use as the design and statutory requirements Requirement R3 to maintain the fire
dpcs include: resistance of the wall.
Insulation materials should be inert,
• polyethylene to BS 6515
durable, rot and vermin proof and should
• bitumen to BS 6398
not be adversely affected by moisture or FLOOR DECKING
vapour. 6.10 - M11 The type and thickness of the
R3. decking material shall have adequate
The following materials are acceptable:
• mineral wool to BS EN 13162 strength and moisture resistance
WALL TIES AND FIXINGS • FR (flame retardant) grade expanded The following materials are acceptable:
polystyrene to BS EN 13163 • moisture-resistant chipboard Type P5 to
6.10 - M4 Wall ties and fixings shall • FR (flame retardant) grade extruded BS EN 312
connect the steel frame to the cladding polystyrene to BS EN 13164 • oriented strand board Type OSB3 to BS
in accordance with the design • rigid polyurethane foam and EN 300
For masonry claddings wall ties should polyisocyanurate to BS EN 13165 • plywood in accordance with BS EN 636.
be of austenitic stainless steel, phosphor • phenolic foam to BS EN 13166
• cellular glass to BS EN 13167. Fixings and supports should be as
bronze or silicon bronze. Materials for wall
recommended by the manufacturer.
ties should be compatible. Stainless steel,
Other insulation materials should be
phosphor bronze and silicon bronze are Floor decking materials not covered by
compatible with each other. a British Standard should be assessed in
Requirement R3.
For other claddings, ties and fixings should
be assessed in accordance with Technical VAPOUR CONTROL
Requirement R3.
LAYERS
SHEATHING 6.10 - M8 Vapour control layers shall
restrict the passage of water vapour
6.10 - M5 Sheathing shall be durable from within the dwelling to the steel
and capable of providing structural frame
resistance to racking
Minimum 500 gauge polyethylene sheet
Cement bonded particle board sheathing or vapour control plasterboard should be
should be in accordance with BS EN 634 used.
and BS EN 13986.

The following guidance should be used,

SITEWORK STANDARDS unless the frame manufacturer confirms
6.10 - S1 All sitework shall: otherwise:
Gap under Acceptable packing
(b) take account of the design base rail
(c) follow established good practice and anchor fixed to studs
less than provide shims under each stud
workmanship
10mm position
Sitework that complies with the design 10 - 20mm provide shims under each stud
and the guidance below will be acceptable position and grout under the
for external and internal walls, and floors whole length of the base rail
using light steel framing. with cement:sand mortar
more than obtain advice from the frame
Information in a form suitable for the 20mm designer/manufacturer -
use of site operatives should be available remedial work to the
on site before and during construction substructure may be required Shot-fired fixings should observe a
including: before erection commences minimum edge dimension to prevent
• relevant drawings spalling at edges of masonry or slabs.
• materials specification Shims should be of pre-galvanised steel. When shotfiring into masonry, solid
• fixing schedules Plastic or timber shims are not acceptable. concrete blocks with a minimum crushing
• fixing details strength of 7.3 N/mm2 should be used,
• manufacturers’ recommendations (b) accuracy of walls positioned to receive fixings.
relating to proprietary items. Wall frames should be checked to ensure
that they are dimensionally accurate Where the design incorporates gas
CONSTRUCTION OF before erection commences. membranes (methane or radon) fixings
should not puncture them but where this is
LOADBEARING WALLS AND All light steel framing should be correctly unavoidable the penetration should
positioned, square and plumb. The
EXTERNAL INFILL WALLS verticality of a light steel frame, relative to
be sealed.
6.10 - S2 Construction of loadbearing its base should be +/- 5mm per storey. (d) alterations
walls and external infill walls shall Steelwork should only be altered with the
The horizontal position of the base rail
ensure adequate stability approval of the designer. Welded or flame cut
should not vary in alignment by more than
Items to be taken into account include: edges should be cleaned before being treated
5mm in 10m.
(a) setting out with a zinc-rich paint to prevent corrosion.
nominal line of frame line of frame
The structure onto which the light steel
(e) fixing panels
frame is to be erected should be correctly
Wall panels should be securely fixed together
6.10
set out in accordance with the design. The max 5mm max 5mm
and to floors in accordance with the design.
loads from the light steel frame should be
supported as detailed in the design. (f) masonry claddings
25x25mm Soft joints should be provided to allow for
spacing blocks 20mm 30mm
differential movement. A gap of 1mm per
metre of wall height should be provided at
10m
openings and soffits.
(c) anchoring the frame

The frame should be anchored to resist
both lateral movement and uplift as
required by the design.
bolt down bracket
overhangs should frame maximum 12mm from compressible joint

not exceed 12mm edge with ledge protected to be 1.0mm thick
chemical anchor at per metre of masonry
20o from vertical to allow for vertical
movement
The supporting structure may have local
deviations in level along its length and
some packing will be required to achieve
the required tolerances and to provide for
effective load transfer. (g) supporting claddings
Masonry claddings should not be
supported by the light steel framed walls
unless shown in the design.
Masonry claddings may be tied to the light
steel framed walls with flexible wall ties
fixed through to the studs.
Lightweight claddings should be supported
by the light steel framed walls on battens
or by other suitable means unless shown
otherwise in the design.

(h) fixing wallboard INSULATION VAPOUR CONTROL
Plasterboard should be fixed in accordance
with Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’
6.10 - S3 Insulation shall be correctly LAYERS
installed
(Sitework).
6.10 - S6 A vapour control layer shall
Insulation should cover the whole external
Other wallboards should be fixed in be correctly installed in accordance with
face of the wall and extend 150mm below
accordance with the manufacturer’s the bottom rail to maintain a warm frame. the design
recommendations. Where required by the design a vapour
Insulation boards should be tightly butted.
Wallboards should be attached to light control layer should be fixed on the warm
Joints between boards should be taped
steel studs using self-drilling, self-tapping side of the insulation and frame.
with a suitable tape where required by the
screws at not more than 300mm centres. design. The vapour control layer should be of the
Other fixings should be in accordance with material specified in the design. Minimum
Foil-faced insulation boards with an
the manufacturer’s recommendations. 500 gauge polyethylene sheet or vapour
integral facing on one side only should be
control plasterboard should be used.
Particular care should be taken at fixed with the foil face on the cavity side.
the junction between walls and roofs. Where polyethylene sheet is used all joints
Reference should be made to Chapter 8.2 BREATHER MEMBRANES in the vapour control layer should have
‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (Sitework). at least 100mm laps, located on studs or
6.10 - S4 Breather membranes shall be noggings. Double sided tape or adhesive
(i) movement between steel frame wall provided where required by the design should be used as a temporary fixing
and other elements Breather membranes should be lapped so before the wall board is fixed.
Movement joints between light steel that each joint is protected and moisture
framed walls and other elements should be Where vapour control plasterboard is used,
drains outwards. joints between sheets should be positioned
provided in accordance with the design.
Laps should be at least 100mm on on studs or noggings. When cutting vapour
A joint should be constructed between the horizontal joints and 150mm on vertical control plasterboard, care should be taken
frame and any chimney or flue to prevent joints. not to displace the vapour control material.
load transfer onto the chimney or flue.
Any holes made in the vapour control layer
(j) cavities WALL TIES AND FIXINGS should be made good and sealed.
A clear cavity should be provided to reduce 6.10 - S5 Wall ties and fixings shall be The vapour control layer should cover the
the risk of rain penetrating to the frame. correctly installed external wall including base rails, head
The following minimum cavity widths,
Wall ties should: rails, studs, lintels and window reveals.
measured between the claddings and
sheathings, should be provided. • be fixed through to the studs At the base of the wall the vapour control
• be inclined away from the light steel layer should overlap the base rail.
framing
6.10
Cladding Cavity width
• be kept clean and free from mortar
Masonry 50mm nominal
droppings. CLADDING
Render on backed 25mm nominal
lathing
6.10 - S7 Cladding shall be correctly
Wall ties should be spaced as required by
installed
Vertical tile No vertical cavity the design but not less than 3.7 ties/m2
hanging without required when a e.g. spaced at a maximum of 600mm Masonry cladding should be constructed
underlay breather membrane is horizontally and 450mm vertically. At in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External
provided masonry walls’ (Design and Sitework).
jambs of openings the spacing should be
Other cladding* 15mm nominal a maximum of 300mm vertically with ties
For other claddings reference should be
set within 225mm of the masonry reveal.
* see Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and made to Chapter 6.9 ‘Curtain walling and
cladding’ Other fixings should be of the type cladding’ (Design and Sitework).
specified, and be fixed in accordance with
The cavity should be extended at least A clear cavity should be provided between
the design.
150mm below the dpc and be kept clear the sheathing and the cladding. The cavity
to allow drainage. Weep holes or other should be drained. Where wall areas are
suitable means of drainage should be divided by cavity barriers, the drainage of
provided where necessary to prevent water the cavity should be maintained or cavity
build up in the cavity. trays and weep holes installed.
Drainage at the base of the cladding
system should be equivalent to 500mm2/m
run (e.g. for masonry, one open perpend
150mm minimum
every 1.5m).
Openings for drainage should be placed to
prevent the ingress of rain.
The cavity should be kept clean, free of
obstructions and should be capable of
draining freely.

CONSTRUCTION OF NON- Non-loadbearing partitions should not be LIGHT STEEL JOISTS

wedged against floor joists, ceiling joists or
LOADBEARING INTERNAL roof trusses. Allowance should be made for 6.10 - S10 Light steel joists shall be
WALLS the floor joists, ceiling joists or roof trusses selected, located and supported as
to deflect so that the partition does not detailed in the design
6.10 - S8 Construction of non- become loadbearing.
loadbearing internal walls shall ensure Items to be taken into account include:
adequate stability (a) protection
Where required by the design ground
floor joists should be protected by the
(a) setting out and workmanship application of a two-coat bitumen based
Partitioning should be correctly positioned, coating, or have a two-coat liquid asphaltic
square and plumb. composition applied. Ring beams to ground
floors should be totally protected and
joists protected for 300mm adjacent to the
support or ring beam.
(b) joist spacings
Joist spacings should be as shown in the
design.
(c) joist support cleats
SUPPORT WHERE WALL IS
PARALLEL AND BETWEEN JOISTS Joist support cleats should be of the correct
type and fitted in the specified location with
the fixings specified in the design.
channel fixed to
structure over
Where joists are fitted directly to light
steel wall studs, pre-drilled holes should be
head rail should
not be connected
correctly aligned before making the final
to top track connection.
Studs should be spaced at maximum Fixing holes should not be enlarged and
450mm or 600mm centres to suit the additional holes should not be cut without
wall board thickness as required by the the consent of the designer.
design. Extra studs should be provided at Where required, web stiffeners should be
openings, if required by the design. properly fitted to ensure good bearing.
(b) size of steel members
6.10
Non-loadbearing partitions should be

constructed in accordance with the design.
SUPPORT WHERE FLOOR OR
BEAM IS ABOVE WALL
(c) alterations
Steelwork should only be altered with the
approval of the designer. Welded or flame Noggings or straps should be provided
cut edges should be cleaned and treated as required to support fittings, such as
with a zinc-rich paint to prevent corrosion. radiators, wall-mounted boilers, sanitary
fittings, kitchen units, etc.
(d) support and fixings
Non-loadbearing partitions should be fixed Fixing and finishing of partitions should be
in accordance with the design. They should in accordance with Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and
be fixed to the floor on which they stand, ceiling finishes’ (Sitework).
at the head, to each other and to abutting
walls. Noggings or extra studs should be SEPARATING WALLS floor joists supported on ‘Z‘
section attached to wall frame
used where shown in the design.
6.10 - S9 Construction of separating
walls shall ensure adequate sound
insulation
The design details should be carefully
followed.
There should be no gaps in the:
• mineral wool quilt or batts
• wallboard layers
• fire-stopping.
Services in or adjacent to separating walls
should be installed in accordance with the
design. (See clause 6.10 - S17).
extra stud to support partition
bolted web to web connection

(d) joist length and end support span exceeds 3.5m for ‘C’ joists or 4.2m for reinforced service hole
Sigma joists unless otherwise specified in

the design:
• a continuous line (or lines) of proprietary
steel herringbone strutting provided grommet (to all punched holes)
between the joists. The pairs of ties

should have a physical gap between
them so that they do not rub against elongated service hole
each other at the cross-over point and

cause noise
6.10 - S12 Restraint strapping shall be

provided in accordance with the design
floor joists directly supported on wall • solid blocking provided to every third Where external walls, not constructed from
frame with stiffener to prevent instability pair of joists with ties between light steel framing, are to be stabilised by
a connection to the floor, straps may be
required. Straps will generally be fixed to
Joists should be accurately cut to length the web of the joist, to suit the masonry
in the factory to ensure a tight fit. The courses.
correct type, size and number of fixings
• joists alternately reversed and tied Where joists run parallel to the wall,
should be as specified at every connection.
together in pairs straps should be supported on noggings
(e) support of trimmed and trimming fixed between the joists. Straps should
joists be placed at a maximum of 2m apart and
Some end notching of light steel joists carried over three joists. Packing should
may be required for interconnection be provided between the wall and the first
of trimming joists. This should be in joist.
accordance with the design. Notches • joists alternately reversed and
Straps should be fixed with suitable bolts,
elsewhere in the span are unacceptable. continuous ties (e.g. resilient bar) fixed
screws or rivets and should bear on the
Welded or flame cut edges should be to the joist flanges.
centre of bricks or blocks, not across
cleaned and treated with zinc-rich paint to
mortar joints.
prevent corrosion.
6.10 - S13 Overlapping joists shall be
properly fixed to prevent disruption of
6.10
finishes
Where joists bear onto steelwork or
are supported by cleats, blocking is not Where joists overlap on loadbearing
unacceptable notch necessary adjacent to the supports. intermediate walls they should be fixed
together with bolts or screws to prevent
(i) alterations the floor decking being pushed up or
Joists should only be altered with the the ceiling being cracked when the
approval of the designer. Welded or flame cantilevered part of the joist moves
cut edges should be cleaned and treated upwards.
with a zinc-rich paint to prevent corrosion.
6.10 - S11 Joists shall be drilled or holes

(f) joist bearings punched within recognised limits
Where light steel joists are supported by The flanges of a light steel joist should not
steel joists, cleats or web stiffeners should be notched unless in accordance with the
be used in accordance with the design. design.
(g) fixing of multiple joists Drilling or punching through the web
Joists may be doubled up to support should only be carried out within
partitions or to form trimmers. Fixings recognised limits.
should be in accordance with the design
and should be properly installed. Bolted Unstiffened holes through the web should
connections should be tightened to the be carried out within the following limits:
torque given in the design. • a rectangular hole or slot should not overlapping joists
exceed 40% of the overall depth of the
(h) prevention of roll member. The length of the hole should 6.10 - S14 Continuous joists shall be
Bridging and blocking should be provided not exceed three times the depth of the reinforced in accordance with the design
in accordance with the design to prevent hole
roll. • the diameter of circular holes should not Where joists are continuous over
exceed 60% of the depth of the member loadbearing intermediate walls, they
Floors constructed with joists with an
• unstiffened holes should be at least the should be reinforced as required by the
asymmetric web (e.g. of ‘C’ or Sigma
depth of the member apart and at least design.
profile) can cause the floor to ‘roll’.
1.5 times the depth from the end of the
To avoid this one of the following member.
alternatives should be provided where the

6.10 - S15 Floor decking and ceilings Grommets should be used around the edge • A detailed description of the system
shall be adequately fixed of service holes to protect electrical cables • Details of any limitations of its use
and reduce the risk of bimetallic corrosion • Information for reference by the
between the light steel framing and copper designer and steel frame project
(a) decking pipes. certifier.
Flooring should be attached using * The manufacturer is the company which
self-drilling, self-tapping screws, ring Swaged holes will not require grommets
assembles the steel frame sections to form
shank nails or other approved fixings in for the passage of electric cables and
the wall and/or floor panels.
accordance with the design at centres not plastic piping.
more than 300mm. T&g joints should be If in doubt consult with NHBC Technical.
In Scotland services are not permitted
glued.
within a separating wall cavity. Stage 2 - Project certification
NHBC requires the builder to appoint a steel
CONTROL OF FIRE frame project certifier to check the specific
design of the steel framed housing on the
6.10 - S18 Fire spread shall be
specific site.
controlled as detailed in the design
The steel frame project certifier will ensure
that the proposals are in accordance with:
(a) walls
• The manufacturer’s system certificate
Walls should be constructed in accordance
issued by SCI, and
with the design and relevant Building
• NHBC Standards Chapter 6.10 ‘Light
Regulations to achieve the necessary fire
steel framed walls and floors’.
resistance.
In order to provide confirmation that
(b) floors both documents have been satisfied for
Floors should be constructed in a specific project, the steel frame project
channel bearing stiffener
accordance with the design and relevant certifier will need to check supporting
Building Regulations to achieve the details and calculations.
(b) ceilings necessary fire resistance.
Plasterboard should be fixed in accordance If satisfied that the specific project details
with Chapter 8.2 ‘Wall and ceiling finishes’ (c) cavity barriers and fire-stops are satisfactory, the steel frame project
(Sitework) using self-drilling, self-tapping Cavity barriers and fire-stops should be certifier will issue a ‘project certificate’ to
screws. installed in positions detailed by the design the builder.
and relevant Building Regulations.
Other ceiling boards should be fixed in Project certificates can only be issued
accordance with the manufacturer’s Service penetrations in floors between by steel frame certifiers who have been
recommendations. dwellings should be fire-stopped. There approved by NHBC*.
6.10
should be no holes or gaps for smoke to

The project certificate should be made
SEPARATING FLOORS penetrate once the fire-stopping has been
available on site for inspection by NHBC.
installed.
6.10 - S16 Construction of separating
* Applications to become a steel frame
floors shall ensure adequate sound
insulation Appendix 6.10-A certifier should be made to NHBC
Technical, Buildmark House, Chiltern
The floating part of a floor should be Avenue, Amersham,
completely separated from the main Bucks HP6 5AP.
structure and surrounding walls by a Certification procedure
resilient layer.
All joints should be glued where boards are This Appendix outlines the two-stage
laid loose over insulation without battens. certification process required by NHBC for
light steel framed housing:
SERVICES Stage 1 - System certification
NHBC requires manufacturers* of steel
6.10 - S17 Services shall be adequately frame systems forming loadbearing wall
protected from damage and floor panels to submit details in the
Services and service outlets should be form of a system manual, to the Steel
installed in accordance with the design. Construction Institute (SCI), Silwood Park,
Ascot, Berkshire, SL5 7QN for assessment.
Light steel studs should not be notched
to accommodate services. Holing of The system manual must contain all of the
structural light steel members should only information shown in Table 1 (overleaf).
be carried out as detailed in the Clause Where there are choices (e.g. types of
6.10 - S11 unless approved by the designer. claddings) the manufacturer will need to
Welded or flame cut edges should be specify which options the SCI is to consider
cleaned and treated with zinc-rich paint to in its assessment.
prevent corrosion.
The SCI will, upon satisfactory completion
Cutting of service holes on site should be of the assessment, issue a numbered
avoided since badly cut edges can have ‘system certificate’ and approve the
an adverse affect on the durability of the manufacturer’s system manual. The system
frame and may cause damage to pipes and certificate issued by the SCI will include
cables. the following information:

Table 1 - Information to be contained in the system manual
This table outlines the minimum information that should be provided in the system manual.
The SCI may ask for additional information.
Topic Description
Description of system Key features
Application The use(s) to which the system can be put, e.g. max number of storeys,
type of cladding
Durability Confirmation that design life is at least 60 years
Grade of steel
Corrosion protection
Supplementary protection
Strength and stability Structural design philosophy including Codes of Practice referenced
and test reports
Grade of steel (traceability)
Section properties
Loading
Ultimate Limit State
Serviceability Limit State
Resistance to overturning
Racking resistance
Holding down
Connections
Structural integrity
Positions and sizes of holes through members
Claddings Which claddings are acceptable?
Provision of cavity
Type of wall ties
Behaviour in relation to fire Which internal linings are necessary?
Fire-stops and cavity barriers
Condensation risk Type, thickness and location of insulation material
6.10
Sound insulation Does specification comply with Building Regulations/Robust Details?
Balconies, terraces, and Any specific design considerations
parapets
Other Other information of relevance to the designer and steel frame certifier
INDEX
A G S
Accuracy 6 Ground floors 3 Separating walls 8
Alterations 6, 8, 9 H Services 4, 10
B Holding down 5 Setting out 6, 8
Breather membranes 2, 5, 7 I Sheathing 5
C Insulation 2, 5, 7 Sound insulation 4, 10
Cavities 2, 7 J Steel 1, 4, 8, 9
Cavity barriers and fire-stops 4, 5, 10 Joists 2, 8 System Certification 4, 10
Claddings 2, 6, 7 L T
Compatibility 1, 4 Loadbearing walls 1 Thermal insulation 5
Connections 1 M V
Connectors 5 Moisture control 2 Vapour control layers 5, 7
Control of fire 4, 10 N Ventilation (of voids) 3
D Non-loadbearing walls 1, 8 W
Deflection 3 P Wall ties and fixings 2, 5, 7
Design 1 Plasterboard 5
Dpc and dpm 2, 5 Project certification 4, 10
F R
Fixings 4, 5, 6, 7 Restraint strapping 9
Floor decking 3, 5, 10 Roll 3, 9
Floors 2, 3, 4

Part 7
Roofs
7.2 Pitched roofs

Part 7 Roofs
Chapter 7.1
Flat roofs and balconies
CONTENTS SCOPE
DESIGN Clause Page
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for flat roofs and balconies
with a fully supported continuous weatherproofing membrane.
Loadbearing structure D3-D4 1
Principles of design D5 2
Structural deck D6 2
Thermal insulation and vapour control layers D7 2
Waterproofing and surface finishes D8 2

Rainwater drainage D9 2
Guarding to balconies D10 3
Access for maintenance D11 3
MATERIALS
Waterproofing M2 4
Structural timber M3 4
Profiled metal M4 4
Green and proprietary roofs M5 4
SITEWORK
In-situ reinforced concrete S2 4
Precast concrete S3 4
Profiled metal S4 4
Timber S5 5
Structural decks S6 5
Drainage S7 6
7.1
Thermal insulation and vapour control layers S8 6

Waterproofing S9 6
Guarding to balconies S10 7
Protection of materials from weather S11 7
APPENDIX 7.1-A
Commonly used flat roofs 8
APPENDIX 7.1-B
Surface treatments 13
APPENDIX 7.1-C
Construction details for flat roofs and 14
balconies
INDEX 16

Flat roofs and balconies 7.1
where required, should be provided at (b) in-situ reinforced concrete
DESIGN STANDARDS 2.0m centres (maximum) (see Sitework In-situ reinforced concrete construction
clause 7.1 - S5(d)). should be designed in accordance with
BS 8110 and, where appropriate, Chapter
Requirements (c) durability 2.1 ‘Concrete and its reinforcement’.
Design that follows the guidance below will Technical Requirement R3 states that the A concrete mix with low shrinkage
be acceptable for flat roofs and balconies. structure shall, unless specifically agreed characteristics should be specified.
otherwise in writing with NHBC, have a life
For the purposes of this Chapter: of at least 60 years. (c) precast concrete
• generally, a flat roof has a maximum Precast concrete construction should be
slope of 10° from the horizontal; The use of timber in balconies should be
designed in accordance with BS 8110.
however, many flat roof systems can be limited to secondary elements which in
The design of concrete elements should
used at greater pitches, in some cases turn are supported by materials other than
allow for the following:
up to vertical. Specifications for sloping timber. Timber can be used in the following
• continuity or anti-crack reinforcement
roofs are generally the same as for flat situations provided it has the appropriate
• allowance for movement at about 15m
roofs, but will require mechanical fixings durability - see Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber
intervals and at abutments.
to hold the materials in place preservation (natural solid timber)’:
• “deck” is the structural substrate of a • cantilevered solid timber joist balconies (d) profiled metal
flat roof with a waterproof membrane above the The manufacturer’s load/span tables for
• “decking” is the upper trafficked joists each profile should be consulted and
surface of a balcony (commonly a • open balcony constructions with timber should include the relevant applied safety
hardwood assembly laid onto the roof decking. The decking may be supported factor. Profiled metals used for roof decks
or substantial paving tiles bedded to the on solid timber joists which in turn are should have a profile with crowns of at
surface). supported by materials or components least 50% of the profile width (not the
other than timber sheet width) for bonded systems and
Note: Profile sheeted roofing acting as the • balustrading. 45% for mechanically fixed systems, in
waterproofing is outside the scope of this Timber should not be used for: order to provide adequate support for the
Chapter because it is discontinuous and • gallows brackets supporting a balcony remainder of the roof build-up.
not continuously supported. • posts or columns supporting a balcony
• guard rails or their support.
STATUTORY
7.1 - D4 Structural design shall be
REQUIREMENTS undertaken to a recognised standard
7.1 - D2 Design shall comply with all to ensure that loads are transmitted to
relevant statutory requirements the supporting structure without undue
movement
Designs should be in accordance with
profile width
relevant Building Regulations and other Items to be taken into account include:
statutory requirements. (a) timber (where appropriate) crown width
Structural design should be in accordance

LOADBEARING with one of the following:
• BS 5268
STRUCTURE • appropriate load/span tables published
7.1 - D3 Flat roofs and balconies, by TRADA in support of Building crown width to be not less than 50%
of the profile width for bonded systems
including associated elements such as Regulations and associated documents and 45% for mechanically fixed systems.
support and guarding, shall be designed • I-joists and metal web joists should
to resist the applied loading and have be specified in accordance with the Construction loadings, including point
adequate durability
Structural design shall be undertaken in
manufacturer’s recommendations, but not
used in situations where any part of the
loads imposed by foot traffic, storage of
materials and loads imposed by following
trades should be taken into account.
7.1
joist is exposed to external conditions.
accordance with a recognised standard. Protection sheets, such as plywood,
Items to be taken into account include: Joist hangers should be the correct size should be used to prevent damage if such
for the timber joists being supported and loadings are expected.
meet with BS EN 845.
Dead and imposed loads should be Fixing to the structure should be in
calculated in accordance with BS 6399. Pre-drilled vertical holding down straps accordance with the manufacturer’s
Where a flat roof is to act as a roof should be at least one metre long, and instructions and BS 6399-2. Unless the
terrace, roof garden or car parking area, 30mm x 2.5mm in cross section. manufacturer agrees otherwise, the
appropriate provision should be made for deck should be side stitched to ensure it
the additional loadings. Intensive green All mild steel straps and fixings should be
performs as a continuous plane layer.
roofs should only be used in conjunction protected against corrosion in accordance
with concrete decks. with Tables 1 and 14 of BS 5628-3. The frequency of fixings should meet the
manufacturer’s recommendations, and be
See clause 7.1 - D3 for guidance on the use
(b) wind loads calculated to resist the wind uplift figures
of timber in balcony construction.
Wind loads appropriate to the site should derived from BS 6399-2.
be calculated in accordance with BS 6399. Reference should be made to Materials
The design should resist uplift from wind clause 7.1 - M1 and Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber (e) structural steelwork
forces either by anchorage to the main preservation (natural solid timber)’ (Design) Structural steelwork should be designed
structure or by being of sufficient weight for timbers requiring preservative treatment. in accordance with BS 5950 and Technical
to prevent lifting. Holding down straps, Requirement R5. Supporting steelwork
and purlins should be square, true and free
from twists or sagging.

(f) differential movement STRUCTURAL DECK The manufacturer of the membrane

Allowance should be made for movement system for a green roof should confirm
in larger roofs (e.g. roofs to blocks of flats), 7.1 - D6 Flat roof decks shall be of that the overall roof design is compatible
particularly where the span of the roof deck adequate strength and moisture with the system. The complete green
changes, e.g. in L-shaped buildings. Joints resistance roof should be installed by a contractor
should be continuous through the vertical Deck materials suitable for the different trained and approved by the membrane
upstands, walls and edges of the building. types of roof design are given in Appendix manufacturer.
Details are shown in Appendix 7.1-C. 7.1-A. Once completed the waterproof membrane
(g) lateral restraint should be visually inspected and
Where walls require lateral restraint, this THERMAL INSULATION electronically tested for waterproofing
may be provided by joists and concrete AND VAPOUR CONTROL integrity, faults rectified, and the roof
roof elements. The bearings for concrete re-tested before further layers, such as
elements and timber joists where they are LAYERS reservoir or filter layers and the subsoil and
built in should be at least 90mm. 7.1 - D7 Flat roofs (and balconies topsoil are placed. The tested membrane
functioning as roofs) shall have adequate should be protected from damage until
Where joists or concrete beams are parallel subsequent layers are applied.
thermal insulation
to walls, restraint straps at 2m centres
(maximum) should be provided. The BRE Report “Thermal insulation: The results of the test should be made
avoiding risks” discusses aspects of available to NHBC.
(h) sound transmission insulation relevant to flat roofs and
Where the roof is a terrace above another The waterproofing for an intensive roof
balconies. In England and Wales account should be of reinforced bitumen membrane
dwelling care should be taken to ensure should be taken of “Accredited Details”.
that the design is in accordance with (RBM) or mastic asphalt and the design
relevant Building Regulations. Thermal insulation materials suitable for should include protection of the membrane
the different types of roof design are given from possible damage during maintenance
in Appendix 7.1-A together with materials of the garden e.g. from weeding/planting.
PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN for vapour control layers and their position A filter layer should be placed above the
7.1 - D5 Flat roofs shall be to a in the construction. The insulation material reservoir layer in accordance with the
recognised design for inverted roofs should be suitable manufacturer’s recommendations.
Appendix 7.1-A shows the three flat for external use and to withstand any OTHER FLAT ROOF COVERINGS
roof constructions acceptable to NHBC anticipated traffic. These are given in Materials clause M1 and
with variations for timber and concrete Where insulation is mechanically fixed the should be used in accordance with the
structural support. fixings should be of sufficient length to following:
ensure they have adequate penetration • zinc sheet CP143-5 ‘Code of Practice for
They are:
into the supporting structure. sheet roof and wall coverings’
warm roof - concrete deck • copper sheet CP143-12 ‘Code of Practice
for sheet roof and wall coverings’
  - timber deck WATERPROOFING AND • lead sheet BS 6915 ‘Design and
  - profiled metal deck SURFACE FINISHES construction of fully supported lead
inverted - inverted concrete deck 7.1 - D8 Flat roofs (and balconies sheet roof and wall coverings’.
warm roof
functioning as roofs) shall adequately
green roof - intensive* resist the passage of moisture to the RAINWATER DRAINAGE
  - extensive* inside of the building
7.1 - D9 Flat roofs (and balconies
The roof coverings and surface finishes functioning as roofs) shall have adequate
*A green roof should be a complete system from suitable for different types of roof design
7.1
the membrane manufacturer and not individual rainwater disposal to a suitable outfall
are given in Appendices 7.1-A, 7.1-B and
components or materials. The details for green Items to be taken into account include:
roofs in Appendix 7.1-A are intended to be a 7.1-C.
guide and may vary depending on the individual (a) falls
Appendix 7.1-A includes typical details GENERAL
manufacturer’s system.
suitable for the following: Other than the exceptions given below,
• built-up Reinforced Bitumen Membrane all flat roofs (and balconies functioning as
Cold roofs are not recommended, due to
(RBM) roofing (formerly called “felt”) roofs) should be designed with a fall of not
the difficulty of providing:
• mastic asphalt roofing less than 1:40. A fall of 1:40 should be used
• an effective vapour control layer at
• single ply roofing systems for the design of flat roofs and balconies,
ceiling level
• green roofs (intensive and extensive). unless a detailed analysis of the roof is
• the required level of ventilation
• an unobstructed ventilation space above carried out including overall and local
Appendix 7.1-B includes details of surface deflection, to ensure the finished fall is
the insulation of 50mm
treatments. not less than 1:80. Falls to balconies acting
• ventilation at both ends of each joist
void. Appendix 7.1-C includes typical details for as flat roofs and slatted balcony decking
flat roofs and balconies. should drain way from the dwelling.
GREEN ROOFS Allowance for deflection should be made in

Intensive and extensive green roofs are the structural design where falls are achieved
shown in Appendix 7.1-A. The details in using screeds, particularly on large roofs.
Appendix 7.1-A are intended to be a guide Falls to balconies should be away from or
and may vary depending on the individual parallel to the dwelling.
manufacturer’s system.

(c) prevention of flooding PROVISION OF
Where a flat roof or balcony has an
upstand on all sides, an overflow outlet INFORMATION
should be provided through parapet 7.1 - D12 Designs and specifications
fall outlet walls or perimeter upstands to prevent shall be produced in a clearly
a build-up of water in the event of other understandable format and include all
outlets becoming blocked. The position relevant information
and height of the overflow should be such
fall away from door
that any build-up of water will not enter Clear and fully detailed drawings should
dimension :
at least 150mm the building. The capacity of the overflow be available on site to enable work to be
fall
at least
should not be less than the size of the carried out in accordance with the design.
50mm
outlet (or the aggregated capacity of the The drawings should include:
outlets, if there are several outlets). • the specification for intensive or
overflow
extensive green roofs
fall not less than
1:40 (for design • extent and direction of falls and position
purposes)
GUARDING TO BALCONIES of outlets
7.1 - D10 Balconies and flat roofs to • sections through the construction
Where decking is to be installed above
which persons have regular access other indicating how the falls are formed, and
the waterproofing but less than 150mm
than for maintenance shall be guarded means of ventilation, if required
below the sill, it should be of a type and
adequately • size, specification and position of all
design that prevents a build-up of standing
the roof components, including the
water. A grating or channel should be used Items to be taken into account include:
vapour control layer, insulation and
immediately adjacent to the threshold. (a) provision of guarding waterproofing layer
TAPERED INSULATION TO ACHIEVE Guarding should be designed as follows: • all treatment and protection of materials
FALLS • the balustrading should not be easily to achieve the necessary durability
Drainage falls to warm-decked roofs using climbed • details of construction at critical
tapered insulation should be designed • any glazing in the balustrading should junctions
by the insulation manufacturer, with falls be toughened or laminated glass or • details of balustrading and method of
of not less than 1:60. They should be laid glass blocks fixing
directly onto the vapour control layer, • balustrading should not be fixed through • details of fixing methods and fixings for
with the primary waterproofing above. the waterproofing unless special insulation and surfacing.
Cross-falls should be achieved using mitred precautions are taken (see Appendix 7.1-C).
joints. 7.1 - D13 All relevant information shall
(b) stability of guarding be distributed to appropriate personnel
METAL SHEET ROOFS Parapet walls and balustrading should
Flat roofs with metal sheet roof coverings Ensure that design and specification
be designed to resist horizontal loading
should be designed with a fall of not less information is issued to site supervisors
as required by the relevant Building
than 1:30 to ensure a finished fall of not and relevant specialist subcontractors
Regulations or BS 6399. Particular care
less than 1:60. and/or suppliers.
is needed when the design incorporates
GREEN ROOFS balustrading fixed to parapet walls to
Green roofs should be designed to retain ensure stability and prevent overturning. MATERIALS STANDARDS
some water, to support and nurture the End fixings or returns may be needed to
vegetation, and to manage the run-off, but ensure stability. 7.1 - M1 All materials shall:
the waterproofing should have falls of not (a) meet the Technical Requirements
In balcony walls (especially long balconies)
less than 1:60 or in accordance with the (b) take account of the design
the structural stability should be checked
system manufacturer’s recommendations. as the dpc at the base of the wall can Materials that comply with the design and
(b) outlets
The size and number of outlets should be
create a slip plane that can seriously limit
the ability of the wall to resist horizontal
flat roofs and balconies. 7.1
forces. In such cases, it may be necessary
designed to meet the expected rainfall Materials for flat roofs and balconies
to incorporate a ring beam or other
intensity in accordance with BS EN 12056- should comply with all relevant standards,
support to ensure stability.
3. For flat roofs bounded by parapets at including those listed below. Where no
least two outlets (or one outlet plus an In the design of parapet walls, movement standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
overflow) should be provided. Outlets should be allowed for. Reference should applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
should have a recessed mouth to allow the be made to Chapter 6.1. ‘External masonry Standards and Technical Requirements’).
free flow of water. walls’ clause D3(g).
Rainwater drainage design is covered in ACCESS FOR Construction Products Directive (89/106/
Chapter 7.2 ‘Pitched roofs’. Reference
should be made to Chapter 5.3 ‘Drainage MAINTENANCE EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
below ground’, where necessary. 7.1 - D11 Adequate access shall be approved by a European Committee for
The roof design should incorporate provided to flat roofs for the purpose of Standardisation (CEN).
rainwater outlets from flat roofs that are maintenance
accessible for maintenance. For green Appendix 7.1-A lists the materials suitable
roofs an accessible and visible inspection Provision should be made for safe future
for:
hatch should be provided at every outlet. access to flat roofs for the purposes of
• waterproofing, including flashings
maintenance.
• structure, deck and decking
• thermal insulation
• vapour control layer
• preservative treatment.

WATERPROOFING BS EN 12588 ‘Lead and lead alloys. Rolled IN-SITU REINFORCED

lead sheet for building purposes’.
7.1 – M2 Waterproofing materials shall CONCRETE
be of adequate durability and resist the
passage of moisture to the inside of the
STRUCTURAL TIMBER 7.1 - S2 In-situ reinforced concrete flat
roofs shall be constructed to ensure
building 7.1 – M3 Structural timbers shall be
they achieve the required design,
of the appropriate grade and size to
REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES, strength and durability
support the imposed loads
FORMERLY REFERRED TO AS “FELTS”.
Only high performance reinforced bitumen Items to be taken into account include:
membranes should be used, i.e. those • appropriate load/span tables published (a) accuracy of formwork
including polyester reinforcement (e.g. by TRADA in support of Building The formwork should be constructed
Type 5U, 5B/180, 5E/250 to BS 747). Regulations and associated documents accurately.
Type 5 reinforced bitumen membranes are • structural softwood for internal use Items to take into consideration are:
colour coded blue for identification. should be dry graded to BS 4978 and • accurate location of holes
marked ‘DRY’ or ‘KD’. • adequate support
SINGLE PLY MEMBRANES
(THERMOPLASTIC) • proper allowance for placing of
I-joists and metal web joists should
Examples of single layer materials steelwork
be specified in accordance with the
include PVC (polyvinyl chloride) and TPO • cast-in features, such as drips and
manufacturer’s recommendations. They
(thermoplastic polyolefine) weatherchecks
should not used in situations where any
These materials soften with increasing • surface finishes.
part of the joist is exposed to external
temperatures. Laps are welded, using conditions. Where a metal deck is used as permanent
either hot air or a specific solvent to melt
shuttering, drying of the concrete will
and fuse them. These materials should
be assessed in accordance with Technical
PROFILED METAL take place from the top surface only. A
temporary roof should be provided to
Requirement R3. 7.1 – M4 Profiled metal roof decks shall
allow drying to take place. The permanent
be of the quality, type and dimensions
LIQUID SYSTEMS waterproofing should only be installed
required by the design
These materials are applied as a liquid, when the deck has fully dried.
often laid in two or more coats. Most Profiled metal roof decks should be:
• galvanised steel to BS EN 10147 and (b) concrete grade
include a reinforcement scrim to distribute
used in compliance with BS 5950-6, or Reference should be made to Chapter
the tensile stresses.
• aluminium to BS EN 485-2. 2.1 ‘Concrete and its reinforcement’ for
• cold-applied flexible polyurethane
guidance on concreting. The design should
systems
have specified a concrete mix with low
• hot melt rubberised bitumen systems. GREEN AND PROPRIETARY shrinkage characteristics.
These are applied hot in two 3mm coats, ROOFS
with reinforcement between, and with a
7.1 – M5 Green roofs and proprietary PRECAST CONCRETE
substantial reinforced bitumen membrane
roofing systems shall be suitable for 7.1 - S3 Precast concrete flat roofs shall
protection sheet. They should only be used
their intended use be constructed to ensure they achieve
in buried applications, such as inverted
Green roofs, both intensive or extensive, the required design, strength and
roofs, green roofs, podium areas, etc.
These materials should be assessed in should be a complete system from durability
accordance with Technical Requirement R3. the membrane manufacturer and not The supporting structure should:
individual components or materials. • be even and true
MASTIC ASPHALT
• have a minimum 90mm bearing for the
To BS 6925 type 988 T25, 20mm thick on The waterproofing for an intensive roof
pre-cast units unless the design shows a
7.1
the flat, laid on black sheathing felt. should be of reinforced bitumen membrane
lesser dimension.
(RBM) or mastic asphalt.
For green roofs, three coats horizontally
(30mm total thickness) and two coats The complete green roof should be Precast units should be:
vertically (20mm total thickness) are installed by a contractor trained and • installed to provide an even surface
required. approved by the membrane manufacturer. • grouted, where required by the design.
Polymer modified asphalt waterproofing Proprietary roofing systems, which do not

should be assessed in accordance with meet with the principles given in Appendix PROFILED METAL
Technical Requirement R3. 7.1-A, should be assessed in accordance 7.1 - S4 Profiled metal flat roofs shall be
with Technical Requirement R3. constructed to ensure they achieve the
Appendix 7.1-B gives suitable surface
treatments for the waterproofing. required design, strength and durability
SHEET METAL
SITEWORK STANDARDS Items to be taken into account include:
Materials should be in accordance with the (a) material type and protection against
7.1 - S1 All sitework shall: corrosion
following: (a) meet the Technical Requirements
BS EN 501 ‘Specification for fully Sheets should be checked for conformity
(b) take account of the design with the design and specification when
supported roofing products of zinc sheet’ (c) follow established good practice and
BS EN 504 ‘Specification for fully they are delivered to site.
workmanship
supported roofing products of copper (b) adequate storage
sheet’ Construction that complies with the design
Profiled sheets should be stored to prevent :
BS EN 506 ‘Specification for self and the guidance below will be acceptable
• rusting of cut edges
supporting products of copper or zinc for flat roofs and balconies.
• severe scratching of the galvanising
sheet’ • sheets being bent or deformed.

(c) fixings Strutting should be located as follows: joists cut accurately
so that gap is not
The number, type and location of fixings hanger bearing
directly on
more than 6mm
Joist Rows of strutting
should in accordance with the design and masonry
span
specification. [m]
(d) installation Up to 2.5 none needed
The supporting steelwork and purlins 2.5 to 4.5 1 (at centre of span)
should be square, true and free from Over 4.5 maximum 2.5m centres, Spaced no gap between
hanger and wall
twists or sagging. Unless the manufacturer equally along the span
agrees otherwise, deck materials should be
notch to keep
side stitched to ensure the deck performs ceiling line level
as a continuous plane layer. In cold deck roofs, the strutting should not
prevent free cross ventilation.
Assembly of the roof, end laps, etc. should
be in accordance with the design; any (d) holding down metal strapping STRUCTURAL DECKS
variation from this should be approved by If the design specifies holding down straps
the designer. to prevent the roof being lifted off the 7.1 - S6 The structural deck shall
supporting structure, they should be at be installed to form a satisfactory
Protection sheets, e.g. plywood, should be 2.0m centres (maximum). substrate for the waterproofing system
used in areas of the roof deck subjected
Where straps are fixed to masonry, Items to be taken into account include:
to construction loadings, including point
loads imposed by foot traffic and storage hardened nails 4mm in diameter x 75mm (a) fixing of plywood and oriented strand
of materials. Loads imposed by following long or No 12 wood screws x 50mm long board
trades should be taken into account. into plugs should be used. Tongued and grooved boards laid either
with the long edge at right angles to the
Any deformed sheets should be stripped The number of fixings should be in joists or parallel to the joists should have
and replaced, before the waterproofing accordance with design requirements and the short edge supported on a joist or
and insulation system is installed. the lowest fixing should be within 150mm nogging.
of the bottom of the vertical strap.
Oriented strand board should be laid over
TIMBER strap with cross section of
supports in the direction indicated on the
30mm x 2.5mm
7.1 - S5 Timber flat roofs and (where boards. The stronger axis should be laid at
appropriate) balconies shall be right angles to the supporting joists.
constructed to meet the required design,
Roof perimeter edges of boards which
strength and durability at least 4
screw fixings do not coincide with joists should be
per strap
Items to be taken into account include: supported on noggings.
(a) grades and sizes of joists lowest fixing not
more than Unless the design specifies closer centres
Materials delivered to site should be 150mm from
bottom of strap oriented strand board and plywood
checked for conformity with the design
fixing centres should not exceed 100mm.
and specification.
Movement gaps at abutment with rigid
(b) the spacing and bearing required to upstands should be not less than 10mm
achieve reasonably level support for strap at least 1m long and gaps between square edge boards
firrings and deck should not exceed 3mm.
Timber joists should be: (e) timber quality
10mm for OSB and
• level - where necessary, hard packing plywood when it abuts for square edge
r
should be used, e.g. tiles or slates Timber should be rejected if it: a rigid upstand boards, 3mm for OSB
7.1
bedded in mortar. Loose or soft packing, • is excessively bowed, twisted or and plywood
including timber, should not be used cambered

• spaced at the centres specified on • is excessively wet
the drawing (not more than 600mm • has large edge knots or shakes
centres). • has a waney edge more than half the
thickness
The use of regularised timber joists will • has fissures
help to achieve a level deck. • has any sign of rot.
(c) strutting Where preservative treated timber has

Strutting should be one of the following: been cut after treatment the cut edges Oriented strand board should be fixed
• herringbone type (timber 38mm x should be re-treated with a coloured with flat headed ring shank nails, 3mm in
38mm) preservative. diameter at least 2½ x board thickness
• solid blocking (38mm thick timber x ¾ long and not less than 9mm from the edge
depth of joist) (f) joist hangers of the board.
• proprietary steel strutting. The joist hanger should be the correct size
for the timber joist or trimmer and nailed Plywood should be fixed with ring shank
in accordance with the design. nails, at least 50mm long x 3mm in
The masonry course to carry the joist diameter.
hangers should be level and at the correct (b) fixing of softwood boarding
height. The walling should not be cut into. Softwood tongued and grooved boarding
should be closely clamped together.
Each board should be nailed with two ring
shank nails to each joist or firring. Nail

heads should be punched below the timber (b) falls on timber roofs The area of insulation laid at any time
surface. End joints should be staggered. Firring pieces should be used to form falls, should be that which can quickly be
unless the design shows sloping joists and covered by the waterproofing or protected
(c) protection of structural deck ceiling. Where laid across the joists, firrings from wetting.
The deck should be installed in dry should be not less than the following sizes:
conditions and be protected from wetting Insulation should be bonded or
until the roof is complete. The joints in mechanically fixed in accordance with the
sheet materials which are pre-felted or Joist Minimum firring dimensions [mm] manufacturer’s recommendations.
Centres
coated should be sealed immediately after [mm]
fixing.
  width depth
The area of deck installed in any working
400 or 38 38
day should be no greater than can be 450
quickly protected from wetting.
600 38 50
Damaged materials and materials that
have been adversely affected by moisture
should be discarded.
DRAINAGE
7.1 - S7 Flat roofs shall have effective
drainage Composite decks require noggings under
Falls and gutters should be constructed in transverse edges. The joist width should
accordance with the design. Flat roofs and minimum firring dimensions be in accordance with the design to ensure
as in table above the insulation has adequate bearing.
balconies should have finished falls of not
less than 1:80 except flat roofs with metal The foil underface of a composite deck
sheet roof coverings and green roofs which (c) tapered insulation systems should be sealed with two beads of sealant
should have finished falls of not less than The manufacturer’s specific design and along all board joints to maintain the
1:60. layout drawings should be followed. The integrity of the vapour control layer.
sequence of installation should ensure
Items to be taken into account include: that boards are waterproofed and the INVERTED ROOFS
(a) falls on concrete roofs roof sealed at the end of each day, or The insulation material for inverted roofs
CEMENT/SAND SCREEDS before the arrival of inclement weather. should be in accordance with the design,
Cement sand screeds should be 1 : 4, Successive roof layers should be laid with a be suitable for external use and withstand
cement : sand. Minimum screed thicknesses minimum of delay, to avoid trapping water any anticipated traffic.
should be as follows: during construction.
GREEN ROOFS
Location of Thickness [mm] Where the vapour control layer has been
screed
(d) access to rainwater outlets used as a temporary waterproofing layer
Rainwater outlets from flat roofs should be any damage should be repaired using a full
Bonded nominally 40mm (25mm accessible. For green roofs an accessible
monolithically minimum) width section of membrane.
to insitu or
and visible inspection hatch should be
pre-cast provided at every outlet. COLD ROOFS
concrete Ventilation should be provided at both
  THERMAL INSULATION ends of each joist void, and should not be
blocked by the thickness of the insulation.
Unbonded (on nominally 70mm (50mm AND VAPOUR CONTROL A minimum of 50mm clear air space above
7.1
separating minimum)
layer) LAYERS the insulation should be maintained.
  7.1 - S8 Insulation and vapour control
Reference should be made to Chapter 8.3 layers shall be installed in accordance WATERPROOFING
‘Floor finishes’ for further guidance on with the design 7.1 - S9 Waterproofing shall prevent
laying screeds.
Appendix 7.1-A gives details of suitable water entering the building
LIGHTWEIGHT SCREEDS materials for insulation and vapour control Items to be taken into account include:
Lightweight screeds should be laid only layers for the different types of roof (a) preparation of surfaces
by specialist contractors. Lightweight designs. The structure and the surface to receive
concrete screeds should have a topping of
WARM ROOFS the waterproofing should be checked and
1 : 6, cement : sand, 13mm thick.
The design should indicate that the vapour approved by the waterproofing contractor.
SCREED FINISH control layer is below the insulation and All nails should be well punched below the
Screeds should be free from ridges and that it is sealed to the waterproofing at surface, which should be even and dry.
indentations. They should be finished with the perimeter and at all penetrations The manufacturer’s recommendations on
a wooden float to provide a smooth, even through the roof, e.g. at outlets and pipes. priming upstands, roof outlets, etc. should
surface for the vapour control layer and In single ply roofing systems the vapour be followed to achieve a satisfactory bond
waterproof finish. control layer is generally not sealed to the with the waterproofing.
waterproofing.
(b) construction sequence
Insulation boards should be kept dry at all Waterproofing systems should be
stages to prevent: laid in accordance with the design
• lack of bonding and specification following the
• trapping of moisture. recommendations of the manufacturer.

Some proprietary systems should be laid GUARDING TO BALCONIES
only by specialist roofing contractors
approved by the manufacturer. See clause 7.1 - S10 Guarding to balconies shall
S9(d) for green roofs. be of adequate strength and height to
minimise the risk of people falling, of
It is preferable for one contractor to lay adequate durability and fixed securely
the vapour control layer, the insulation, the
waterproofing and the surface finish. The Items to be taken into account include:
contractor should ensure that the deck (a) strength and movement of masonry
and the insulation boards are waterproofed balcony walls
and the roof sealed at the end of each day, Masonry balcony walls should be built
or before the arrival of inclement weather. in accordance with Chapter 6.1 ‘External
masonry walls’. In particular:
Successive roof layers should be laid so as • walls should incorporate strengthening
not to trap water during construction. as required by the design
Membrane laps near outlets should not • movement joints should be provided in
impede drainage. accordance with the design
• copings should be firmly bedded.
(c) weather conditions
The manufacturers’ recommendations (b) fixing of balustrading and guard rails
for conditioning, (unrolling in advance of Balustrading and guard rails should
laying, etc) should be followed. be fixed in accordance with the design
details. Reference should also be made to
Generally, sheet membranes should not be Appendix 7.1-C.
laid or handled when the air temperature
is 5°C or below unless the manufacturer PROTECTION OF
agrees otherwise. Some self-adhesive
reinforced bitumen membranes should not MATERIALS FROM
be laid below 10°C. For such systems, the WEATHER
manufacturer’s specific instructions should
7.1 - S11 Moisture sensitive material
be followed.
shall be protected from wetting
Membranes should not be laid on damp or Timber-based roof decking and insulation
frosted surfaces or when any rain, sleet or materials should be stored under cover to
snow is falling. prevent wetting.
(d) green roofs Timber-based roof decks that have been

Green roofs should be laid in accordance fixed in position should be temporarily
with the design and the membrane covered to prevent wetting, unless the
manufacturer’s recommendations, taking waterproofing is to be laid immediately.
into account:
Zinc coils and sheets should be stored in
• root barriers
dry conditions before being installed.
• height of upstand in relation to soil
height and flashings
• integrity of waterproofing prior to
burying
• protection, reservoir and filter layers
• moisture control of the soil.
7.1
Green roof systems should be installed by
operatives who:
• are competent
• are familiar with the system being
installed
• hold a certificate confirming they have
been trained by the system membrane
manufacturer or distributor.
(e) correct detailing

Appendix 7.1-C gives, for the different roof
types, typical details of:
• abutments
• parapets
• edge details
• fixing of guarding
• projections through the waterproofing
• roof lights.

Appendix 7.1-A
Commonly used flat roofs
Three types of flat roof are shown here to illustrate the principles of their design:
WARM ROOF (insulation on top of deck)

concrete deck timber deck profiled metal deck
surface surface surface
treatment* treatment* treatment*
waterproofing waterproofing
waterproofing
insulation insulation insulation
vapour control vapour control
layer vapour control
layer
layer
screed deck metal deck
deck
* mineral surfaced or solar reflective treatment where required
INVERTED WARM ROOF (insulation on top of waterproofing)

concrete deck
ballast
filter layer
insulation
waterproofing
screed
deck
GREEN ROOF
intensive (requires regular maintenance. Plants contained within soil) extensive (requires periodic maintenance. Plants generally contained in
the sedum blanket)
7.1
soil and vegetation sedum blanket

(up to 1m deep)
filter layer
filter layer root barrier
drainage/reservoir layer waterproofing
protection layer insulation
root barrier
waterproofing vapour control layer
insulation screed
vapour control layer
screed concrete deck
(profiled metal decks
may be an alternative
concrete deck depending on loadings)

WARM ROOF (concrete deck)
surface treatment
waterproofing
insulation *
screed to falls *
concrete deck
plaster or
plasterboard
* falls can be created by either screed to

falls or tapered insulation
Surface treatment
See Appendix 7.1-B
Waterproofing and insulation

Waterproofing should be one of the following:
• reinforced bitumen membrane (RBM) to BS 8747 from the following table:
Type of Reinforced Bitumen Membrane (RBM) Insulation Material Method of fixing first
layer
First/preparatory layer Second layer/underlay Final layer/cap sheet
Type 3G perforated layer S2P3 S5P5 with either integral Rigid Urethane Loose laid and lapped, to
mineral finish or separate Foam (RUF) boards produce partial bonding
solar protection (polyurethane (PU) and
polyisocyanurate (PIR)
Type 3G perforated layer Elastomeric underlay Elastomeric capsheet
achieving S2P3 achieving S5P5
S2P3 fully bonded S2P3 S5P5 with either integral Compressed cork, rock Full bitumen bonding,
mineral finish or separate fibre or glass fibre boards, per BS 8217
solar protection cellular glass slabs, perlite
boards, or composite
7.1
S2P3 fully bonded Elastomeric underlay Elastomeric capsheet products
achieving S2P3 achieving S5P5
Note: torching onto insulation boards, except rock/glass fibre or perlite is not acceptable.
Note: Elastomeric (i.e. SBS polymer-modified) bitumen membranes, with greater extensibility and flexibility, especially at low temperatures, are likely to
provide longer service life.
• mastic asphalt, 20mm thick on the flat, laid in two layers, all to BS 8218 onto black sheathing felt
• a thermoplastic single ply membrane, assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3, either bonded to the insulation, mechanically
fixed to the deck through the insulation, or loose-laid, sealed and ballasted. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for details.
Vapour control layer

The vapour control layer should consist of at least one layer of bitumen roofing membrane (S2P3) fully bonded to the structural deck and all
laps sealed with bitumen.
Concrete deck and screed

Concrete roof deck, suitably primed, with sand/cement screed topping to achieve the falls. The screed should be in accordance with Clause
7.1-S7(a).
Detailing
Typical details are shown in Appendix 7.1-C.

WARM ROOF (timber deck) WARM ROOF (profiled metal deck)

surface
treatment
waterproofing
surface
insulation *
treatment
waterproofing
insulation *
deck
joist and firring* profiled metal deck*

plaster or
plasterboard
plaster or
plasterboard
* falls can be created by either tapered insulation or
installing the deck at 1 : 40
* falls can be created by either

firrings or tapered insulation
Surface treatment Vapour control layer

In bonded systems the vapour control layer should consist of at
See Appendix 7.1-B
least one layer of bitumen roofing membrane (S2P3) fully bonded
Waterproofing and insulation or nailed to the structural deck and all laps sealed with bitumen.
In mechanically fixed systems the vapour control layer should
Waterproofing should be one of the following: consist of suitable polyethylene sheet sealed at all laps.
• reinforced bitumen membranes (roofing felt) to BS 8747 from the
following table: Preservative treatment
All roof timbers, joists, wall plates, blocking, strutting, battens,
Type of Reinforced Bitumen Membrane Insulation Method of firrings, noggings to be preservative treated, unless naturally
(RBM) Material fixing first durable. Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’
layer gives details of preservative treatments.
First/ Second Final layer/
preparatory layer/ cap sheet
Deck
layer underlay
Timber or timber-based decks should be one of the following:
Type 3G S2P3 S5P5 with Rigid Urethane Loose laid
perforated either Foam (RUF) and lapped, Material Thickness of deck(mm)
layer integral boards to produce
mineral (polyurethane partial Joist centres (mm)
finish or (PU) and bonding
separate polyisocyanurate 450mm 600mm
solar (PIR) Pre-treated plywood, WBP grade 15 18
protection
Marine plywood, WBP grade 15 18
Type 3G Elastomeric Elastomeric
perforated underlay capsheet Oriented Strand board Type OSB3 15 18
layer achieving achieving
S2P3 S2P3 Pre-treated timber planking - tongue and 19 19
grooved (‘close boarded timber’) Max. board
S2P3 fully S2P3 S5P5 with Compressed Full bitumen width 100mm.
bonded either cork, rock fibre bonding,
7.1
integral or glass fibre per BS 8217 Reference should be made to Sitework clause 7.1 - S6 for fixing of
mineral boards, cellular
finish or glass slabs,
the deck to joists.
separate perlite boards,
solar or composite Joists
protection products For sizes and spacing, reference should be made to appropriate
load/span tables published by TRADA in support of Building
S2P3 fully Elastomeric Elastomeric
bonded underlay capsheet Regulations and associated documents.
achieving achieving
S2P3 S2P3 Detailing
Note: torching onto insulation boards, except rock/glass fibre or perlite is not Typical details are shown in Appendix 7.1-C.
acceptable.
Note: Elastomeric (i.e. SBS polymer-modified) bitumen membranes, with
greater extensibility and flexibility, especially at low temperatures, are likely to
provide longer service life.
• mastic asphalt, 20mm thick on the flat, laid in two layers, all to
BS 8218 onto black sheathing felt
• a thermoplastic single ply membrane, assessed in accordance
with Technical Requirement R3, either bonded to the insulation,
mechanically fixed to the deck through the insulation, or loose-
laid, sealed and ballasted. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for details.

INVERTED WARM ROOF(concrete deck)
(NOT suitable for slopes greater than 10°)
ballast
filter layer
insulation
waterproofing
screed to falls
concrete deck
plaster or
plasterboard
Ballast
Ballast should consist of paving slabs, or of rounded pebbles of minimum diameter 19mm to the depth specified in the design.
Filter layer
Geo-textile layer, laid over insulation boards to prevent fines from reaching the membrane surface.
Insulation
Insulation should be of a type unaffected by exposure to the weather and capable of supporting the weight of the ballast. Only the following
materials are suitable:
• extruded polystyrene (XPS)
• extruded polystyrene, with cementitious surface.
Waterproofing
Waterproofing should be one of the following:
• reinforced bitumen membranes (roofing felt) to BS 8747 from the following table:
Type of Reinforced Bitumen Membrane (RBM) Deck material Method of fixing first layer
First/preparatory Second layer/ Final layer/cap sheet

layer
Type 3G perforated
underlay
S2P3 S5P5 with either integral mineral finish or Concrete, or concrete with Loose laid and lapped, to
7.1
layer separate solar protection sand/cement screed produce partial bonding
Type 3G perforated Elastomeric underlay Elastomeric capsheet achieving S2P3
layer achieving S2P3 Mineral surfaced on exposed upstands, etc.
Note: Concrete or screeded substrates should be adequately dry to receive waterproofing system.
Note: Elastomeric (i.e. SBS polymer-modified) bitumen membranes, with greater extensibility and flexibility, especially at low temperatures, are likely to provide
longer service life.
• mastic asphalt, 20mm thick on the flat, laid in two layers, all to BS 8218 onto black sheathing felt
• a thermoplastic single ply membrane, assessed in accordance with Technical Requirement R3, either bonded or mechanically fixed to the
deck, or loose-laid, sealed and ballasted. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for details.
Concrete deck and screed

Concrete roof deck, suitably primed, with sand/cement screed topping to achieve the falls. The screed should be in accordance with Clause
7.1-S7(a).
Detailing
Typical details are shown in Appendix 7.1-C.
Note:
Inverted roofs should only be used with timber (solid or I-joist) or metal profiled decks if they have been designed to support the loads,
particularly from the depth of ballast needed to retain the insulation material.

GREEN ROOF
A green roof, either intensive or extensive, should be a complete system from the membrane manufacturer and not individual components or
materials. The details given below are intended to be a guide and may vary depending on the individual manufacturers system. The following
identifies the two types of green roof:
INTENSIVE EXTENSIVE
soil and vegetation
sedum blanket and

growing medium
filter layer
drainage/reservoir layer
protection layer
root barrier
waterproofing
insulation
screed to falls
concrete deck
concrete deck
(profiled metal deck
may be an alternative
depending on loadings)
plaster or plasterboard
Summary Intensive Extensive

Features requires regular “intensive” maintenance e.g. similar to a requires minimal maintenance e.g. annual attention
normal garden a sedum blanket contains the plants
provides a normal garden environment
uses natural topsoil at least 150mm deep and normal plants
Structure roof design to allow for full weight of wet soil roof loadings less than Intensive roof
20° maximum roof pitch
Falls and drainage falls 1:60min 45° maximum roof pitch
moisture irrigation system may be required to support plants in dry drainage falls 1:60min
control spells irrigation system may be required to support plants in drought
conditions
Vapour control Fully bonded polyester-reinforced RBM (S2P3) Fully bonded polyester-reinforced RBM (S2P3)
layer
7.1
Insulation Insulation material to have adequate compressive strength to Insulation material to have adequate compressive strength to
withstand likely applied loads withstand likely applied loads
Where the insulation is above the weatherproofing, only Where the insulation is above the weatherproofing, only extruded
extruded polystyrene (XPS) should be used polystyrene (XPS) should be used
Waterproofing See separate table. A root resistant element such as a See separate table. A root resistant element such as a copper foil or
copper foil or “Preventol” treatment is required above the “Preventol” treatment is required above the waterproofing membrane
waterproofing membrane
Protection and A filter layer and protection layer (or board), above the Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations
filter layers waterproofing membrane, is required to prevent damage. These
to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations

Type of Reinforced Bitumen Membrane (RBM) Insulation Method of
material  fixing first
First/ preparatory Second layer/ Final layer/ layer 
layer underlay cap sheet
Type 3G perforated layer S2P3 S5P5 with either integral mineral finish or Rigid Urethane Foam (RUF) Loose laid and lapped, to
separate solar protection boards (polyurethane (PU) produce partial bonding.
and polyisocyanurate (PIR))
Type 3G perforated Elastomeric underlay Elastomeric capsheet achieving S2P3 Mineral
layer achieving S2P3 surfaced on exposed upstands, etc.
S2P3 fully bonded S2P3 S5P5 with either integral mineral finish or Compressed cork, rock Full bitumen bonding,
separate solar protection fibre or per BS 8217
glass fibre boards, cellular
S2P3 fully bonded Elastomeric underlay Elastomeric capsheet achieving S2P3 Mineral glass slabs, perlite boards, or
achieving S2P3 surfaced on exposed upstands, etc composite products
Note: torching onto insulation boards, except rockwool or perlite is not acceptable.
Note: Elastomeric (i.e. SBS polymer-modified) bitumen membranes, with greater extensibility and flexibility, especially at low temperatures, are likely to provide
longer service life.
Mastic Asphalt
Mastic asphalt to BS 8218. Three coat horizontally (30mm total thickness), two coat vertically (20mm total thickness).
Appendix 7.1-B
Surface treatments
  Maintenance only for roofs up to 10° Access roof, walkway or terrace deck Further information may be
obtained from
Reinforced Bitumen • mineral surfaced capsheets (e.g. • pre-cast semi porous concrete tiles Flat Roofing Alliance
Membranes (RBM) Type S5P5) or reflective stone bedded in bitumen or other approved www.fra.org.uk
chippings ,  bedded in a dressing adhesive, or
compound, or • pre-cast concrete proprietary paving
• a suitable thickness of washed, slabs on supports or sand/cement
rounded 20 - 40mm shingle ballast blinding2, or
laid loose • proprietary timber decking systems3
Mastic Asphalt • reflective stone chippings1, bedded • pre-cast semi porous concrete tiles Mastic Asphalt Council
in a bitumen based compound, or bedded in bitumen or other approved www.masticasphaltcouncil.co.uk
• a solar reflective paint, as approved adhesive, or
by the Mastic Asphalt Council • pre-cast concrete proprietary paving
slabs on supports or sand/cement
blinding2
Thermoplastic Single Ply • products do not require • proprietary flexible, non-slip walkway Single Ply Roofing Association
Membranes supplementary solar reflective sheets or tiles, compatible with the www.spra.co.uk
7.1
coatings or other finishes membrane product
• where laid loose, membranes can be • pre-cast concrete proprietary paving
ballasted with suitable thickness slabs on adjustable supports or suitable
of washed, rounded 20-40mm non-woven polymeric protection layer
shingle ballast laid on a non-woven • proprietary timber decking systems
polymeric protection layer with bearers set on additional
membrane or suitable non-woven
polymeric protection layer
Notes
1 Loose surface finishes should be prevented from being removed by weather and discharged into gutters and drain pipes. Chippings should
be not less than 12.5mm limestone or white spar, not pea gravel.
2 Cement/sand blinding should be laid on two layers of waterproof building paper or two layers of 1000 gauge polyethylene separating
membrane. The slabs should be kept back 75mm at perimeters and a 25mm movement gap incorporated for every 9m2 of paving laid.
3 Timber decking systems should only use compatible preservative treatments. The undersides of the bearers should have large, smooth
contact areas, with no sharp edges or corners.

Appendix 7.1-C
Construction details for flat roofs and balconies
This Appendix contains common details for flat roofs and balconies. The following sketches show examples of typical common construction
details and illustrate general principles. Further information on specific waterproofing systems may be obtained from BS 8217 ‘Reinforced
bitumen membranes for roofing - Code of Practice’, the Flat Roofing Association, Mastic Asphalt Council or Single Ply Roofing Association.
CONCRETE DECK
Pre-formed capping metal flashing
OSB or plywood capping
upstand
surface treatment
150mm min (if required)
waterproof membrane
insulation
vapour barrier
surface treatment (if required)
screed
waterproof membrane
insulation
concrete deck vapour barrier
screed
concrete deck
Upstand Handrail fixing

• upstand may be fixed to wall • upstand should be formed in concrete roofs
• upstand to be at least 150mm high
• similar details apply to inverted roofs with concrete decks  
preformed kerb  
OSB or plywood capping
fixed to one kerb only
mineral surfaced top
layer to upstand and
surface treatment (if required) 75mm min over expansion joint
150mm min
waterproof membrane 150mm min
insulation
waterproof membrane
insulation
screed vapour control layer
screed
concrete deck
concrete deck
Skirting to rooflight or ventilator kerb Twin-kerb expansion joint

7.1
• similar details apply to inverted roofs. Allow for thickness of

ballast to achieve upstand dimension. • expansion joint is similar for both warm and inverted concrete
roofs.
TIMBER DECK
surface treatment (if required) battens, tiles/slates
tilting fillet
waterproof membrane
insulation
vapour control layer 150mm min OSB or plywood layboard
metal flashing waterproof membrane
insulation
battens, tiles/slates
insulation
insulation
Mansard edge Pitched roof abutment

• All elements should be firmly fixed to prevent peelback in high
winds  
 

TIMBER DECK (continued)
cavity tray waterproof membrane

metal cover flashing surface treatment (if required)
upstand of
insulation board edge trim
built-up timber kerb

150mm min surface treatment (if required)
300mm min waterproof membrane insulation
insulation vapour control layer
timber deck
 
Independent skirting detail Verge detail
• upstands should be kept separate from wall - allow for movement • similar details apply to inverted deck
• upstand should be at least 150mm high
• similar details apply to cold deck timber roofs

waterproof membrane apron flashing
bonded to pipe
insulation sleeve around pipe
150mm min
waterproof membrane
insulation
insulation around pipe
Welted drip to external gutter Pipe passing through roof

• similar details apply to cold deck timber roofs • vapour control layer should be bonded to waterproofing
• inverted timber decks need special consideration to avoid • detailing of upstand and flashing is similar for all roofs
insulation being lifted by wind suction. An alternative
detail should be used.
surface treatment (if required) waterproof membrane

50mm
mineral surfaced
top layer to face
turned back
over insulation
7.1
of timber kerb
150mm min
waterproof membrane
insulation
50mm x 50mm
triangular fillet
insulation around
pipe and outlet
Upstand to ventilator or rooflight kerb Rainwater outlet

• similar details should be allowed for cold and inverted roofs. • the opening should be properly trimmed
The thickness of ballast in inverted roofs, to achieve upstand • the outlet should be at lowest point in roof
dimensions, should be allowed for. • similar details apply to concrete roof
• ensure outlet is fixed securely to decking to prevent
displacement by thermal expansion of rainwater pipe.

INDEX
A I S
Access 3 Insulation 2, 3, 6, 7, Screeds 6, 9, 12
Accuracy 4 9, 11, 12, Sheet metal decks 4
13, 14
B Single ply membranes 4, 9, 11,
Inverted roofs 2, 6, 8, 11 12, 13
Balconies 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 7 J Sound transmission 2
Balustrading 1, 3, 7 Joist hangers 1, 5 Straps 1, 2, 5
Boarding 5 Joists 1, 3, 5, Structural steelwork 1
6, 10
C Strutting 5, 11
L
Car parking 1 Surface treatments 2, 4, 13
Lateral restraint 2
Cold decks 2, 6 T
Lead sheet 2, 4
Concrete deck 1, 4, 8, 9, Thermal insulation 2, 6
11, 12, 14 Liquid systems 4
Timber 1, 2, 4, 5,
Loads 1, 4 6, 7, 8, 10,
Concrete grade 4
M 14, 15
D
Mastic asphalt 2, 4, 9, 12, Timber deck 8, 14, 15
Deck 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
13, 14 V
6, 10, 14
Movement 1, 2, 7 Vapour control layers 2, 3, 6,
Decking 1, 2, 3,
4, 14 O 9, 10, 12,
14, 15
Design 1, 2 Outlets 3, 6
Ventilation 2, 3, 5, 6
Drainage 2, 3, 6 P
Precast concrete construction 1, 4
W
Durability 1, 3, 4, 5, 7
Warm roofs 2, 8, 9, 10
F Preservative treatment 1, 3, 11, 13
Waterproofing 2, 4, 5, 6,
Falls 2, 3, 6, 12 Profiled metal 1, 2, 4, 8,
9, 10, 11
10, 12
Flood prevention 3
Propriety roofs 4
Formwork 4
Protection 4, 5, 6,
G 7, 12
Green roofs 2, 3, 4, 6, R
7, 8
Rainwater drainage 2, 3
Guarding 1, 3, 7
Reinforced bitumen membranes 4, 7, 9, 10,
11, 13, 14
Reinforced concrete construction 1
Roof gardens 1
7.1

Part 7 Roofs
Chapter 7.2
Pitched roofs
7.2 Pitched roofs
CONTENTS SCOPE
Requirements and recommendations for pitched roofs,
including trussed rafter and traditional cut roofs, vertical
Statutory requirements D2 1 tiling, weatherproofing and insulation.
Loadbearing structure D3-D4 1
Trussed rafter roofs D5 1
Traditional cut roofs D6 2
Timber treatment D7 2
Weathertightness D8-D9 3-4
Insulation and control of condensation D10-D11 4
Fire spread D12-D13 5
Access D14 5
Roof drainage D15 5
MATERIALS
Structural timber M2-M3 6
Restraint straps and holding down straps M4 6
Roofing materials M5 6
Reclaimed materials M6 7
SITEWORK
Wall plates S2 7
Strapping S3 7
Trussed rafters S4-S6 7-8
Traditional cut roofs S7-S8 8
Water tank supports S9 9
Fascias, bargeboards and soffits S10 10
Roofing materials S11 10
Flashings and weatherings S12 11
Fire-stopping S13 13
7.2
Roof drainage S15 13
APPENDIX 7.2-A
Protection from corrosion of metal components 14
embedded in masonry
APPENDIX 7.2-B
Roof tile fixings 15
APPENDIX 7.2-C
Bracing requirements for trussed rafter roofs 17
APPENDIX 7.2-D
Tank support details 19
APPENDIX 7.2-E
Sizes and spacing of tile battens 20
APPENDIX 7.2-F
Strutting for attic trusses and cut roofs that have a 20
floor
INDEX 21

Pitched roofs 7.2
(d) sizing and spacing of members restraint should be provided at rafter level
DESIGN STANDARDS Sizing and spacing of rafters and ceiling for gable walls. Larger gable or separating
joists should be as: walls may also require restraint at ceiling
• Clause D5 for trussed rafter roofs level.
Requirements
• Clause D6 for traditional cut roofs.
Design that follows the guidance below will Guidance in assessing when ceiling
be acceptable for pitched roofs. Generally, the spacing of rafters and ceiling restraint is needed can be found in Building
joists should be not more than 600mm. Regulations.
The spacing of ceiling joists should suit
STATUTORY the thickness and size of the plasterboard
Lateral restraint straps should have a
minimum cross section of 30mm x 5mm
REQUIREMENTS sheets or other ceiling finish. Plasterboard
and a minimum anchorage down-turn of
sheets may be fixed at the following joist
7.2 - D2 Design shall comply with all 100mm. The level of galvanizing for straps
centres:
relevant statutory requirements and their fixings should be in accordance
• 9.5mm sheets - up to 450mm
with BS 5628 : Part 3 (reference should
Designs should be in accordance with spacing
be made to Appendix 7.2-A). Sheradizing is
relevant Building Regulations and other • 12.5mm and 15mm - up to 600mm
not acceptable in Northern Ireland and the
statutory requirements. sheets spacing
Isle of Man. Straps should be of sufficient
length to be fixed to three trusses and
LOADBEARING Proprietary roof systems should be
should be fixed with solid blocking.
STRUCTURE with Technical Requirement R5. In framed roofs, as an alternative, purlins
7.2 - D3 All pitched roof structures and pole plates can also provide restraint
(e) size and spacing of tile battens
shall be designed to support applied if the timber abuts a gable construction.
The size and spacing of tile battens should
loads and self weight without undue Where purlins are used to provide restraint
be in accordance with the roof covering
movement they should not be spaced at more than
manufacturer’s recommendations, but not
2 metre centres, unless the design shows
Items to be taken into account include: less than shown in the table in Appendix E.
they are adequate at greater spacing.
Nails for fixing battens should be 3.35mm
Dead and imposed loads should be In trussed rafter roofs, an alternative is
(10 gauge) x 65mm long. Galvanized
calculated in accordance with BS 6399 : to provide restraint through gable ladder
smooth round nails are acceptable, except
Part 3. Dead loads include the self weight detailing.
where the maximum basic wind speed is
of the roof structure and the roof covering.
over 48m/s (from BS 6399 : Part 2), when (d) timber frame construction
Imposed loads include snow loadings and
ring shank nails should be specified. For dwellings of timber frame construction,
the weight of water tanks, insulation, etc.
the designer should ensure stability in
Structural timber should be specified 7.2 - D4 All pitched roof structures
accordance with BS 5268.
according to the strength classes in shall be designed so as to transmit loads
BS 5268 : Part 2. Timber specifications and give restraint to the supporting
when using BS 4978 grading rules (eg GS) structure without undue movement TRUSSED RAFTER ROOFS
should also include the timber species. Items to be taken into account include: 7.2 - D5 Trussed rafters shall be
The strength class can then be determined (a) wall plates designed to support applied loads and
from Table B1 in Approved Document A1/2 Normally, trussed rafter roofs and self weight without undue movement
to the Building Regulations or Table 3 in traditional cut roofs should be supported Items to be taken into account include:
BS 5268 : Part 2. on timber wall plates. (a) recognised design standards
(b) wind loads Wall plates should be as detailed in Clause Trussed rafters should be designed in
Wind loads appropriate to the site location D6(b) with regard to the table concerning accordance with BS 5268 : Part 3. Truss
7.2
should be calculated in accordance with minimum sizes. Fixings to connect the manufacturers may have their own
BS 6399 : Part 2. The roof should be roof structure to the wall plate should computer programs for calculating truss
designed to resist wind uplift. This be specified having regard to the roof designs in accordance with the British
resistance is often provided by the weight construction and the exposure conditions Standard.
of the roof itself but holding down straps of the site.
(b) design information
should be provided where the self weight
For trussed rafter roofs not subject to To ensure that trussed rafters are correctly
of the roof is insufficient.
uplift, the minimum fixing should be two designed and fabricated, and are suitable
(c) holding down straps 4.5mm x 100mm long galvanized round for their intended purpose, an accurate
Holding down straps are required in wire nails, skew nailed, one from each side specification is necessary.
Scotland, Northern Ireland and other areas of the trussed rafter. Alternatively, truss
BS 5268 : Part 3 gives a list of information
of severe exposure. Some roof covering clips can be used, fixed in accordance with
to be supplied to the truss manufacturer,
manufacturers provide detailed guidance. manufacturers’ instructions.
including the:
Where holding down straps are necessary, In Scotland, nails should be appropriate to • height and location of building with
they should have a minimum cross wall plate dimensions. reference to unusual wind conditions
section of 30mm x 2.5mm and be fixed at • profile of the trussed rafter, including
maximum 2m centres. Steel straps with a (b) holding down straps camber, if required
galvanized finish are normally acceptable. In situations where the roof is required • span of the trussed rafter
The design should detail how straps are to resist uplift, skew nailing is unlikely to • pitch or pitches of the roof
to be fixed and what materials are to be provide sufficient strength. Appropriate • method of support and position of
used. The durability of fixings should be metal straps should be used. supports
compatible with the straps. • type and weights of roof tiles or
(c) lateral restraint straps
covering, including sarking, insulation
For dwellings of masonry construction,
and ceiling materials

7.2 Pitched roofs
• size and approximate position of any (e) mono-pitch trusses and girder TRADITIONAL CUT ROOFS
water tanks or other equipment to be trusses
supported on the trussed rafters 7.2 - D6 Cut roofs shall be designed to
• overhang of rafters at eaves and other Hipped roofs constructed with trussed support applied loads and self weight
eaves details rafters will generally require a series without undue movement
• positions and dimensions of hatches, of diminishing mono-pitched trusses
supported by a girder truss. Items to be taken into account include:
chimneys and other openings
(a) recognised design standards
• use of the building with reference to any The bearing of mono-pitched trusses into Sizes of certain roof members for
unusual environmental conditions shoes should be as follows: basic pitched roofs are given in TRADA
• type of preservative treatment, where publications and BS 8103.
Span Minimum Minimum
required bearing thickness
• spacing of trussed rafters and special length of truss Where spans, sizes, spacing or strength
timber sizes, where these are required member classes of timber are outside the scope
to match existing construction. of the tables in the statutory regulations
Less than 4m 50mm 35mm
or where the form of roof is other than
The building designer should ensure 4m or more 75mm 35mm a basic pitched roof, the roof should be
that the design of the roof as a whole designed by an Engineer in accordance
is satisfactory in achieving the overall Alternative bearings should be designed by with Technical Requirement R5.
stability of the complete structure. an Engineer in accordance with Technical Calculations should be based on
This includes its connection to, and Requirement R5. BS 5268 : Part 2.
compatibility with, the supporting
structure and adjacent elements of the (f) water tank support (b) member sizes
building. Where water tanks are supported by roof Unless the roof is designed by an Engineer
trusses, their load should be transferred to in accordance with Technical Requirement
(c) bracing the node points of the trussed rafter and R5, traditionally, nominal sizes of members
The building designer should specify spread over at least three trussed rafters would be as follows:
all bracing. Trussed rafter roofs should in accordance with BS 5268 : Part 3.
be braced in accordance with Table 1 in Member Minimum size
Appendix 7.2-C, unless the roof is designed A correct method of water tank support is (mm)
and braced in accordance with BS 5268 : shown in Appendix 7.2-D.
Struts and braces 100 x 50
Part 3.
Proprietary tank support systems should Wall plates (Scotland) 100 x 25
All timber bracing to trussed rafters should be assessed in accordance with Technical Wall plates (Northern Ireland 100 x 38
be at least 100mm x 25mm in section and Requirement R3. & the Isle of Man)
twice nailed to each trussed rafter and to Wall plates (other) 75 x 50
(g) multiple trussed rafters
the wallplate. Nailing should be 3.35mm Hips rafter cut + 25
All multiple and reinforcing timbers to
(10 gauge) x 65mm long galvanized round
simple or multiple trussed rafters should Valleys 32 thick
wire nails.
be designed to be permanently fastened Ridges rafter cut + 25
(d) spacing together. The timber members should be
Trussed rafters should not be spaced at either fixed together during manufacture (c) triangulation
centres greater than 600mm. Where this or, alternatively, fully detailed drawings In the design of a cut roof, timber members
cannot be achieved, eg to accommodate and specifications showing the fixing should be triangulated or otherwise
hatch openings or chimneys, the spacing of method should be supplied to the site to arranged to form a coherent structure. All
trussed rafters may be increased as shown enable the components to be assembled forces inherent in the design should be
below provided that the spacing between correctly. resolved. The method of fixing or jointing
centres of trimming trussed rafters does members should be specified.
(h) roofs incorporating valleys or other
7.2
not exceed 2 times the design spacing of

special features Particular care should be taken to ensure
trussed rafters and that b is smaller than
Roofs with hips, valleys or other special adequate triangulation when designs
or equal to 2a - c, where:
features should be designed by an incorporate hips and valleys, and when cut
a = design spacing of trussed rafters
Engineer in accordance with Technical roofs are used in conjunction with trussed
b =distance between centres of trimming
Requirement R5. Standard designs rafters.
trussed rafter and adjacent trussed
supplied by manufacturers which
rafter Details of all structural members should be
incorporate these features may usually be
c = nominal width of required opening. provided.
acceptable.
(i) combined trussed rafter and cut roofs (d) strutting to cut roofs
Particular care is needed where trussed Any part of a cut roof which forms a floor
rafters and a cut roof are combined in a should have strutting in accordance with
roof design. The designer should provide Appendix 7.2-F.
trimming
trussed
details of the complete roof. Trussed
rafters
rafters supporting traditional cut roof TIMBER TREATMENT
members should be designed by an 7.2 - D7 Measures shall be taken to
Engineer in accordance with Technical ensure durability of timber
Requirement R5.
a
(j) strutting to attic trusses (a) treatment against House Longhorn
b
c The part of an attic truss which forms a Beetle
floor should have strutting in accordance In some areas of the UK, treatment against
b
with Appendix 7.2-F. House Longhorn Beetle is required.
Reference should be made to relevant
Building Regulations. Reference should

Pitched roofs 7.2
also be made to Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber (d) roof coverings other than tiles or To avoid damage from condensation,
preservation (natural solid timber)’ (Design). slates proprietary insulation boards should
Lead sheet roofing should be in be used strictly in accordance with
(b) timber requiring treatment accordance with BS 6915. the recommendations given in the
The following timber members should be independent assessment.
either naturally durable or suitably treated: Other types of sheet roofing should be in
• fascias accordance with the relevant parts of Where an underlay is fully supported and
• bargeboards CP 143. has a low vapour resistance (less than
• soffits 5.7MNs/g), it should be used with counter
Roofs with the following traditional battens, battens and roof covering.
• other trim.
coverings should be designed in
For full protection, these timber members accordance with satisfactory custom and Where underlay with a high vapour
should also be painted or stained in practice: resistance is used (over 5.7MNs/g), the
accordance with the recommendations • natural stone counter battens should be located between
in Chapter 8.5 ‘Painting and decorating’ • shingles the sarking and the underlay. This is to
(each section). • thatch. allow ventilation below the underlay.
In pitched roofs with a fully supported Thatching should be as recommended (g) flashings and other weathering
weatherproofing membrane, the following by the Thatch Advisory Service or other details where a pitched roof abuts a
timber members should be either naturally appropriate authority in accordance with vertical surface
durable or suitably treated: Technical Requirement R3. Where a roof abuts a vertical surface,
• rafters cover flashings, stepped cover flashings,
Proprietary roof coverings should be
• purlins soakers and back or parapet gutters
• ceiling joists should be provided as necessary. Where
Requirement R3.
• bracing the roof is over an enclosed area the wall
• sarking (e) roof underlays construction should include cavity trays
• wall plates An underlay should be provided for all tiled linked to the flashings. Reference should
• battens for fixing vertical cladding. roofs. be made to Sitework clause 7.2 - S12(f) for
details.
The level of durability of all the above The underlay may be felt to BS 747 or a
members can be achieved by natural proprietary sarking membrane complying Cover flashings should be tucked 25mm
durability or treatment with preservative. with Technical Requirement R3. Some into a brick joint or chase not less than
Reference should be made to Chapter 2.3 proprietary roofing underlays have a 75mm above the intersection with the roof.
‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’ higher vapour resistance than bitumen felt
(each section) for guidance. Flashings and soakers should be of non-
and may need additional roof ventilation.
ferrous metal and of the same material to
Manufacturers’ recommendations should
avoid electrolytic action.
WEATHERTIGHTNESS be followed. Where the underlay is
exposed, such as at the eaves, a type 5U Where lead is used, soakers should be
7.2 - D8 Roofs shall be designed to
felt should be used. A type 1F felt may be at least Code 3 and flashings, gutters,
satisfactorily resist the passage of rain
used for the remainder of the roof. saddles, etc should be Code 4 or better.
and snow to the inside of the building
To prevent the underlay sagging at the In the case of gutters behind parapet walls,
eaves and forming a water trap behind provision should be made for an overflow
(a) weathertightness of roof coverings
the fascia, it is recommended that the in case the outlet becomes blocked.
Roofs with a tile or slate covering should
underlay is supported by a continuous
be designed in accordance with (h) weathering details where a pitched
fillet. Where the pitch is below 30°, a
BS 5534 : Parts 1 and 2. roof intersects with a continuous
continuous support fillet should be
7.2
provided. waterproof membrane
(b) tiles
For information on intersections with flat
For tiled roofs, the pitch, gauge and lap
(f) rigid sarking roofs, gutters or valleys, reference should
should be within the limits given in Table 1
In areas of severe exposure, a rigid sarking be made to Sitework clause 7.2 - S12(e).
of Appendix 7.2-B, unless the manufacturer
with underlay is recommended and is
specifies otherwise. (i) pipes
normal practice in Scotland.
Fixings for single and double lap tiles Where soil pipes, vent pipes or other pipes
The choice of rigid sarking should take penetrate roof tiling, a lead slate flashing,
should be designed in accordance
account of the type and fixing of the roof or a purpose-made accessory supplied by
with BS 5534 and BS 6399. Where tile
covering. The following materials are the roof covering manufacturer to form a
manufacturers have computer programs
acceptable: weathertight joint, should be used.
based on these British Standards, their
• tongued and grooved or square edged
recommendations should be followed. If lead slates are used, they should be
boarding to BS 1297
Tables 2 and 3 of Appendix 7.2-B contain • bitumen impregnated insulating board to supported (eg using marine plywood) to
minimum fixings for tiles. The tile BS 1142 : Part 3 (sarking and sheathing prevent the lead sagging.
manufacturer will be able to advise on grade)
(j) chimneys
any additional nails or clips required for • WBP or CBR plywood to BS EN 636,
Flashings should connect with the chimney
a particular location. A fixing schedule durability Class G
dpcs. The normal flashing components
produced by the tile manufacturer, based • type P5 chipboard to BS EN 312
are shown in Sitework clause 7.2 - S12(g).
on The Zonal Method, is acceptable. • oriented strand board type OSB3 to BS
Components will vary depending on
EN 300
(c) slates whether the chimney intersects the roof
• proprietary products which have been
Natural slates should be fixed in at eaves or ridge level and the type of roof
accordance with BS 5534 and BS 6399. covering. Reference should be made to
Requirement R3.
Each slate should be nailed twice when roof covering manufacturers’ information
centre nailed. sheets.

7.2 Pitched roofs
For more detailed information on the • a breather membrane where the For roofs that incorporate a high water
construction and weatherproofing of supporting structure is of timber vapour resistance (type HR) underlay (e.g.
chimneys, reference should be made to construction. types 1F/5U felts):
Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and
For detailed information on the use of • eaves ventilation should be provided
flues’.
moisture barriers in association with on opposite sides of the roof to permit
(k) ridges and hips timber frame construction, reference cross ventilation. Reference should be
Ridge and hip tiles may be bedded should be made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External made to Sitework clause 7.2 – S11(a) for
on mortar or mechanically fixed. It is timber framed walls’. illustrations showing where ventilation
recommended that ridge tiles at gable should be provided
(b) batten size
ends and over separating walls are always
Batten sizes should comply with Clause • where the roof pitch is 15° or more,
mechanically fixed.
D3(e). cross ventilation should be provided to
In areas of high exposure or where the roof void equivalent to a 10mm slot
complex ridge features are involved, it (c) fixing running the full length of the eaves
may be necessary to mechanically fix Every tile or slate should be nailed twice
and comply with the general requirements • where the ceiling follows the slope of a
all ridge tiles. The tile manufacturers’
of BS 5534. ‘cold roof’ regardless of pitch or where
a cold roof has a pitch less than 15°,
(l) valleys (d) weathering details cross ventilation should be provided
A valley may be formed of purpose-made Bottom edges should be finished with an to the roof void equivalent to a 25mm
valley tiles or as an open valley lined with under-course tile. At dormer cheeks, the slot running the full length of the eaves.
lead or other material acceptable under tiles or slates should be specified to be At least 50mm clearance should be
Technical Requirement R3. cut close to the slope of the roof, over a maintained between the insulation and
flashing fixed to the side of the dormer. the roof underlay
Where slates or plain tiles are used, a laced
valley, swept valley or mitred tiles with At internal or external angles, purpose • where the roof pitch exceeds 35° or
soakers may also be used. made corner tiles or soakers should be when the span exceeds 10m, high level
used to form a weathertight joint. ventilation, equivalent to a continuous
Care should be taken to ensure that the 5mm opening, should be used in
true pitch of the valley is not less than the Where pitched roofs abut masonry walls, addition to eaves ventilation
minimum allowed pitch. a stepped flashing should be specified,
turned behind the tiles. Details are shown • the means of providing cross ventilation
(m) verges in Sitework clause 7.2 - S12. to mono-pitched roofs should be
Tiling at verges should project 40mm in accordance with BS 5250 which
For information regarding vertical tiling or indicates eaves ventilation together with
to 50mm beyond the gable wall or
slating on walls, reference should be made the equivalent of a continuous 5mm slot
bargeboard.
to Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ at high level.
Unless a proprietary dry verge system (Design and Sitework) or Chapter
or cloaked verge is used, tiles should be 6.2 ‘External timber framed walls’. For cold roofs that incorporate a low water
bedded into mortar on an undercloak vapour resistance (type LR) underlay (e.g.
of plain tile, slate or cement-based INSULATION AND a vapour permeable underlay):
board. Plain tiles should not be used as
an undercloak below 30° pitch or on a CONTROL OF • ridge or high level ventilation equivalent
to a continuous opening of 5mm should
bargeboard. CONDENSATION be provided, unless the underlay has been
Purpose-made tile-and-a-half, or half-tiles, 7.2 - D10 Roofs directly above habitable assessed in accordance with Technical
should be used at verges. Cut tiles are not rooms shall be adequately insulated Requirement R3 and the assessment
7.2
acceptable. confirms that this is not required.

Consider using an overhanging verge (by avoiding risks’ discusses aspects of (b) position of vapour checks
means of a gable ladder) to provide better insulation relevant to pitched roofs. In Vapour control layers should be used in
weather protection to the gable wall, England and Wales account should be roof constructions where the ceiling board
especially in exposed positions or where taken of Accredited Details. is fixed to the rafters and insulation is
cavity insulation is used. placed between the rafters.
Insulation should be of sufficient thickness
(n) proprietary roof coverings to meet the requirements of Building In normal pitched roofs where insulation is
Roof coverings not covered by a British Regulations. placed at ceiling level and the void above
Standard should comply with Technical To reduce the risk of freezing, and is ventilated, a vapour control layer is not
Requirement R3. condensation on pipework, the guidance recommended. Moisture from the dwelling
in Sitework clause 7.2 - S14 should be will be diffused through the ceiling and
7.2 - D9 Vertical tiling and slating shall removed by roof space ventilation.
followed.
adequately resist the passage of rain
and snow to the inside of the building Vapour control layers, where required,
7.2 - D11 Measures shall be taken to
should be placed on the warm side of
Items to be taken into account include: control condensation
insulation.
(a) moisture barrier Items to be taken into account include:
A moisture barrier should be provided (a) ventilation of main roof spaces (c) ventilation of dormers
behind all vertical tiling and slating. Pitched roofs with insulation at ceiling Pitched dormers should be ventilated from
level should always be ventilated to eaves to eaves or, where necessary, from
Moisture barriers should be:
the outside air to minimise the risk of eaves to ridge.
• underfelt or equivalent where the wall
structure is brickwork or blockwork condensation. Flat roofed dormers of cold deck
construction should be ventilated. The
ventilation path should not be blocked

Pitched roofs 7.2
by the timber structure, strutting, etc be firestopped. If there are gaps, fire, downpipes. Consideration should also
(reference should be made to Chapter smoke and flame can spread from one be given to the provision of rainwater
7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’ (Design and compartment to the next across the wall. drainage to roof areas less than 6m2, for
Sitework)). example dormer and porch roofs.
Mineral wool fire-stopping should be used
(d) methods of ensuring unobstructed to allow for movement in the roof timber, (b) sizes
ventilation and avoid ‘hogging’ of the roof which is Gutters and downpipes should be of sufficient
Ventilation openings where the least often associated with mortar fire-stopping. size to accommodate normal rainfall.
dimension exceeds 10mm should be
Care is needed in sizing gutters where
protected to prevent the entry of birds, etc. firestop between battens
above underlay dormer roofs interrupt the run-off from a
Acceptable protection of openings can be pitched roof. The gutter should be sized to
firestop below
provided by using materials complying underlay cope with the concentrated flows.
with Materials clause 7.2 - M5(j).
(c) discharge from one roof to another
A spacer in the eaves should be used so
that ceiling insulation can be installed over Where water from a large roof surface
and beyond the wall plate. This minimises discharges onto another surface,
the cold bridge without blocking the precautions should be taken to prevent
ventilation. erosion of the lower surface.
cavity closed
at eaves
(d) discharge into drainage system
cavity barrier of cavity
mineral wool or barrier in Unless designed otherwise, shoes should
spacer maintains fire-resisting board separating wall
25mm clear airway in boxed eaves be provided to rainwater downpipes.
above insulation
Where a wall separates an integral garage from

cold roof
the rest of a dwelling, other arrangements are
PROVISION OF
possible provided the principle of half-hour fire INFORMATION
separation is maintained. 7.2 - D16 Designs and specifications
insulation above
cavity closer and shall be produced in a clearly
wall plate avoids
a cold bridge ACCESS understandable format and include all
7.2 - D14 Roof voids shall be provided relevant information
with suitable access Full details of trussed rafter roofs should
ventilation
Access should be provided to: be available on site, including the following:
• the main roof space, and • layout drawing of trusses and associated
(e) other methods of reducing
• roof voids that contain cisterns, tanks items
condensation
and the like. • bracing requirements
Methods of reducing condensation, such as
• trimming around chimneys, access
draughtstripping loft hatches and sealing Access is not required to other roof voids hatches, etc
holes for services, are given in Sitework containing only water pipes. • mono-pitch and lean-to roofs
clause 7.2 - S14.
• girder trusses, multiple trusses and
SIZE OF OPENINGS diminishing trusses and how they are
FIRE SPREAD Access openings should be not less than
fixed together and supported on truss
520mm in any direction.
7.2 - D12 Roofs shall adequately resist shoes, layboards or similar
fire spread Where equipment (e.g. heating and • roof intersections (ie hips and valleys).
ventilation equipment) is located in a
Items to be taken into account include: Assembly drawings are also important
7.2
roof space the size of the opening should
(a) roof coverings where there are complicated roof shapes
permit its removal.
Slates and concrete or clay tiles are or where trussed rafter and framed roofs
designated AA when tested to BS 476 : Access openings should not be located directly are used in combination.
Part 3 and therefore can be used without over stairs or in other hazardous locations.
The drawings should show:
limitation on any pitched roof. The use
PROVISION OF WALKWAYS • the number and type of fixings for roof
of some other materials is restricted
Boarded walkways should be provided: coverings
by statutory requirements, particularly
• between the access opening and any • means of providing eaves ventilation
in relation to their distance from site
cistern or other permanent equipment • fire-stopping at separating wall and
boundaries (reference should be made to
located in the roof space, and boxed eaves
Building Regulations). These include:
• flashing details at abutments, chimneys,
• bitumen felt slates • at each cistern or other permanent
• wood shingles etc
equipment suitably located for maintenance • supports for water cisterns in the roof
• thatch. purposes and at least 1m2 in area. space
(b) chimneys and flue pipes Boarding should be securely fixed without • restraint strapping
Combustible material, such as roof timbers compressing the loft insulation. • position, thickness and limits of
and sarking felt, should be kept away from insulation.
heat sources as described in Chapter 6.8 ROOF DRAINAGE
‘Fireplaces, chimneys and flues’ (Design). 7.2 - D17 All relevant information shall
7.2 - D15 Roof drainage shall adequately be distributed to appropriate personnel
7.2 - D13 Junctions between roofs and carry rainwater to an outfall Ensure that design and specification
compartment or separating walls shall information is issued to site supervisors
adequately resist fire spread and relevant specialist subcontractors
(a) provision of gutters and downpipes
The junction between a separating or Roofs greater than 6m2 in area should and/or suppliers.
compartment wall and a roof should be provided with rainwater gutters and

7.2 Pitched roofs
Straps should be ordered to the correct • zinc alloy to BS 6561 and 0.6mm thick
MATERIALS STANDARDS length and with the correct number of • copper to BS 2870, 0.7mm thick is
7.2 - M1 All materials shall: bends and/or twists required by the design. suitable for gutters, 0.55mm thick fully
(a) meet the Technical Requirements annealed is suitable for flashing, soakers
(b) take account of the design ROOFING MATERIALS and saddles.
Materials that comply with the design and 7.2 - M5 Roofing materials shall be To prevent electrolytic action where metal
the guidance below will be acceptable for of the quality, type and dimensions items may be in contact, eg flashings and
pitched roofs. required by the design soakers, these should not be of different
metals.
Materials for pitched roofs shall comply Items to be taken into account include:
with all relevant standards, including those (a) roof coverings Proprietary flashings should be assessed in
listed below. Where no standard exists, The following roof coverings are accordance with Technical Requirement R3.
Technical Requirement R3 applies (see acceptable:
(d) underlays
Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards • clay tiles and fittings to BS 402
Where the underlay is exposed, such as at
and Technical Requirements’). • concrete tiles and fittings to BS EN 490
the eaves, a type 5U felt should be used. A
and BS EN 491
References to British Standards and type 1F felt may be used for the remainder
• fibre cement slates and fittings to
Codes of Practice include those made of the roof.
BS EN 492
under the Construction Products Directive • natural slates to BS 680. Check To minimise the risk of condensation in
(89/106/EEC) and, in particular, appropriate particularly that imported slates comply the case of a fully supported underlay
European Technical Specifications fully with this British Standard above rigid sarking, underlays should have
approved by a European Committee for • shingles should be of Western Red Cedar a low vapour resistance, preferably less
Standardisation (CEN). and pre-treated with CCA preservative to than 5.7MNs/g. Underlays with a higher
BS 4072 and be Grade 1 to the Canadian vapour resistance may need increased
STRUCTURAL TIMBER Standards Association. Care is needed in ventilation to the roof space and between
the selection of flashing materials and the underlay and sarking. Manufacturers’
7.2 - M2 Structural timber shall be
nail fixings to avoid corrosion. Follow the recommendations should be followed.
of the appropriate grades and sizes to
recommendations of the supplier.
support the imposed loads Proprietary underlays should have been
Structural timber should be specified Natural stone should be used in assessed in accordance with Technical
according to the strength classes in accordance with established custom and Requirement R3. Manufacturers’
BS 5268 : Part 2. Roof members are practice. recommendations should be followed.
usually C16, C24 or TR26. Thatch should be as recommended by (e) rigid sarking
Timber specifications when using the the Thatch Advisory Service or other The following materials are acceptable:
BS 4978 grading rules (eg GS) should also appropriate authority in accordance with • tongued and grooved or square edged
include the timber species. The strength Technical Requirement R3. boarding to BS 1297
class can then be determined from Table B1 Use of reclaimed materials is covered in • bitumen impregnated insulating board to
in Approved Document A1/2 to the Building Clause M6. BS 1142 : Part 3 (sarking and sheathing
Regulations or Table 3 in BS 5268 : Part 2. grade)
Proprietary coverings should be assessed in • WBP or CBR plywood to BS EN 636,
7.2 - M3 Structural timber shall be of accordance with Technical Requirement R3. durability Class G
suitable durability • type P5 chipboard to BS EN 312
(b) fixings • oriented strand board type OSB3 to
Structural timber should be pre-treated with Clout or slate nails for fixing slates and
preservative where specified by the designer. BS EN 300
tiles should be one of the following and at • proprietary products which have been
7.2
Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural least 38mm long:

solid timber)’ (each section) recommends assessed in accordance with Technical
• aluminium to BS 1202 : Part 3 Requirement R3.
methods of preservative treatment. • copper to BS 1202 : Part 2
Use of reclaimed materials is covered in • silicon bronze. (f) battens and counter battens
Clause M6. Battens and counter battens should be to
Galvanized steel nails are not suitable for
the sizes specified in the design. Timber
fixing slates and tiles because of the risk of
used for battens and counter battens
RESTRAINT STRAPS AND damaging the galvanizing but may be used
should be as listed in BS 5534 : Part 1.
to fix battens and underlay. Nails for fixing
HOLDING DOWN STRAPS battens should be at least 30mm longer Preservative treatment is generally
7.2 - M4 Strapping shall be of adequate than the batten thickness. Ring shank required for battens to vertical tiling
strength and durability nails should be used when specified by the and slating and is recommended for
Lateral restraint straps should have designer. roof battens in severe exposure areas.
minimum cross section dimensions of Reference should be made to Chapter 2.3
Tile clips should be of aluminium or
30mm x 5mm. Vertical holding down ‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’
stainless steel.
straps should have minimum cross section (Materials) for guidance on the timber
dimensions of 30mm x 2.5mm. (c) flashings types and classes requiring treatment.
The following are acceptable:
Mild steel straps and fixings should be (g) insulation
• milled lead sheet to BS 1178. Flashings,
protected against corrosion in accordance Thermal insulation should be to the design
gutter linings, etc should be at least
with Tables 1 and 14 of BS 5628 : Part 3 (see specification.
Code 4, soakers may be Code 3
Appendix 7.2-A). Fixings and straps should be
• aluminium and aluminium alloys to The following materials are acceptable:
compatible. Sheradizing is not acceptable in
BS 1470 (0.6mm to 0.9mm thick) and • mineral fibre mats to BS 5803 : Part 1
Northern Ireland and the Isle of Man.
protected from contact with mortar by a • blown mineral fibre to BS 5803 : Part 2
coating of bituminous paint • blown cellulose fibre to BS 5803 : Part 3

Pitched roofs 7.2
• proprietary materials assessed in packing between
accordance with Technical Requirement SITEWORK STANDARDS rafter and wall nogging fixed
horizontally
avoids twisting
R3. restraint straps
Insulation of water pipes should be in (a) meet the Technical Requirements
accordance with Chapter 8.1 ‘Internal (b) take account of the design
services’ (Materials). (c) follow established good practice and
(h) fascias, bargeboards and soffits workmanship
Timber used for fascias, bargeboards, Sitework that complies with the design and
soffits, etc should be pre-treated with the guidance below will be acceptable for strap fixed to solid
preservative. Reference should be made to pitched roofs. strap held
tightly against
noggings with at least
four fixings of which
Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation (natural block inner leaf at least one to be in
the third rafter
solid timber)’ (Materials) for guidance on WALL PLATES
preservative treatments.
7.2 - S2 Wall plates shall be bedded to HOLDING DOWN STRAPS
The following materials are also distribute roof loads and fixed to prevent Holding down straps should be used when
acceptable: wind uplift detailed in the design. Holding down straps
• WBP plywood to BS EN 636, durability Roof construction details should may be required where the:
Class M or better be available on site, particularly for • roof is of lightweight construction
• high density fibre reinforced calcium combination and specialist roofs. • site is exposed.
silicate board that meets the
Wall plates should be bedded to line and If in doubt, check with the designer.
performance requirements of BS 3536
• glass fibre reinforced cement (GRC) level using nails or straps to hold them Straps should be at least one metre long
board that meets the performance down in accordance with the design and either screwed to the face of masonry
requirements of BS 3536 requirements. or have a tail built into a masonry bed
• proprietary products which have been joint. If screws are used, a minimum of
Wall plates should generally be in lengths
assessed in accordance with Technical three screws are necessary, at least one of
of not less than 3m but shorter lengths
Requirement R3. which should be located within 150mm of
should extend over at least 3 joists/rafters
or trusses. Wall plates should be joined the bottom end of the strap. Nailing is not
(i) fire-stopping and cavity barriers
using half-lapped joints at corners and acceptable.
Cavity barriers in boxed eaves should be
wire reinforced mineral wool blanket, at in running lengths. In Scotland, 100mm x
least 50mm thick. Ordinary mineral wool 25mm wall plates should be used, in long TRUSSED RAFTERS
quilt is acceptable as fire-stopping above lengths, butt jointed. 7.2 - S4 Trussed rafters shall be
separating walls. protected from damage before and
Where required, holding down straps during construction
(j) protection to ventilation openings should be fixed to the wall plate at
Ventilation openings where the least maximum 2m centres. If the strap is not Items to be taken into account include:
dimension exceeds 10mm should be turned into a bed joint, it should be fixed to (a) storage
protected to prevent the entry of birds, etc. the wall with at least three screw fixings. To avoid distortion and prevent damage,
trussed rafters should be stored clear of
Acceptable protection of openings can be STRAPPING the ground, either flat on level bearers
provided by: placed under joints (for short term
• rigid fabrications with width of opening 7.2 - S3 Straps shall be used, where
storage) or vertically and propped (for long
greater than 3mm and less than 10mm necessary, to restrain gable and
term storage).
(no restriction on length) separating walls and hold down the roof
• rigid fabrications with round holes against wind uplift Trusses should be protected against
7.2
greater than 3mm and less than 10mm RESTRAINT STRAPS weather to prevent corrosion of truss
in diameter Restraint straps, or a restraining form plates and deterioration of the timber.
• square or rectangular mesh where the of gable ladder, are required to provide Ventilation should be provided.
clear opening size is greater than 3mm stability to walls. They should be installed
and less than 10mm. as shown in the design.
support at
wall plate
RECLAIMED MATERIALS position
7.2 - M6 Reclaimed materials shall be: restraint straps at not

more than 2m centres
straps at
(a) of the type, size and quality required ceiling level,
if required
in the design
ventilation
(b) suitable for re-use rafters clear
of ground
Materials recovered from older buildings, gable wall

Any damaged trussed rafters or trussed
such as timber, slate or tile, may be re- Restraint straps should be fixed to solid rafters with loose plates should be
used only with the prior agreement of noggings with a minimum of four fixings of rejected, not repaired.
the NHBC. Independent certification of which one should be in the third rafter. The
suitability may be required. fixings should be four steel screws or four (b) handling
75mm x 4mm (8 SWG) round nails. To prevent distortion during construction,
trussed rafters should be carried upright
Rafters should not be notched to make the
(if carried flat, bending can loosen the
straps flush with the rafter. Straps should
fasteners).
go under rafters and over ceiling joists.
The turn-down should be on a substantial
piece of blockwork, preferably the centre
of an uncut block.

7.2 Pitched roofs
7.2 - S5 Trussed rafters shall be The gable ladder can be used to provide • CEILING JOIST or TIE: triangulates the
erected in accordance with fabricators’ restraint to the external wall if: rafters, stopping the walls and roof
instructions • there is blocking between the last spreading outwards; supports the ceiling
trussed rafter and the inner leaf (at a finish and any walkways, etc
Detailed guidance on the use and
maximum of 2m spacing), and • RIDGE: provides fixing and spacing for
handling of trussed rafters is given in
• the soffit board is cut carefully and then the tops of rafters
the International Truss Plate Association
fixed securely so as to restrain the outer • PURLIN: supports long span rafters to
Technical Handbook available from trussed
leaf. prevent deflection and increase stiffness
rafter suppliers.
• STRUTS: give support to purlins to
Detailed drawings should be available 7.2 - S6 Trussed rafters shall be braced prevent deflection and transmit roof
on site to show the layout of the trussed to prevent distortion loading to loadbearing structure below.
rafters, especially at hips, valleys and The roof should be braced using at least The following are extra members which
trimmings to chimneys, etc. 100mm x 25mm timber. All bracing should may be used on large roofs:
be twice nailed with 3.35mm (10 gauge) x • COLLAR: ties the roof together at purlin
Trussed rafters should be supported only
65mm long galvanized round wire nails to level
at the junction between the ceiling tie
every trussed rafter it crosses and to the • CEILING BINDERS and HANGERS:
and rafter, unless specifically designed
wallplate. support long span ceiling joists
otherwise, eg as a cantilever.
The minimum bracing requirements • POLE PLATES: similar to purlins but
are shown in Appendix 7.2-C. Additional used where ceiling joists are above wall
bracing may be needed in exposed areas. plate level.
rafter
Check the design drawings for special Positions of standard structural
requirements. members are shown in the diagrammatic
S
All bracing should be completed before representation below:
starting to lay the roof covering.
Longitudinal binders should butt solidly
against the wall at each end. This is most
easily achieved by fixing the binder in two ridge
ceiling tie
lap-jointed lengths.
Braces and binders, where not continuous, pole plate
spanning between
projection not more than:
-50mm, or should have lapped joints and be nailed to loadbearing walls purlin
collar
-one-third x S whichever is the greater
at least two trusses.
hanger
t
binders abuted ru
binder st
tightly against gable
and separating walls
Trussed rafters should be evenly spaced wall plate
and vertical. Temporary bracing should be binders fixed to ceiling ties of trussed rafters,
if necessary using two lap-jointed lengths
provided to control the spacing and keep loadbearing wall
trusses vertical. The part of an attic truss which forms a
Trussed rafters should be fixed to the wall floor should have strutting in accordance (b) prevention of distortion and
plates either: with Appendix 7.2-F. overloading
• in accordance with the design, or The design details for sizes of timber
• using double skew nailing or truss clips. TRADITIONAL CUT ROOFS members should be followed.
7.2
Avoid damaging the metal truss plates, 7.2 - S7 Roof timbers shall be of the All framing should be completed before
trussed rafters or wall plates. grades and sizes shown on the drawings roof coverings are laid.
The spacing or structure of trusses should Structural timber should be marked to If a roof is not a simple triangle, all
not be altered without the designer’s show its strength class (normally C16 or members should be fully supported and
approval. C24). Alternatively, evidence of species tied together. If necessary, temporary
and grade should be available to determine support to long span members should be
Where the width of gable ladders exceeds the equivalent strength class. used until the framing is complete.
that of the trussed rafter centres, noggings
should be provided to reduce the span of The correct size of timber should be used (c) valley and hip construction
the roofing tile battens. for each member, as shown on the design Particular care is needed in the
drawings. construction of valleys and hips:
not more than 600mm centres
7.2 - S8 Construction of traditional cut • VALLEY RAFTERS carry load from both
last trussed sections of the roof. Valley rafters will
rafter close roofs shall ensure adequate structural
to wall need to be larger than ordinary rafters
stability
to take the extra load and to provide
Items to be taken into account include: full bearing for the splay cut of JACK
RAFTERS. (Long valley rafters may need
(a) location of members intermediate support.)
noggings to
reduce span All members should be accurately located. • HIP RAFTERS provide spacing and fixing
of tile battens
Purlins and binders should be built in, for jack rafters. They need to be a deeper
where necessary. In a typical traditional section than other rafters to take the top
bargeboard roof, the basic timber members are: cut of the JACK RAFTERS. Purlins should
• RAFTER: carries the weight of the roof be mitred at hips, and lip cut to accept
finish, eg tiles, tile battens and underfelt the bottom of the hip rafter.

Pitched roofs 7.2
valley rafter The following should be used at main Angle ties should be used on hipped
connections: roof corners to prevent the wall plates
hip rafters
• RAFTERS to ceiling joists: nailed lapped spreading. For heavily loaded hip rafters,
joint. The rafter should be birdsmouthed eg where they are carrying purlins, dragon
over and skew nailed to the wall plate ties or similar bracing should be used to
jack rafters jack rafters
prevent hip rafter spread.
rafters skew
nailed to
(d) dormer construction wall plate
On most dormers, the DORMER CHEEK timber angle tie

prevents wall
STUDS should be supported either by a plates spreading
double rafter or by a double floor joist.
dormer rafter if dragon tie

carrying dormer prevents spread
cheek studs of hip rafter
• RAFTERS to purlin: a birdsmouth joint
dormer should be used if the purlin is fixed
cheek studs
vertically
plywood angle tie

plate prevents wall
plates spreading
d
double joist birdsmouth joint

carrying dormer steel tie prevents
cheek studs spread of hip rafter
¹⁄³ xd
Where cheek framing does not extend

to floor level, a double rafter will give
necessary support to the cheek. The two
rafters must be fixed together.
• PURLIN connections: support should
Trimming members around dormers
be provided directly under joint or use notch to fit
should be large enough to take the extra over angle tie
a scarf joint. Any scarf joint should
load from the cut main roof members and
be made near a strut so that the joint
dormer framing and cladding, as detailed
supports the longer span.
in the design.
angle tie
Dormers should be framed up so they are halving joint in purlin

when directly over strut
independent of the window frame, using a
suitable lintel over the opening.
trimmer takes load (f) strutting to cut roofs

from cut rafters
lay board Any part of a cut roof which forms a floor
should have strutting in accordance with
Appendix 7.2-F.
WATER TANK SUPPORTS 7.2

7.2 - S9 Loads from water cisterns shall
be transferred to:
lintel supports
dormer roof
double rafter supports (a) the node points of trussed rafters
dormer cheek studs and
load from the trimmer In trussed rafter roofs, tank stands should
be supported at the node points of the
scarf joint near strut trussed rafters and the load spread over at
supporting longer
span of purlin least three trusses.
trimmer takes load
from cut rafters Correct supports are illustrated in
Appendix 7.2-D.
(e) jointing of members
All joints should be cut accurately to fit wedges and metal (b) suitable bearers in traditional cut roofs
plate to tighten joint
tightly. When they are nailed, care should In traditional cut roofs, tank stands should
be taken not to split members. be supported as shown in the design.

7.2 Pitched roofs
FASCIAS, BARGEBOARDS 5mm Requirement R3 and the assessment

confirms that this is not required.
AND SOFFITS
7.2 - S10 Fascias, bargeboards and 10mm or 25mm (b) underlays
to suit pitch
soffits shall be selected, fixed and Horizontal laps should be as follows:
treated against decay in accordance Pitch Minimum horizontal lap
with the design (underlay not fully
supported)
MONO-PITCHED ROOF Less than 15° 225mm
(a) timber quality
Timber for external feature work should 15° to 34° 150mm
at least 50mm
be free from waney edges, large knots and clear airway 5mm 5mm 35° and above 100mm
resinous pockets, splits and other unsightly at least 50mm
clear airway
defects. 25mm Vertical laps in the underlay should occur
(b) fixing only over rafters and be securely fixed.
5mm
All joints should be cut and fixed neatly. Where the pitch is below 30°, the underlay
Mitred angles and splay joints should be 25mm 25mm should be supported at eaves level by a
used to prevent exposure of end-grain. tilting fillet. The underlay should be dressed
Butt joints to fascias should be splayed. into the gutter and pulled tight to ensure
ROOM-IN-ROOF (flat roof dormer)
there are no troughs to retain water.
(c) treatment against decay lap to suit
pitch of roof
Where preservative treated timber is Where the ceiling is partially or completely
cut or planed, a liberal brush coating of sloping and the ventilation path is blocked,
preservative should be applied. the roof void should have additional
All untreated timber that is to be painted ventilation openings immediately below
should be knotted and primed all round and above the block.
before fixing. When timber requires a 5mm 5mm
stained finish, one coat of stain should be 10mm
applied before fixing. underlay supported
by tilting fillet and
5mm dressed into gutter
roof light
ROOFING MATERIALS
25mm
7.2 - S11 Roofing materials shall be The underlay should extend over the ridge.
installed in accordance with the design
A strip of underlay, at least 600mm wide,
Items to be taken into account include: should be laid over hips and above the
(a) ventilation ROOM-IN-ROOF (partially sloping ceiling) underlay to the main roof.
All roof voids should be ventilated to
5mm 5mm At valleys, a similar strip should be laid
prevent condensation problems.
under the main roof underlay and held
Ventilation openings where the least 25mm
down by the valley battens, where used.
dimension exceeds 10mm should be The main roof underlay should be dressed
protected with mesh to prevent entry of 5mm roof light over the valley battens.
birds, etc. 600mm wide strip of
supported underlay
Where proprietary eaves ventilators are 25mm
held by valley battens
7.2
used, they should be fixed in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Ventilation should be provided on opposite ROOM-IN-ROOF (completely sloping ceiling)
sides of the roof space, equivalent to a

continuous gap of the width shown in the 10mm or 25mm
to suit pitch
10mm or 25mm
following drawings:
5mm 5mm where pitch main roof underlay dressed
exceeds 35 o or over valley battens
span exceeds 10m
10mm 10mm
The underlay should be turned up at least

100mm at all abutments to prevent rain and
PITCHED ROOF DORMER
snow being blown into the roof space.
ROOF PITCH OVER 15 o
Where necessary to protect the heads of

For cold roofs that incorporate a low water timber features, the underlay should extend
25mm 25mm vapour resistance (type LR) underlay, 50mm beyond gable walls, bargeboards, etc.
(e.g. a vapour permeable underlay) ridge
or high level ventilation equivalent to a Particular care is needed where pipes project
continuous opening of 5mm should be through the underlay. Torn underlay around
ROOF PITCH BELOW 15o provided, unless the underlay has been pipes can lead to the ceiling becoming
assessed in accordance with Technical wet and stained. Cut a small cross in the

Pitched roofs 7.2
underlay and sleeve over the pipe so that the avoid problems such as unequal overhangs
tongues turn up. at verges and often makes it possible to tiles project halfway
avoid excessive tile cutting at abutments, across gutter
cross cut
in underlay chimneys and similar obstructions.
for pipe
For plain tiles and slates, joints should be
slightly open. This allows some flexibility
in setting out. Interlocking tiles have a
tolerance of about 3mm in the joint, giving
sufficient latitude over the whole roof
tongues turned width to avoid tile cutting. underlay dressed
into gutter below
up around pipe
under-eaves tiles
Bottom edges of slate and plain tile roofs
should be finished with an under-eaves
(c) battens and counter battens course.
Battens should be set out in straight lines, To prevent the underlay sagging at the
parallel to the ridge and to the gauge eaves and forming a water trap behind the
required by the tile or slate. The lap should fascia, it is recommended that the underlay
not be decreased because this would under-eaves tiles is supported by a continuous fillet. Where
reduce weathertightness. The lowest for first course
the pitch is below 30°, a continuous fillet
batten should be fixed so that the tile should always be used. Plain tiles are
projects halfway across the gutter. Purpose-made tile-and-a-half, or half-tiles, unsuitable for pitches less than 35°.
should be used at verges. Cut tiles at
Battens should be: (b) verges
verges are not acceptable.
• at least 1.2m long All verge tiles and slates should be
• supported by at least three rafters bedded on an undercloak. Alternatively,
• butt jointed on a rafter, and proprietary dry verge systems should be
cut tiles
• nailed to every rafter. avoided fixed in accordance with manufacturers’
at eaves
Batten ends should be cut square and nails recommendations.

skew driven on each side of the joint. Not Where a bargeboard is used, the
more than one batten in four should be undercloak should be securely nailed to
joined over any one truss or rafter. tile-and-a-half a true line, projecting 40mm to 50mm
tiles used for
Where underlay laps are not under a correct coursing beyond the bargeboard. If laid directly on
batten, an extra batten should be used to masonry, the undercloak should be bedded
prevent the underlay lap opening due to on 1:3 cement : sharp sand with plasticiser
Tiles to be bedded on mortar should be
wind uplift. mortar struck off flush with the external
wetted first. Allow the surface water to
surface of the wall.
Battens on rigid sarking boards should drain before fixing. Substantial thicknesses
be supported on counter battens to allow of mortar bedding may be needed, eg verge tiles
bedded in
free drainage of any water that may reach beneath a bold roll tile, to give it body. mortar on tile
undercloak
the underlay. Counter battens should be Mortar should normally be 1:3, cement :
fixed through to the rafters and not to the sharp sand.
sarking boards alone. Battens should be 40mm to 50mm
(e) other roof coverings
fixed through counter battens to rafters. underlay taken
When using the following materials, the over wall cavity
Battens should be fixed with cut or wire detailing and workmanship should follow
7.2
nails. The nail shank can be smooth, the design and recognised good building The undercloak should lap the roof underlay
annular ringed or helically threaded. Nails practice: but not tilt inwards. Verge slates or tiles
can be steel or aluminium. In coastal areas, • sheet metal roofing including lead, should be bedded on the undercloak and
steel nails should be hot dip galvanized. copper and zinc the 1:3 cement : sharp sand with plasticiser
• thatch mortar struck off smoothly and cleanly.
(d) slates and tiles • cedar shingles. Interlocking single lap tiles should be
Slates should be fully nailed over the
Thatching should be as recommended secured with clips nailed in position at the
whole roof.
by the Thatch Advisory Service or other tile lap, as well as bedded in mortar.
The design should specify the number of appropriate authority in accordance with
fixings for clay and concrete tiles. Tables 2 (c) ridges and hips
and 3 of Appendix 7.2-B contain minimum Ridge and hip tiles are bedded in 1:3 cement
fixings for tiles. Additional nails and clips : sharp sand with plasticiser mortar or
may be necessary in accordance with the
FLASHINGS AND mechanically fixed using a proprietary
design. A fixing schedule produced by the tile WEATHERINGS dry ridge fixing system following the
manufacturer, based on The Zonal Method, is manufacturer’s instructions. The method
7.2 - S12 Flashings and weatherings shown in the design should always be used.
acceptable.
shall be constructed to prevent damp
Ridge and hip tiles, for a distance of entering the dwelling
underlay carried ridge tiles bedded
at least 900mm from the face of rigid Items to be taken into account include:
over ridge in mortar
masonry supports such as gables, (a) eaves

abutments and separating walls, should be Tiles or slates should overhang to the
mechanically fixed. centre of the gutter. For slates or plain
Careful setting out makes the actual tiles, an under-eaves course should be
tiling process faster and will influence the used.
finished appearance on the roof. It helps to

7.2 Pitched roofs
Where bedded in 1:3 cement : sharp sand LEAD-LINED VALLEY wedged in place. The joint should then be
with plasticiser mortar the following tiles Lead-lined valleys should be Code 4 (colour pointed in cement mortar of 1 : 3, cement :
should also be nailed: coded blue) or Code 5 (colour coded red) sharp sand.
• bonnet hip tiles and supported on gutter boards of 19mm
Cavity trays should be linked to the
• end ridge tiles thick marine ply or as specified. Lead
flashing to prevent water penetrating into
• ridge tiles over separating walls in valleys should be laid in lengths not
an enclosed area where a:
• mono-pitch ridge tiles. exceeding 1.5m and be lapped 150mm at
• flat or pitched roof over an enclosed
each length. Tiles should be cut and bedded
Where half-round tiles are used at hips, area abuts a wall
as for valley trough tiles except that the
they should be supported at the base of • balcony abuts a wall.
mortar should be bedded on an undercloak
the hip by a galvanized hip iron.
(for example slate) to prevent direct contact
(d) valleys and hidden gutters between the lead and the mortar. lead flashing
wedged into joint
below wall dpc
Construction should be adequate in joints in lead lapped
at least 150mm
edge tiles cut to rake and bedded
in mortar on an undercloak
relation to: at least 75mm
• depth underlay at least 150mm
turned up
• width behind
flashing
• undercloaking
• pointing
• adequate support
• pitch.
Valleys should be formed using one of the
following:
• valley coursing tiles (plain tiles) at least 125mm lead-lined gutter Where a pitched roof abuts the wall at an
clear channel
• valley trough tiles (interlocking tiles) angle, a stepped cavity tray linked to a
• non-ferrous metal stepped flashing should be used.
• a proprietary system. PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS
Proprietary gutter or valley systems Stepped flashings should be cut from a
Where roof coverings are of plain tiles or should be fixed in accordance with the strip at least 150mm wide.
slates, laced and swept valleys may be manufacturer’s recommendations. soakers
used or, alternatively, a mitred valley with beneath stepped lead flashing
each tile held in mortar joints
soakers. (e) flat roof intersection overlapped with lead wedges
by lead
Where a flat roof adjoins a pitched roof, flashing
The pitch of a valley is less than the pitch
or where valleys or gutters occur, the
of the main roof. Where tiles are to be used
waterproof membrane should be carried
for valleys, the valley pitch should be not
up under the tiling to a height of 150mm
less than the minimum permissible pitch
above the flat roof, valley or gutter and
given in Table 1 of Appendix 7.2-B.
lapped by the roofing underlay.
VALLEY USING VALLEY TILES
The lowest course of tiles/slates should not
In roofs with plain tiles, purpose-made
touch the roof membrane.
valley coursing tiles should be used.
Adjacent roof tiles should be cut neatly to underlay overlaps
weatherproofing
form a smooth junction, preferably cutting
from tile-and-a-half tiles.
approx 150mm
For single lap interlocking tiles, purpose-

7.2
fall
made valley trough tiles should be at least 150mm (g) projections through the roof
supported by gutter boards. Roof A purpose-made one-piece flashing and
tiles should be cut to the correct rake. upstand should be used around pipes
Mechanical cutting gives a neater projecting through the tiling.
appearance than hand cutting. The tiles
should be bedded in mortar, leaving a Note
minimum 100mm wide channel (125mm Where the flat roof is over a dormer, it is welted edge
plastic collar
minimum for pitches below 30°). recommended that the flat roof should be solvent welded to flashing
to pipe
designed and constructed with a fall to the
valley trough tiles edge tiles cut to rake
and bedded in mortar front or sides.
Flat roofs should comply with Chapter 7.1
‘Flat roofs and balconies’ (Sitework).
(f) abutments
All abutments should be weatherproofed
using non-ferrous metal flashings. Lead one piece flashing and
flashings should be at least Code 4 (colour sleeve around pipe
coded blue), while soakers are normally

Code 3 (colour coded green). Normally,
valley undercloak strip
Chimney flashings should link with the
lead flashings should not exceed 1.5m in
chimney dpc trays. An example is shown
length, with laps of not less than 100mm.
below.
at least 100mm
clear channel
Flashing should be tucked into a mortar
joint or chase 25mm deep and at least
75mm above the tiling level and lead

Pitched roofs 7.2
DETAIL OF BACK GUTTER A cavity barrier should be provided within To reduce the risk of freezing and
boxed eaves. The cavity barrier should be condensation on pipework, the following
cover
flashing wire reinforced mineral wool blanket, at least precautions should be taken:
back gutter
flashing supported 50mm thick, nailed to the rafter and carefully • place roof insulation above and around
by gutter boards
cut to shape to fully seal the boxed eaves. water tanks but not below them
• locate water pipes below the main roof
firestop between battens
above underlay
insulation whenever possible
at least 150mm • insulate all water services above the
cover flashing firestop below
underlay main roof insulation, including cisterns
and vent pipes.
lap tank pipes insulated
and loft when above
insulation loft insulation
upper dpc tray

back
gutter cavity closed
flashing at eaves
cavity barrier of cavity

mineral wool or barrier in
fire-resisting board separating wall
in boxed eaves
stepped side THERMAL INSULATION

flashing
7.2 - S14 Thermal insulation and
rising main
ventilation of roofs shall prevent the insulated above
lower dpc tray ceiling level
adverse effects of condensation
To avoid condensation forming in the roof It is recommended that the cold rising
space ensure that: main be insulated above ceiling level
front apron flashing • ventilation of the roof is provided in even if it is below the main roof insulation
accordance with the design (condensation that forms on uninsulated
• insulation does not block any ventilation cold water pipes located below the main
(h) changes in roof slope roof insulation can result in damage to
paths
Flashings or soakers should be used where ceilings and decorations).
• insulation is laid over the whole loft
there is a change in roof slope of 5° or
area, including the wall plate
more, eg at mansards and sprockets.
• there are no gaps in the insulation. ROOF DRAINAGE
A saddle flashing should be used where a
7.2 - S15 Roof drainage shall adequately
ridge meets the main roof.
spacer maintains carry rainwater to an outfall
25mm clear airway
above insulation
cold roof
ridge tile bedded on
saddle flashing
(a) fixing and jointing gutters and downpipes
Rainwater gutters and downpipes should
be fixed in the positions indicated by the
insulation above design using the correct type of fittings
cavity closer and
wall plate avoids for internal and external angles, outlets,
a cold bridge
etc to ensure efficient drainage of the
roof. Gutters and downpipes should be
ventilation
supported and jointed in accordance with
7.2
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The amount of moist air entering the loft space
from the dwelling should be controlled by: (b) falls
• draughtstripping the loft hatch or using Gutters should be laid with sufficient fall
a proprietary loft hatch towards the outlet, unless designed to be
• ensuring that the hatch is heavy enough flat, and be provided with stop ends.
FIRE-STOPPING (or suitably fixed) to compress the
(c) satisfactory outfall
7.2 - S13 Pitched roofs shall be draught seal
If a downpipe discharges above ground
constructed to offer adequate resistance • sealing gaps where services pass
level or above a drainage gully, a shoe
to the spread of fire through the ceiling.
should be fixed to the end of the pipe to
Fire-stopping and cavity barriers should be prevent walls becoming saturated.
provided:
• at junctions between cavities
• above separating walls
• within boxed eaves of separating walls.
The separating wall should stop about
loft hatch
25mm below the top of adjacent roof draught gaps sealed
stripped at services
trusses.
cross
ventilation
A soft fire-resistant packing, such as
mineral wool, should be used to allow for The guidance above will assist in reducing
movement in roof timbers and prevent the risk of condensation occurring but is
‘hogging’ of the tiles. not acceptable as an alternative to cross
ventilation of the roof space.

7.2 Pitched roofs
Appendix 7.2-A
Protection from corrosion of metal components embedded in masonry
Metal components, other than wall ties built into masonry, should be made of a material listed below and protected in the way described in
Table 1.
Reference should be made to Table 2 for guidance on which category of material and protection to use.
Table 1 - Anchorages, dowels and fixings
Category Base material Form Grade and standard to be complied with Protective measures to be carried out  after
fabrication
A Hot-dip Sheet BS 2989, Z1 or Z2, coating type G 600. All external cut edges to be protected
galvanized Minimum mass of coating 600 g/m2 including both sides using a one-pack chemical-resistant paint
low carbon complying with HF1A to HF2F in part 4 of
steel table 4H of BS 5493 and modified
to give adequate adhesion to the fixing
BS 2989, Z1 or Z2, coating type G 275. Coating to be supplied after fabrication to
Minimum mass of coating 275 g/m2 including both sides the external surfaces and consisting of
either:
(a) bituminous solution complying with
types 1 or 2 of BS 3416 and of minimum
thickness 25µm;
or
(b) a one-pack chemical-resistant paint
complying with HF1A to HF2F in part 4
of table 4H of BS 5493 and modified to give adequate
adhesion to the fixing.
Where the zinc is removed on internal
surfaces during fabrication, e.g. by welding,
further protection should be applied to
these areas.
B Low carbon Strip BS 1449 : Part 1 (mechanical Post-galvanizing complying with BS 729.
steel requirements in table 11 only) Minimum mass of coating 460 g/m2 including
both sides
BS 4360 grade 43A
C Low carbon Strip BS 1449 : Part 1 (mechanical Post-galvanizing complying with BS 729.
steel requirements in table 11 only) Minimum mass of coating 940 g/m2 including
both sides
BS 4360 grade 43A
D Copper   BS 6017  
Copper alloys   BS 2870, grades listed Material other than phosphor bronze to be
in tables 8 and 12 formed either:
BS 2873, grades listed (a) by bending at dull red heat and
in tables 4 and 6 allowing to cool in still air;
or
BS 2874, grades listed in
tables 6, 8 and 9 except CA 106 (b) by cold forming and subsequently
7.2
stress relief annealing at 250°C to

300°C for 30 min to 1h.
Effectiveness of stress relieving of cold
formed components to be tested by the
supplier using the mercurous nitrate test
described in BS 2874
Austenitic Strip BS 1449 : Part 2  

stainless steel
minimum 18/8 Bar Rod BS 970 : Part 1
composition Tube BS 6323 : Part 8
and excluding
free machining Wire BS 1554
specifications
BS 3111 : Part 2
Reproduced from BS 5628 : Part 3 (with updated references) by permission of BSI.

Pitched roofs 7.2
Table 2 - Protection of metal components (other than wall ties) built into masonry
Type of component Situation Category given in table 1 (material and recommended protective
measures)
Three storeys or less More than three storeys
Anchorages, bonding ties, slip brick All C or D D
ties and continuous support angles
Dowels and restraint straps Internal walls A, B, C, D A, B, C, D
Joist hangers In contact with or embedded in inner A, B, C, D A, B, C, D

leaf
Reinforcement for non-structural In contact with or embedded in outer C or D D
use leaf or single leaf walls
Lintels All As specified in BS 5977 : Part 2 for Not normally applicable. If used
the appropriate type of lintel i.e. special precautions may be
installed with or without dpc necessary
Cavity trays All As specified in BS 5977 : Part 2 for As specified in BS 5977 : Part 2 for
lintels installed without dpc lintels installed without dpc
It is an NHBC recommendation that components in contact with, or embedded in, an inner leaf which is damp or exposed to periodic wettings
(eg below dpc) should be protected in the same way as components in contact with, or embedded in, an outer leaf.
Reproduced from BS 5628 : Part 3 by permission of BSI.
Appendix 7.2-B
Roof tile fixings
Table 1 - Recommended limits of pitch, gauge and lap for roof tiles
Type of tile Gauge Minimum head-lap (mm) Minimum permissible pitch (°)
Plain not more than ½ length-lap 65 normally for clay tiles 35¹ (clay)
(double-lap) 75 in severe exposure conditions 35 (plain concrete)
Concrete determined by design to comply with 75 or to manufacturer’s specific 30 (Note: For pitches below 30,
(single-lap manufacturers’ recommendations recommendations evidence shall be provided as to
interlocking) suitable performance)
Slates not more than ½ length-lap 54² minimum, increase with lower 20 subject to head lap
(double-lap) pitch and severe exposure
conditions
Notes
7.2
1 Clay tiles that do not meet the dimentional and geometric requirements given in BS EN 1304 should be laid at pitches not less than 40˚.
2 For pitches greater than 45˚in sheltered and moderate exposure zones only. See BS 5534 table 5 for other pitches and exposures.

7.2 Pitched roofs
Table 2 - Minimum fixings for single lap interlocking clay and concrete tiles
Location Fixings
Verges, abutments The end tile in each course should be fixed (nail and/or clip)
and each side of
valleys and hips
Eaves and top edges Each tile in the first course at the eaves and last course at the ridge/top edge
should be fixed (nail and/or clip)
General roof area For rafter pitches below 45° - tiles should be fixed in accordance with
For rafter pitches between 45° and 55° - all tiles should be nailed or nailed
and clipped.
For rafters pitches of 55° and above - all tiles should be nailed and the tail of
each tile should be mechanically fixed.
Notes
1 Additional nails or clips may be required depending on pitch and degree of exposure.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. A fixing schedule produced by the tile
manufacturer, based on The Zonal Method, is acceptable. Evidence of calculations in
compliance with Technical Requirements R3 and R5 may be required.
2 The mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles is recommended. But in all cases ridge or
hip tiles, for a distance of at least 900mm from the face of rigid masonry supports such
as gables, abutments and separating walls, should be mechanically fixed.
3 Nails should be in accordance with BS 5534 and be not less than 3.35mm diameter and
should penetrate at least 15mm into battens.
Table 3 - Minimum fixings for double lap clay and concrete plain tiles
Location Fixings
Verges, butments and The end tile in each course should be twice nailed
each side of valleys
and hips
Eaves and top edges Each tile in the first two courses at the eaves and last two courses at the ridge
should be twice nailed or otherwise mechanically fixed.
General roof area Nibbed tiles
For rafter pitches below 60° - each tile in every fifth course should be twice
nailed.
For rafter pitches 60° and above - all tiles should be twice nailed.
Nibless tiles
All tiles should be twice nailed.
Notes
7.2
1 Additional nails or clips may be required depending on pitch and degree of exposure.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. A fixing schedule produced by the tile
manufacturer, based on The Zonal Method, is acceptable. Evidence of calculations in
compliance with Technical Requirements R3 and R5 may be required.
2 The mechanical fixing of all ridge and hip tiles is recommended. But in all cases ridge or
hip tiles, for a distance of at least 900mm from the face of rigid masonry supports such as
gables, abutments and separating walls, should be mechanically fixed. All bonnet hip, arris
hip and purpose-made hip tile fittings should be nailed.
3 Nails should be in accordance with BS 5534 and be not less than 2.65mm diameter and
should penetrate at least 15mm into battens.

Pitched roofs 7.2
Appendix 7.2-C
BRACING REQUIREMENT FOR TRUSSED RAFTER ROOFS

Type of bracing Position of bracing Where applicable
A All trussed rafter roofs unless rigid sarking
Truss Span
Diagonal rafter bracing or or such as timber boarding or plywood is used.

(at approx. 45° on plan)
Alternative styles of bracing for roofs that are approximately square
Truss Span
or or
Alternative styles of bracing for larger roofs

Truss Span
X Intersection detail ‘X’

22 x 97 x 600mm long
timber splice plate nailed
using minimum of 4 No.
3.35mm x 65mm long
Bracing for narrow fronted roofs galvanised round wire nails
(less than 6.6m wide) of detached each side of intersection
or staggered/stepped buildings driven through bracing and
clenched over
Truss Span
Alternative styles for monopitch trusses
B All trussed rafter roofs

Longitudinal
bracing member
at ridge node point  
C All ceiling node points, but may be omitted where
Longitudinal spacing between braced nodes does not
binders at ceiling exceed 3.7m
node points
  less than 3.7m
D les All rafter node points, but may be omitted where

st
Longitudinal ha
n4 spacing between braced nodes does not exceed 4.2m
.2m
bracing member
at rafter  
node point
E Where the span exceeds 8m. For monopitch roofs of
Chevron bracing any span and duopitch roofs over 11m span, bracing
between webs should be designed by an Engineer in accordance with
7.2
  more than 8m
F Where not restrained by masonry wall, or cladding in

Diagonal bracing plywood or similar rigid sheet material
to end vertical of
monopitch trusses  

7.2 Pitched roofs
CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS ON THE USE OF STANDARD TRUSSED RAFTER BRACING

1 T
he use of standard bracing does not apply to buildings erected on long stretches of open, level or near level country with no shelter.
Examples include flat coastal fringes, fens, airfields and moorland.

The height and location of the building, roof pitch and span are also important. Appendix A of BS : 5268 : Part 3 (AMD.5931) gives full details
but as a general guide standard bracing is acceptable for the following situations:
Roof type Max No of Maximum span (m)

pitch storeys
(°) England Scotland N Ireland &
& Wales the Isle of Man
Duo-pitch 35 1 10.6 9.8 (8.6) 9.8 (8.6)
2 9.1 7.7 (7.2) 7.7 (7.2)
3 8.5 7.2 (6.0) 7.2 (6.0)
30 1 12.0 11.6 (10.6) 11.6 (10.6)
2 11.5 10.0 (8.7) 10.0 (8.7)
3 10.2 8.8 (7.5) 8.8 (7.5)
Mono- 35 1 5.6 4.9 (4.3) 4.9 (4.3)
pitch 2 4.5 4.2 (3.6) 4.2 (3.6)
3 4.3 3.6 (3.0) 3.6 (3.0)
30 1 6.6 5.8 (5.1) 5.8 (5.1)
2 5.8 5.0 (4.4) 5.0 (4.4)
3 5.1 4.4 (3.7) 4.4 (3.7)
25 1 8.1 7.3 (6.5) 7.3 (6.5)
2 7.2 6.4 (5.6) 6.4 (5.6)
3 6.4 5.6 (4.5) 5.6 (4.5)
Figures in brackets apply to areas of Scotland either north or west of Ullapool and to areas of Northern Ireland north east of Londonderry.
2 T he maximum span of the trussed rafters is 12m, the maximum height of the building is 8.4m to the underside of ceiling tie and the
maximum rafter spacing is 600mm.
3 The maximum length of unsupported masonry between buttressing walls, piers or chimneys is 9m.
4 The bracing is for either duo-pitched or mono-pitched roofs.
5 The minimum size for bracing members is nominal 25mm x 100mm (3mm tolerance).
6 All bracing members to be nailed with 2 No 3.35mm diameter x 65mm long galvanized round nails to every trussed rafter they cross.
7 The trusses are supported only at their ends.
8 The roof (including hip ends) is rectangular in shape.
9 Longitudinal bracing members may be lap-jointed provided the overlap is nailed to at least two trussed rafters. They should extend the full
length of the roof and tightly abut gable and party walls. Longitudinal bracing members should permit diagonal bracing to pass.
10 At least four diagonal rafter braces are required in every roof. In narrow fronted roofs and mono-pitched roofs, where braces cross, use the
intersection detail ‘x’ above.
11 Diagonal rafter bracing should be at approximately 45° to the rafters on plan. Chevron bracing should be at approximately 45° to the web
7.2
members. Diagonal bracing and chevron bracing should be across all trussed rafters, but small gaps (2 trussed rafters between sets of
bracing and 1 trussed rafter adjacent to gable or separating walls) are permitted in the middle of an otherwise fully braced roof.
12 Rafter diagonal bracing and longitudinal bracing at rafter level may be omitted where rigid sarking boards are used. Rigid sarking boards
(e.g. chipboard, plywood, osb) should be fixed with 3.0mm diameter x 50mm long galvanised round wire nails at 200mm centres to every
trussed rafter.
13 All trusses should have a ceiling of plasterboard or other suitable material. (For trussed rafters at 600mm centres, 12.5mm plasterboard
is required.) Where there is no plasterboard, such as in garages, longitudinal binder bracing (Type C above) is to be used at all ceiling node
points and additional diagonal ceiling bracing is required.
14 Bracing to satisfy particular conditions shall be in addition to that detailed in the above table.
15 The ITPA Technical Handbook gives further details and advice on construction.

Pitched roofs 7.2
Appendix 7.2-D
Tank support details
Offset bracing to clear tank
Tank placed centrally bearers (for bracing details
see section five)
Bearer ‘A’ placed as

close to the node
point as possible
Node point
Bay size
Trussed rafter span LS
Node point Tank Tank

S
3
S b
b 2
S
2S a c a
S
2 3
c
2S
3 c
S b
a
c
S S
b 2 S 3 Node point
S
2 S = Trussed rafter spacing
Sizes for support members

Total tank capacity to Min. member sizes Max. trussed Max. bay size
marked waterline   rafter span for other
a and c b for Fink configurations
  configuration
mm m m
Detail A
Not more than 300 L 47 x 72 2/35 x 97 or
supported on
1/47 x 120 6.50 2.20
four trussed rafters
47 x 72 2/35 x 120 or
1/47 x 145 9.00 2.80
7.2
47 x 72 2/35 x 145 12.00 3.80
Detail B 47 x 72 1/47 x 97 6.50 2.20
Not more than 230 L
supported on
47 x 72 2/35 x 97 or
three trussed rafters
1/47 x 120 9.00 2.80
47 x 72 2/35 x 120 or
1/47 x 145 12.00 3.80
NOTE: Support members may be of any species with a permissible bending stress not less
than that of European redwood/whitewood of GS stress grade (see 14.1).
Reproduced from BS 5268 : Part 3 by permission of BSI.

7.2 Pitched roofs
Appendix 7.2-E
Sizes and spacing of tile battens

The sizes and spacing of tile battens should be specified from the table below.
Batten lengths should be sufficient to span over not less than three consecutive supports.
The actual batten thickness (smaller dimension) should not be less than that given in the
table nor more than 3mm oversize. Actual batten width should be within ±3mm of the basic
size.
BS 5534 requires delivery notes to accompany the battens and the batten to be marked with
the following information - supplier, origin, “graded BS 5534”, and size.
  450mm span 600mm span

mm mm
Slates (double lap)    
Natural: sized or random 25 x 50 25 x 50
Fibre cement or concrete 25 x 38 25 x 50
Clay and concrete tiles    
Double lap 25 x 38 25 x 38
Single lap 25 x 38 25 x 50
Appendix 7.2-F
Strutting for attic trusses and cut roofs that have a floor
If the distance D exceeds 2.5m between
- the node points which form the width of the floor of the attic truss or
- the supports to a floor within a cut roof,
then additional strutting should be provided as follows;
Distance D Rows of strutting
Under 2.5 none needed

Over 4.5 2 (at equal spacing)
7.2
Either herringbone strutting (38mm x 38mm timber) or solid strutting not less than three-
quarters the depth of the floor and at least 38mm thick should be used.

Pitched roofs 7.2
INDEX
A H U
Abutments 12 Hips 8, 11 Underlay 3, 6, 10
Access 5 Holding down straps 1, 6, 7 V
B House Longhorne beetle 2 Valleys 4, 8, 12
Bargeboards 7, 10 I Vapour checks 4
Battens 1, 4, 6, 11, Imposed loads 1 Ventilation 4, 7, 10
20 Insulation 6, 13 Verges 4
Bracing 2, 8, 17, 18 J W
C Jointing 9 Wall plates 1, 7
Cavity barriers 7 L
Chimneys 3, 5 Lateral restraint straps 1, 6, 7
Condensation 4, 5
M
Cut roofs 2, 8
Moisture barrier 4
D P
Design 1, 2
Proprietary roof coverings 4, 12
Dormers 9
R
Drainage 5, 13
Ridges 4, 11
F Roof coverings 3, 5, 6
Fascias 7, 10
Roof spaces 4
Fire-stopping 5, 7, 13
S
Fixing(s) 4, 6, 10,
Sarking, rigid 3, 6
14, 15
Slates 3, 11
Flashings 3, 6, 11, 13
Soffits 7, 10
Flue pipes 5
T
G
Tank supports 2, 9, 19
Girder trusses 2
Tiles 3, 11, 15
Timber 2, 6, 10
Trussed rafters 2, 7, 17
Trusses 2
7.2

Part 8
Services and internal finishing
8.1 Internal services
8.2 Wall and ceiling finishes
8.3 Floor finishes
8.4 Finishings and fitments

Part 8 Services and internal finishing
Chapter 8.1
Internal services
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for internal services,
including plumbing, hot and cold water supply, and gas,
electric and solid fuel heating installations.
Precautions against ground hazards D4 1
Precautions against chemical attack D5 1
Water supply D6 1
Cold water service D7 1
Hot water service D8-D9 1
Electrical service D10-D11 2
Gas service D12-D13 3
Space heating D14-D15 3
Soil and waste systems D16-D17 3
MATERIALS
Precautions against corrosion M2 4
Materials and appliances M3 4
SITEWORK
Installation: general S2 5
Hot and cold water services S3 6
Electrical service S4 6
Gas service S5 7
Meters S6 7
Space heating S7 7
Soil and waste systems S8 7
Testing and commissioning S9 8
APPENDIX 8.1-A
Thermal insulation of waterpipes to 8
delay freezing
INDEX 8
8.1

Internal services 8.1
DESIGN STANDARDS WATER SUPPLY Storage cisterns should have rigid close
fitting covers (which are not airtight) and
8.1 - D6 Water service design shall be in which exclude light and insects.
8.1 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical accordance with statutory requirements
Requirements and based on the pressures and flow (c) warning and overflow pipes
Design that follows the guidance below will rates supplied from the incoming main Warning and overflow pipes should be of
be acceptable for internal services. adequate size and be provided from all
Water services should be in accordance
cold water cisterns to a suitable discharge
with relevant Building Regulations and
outside of the building. Where permitted
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS other statutory requirements.
by water regulations, the discharge may be
8.1 - D2 Design shall comply with all The design of the water service should be internal provided it is conspicuous.
relevant statutory requirements based on a minimum dynamic pressure of
1.5 bar at the stopvalve inside the home. (d) reducing the risk of freezing
Designs should be in accordance with Pipes and cisterns should be located in the
relevant Building Regulations and other The design should ensure that a minimum warm envelope of the home to reduce the
statutory requirements. flow rate of 20L/min is available at the risk of freezing.
stopvalve inside the home.
STRUCTURAL STABILITY Where pipes and cisterns are placed
The design should take account of: in unheated spaces, they should be
8.1 - D3 The design of internal services • pressure and flow rate reductions where adequately insulated to reduce the risk of
shall not adversely affect the stability of there are long distances between the freezing (see BS 6700 and Appendix 8.1-A).
the dwelling water main and the stopvalve inside the
Notching, drilling and chasing to building. This may involve increasing the HOT WATER SERVICE
accommodate service pipes and cables diameter of the supply pipe
• pressure fluctuations, or surges, which 8.1 - D8 An adequate hot water service
should either: shall be provided in accordance with
• comply with Sitework clauses 8.1 - S2(d) may occur within the system and the
potential damage they may have on statutory requirements
and (e), or
• be designed by an Engineer. fittings. Surge arresters may need to be Hot water services should be in accordance
installed at suitable points within the with relevant Building Regulations and
system. other statutory requirements.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST
GROUND HAZARDS COLD WATER SERVICE 8.1 - D9 The hot water services shall
be adequate for the likely demand and
8.1 - D4 Design of service entries shall 8.1 - D7 Adequate cold water services consumption
take account of ground hazards shall be provided
In certain parts of the country, special Items to be taken into account include: (a) types of system
precautions are necessary to reduce the (a) drinking water • instantaneous systems (combination
entry of radon gas. Areas in England Drinking water should be provided at the
and Wales where special precautions are boiler)
kitchen sink. The supply should come These systems produce hot water on
necessary are detailed in BRE Report 211 direct from the supply pipe or, where
‘Radon: guidance on protective measures demand, but generally at significantly
this is impracticable, from a storage lower flow rates than storage systems.
for new dwellings’. cistern containing an adequate supply of They should only be used where the
Where landfill and other gases are present wholesome water. Further information is simultaneous demand for hot water
precautions are necessary to prevent given in Water Regulations and guides. is limited e.g. in homes with only one
entry. Details are shown in BRE Report bathroom or shower room, unless the
(b) cold water storage
212 ‘Construction of new buildings on gas- boiler manufacturer can show that the
Cold water storage should be provided:
contaminated land’. boiler is capable of producing hot water
• to supply an open vented hot water
storage system simultaneously to outlets in accordance
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST • where required by the water supplier with clause D9(c).
For storage combination boilers, whose
CHEMICAL ATTACK • to supply those cold water outlets not
characteristics are similar to storage
connected to the supply pipe.
8.1 - D5 Adequate precautions shall be systems, the storage capacity should
taken to ensure services are not subject The cold water storage capacity should meet with the guidance in (b) below.
to chemical attack take account of the guidance in BS 6700, • storage systems (vented cylinder,
8.1
which recommends: unvented hot water storage system,

WATER SERVICES “In small houses it is usual for storage primary store)
Pipes and fittings for water services should cisterns supplying only cold water fittings These systems provide higher flow rates
be of materials which are resistant to to have a capacity of 100L to 150L, and than instantaneous systems but require
corrosion. The recommendations of the double this capacity if supplying all water a suitable space for the siting of the
water supplier should be followed as to outlets, hot and cold. storage vessel.
the compatibility of the water supply with
materials and fittings. In larger houses a total storage capacity of (b) hot water storage
100L per bedroom is recommended”. Hot water storage for notional draw-off
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
Primary feed cisterns for indirect water requirements should be not less than
PVC covered cables should not be in
heating systems should be of adequate shown in the following table. Where
contact with polystyrene insulation.
capacity. appliances are to be installed requiring
greater amounts of hot water, the storage
Cold water storage cisterns should be capacity should be increased accordingly:
accessible for inspection and maintenance.

2 The minimum flow rate should normally

Home with Room Outlets Notes
be available, based on clause D6, but
Shower Bath only Bath and Two      
may be less if the pressure and flow rate
only shower(s*) baths Kitchen/ 8 Where homes have
of the incoming supply falls below 1.5
60L 120L 145L 180L utility separate areas,
bar.
the kitchen should
3 Excludes instantaneous electric showers. have a minimum of
*max. 2 showers (excludes instantaneous
4 outlets, and the
electric showers) 4 Further information on flow rates and
utility room 4.
temperatures can be found in BS 6700. Where appliances
For systems heated by off-peak electricity,
are provided, at least
the storage capacity should be in (d) unvented hot water storage systems 3 outlets should be
accordance with the recommendations of Unvented hot water storage systems free for general use
the electricity supplier. should be assessed in accordance with Dining room 4  
Technical Requirement R3 or meet the
Where boiler outputs are controlled and Living or 8 At least 2 outlets
requirements of BS 7206, and be the family room should be near the
can prioritise hot water then storage
subject of a third party certification TV aerial outlet
capacities can be less than the figures
scheme (e.g. Kitemarking). Bedrooms 6 (4) 6 for main bedroom
in the table. Some storage combination
4 for other
boilers and combined primary storage (e) safety in showers bedrooms
units (CPSU) have this facility. The Where a shower is installed, adequate Landing 2
manufacturer should be consulted on the provision should be made to ensure that
appropriate storage capacity for the likely the outlet temperature of the water is not Hall 2
hot water demand. seriously affected by the use of other hot
or cold outlets in the dwelling. This may be BS 7671 states that sockets which might
For homes with a single bathroom/shower reasonably be used to supply power to
room, it is assumed that immediately achieved by the provision of a thermostatic
shower mixing valve, appropriate design of external appliances should be protected
after filling a bath, some hot water may by a residual current device. To meet this
be required for kitchen or wash basin use, pipe sizes or dedicated supplies.
regulation, all power circuits should be
but a second bath will not be required for protected by a residual current device
another 20 or 30 minutes. ELECTRICAL SERVICE to BS 4293. Lighting circuits and those
For homes with two or more bathrooms, it 8.1 - D10 The electrical installation shall supplying power to smoke detectors
is assumed that all the installed baths will be provided in accordance with relevant should not be protected by a residual
be filled in succession and that some hot regulations current device.
water may be required for kitchen or wash All electrical installations should comply (c) lighting
basin use immediately after. with BS 7671. Every room should have at least one fixed
The quantities of hot water stored are Cables which are covered or surrounded lighting outlet.
based on a water draw off temperature of by thermal insulation may need to be Lighting outlets should be provided to
60ºC. de-rated. Guidance is available in the BRE halls, landings and staircases. At each floor
report ‘Thermal insulation: avoiding risks’. level two-way switching should be provided
(c) flow rates and temperature
The system should be designed and to staircases.
8.1 - D11 An adequate electrical service
installed so that the following flow rates shall be provided In common areas to dwellings, artificial
and temperatures are available: lighting should be provided, controlled
Items to take into account include:
Outlet Flow Rate L/s Supply by either manual switching by persons
(a) cooking
temperature using the area or automatic light sensitive
In all dwellings, a minimum 30A electricity
Design Minimum
controls.
supply, suitably switched and terminated,
Rate Rate should be provided to the cooker space.
(see (see
(d) fixed appliances
note 1) note 2) If a cooker panel is provided it should be EXTRACT FAN SYSTEMS
Bath 0.3 0.2 60ºC located to the side of the cooker space. Extract fan systems should be designed
(from Where a gas supply is provided to the in accordance with the manufacturer’s
storage) dwelling, a 13A socket outlet should be recommendations. Ducts passing through
Bath 0.2 0.15 40ºC positioned at the cooker space. unheated spaces, such as a roof void,
(from to the outside air should be insulated
combi) (b) socket outlets to prevent condensation affecting the
8.1
Shower 0.2 0.1 40ºC Rooms should be provided with not less operation of the fan. Alternatively,
(see than the following 13A outlets. Dual outlets the ducting should have a means of
note 3) count as two. collecting the condensate and draining
Wash 0.15 0.1 40ºC it to the outside. Where ducting is part
Basin of a mechanical ventilation and heat
Sink 0.2 0.1 60ºC recovery system it should be insulated
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
Notes recommendations.
1 The design flow rate should be
available at each outlet when the total ELECTRICAL SUPPLY TO GAS
demand does not exceed 0.3L/s. When APPLIANCES
simultaneous discharge occurs, the flow Where a gas appliance requires an
rate at an individual outlet should not be electrical supply, a suitable fixed spur or
less than the minimum rate. socket outlet should be provided.

(e) television 8.1 – D15 Space heating shall be 8.1 – D17 Internal soil and waste
A concealed co-axial cable should be adequate systems shall be adequate
provided from the roof void to a terminal
Items to be taken into account include: Items to be taken into account include:
outlet in the main living room. Where the
co-axial cable is not provided, a conduit (a) minimum standards for living room (a) disposal of effluent from the building
and draw wire or an alternative should be heating Soil and waste systems should comply with
provided. The provision of an aerial is not The main living room of a dwelling should any specific requirements from the water
required. have a heating appliance or a heat output supplier.
as part of whole home heating which is
Guidance and recommendations for
capable of maintaining a temperature of
GAS SERVICE at least 21ºC in the room when the outside
building drainage and sanitation are given
in BS EN 752 and BS EN 12056.
8.1 - D12 Where provided, gas services temperature is -3ºC.
shall be adequate and in accordance with (b) entry of foul air from the drainage
relevant standards and codes (b) minimum standards for whole home
system to the building
heating
All gas services must comply with the Gas Soil and waste systems should be arranged
The provision of whole home or central
Safety (installation and use) Regulations. so that:
heating is discretionary. Where it is
• each branch is adequately ventilated
British Standards relevant to the design provided, it should be designed to
• foul air from the drainage system cannot
of gas installations include BS 6891 and recognised standards and based generally
enter dwellings.
for Butane and Propane gas, BS 5482. on the following:
Other authoritative publications such as • external temperature -3ºC Ventilation should be provided at the head
those prepared by the Institution of Gas • the design temperatures and ventilation of underground drains. This may be by a
Engineers and Managers and the Council rates given in the table below: soil pipe or separate ventilation pipe.
for Registered Gas Installers (CORGI) can Room Room Ventilation rate Where a soil pipe or ventilation pipe is less
be used. temperature (air changes per than 3m away from an opening into the
(ºC) hour) building, it should extend at least 900mm
Gas pipework to be installed in timber
frame construction should allow for the Living 21 1.5 above that opening.
room
likely differential movement. Reference
should be made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External Dining 21 1.5
room
timber framed walls’. at least
900mm
Bedroom 18 1
Where a gas supply is provided, there Hall and 18 1.5
should be a gas point at the cooker space. landing
opening
For details of hearths, flues and air supply, Kitchen 18 2 into building less than 3m
refer to Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, chimneys Bathroom 22 2

and flues’. Toilet 18 2
soil pipe or
ventilation
8.1 – D13 Where provided, gas services pipe
Notes
shall be adequate
1 The number of air changes per hour
Meters and associated equipment should
be located where they are reasonably from kitchens and bathrooms should
take account of any mechanical (c) air admittance valves
accessible and not subject to damage.
ventilation installed. Air admittance valves only allow air to
Domestic meters may be of the following
2 Where rooms contain open flued enter the drainage system. Their use does
type:
appliances, the rate of air change used not avoid the need to adequately ventilate
• built-in – to the outer leaf of the wall
for the design should be increased (see the drainage system.
• surface-mounted – on an external wall
• semi-concealed – sunk into the ground BS EN 12828). Where air admittance valves are used to
adjacent to the outer wall 3 In case of dispute, the design terminate soil pipes, they should comply
• individually purpose-made temperatures adopted should be verified with BS EN 12380 or be assessed in
compartments – in accordance with the by calculations and not by performance accordance with Technical Requirement
recommendations of BS 6400. tests. R3. Valves within the building should be:
(c) safe operation of heating appliances • positioned in areas which are not liable
SPACE HEATING Reference should be made to Sitework to freezing
8.1
clause 8.1 - S7 and Chapter 6.8 ‘Fireplaces, • positioned in areas which have adequate
8.1 – D14 Where space heating is ventilation
provided it shall be in accordance with chimneys and flues’ for guidance on:
• accessible for maintenance.
relevant standards • location of appliances
• provision for supply of combustion air (d) entry of vermin
British Standards relevant to heating and removal of combustion products
systems include BS 5449, BS 5410 and BS Entry of vermin should be prevented.
• separation from combustible materials.
8303. (e) noise transmission
Underfloor heating systems should be SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEMS Precautions should be taken to limit noise
designed in accordance with BSRIA guides transmission from rooms containing WCs,
8.1 – D16 Internal soil and waste for example:
AG12 and 13.
systems shall be designed in accordance • soil pipes passing through dwellings
with relevant statutory requirements should be encased and insulated; the
Designs should be in accordance with insulation should be continued through
relevant Building Regulations and other the thickness of any sound-insulating
statutory requirements. floor

• walls between living rooms and rooms PRECAUTIONS AGAINST BS 6004 Electric cables. PVC
containing WCs should be insulated as insulated, non-armoured
recommended in Chapter 6.3 ‘Internal CORROSION cables for voltages up to
walls’ (Design). In England and Wales, 8.1 - M2 Materials for internal water and including 450/750V for
reference should be made to statutory services shall be selected to ensure electric power, lighting and
requirements. satisfactory service for the life of the internal wiring.
Sound insulation should be detailed in systems, taking suitable precautions
accordance with Sitework clause 8.1 – S8(c). against corrosion (c) gas service
Pipes and fittings for water services Recommendations of the relevant gas
transporters and suppliers
PROVISION OF should be of materials which are safe
and minimise the risk of corrosion. The
INFORMATION recommendations of the water supplier
BS 6400 Specification for installation
of domestic gas meters (2nd
8.1 - D18 Designs and specifications should be followed as to the compatibility family gases)
shall be produced in a clearly of the water supply with materials and
BS 6891 Specification for installation
understandable format and include all fittings.
of low pressure gas pipework
relevant information of up to 35mm (R1) in
In areas where pitting corrosion of copper
For internal services drawings should cylinders occurs, it may be necessary to fit domestic premises (2nd family
show: aluminium protector rods. These should be gases).
• location of sanitary fittings fitted during manufacture in accordance
• drainage runs with the relevant British Standard. (d) space heating
• location and size of cold water storage
The water supplier may require a sacrificial BS 5410 Code of Practice for oil firing
cisterns
anode to be fitted. BS 5449 Code of Practice for central
• location and size of hot water storage
cylinder Further guidance is given in BS EN 806. heating for domestic
• hot and cold water pipe runs premises
BS 8303 Code of Practice for
• heating boiler and heat emitters MATERIALS AND installation of domestic
• central heating pipe runs
• gas supply pipe runs APPLIANCES heating and cooking
• electrical outlets, switches and 8.1 - M3 Materials and components appliances burning solid
consumer unit. shall comply with relevant codes and mineral fuels.
standards and be approved by relevant BS EN Heating systems in buildings
8.1 - D19 All relevant information shall 12828 - design for water-based
authoritative organisations
be distributed to appropriate personnel heating systems.
Ensure that design and specification
information is issued to site supervisors (a) water services (e) space heating appliances
and relevant specialist subcontractors Recommendations of the relevant water Space heating appliances, including all
and/or suppliers. supplier components and controls should be a
BS EN 806 Specifications for type approved by the relevant authority,
installations inside buildings including:
MATERIALS STANDARDS conveying water for human • Solid fuel Solid Fuel Association,
consumption. Heating Equipment
8.1 - M1 All materials shall: Testing and Approval
BS 7206 Specification for unvented
(a) meet the Technical Requirements Scheme
hot water storage units and
(b) take account of the design packages. • Electricity British Electrotechnical
Materials that comply with the design and Approvals Board
BS EN 1057 Copper and copper alloys
the guidance below will be acceptable for - seamless round copper for • Gas Advantica plc
internal services. water and gas in sanitary • Oil OFTEC
and heating applications. • LPG Advantica plc
Materials for internal services should
comply with all relevant standards, BS 1566 Copper indirect cylinders
including those listed below. Where no for domestic purposes. (f) soil and waste systems
standards exist, Technical Requirement R3 BS 3198 Specification for copper hot
BS EN 12056 Gravity drainage systems
8.1
applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the water storage combination

inside buildings
Standards and Technical Requirements’). units for domestic purposes.
References to British Standards and Codes BS 7291 Thermoplastics pipes and
of Practice include those made under the associated fittings for hot
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ and cold water for domestic
EEC) and, in particular, appropriate purposes and heating
European Technical Specifications installations in buildings.
Standardisation (CEN). (b) electrical service
Recommendations of the relevant
electricity suppliers
BS 7671 Requirements for electrical
installations

(d) notching and drilling of joists (e) concealed services
SITEWORK STANDARDS SOLID TIMBER Services concealed in walls or floors should
Solid timber joists and studs should only be located so that significant cracking of
be notched and drilled within the limits the surface does not occur.
(b) take account of the design shown in the table below:
WALLS
(c) follow established good practice and Item Location Maximum size If chases in walls are necessary, their depth
workmanship should not exceed:
Notching top edge
Sitework that follows the design and the joists 0.1 to 0.2 0.15 x depth of • one-sixth the thickness of the single leaf
guidance below will be acceptable for up to 250mm of span joist for horizontal chases
depth • one-third the thickness for vertical
internal services.
Drilling joists centre line chases.
up to 250mm 0.25 to 0.4 0.25 x depth
INSTALLATION: GENERAL depth of span of joist Hollow blocks should not be chased unless
8.1 - S2 All services shall be installed to Drilling studs centre line specifically permitted by the manufacturer.
ensure satisfactory operation 0.25 to 0.4 0.25 x depth
of height of stud FLOORS
Items to be taken into account include: Pipes under floor screeds should, where
(a) location and fitting of pipes and cables maximum diameter maximum depth necessary, be protected by wrapping or
of hole should be of notch should be
Service entries through the substructure 0.25 x joist depth 0.15 x joist depth ducting. Allowance should be made for
should be constructed as described in thermal expansion, especially at changes
notches on top
Chapter 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground in a zone between of direction
0.1 and 0.2 x span
bearing floors’ (Design and Sitework). The cover over a pipe or pipes, or any
Services should: insulating material should be at least
• where necessary to prevent damage to holes on centre line 25mm. Where pipes cross over, the screed
in a zone between
the service, be sleeved or ducted where 0.25 and 0.4 x span thickness should still be not less than
passing through structural elements holes kept apart by
25mm and it may be necessary to form a
(not solidly embedded)
at least three times
hole diameter
duct to achieve adequate cover. In an in-
• not be located in the cavity of an situ suspended concrete floor, the location
external wall, except for electricity and depth should be approved by the
Holes should be kept apart by at least designer.
meter tails three times hole diameter.
• only be buried in screeds where
permitted by relevant codes of practice. Notches and drillings in the same
at least
joist should be at least 100mm apart 25mm cover insulated pipes
Where copper pipes are permitted in floor horizontally. within screed
screeds they should be :

• sleeved or wrapped so that they can
move freely along the length and at
joints and bends
• jointed with capillary joints.
Where plastic pipework is in or behind at least 100mm
wall surfaces, and would otherwise not between notches
and holes
be located by a metal detector or similar (f) fire-stopping
equipment, a metallic tape should be Fire-stopping should be provided
applied to the pipework. Special instructions should be obtained around any services which penetrate
from the designer when notching and fire-resisting floors, walls or partitions.
(b) jointing of pipes and fittings drilling: Where a proprietary system, such as
Proprietary joints should be made strictly • is required in joists deeper than 250mm an intumescent seal, is used it should
in accordance with the manufacturer’s • does not meet the above guidelines, or be installed in accordance with the
instructions. • is needed close to heavy loads, such as manufacturer’s instructions.
those from partitions, cisterns, cylinders
Only fluxes recommended by the pipe
and stair trimming. (g) extract ducts
manufacturer should be used and all traces
Extract ducts should have sealed joints and
should be removed immediately after If structural strength is impaired by
be adequately supported. Ducts passing
8.1
jointing. Fluxes containing lead are not notching or drilling the element should be
through unheated spaces, such as a roof
acceptable. replaced or correctly repaired.
void, to the outside air should be insulated
(c) fixing of pipes I-JOISTS or a condensation drain should be provided
Pipes should be adequately secured In I-joists pre-formed holes are provided in accordance with the design.
with suitable clips or brackets. Fixings in the timber webs for pipes and cables.
Condensation Duct sloping to
should be installed neatly and spaced to Other holes and notches should not be cut trap outside
prevent sagging but not restrict thermal without the approval of the manufacturer.
movement. Pipes should have adequate
falls, where appropriate. METAL WEB JOISTS
Pipe to drain
In metal web joists services should run in condensate to eaves
Sufficient room should be allowed for the gaps between the metal webs. Where
thermal expansion and contraction services are in conduits, the conduits may
to avoid damage and noise from pipe have to be inserted before fixing the joists Insulating a vertical Insulating a horizontal
extract duct extract duct
movement. in position. Reference should also be made
to Chapter 6.10 ‘Light steel framed walls
and floors’ (Sitework).

HOT AND COLD WATER should be provided next to cisterns to

permit routine maintenance. The boarding
SERVICES should be constructed so that ceiling insulated
water
pipes
8.1 - S3 Hot and cold water services insulation is not compressed.
shall be installed to avoid mechanical, Water storage cisterns should be protected
frost and corrosion damage from contamination by a rigid close fitting
Items to be taken into account include: cover (which is not airtight) which excludes
(a) protection of the incoming service light and insects. cold air
Any stop valve within the curtilage and Holes should be formed with a cutter in the
outside the dwelling should be protected positions shown in the design.
by a shaft or a box. (g) provision for expansion
Overflows or warning pipes should be not Vented systems should be provided with an
Service pipes should be at least 750mm less than 19mm diameter and situated expansion pipe.
below the ground surface. Where this is 25mm from the shut off water level in the
not possible, adequate precautions should cistern. The pipe may dip below the water (h) unvented hot water systems
be taken against frost and mechanical level in accordance with water regulations. Where an unvented hot water system with
damage. Alternatively, the pipe should terminate a storage capacity greater than 15 litres
vertically downwards or a tee should be is required by the design, the assembled
Any underground duct should be sealed at
fitted horizontally at the discharge end. system with all its components should
both ends to prevent the entry of fluids,
have independent third party assessment
vermin and insects.
(e) hot water storage or meet the requirements of BS 7206
(b) insulation of the incoming service Hot water cylinders should be with third party assessment such as
If the floor is of suspended construction, fully supported in accordance with Kitemarking. Unvented hot water storage
the underfloor water service should be manufacturers’ recommendations. systems should be installed by competent
insulated as it passes through the ground installers.
Cylinders should be installed vertically,
and the ventilated space. unless designed otherwise, and should be (i) draining down facility
accessible. Hot and cold water installations should be
Cylinders should be insulated as specified capable of being separately drained down.
in the design.
(j) use of materials
ventilated void to
suspended floor Where an immersion heater is fitted, it Pipes and fittings for water services
should be: should be of materials which are safe
• appropriate for the type of water and minimise the risk of corrosion. The
supplied to the dwelling recommendations of the water supplier
at least
750mm • thermostatically controlled as to the compatibility of the water supply
any
• located so that it can be withdrawn for with materials and fittings should be
distance
replacement followed.
• fitted with an on/off switch. In areas where pitting corrosion of copper
cylinders occurs, it may be necessary to fit
(f) thermal insulation of water services
aluminium protector rods. These should be
(c) location of meters All water services in unheated spaces,
fitted during manufacture in accordance
If a water meter is built into the external including cisterns and vent pipes, should
with the relevant British Standard.
wall of the dwelling, it should comply with be insulated against freezing as specified
Clause S6. in the design. Insulation should not be
placed beneath a cold water tank where it ELECTRICAL SERVICE
(d) provision of cold water storage can benefit from heat from below. Raised 8.1 - S4 Electrical services shall be
Cold water storage cisterns should have tanks should be insulated on all sides in an installed to comply with relevant codes
the capacity specified in the design. unheated roof space. and standards and ensure safe and
Adequate support should be provided for lap tank pipes insulated satisfactory operation
the cistern filled with water. and loft
insulation
when above
loft insulation
Water cisterns installed in roof spaces (a) compliance with Standards
should be supported as described in Electrical installations should comply
8.1
Chapter 7.2 ‘Pitched roofs’ (Design and with BS 7671 ‘Requirements for electrical
Sitework). Continuous support should be installations’.
provided, where necessary, to prevent the
cistern bottom being deformed. Suitable Socket outlets which might reasonably
materials for support platforms are: be used to supply power to external
• softwood boarding appliances should be protected by a
• marine plywood rising main insulated residual current device (RCD). To meet with
above ceiling level
• chipboard Type P5 to BS EN 312 this regulation, all power circuits supplying
• Oriented strand board Type OSB3 to sockets should be protected by a residual
BS EN 300 laid with stronger axis (as All bends and junctions should be fully current device to BS EN 61008. Lighting
marked on board) at right angles to the insulated, especially near openings to the circuits and those supplying power to
bearers. outside air, such as the eaves, where there smoke detectors should not be protected
is an increased risk of freezing. If possible, by a residual current device.
All water tanks should be accessible. water pipes should not be located within
Gangway boarding should be provided the loft space where they could be affected (b) manufacturers’ recommendations
from the roof space access opening to by cold ventilation air. Any work involving material or equipment
each cistern. An area of 1m2 of boarding installed as part of the supply or use

of electricity should be carried out and appliances should meet with relevant 13. Drawings should be made available on
in accordance with manufacturers’ standards and codes including those site showing the pipe routes.
recommendations. published by Institution of Gas Engineers
(c) location of electric cables

and Managers (IGEM) or the Council for SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEMS
Registered Gas Installers (CORGI).
Cables without special protection, such 8.1 - S8 Soil and waste systems shall
as an earthed metal conduit, should be Gas pipework to be installed in timber be installed to ensure that effluent is
positioned as follows: frame construction should allow for likely removed without affecting health or
• vertically from the outlet or switch being differential movement. Reference should creating unnecessary noise and smell
served, or be made to Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber
framed walls’. Items to be taken into account include:
• horizontally from the outlet or switch
(a) pipework
being served, or
Soil and waste pipes should be fixed neatly
• within the shaded zone in the diagram METERS and securely to provide correct falls.
below, or 8.1 - S6 Openings in walls for meter
• not less than 50mm from the surface of cabinets shall be structurally adequate (b) sanitary fittings
a wall, or and prevent dampness entering the Fixings to walls and floors should be
• not less than 50mm from the top or dwelling appropriate for the weight of fittings.
bottom of a timber joist or batten in a Excess packing should be avoided under
floor or ceiling. EXTERNAL ELECTRICITY AND GAS sanitary fittings.
METERS
Openings for electricity and gas meter All sanitary fittings, cisterns, basin
in shaded zone
150mm wide cabinets set into external walls should be brackets and the like should be fixed with
provided with dpcs and cavity trays. non-ferrous or stainless steel screws or
fixings.
Except for purpose-designed built-in meter
boxes provided by gas and electricity (c) sound insulation of pipes
companies lintels are required. Insulation should be provided to all soil
pipes passing through dwellings.
vertically or horizontally
to switch or outlet
cavity tray
LOCATION OF CABLES WITHOUT SPECIAL PROTECTION timber
framing Either line the
enclosure or
Where the position of switches or sockets wrap the pipe
with 25mm
The material of
can be determined from the reverse side of the enclosure
unfaced mineral
fibre
should have a mass
the wall or partition, the zone on one side of 15 kg/m2
of the wall or partition also extends to the METER BOX
reverse side.
(d) location of cables in relation to (d) flexible joints/sealants

insulation Junctions with wall tiling around baths
Cables should not be placed under, against and showers on joisted floors should be
or within thermal insulation, unless they made with watertight flexible sealant
have been appropriately sized. For further to accommodate movement. The
guidance, refer to the BRE Report ‘Thermal
SPACE HEATING manufacturer’s instructions should be
insulation: avoiding risks’. 8.1 - S7 Installation of space heating followed.
systems shall comply with relevant
PVC covered cables should not be in (e) accessories
codes and standards and ensure safe
contact with polystyrene insulation. All specified accessories, such as chains, plugs,
and satisfactory operation
etc should be provided and installed. WC lids
(e) location of socket outlets and switches Items to be taken into account include: and seats should be stable when open.
Socket outlets and switches on walls (a) location and fitting of appliances
should be located in accordance with Reference should be made to Chapter 6.8 (f) waste disposal units
8.1
relevant Building Regulations. ‘Fireplaces, chimneys and flues’. Waste disposal units should have adequate
provision for support and should be
GAS SERVICE (b) location of warm air ducts fitted with a tubular trap (not bottle
Warm air ducts for gas-fired air heaters or re-sealing) and be connected to the
8.1 - S5 Where a gas service is installed, should be installed in accordance with drainage system in accordance with the
it shall comply with relevant codes the design, and follow the manufacturer’s manufacturer’s instructions.
and standards to ensure safe and recommendations.
satisfactory operation (g) air admittance valves (AAVs)
(c) thermal insulation of heating services AAVs should only be used where specified
All pipework and ductwork should be in the design. They should not be positioned
(a) compliance with Standards in areas which are liable to freezing.
insulated as specified in the design.
Service pipework up to and including the
emergency control valve and meter should (d) underfloor heating systems AAVs require a free movement of air
be in accordance with the requirements Detailed guidance on underfloor heating around them which can be achieved by
of the gas transporter, gas supplier and systems is given in BSRIA guides AG12 and ventilation grilles, discreet gaps around
primary meter owner. Installation pipework the boxing or ventilation of the boxing into
a ventilated roof void. The ventilation area

should be not less than 2500mm2 unless

otherwise specified by the manufacturer. APPENDIX 8.1-A
TESTING AND Thermal insulation of water pipes to delay freezing

COMMISSIONING
Minimum insulation thickness (mm) needed to delay freezing inside domestic premises
8.1 - S9 All services shall be tested for cold water systems.
Testing should be carried out in Outside pipe Thermal conductivity of material at 0°C W/(m-K)
accordance with all relevant regulations diameter (mm)
0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040
and codes of practice.
15 30 45 70 91
Pipes to be located under screeds should
be air or water tested both before and 22-28 12 15 19 24
after the screed is laid. Notes:
The conditions assumed for the table are:
Leaks or other defects should be made • air temperature -6°C
good prior to the application of finishes. • water temperature +7°C
• ice formation 50%
Before completion and handover of the
building services should be commissioned
in accordance with relevant regulations Examples of insulating materials
and codes of practice. Thermal Material
conductivity
W/(m-K)
Less than 0.020 Rigid phenolic foam insulation
thickness
0.020 to 0.025 Polyosocyanurate form and rigid
polyurethane foam
0.025 to 0.030 PVC foam
0.030 to 0.035 Expanded polystyrene, extruded
polystyrene, cross-linked polyethlene See table above for minimum
thickness of insulation
foam, expanded nitrile rubber and
improved polyethylene foam
0.035 to 0.040 Standard polyethylene foam, expanded
synthetic rubber and cellular glass
INDEX
A G R
Accessories 7 Gas services 3, 4, 7 Room temperatures 3
Air admittance valves 3, 7 Ground hazards 1 S
Appliances 2, 4, 7 H Sanitary fittings 7
C Hot water services 1,6 Services, protection 6
Cables, location 5, 7 Hot water storage 1, 6 Showers, safety 2
Cold water services 1, 6 I Socket outlets 2, 7
Cold water storage 1, 6 Insulation, thermal 6, 7, 8 Soil and waste systems 3, 4, 7
Concealed services 5 J Soil system ventilation 3
Cooking 2 Jointing 5 Sound insulation of pipes 7
Corrosion 4 Joints and sealant 7 Space heating 3, 4, 7
D L Switches, location 7
Draining down 6 T
8.1
Lighting 2
Drilling timber 5 M Television outlet 3
Drinking water 1 Materials, use of 6 Testing 8
E Meters 6, 7 U
Effluent, disposal 3 N Underfloor heating 7
Electrical services 2, 4, 6 Noise transmission 3 Unvented hot water storage 2, 6
Expansion 6 systems
Notching timber 5
Extract ducts 5 V
O
Extract fans 2 Vermin 3
Overflow pipes 1
F W
P
Fire-stopping 5 Warm air ducts 7
Pipes, fixing 5
Flow rates 2 Warning pipes 1
Pipes, location 5
Freezing 1, 8 Waste disposal units 7
Water services, supply 1, 4

Chapter 8.2
Wall and ceiling finishes
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for internal wall
and ceiling finishes.
Plastering D3 1
Plasterboard and dry lining D4 1
Ceramic wall tiling D5 2
MATERIALS
Plastering M2 2
Plasterboard and dry lining M3 2
Ceramic wall tiling M4 2
SITEWORK
Plastering S2 3
Plasterboard and dry lining S3 3
Ceramic wall tiling S4 4
APPENDIX 8.2-A
Dry lining to receive ceramic wall tiling 5
INDEX 5
8.2

Wall and ceiling finishes 8.2
(c) plaster mix Notes
DESIGN STANDARDS Plaster mixes should be specified as 1 Cut edges should only be used at
appropriate for the: perimeters. In all other situations cut
8.2 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical • strength and surface characteristics of edges should finish over a support or
Requirements the background nogging.
Design that follows the guidance below will • intended quality of the plaster surface 2 Additional intermediate noggings may
be acceptable for wall and ceiling finishes. • application of further finishes.
be required where fire resistance is
Undercoats, finishing coats and mix necessary.
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS proportions should be as recommended by
Plasterboard to receive ceramic wall tiling
the plaster manufacturer for the particular
8.2 - D2 Design shall comply with all should be supported in accordance with
conditions of use. Portland cement and
relevant statutory requirements  the details given in Appendix 8.2-A.
gypsum plaster should not be used in the
Designs should be in accordance with same mix. Where double layers of plasterboard
relevant Building Regulations and other are used, for example for improved
statutory requirements. (d) plaster thickness
sound insulation, board joints should be
DECORATIVE FINISH
staggered from one layer to the other and
The number of plaster coats should be
PLASTERING sufficient to achieve a reasonably plane extra noggings provided to support the
8.2 - D3 Design shall ensure a suitable finish in accordance with the following: second layer.
substrate for the intended decorative (b) surface facing
finish Surface to Min no Thickness
be plastered of coats of plaster Plasterboard should be fixed face side out
Items to be taken into account include: Walls for both plastering and direct decoration
(a) background finishes.
Metal lathing 3 13mm (nominal
Backgrounds should be given appropriate from lathing) Tapered edge boards should be used for
treatment before plastering in accordance Brickwork 2 up to 13mm surfaces to be decorated directly on the
with BS 5492 Code of Practice for internal Blockwork 2 up to 13mm board surface.
plastering.
Plasterboard 1 sufficient to provide
or concrete a crack-free surface (c) fire resistance
HIGH DENSITY CLAY OR CONCRETE
Ceilings Where plasterboard contributes to fire
BRICKS AND BLOCKS AND DENSE
resistance, its thickness and treatment
CONCRETE (including floor soffits) Concrete 2 10mm (maximum)
should be as specified in the appropriate
• suitable bonding treatment Plasterboard 1 skimcoat
statutory regulations.
• hacking
• spatterdash FIRE RESISTANCE AND SOUND (d) vapour control layers
• stipple. INSULATION Where required to control interstitial
Where plaster is intended to contribute condensation, vapour control layers
MIXED BACKGROUNDS, eg CONCRETE to fire resistance or sound insulation, should be incorporated. In timber frame
WITH BRICKS/BLOCKS minimum requirements for plaster walls, vapour control layers should be
• may require expanded metal, to provide thickness are specified in the appropriate in accordance with recommendations
key for plastering and to reduce the statutory regulations. detailed in Chapter 6.2 ‘External timber
effects of differential movement.
(e) plastic compound finish framed walls’ (Design).
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE BLOCKS Plastic compound finishes containing In roof constructions, vapour control layers
• plaster should not be stronger than asbestos should not be specified. should be in accordance with the following
recommended by the blockwork
chapters:
manufacturer. PLASTERBOARD AND DRY 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’ (Design)
AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE LINING 7.2 ‘Pitched roofs’ (Design).
BLOCKS 8.2 - D4 Dry lining shall be designed to
• plastering should be carried out in be suitable for the intended decorative (e) fixings
accordance with manufacturers’ finish PLASTERBOARD
recommendations, with special care Plasterboard may be fixed to:
Dry lining work should be in accordance
taken regarding the moisture condition • timber, using plasterboard nails or dry
with BS 8212.
8.2
of the blocks. wall screws

Items to be taken into account include: • metal, using dry wall screws.
NORMAL CLAY BRICKWORK,
(a) support of plasterboard
CONCRETE BLOCK DRY LINING
Supports for plasterboard should be
• may require raked joints or the use of designed so that the following span limits Dry lining may be fixed by:
keyed bricks. are not exceeded: • adhesive dabs
• nailing or screwing to timber battens
PLASTERBOARD Board Timber Intermediate Perimeter
thickness support noggings noggings • screwing to metal channels
• reference should be made to BS 5492
(mm) centres required required • proprietary fixing systems.
for plastering on plasterboard.
(mm)
Where insulated dry lining is fixed with
(b) services 9.5 400 No Yes
adhesive dabs, nailable plugs should
Services to be concealed by plaster 450 Yes Yes
also be specified in accordance with
should be tested, where possible, before 12.5 400 No Yes
plastering is commenced (reference should 450 No Yes
be made to Chapter 8.1 ‘Internal services’ 600 Yes Yes
(Sitework)).
15 600 No No

(f) gap sealing Tiles likely to be frequently wetted should PLASTERING

Gap sealing should be specified, where be fixed using solid bed fixing method with
necessary, to prevent draughts (see a water resistant adhesive on a moisture- 8.2 - M2 Materials for plastering
Sitework clause 8.2 - S3(f) for details). resistant background. shall be adequate for the location and
intended use
(g) coving (d) joint filling
Location, type, size and method of fixing Grouting should be:
should be specified. • cement-based epoxy resin or a (a) plasters
proprietary product Relevant standards include:
CERAMIC WALL TILING • waterproof in and around shower BS EN 13279 Gypsum binders and
enclosures where tiling can be saturated. gypsum plasters
8.2 - D5 Ceramic wall tiling shall be A sealing method should be specified BS 5270 Part 1 Specification for
designed and specified to achieve a for the joint between sanitary fittings polyvinyl acetate (PVAC)
surface of acceptable appearance and and adjacent tiling - this is particularly emulsion bonding agents
adequate durability important where movement can take place, for indoor use with gypsum
Items to be taken into account include: eg where timber floors are used. building plasters.
(a) background
(b) materials for render
EVENNESS PROVISION OF Relevant standards include:
Background surfaces for tiling should be INFORMATION BS EN 197 Specification for Portland
sufficiently even to achieve a plane tiled
surface. 8.2 - D6 Designs and specifications cements
shall be produced in a clearly BS EN 13139 Aggregates for mortar.
STRENGTH understandable format and include all
Background surfaces should be strong relevant information (c) metal laths and beads
enough to support tiling of the specified Relevant standards include:
Design information should include:
thickness. BS 405 Specification for uncoated
• schedule of finishes
BOND • plaster thickness, mix and special expanded metal carbon steel
The background should provide adequate requirements sheets for general purposes
mechanical key. Very smooth and dense • location of vapour checks behind dry lining BS EN 13658 Metal lath and beads.
surfaces may require bonding agents for • extent and detail of tiled surfaces Parts 1 and 2 Definitions, requirements
increased adhesion. • location of services adjacent to tiled and test methods.
surfaces.
UNIFORMITY
Surfaces should be sufficiently uniform to 8.2 - D7 All relevant information shall PLASTERBOARD AND DRY
avoid differential movement. Metal lathing be distributed to appropriate personnel LINING
or wire netting may be necessary to cover
Ensure that design and specification 8.2 - M3 Materials for plasterboard
junctions.
information is issued to site supervisors and dry lining shall be adequate for the
SUCTION and relevant specialist subcontractors location and intended use
Background surfaces should have and/or suppliers.
Relevant standards include:
adequate porosity for the specified method
of fixing the tiles. Where cement mortar is BS 1230 Gypsum plasterboard
to be used as an adhesive, a background
containing soluble salts may require
MATERIALS STANDARDS Recommendations regarding materials for
use in dry lining work are included in:
special precautions, such as the use of 8.2 - M1 All materials shall:
mortar with sulfate-resisting cement. BS 8212 Code of Practice for dry lining
(a) meet the Technical Requirements and partitioning using gypsum
(b) tile quality (b) take account of the design plasterboard.
Tiles should be appropriate for their Materials that comply with the design and
location and intended use. Specification the guidance below will be acceptable for CERAMIC WALL TILING
items may include: wall and ceiling finishes.
• surface finish 8.2 - M4 Materials for ceramic tiling
• size and thickness Materials for wall and ceiling finishes shall be adequate for the location and
should comply with all relevant standards, intended use
8.2
• colour
• edge shape including those listed below. Where no
• fittings (coves, skirtings, etc) standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the BS EN 14411 Ceramic tiles. Definitions,
• accessories (soap tray, paper holder,
Standards and Technical Requirements’). classification, characteristics
hooks, etc).
and marking.
The weight of tiles on lightweight plasters References to British Standards and BS EN 12004 Adhesives for tiles.
should not exceed 20kg/m2 (e.g. not be Codes of Practice include those made Definitions and
thicker than 8mm). under the Construction Products Directive specifications.
(89/106/EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
(c) fixing BS EN 13888 Grouts for tiles. Definitions
Tiles should be fixed as appropriate for the and specifications.
background, using: Standardisation (CEN).
• cement mortar, or
• proprietary adhesive.

(d) plaster thickness Reveals, soffits to openings, external
SITEWORK STANDARDS DECORATIVE FINISH angles and the like, should be reasonably
Plaster should be applied to a thickness, plumb and level, and ceiling lines and
8.2 - S1 All sitework shall: corners should be regular.
excluding any dubbing out, sufficient to
achieve the required quality of finish, in Particular care should be taken in areas
accordance with the following: around wall light points, wall light switches
workmanship and socket outlets.
Surface to be Min no Thickness
Sitework that complies with the design and plastered of coats of plaster (g) plastic compound finish
the guidance below will be acceptable for Walls Plastic compound finishes should be
wall and ceiling finishes. Metal lathing 3 13mm (nominal applied by suitably trained operatives.
from lathing)
PLASTERING Brickwork 2 up to 13mm PLASTERBOARD AND DRY
8.2 - S2 Plastering shall be suitable for Blockwork 2 up to 13mm LINING
the intended decorative finish Plasterboard 1 sufficient to provide
or concrete a crack-free surface 8.2 - S3 Plasterboard and dry lining
Items to be taken into account include: shall be suitable for the intended
Ceilings
(a) background decorative finish
Concrete 2 10mm (maximum)
EVENNESS Items to be taken into account include:
Plasterboard 1 skimcoat
Background to be plastered should be (a) background
sufficiently even to provide a reasonably EVENNESS AND STRENGTH
plane plaster finish and to avoid the (e) application
Plasterboard thickness should be correct
necessity for excessive dubbing out before SCHEDULING OF WORK
for the support spacing.
the finish is applied. Plastering should not be carried out in
weather which could adversely affect the Maximum limits are as follows:
BOND finished result. Any plaster damaged by
The background should provide a frost should be removed and replaced Board Timber Intermediate Perimeter
satisfactory key. Backgrounds may be (reference should be made to Chapter 1.4 thickness support noggings noggings
improved by: ‘Cold weather working’). (mm) centres required required
(mm)
• raking out masonry joints
• hacking and scratching MIXING 9.5 400 No Yes
• applying a spatterdash coat or stipple Materials should be mixed thoroughly, but 450 Yes Yes
prolonged mixing should be avoided. Avoid
coat 12.5 400 No Yes
mixing more plaster than can be applied
• applying a bonding agent.
before it starts to set. Plaster should not
450 No Yes
SUCTION be re-tempered.
Suction of the background should be 600 Yes Yes
PROTECTION
checked for adequacy and should be
The completed work of other trades, 15 600 No No
reasonably even. Where different materials
especially timber, chipboard and glazing,
in the background could cause cracks, eg
should be protected from damp and Notes
in floors of precast beams and infill blocks,
damage during plastering. • Cut edges should only be used at
metal lathing should be used or other
perimeters. In all other situations cut
precautions taken. PREPARATION edges should finish over a support or
Before plastering is started, all surfaces nogging.
EDGE PROTECTION should be dry, clean, and free from • Additional intermediate noggings may
Metal beads should be fixed to provide laitance, grease, loose material or any be required where fire resistance is
edge protection, where necessary, using substance likely to prove harmful to the necessary.
zinc-plated fasteners as recommended by bond or the intended finished appearance
the manufacturer. of the plaster. When double layers of plasterboard for
ceilings are specified, the joints of one
(b) services Joints between boarded or slab surfaces layer should not coincide with those of the
All services to be concealed behind plaster should be scrimmed, paper taped or other. The first layer should be fully fixed
should be completed and protected against otherwise treated as recommended by the and have all cut edges supported. The
manufacturer.
8.2
any adverse effects of chemical action or second layer should be supported on all
thermal movement. Where there appears Dubbing out should be done well in edges with noggings provided to suit.
to be a risk of insufficient plaster cover to advance of the application of the first coat. Lines of noggings
at board edges of
avoid surface cracking, fix metal lathing or second layer
wire netting. PLASTERING
The background surface should be fully
(c) plaster mix set for each coat of plaster. The surface
Plaster should be mixed in the specified should not be overworked and adequate 2700mm x 1200mm
wallboard
proportions or as recommended by the time should be left between coats to allow second layer
plaster manufacturer for the particular strength and suction to develop. first layer
location and use. cut board
(f) quality of finish
Undercoats and finishing coats should be All plastered surfaces should be
compatible. Portland cement and gypsum reasonably plane and true and with
plaster should not be used in the same mix. a quality of finish appropriate for the
location and intended use.
Perimeter noggings
Ceiling layout with two levels of boards

SERVICES centres vertically, and as shown in the can be achieved. Under a 2m straight-
There should be adequate support for: following table: edge, gaps should not be greater than:
• light points • 3mm - for thin bed adhesives
• socket outlets Thickness of Width of wall Dabs per • 6mm - for thick bed adhesives.
• other service installations. wall board [mm] board [mm] board [rows]
9.5 900 3 STRENGTH
Openings in plasterboard for services and The surface should be strong enough to
9.5 1200 4
electrical outlets should be accurately accept the specified adhesive and support
cut and any gaps in vapour control layers 12.5 1200 3 the tiling. Separate coats should be well
taped and sealed, as detailed in Chapter bonded.
Dabs should be applied to one board at a
6.2 ‘External timber framed walls’.
time. BOND
WATER VAPOUR RESISTANCE The background should provide a
MECHANICAL FIXINGS FOR THERMAL
Install vapour control layers where satisfactory key. Backgrounds may be
specified. Edges should be lapped over WALLBOARDS improved by:
supports and be taped or sealed. At least 2 nailable plugs should be • raking out masonry joints
used per board in accordance with the • hacking and scratching
(b) surface finish manufacturer’s recommendations. • applying a bonding agent.
Plasterboard should be fixed face side out
for both plastering and direct decoration PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS UNIFORMITY
finishes. Proprietary dry lining systems should Metal lathing or wire netting should be
be fixed in accordance with the fixed across junctions where differential
Tapered edge boards should be used for manufacturer’s recommendations. movement might occur.
surfaces to be decorated directly on the
board surface. (e) jointing SUCTION
Where surfaces are to receive skim Suction of the background should be
(c) scheduling of work coat plaster, joints should be scrimmed adequate and reasonably consistent.
Plasterboard work should: or paper taped in accordance with the Where different materials could cause
• not be started until the building is manufacturer’s recommendations. Ceiling cracks, eg across junctions, appropriate
substantially weatherproof boards should be staggered to minimise precautions should be taken, eg by fixing
• be programmed so that finishes are any risk of cracking. metal lathing.
applied as soon as possible after
completion. For unskimmed surfaces, joints should be
filled, taped or finished as recommended WETTING
by the manufacturer. Where repeated or persistent wetting may
(d) fixing occur, gypsum plasters should not be used.
Fixing methods should be as follows: Plasterboard should be moisture resistant
• nails : hot dip galvanised, zinc (f) gap sealing
A continuous ribbon of adhesive should be grade.
electroplated or sheradised steel
• screws : zinc electroplated or black applied to the perimeter of external walls,
HEATING
phosphate openings and services in drylined walls to
Gypsum plasters should not be used where
(or to the board manufacturer’s prevent air infiltration.
repeated or persistent heating occurs, eg
recommendations). In addition: on flues or near heat sources.
Fixings should be as follows: • dry linings should be completely
taped and filled at board joints and at (b) adhesives
abutments to ceilings and internal walls Tiles should be fixed as specified, using
Board Nail Screw Screw
• dry wall lining at door and window cement mortar or proprietary adhesive
thickness length length length
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) openings should be securely fixed and in accordance with manufacturers’
into timber into steel filled. This also applies at external and instructions. Adhesives for tiles subject to
internal corners frequent wetting should be water resistant.
9.5 30 32 22
• gaps around service points, electric
12.5 40 36 22 (c) application
sockets, light switches, etc should be
15 40 36 25 filled with jointing compound. PREPARATION
Before tiling is started, surfaces should be
Nails or screws should be not less than: (g) appearance dry, clean, and free from laitance, grease,
• 10mm from paper bound edges Unless designed otherwise, intersections loose material or any substance likely to
• 13mm from cut ends of boards should be formed at right angles and be prove harmful to the bond or the intended
• 6mm from edges of timber members. flush. Junctions at floors and ceilings finished appearance of the tiling.
8.2
should be neat and regular.

Nail and screw heads should not project FIXING
above the board surface. Dry lining to be finished fair should be of a In wet areas, tiles should be solidly bedded
quality recommended by the manufacturer. in adhesive.
Fixing centres should be as follows:
• nailing to: walls and ceilings - Damaged boards should not be used.
Tiles should be fixed in straight and even
approximately 150mm courses to form a plane surface. Work
centres (8 per linear metre) CERAMIC WALL TILING generally should be of a straight and
• screwing to: walls - approximately regular appearance. Take particular care
8.2 - S4 Ceramic wall tiling shall
300mm centres where lighting points are close to the
(8 per 2 linear metres) provide a surface adequate for its
tiled surface, such as above washbasins in
ceilings - approximately intended use
bathrooms.
230mm centres (5 per Items to be taken into account include:
linear metre). (a) background JOINTING
Joints should be even and cutting neatly
DRY LINING ON ADHESIVE DABS EVENNESS carried out. Make sure that the spacing is
Boards should be fixed to a pattern of The background to be tiled should be sufficient to allow expansion.
adhesive dabs, at approximately 300mm reasonably true so that a plane tile surface

GROUTING
Grouting should be the specified mix Appendix 8.2-A
and colour. The specified sealing method
should be used at junctions between tiling Dry lining to receive ceramic wall tiling
and sanitary fittings.
Description Board Support Additional support Max. height Comments
Proprietary water resisting grouting should thickness centres mm
mm mm
be used in accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations. Timber frame 12.5, 15 400 to 450 No 3600
600 Timber noggings 600 mm 3600

EDGING centres vertically
There should be no cut or unfinished tiles Timber battens 12.5, 15 400 Battens at head, base and 3600
at exposed edges or external corners. intermediate positions not
exceeding 1200 mm centres
(d) movement Direct bond 9.5 450 Horizontal dabs at mid-storey 3600 Complete at least
Properly designed movement joints should dabs of height 10 days before
be: adhesive in tiling
rows
• built into tiling at centres not exceeding
4.5m both vertically and horizontally Direct bond 12.5, 15 600 Horizontal dabs at mid-storey 3600 Complete at least
(Thermal dabs of height 10 days before
• at all vertical corners in large tiled areas laminates) adhesive in tiling
• located at junctions with other surfaces rows
or backgrounds. Metal furring 12.5, 15 400 Metal furring stops at head, 3600 Complete at least
metal furring base and intermediate positions 10 days before
Tiles without spacer lugs should have a sections not exceeding 1200 mm centres tiling
minimum joint width of 1-2mm to relieve Resin base All Blob of 9 nailable plugs per board
local stress. adhesive sealant
(Thermal
laminates)
Independent
steel stud lining
48 mm 2 x 12.5 400 Mid-point support 3000
60 mm 2 x 12.5 Mid-point support 3600

48 mm metal 15 400 2700
stud partitions
2 x 12.5 400 3600
each side 3600
2 x 15 each
side
70 mm metal 15 400 3600

stud partitions
2 x 12.5 400 3600
each side 3600
2 x 15 each
side
146 mm metal 2 x 15 each 600 Additional stud at 300 mm up 3600

stud partitions side to tile height
Prefabricated 57 Normal 2700
gypsum 63 specification
wallboard
panel partition
Laminated 50 Normal 2600 Complete at least
partition 65 specification 2800 10 days before
tiling
INDEX
8.2
A F Plasters 2
Adhesive dabs 4 Fire resistance 1 Plastic compound finishes 2
Adhesives, ceramic tiling 4 Fixings 1, 2, 4 Proprietary systems 4
B G R
Background, ceramic tiling 2, 4 Gaps, sealing 2, 4 Render 2
Background, dry lining 3 M S
Background, plastering 1, 3 Metal laths and beads 2 Services 1, 3, 4
C Movement 5 Sound insulation 1
Ceilings 3 N T
Ceramic tiling 2, 5 Noggings 3 Tile quality 2
D P V
Decorative finish 1 Plaster mix 3 Vapour control layer 4
Dry lining 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Plasterboard 1 Vapour resistance 4
Plastering 1, 3

Chapter 8.3
Floor finishes
8.3 Floor finishes
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for floor finishes,
including integral insulation, screeds, ceramic, concrete
and similar tiles, flexible sheet and tiles, wood block and
Screeding D3 1
asphalt.
Ceramic, concrete, terrazzo and similar tile D4 1
finishes
Asphalt finishes D5 1
Flexible sheet and tile finishes D6 1
Wood finishes D7 2
Staircase finishes D8 2
Provision of information D9-D10 2-3
MATERIALS
Screeding materials M2 3
Ceramic, concrete, terrazzo and similar tile M3 3
finishes
Asphalt finishes M4 3
Flexible sheet and tile finishes M5 3
Wood finishes M6 3
Sound insulation M7 3
Structural floor decking M9 4
SITEWORK
Screeding S2 4
Ceramic, concrete, terrazzo and similar tile S3 5
finishes
Asphalt finishes S4 5
Flexible sheet and tile finishes S5 5
Wood finishes S6 5
Staircase finishes S7 6
INDEX 6
8.3

Floor finishes 8.3
DESIGN STANDARD
may be acceptable as part of the required CERAMIC, CONCRETE,
thickness.
TERRAZZO AND SIMILAR
8.3 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical Where service pipes are bedded in the
Requirements screed, the screed should be deep enough TILE FINISHES
to provide at least 25mm of cover over 8.3 - D4 Tile floorings shall provide a
pipes and insulation. suitable surface for the intended use
be acceptable for floor finishes.
(e) bay size Items to be taken into account include:
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS Screeds over underfloor heating should (a) background
be sub-divided into bays not exceeding EVENNESS
40m2 in area. Otherwise, room size laying The substrate should provide a plane surface.
is preferable. Expansion joints in screeds Falls should be specified where required.
Designs should be in accordance with should be consistent with joints in the slab.
relevant Building Regulations and other MOISTURE PROTECTION
statutory requirements. (f) curing Where floor tiling is laid above ground
A curing period should be allowed until the bearing floor slabs, a dpm should be
screed achieves sufficient strength to resist
SCREEDING shrinkage stresses and other damage.
incorporated below or above the floor slab.
8.3 - D3 Floor screeds shall be suitable (b) application

for their intended use (g) surface quality Floor tiling should be in accordance with
SCREEDS UNDER FINISHES the recommendations of BS 5385 : Part 3.
Screeds intended to be covered with floor Care should be taken to ensure that:
(a) background finishes should provide an even surface as • the concrete base or screed is true
BOND appropriate. and level
Background surfaces for bonded screeds • sufficient drying time has been allowed,
should provide an adequate mechanical Recommendations for screeds suitable for
ie at least 6 weeks for concrete base,
key. If necessary, cement grouting or a various floor finishes are given in the British
3 weeks for screed.
bonding agent should be specified to Standards referred to in Materials clause
provide adequate adhesion. 8.3 - M2. BS 8204 gives recommendations TILES ON WOOD-BASED SUBSTRATE
for screeds to receive in-situ floorings. Floor tiles on wood-based substrates
MOISTURE PROTECTION should be bedded in an adhesive
The floor design should ensure that POWER FLOATED FINISH
manufactured specifically for the
moisture from the ground does not enter Concrete floor slabs may be suitably
substrate.
the dwelling. For details, reference should finished to serve directly as a wearing
be made to Chapters 5.1 ‘Substructure and surface without the need for an
ground bearing floors’ (Design) and 5.2 additional topping, in accordance with ASPHALT FINISHES
‘Suspended ground floors’ (Design). recommendations of BS 8204. 8.3 - D5 Asphalt finishes shall be
USE OF SEALERS OR HARDENERS suitable for their intended use
(b) services
Provision should be made for: If required, surface sealers or hardeners Asphalt floor finishes should be in
should only be used in accordance with accordance with BS 6925 (limestone
• thermal movement of water pipes
manufacturers’ instructions. aggregate). Suitable thicknesses and
• protection against chemical attack, for
grades include:
example by using purpose-made pipe (h) moisture content
sleeves or ducts. The moisture content of screeds to receive Use Thickness (mm) Grade
other finishes, should be:
(c) screed mix Floor finish 15 to 20 I or II
• generally in accordance with relevant
Cement and sand screeds should normally Underlay for other 15 to 20 I or II
be a mix between 1 : 3 and 1 : 4½. Screeds British Standards
finishes (in one
more than 40mm thick may be of concrete. • in accordance with floor finish
coat)
manufacturers’ recommendations,
Proprietary additives should have been where available.
assessed in accordance with Technical Suspended floor system manufacturers
Requirement R3. (i) thermal insulation material below should be consulted where mastic asphalt
screeds floor finishes are to be used with such
(d) screed thickness Insulation below screeds should provide systems.
Cement and sand screeds should be not adequate compressive strength to support
8.3
less than the following thickness: wet construction screeds and floor loads. FLEXIBLE SHEET AND TILE
Method of laying Minimum thickness Suitable materials are described in clause FINISHES
at any point (mm) M8. Insulants should be compatible with 8.3 - D6 Flexible sheet and tile flooring
Laid monolithically with base 12 any dpm in contact with the insulation.
shall provide a suitable surface for the
Laid on and bonded to a set and 20 intended use
hardened base (j) sound insulation material below
screeds Items to be taken into account include:
Laid on a separating membrane (eg 50
1000g polyethylene) Screeds above compressible material in (a) background
sound insulating floating floors should BS 8203 gives recommendations on the
Laid on resilient slabs or quilts (screed 65
reinforced with galvanized wire mesh) be laid on an isolating membrane (for use of flexible sheet and tile floorings.
example building paper) and reinforced
Above services, reinforcement or 25
insulation to services with galvanized wire mesh. EVENNESS
Substrates should be sufficiently level to
Suitable insulation materials are described achieve an acceptable floor surface. If
For concrete ground bearing floors, up in clause M7.
to 20mm thickness of monolithic screed necessary, a levelling underlay should be
provided.

8.3 Floor finishes
Acceptable types of underlay for boarded Screeds or concrete surfaces to receive (d) thermal insulation
surfaces include the following: wood finishes: Methods of providing insulation include the
• should be treated with a suitable primer following:
Type of underlay Minimum thickness • insulation above in-situ concrete slab
(mm) where recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer. (dpm required)
Hardboard 3.2
flooring
Plywood 4.0 INDIRECTLY APPLIED FINISHES
insulation
(softwood boarding, wood-based panel dpm
Chipboard 9.0
products)
Oriented strand board 6.0 The following precautions should be taken: ground bearing
slab
• vapour control layers may need to be
MOISTURE PROTECTION incorporated above the insulation
Where flexible sheet or tile flooring is laid • insulation above dry, precast system
• battens should be preservative treated
on ground bearing concrete floors, a dpm (dpm NOT required).
in accordance with recommendations
should be incorporated to prevent rising
given in Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber vapour control flooring
moisture adversely affecting floor finishes. layer
preservation (natural solid timber)’ (under wood insulation
based floors)
Screeds or concrete surfaces should • provision should be made for local dry, precast
system
be sufficiently dry to avoid any adverse support for heavy items such as storage
effects on the flooring. heaters, boilers, etc ventilated void
• battens should be at appropriate

Where there is a risk of trapping moisture Proprietary insulated flooring should be
centres, generally in accordance with
from spillage or interstitial condensation, assessed in accordance with Technical
permeable finishes should be used. the following:
Requirement R3. Manufacturers’
Thickness of finish Maximum batten centres
recommendations regarding provision
(b) laying and fixing of vapour control layers and damp-proof
(mm) (mm)
Flexible tiles and sheets should be laid, membranes should be followed.
using the adhesive and the method Chipboard (type P5)
recommended by the manufacturer. Further information can be found in
18/19 450 BS 5250 and the BRE Report ‘Thermal
Special precautions, such as welded seams, 22 600 insulation: avoiding risks’.
may need to be specified to prevent
curling, bubbling and lifting. Plywood STAIRCASE FINISHES
12 450 8.3 - D8 Staircase finishes shall allow
(c) accessories
Skirtings should be specified, where 16 600 safe use of the staircase
appropriate. Oriented strand board (type OSB3) Items to be taken into account include:
15 450
(a) rise and going
WOOD FINISHES Staircase pitch and tread dimensions
18-19 600 are specified in Chapter 6.6 ‘Staircases’
8.3 - D7 Wood and wood-based flooring
(Design). It is important that rise and going
shall be designed to provide a suitable
• fixings to battens should prevent remain consistent and are not affected by
wearing surface for the intended use the staircase finish, particularly at the top
excessive movement and should be
Items to be taken into account include: in accordance with manufacturers’ and bottom of the flight.
(a) background recommendations.
BS 8201 gives recommendations on the (b) slip resistance
(b) services Guidance on staircase finishes of flexible
use of wood and wood-based floorings for
sheet or tiles is included in BS 8203.
directly and indirectly applied finishes. Wherever possible, services beneath the
floor finish should be tested before floor Communal staircases, such as those
BS 5250 gives recommendations on the
laying is commenced. providing means of escape in fire, should
use of vapour control layers with wood and
be provided with a non-slip surface or
wood-based floorings. (c) sound insulation nosing.
Screeds or concrete to receive wood Floating floor finishes should be designed to:
flooring should be sufficiently dry to avoid • isolate the floor finish from the PROVISION OF
supporting floor and all walls
any adverse effects. Tests for moisture INFORMATION
8.3
content are given in BS 8201. • avoid excessive movement or squeaking

• avoid the use of fixings which penetrate 8.3 - D9 Designs and specifications
A damp-proof membrane should be the insulation layer. shall be produced in a clearly
incorporated as appropriate. understandable format and include all
Floors should be designed so that there necessary information
DIRECTLY APPLIED FINISHES are no airpaths, especially at the perimeter.
(wood blocks, parquet, wood mosaic, etc) This limits the transfer of airborne sound Drawings and specifications should cover
Floor finishes should be applied with the at least:
and avoids flanking transmission.
correct adhesives, for example: • schedule of finishes
• bitumen rubber emulsion (in accordance SOFT FLOOR COVERING • screed thickness and mix
with BS 8201) Where a floor relies on a soft floor • details of sound insulating floors
• proprietary adhesives (assessed in covering to provide the minimum standard • extent and detail of tiled surfaces
accordance with Technical Requirement of sound insulation, the covering should be • location of services adjacent to tiled
R3) in accordance with manufacturers’ fixed permanently in position. surfaces
instructions. • details of staircase finishes.

Floor finishes 8.3
8.3 - D10 All relevant information shall BS EN 14411 Ceramic tiles. Definitions, BS 8201 Code of Practice for flooring
be distributed to appropriate personnel classification, characteristics of timber, timber products and
Ensure that design and specification and marking. wood-based panel products.
and relevant specialist sub-contractors DIRECTLY APPLIED FINISHES
and/or suppliers. (b) terrazzo tiles
Relevant standards include: (wood blocks, parquet, wood mosaic, etc)
BS EN 13748: Terrazzo tiles Relevant standards include:
Parts 1 and 2 BS 1187 Specification for wood blocks
MATERIALS STANDARDS for floors
BS 8204 Screeds, bases and in
situ floorings. Concrete BS 4050 Specification for mosaic
8.3 - M1 All materials shall: bases and cement sand parquet panels.
(a) meet the Technical Requirements levelling screeds to receive
(b) take account of the design floorings. INDIRECTLY APPLIED FINISHES
Materials that comply with the design and (softwood and hardwood boarding, wood-
floor finishes.
ASPHALT FINISHES based panel products, etc)
8.3 - M4 Materials for asphalt flooring BS 1202 Specification for nails
Materials for floor finishes shall comply
shall be adequate for the location and
with all relevant standards, including those BS 1210 Specification for wood screws
listed below. Where no standard exists, intended use
BS 1297 Specification for tongued and
Technical Requirement R3 applies (see Relevant standards include: grooved softwood flooring
Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the Standards BS 6925 Specification for mastic
and Technical Requirements’). BS EN 312 Specification for wood
asphalt for building and
Part 2: chipboard Particleboard
References to British Standards and Codes civil engineering (limestone
aggregate). BS EN 300 Specification for oriented
of Practice include those made under the Part 3: strand Particleboard board
Construction Products Directive (89/106/ (OSB)
European Technical Specifications FLEXIBLE SHEET AND TILE BS EN 636 Plywood.
approved by a European Committee for FINISHES
8.3 - M5 Materials for flexible sheet and SOUND INSULATION
tile flooring shall be adequate for the
SCREEDING MATERIALS location and intended use
8.3 - M7 Sound insulation materials
shall provide adequate insulation
8.3 - M2 Materials selected for
Relevant standards include: standards in their intended location
screeding shall be adequate for the
BS EN 649 Resilient floor coverings.
location and intended use Information concerning materials
Homogenous and
and constructions that will generally
Relevant standards include: heterogenous polyvinyl
be acceptable is given in statutory
BS 8204 In-situ floorings chloride floor coverings.
regulations.
The following standards include references Proprietary products should have been
Semi-flexible polyvinyl
to concrete and screed as sub-base: assessed in accordance with Technical
chloride tiles.
BS 8201 Code of Practice for flooring Requirement R3.
of timber, timber products and BS EN 650 Resilient floor coverings.
wood-based panel products Polyvinyl chloride floor Sound insulation materials include:
coverings on jute backing • flexible material
BS 8203 Code of Practice for installation
or on polyester felt backing • mineral fibre quilt insulation
of sheet and tile flooring
or on polyester felt with • board material (for use under screeds)
BS 5385 Wall and floor tiling. polyvinyl chloride backing. • pre-compressed expanded polystyrene
BS EN 651 Resilient floor coverings. - impact sound duty (ISD) grade
CERAMIC, CONCRETE, Polyvinyl chloride floor • proprietary materials which have been
coverings with foam layer. assessed in accordance with Technical
TERRAZZO AND SIMILAR Requirement R3.
TILE FINISHES
8.3
Cork floor tiles.

8.3 - M3 Materials for tile flooring
The following standard contains further
shall be adequate for the location and
specification details for flexible sheet and
intended use
tile flooring:
BS 5385 Wall and floor tiling contains BS 8203 Code of Practice for installation
references to materials for ceramic, of resilient floor coverings.
concrete and similar floor tiles.
Items to be taken into account include: WOOD FINISHES
(a) ceramic tiles 8.3 - M6 Materials for wood flooring
Relevant standards include: shall be adequate for the location and
BS 5385 Code of Practice for the intended use
Part 3 design and installation
of ceramic floor tiles and ALL WOOD AND WOOD-BASED
mosaics. MATERIALS

8.3 Floor finishes
THERMAL INSULATION SURFACE PREPARATION COMPACTION

All surfaces should be clean and dust free. Screeds should be thoroughly compacted,
8.3 - M8 Thermal insulation materials In particular, any traces of gypsum should using a heavy tamper or a mechanical
shall provide adequate insulation have been removed. Concrete surfaces compactor or vibrator.
standards in their intended location should be wetted and brushed before
screeding. Proprietary screeds should be laid
Floor insulation materials should include in accordance with manufacturers’
the following: BOND recommendations.
Material BS Grade or Where screeds are to be bonded to the
description substrate, the surface should provide (e) protection, curing
adequate bond. If necessary, the surface Screed surfaces should be protected
EPS(expanded EN 13163 70
polystyrene) should be improved by: against damage from traffic and be kept
• hacking continuously moist until sufficient strength
PUR (rigid for use under
has been attained to resist shrinkage
polyurethane) screeds • roughening
stresses (at least 7 days).
PIR(rigid 4841 • grouting
polyisocyanurate) • application of a bonding agent. (f) surface finish
Fibre building board 1142 insulating SCREEDS PROVIDING A WEARING
Part 3 board (b) services
SURFACE
(softboard) Provision should be made for:
Floor screeds to be left as a wearing
Proprietary • thermal movement of water pipes
surface should be either treated with
materials assessed • protection against chemical attack, for
a surface hardener in accordance with
in accordance example by using purpose-made sleeves
manufacturers’ recommendations or be
with Technical or ducts, see Chapter 8.1 ‘Internal
Requirement R3 - -
power floated to a smooth and durable
services’ (Design and Sitework).
surface.
Insulation materials for use below screeds There should be at least 25mm thickness
SCREEDS TO RECEIVE A FLOOR FINISH
should: of screed above the highest point of any
Where a screed is to be used as a sub-base
• have adequate compressive strength to service pipe or insulation placed around
for a floor finish, the surface should be
support wet construction screeds and the pipe.
suitable for the required finish as specified
floor loads in the design.
• be compatible with any dpm, where (c) mixing
appropriate. Cement and sand screeds should be mixed
(g) screeds on resilient insulation
in the specified proportions.
materials
STRUCTURAL FLOOR Proprietary screeds should be mixed Screeds above resilient insulating
in accordance with the manufacturer’s materials should be laid on a separating
DECKING recommendations. membrane and reinforced as specified.
8.3 - M9 Structural floor decking
(d) laying The slabs of resilient material should be
materials shall be suitable for their
WEATHER CONDITIONS tightly butted, and turned up at the room
purpose and location
Screeding should not be carried out under perimeter to prevent contact between
Decking materials should be selected in weather conditions which could adversely the screed and the structure which could
accordance with the relevant parts of affect the result. The following precautions create sound transmission paths.
Chapter 6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper should be taken:
floors’ (Design and Materials). Joints in the isolating membrane should be
• hot or dry weather - screeds should
lapped and taped. The membrane should
not be laid in hot or dry weather unless
be turned up at the perimeter to prevent
precautions are taken to prevent the
grout seeping through.
screed surface drying out too quickly
SITEWORK STANDARDS • frost - screeds should not be laid if there
is a risk of freezing.
(a) meet the Technical Requirements Any screeds damaged by frost should be
(b) take account of the design removed and replaced (reference should membrane
screed reinforced
as specified
(c) follow established good practice and be made to Chapter 1.4 ‘Cold weather turned up
at perimeter separating membrane
workmanship working’). between resilient
insulation and screed
Sitework that complies with the design and TIMING
8.3
the guidance below will be acceptable for Monolithic screeds should be laid within
floor finishes. three hours of the concrete sub-floor being
poured. (h) screeds on thermal insulation
SCREEDING Wet screeding should be programmed to
The procedure for laying screeds on
resilient materials should be followed.
8.3 - S2 Floor screeds shall be laid to allow sufficient drying out time before dry Turning up insulation at perimeters
provide a suitable background for the lining is to commence. prevents cold bridging.
intended floor finishes
BAY SIZE
Items to be taken into account include: Screeds above underfloor heating should
(a) background not exceed 40m2 with a maximum length
MOISTURE PROTECTION of 8m.
Check that any specified damp-proofing
THICKNESS
treatment has been completed before
Screeds should be laid to the specified
screeding is commenced.
thickness.

Floor finishes 8.3
CERAMIC, CONCRETE, paper or an alternative material which will Fixings for plywood or hardboard should
withstand traffic from other trades and any be at 100mm centres at perimeters (12mm
TERRAZZO AND SIMILAR plaster droppings or other spillage. from edges) and 150mm centres across
TILE FINISHES the sheets; and for chipboard and oriented
strand board, at 300mm centres at
8.3 - S3 Tile flooring shall provide a ASPHALT FINISHES perimeters (9mm from edges) and 400mm
suitable surface for the intended use 8.3 - S4 Asphalt and pitch mastic shall centres across the boards.
Items to be taken into account include: be suitable for its use
Measures should be taken to prevent
(a) background Suitable thicknesses and grades include: damage to underfloor services.
EVENNESS
The background to be tiled should be Use Thickness Grade FLOORING
(mm) Sheet or tile flooring should be fixed with
reasonably even and laid to falls where
required. Floor finish 15 to 20 I or II the specified adhesives and in accordance
Underlay for other 15 to 20 I or II
with manufacturers’ instructions.
PREPARATION finishes in one coat Flooring should be fully bonded, where
Before bedding is commenced, the
appropriate. Adhesives should be spread
following precautions should be taken: Suspended floor system manufacturers evenly, and dry and contact adhesives left
• the surface should be clean and free from should be consulted where mastic asphalt for the correct period of time to ensure full
all laitance, dirt, dust, grease and any other floor finishes are to be used with such bonding. Provision for adjustment after
material incompatible with the adhesive systems. initial contraction or expansion should be
• where appropriate, a damp-proof
made where necessary.
membrane should have been incorporated FLEXIBLE SHEET AND TILE
• differences in level should be dubbed out Welded joints should be provided,
• the screed or concrete surface should FINISHES where specified, in accordance with
be true and level (±3mm under a 3m manufacturers’ recommendations.
8.3 - S5 Flexible sheet and tile floor
straight edge)
finishes shall be laid to provide a The flooring should be pressed down
• the screed or base should be sufficiently
suitable wearing surface firmly where appropriate, surplus adhesive
dry.
Items to be taken into account include: removed, and the completed surface
(b) bedding loaded or rolled as necessary to prevent
Cement and sand mortar should normally (a) background
curling or bubbling.
be a mix between 1 : 3 and 1 : 4½. MOISTURE PROTECTION
The substrate should be sufficiently dry to (c) fittings
Where proprietary mortars or adhesives are
prevent any adverse effect on the flooring. Where specified, skirtings, coves,
used, manufacturers’ recommendations
coverstrips and other pre-formed
should be followed. Where applicable, manufacturers’
components should be fixed in accordance
(c) laying with manufacturers’ recommendations.
Floor tiles should be bedded in a solid EVENNESS
bed of mortar or proprietary adhesive of (d) quality of finish
The surface should be even and without
a thickness appropriate for the material. The floor finish should be reasonably level
high spots or cracks. Where a levelling
The tiles should be arranged to minimise and smooth. Particular care should be
underlay is needed, it should be of a
cutting with straight joints of even width. taken at doorways and junctions. Flooring
type and thickness recommended by the
Any cutting necessary should be done should be cut so that it fits neatly around
flooring manufacturer.
neatly and accurately. fittings, pipes, etc.
Boarded surfaces may be covered by a
(d) jointing sheet underlay. (e) protection
For ceramic tiles, joints should be not less All sheet or tile flooring should be kept
than 3mm wide. The following types are acceptable: protected until handover of the dwelling.
Movement joints should be provided Temporary covering should be building
Type of underlay Minimum thickness paper or other material, which will
around the floor perimeter and at rigid (mm)
upstands. In large areas tiling should be withstand traffic from other trades and
Hardboard 3.2 any dampness caused by plaster droppings
divided into bays at 8-10m centres.
Plywood 4.0 or spillage.
(e) grouting
Chipboard 9.0
Grout should be a cement based epoxy WOOD FINISHES
resin or a proprietary product. Where tiles Oriented strand board 6.0
8.3
may become saturated the grout should be 8.3 - S6 Wood flooring shall be laid so
water resistant. (b) laying as to be suitable for the intended use
CONDITIONING Items to be taken into account include:
TILES ON WOOD-BASED SUBSTRATE Flexible and sheet flooring materials
Floor tiles on wood-based substrates should should be stored in a clean and ventilated (a) moisture protection
be bedded in an adhesive manufactured place. Unless specifically permitted by the For wood finishes to be laid on concrete
specifically for the substrate. manufacturer, materials should not be slabs or screeds, the substrate should be
stored in cold conditions. The temperature sufficiently dry to prevent any adverse
(f) accessories
should be not less than 18°C for at least 24 effects. A 50mm screed is likely to
Any accessories, such as covings, skirtings,
hours before and during laying. require at least 2 months to become
etc, should match the tile pattern and be
sufficiently dry. A concrete slab requires
fixed so that joints are aligned with those
UNDERLAYS at least 6 months to become sufficiently
in the floor. dry. Alternatively, it should be tested
Plywood or hardboard underlays should be
(g) protection fixed with ring shank nails or staples; and for moisture content in accordance with
Where necessary, tile flooring should be chipboard and oriented strand board with BS 8201.
protected until the dwelling is handed over. ring shank nails or screws, 2½ times the Where specified and where timber battens
Temporary covering should be building thickness of the boards. are used above a dry slab, a continuous

8.3 Floor finishes
vapour control layer should be fixed under • batten spacing - battens should be at nails/screws at least 10mm
the wood flooring, with lapped and taped centres appropriate to the floor finish from edge of panel
or sealed joints coincident with supports. material, and generally in accordance
with the following: or in accordance with manufacturers’
The supporting battens below the vapour recommendations.
control layer should be preservative
Thickness of finish Maximum batten centres
treated and a dpm should have been FLOOR COVERINGS LAID ON
(mm) (mm)
provided below the slab. RESILIENT MATERIALS
Chipboard (type P5) Where flooring is to be laid on resilient
preservative treated battens
to prevent condensation 18/19 450 materials on a separating floor, it is
damaging wood flooring
22 600 important that edges are isolated from
walls and skirtings by a resilient layer.
dry, ground bearing slab Plywood
dpm 12 450 STRUCTURAL DECKING
16 600 Floor boards and decking should be
Wood blocks and strips should be laid and fixed as described in Chapter
conditioned before laying to the appropriate Oriented strand board (type OSB3)
6.4 ‘Timber and concrete upper floors’
moisture content for the specified period. 15 450 (Sitework).
18-19 600
(b) services (d) protection
Underfloor heating, where installed, should • batten fixing to substrate - battens may All wood flooring should be kept protected
be kept on before and during the floor laying. be shot-fired or fixed with suitable clips. until handover of the dwelling. Temporary
• chipboard and oriented strand board covering should be building paper or other
(c) laying and fixing
fixed to battens material, which will withstand traffic from
PREPARATION OF SCREEDS OR other trades and any dampness caused by
CONCRETE SURFACES Fixing Length Centres plaster droppings or spillage.
Preparation should be as follows:
Flat headed 2½ x board 200mm to
• high spots, nibs and major irregularities
should be removed
ring shank thickness 300mm STAIRCASE FINISHES
nails or centres around
• differences in level should be dubbed out. screws perimeters 8.3 - S7 Staircase finishes shall be
suitable for their intended use
DIRECTLY APPLIED FINISHES 400mm to
(wood block and strip flooring) 500mm centres Items to be taken into account include:
on intermediate (a) provision of slip resistant nosings
Wood block and strip flooring should
supports
be laid and fixed in accordance with For communal stairs, eg in escape
manufacturers’ recommendations, using or in accordance with manufacturers’ routes in blocks of flats, non-slip nosings
the specified or recommended adhesive as recommendations. or inserts should be provided where
appropriate. specified, and fixed in accordance with the
• plywood fixed to battens
Adhesive should be evenly spread, and
blocks laid to the specified pattern, leaving Fixing Centres
(b) consistent rise and going
gaps around the perimeter for movement. 10 gauge nails 150mm centres around The rise and going should remain uniform
or screws perimeter after application of the staircase finish.
INDIRECTLY APPLIED FINISHES 300mm centres on Reference should also be made to Chapter
(softwood boarding, wood-based panel intermediate supports 6.6 ‘Staircases’ (Design and Sitework).
products)
INDEX
A I T
Asphalt finishes 1, 3, 5 Indirectly applied finishes 2, 3, 6 Terrazo tiles 1, 3, 5
B M Thermal insulation 1, 2, 4
Background, flexible finishes 1, 5 Moisture protection 2, 4, 5 Tile floorings 1, 5
8.3
Background, screeds 1, 4 O W
Background, tiles 1, 5 Oriented strand board 2, 6 Wood finishes 2, 3, 5
Background, wood finishes 2 P
C Plywood 2, 6
Ceramic tiles 1, 3, 5 S
Chipboard 2, 6 Screeds 1, 3, 4
Concrete tiles 1, 3, 5 Services 1, 2, 4, 6
Curing 1 Slip resistance 2 ,6
D Soft floor coverings 2
Decking 4 Sound insulation 1, 2, 3
Directly applied finishes 2, 3, 6 Staircases 2, 6
F Structural floor decking 4, 6
Flexible finishes 1, 3, 5 Surface finish, screeds 1, 4

Chapter 8.4
Finishings and fitments
CONTENTS SCOPE
Requirements and recommendations for fitments and
cupboards, internal trim and finishings.
Cupboards and fitments D2 1
Finishings and internal trim D3 1
Provision of information D4 1
MATERIALS
Joinery M2 1
Ironmongery M3 1
Other materials M4 2
Prefabricated items M5 2
SITEWORK
Cupboards and fitments S2 2
Finishings and internal trim S3 2
Protection S4 2
INDEX 3
8.4

Finishings and fitments 8.4
The airing area should be separated from
DESIGN STANDARDS other storage. MATERIALS STANDARDS
8.4 - D1 Design shall meet the Technical 8.4 - M1 All materials shall:
Requirements (a) meet the Technical Requirements
total area of shelving (b) take account of the design
Design that follows the guidance below will not less than 0.5m2 using
be acceptable for finishings and fitments. not less
than
full width and depth of
airing cupboard Materials that comply with the design and
300mm
between
CUPBOARDS AND shelves finishings and fitments.
FITMENTS Materials for finishings and fitments

should comply with all relevant standards
8.4 - D2 The builder shall provide fixed top shelf not more
than 1.5m above floor including those listed below. Where no
and built-in fitments in accordance with standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
the specification applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
Items to be taken into account include: Standards and Technical Requirements’).
(a) kitchen facilities (d) hinges
To reduce movement and shrinkage, doors References to British Standards and
The specification should cover space or Codes of Practice include those made
facilities for: should be hung on hinges as follows:
under the Construction Products Directive
• preparation and cooking of food Location of door Hinges (89/106/EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
• washing up, drying and storage of dishes European Technical Specifications
and utensils Airing cupboard 1½ pairs x 75mm
• storage of dry foods Other internal 1 pair x 75mm Standardisation (CEN).
• storage of perishable foods fitments
• laundering
• storage of domestic cleaning appliances, JOINERY
part of which should be suitable for FINISHINGS AND 8.4 - M2 Wood and wood-based
brooms, upright cleaners and similar INTERNAL TRIM materials shall be of the quality and
equipment. dimensions required by the design
8.4 - D3 Finishings and internal trim
Space or facilities for laundering and shall be suitable for their location and Items to be taken into account include:
cleaning items may be provided outside intended use (a) classification
the kitchen area. All wood and wood-based materials
should, as a minimum, comply with the
A circulation space of not less than one (a) wood trim requirements of:
metre should be provided in front of all All trim should be of adequate size to mask
work surfaces, cupboards and appliances BS EN 942 Specification for timber :
joints around built-in fitments, etc allowing
provided. For design purposes, when work Timber for and workmanship
for movement and shrinkage.
surfaces, cupboards and appliances are in joinery : Class 3
intended (but not provided) they should be Any wood trim in the vicinity of fireplaces BS EN 312 Particleboard.
assumed to be 600mm deep. or heating appliances should be fixed
at not less than the statutory minimum  (b) workmanship
(b) storage space distance from heat sources and be All joinery items should be constructed to
Storage space should also include space or arranged to minimise movement and a good standard of workmanship including:
provision for: shrinkage. • fit and construction of joints
• general storage • construction of finger joints
• storage of clothes, linen and bedding Special consideration should be given
• glueing and laminating
and, in homes which do not have central, to the positioning of finishings and trim
• construction of moving parts
or whole home, heating, their airing. in relation to cable runs, light points,
• surface finishes.
socket outlets, door furniture, handrails,
(c) airing cupboards balustrades, etc. Prefabricated components should comply
Airing cupboards are required in homes with the relevant parts of BS 1186 : Part 2.
which do not have central, or whole home, (b) non-wood trim
heating. In other cases they are optional. Proprietary trim items should be installed (c) surface finish
in accordance with the manufacturer’s The prepared surface should be such that
8.4
Where provided, airing cupboards should recommendations. no defects are visible after the finish is
have: applied.
• not less than 0.5m2 of easily reached PROVISION OF
shelving suitable for the airing of clothes IRONMONGERY
• a vertical space between shelves of not INFORMATION
less than 300mm 8.4 - D4 All relevant information shall 8.4 - M3 Ironmongery shall be provided
• a suitable heat source, such as a hot be produced in a clearly understandable in accordance with the design and
water cylinder or an equivalent. format and distributed to appropriate specification
Care is necessary when designing airing personnel Relevant standards include:

cupboards. To be accessible, the shelving Ensure that design and specification BS 7352 Specification for strength
should be placed not higher than 1.5m. information is issued to site supervisors and durability performance
and relevant specialist subcontractors of metal hinges for side
and/or suppliers. hanging applications.

OTHER MATERIALS Worktops spanning between units should • fixed securely to linings to prevent
be supported, where necessary. curling.
8.4 - M4 Other materials shall be Skirtings should:
suitable for the intended use Hanging rails should be provided in
• be mitred and scribed at external and
wardrobe cupboards, with intermediate
Materials other than wood should be of internal angles, as appropriate
supports, where necessary, to avoid
the quality and dimensions required by the • tightly abut architraves as appropriate
bending.
design and should be chosen in accordance • be run level and scribed to floors.
with manufacturers’ recommendations. (e) edge trim Skirtings and architraves of materials
Where worktops or unit panels are cut, other than wood, eg those designed to
PREFABRICATED ITEMS edges should be sealed using a metal accommodate trunking, should be fixed
or plastic strip glued to the edge with in accordance with the manufacturer’s
8.4 - M5 All prefabricated items shall waterproof adhesive. Alternatively, an recommendations.
be suitably protected against damage appropriate waterproof joint may be used.
Appropriate protection should be specified (e) painting, etc
(f) sealing Painting, staining, etc should be carried
to reasonably ensure that items are Sinks and hob units, which are inset in
undamaged. out in accordance with Chapter 8.5
worktops, and vanity units should be ‘Painting and decorating’ (each section).
sealed with a waterproof joint.
(f) completion
Where appropriate, gaps between fitments
SITEWORK STANDARDS and wall tiling should be sealed with a
All work should be left in a clean state.
waterproof joint and brought to a smooth
finish. PROTECTION
(b) take account of the design 8.4 - S4 Completed work shall be
(g) operation of moving parts
(c) follow established good practice and handed over undamaged
For built-in fitments, doors should fit
workmanship openings closely and evenly and operate Items to be taken into account include:
Sitework that complies with the design and freely; drawers should run smoothly, and (a) kitchens
the guidance below will be acceptable for locks and catches properly engage. Kitchen units and complete fitted kitchens
finishings and fitments. should be protected and, wherever
FINISHINGS AND possible, be left in the original wrappings
until shortly before handover.
CUPBOARDS AND INTERNAL TRIM
FITMENTS 8.4 - S3 Finishings and internal trim (b) special features
Appropriate protection for fireplace
8.4 - S2 Cupboards and fitments shall be fixed to ensure a satisfactory
surrounds, panelling and other special
shall be installed to give satisfactory finish free from unsightly blemishes
features should be provided, where
appearance and performance Items to be taken into account include: necessary.
Items to be taken into account include: (a) general workmanship
All trim should be sufficiently wide to mask (c) trim
(a) pre-installation check Make sure that all completed skirtings,
joints.
Cupboards and fitments should be checked architraves, etc are adequately protected
to ensure they are undamaged before Any trim in the vicinity of fireplaces, or against damage from other trades.
installation. other heat-producing appliances, should
be: (d) removal of coverings
(b) correct location All temporary coverings should be
• at the specified distance
Cupboards and fitments should be installed removed and all fitments and finishings
• arranged to minimise movement and
as shown in the design. cleaned and dusted shortly before
shrinkage.
In the kitchen, a circulation space of not handover.
Nails should be punched just below the
less than one metre should be provided in
timber surface and holes filled. Nails
front of all work surfaces, cupboards and
should never be driven home with the
appliances.
hammer head. As far as possible, any
(c) accurate levelling chipping, hammer marks or burrs should
All cupboards and worktops should be be avoided where easing is required and
plumb and level and be scribed to wall any damage made good.
8.4
faces, where necessary.

(b) shelving
(d) adequate support and fixing Shelving supports should be fixed securely
All wall units should be securely fixed, and so that shelves are level. The specified
using: distance between shelves in airing
• plugs and screws to masonry cupboards should be allowed.
• screws to timber studs, etc (fixings
(c) special features
should be of appropriate size)
Fireplace surrounds, panelling and other
• appropriate proprietary fixings in
special features should be complete and
accordance with manufacturers’
joined satisfactorily to adjoining surfaces.
instructions.
Use pre-drilled holes in units and brackets (d) architraves and skirtings
provided by the manufacturer, where Architraves should be:
appropriate. • parallel to frames and linings
• installed with an equal margin to each
frame member

Finishings and fitments 8.4
INDEX
A L T
Accuracy 2 Leveling 2 Timber 1
Airing cupboards 1 M Trim 1, 2
Architraves 2 Moving parts 2 W
C N Wood 1
Circulation space 1, 2 Nails 2 Wood based materials 1
Classification, timber 1 P Workmanship 2
Completion 2 Painting 2 Worktops 2
Coverings 2 Particle board 1
F Prefabricated items 2
Features 2 Pre-installation check 2
Fixing 2 S
H Sealing 2
Hanging rails 2 Shelving 2
Hinges 1 Skirtings 2
I Staining 2
Installation 2 Storage space 1
Ironmongery 1 Support 2
8.4

Chapter 8.5
Painting and decorating
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for painting and
decorating.
Selection of paint and decorative D2 1
systems
Compatibility D3 1
MATERIALS
Preservatives, stains and paints M2 2
Prefabricated joinery M3 2
SITEWORK
Prefabricated components S2 2
Storage on site S3 2
Timing S4 2
Quality of finish S5 2
Wallpapering S6 3
INDEX 4
8.5

Painting and decorating 8.5
Where the decorative system is part of (b) stains and varnishes
DESIGN STANDARDS the weather resistance of the rendering, Stains and varnishes should be suitable
it should be assessed in accordance with for the species of timber to which
Technical Requirement R3. they are applied. Where appropriate,
Requirements
manufacturers’ recommendations should
Design that follows the guidance below will (c) metal be obtained and followed.
be acceptable for painting and decorating. STRUCTURAL STEEL
Guidance on the protection of structural BS 6952 gives recommendations on the
use of exterior wood coating systems.
SELECTION OF PAINT AND steel is given in BS EN ISO 12944 ‘Paints
and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel
DECORATIVE SYSTEMS structures by protective paint systems’
(c) glazing compounds
Linseed-oil putty should not be specified
8.5 - D2 Paint and decorative systems and BS EN ISO 14713 ‘Protection against
for glazing rebates in windows and doors
shall provide an acceptable finish corrosion of iron and steel in structures’.
treated with stains.
Paint or decorative systems should be selected Internal and external steel which has not
Appropriate sealants should be used
and applied in accordance with BS 6150 ‘Code been galvanized should be protected with
of Practice for painting of buildings’. at least two coats of zinc phosphate primer
recommendations.
and a suitable decorative finish, where
Items to be taken into account include: required.
(a) timber
PROVISION OF
DECORATIVE SYSTEMS
Internal and external steel which has been INFORMATION
galvanized to a rate of at least 460g/m2
Decorative systems should be compatible 8.5 - D4 Designs and specifications
is acceptable without further protection.
with the surface to be decorated which shall be produced in a clearly
Steel galvanized to a rate of less than
may be: understandable format and include all
460g/m2 should be protected with at least
• bare timber relevant information
two coats of zinc phosphate primer and a
• stained timber
suitable decorative finish, where required. Design information should include:
• primed timber
• preservative treated timber Where steelwork is to be protected by • specification of preparatory work
• naturally durable species. intumescent paint for fire resistance, the • schedule of finishes.
manufacturer’s recommendations should 8.5 - D5 All relevant information shall
STAIN SYSTEMS be followed.
Stain systems for timber should be either: be distributed to appropriate personnel
• a 2 coat system, or GUTTERS Ensure that design and specification
• in accordance with manufacturers’ Insides of metal gutters (other than information is issued to site supervisors
recommendations. aluminium) should be painted with a and relevant specialist subcontractors
suitable protective paint. and/or suppliers.
PAINT SYSTEMS
Paint systems for timber should be either: NON-FERROUS PIPEWORK
• at least one priming coat, one undercoat Copper pipes, etc should be painted with
and one finishing coat, or the normal decorative finishes. MATERIALS STANDARDS
• proprietary systems in accordance with
manufacturers’ recommendations. (d) plaster and plasterboard 8.5 - M1 All materials shall:
Plaster and plasterboard surfaces (a) meet the Technical Requirements
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT should be prepared in accordance with (b) take account of the design
Painting or staining of external timber manufacturers’ directions for:
is required to provide protection and • plastic compound finishes
stability even if the timber is preservative • wallpapers
painting and decorating.
treated, unless the preservative treatment • emulsion paints, etc.
manufacturer confirms otherwise (see Materials for painting and decorating
Clause D3). (e) proprietary building boards should comply with all relevant standards,
Paint systems should be either: including those listed below. Where no
MOISTURE CONTENT • at least one priming coat, one undercoat standard exists, Technical Requirement R3
Wood with moisture content above 18% is and one finishing coat, or applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the
not suitable for priming/painting. • proprietary systems in accordance with Standards and Technical Requirements’).
8.5
(b) masonry and rendering References to British Standards and

Paint or decorative finishes should not be Other finishes should be applied Codes of Practice include those made
applied to external brickwork or render in accordance with manufacturers’ under the Construction Products Directive
where the finish could trap moisture in recommendations. (89/106/EEC) and, in particular, appropriate
the construction causing frost damage or European Technical Specifications
sulfate attack or other detrimental effects. COMPATIBILITY approved by a European Committee for
(This applies particularly to bricks which Standardisation (CEN).
8.5 - D3 Paint and decorative systems
have no upper limit on their soluble salt shall be compatible with timber species
content. The brick manufacturer’s written and treatments
agreement to the application of any finish
should be obtained in such cases.) Items to be taken into account include:
(a) preservatives
Paint systems for external brickwork or Paint and stain systems specified should be
render, including proprietary surface compatible with any timber preservatives
preparations, should be appropriate for that have been used. Where appropriate,
the substrate in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations should
manufacturer’s recommendations. be obtained and followed.

PRESERVATIVES, STAINS PREFABRICATED from the surface. Internal paintwork should

be left until the risk of dust and damage is
AND PAINTS COMPONENTS minimal.
8.5 - M2 Materials for use on non- 8.5 - S2 Prefabricated components
(c) staining
durable building elements shall be to be painted or decorated shall be of
Staining should be carried out when
selected to provide adequate protection suitable quality and adequately prepared
the substrate is dry to ensure adequate
Items to be taken into account include: Components to be painted, stained or dispersal and absorption.
(a) preservatives sealed should have been primed (if to be
Timber preservatives should be selected painted) or given a first coat of stain or QUALITY OF FINISH
in accordance with Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber sealer before fixing.
preservation (natural solid timber)’ 8.5 - S5 Workmanship shall ensure a
Prefabricated joinery to be decorated satisfactory finish
(Materials).
should be supplied primed. Complete
(b) knotting decoration should be carried out within the Items to be taken into account include:
time specified by the manufacturer. (a) painting on wood
BS 1336 Specification for knotting.
SURFACE PREPARATION
Components supplied untreated should Door and window furniture, sockets and
However, knotting may not be effective have been stored under cover and be
against heavy exudation of resin which light switches should be removed before
primed as soon as possible after delivery. painting to avoid over-painting and
may disrupt finishes.
Where primer is damaged, surfaces should splashing.
(c) stains be re-primed. Unsound wood, loose or highly resinous
BS 6952 Exterior wood coating systems. knots, etc should be cut out, replaced and
(d) primers
STORAGE ON SITE made good.
8.5 - S3 Materials and prefabricated Tool and machine marks and raised
BS 4756 Specification for ready-mixed
components stored on site shall be grain should be removed. Where a
aluminium priming paints for
adequately protected smooth surface is required, re-finish with
woodwork
Items to be taken into account include: glasspaper and fillers, as appropriate.
BS 5082 Specification for water-borne
priming paints for woodwork (a) painting materials Nail holes, splits and other imperfections
Where it is necessary to store materials, should be stopped. Sharp arrises should be
BS 5358 Specification for solvent-borne
the storage should ensure that the rubbed down to ensure an even coating.
priming paints for woodwork.
materials remain fit for use in the dwelling.
Surfaces to be painted should be free from
(e) proprietary paint systems Water-borne paints, primers and stains dirt, dust and moisture.
Paint systems should be suitable in all should be protected against frost before
respects for their intended use and use. Painting materials should not be used All joinery delivered pre-primed to the site
situation. Selection should be in accordance if they have been damaged by frost. should meet the requirements given under
with manufacturers’ recommendations. PRIMING below.
(b) prefabricated components
Any surfaces showing deterioration of
PREFABRICATED JOINERY Where it is necessary to store components,
primer or seal coat should be rubbed down
the storage should ensure that they
8.5 - M3 Prefabricated joinery shall be and a second coat applied.
remain fit for use in the dwelling.
provided with adequate protection
Prefabricated joinery should have the first
Protection in accordance with Clause M2 TIMING coat of paint or stain applied before fixing.
may be required.
8.5 - S4 Work shall only be carried PRESERVATIVES
Prefabricated joinery to be painted or out when conditions and surfaces are Before application, primer or paint finishes
stained should have been primed or given appropriate should be checked for compatibility with any
a first coat of stain or sealer before fixing. timber preservatives that have been used.
Where primer is damaged, surfaces should (a) external work Where appropriate, manufacturers’
be re-primed. External paintwork should not be carried recommendations for selection and use of
out under weather conditions which may materials should be obtained and followed.
adversely affect the completed work.
8.5
KNOTTING
SITEWORK STANDARDS Surfaces should be free from frost before All knots should be sealed using knotting
painting commences and while paint dries. applied by brush or in the case of joinery
(a) meet the Technical Requirements Coatings should not be applied to moist part of the priming process.
(b) take account of the design surfaces, nor when rain is expected before
PRIMING
(c) follow established good practice and the paint surface has set.
One full round coat of primer should be
workmanship applied to all surfaces to be painted and to
(b) internal work
Sitework that complies with the design and When decorating internal walls, cold hidden surfaces of external woodwork.
the guidance below will be acceptable for surfaces may cause problems with Cut ends of external woodwork, rebates for
painting and decorating. water-borne paints, even though the air glazing and backs of glazing beads should
temperature may be above freezing. be primed.
Surfaces should be free from condensation
UNDERCOAT AND GLOSS
before applying paint. Coatings, especially
Paint should not be thinned beyond the
those which are oil-based, should not be
limits recommended by the manufacturer.
applied until all moisture has evaporated

Painting and decorating 8.5
Unless an alternative recommendation is (d) painting on other surfaces WALLPAPERING
made by the manufacturer, the following EXTERNAL MASONRY AND
should be applied: RENDERING 8.5 - S6 Wallpapering shall achieve a
• at least one undercoat (2 coats Only materials specified should be used for neat, consistent appearance
preferred), and external masonry or rendering. Items to take into account include:
• one finishing coat. (a) surface preparation
Substrates should be clean and free from
The undercoat should provide a suitable dust or loose deposits. Surfaces with Before any wallpapering is started, check
base to ensure a satisfactory finishing varying suction may require stabilizing that surfaces are dry and sufficiently even
coat. Additional undercoats or finishing with a treatment recommended by the and smooth. Surfaces should be sized or
coats are at the discretion of the Builder. manufacturer. sealed, if necessary.
Each application should be a full round coat. To prevent stripping of the board
PLASTER AND SKIM COAT ON
lining paper, dry lining should be sized
Surfaces should be lightly rubbed down PLASTERBOARD
between coats with glasspaper and each Surfaces should be visibly sound and
recommendations.
coat should be applied within one month of without powdering or crumbling.
the application of the previous coat. Where proprietary coverings are used, any
All joints should be completed and any
preparatory treatment recommended by
(b) staining and varnishing on wood cracks, nail holes and surface imperfections
the manufacturer should be applied.
filled. The surface should be rubbed down
SURFACE PREPARATION
with glasspaper, if necessary, and dusted. (b) choice of adhesive
Before application, stains should be
checked for compatibility with any timber Surfaces require stabilizing, either with Adhesive of a type recommended by the
preservatives that have been used. Stains a coat of thinned paint or with a sealer wallpaper manufacturer should be used.
should not be applied to door or window recommended by the manufacturer. (c) workmanship
rebates to be glazed with linseed-oil putty. Wallpaper and coverings should be
Paint should then be applied in not less
Surfaces to be stained or varnished should than two coats. properly aligned and neatly fixed.
be prepared to provide adequate adhesion Electrical switch plates should be
and acceptable appearance. DRY LINING
A seal coat should be applied and surfaces temporarily removed and the papering
APPLICATION prepared for decoration in accordance with accurately trimmed so that it will tuck
Low-build or high-build stain should manufacturers’ recommendations. behind the switch plate on completion.
be applied as recommended by the Papers containing metal backings should
manufacturer to provide appropriate cover. BUILDING BOARD not be tucked behind switch plates.
Where painting is specified, surfaces
Varnish should be applied in at least three should be primed or sealed and finished
coats on interior surfaces. Exterior varnish with at least two coats.
(yacht or high gloss) should be applied
in at least four coats. Surfaces should be The first coat should be as recommended
sanded between coats. by the board manufacturer.
(c) painting on metal (e) surface finish

STRUCTURAL STEEL QUALITY OF COMPLETED WORK
Internal and external steel which has not All paintwork should be complete. Surfaces
been galvanized should be protected with should be evenly coated and neither
at least two coats of zinc phosphate primer background nor undercoat should be visible.
and a suitable decorative finish, where Where brush marks, runs or abnormal
required. roughness occur, work should be rubbed
Internal and external steel which has been down and re-painted. Spilt, splashed or
galvanized to a rate of at least 460g/m2 badly applied paint should be removed.
is acceptable without further protection. On completion, there should be no
Steel galvanized to a rate of less than paintmarks on any surfaces not intended
460g/m2 should be protected as steel to be painted. On painted surfaces
which has not been galvanised. there should be no conspicuous runs or
8.5
Where steelwork is to be protected by prominent brush marks. Ironmongery

intumescent paint for fire resistance, the removed before painting should be re-fixed
manufacturer’s recommendations should afterwards.
be followed.
PROTECTION
GUTTERS Completed work should be protected
Insides of metal gutters (other than against dirt and damage until the dwelling
aluminium) should be painted with a is handed over.
suitable protective paint.
NON-FERROUS PIPEWORK
Copper pipes, etc should be painted with
the normal decorative finishes.

INDEX
A J R
Adhesive 3 Joinery, prefabricated 2 Rendering 1, 3
Application, stain or varnish 3 K S

B Knotting 2 Stain systems 1, 2
Building boards 1, 3 M Staining 2
D Masonry 1 Storage 2
Decorative systems 1 Metal 1, 3 Structural steel 1, 3
Dry lining 3 Moisture content 1 U

E P Undercoat 2
External work 2, 3 Paint systems 1, 2 V

F Pipework, non-ferrous 1, 3 Varnishing 3
Finish 3 Plaster 1, 3 W
Plasterboard 1, 3 Wallpapering 3
G
Prefabricated components 2 Wood 2, 3
Glazing compounds 1
Preparation 2, 3 Workmanship 2, 3
Gutters 1, 3
Preservative treatment 1, 2
I
Priming 2
Internal work 2
Proprietary building boards 1
Protection 2, 3
8.5

Part 9
External works
9.1 Garages
9.2 Drives, paths and landscaping

Part 9 External works
Chapter 9.1
Garages
9.1 Garages
CONTENTS SCOPE
Design standards D1 1 Requirements and recommendations for integral, attached
and detached garages.
Garage foundations D3 1
Garage floors D4 1
Garage walls D5 1
Resistance to fire spread D6 2
Security D7 2
Doors and windows D8 2
Garage roofs D9 2
Permanent prefabricated D10 3
garages and carports
Services D11 3
MATERIALS
SITEWORK
INDEX 4
9.1

Garages 9.1
Unreinforced concrete slabs should: Items to be taken into account include:
DESIGN STANDARDS • have a minimum thickness of 100mm (a) bearing capacity of the ground
• have a minimum downstand thickening Where the depth of fill exceeds 600mm,
of 350mm below ground level around concrete floors should be designed in
Requirements
the whole perimeter of the slab accordance with Chapter 5.2 ‘Suspended
Design that follows the guidance below will • have a minimum width of edge ground floors’ (Design) and BS 8103:Part 4.
be acceptable for garages. thickening of 300mm
• be constructed on 100mm minimum of Supporting fill should comply with the
requirements of Chapter 5.1 ‘Substructure
STATUTORY properly compacted hardcore
and ground bearing floors’ (Sitework).
• have dimensions not exceeding 6m in
REQUIREMENTS any direction - for dimensions greater Where protection is needed to prevent
9.1 - D2 Design shall comply with all than this, movement joints should be attack by sulfates in either the ground,
relevant statutory requirements provided. ground water or fill below the slab, an
Design should be in accordance with impervious isolating membrane should be
ground level at least
relevant Building Regulations and other 100mm provided between the concrete and the
statutory requirements. at least ground.
100mm
hardcore
at least (b) resistance of the floor to moisture
GARAGE FOUNDATIONS 350mm
from the ground
9.1 - D3 Garage foundations shall Generally, a dpm is unnecessary except
transmit all loads to the ground safely where:
and without undue movement • it is necessary to prevent dampness
at least 300mm
entering the dwelling, or
Garage foundations should support • the floor has to be protected against
adequately the imposed loads, taking chemical attack from the ground.
account of ground conditions. Further (d) adjacent structures
Where no dpm is provided, the floor may
guidance is given in: Foundations for garages should not impair
show signs of dampness.
• Chapter 4.4 ‘Strip and trench fill the stability of the dwelling or any other
foundations’ (Design), and adjacent structure. Where the floor is below ground level,
• the guidance given below. precautions should be taken to prevent the
(e) underground services entry of ground water by:
Items to be taken into account include: Garage foundations that are to be above • tanking
(a) hazardous ground or near services should be constructed • the use of dpcs and dpms
For foundations on hazardous ground, the so that no settlement of foundations or • drainage of the ground behind the wall
following Chapters are relevant: damage to services occurs (see Chapter to a level below the floor.
4.1 ‘Land quality - managing ground 5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’ (Design)).
conditions’ (c) thickness of floor slabs
(f) provision for movement Ground bearing floors, where provided,
4.2 ‘Building near trees’
Movement joints in foundations should be should not be less than 100mm thick,
4.5 ‘Raft, pile, pier and beam foundations’
provided: including a float finish.
(Design).
• between dwellings and attached garages
Any existing fill on the site of the garage where there is a change of foundation (d) floor drainage
should be examined and identified. type or depth When practicable, garage floors should
Where any potential health hazard or • at approximately 6m intervals where to be laid to falls to ensure that water or
risk of damage is indicated, appropriate unreinforced concrete slab foundations spillage is directed out of the garage via
precautions should be taken, as described are used. the vehicle doorway.
in the following Chapters:
(e) structural topping
4.1 ‘Land quality - managing ground GARAGE FLOORS Where reinforced screeds are to be
conditions’
5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing 9.1 - D4 Garage floors shall transmit incorporated as structural topping, they
floors’ (Design). all loads to either the foundations or should be designed by an Engineer in
the ground safely and without undue accordance with Technical Requirement R5.
(b) type of foundation required for movement
integral/attached garages
Garage floors will be acceptable if they are GARAGE WALLS
Foundations for integral or attached
in accordance with: 9.1 - D5 Walls for all garages shall
garages should be the same as those for
• Chapter 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground transmit all loads to foundations, safely
the dwelling unless proper consideration
bearing floors’ (Design), and and without undue movement
is given to each foundation and the
• Chapter 5.2 ‘Suspended ground floors’
possibility of differential movement Garage walls will be acceptable if they are
(Design), and
between them. in accordance with:
• the guidance given below.
• Chapter 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground
(c) type of foundation required for Unless ventilation is specifically required bearing floors’ (Design), and
detached garages and blocks of garages for some other reason the void beneath a • Chapter 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’
Design of foundations for detached garage floor which is suspended precast (Design), and
9.1
individual garages or blocks of garages concrete may be unventilated if: • the guidance given below.
should avoid damage caused by differential • the floor has adequate durability, and
loads and uneven settlement. • the ground beneath is well drained, and Items to be taken into account include:
An unreinforced edge thickened concrete • there is unlikely to be a build up of soil (a) stability of walls above ground
slab may be used where the ground gases. Walls for detached garages and external
is uniform and provides a satisfactory walls for attached garages should:
foundation bearing. • be not less than 90mm thick

9.1 Garages
• in the case of walls up to 200mm thick, GARAGE ROOFS

have piers at corners (unless buttressed
by a return) and at intermediate centres 9.1 - D9 Garage roofs shall satisfactorily
not exceeding 3m fire-resisting fire-resisting resist the passage of rain and snow
wall partition
• have adequate lateral restraint against to the inside of the building, support
wind loading. applied loads and self weight and
transmit the loads to the walls safely
(b) stability of walls retaining ground and without undue movement
Garage walls retaining ground should be: dwelling garage dwelling garage
Garage roofs will be acceptable if they are
• suitable for the ground conditions
in accordance with:
• structurally adequate.
• Chapter 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’
Where garage walls act as retaining walls, • a half-hour fire-resisting floor or ceiling (Design), and
they should be designed in accordance • Chapter 7.2 ‘Pitched roofs’ (Design), and
with Chapter 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground • the guidance given below.
bearing floors’ or by an Engineer in
dwelling Items to be taken into account include:
(a) holding down
(c) provision for movement To prevent uplift flat roofs and, where
Movement joints in garage walls, as fire-resisting
necessary, pitched roofs should be provided
described in BS 5628, should be provided: ceiling or floor with holding down straps at not more
• between dwellings and attached garages than 2m centres where the roof members
as required by Clause D3(f) insulation garage bear on the supporting wall. Straps should
required where
• where there are movement joints in floor is fire have a minimum cross section of 30mm
resisting
foundations (reference should be made x 2.5mm, be at least one metre long and
to Clause D3(f)). have three fixings to the wall.
• any proposal which gives nominal half-
(d) adequate resistance to rain and hour fire resistance. (b) bracing
ground water The building designer should specify all
A damp-proof course should be provided bracing. Trussed rafter roofs should be
at a level at least 150mm above the level of
SECURITY braced in accordance with Table 1 in Appendix
adjacent ground. This dpc will protect the 9.1 - D7 Garages shall be constructed 7.2-C, unless the roof is designed and braced
wall from rising ground moisture. to provide reasonable security against in accordance with BS 5268 : Part 3.
unauthorised entry, in particular where
Garage walls constructed from a single All timber bracing to trussed rafters should
garages are linked
leaf of masonry, such as brickwork or be at least 100mm x 25mm in section and
blockwork approximately 100mm thick, will Where garages in different ownership are twice nailed to each trussed rafter. Nailing
not be impervious to wind driven rain and linked, walls should prevent direct access should be 3.35mm (10 gauge) x 65mm long
consequently could become damp. from one garage to another. galvanized round wire nails.
In areas of severe exposure, single (c) fixing of corrugated roof coverings
leaf walls may require a high standard DOORS AND WINDOWS Framing for corrugated coverings should
of workmanship and possibly surface 9.1 - D8 Garage doors and windows shall be constructed and sheets laid to falls
treatment to prevent an unacceptable level be adequate for their purpose in accordance with manufacturers’
of rain penetration. recommendations.
Doors and windows will be acceptable if
Where a garage is integral or attached, they are in accordance with: (d) detailing at abutments
the design should ensure that dampness • Chapter 2.3 ‘Timber preservation The following precautions should be taken
cannot enter the dwelling. (natural solid timber)’ (Design), and at abutments between a garage roof and
• Chapter 6.7 ‘Doors, windows and glazing’ the main building or between stepped
Where a wall is below ground level, (Design), and
precautions should be taken to prevent the garages:
• the guidance given below. • flashings and weatherproofing should
entry of ground water by:
• tanking Items to be taken into account include: allow for differential movement
• use of dpcs and dpms (a) robustness • cover flashings should be of metal or
• drainage of ground behind the wall. Frames should be selected and fixed other approved material
having regard to the type and weight of • aprons and eaves fillers for corrugated
coverings should fit the corrugation
RESISTANCE TO FIRE the garage door.
profile of the roofing
SPREAD (b) ease of operation • cavity trays should divert water from
Proprietary doors and door gear inside the cavity to the external surface
9.1 - D6 Garages shall be constructed so
should be installed in accordance with of the roof.
as to prevent fire spread to the dwelling
from the garage manufacturers’ recommendations.
(e) movement
Fire resistance between dwellings and Care should be taken to ensure that garage Movement joints should be provided:
integral or attached garages, may be doors are in proper working order at the • between dwellings and attached garages
9.1
provided by: time of handover of the dwelling. which have different types or depths of
• a wall in brickwork, blockwork or fire- foundations (reference should be made
resisting studwork up to the underside to Clause D3(f))
of the roof covering • at approx 6m intervals where
unreinforced slab foundations are used
(reference should be made to Chapter 7.1
‘Flat roofs and balconies’ (Design)).

Garages 9.1
Movement joints in roofs should be Items to be taken into account include:
continued through roof coverings and (a) protection of water services against
MATERIALS STANDARDS
be provided with appropriate weather frost 9.1 - M1 All materials shall:
protection. A rising main should not be located within (a) meet the Technical Requirements
a garage. (b) take account of the design
(f) adequate disposal of rainwater
The provision of rainwater disposal is at A water supply or outlet in a garage should Materials that comply with the design and
the discretion of the Builder, subject to have adequate provision for isolating and the guidance given in the Chapters listed
statutory requirements and the paragraphs draining down. below will be acceptable for garages.
below.
Pipes should be insulated and located so FOUNDATIONS
Individual roofs, or combinations of roofs as to minimise the risk of freezing. 4.4 ‘Strip and trench fill foundations’
that drain from one to another with a (Materials)
total area greater than 6m2, should have a (b) provision of electricity
The provision of electric lighting and 4.5 ‘Raft, pile, pier and beam foundations’
rainwater drainage system. (Materials)
socket outlets in a garage is at the
Where rainwater from a large roof surface discretion of the Builder. 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing
discharges onto a garage roof, precautions floors’ (Materials)
should be taken to prevent premature All electrical installations should comply 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (Materials).
erosion of the lower surface. with BS 7671, formerly the Institution
of Electrical Engineers (IEE) Wiring FLOORS
Rainwater should not discharge from the Regulations, operative on the date when 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing
roof directly to a drive or path. the foundations of the dwelling are laid. floors’ (Materials)
5.2 ‘Suspended ground floors’ (Materials).
For details on the design of rainwater (c) risk of fire or explosion
disposal systems, reference should Installation in a garage of an oil or gas WALLS
be made to the following Chapters, as burning boiler or heating appliance 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing
appropriate: should be in accordance with any relevant floors’ (Materials)
7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’ (Design) Statutory Regulations. 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (Materials).
7.2 ‘Pitched roofs’ (Design).
ROOFS
(g) acceptable forms of construction PROVISION OF 7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’ (Materials)
Garage roofs should be designed, specified INFORMATION 7.2 ‘Pitched roofs’ (Materials).
and constructed as described in Chapter 7.1
‘Flat roofs and balconies’ (each section) or 9.1 - D12 Designs and specifications
Chapter 7.2 ‘Pitched roofs’ (each section), shall be produced in a clearly
as appropriate. understandable format and include all SITEWORK STANDARDS
PERMANENT Design information should include all (a) meet the Technical Requirements
necessary details of the following:
PREFABRICATED GARAGES • exact location of garages
(b) comply with the design
(c) follow established good practice
AND CARPORTS • all relevant levels, related to an agreed and workmanship
9.1 - D10 Permanent prefabricated reference point
• foundations Sitework that complies with the design and
garages and carports shall be suitable the guidance given in the Chapters listed
for their intended purpose • waterproofing, where applicable
• walls below will be acceptable for garages.
Permanent prefabricated garages and • roof structure and coverings
carports should: FOUNDATIONS
• external and internal finishes
• have appropriate foundations 4.4 ‘Strip and trench fill foundations’
• services, where applicable.
• be structurally adequate (Sitework)
• provide appropriate weathertightness 9.1 - D13 All relevant information shall 4.5 ‘Raft, pile, pier and beam foundations’
• provide adequate separation between be distributed to appropriate personnel (Sitework)
linked garages in different ownership. 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing
Ensure that design and specification floors’ (Sitework)
Prefabricated garages should be erected information is issued to site supervisors 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (Sitework).
in accordance with manufacturers’ and relevant specialist subcontractors
recommendations. and/or suppliers. FLOORS
5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing
Particular care should be taken to ensure floors’ (Sitework)
adequate holding down of carports and 5.2 ‘Suspended ground floors’ (Sitework).
other light structures against wind action.
WALLS
SERVICES 5.1 ‘Substructure and ground bearing
floors’ (Sitework)
9.1 - D11 The provision of any service 6.1 ‘External masonry walls’ (Sitework).
or appliance within a garage shall be in
9.1
accordance with relevant regulations ROOFS

7.1 ‘Flat roofs and balconies’ (Sitework)
Where services or appliances are provided
7.2 ‘Pitched roofs’ (Sitework).
in garages, they should comply with the
guidance below and with the following
Chapters, as appropriate:
5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’ (Design)
8.1 ‘Internal services’ (Design).

9.1 Garages
INDEX
A F P
Abutments, roofs 2 Fire resistance 2 Prefabricated garages 3
Attached garages 1 Fire risks 3 Protection 3
B Fixing 2 R
Blocks of garages 1 Floors 1, 3 Rainwater 2, 3
Bracing 2 Foundations 1, 3 Retaining walls 2
C G Roofs 2, 3
Car ports 3 Ground water 2 S

Corrugated roof coverings 2 H Screeds 1
D Hazardous ground 1 Security 2
Detached garages 1 Holding down straps 2 Services 1, 3
Door openings 2 I U
Doors 2 Integral garages 1 Underground services 1
Drainage 1, 3 M W
E Moisture resistance 1 Walls 1, 3
Electricity 3 Movement 1, 2 Water services 3
Explosion, risks 3 Windows 2

9.1

Part 9 External works
Chapter 9.2
Drives, paths and landscaping
CONTENTS SCOPE
Requirements and recommendations for private roads,
shared private drives, private drives, car parking areas,
Provision of access D2 1
paths and landscaping.
Freestanding walls and D3 1
retaining structures
Garden areas D4-D7 1
Landscaping D8 2
MATERIALS
Concrete M2 2
All materials M3 2
SITEWORK
Ground stability S2 2
Foundations and construction S3 3
Freestanding walls and S4 3
retaining structures
Garden areas S5-S7 3
Landscaping S8 3
APPENDIX 9.2-A
Construction details of paved areas 4
INDEX 8
9.2

Drives, paths and landscaping 9.2
If a garage, carport or car parking area Where appropriate, brickwork and
DESIGN STANDARDS is provided within the curtilage, a path blockwork retaining walls may be designed
should be provided to it from the home. in accordance with BRE Good Building
Where appropriate, a drive can be Guide 27.
Requirements
regarded as a path for the provision of all
Design that follows the guidance below or part of this access. (b) guarding
will be acceptable for private roads, drives, Guarding should be provided where
paths and landscaping. Path widths should be not less than the structures are retaining land more than
following: 600mm high to which people have access.
In this Chapter “home” includes a house, • within curtilage to main or 900mm
bungalow, flat or maisonette. The “garden any entrance designated by Where steps and guarding are provided
area” is the land within the curtilage up Building Regulations they should be designed in accordance
to 20m from the habitable parts of the with Sitework clause 9.2 - S7.
• paths used for the removal of 900mm
home (i.e. not garages/outbuildings). This refuse to the collection point  (c) planters
distance is measured from the external
• paths adjoining a home 700mm Where planters are provided they should
walls.
• where path is 100mm or more 600mm be designed to adequately support the
from the wall of a home volume of retained soil and the plant
PROVISION OF ACCESS species.
• all other cases 600mm
9.2 - D2 Adequate access shall be
provided to and around the home GARDEN AREAS
Paths should have gradients not exceeding
Access should include the provision of 9.2 - D4 Garden areas shall be stable
1:6. On steeper sloping ground, steps
private roads, shared private drives,
may need to be introduced at intervals to Items to be taken into account include:
private drives, car parking areas and paths
ensure that the maximum gradient of the (a) slopes
as appropriate.
path is not exceeded. Unless the stability of new or existing
Items to be taken into account include: slopes has been determined by an
Foundations and constructions suitable for
(a) private roads, shared private drives, paths are given in Appendix 9.2-A. Engineer in accordance with Technical
private drives and car parking areas Requirement R5 the following maximum
Where a private road, shared private (c) steps gradients apply:
drive, private drive or car parking area Steps should be in accordance with • unsupported granular soil should be 5°
is constructed to provide access to, or Sitework clause 9.2 - S7. less than its natural angle of repose
around, a home it should be constructed to • unsupported cohesive soil should not
carry the likely loads from vehicles using it. (d) handrails and guarding to paths and exceed 9° (1:6).
steps
Drives forming part of the approach to Handrails and guarding should be provided (b) retaining structures
certain entrances should comply with in accordance with Sitework clause 9.2 - S7. Where it is necessary to provide retaining
relevant Building Regulations. structures to ensure the stability of
FREESTANDING WALLS the ground they should be designed in
Drives should be designed to permit a
accordance with Clause D3.
motor car reasonable access to and from a AND RETAINING
garage or car parking area. 9.2 - D5 Garden areas within 3m of the
STRUCTURES habitable part of the home shall not be
Foundations, constructions and drainage
suitable for private roads, shared private 9.2 - D3 Where provided, freestanding waterlogged
drives, private drives and car parking areas walls and retaining structures shall be
Waterlogging of garden areas within 3m
are given in Appendix 9.2-A. adequate for their intended purpose
of the habitable part of the home should
Items to be taken into account include: be prevented by drainage or other suitable
Private roads, shared private drives and
(a) design means.
private drives should have a maximum
gradient of 1:6. Where the gradient is Freestanding walls should be designed in
accordance with: 9.2 - D6 Reasonable access shall be
more than 1:10 and the gradient changes, provided to garden areas
suitable transition lengths should be BS 5628 Code of practice for use of
provided to reduce the risk of vehicles masonry, or Access by steps or other suitable means
grounding. See Appendix 9.2-A. should be provided to garden areas where
BRE Good Building Guide 14.
appropriate. Access is not required to
(b) paths  All retaining structures, more than small isolated garden areas such as narrow
Every home should have a path or paths 600mm high, should be designed by an strips of land at the top or bottom of
within the curtilage to provide pedestrian Engineer in accordance with Technical retaining walls.
access to the main entrance and a Requirement R5. Gabion and crib
secondary entrance where present. 9.2 - D7 Patios and decking shall be
structures should not be used to provide
suitable for their purpose
A path to a secondary access door is not support to homes, garages, roads, drives,
required where entry to the home can be car parking areas and drainage systems. Items to be taken into account include:
gained directly from a garage. (a) patios
Retaining structures should be designed in
9.2
Foundations and constructions suitable for

A path to a secondary entrance of a mid- accordance with:
patios are given in Appendix 9.2-A.
terrace home or ground floor flat is not
required. BS 5930 Code of practice for site (b) timber decking
investigations, and Timber used in the construction of decking
Paths to certain entrances should comply BS 8110 Structural use of concrete, or should either be naturally durable or
with relevant Building Regulations. treated with preservative. See Chapter 2.3
BS 5628 Code of practice for use of
masonry.

‘Timber preservation (natural solid timber)’ Construction Products Directive (89/106/ BS 6677 Part 1 : Clay and calcium
(each section). EEC) and, in particular, appropriate silicate pavers for flexible
European Technical Specifications pavements : Specification
Decking and its support should be in
approved by a European Committee for for pavers
accordance with guidance published by the
Timber Decking Association or designed by BS 6717 Precast, unreinforced
an Engineer in accordance with Technical concrete paving blocks
Requirement R5. CONCRETE - Requirements and test
9.2 - M2 Concrete shall be of a mix methods
LANDSCAPING design which will: BS 7263 Precast concrete flags,
(a) achieve sufficient strength for its kerbs, channels, edgings and
9.2 - D8 Possible future damage to
purpose quadrants
the home caused by planting shall be
(b) be sufficiently durable to remain BS 7533 Pavements constructed
minimised
unaffected by chemical or frost action with clay natural stone or
Where trees or shrubs have been removed, concrete pavers.
For guidance on the specification and
are to be retained or are to be planted by
use of concrete, reference should be
the builder, precautions should be taken to (d) materials for freestanding walls
made to Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and its
reduce the risk of future damage to homes Materials in accordance with BRE Good
reinforcement’ (Design) and Appendix
and services. These include: Building Guide 14 ‘Building brick or
9.2-A.
• allowing sufficient space to preserve blockwork freestanding walls’ will be
root systems acceptable.
• allowing for root spread and water ALL MATERIALS
depletion, especially on clay soils 9.2 - M3 All materials shall be suitable (e) materials for retaining walls
• allowing for the effects of water uptake for their intended use Materials in accordance with BRE Good
where trees have been removed, Building Guide 27 ‘Building brickwork
especially on clay soils Items to be taken into account include: or blockwork retaining walls’ will be
• allowing for the future effects of tree (a) asphalts and macadam acceptable.
and root growth Hot rolled and mastic asphalts and
• providing foundation depths sufficient to macadam should comply with relevant (f) timber decking
allow for existing and new trees. standards, including: Materials in accordance with guidance
published by the Timber Decking
BS 594 Hot rolled asphalt for roads
Guidance is given in Chapter 4.2 ‘Building Association will be acceptable.
and other paved areas
near trees’ and BS 5837.
BS 1447 Specification for mastic (g) topsoil
asphalt (limestone fine Topsoil quality should be such that
PROVISION OF aggregate) for roads, it will not present a hazard to users
INFORMATION footways and pavings in of the garden area. BS 3882 and the
9.2 - D9 Designs and specifications building Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment
shall be produced in a clearly BS 4987 Coated macadam for roads (CLEA) guidelines provide advice on
understandable format and include all and other paved areas. determining the suitability of topsoil.
 (b) sub-base material and aggregates 
All works relating to drives, paths and
landscaping should be fully specified. Sub-base for different road types should SITEWORK STANDARDS
be Type 1 to clause 803 Table 8/2, MCHWI
9.2 - D10 All relevant information shall Series 800. 9.2 - S1 All sitework shall:
be distributed to appropriate personnel (a) meet the Technical Requirements
Aggregates used in asphalt and macadam (b) take account of the design
Ensure that relevant design and mixtures and unbound aggregate (graded (c) follow established good practice and
specification information is issued to 15/20 mm gravel) for surfacing should workmanship
site supervisors and relevant specialist comply with relevant standards, including:
subcontractors and/or suppliers. Sitework that complies with the design
BS EN 13043 Aggregates for bituminous and the guidance below will be acceptable
mixtures and surface for private roads, drives, paths and
treatments for roads, landscaping.
MATERIALS STANDARDS airfields and other trafficked
areas
9.2 - M1 All materials shall: GROUND STABILITY
PD 6682 Part 2 - Guidance on the use
(a) meet the Technical Requirements of BS EN 13043 9.2 - S2 Precautions shall be taken on
(b) take account of the design sloping sites to ensure stability of the
BS EN 13242 Aggregates for unbound
Materials that comply with the design and and hydraulically bound ground
the guidance below will be acceptable for materials Where the ground may become surcharged
drives, paths and landscaping. during construction, precautions should be
PD 6682 Part 6 - Guidance on the use
Materials for drives, paths and landscaping of BS EN 13242. taken to ensure stability.
9.2
should comply with all relevant standards, Retaining structures that give support
including those listed below. Where no (c) blocks, slabs and pavers
to the foundations of a home should be
standard exists, Technical Requirement R3 Blocks, slabs, pavers, edgings, etc should
completed before work starts on the
applies (see Chapter 1.1 ‘Introduction to the comply with relevant standards, including:
construction of the foundations of the
Standards and Technical Requirements’). BS EN 771 Specification for masonry home. The use of gabion and crib structures
units to retain ground that gives support to

homes, garages, roads, drives, and drainage Retaining structures should be constructed (b) steps
systems is not acceptable to NHBC. in accordance with the design or BRE Good Any steps should have a maximum rise of
Building Guide 27. 220mm and a minimum going of 220mm.
FOUNDATIONS AND (b) guarding
CONSTRUCTION Guarding should be provided to retaining
LANDSCAPING
walls more than 600mm high in 9.2 - S8 Planting shall be completed
9.2 - S3 Foundations and construction
accordance with Clause S7(a). in a manner appropriate for the site
for private roads, shared private drives,
conditions and layout
private drives, car parking and paths
shall be appropriate for their use GARDEN AREAS If landscaping is specified, the work
(up to 20m from the habitable parts of should be carried out and completed
Items to be taken into account include: the home) in a competent professional manner.
(a) specification 9.2 - S5 Garden areas shall be free from Landscaping should meet with the
Appendix 9.2-A gives details of suitable guidance given in the Design section of
obstructions beneath the surface
constructions for private roads, shared this Chapter.
private drives, private drives, car parking, Old foundations, concrete bases and
paths and patios. similar obstructions occurring within The NHBC recommendations on the
300mm of the finished ground surface protection and planting of trees should
(b) protection of drains and services should be removed. also be followed. See Chapter 4.2 ‘Building
Where underground drainage or services near trees’ (each section).
are below a private road, shared private 9.2 - S6 Garden areas shall be
drive, private drive, car parking area, adequately prepared for cultivation
path, or patio they should be protected Construction rubbish and debris should
against damage as described in Chapter be removed from garden and other areas
5.3 ‘Drainage below ground’ (Design and around the home.
Sitework).
The ground around the home can be
(c) drainage compacted by machinery and storage of
All private roads, shared private drives, materials during construction as well as
private drives, car parking areas, should when topsoil is being replaced and this
have adequate drainage and disposal. See can affect the structure of the soil and
Appendix 9.2-A. its draining capability. Where this occurs
within 3m of the home appropriate action
Paths and patios abutting the home should
should be taken to suitably restore the
generally be at least 150mm below the dpc
drainage characteristics of the soil.
and be laid to falls away from the home
unless a channel or other suitable means Any ground disturbed during construction
of collection and disposal is provided. should be re-graded to conform to the
general shape of the adjacent ground.
(d) ground levels
Finished ground levels should be Subsoil should not be placed over topsoil
compatible with: and any topsoil disturbed should be
• dpc levels reinstated. Garden areas should be provided
• cover levels of drainage access points with topsoil to a thickness of not less than
• depth of underground services (gas, 100mm. The topsoil should not contain
electricity, water, drains) contaminants which are likely to present a
• drive and path levels. hazard to users of the garden area.
(e) timber decking 9.2 - S7 Retaining structures and steps

Decking should be constructed in shall be adequately guarded and allow
accordance with the design or guidance safe use
published by the Timber Decking
Association.
(a) guarding and handrails
(f) patios Guarding should be provided where:
Foundations and constructions suitable for • structures are retaining land more than
patios are given in Appendix 9.2-A. 600mm high to which people have
access, or
• a path is adjacent to a vertical difference
FREESTANDING WALLS in level of more than 600mm, or
AND RETAINING • the ground adjacent to the path falls
STRUCTURES away at an angle of more than 30° from
the horizontal, or
9.2 - S4 Freestanding walls and • the total rise of a flight of steps exceeds
retaining structures shall be adequate
9.2
600mm. A handrail should be provided.

for their intended purpose
The guarding should be at least 1100mm
Items to be taken into account include: high, not readily climbable by children and
(a) construction a 100mm sphere should not be able to pass
Freestanding walls should be constructed through any openings in the guarding.
in accordance with the design or BRE Good
Building Guide 14.

Appendix 9.2-A
Table 1 Construction details of paved areas:
The construction of private roads, shared private drives, private drives and car parking areas should be in accordance with the following or an
equivalent alternative. (Thicknesses shown are in mm).
Private road having frequent use by commercial vehicles

Construction (see Note 1) Road type
 
Road Road Footpath
(Bituminous (Block pavers) (Bituminous
Macadam) Macadam)
Sub-base Granular sub-base material Type 1 to clause 803 Table Table 2 150 225
8/2 MCHW1 Series 800 (see Note 2) (if CBR is 5% or less) (see Note 3)
(see Note 3)
Table 2
(if CBR is greater than
5%)
Base (Road base) Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 100 N/A N/A
grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/32mm size to
4987 (Group one mix) clause 5.2)
Concrete designation (BS 8500-2 Table 7) N/A N/A N/A
Binder course Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 60 60 60

(Base course) grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/20mm size to (0/20mm size to clause (0/20mm size to
4987 (Group two mix) clause 6.5) 6.5) clause 6.5)
Surface course Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 30 N/A 20

(wearing course) grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/10mm size to (0/6mm size to
4987 (Group three mix) clause 7.4) clause 7.5)
Hot rolled asphalt to BS 594-1 40 N/A N/A

(designation 30%
0/14)
Mastic Asphalt to BS 1447 30 N/A N/A

(Grade S - 40%
0/10mm size)
Concrete designation (BS 8500-2 Table 7) N/A N/A N/A
Bedding course Sharp sand to BS 7533-3 category II of Annex D N/A 50 N/A
Pavers Block pavers To BS 6717 of Class markings W2, A2, N/A 80 N/A
and S3 (weathering, abrasion and slip/skid classes)
(see Note 6)
Notes
1 Names of pavement layers show both the European harmonised names and in brackets the names traditionally used in the UK.
2 If a capping layer is specified then sub-base thickness can be reduced. DMRB Volume 7 Section 2 Part 2 HD 25/95 Foundations Chapter 3
Capping and Sub-base gives guidance on capping and sub-base thickness design based on CBR values and with and without a capping layer.
3 Thickness is based on the provision of a geotextile membrane underneath the sub-base. If no geotextile membrane is provided see Table 2.
4 Bond and tack coat should be provided for bituminous mixtures in accordance with BS 4987-2 or BS 594-2.
5 Asphalt based materials can be used as partial replacement of full thickness of granular sub-base Type 1 material.
6 When laid to either 90 or 45 degrees herringbone pattern then the edge perimeter to be laid with one single row of stretcher bond set
parallel to the edge restraint. Where block pavers are laid abutting drainage channels, gulley grates and the like, the upper surface of the
block pavers shall be set between 3 and 6mm above the grating. Manufacturer’s declared value markings W3 and S4 are acceptable if W3
is 1.0 kg/m2 or less and S4 is 45 or more based on ‘C scale unit’ (with regard to abrasion, Class A2, no test result is greater than 23mm; and
Class A1 = no performance determined).
7 Use 38mm thickness of graded 15/20mm unbound aggregate to BS EN 13242 (gravel) well rolled and compacted.
8 N/A = Not Applicable
9.2

Shared parking and associated access areas having frequent use by commercial vehicles
 
Bituminous Macadam Block pavers
Sub-base Granular sub-base material Type 1 to clause 803 Table Table 2 Table 2
8/2 MCHW1 Series 800 (see Note 2)
Base (Road base) Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 80 N/A
grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/32mm size to clause 5.2)
4987 (Group one mix)
Concrete designation (BS 8500-2 Table 7) 100 N/A
Grade GEN2 (see Note 4)
Binder course Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 60 N/A

(Base course) grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/20mm size to clause 6.5)
4987 (Group two mix)
Surface course Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 30 N/A
(wearing course) grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/10mm size to clause 7.4)
4987 (Group three mix)
Hot rolled asphalt to BS 594-1 N/A N/A
Mastic Asphalt to BS 1447 N/A N/A
Concrete designation (BS 8500-2 Table 7) N/A N/A
Bedding course Sharp sand to BS 7533-3 category II of Annex D N/A 50
Pavers Block pavers To BS 6717 of Class markings W2, A2, N/A 80

(see Note 6)
Shared drives having infrequent use by commercial vehicles

 
Bituminous Macadam Concrete Block pavers Gravel
Sub-base Granular sub-base material Type 1 to clause 803 Table Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2
Base (Road base) Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving see Note 5 N/A N/A N/A
grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS
Concrete designation (BS 8500-2 Table 7) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Binder course Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 80 N/A N/A N/A
(Base course) grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/32mm size to clause
4987 (Group two mix) 6.4) or (0/20mm size to
clause 6.5)
Surface course Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 30 N/A N/A see Note 7
(wearing course) grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/10mm size to clause
4987 (Group three mix) 7.4)
Hot rolled asphalt to BS 594-1 40 N/A N/A N/A

(designation 30% 0/14)
Mastic Asphalt to BS 1447 30 N/A N/A N/A

(Grade S - 40% 0/10mm
size)
Concrete designation (BS 8500-2 Table 7) N/A 150 N/A N/A

Grade PAV2
Bedding course Sharp sand to BS 7533-3 category II of Annex D N/A N/A 50 N/A
Pavers Block pavers To BS 6717 of Class markings W2, A2, N/A N/A 80 N/A
(see Note 6)
9.2

Table 1 continued
Private drives and parking areas having use by cars and light vehicles
 
Bituminous Macadam Concrete Block pavers Gravel
Sub-base Granular sub-base material Type 1 to clause 803 Table Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2
Base (Road base) Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving N/A N/A N/A N/A
grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS
Concrete designation (BS 8500-2 Table 7) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Binder course Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 60 N/A N/A N/A
(Base course) grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/20 mm size to clause
4987 (Group two mix) 6.5)
Surface course Dense Bituminous Macadam (100/150 Pen paving 20 N/A N/A see Note 7
(wearing course) grade bitumen) with crushed rock aggregate to BS (0/6mm size to clause
4987 (Group three mix) 7.5)
Hot rolled asphalt to BS 594-1 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Mastic Asphalt to BS 1447 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Concrete designation (BS 8500-2 Table 7) N/A 100 N/A N/A

Grade PAV 1
Bedding course Sharp sand to BS 7533-3 category II of Annex D N/A N/A 50 N/A
Pavers Block pavers To BS 6717 of Class markings W2, A2, N/A N/A 50 N/A
(see Note 6)
Notes
1 Names of pavement layers show both the European harmonised names and in brackets the names traditionally used in the UK.
2 If a capping layer is specified then sub-base thickness can be reduced. DMRB Volume 7 Section 2 Part 2 HD 25/95 Foundations Chapter 3
Capping and Sub-base gives guidance on capping and sub-base thickness design based on CBR values and with and without a capping layer.
3 Thickness is based on the provision of a geotextile membrane underneath the sub-base. If no geotextile membrane is provided see Table 2.
4 Bond and tack coat should be provided for bituminous mixtures in accordance with BS 4987-2 or BS 594-2.
5 Asphalt based materials can be used as partial replacement of full thickness of granular sub-base Type 1 material.
6 When laid to either 90 or 45 degrees herringbone pattern then the edge perimeter to be laid with one single row of stretcher bond set
parallel to the edge restraint. Where block pavers are laid abutting drainage channels, gulley grates and the like, the upper surface of the
block pavers shall be set between 3 and 6mm above the grating. Manufacturer’s declared value markings W3 and S4 are acceptable if W3
is 1.0 kg/m2 or less and S4 is 45 or more based on ‘C scale unit’ (with regard to abrasion, Class A2, no test result is greater than 23mm; and
Class A1 = no performance determined).
7 Use 38mm thickness of graded 15/20mm unbound aggregate to BS EN 13242 (gravel) well rolled and compacted.
8 N/A = Not Applicable
Table 2 Minimum sub-base thickness for paved areas:

California Bearing Ratio (CBR) values Minimum thickness (mm) of sub-base
(Consolidated in accordance with MCHW Volume 1 clause 801, table 8/1).
Without Geotextile underneath With Geotextile underneath
Less than 2% N/A 300
2% - 3% 325 225
3% - 5% 250 150
5% - 7% 150  
7% - 20% 100  
Notes
The thickness of any required capping layer and the sub-base should be determined after investigations and on-site tests have been carried
out relating to the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value and frost susceptibility of the sub-grade. See table 2.
9.2
Where the tests indicate that the sub-grade is frost susceptible a suitable capping layer should be included below the sub-base, to a depth that
will ensure that the construction will not be affected by frost heave.

GENERAL Paving slabs
All works should be completed in Paving slabs should be fully bedded in
accordance with: 25mm 1:4 cement : sand mortar or a
• the design, and suitable alternative.
• the ground remediation statement
Where paving slabs are laid abutting
where applicable.
drainage channels, gully grates and the
All vegetable matter should be removed like, the upper surface of the paving slab
from the area of the proposed works. should be set approximately 5mm above
the grating.
Formation levels should be set out in
accordance with the design. Concrete
Concrete should be not less than 75mm
Only suitable fill material comprising clean,
thick and have a tamped or textured finish.
well consolidated crushed rock, hardcore,
The concrete mix should be suitable to
slag or concrete should be used to make
give a durable and frost resistant surface,
up levels.
as described in Chapter 2.1 ‘Concrete and
The sub-base should be mechanically its reinforcement’ (Design). Movement
consolidated in layers not exceeding joints, not less than 10mm wide, should be
225mm. provided across the full width of the path
at not more than 4m centres. A movement
Construction of paved areas joint is not required at the abutment with
All sub-base levels should have the same a wall unless the opposite edge of the
longitudinal gradient and cross-fall as the concrete is also restrained.
finished levels.
TRANSITION LENGTHS
Private roads, shared private drives and
car parking areas should have adequate Transition lengths should be incorporated
falls, cross-falls and suitable drainage to into drives and ramps with a gradient of
ensure that surface water is disposed of. more than 1:10.
Where it is intended to use porous or
permeable surfaces as part or all of the
Ramp
rainwater drainage system reference
should be made to CIRIA report C522
0.5m 0.5m
- Sustainable urban drainage systems
- design manual for England and Wales.
Surfaces should not be laid flatter than
1:40 or have a camber of 1:40 if no fall is 0.5m 0.5m Dimensions for transition lengths
available to avoid “flat spots”.

Surface water from private areas should Note
not drain onto adopted areas. Maximum drive gradient is 1:6.
Surfaces of private drives and paths should

be laid to a minimum finished fall of 1:80
away from the home including a garage.
Alternatively a channel or other suitable
means of collection and disposal should be
provided adjacent to the home.
Vertical alignment, finished levels,
transition arrangements and gradients
should be in accordance with the design.
Edge restraint or kerbing should have a
profile and foundation which is suitable
to form a permanent supporting edge for
the expected vehicle loads using the road
or drive.
Any soakaway should be located in open
or garden areas at least 2m away from any
paved area.
HOUSE PATHS AND PATIOS

9.2
Sub-base
The sub-base should comprise of a 100mm
thickness of clean, well consolidated
crushed rock, hardcore (max size 75mm),
slag or concrete, the surface of which is
blinded with 25mm of sand.

INDEX
A H T
Access 1 Handrails 1 Timber decking 3
Aggregates 2 L Trees 2, 3
Asphalt 2 Landscaping 2, 3 W
B M Walls 1, 2
Blocks 2 Macadam 2 Waterlogging 1
C Materials 2 Widths - paths 1
Car parking 3 P
Concrete 2, 3 Paths 1
Concrete slabs, precast 2 Pavers 2, 3
D Patios 3
Damage to buildings 2 Planters 1
Drains 3 Private drives 1
Drives 1 Private roads 1
F R
Foundations 1, 3 Retaining structures 1, 2
Freestanding walls 2 S
G Services 3
Gabions 1, 2 Shared private drive 1
Garden areas 3 Shrubs 2
Grading 1, 3 Slabs 2
Ground levels 3 Slopes 1
Guarding 1 Stability, ground 2
Steps 1
9.2

NHBC Standards
NHBC 2008
Standards
Effective from 1 May 2008
2008
NHBC
Buildmark House, Chiltern Avenue, Amersham, Bucks HP6 5AP
Tel: 0870 241 4302 Fax: 01494 735201 www.nhbc.co.uk
NHBC is authorised and regulated by the Financial Services Authority HB1286 04/07

NHBC Standards 2008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NHBC Standards 2008

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NHBC Standards 2008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NHBC Standards

What’s new in 2008?

• The CD version of the Standards now contains an electronic calculator to determine

1.1 Introduction to the Standards and 6.1 External masonry walls

PART 3 No longer allocated PART 7 Roofs

7.1 Flat roofs and balconies

5.1 Substructure and ground bearing floors PART 9 External works

PART 10 No longer allocated

1.1 Introduction and Technical Requirements

1.2 A consistent approach to finishes

1.3 No longer allocated

1.4 Cold weather working

Introduction and Technical Requirements

Page 5 Chapter 1.1 2008

2008 Chapter 1.1 Page 1

Introduction and Technical Requirements

Page 2 Chapter 1.1 2008

R5 Structural design BS 5950 Structural use of steel work

Other structural elements may be When requested by NHBC, the Builder

2008 Chapter 1.1 Page 3

Introduction and Technical Requirements

Page 4 Chapter 1.1 2008

A consistent approach to finishes

Page This Chapter gives guidance on the suitability of the finishes

Page 3 Chapter 1.2 2008

EXTERNAL WALLS Level of bed joints Plumb of wall - storey height

overall context. should not vary from the average of any 8

2008 Chapter 1.2 Page 1

A consistent approach to finishes

Straightness of external reveals APPEARANCE OF EXTERNAL WORKS

Page 2 Chapter 1.2 2008

DOORS AND WINDOWS Window frames up

Reveals, head and sill

Head and sill:

Max 3mm out of level

Gaps and distortion WALLS AND CEILINGS

These dimensions are The gap between the ± 8mm in 200mm

2008 Chapter 1.2 Page 3

A consistent approach to finishes

Page 4 Chapter 1.2 2008

2008 Chapter 1.2 Page 5

Cold weather working

Page 3 Chapter 1.4 2008

All these services are provided by the

2008 Chapter 1.4 Page 1

Cold weather working

SITE-MIXED MASONRY should be kept above freezing during the

Page 2 Chapter 1.4 2008

2008 Chapter 1.4 Page 3

2.1 Concrete and its reinforcement

2.2 No longer allocated

2.3 Timber preservation

Mix design D3-D4 1

Page 5 Chapter 2.1 2008

2008 Chapter 2.1 Page 1

REINFORCED CONCRETE The effects of carbonation on concrete the manufacturer’s recommendations,

Page 2 Chapter 2.1 2008

2008 Chapter 2.1 Page 3

• to provide sufficient support to ensure (b) shape of bars

Page 4 Chapter 2.1 2008

• The CD version of the Standards now contains an electronic calculator to determine

• to provide sufficient support to ensure (b) shape of bars

• structural blinding and overbreak GEN1 ST2 S3/S41

• house floors not designed as suspended and not

• garage floors not designed as suspended and not GEN3 ST4 S2

• house and garage ground floor slabs

• be able to carry out a desk study and walkover survey